SERVICE HANDBOOK

MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL COLOR SYSTEMS

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C
e-STUDIO2830C/3520C/3530C
e-STUDIO4520C

Model: FC-2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
Publish Date: March, 2008
File No. SHE070001L0
R070921E3700-TTEC
Ver12_2011-11

Trademarks

The official name of Windows XP is Microsoft Windows XP Operating System.

The official name of Windows 7 is Microsoft Windows 7 Operating System.
The official name of Windows Vista is Microsoft Windows Vista Operating System.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Windows Vista and the brand names and product names of other
Microsoft products are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.
and/or other countries.
Apple, AppleTalk, Macintosh, and Mac are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. in the U.S. and other
countries.
PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
NOVELL, NetWare, and NDS are trademarks or registered trademarks of Novell, Inc.
FLOIL is a registrated treadmark of Kanto Kasei Ltd. CORPORATION.
Mylar is a registered trademark of DuPont Teijin Films U.S. Limited Partnership.
Molykote is a registered trademark of Dow Corning Corporation.
Other company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks of their respective
companies.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Under the copyright laws, this manual cannot be reproduced in any form without prior written permission
of TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION.

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS REGARDING THE SERVICE FOR

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
The installation and service should be done by a qualified service
technician.
1. Transportation/Installation
- When transporting/installing the equipment, employ four persons and be sure to hold the positions as shown in the figure.
The equipment is quite heavy and weighs approximately 121 kg (266.75 lb.) or 123 kg (271.16
lb.), therefore pay full attention when handling it.

Be sure not to hold the movable parts or units (e.g. the control panel, ADU or RADF) when transporting the equipment.
Be sure to use a dedicated outlet with AC 110 V / 13.2 A, 115 V or 127 V / 12 A, 220-240 V / 8 A
for its power source.
The equipment must be grounded for safety.
Select a suitable place for installation. Avoid excessive heat, high humidity, dust, vibration and
direct sunlight.
Provide proper ventilation since the equipment emits a slight amount of ozone.
To insure adequate working space for the copying operation, keep a minimum clearance of 80
cm (32) on the left, 80 cm (32) on the right and 10 cm (4) on the rear.
The equipment shall be installed near the socket outlet and shall be accessible.
Be sure to fix and plug in the power cable securely after the installation so that no one trips over
it.
If the unpacking place and where the equipment is to be installed differ, perform image quality
adjustment (automatic gamma adjustment) according to the temperature and humidity of the
place of installation and the paper to be used.

2. General Precautions at Service

- Be sure to turn the power OFF and unplug the power cable during service (except for the service
should be done with the power turned ON).
- Unplug the power cable and clean the area around the prongs of the plug and socket outlet once
a year or more. A fire may occur when dust lies on this area.
- When the parts are disassembled, reassembly is the reverse of disassembly unless otherwise
noted in this manual or other related documents. Be careful not to install small parts such as
screws, washers, pins, E-rings, star washers, harnesses in the wrong places.
- Basically, the equipment should not be operated with any parts removed or disassembled.
- The PC board must be stored in an anti-electrostatic bag and handled carefully using a wristband
since the ICs on it may be damaged due to static electricity.
Caution: Before using the wristband, unplug the power cable of the equipment and
make sure that there are no charged objects which are not insulated in the
vicinity.

Avoid expose to laser beam during service. This equipment uses a laser diode. Be sure not to
expose your eyes to the laser beam. Do not insert reflecting parts or tools such as a screwdriver
on the laser beam path. Remove all reflecting metals such as watches, rings, etc. before starting
service.
Be sure not to touch high-temperature sections such as the exposure lamp, fuser unit, damp
heater and areas around them.
Be sure not to touch high-voltage sections such as the chargers, transfer belt, 2nd transfer roller,
developer, high-voltage transformer, exposure lamp control inverter, inverter for the LCD backlight and power supply unit. Especially, the board of these components should not be touched
since the electric charge may remain in the capacitors, etc. on them even after the power is
turned OFF.
Make sure that the equipment will not operate before touching potentially dangerous places (e.g.
rotating/operating sections such as gears, belts pulleys, fans and laser beam exit of the laser
optical unit).
Be careful when removing the covers since there might be the parts with very sharp edges
underneath.
When servicing the equipment with the power turned ON, be sure not to touch live sections and
rotating/operating sections. Avoid exposing your eyes to laser beam.
Use designated jigs and tools.
Use recommended measuring instruments or equivalents.
Return the equipment to the original state and check the operation when the service is finished.
Be very careful to treat the touch panel gently and never hit it. Breaking the surface could cause
malfunctions.

3. Important Service Parts for Safety

- The breaker, door switch, fuse, thermostat, thermofuse, thermistor, IC-RAMs including lithium
batteries, etc. are particularly important for safety. Be sure to handle/install them properly. If
these parts are short-circuited and their functions become ineffective, they may result in fatal
accidents such as burnout. Do not allow a short-circuit or do not use the parts not recommended
by Toshiba TEC Corporation.

4. Cautionary Labels
- During servicing, be sure to check the rating plate and cautionary labels such as Unplug the
power cable during service, CAUTION. HOT, CAUTION. HIGH VOLTAGE, CAUTION.
LASER BEAM, etc. to see if there is any dirt on their surface and if they are properly stuck to the
equipment.

Explanatory label
Identification label
Certification label
Warning for grounding wire

Warning for
high temperature area
(fuser unit)
Warning for handling transfer belt
Warning for
high temperature area
(ventilation holes)
Warning for
high temperature area
(fuser unit)

Warning for high temperature area

5. Disposal of the Equipment, Supplies, Packing Materials, Used Batteries and IC-RAMs
- Regarding the recovery and disposal of the equipment, supplies, packing materials, used batteries and IC-RAMs including lithium batteries, follow the relevant local regulations or rules.
6. When the option has been installed:
When the EFI printer board has been installed, be sure to unplug the power cable before performing
maintenance and inspection, otherwise troubles such as a communication error may occur.
Caution:
Dispose of used batteries and IC-RAMs including lithium batteries according to this manual.
Attention:
Se dbarrasser de batteries et IC-RAMs uss y compris les batteries en lithium selon ce manuel.
Vorsicht:
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien und IC-RAMs (inclusive der Lithium-Batterie) nach diesem Handbuch.

ALLEGEMEINE SICHERHEITSMASSNAHMEN IN BEZUG

AUF DIE WARTUNG FR e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/
2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
Die Installation und die Wartung sind von einem qualifizierten ServiceTechniker durchzufhren.
1) Transport/Installation
- Zum Transportieren/Installieren des Gertes werden 4 Personen bentigt. Nur an den in der
Abbildung gezeigten Stellen tragen.
Das Gert ist sehr schwer und wiegt etwa 121 kg oder 123 kg; deshalb muss bei der
Handhabung des Gerts besonders aufgepasst werden.

Beim Transportieren des Gerts nicht an den beweglichen Teilen oder Einheiten (z.B. das Bedienungsfeld, die Duplexeinheit oder die automatische Dokumentenzufhrung) halten.
Eine spezielle Steckdose mit Stromversorgung von AC 110 V / 13.2 A, 115 V oder 127 V / 12 A,
220-240 V / 8 A als Stromquelle verwenden.
Das Gert ist aus Sicherheitsgrnden zu erden.
Einen geeigneten Standort fr die Installation whlen. Standorte mit zuviel Hitze, hoher Luftfeuchtigkeit, Staub, Vibrieren und direkter Sonneneinstrahlung sind zu vermeiden.
Fr ausreichende Belftung sorgen, da das Gert etwas Ozon abgibt.
Um einen optimalen Kopierbetrieb zu gewhrleisten, muss ein Abstand von mindestens 80 cm
links, 80 cm rechts und 10 cm dahinter eingehalten werden.
Das Gert ist in der Nhe der Steckdose zu installieren; diese muss leicht zu erreichen sein.
Nach der Installation muss das Netzkabel richtig hineingesteckt und befestigt werden, damit niemand darber stolpern kann.
Falls der Auspackungsstandort und der Installationsstandort des Gerts verschieden sind, die
Bildqualittsjustierung (automatische Gammajustierung) je nach der Temperatur und Luftfeuchtigkeit des Installationsstandorts und der Papiersorte, die verwendet wird, durchfhren.

2) Allgemeine Sicherheitsmassnahmen in bezug auf die Wartung

- Whrend der Wartung das Gert ausschalten und das Netzkabel herausziehen (ausser Wartung,
die bei einem eingeschalteten Gert, durchgefhrt werden muss).
- Das Netzkabel herausziehen und den Bereich um die Steckerpole und die Steckdose die Umgebung in der Nhe von den Steckerzacken und der Steckdose wenigstens einmal im Jahr reinigen. Wenn Staub sich in dieser Gegend ansammelt, kann dies ein Feuer verursachen.
- Wenn die Teile auseinandergenommen werden, wenn nicht anders in diesem Handbuch usw
erklrt, ist das Zusammenbauen in umgekehrter Reihenfolge durchzufhren. Aufpassen, dass
kleine Teile wie Schrauben, Dichtungsringe, Bolzen, E-Ringe, Stern-Dichtungsringe, Kabelbume nicht an den verkehrten Stellen eingebaut werden.
- Grundstzlich darf das Gert mit enfernten oder auseinandergenommenen Teilen nicht in
Betrieb genommen werden.
- Das PC-Board muss in einer Anti-elektrostatischen Hlle gelagert werden. Nur Mit einer Manschette bei Bettigung eines Armbandes anfassen, sonst knnte es sein, dass die integrierten
Schaltkreise durch statische Elektrizitt beschdigt werden.
Vorsicht: Vor Benutzung der Manschette der Bettigung des Armbandes, das Netzkabel
des Gertes herausziehen und prfen, dass es in der Nhe keine geladenen
Gegenstnde, die nicht isoliert sind, gibt.
-

Setzen Sie sich whrend der Wartungsarbeiten nicht dem Laserstrahl aus. Dieses Gert ist mit
einer Laserdiode ausgestattet. Es ist unbedingt zu vermeiden, direkt in den Laserstrahl zu
blicken. Keine reflektierenden Teile oder Werkzeuge, wie z. B. Schraubendreher, in den Pfad des
Laserstrahls halten. Vor den Wartungsarbeiten smtliche reflektierenden Metallgegenstnde, wie
Uhren, Ringe usw., entfernen.
Auf keinen Fall Hochtemperaturbereiche, wie die Belichtungslampe, die Fixiereinheit, die
Heizquelle und die umliegenden Bereiche, berhren.
Auf keinen Fall Hochspannungsbereiche, wie die Ladeeinheiten, das Transferband, die zweite
Transferwalze, die Entwicklereinheit, den Hochspannungstransformator, den Steuerumrichter fr
die Belichtungslampe, den Umrichter fr die LCD-Hintergrundbeleuchtung und das Netzgert,
berhren. Insbesondere sollten die Platinen dieser Komponenten nicht berhrt werden, da die
Kondensatoren usw. auch nach dem Ausschalten des Gerts noch elektrisch geladen sein knnen.
Vor dem Berhren potenziell gefhrlicher Bereiche (z. B. drehbare oder betriebsrelevante Bereiche, wie Zahnrder, Riemen, Riemenscheiben, Lfter und die Laseraustrittsffnung der optischen Lasereinheit) sicherstellen, dass das Gert sich nicht bedienen lsst.
Beim Entfernen von Abdeckungen vorsichtig vorgehen, da sich darunter scharfkantige Komponenten befinden knnen.
Bei Wartungsarbeiten am eingeschalteten Gert drfen keine unter Strom stehenden, drehbaren
oder betriebsrelevanten Bereiche berhrt werden. Nicht direkt in den Laserstrahl blicken.
Ausschlielich vorgesehene Werkzeuge und Hilfsmittel verwenden.
Empfohlene oder gleichwertige Messgerte verwenden.
Nach Abschluss der Wartungsarbeiten das Gert in den ursprnglichen Zustand zurck
versetzen und den einwandfreien Betrieb berprfen.
Das berhrungsempfindliche Bedienungsfeld stets vorsichtig handhaben und keinen Sten
aussetzen. Wenn die Oberflche beschdigt wird, kann dies zu Funktionsstrungen fhren.

3) Sicherheitsrelevante Wartungsteile
- Der Leistungsschutzschalter, der Trschalter, die Sicherung, der Thermostat, die Thermosicherung, der Thermistor, die IC-RAMs einschlielich der Lithiumakkus usw. sind besonders
sicherheitsrelevant. Sie mssen unbedingt korrekt gehandhabt und installiert werden. Wenn
diese Teile kurzgeschlossen und funktionsunfhig werden, kann dies zu schwerwiegenden
Schden, wie einem Abbrand, fhren. Kurzschlsse sind zu vermeiden, und es sind ausschlielich Teile zu verwenden, die von der Toshiba TEC Corporation empfohlen sind.

4) Warnetiketten
- Im Rahmen der Wartung unbedingt das Leistungsschild und die Etiketten mit Warnhinweisen
berprfen [z. B. Unplug the power cable during service (Netzkabel vor Beginn der Wartungsarbeiten abziehen), CAUTION. HOT (VORSICHT, HEISS), CAUTION. HIGH VOLTAGE
(VORSICHT, HOCHSPANNUNG), CAUTION. LASER BEAM (VORSICHT, LASER) usw.],
um sicherzustellen, dass sie nicht verschmutzt sind und korrekt am Gert angebracht sind.
5) Entsorgung des Gerts, der Verbrauchs- und Verpackungsmaterialien, alter Akkus und IC-RAMs
- In Bezug auf die Entsorgung und Wiederverwertung des Gerts, der Verbrauchs- und Verpackungsmaterialien, alter Akkus und IC-RAMs, einschlielich Lithiumakkus, sind die einschlgigen
nationalen oder regionalen Vorschriften zu befolgen.
Caution:
Dispose of used batteries and IC-RAMs including lithium batteries according to this manual.
Attention:
Se dbarrasser de batteries et IC-RAMs uss y compris les batteries en lithium selon ce manuel.
Vorsicht:
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien und IC-RAMs (inclusive der Lithium-Batterie) nach diesem Handbuch.

Laseremissionseinheit
Diese Einheit besteht aus der Laserdiode, dem Fokussierungsobjektiv, der Blende und dem Zylinderobjektiv.
- Laserdiode
Diese Laserdiode zeichnet sich durch eine geringe Regeldifferenz, eine kleine Laservariation und
einen niedrigen Schwellenstrom aus.
Die Blende der Laseremissionseinheit ist unter dem Fokussierobjektiv angeordnet, um die Form der
Laserstrahlen in der primren und sekundren Scanrichtung festzulegen.
Die Laserdiode gibt Laserstrahlen als Reaktion auf die Signale der Laseremissionssteuerung (ein/
aus) von der Lasertreiber-PC-Platine (LDR) aus. Die durch das Fokussierobjektiv gefhrten Laserstrahlen werden auf die Trommeloberflche fokussiert.
- Vorsichtsmanahmen im Zusammenhang mit Lasern
Dieses Gert enthlt eine Laserdiode, die einen unsichtbaren Laserstrahl emittiert.
Da man diesen Laserstrahl nicht sehen kann, ist bei der Handhabung der Komponenten der optischen Lasereinheit, bei der Durchfhrung von Arbeiten und bei der Justierung des Laserstrahls
uerste Vorsicht geboten. Arbeiten drfen niemals anhand anderer als den vorgeschriebenen
Anleitungen durchgefhrt werden; andernfalls kann es zu einer Schdigung Exposition durch Laserstrahlung kommen.
Die Lasereinheit ist vollstndig mit einer Schutzabdeckung versiegelt. Solange ausschlielich die
Arbeitsschritte der vorgeschriebenen Anleitungen durchgefhrt werden, tritt der Laserstrahl nicht
aus, und es besteht keine Gefahr, der Laserstrahlung ausgesetzt zu werden.
Das folgende Laser-Warnetikett ist an der Abdeckung vorne rechts angebracht.

Warnhinweise:
- Setzen Sie sich whrend der Wartungsarbeiten nicht dem Laserstrahl aus.
Dieses Gert ist mit einer Laserdiode ausgestattet. Es ist unbedingt zu vermeiden, direkt in den
Laserstrahl zu blicken. Keine reflektierenden Teile oder Werkzeuge, wie z. B. Schraubendreher,
in den Pfad des Laserstrahls halten. Vor den Wartungsarbeiten smtliche reflektierenden Metallgegenstnde, wie Uhren, Ringe usw., entfernen.
- Bei Wartungsarbeiten am eingeschalteten Gert drfen keine unter Strom stehenden, drehbaren
oder betriebsrelevanten Bereiche berhrt werden. Nicht direkt in den Laserstrahl blicken.
- Im Rahmen der Wartung unbedingt das Leistungsschild und die Etiketten mit Warnhinweisen
berprfen [z. B. Unplug the power cable during service (Netzkabel vor Beginn der Wartungsarbeiten abziehen), CAUTION. HOT (VORSICHT, HEISS), CAUTION. HIGH VOLTAGE
(VORSICHT, HOCHSPANNUNG), CAUTION. LASER BEAM (VORSICHT, LASER) usw.],
um sicherzustellen, dass sie nicht verschmutzt sind und korrekt am Gert angebracht sind.

CONTENTS
1. SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES ......................................... 1-1
1.1 Specifications....................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1 General..................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2 Copy ......................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.1.3 Print .......................................................................................................................... 1-9
1.1.4 Scan ......................................................................................................................... 1-9
1.1.5 e-Filing...................................................................................................................... 1-9
1.1.6 Internet Fax ............................................................................................................ 1-10
1.1.7 Network Fax ........................................................................................................... 1-10
1.2 Accessories ....................................................................................................................... 1-11
1.3 Options .............................................................................................................................. 1-13
1.4 Supplies ............................................................................................................................. 1-14
1.5 System List ........................................................................................................................ 1-15

2. SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE .......................................................................................... 2-1

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5

Input check (Test mode 03) ................................................................................................. 2-4

Output check (test mode 03) ............................................................................................. 2-12
Test print mode (test mode 04).......................................................................................... 2-15
List Printing ........................................................................................................................ 2-16
ADJUSTMENT MODE (05) ............................................................................................... 2-28
2.5.1 Classification List of Adjustment Mode (05) .......................................................... 2-28
2.5.2 Operating Procedure .............................................................................................. 2-33
2.5.3 Test print pattern in Adjustment Mode (05) ............................................................ 2-35
2.5.4 Process ................................................................................................................. 2-38
2.5.5 Image Processing................................................................................................... 2-39
2.5.6 System ................................................................................................................... 2-69
2.5.7 Scanner .................................................................................................................. 2-70
2.5.8 Printer ..................................................................................................................... 2-72
2.6 SETTING MODE (08) ........................................................................................................ 2-76
2.6.1 Classification List of Setting Mode (08) .................................................................. 2-76
2.6.2 Operating Procedure .............................................................................................. 2-89
2.6.3 Process .................................................................................................................. 2-91
2.6.4 Printer ..................................................................................................................... 2-93
2.6.5 Counter................................................................................................................... 2-94
2.6.6 System ................................................................................................................... 2-95
2.6.7 Pixel counter........................................................................................................... 2-99
2.6.8 PM support mode related code ............................................................................ 2-112
2.6.9 Default setting / restore setting of the EFI Printer Board ...................................... 2-122

3. ADJUSTMENT .............................................................................................................. 3-1

3.1 Image Related Adjustment .................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.1 Adjustment Order ..................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 Adjustment of the Auto-Toner Sensor ...................................................................... 3-2
3.1.3 Performing Image Quality Control (ICQ) .................................................................. 3-4
3.1.4 Adjustment of Color Registration Control ................................................................. 3-6
3.1.5 Adjustment of the transfer belt due to environmental factors ................................... 3-7
3.1.6 Image Dimensional Adjustment................................................................................ 3-8
3.1.7 Paper alignment at the registration roller ............................................................... 3-10
3.1.8 Image dimensional adjustment at the printing section ........................................... 3-15
3.1.9 Image dimensional adjustment at the scanning section ......................................... 3-20
3.2 Image Quality Adjustment (Copying Function) .................................................................. 3-29
3.2.1 Automatic gamma adjustment ................................................................................ 3-29
3.2.2 Density adjustment ................................................................................................. 3-31
2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
CONTENTS

3.3

3.4

3.5

3.6
3.7

3.8

3.2.3 Color balance adjustment....................................................................................... 3-32

3.2.4 Gamma balance adjustment .................................................................................. 3-34
3.2.5 Background adjustment.......................................................................................... 3-35
3.2.6 Judgment threshold for ACS (common for copy and scan).................................... 3-36
3.2.7 Sharpness adjustment............................................................................................ 3-36
3.2.8 Setting range correction ......................................................................................... 3-37
3.2.9 Adjustment of smudged/faint text ........................................................................... 3-37
3.2.10 Color Adjustment of Marker.................................................................................... 3-38
3.2.11 Beam level conversion setting................................................................................ 3-39
3.2.12 Maximum toner density adjustment to paper type.................................................. 3-40
3.2.13 Maximum text density adjustment .......................................................................... 3-40
3.2.14 Text/Photo reproduction level adjustment .............................................................. 3-41
3.2.15 Black reproduction switching at the Twin color copy mode .................................... 3-41
3.2.16 Black header density level adjustment ................................................................... 3-42
3.2.17 Black area adjustment in twin color copy mode ..................................................... 3-42
3.2.18 Judgment threshold adjustment for blank originals ................................................ 3-42
3.2.19 Background offsetting adjustment for ADF............................................................. 3-43
Image Quality Adjustment (Printing Function) ................................................................... 3-44
3.3.1 Automatic gamma adjustment ................................................................................ 3-44
3.3.2 Gamma balance adjustment (Black Mode) ............................................................ 3-46
3.3.3 Color balance adjustment....................................................................................... 3-48
3.3.4 Adjustment of faint text ........................................................................................... 3-49
3.3.5 Upper limit value at Toner Saving Mode ................................................................ 3-49
3.3.6 Maximum toner density adjustment........................................................................ 3-50
3.3.7 Fine line enhancement switchover ......................................................................... 3-50
3.3.8 PureBlack/PureGray threshold adjustment (PCL)................................................ 3-50
3.3.9 PureBlack/PureGray threshold adjustment (Twin color mode) ............................ 3-51
3.3.10 PureBlack/PureGray threshold adjustment (PS).................................................. 3-51
3.3.11 PureBlack/PureGray threshold adjustment (XPS) ............................................... 3-51
3.3.12 Toner limit threshold adjustment ............................................................................ 3-52
3.3.13 Screen switchover .................................................................................................. 3-52
3.3.14 Sharpness adjustment............................................................................................ 3-53
3.3.15 Thin line width lower limit adjustment ..................................................................... 3-53
3.3.16 Offsetting adjustment for background processing .................................................. 3-53
Image Quality Adjustment (Scanning Function) ................................................................ 3-54
3.4.1 Gamma balance adjustment .................................................................................. 3-54
3.4.2 Density adjustment ................................................................................................. 3-55
3.4.3 Background adjustment (Color Mode).................................................................... 3-56
3.4.4 Judgment threshold for ACS (common for copy and network scan) ...................... 3-56
3.4.5 Sharpness adjustment............................................................................................ 3-57
3.4.6 Setting range correction ......................................................................................... 3-58
3.4.7 Fine adjustment of black density ............................................................................ 3-59
3.4.8 RGB conversion method selection ......................................................................... 3-59
3.4.9 Adjustment of saturation......................................................................................... 3-60
3.4.10 Background processing offset adjustment ............................................................. 3-61
Image Quality Adjustment (FAX Function) ........................................................................ 3-62
3.5.1 Density adjustment ................................................................................................. 3-62
3.5.2 Beam level conversion setting................................................................................ 3-63
Adjustment of the Process unit Related Section................................................................ 3-64
3.6.1 High-Voltage Transformer Setting .......................................................................... 3-64
Adjustment of the Scanner Section ................................................................................... 3-65
3.7.1 Adjustment carriages-1 and -2 positions ................................................................ 3-65
3.7.2 Belt tension adjustment of the Scan motor............................................................. 3-66
Adjustment of the Paper Feeding System ......................................................................... 3-67
3.8.1 Sheet sideways deviation caused by paper feeding .............................................. 3-67

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
CONTENTS

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3.9 Adjustment of the developer unit ....................................................................................... 3-70

3.9.1 Adjustment of the Auto-Toner Sensor .................................................................... 3-70
3.9.2 Adjustment of the doctor-to-sleeve gap.................................................................. 3-70
3.10 Adjustment of the Transfer Unit ......................................................................................... 3-72
3.10.1 Adjustment of the transfer belt due to environmental factors ................................. 3-72
3.10.2 Adjustment of Gap between Transfer Belt Unit (TBU) Drive Gears ...................... 3-75
3.11 Adjustment of the Separation Plate Gap ........................................................................... 3-77

4. BACKUP FUNCTION.................................................................................................... 4-1

4.1 Data Cloning ........................................................................................................................ 4-1
4.1.1 General description .................................................................................................. 4-1
4.1.2 Precautions .............................................................................................................. 4-1
4.1.3 Backup files .............................................................................................................. 4-2
4.1.4 List of codes available for cloning ............................................................................ 4-4
4.1.5 Cloning procedure .................................................................................................... 4-7
4.2 AES Data Encryption Function Setting .............................................................................. 4-14
4.2.1 General description ................................................................................................ 4-14
4.2.2 Precautions ............................................................................................................ 4-14
4.2.3 Setting procedure ................................................................................................... 4-15
4.2.4 Procedure for disabling data encryption function ................................................... 4-20
4.2.5 Procedure for discarding HDD when data encryption function is enabled ............ 4-20
4.3 Assist Mode ....................................................................................................................... 4-21
4.3.1 Assist Mode ............................................................................................................ 4-21
4.3.2 Operating Procedure of Assist Mode ..................................................................... 4-22

5. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)............................................................................ 5-1

5.1 General Description ............................................................................................................. 5-1
5.2 PM Display........................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.1 General Description.................................................................................................. 5-1
5.2.2 PM Display Conditions ............................................................................................. 5-1
5.2.3 PM Display Contents ................................................................................................ 5-3
5.2.4 Counter Clearing ...................................................................................................... 5-4
5.3 General Descriptions for PM Procedure .............................................................................. 5-5
5.4 PM Support Mode................................................................................................................ 5-6
5.4.1 General Description.................................................................................................. 5-6
5.4.2 Operational flow ....................................................................................................... 5-6
5.4.3 Operational screen ................................................................................................... 5-7
5.4.4 Access tree............................................................................................................. 5-10
5.5 Work flow of parts replacement ......................................................................................... 5-12
5.6 Preventive Maintenance Checklist..................................................................................... 5-13
5.6.1 Scanner .................................................................................................................. 5-14
5.6.2 Laser unit................................................................................................................ 5-15
5.6.3 Feed unit ................................................................................................................ 5-16
5.6.4 Automatic duplexing unit ........................................................................................ 5-18
5.6.5 Bypass feed unit ..................................................................................................... 5-19
5.6.6 Main charger .......................................................................................................... 5-20
5.6.7 Drum/Cleaner unit, Cleaner related section ........................................................... 5-21
5.6.8 Developer unit (K, Y, M, and C) ............................................................................. 5-24
5.6.9 Waste Toner Box.................................................................................................... 5-28
5.6.10 Transfer belt unit / Transfer belt cleaning unit ........................................................ 5-29
5.6.11 Image quality control unit ....................................................................................... 5-31
5.6.12 2nd transfer roller unit ............................................................................................ 5-32
5.6.13 Fuser unit ............................................................................................................... 5-33
5.6.14 Exit unit................................................................................................................... 5-36
5.6.15 RADF (MR-3018) ................................................................................................... 5-37
5.6.16 PFP (KD-1023) ....................................................................................................... 5-38
2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
CONTENTS

5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11

5.6.17 LCF (KD-1024) ....................................................................................................... 5-39

Storage of Supplies and Replacement Parts..................................................................... 5-40
PM KIT............................................................................................................................... 5-41
Maintenance Part List ....................................................................................................... 5-42
Grease List ........................................................................................................................ 5-44
Operational Items in Overhauling ...................................................................................... 5-44

6. ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................ 6-1

6.1 Error Code List..................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.1 Jam........................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.2 Service call ............................................................................................................... 6-7
6.1.3 Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function.............................................................. 6-13
6.1.4 Printer function error............................................................................................... 6-21
6.1.5 TopAccess related error ......................................................................................... 6-22
6.1.6 Error history ............................................................................................................ 6-23
6.2 Diagnosis and Prescription for Each Error Code ............................................................... 6-24
6.2.1 Paper transport jam (paper exit section) ................................................................ 6-24
6.2.2 Paper misfeeding ................................................................................................... 6-24
6.2.3 Paper transport jam ................................................................................................ 6-28
6.2.4 Other paper jam ..................................................................................................... 6-32
6.2.5 Cover open jam ...................................................................................................... 6-35
6.2.6 RADF jam ............................................................................................................... 6-37
6.2.7 Jam in bridge unit ................................................................................................... 6-40
6.2.8 Paper jam in finisher section .................................................................................. 6-41
6.2.9 Paper jam in saddle stitcher section....................................................................... 6-47
6.2.10 Paper jam in puncher unit ...................................................................................... 6-49
6.2.11 Other paper jam ..................................................................................................... 6-49
6.2.12 Paper feeding system related service call .............................................................. 6-52
6.2.13 Scanning system related service call ..................................................................... 6-57
6.2.14 Fuser unit related service call................................................................................. 6-59
6.2.15 Communication related service call........................................................................ 6-63
6.2.16 RADF related service call ....................................................................................... 6-65
6.2.17 Circuit related service call ...................................................................................... 6-65
6.2.18 Laser optical unit related service call ..................................................................... 6-68
6.2.19 Finisher related service call .................................................................................... 6-71
6.2.20 Image control related service call ........................................................................... 6-88
6.2.21 Copy process related service call......................................................................... 6-101
6.2.22 Other service call.................................................................................................. 6-105
6.2.23 Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function............................................................ 6-106
6.2.24 Printer function error............................................................................................. 6-120
6.2.25 TopAccess related error ....................................................................................... 6-122

7. REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD ...................................................................... 7-1

7.1 Removal and Installation of PC Boards/HDD ...................................................................... 7-1
7.1.1 Hard disk (HDD) ....................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.2 Board cover .............................................................................................................. 7-2
7.1.3 FAX cover................................................................................................................. 7-3
7.1.4 SYS/HDD cooling fan ............................................................................................... 7-3
7.1.5 SYS board ................................................................................................................ 7-3
7.1.6 IMG board ................................................................................................................ 7-4
7.1.7 LGC board ................................................................................................................ 7-5
7.1.8 Switching regulator ................................................................................................... 7-5
7.1.9 High-voltage transformer (HVT) ............................................................................... 7-7
7.1.10 FIL board .................................................................................................................. 7-8
7.1.11 Board case ............................................................................................................. 7-10
7.1.12 SRAM board <for LGC board> ............................................................................... 7-12
e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
CONTENTS

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

7.1.13 SRAM board <for SYS board> ............................................................................... 7-13

7.2 Precautions, Procedures and Settings for Replacing PC Boards and HDD ...................... 7-15
7.2.1 Precautions when replacing PC boards ................................................................. 7-15
7.2.2 HDD fault diagnosis................................................................................................ 7-16
7.2.3 Precautions and procedures when replacing the HDD........................................... 7-18
7.2.4 Precautions and Procedures when replacing the SYS board ................................ 7-23
7.2.5 Procedures and settings when replacing the SLG board ...................................... 7-24
7.2.6 Precautions and procedure when replacing the SRAM board (for the SYS board) 7-25
7.2.7 Procedures and settings when replacing SRAM board (for LGC board)................ 7-29
7.2.8 Firmware confirmation after the PC board/HDD replacement ................................ 7-31
7.2.9 Electronic key re-registration using the one-time dongle........................................ 7-32
7.3 Precautions for Installation of GP-1070 and Disposal of HDD/Board................................ 7-33
7.3.1 Precautions for Installation of GP-1070 and Disposal of HDD/Board..................... 7-33
7.3.2 Precautions when disposing of the SYS board ...................................................... 7-33
7.3.3 Precautions when disposing of the SRAM board ................................................... 7-33

8. FIRMWARE UPDATING ............................................................................................... 8-1

8.1 Firmware Updating with USB Media.................................................................................... 8-5
8.1.1 Master data/System ROM/Engine ROM/Scanner ROM........................................... 8-7
8.1.2 Imaging Acceleration Board ROM (GE-1170) ........................................................ 8-17
8.2 Firmware Updating with PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 ............................................................. 8-23
8.2.1 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2) ............................. 8-24
8.2.2 System ROM .......................................................................................................... 8-27
8.2.3 Engine ROM ........................................................................................................... 8-29
8.3 Firmware Updating with K-PWA-DLM-320 ........................................................................ 8-32
8.3.1 Scanner ROM......................................................................................................... 8-33
8.3.2 RADF firmware (MR-3018)..................................................................................... 8-35
8.3.3 Finisher firmware (MJ-1101)................................................................................... 8-37
8.3.4 Converter Firmware (MJ-1101) .............................................................................. 8-39
8.3.5 Hole punch unit firmware (MJ-6101) ...................................................................... 8-43
8.3.6 Finisher firmware/Saddle stitcher firmware (MJ-1030) ........................................... 8-47
8.3.7 Finisher firmware (MJ-1031)................................................................................... 8-51
8.3.8 Fax unit firmware (GD-1250) .................................................................................. 8-54
8.4 Confirmation of the updated data ...................................................................................... 8-56
8.5 When Firmware Updating Fails ......................................................................................... 8-57
8.5.1 Procedure ............................................................................................................... 8-57
8.5.2 Flow chart for correcting USB update failure.......................................................... 8-58

9. POWER SUPPLY UNIT ................................................................................................ 9-1

9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8

General description.............................................................................................................. 9-1

Construction......................................................................................................................... 9-1
Operation of DC Output Circuits .......................................................................................... 9-2
Output Channel ................................................................................................................... 9-3
Fuse..................................................................................................................................... 9-5
Configuration of Power Supply Unit..................................................................................... 9-6
Sequence of Power Supply ................................................................................................. 9-7
AC Wire Harness ................................................................................................................. 9-9

10. DC WIRE HARNESS / ELECTRIC PARTS LAYOUT................................................. 10-1

10.1 DC Wire Harness............................................................................................................... 10-1
10.2 Electric Parts Layout.......................................................................................................... 10-2

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
CONTENTS

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
CONTENTS

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1.

SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES

1.1

Specifications

1.1.1

General

Type

Original glass
Color
Copy process
Developing system
Fixing method
Photosensor type
Original scanning sensor
Scanning light source
Resolution
Scanning
Writing
Gradation
Paper feeding

Paper supply

Drawers /
PFP (optional)
Bypass feeding

LCF (optional)

Paper size

Paper type

Paper weight

Drawers /
PFP (optional)
Bypass feeding

LCF (optional)
Drawers /
PFP (optional)
Bypass feeding

LCF (optional)
Drawers /
PFP (optional)

Desktop type
(Console type: when optional Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP) or optional
Large Capacity Feeder (LCF) is installed.)
Fixed
Full color, Twin color
Indirect electrophotographic method (dry)
2-component magnetic brush developing
Belt fusing system
OPC
Linear CCD sensor
Xenon lamp
600 dpi x 600 dpi
2400 dpi x 600 dpi (black print, except gray scale)
600 dpi x 600 dpi (color print / gray scale)
256
2 drawers + Bypass feeding + PFP 1 drawer (optional)
2 drawers + Bypass feeding + PFP 2 drawers (optional)
2 drawers + Bypass feeding + LCF (optional)
Stack height 60.5 mm,
Approx. 550 sheets (80 g/m2, 21.3 lb. Bond),
Approx. 500 sheets (105 g/m2, 28 lb. Bond)
Stack height 11 mm,
Approx. 100 sheets (80 g/m2, 21.3 lb. Bond),
Approx. 80 sheets (105 g/m2, 28 lb. Bond)
Stack height 137.5 mm,
Approx. 2500 sheets (80 g/m2, 21.3 lb. Bond),
Approx. 2000 sheets (90 g/m2, 28 lb. Bond)
A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5, B5-R, FOLIO, 8K, 16K, 16K-R,
LD, LG, LT, LT-R, ST-R, COMPUTER, 13"LG, 8.5" x 8.5",
A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5, B5-R, FOLIO, 8K, 16K, 16K-R,
305 x 457 mm (A3Wide), 320 x 450 mm (SRA3), 320 x 460 mm,
LD, LG, LT, LT-R, ST-R, COMPUTER, 13"LG, 8.5" x 8.5",
12" x 18" (Full Bleed),
Non-standard:
Paper size within 100 - 320 mm (5 1/2" - 12.6") (Length), 148 - 460
mm (8 1/2" - 18.1") (Width) <For printing functions, within 461 mm 1200 mm (18.15" - 47.24") (width)>
A4, LT
Plain paper, Recycled paper, Thick 1, Thick 2, Thick 3
Plain paper, Recycled paper, Thick 1, Thick 2, Thick 3, Thick 4,
Sticker labels, OHP film, Tab paper, Water proof paper,
Extra large paper
Plain paper, Recycled paper
64 g/m2 to 256 g/m2 (17 lb. Bond to 94.5 lb. Cover)

Bypass feeding

64 g/m2 to 280 g/m2 (17 lb. Bond to 150 lb. Index)

LCF (optional)

64 g/m2 to 105 g/m2 (17 lb. Bond to 28 lb. Bond)

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES

1-1

Automatic
duplexing unit

Type
Acceptable paper size

Stackless, Switchback type

A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5, B5-R, FOLIO, 8K, 16K, 16K-R,
305 x 457mm (A3Wide),
LD, LG, LT, LT-R, ST-R, COMPUTER, 13"LG, 8.5" x 8.5",
12" x 18" (Full Bleed)

Acceptable paper
weight

64 g/m2 to 256 g/m2 (17 lb. Bond to 94.5 lb. Cover)

Toner supply
Density control
Total counter
Memory (RAM)

Main memory
Page Memory

HDD
Account Codes
Department Codes
Machine version

Warm-up time

e-STUDIO2020C
e-STUDIO2330C
e-STUDIO2820C
e-STUDIO2830C
e-STUDIO3520C
e-STUDIO3530C

Approx. 99 sec. (100 V series) <Stand-alone, temperature: 20oC>

Approx. 89 sec. (200 V series) <Stand-alone, temperature: 20oC>

e-STUDIO4520C

Approx. 160 sec. <Stand-alone, temperature: 20oC>

Power requirements

Power consumption

Weight

Automatic toner density detection/supply

Automatic density mode and manual density mode selectable in 11
steps
Electronic counter
1 GB
512 MB
80 GB
10,000 codes
1,000 codes
NAD: North America, Brazil
MJD: Europe
AUD: Australia
ASD: Asia, Hong Kong, Latin America
TWD: Taiwan
SAD: Saudi Arabia
ASU: Saudi Arabia, Asia
CND: China
KRD: Korea
ARD: Argentina
JPD: Japan

AC 110 V / 13.2 A, 115 V or 127 V / 12 A

220-240 V / 8 A (50/60 Hz)
* The acceptable value of each voltage is 10%.
1.5 kW or less (100 V, 115 V)
1.6 kW or less (127 V)
2.0 kW or less (200 V series)
* The electric power is supplied to the RADF, Finisher, PFP and
LCF through the equipment.
Approx. 121 kg (266.75 lb.) (for NAD and MJD)
Approx. 123 kg (271.16 lb.) (for others)

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1-2

Dimensions of the equipment

W 699 x D 742 x H 759 (mm)

* When the tilt angle of the control panel is 52 degrees.

52
H

1.1.2

Copy

[ 1 ] Copy specifications
Storage capacity
Original glass
Original scanning
system
Original type
Original size
Original scanning
Reversing
system
Automatic
Document
Original type
Feeder
Original size
(optional)

Eliminated
portion

Original paper weight

Single-sided copy: 35-157g/m2 (9.3 lb. Bond - 58 lb. Cover)

Double-sided copy: 50-157 g/m2 (13.3 lb. Bond - 58 lb. Cover)

Original capacity

Max. 100 sheets (80 g/m2) (Stack height 16 mm)

Leading edges: 3.0 2.0 mm, Trailing edges: 3.0 2.0 mm,
Side edges: 2.0 2.0 mm
Leading edges: 5.0 2.0 mm, Trailing edges: 3.0 2.0 mm,
Side edges: 2.0 2.0 mm
Up to 999 copies: Key in set numbers

Black copy
Color copy

Multiple copying

Max. 1000 sheets or until the memory is full

Flat surface scanning system
(the left rear corner used as guide to place originals)
Sheets, books and 3-dimensional objects
Max. A3/LD
Fixed scanning system by feeding the original
(the center used as guide to place originals)
Sheets (carbon, bounded or stapled originals cannot be accepted)
A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5, B5-R, FOLIO,
LD, LG, LT, LT-R, ST-R, COMPUTER

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES

1-3

[ 2 ] First copy time

e-STUDIO2020C
e-STUDIO2330C
e-STUDIO2820C
e-STUDIO2830C
e-STUDIO3520C

Black

Approx. 6.5 sec.

Color

Approx. 8.4 sec.

e-STUDIO3530C

Black

Approx. 5.2 sec.

Color

Approx. 8.4 sec.

Black

Approx. 5.2 sec.

Color

Approx. 6.8 sec.

e-STUDIO4520C

[ 3 ] Copy speed (Copies/min.)

[ 3-1 ]

Plain paper

Plain paper: 64 g/m2 to 105 g/m2 (17 lb. Bond to 28 lb. Bond)
e-STUDIO2020C
Paper supply
Paper size
A4, LT
B5, A5-R, ST-R
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R
B4, LG, FOLIO,
COMPUTER
A3, LD
305 x 457mm,
320 x 450mm (SRA3)

Drawer
20 (20)

Bypass feed
Size not
Size specified
specified
20 (20)
12 (12)

PFP
20 (20)

LCF
(A4/LT only)

17 (17)
14 (14)

17 (17)
14 (14)

12 (12)
12 (12)

17 (17)
14 (14)

20 (20)
-

12 (12)
-

12 (12)
11 (11)

12 (12)
-

12 (12)
-

PFP

LCF
(A4/LT only)

e-STUDIO2330C
Paper supply
Paper size
A4, LT
B5, A5-R, ST-R
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R
B4, LG, FOLIO,
COMPUTER
A3, LD
305 x 457mm,
320 x 450mm (SRA3)

Bypass feed
Drawer
28 (23)

28 (23)

Size not
specified
16 (12)

22 (17)
19 (14)

22 (17)
19 (14)

16 (12)
16 (12)

22 (17)
19 (14)

28 (23)
-

16 (12)
-

16 (12)
15 (11)

16 (12)
-

16 (12)
-

PFP

LCF
(A4/LT only)

Size specified

28 (23)

e-STUDIO2820C
Paper supply
Paper size
A4, LT
B5, A5-R, ST-R
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R
B4, LG, FOLIO,
COMPUTER
A3, LD
305 x 457mm,
320 x 450mm (SRA3)

Bypass feed
Drawer
28 (28)

28 (28)

Size not
specified
16 (16)

22 (22)
19 (19)

22 (22)
19 (19)

16 (16)
16 (16)

22 (22)
19 (19)

28 (28)
-

16 (16)
-

16 (16)
15 (15)

16 (16)
-

16 (16)
-

Size specified

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES

28 (28)

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1-4

e-STUDIO2830C
Paper supply
Paper size
A4, LT
B5, A5-R, ST-R
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R
B4, LG, FOLIO,
COMPUTER
A3, LD
305 x 457mm,
320 x 450mm (SRA3)

Drawer
35 (28)

Bypass feed
Size not
Size specified
specified
35 (28)
18 (16)

PFP
35 (28)

LCF
(A4/LT only)

26 (22)
22 (19)

26 (22)
22 (19)

18 (16)
18 (16)

26 (22)
22 (19)

35 (28)
-

18 (16)
-

18 (16)
17 (15)

18 (16)
-

18 (16)
-

PFP

LCF
(A4/LT only)

e-STUDIO3520C
Paper supply
Paper size
A4, LT
B5, A5-R, ST-R
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R
B4, LG, FOLIO,
COMPUTER
A3, LD
305 x 457mm,
320 x 450mm (SRA3)

Drawer
35 (35)

Bypass feed
Size not
Size specified
specified
35 (35)
18 (18)

35 (35)

26 (26)
22 (22)

26 (26)
22 (22)

18 (18)
18 (18)

26 (26)
22 (22)

35 (35)
-

18 (18)
-

18 (18)
17 (17)

18 (18)
-

18 (18)
-

PFP

LCF
(A4/LT only)

e-STUDIO3530C
Paper supply
Paper size
A4, LT
B5, A5-R, ST-R
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R
B4, LG, FOLIO,
COMPUTER
A3, LD
305 x 457mm,
320 x 450mm (SRA3)

Bypass feed
Drawer
45 (35)

45 (35)

Size not
specified
22 (18)

32 (26)
26 (22)

32 (26)
26 (22)

22 (18)
22 (18)

32 (26)
26 (22)

45 (35)
-

22 (18)
-

22 (18)
22 (17)

22 (18)
-

22 (18)
-

PFP

LCF
(A4/LT only)

Size specified

45 (35)

e-STUDIO4520C
Paper supply
Paper size
A4, LT
B5, A5-R, ST-R
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R
B4, LG, FOLIO,
COMPUTER
A3, LD
305 x 457mm,
320 x 450mm (SRA3)

*
*
*
*

Bypass feed
Drawer
45 (45)

45 (45)

Size not
specified
22 (22)

32 (32)
26 (26)

32 (32)
26 (26)

22 (22)
22 (22)

32 (32)
26 (26)

45 (45)
-

22 (22)
-

22 (22)
22 (22)

22 (22)
-

22 (22)
-

Size specified

45 (45)

- means Not acceptable.

When originals are manually placed for single-sided, continuous copying.
Plain paper is selected for the paper type.
When the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder is used, the copying speeds of the equipment is
only possible under the following conditions:
Original: A4 or LT (single-sided)

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES

1-5

Mode: APS and Automatic density not selected, Plain paper mode
Reproduction ratio: 100%
The values in ( ) can be realized in the color mode.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1-6

[ 3-2 ]

Thick 1/Thick 2/Thick 3

Thick 1: 106 g/m2 to 163 g/m2 (- 90 lb. Index)

Thick 2: 164 g/m2 to 209 g/m2 (- 110 lb. Index)
Thick 3: 210 g/m2 to 256 g/m2 (- 140 lb. Index)
e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
Paper supply
Paper size
A4, LT
B5, A5-R, ST-R
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R
B4, LG, FOLIO,
COMPUTER
A3, LD
305 x 457mm,
320 x 450mm (SRA3)

*
*
*

Drawer
17.5 (17.5)

Bypass feed
Size not
Size specified
specified
17.5 (17.5)
8.5 (8.5)

PFP
17.5 (17.5)

LCF
(A4/LT only)

13 (13)
10.5 (10.5)

13 (13)
10.5 (10.5)

8.5 (8.5)
8.5 (8.5)

13 (13)
10.5 (10.5)

8.5 (8.5)
-

8.5 (8.5)
8 (8)

8.5 (8.5)
-

8.5 (8.5)
-

- means Not acceptable.

When originals are manually placed for single-sided, continuous copying.
The values in ( ) can be realized in the color mode.

[ 3-3 ]

Thick 4

Thick 4: 257 g/m2 to 280 g/m2 (- 150 lb. Index)

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
Paper supply
Paper size
A4, LT
B5, A5-R, ST-R
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R
B4, LG, FOLIO,
COMPUTER
A3, LD
305 x 457mm,
320 x 450mm (SRA3)

*
*
*

Drawer
-

Bypass feed
Size not
Size specified
specified
17.5 (17.5)
8.5 (8.5)

PFP
-

LCF
(A4/LT only)

13 (13)
10.5 (10.5)

8.5 (8.5)
8.5 (8.5)

8.5 (8.5)
8 (8)

8.5 (8.5)
-

PFP

LCF
(A4/LT only)

- means Not acceptable.

When originals are manually placed for single-sided, continuous copying.
The values in ( ) can be realized in the color mode.

[ 3-4 ] OHP film

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
Paper supply
Paper size
A4, LT

*
*
*

Bypass feed
Drawer
-

Size specified
14.5 (14.5)

Size not
specified
-

- means Not acceptable.

When originals are manually placed for single-sided, continuous copying.
The values in ( ) can be realized in the color mode.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES

1-7

[ 4 ] System copy speed

1 set
3 sets
5 sets
1 set
3 sets
5 sets
1 set
3 sets

e-STUDIO2020C
33.00 (34.74)
94.90 (96.62)
154.07 (155.74)
38.42 (40.16)
97.93 (99.20)
156.45 (158.33)
70.50 (72.75)
190.42 (192.66)

Sec.
e-STUDIO2330C
26.29 (34.30)
70.79 (85.61)
113.13 (137.06)
31.60 (36.61)
78.27 (91.91)
116.33 (142.09)
61.71 (67.18)
146.44 (170.49)

5 sets
1 set
3 sets
5 sets

308.62 (311.20)
65.89 (67.05)
183.56 (185.29)
302.32 (303.56)

231.28 (273.28)
55.11 (64.19)
140.11 (162.75)
224.86 (266.15)

231.28 (234.05)
55.11 (58.50)
140.11 (142.58)
224.86 (228.09)

e-STUDIO2830C

Sec.
e-STUDIO3520C

e-STUDIO3530C

1 set
3 sets
5 sets
1 set
3 sets
5 sets
1 set
3 sets
5 sets
1 set
3 sets
5 sets

22.33 (28.21)
58.69 (76.33)
93.13 (114.89)
30.60 (33.83)
66.21 (76.09)
102.90 (118.64)
61.02 (64.43)
134.24 (149.43)
207.54 (234.05)
55.12 (58.50)
123.25 (142.58)
191.18 (228.09)

22.33 (24.10)
58.69 (60.34)
93.13 (94.41)
30.60 (31.00)
66.21 (68.06)
102.90 (104.72)
61.02 (64.45)
134.24 (137.46)
207.54 (210.85)
55.12 (58.02)
123.25 (126.84)
191.18 (194.06)

18.03 (24.10)
46.92 (60.34)
73.46 (94.41)
30.95 (31.00)
61.03 (68.06)
83.51 (104.72)
58.17 (64.45)
116.96 (137.46)
175.09 (210.85)
53.89 (58.02)
106.97 (126.84)
159.83 (194.06)

1 set
3 sets
5 sets
1 set
3 sets
5 sets
1 set
3 sets
5 sets
1 set
3 sets
5 sets

Sec.
e-STUDIO4520C
18.03 (19.35)
46.92 (47.82)
73.46 (74.35)
30.95 (26.39)
61.03 (55.61)
83.51 (84.97)
58.17 (60.50)
116.96 (118.88)
175.09 (177.28)
53.89 (56.41)
106.97 (109.42)
159.83 (162.32)

Copy mode
Single-sided originals

Single-sided copies
Single-sided originals

Double-sided copies
Double-sided originals

Double-sided copies
Double-sided originals

Single-sided copies
Copy mode
Single-sided originals

Single-sided copies
Single-sided originals

Double-sided copies
Double-sided originals

Double-sided copies
Double-sided originals

Single-sided copies
Copy mode
Single-sided originals

Single-sided copies
Single-sided originals

Double-sided copies
Double-sided originals

Double-sided copies
Double-sided originals

Single-sided copies

*
*
*

e-STUDIO2820C
26.29 (28.21)
70.79 (76.33)
113.13 (114.89)
31.60 (33.83)
78.27 (76.09)
116.33 (118.64)
61.71 (64.43)
146.44 (149.43)

Shows the period of time from when the [START] button is pressed until the message Ready is
displayed. (10 sheets of A4/LT size original are set on the RADF and one of the copy modes above
is selected.)
Setting: when in the Text/Photo mode with Automatic density and APS/AMS set to OFF, or when in
the sort mode with paper fed from the 1st drawer.
The Saddle Stitch Finisher and hole punch unit not installed.
The values in ( ) are the speeds of when in the color mode.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1-8

1.1.3

Print

Supported Page Description Language

(Printer Driver)
Supported Page Description Language
(RIP)
Supported Client OS

Resolution
Eliminated portion
Interface

1.1.4

Black
Color
Black / Color
Standard
Optional

Color / Black

Resolution
Scan mode
File formats

Windows 2000 / XP / Vista / 7 / Server 2003 / Server 2008

Mac OS X (Ver. 10.2 or higher)
Solaris (SUN) / HP-UX / AIX (IBM) / Linux / SCO
600 x 600 dpi, 8bit
600 x 600 dpi, 8bit
Leading edges: 4.2 mm + 2.8 mm/-1.2 mm,
Trailing edges: 4.2 mm + 1.2 mm/-2.8 mm, Side edges: 4.2 2.0 mm
Ethernet (100BASE-TX/10BASE-T)
WLAN (IEEE 802.11b/g), Bluetooth (HCRP and BIP)

45 sheets/min. (600 x 600 dpi)

53 sheets/min. (400 x 400 dpi)
57 sheets/min. (300 x 300 dpi)
100, 150, 300, 400 and 600 dpi
Black and White, Gray scale, Color and ACS (Auto color Selection)
JPEG, Multi/Single page TIFF, Multi/Single page PDF, Slim PDF,
Multi/Single page XPS

When scanning single-sided A4/LT landscape originals using RADF

1.1.5

e-Filing

Number of Boxes
Number of Folder
Number of Document
Number of Page
Capacity of HDD

PCL6, PostScript 3 emulation, XPS, PCL5e, PCL5c, PDF (emulation)

Scan

Scanning speed

PCL6, PostScript 3 emulation, XPS

Public Box
User Box

e-Filing

1
200
100 folders per box
400 documents per box/folder
200 pages per document
13 GB

When scanning single-sided A4/LT landscape originals using RADF

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES

1-9

1.1.6

Internet Fax

[ 1 ] Internet FAX transmission

Resolution

TX Resolution
< dots/mm >

Scanning

Original
Document Size
Speed

Gray scale
Address book
Address Book
Group
Transmission Features Broadcast
transmission
Message size
limitation
Message
division

Standard (8 x 3.85),
Fine (8 x 7.7),
U-Fine (16 x 15.4)*
* If U-Fine is selected in TX resolution, data is converted to Fine
resolution in RX.
A3, B4, A4, A4-R, A5, B5, B5-R, A5-R, LT, LT-R, LG, LD, ST, ST-R,
Computer, FOLIO
0.7 sec. (per page/A4)
Max. 50 spm (ITU-T No.1, A4, 8 x 3.85,Text mode)
256 levels (Error Diffusion)
1000 stations
Max. 200 stations
Max. 400 destinations/job.
(Fax number and E-mail address are available to registered in same
job.)
Max. 100MB
Page by page

[ 2 ] Internet FAX receiving

Format of receive attachment

1.1.7

TIFF-FX (Profile S, F, J)

Network Fax

Compatibility

Super G3, G3 (ITU-T.30)

Internet Fax (Simple mode) (ITU-T.37)
TX Resolution
PSTN
Standard: 200 x 100 dpi,
Fine: 200 x 200 dpi,
Super Fine: 200 x 400 dpi,
Ultra Fine: 400 x 400 dpi
Internet Fax
200 dpi x 200 dpi
Original Document Size
A3, A4, A5, B4, B5, FOLIO, LD, LG, LT, ST, COMPUTER
Mail Box
User defined
Max. 300 boxes
Routed document
Send to e-Filing MMR
format
Send to File
Single TIFF, Multi-TIFF, Single PDF, Multi PDF
(SMB)
Send to FTP
Single TIFF, Multi-TIFF, Single PDF, Multi PDF
Send to E-mail Single TIFF, Multi-TIFF, Single PDF, Multi PDF
Send to I-Fax
TIFF-S
Send to PSTN- MMR
FAX

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 10

1.2

Accessories

Unpacking/Setup instruction

1 set

Operators manual

1 set (except for ASU)

Operator's manual pocket

1 pc.

Power cable

1 pc.

Warranty sheet
Setup report
PM sticker
Process unit (Y, M, C, K)

1 pc. (for NAD)

1 set (for NAD, MJD and CND)
1 pc. (for MJD)
1 pc. each

Control panel stopper

1 pc.

Sub tray
Rubber plug

1 pc. (for NAD)

6 pcs.

Blind seal (small / large)

1 pc. /3 pcs.

CD-ROM

2 pcs. (except for ASU)

Developer material (Y, M, C, K)

1 pc. each (for CND)

Approval sheet
Screw

1 set (for CND)

1 pc.

Gasket

1 pc.

Gasket screw

1 pc.

Machine version
NAD:
North America, Brazil
MJD:
Europe
AUD:
Australia
ASD:
Asia, Hong Kong, Latin America
TWD:
Taiwan
SAD:
Saudi Arabia

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES

1 - 11

ASU:
CND:
KRD:
ARD:
JPD:

Saudi Arabia, Asia

China
Korea
Argentina
Japan

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 12

1.3

Options
Original Cover
Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF)
Large Capacity Feeder (LCF)
Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP)
Drawer Module
Finisher
Saddle Stitch Finisher
Hanging Finisher
Hole Punch Unit
Staple Cartridge

Bridge Kit
Work Table
EFI Printer Board
FAX Unit
2nd Line for Fax Unit
Wireless LAN Module
Bluetooth Module
Antenna
Data Overwrite Enabler
Meta Scan Enabler
External Interface Enabler
IPSec Enabler
Harness Kit for Coin Controller
e-BRIDGE ID Gate (HID)
e-BRIDGE ID Gate (MIFARE)
Imaging Acceleration Board
Damp Heater Kit
Desk

KA-3511PC/PC-C
MR-3018
KD-1024LT/A4/C
KD-1023/C
MY-1032/C
MJ-1101
MJ-1030/C
MJ-1031/C
MJ-6101N/E/F/S/E-C (for MJ-1101)
MJ-6004N/E/F/S (for MJ-1030)
STAPLE-2400 (for MJ-1101)
STAPLE-2000 (for MJ-1030/1031)
STAPLE-600 (for saddle stitcher of
MJ-1030)
KN-4520
KK-3511
GA-1211
GD-1250NA/AU/AS/EU/C/TW
GD-1260NA/AU/EU/C/TW
GN-1050/C
GN-2010
GN-3010
GP-1070
GS-1010
GS-1020
GP-1080
GQ-1110
KP-2004
KP-2005
GE-1170
MF-3500CU/CE
MH-1700

Notes:
The bridge kit (KN-4520) is necessary for installation of the finisher (MJ-1101/1030/1031).
The finisher (MJ-1101) is necessary for installation of the hole punch unit
(MJ-6101N/E/F/S/E-C).
The finisher (MJ-1030) is necessary for installation of the hole punch unit (MJ-6004N/E/F/S).
The antenna (GN-3010) is necessary to enable the wireless LAN module (GN-1050/C) and
the bluetooth module (GN-2010).

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES

1 - 13

1.4

Supplies
Drum

OD-FC35

Developer material (K)

D-FC28K

Developer material (Y)

D-FC28Y

Developer material (M) D-FC28M

Developer material (C) D-FC28C

Toner cartridge (K)

PS-ZTFC28K (for North America, Central and South America)

PS-ZTFC28EK (for Europe)
PS-ZTFC28DK (for Australia and Asia)
PS-ZTFC28CK (for China)

Toner cartridge (Y)

PS-ZTFC28Y (for North America, Central and South America)

PS-ZTFC28EY (for Europe)
PS-ZTFC28DY (for Australia and Asia)
PS-ZTFC28CY (for China)

Toner cartridge (M)

PS-ZTFC28M (for North America, Central and South America)

PS-ZTFC28EM (for Europe)
PS-ZTFC28DM (for Australia and Asia)
PS-ZTFC28CM (for China)

Toner cartridge (C)

PS-ZTFC28C (for North America, Central and South America)

PS-ZTFC28EC (for Europe)
PS-ZTFC28DC (for Australia and Asia)
PS-ZTFC28CC (for China)

Waste toner box

PS-TBFC28 (expect for Europe and China)

PS-TBFC28E (for Europe)
PS-TBFC28C (for China)

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 14

 2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 15
Finisher
MJ-1101

Staple Cartridge
STAPLE-2400

Hanging Finisher
MJ-1031/C

Staple Cartridge
STAPLE-2000

Staple Cartridge
STAPLE-600

Saddle Stitch
Finisher
MJ-1030/C

Staple Cartridge
STAPLE-2000

Hole Punch Unit

MJ-6101 N/E/F/S/E-C

Drawer Module
MY-1032/C

External Interface Enabler

GS-1020
IPSec Enabler
GP-1080

Imaging
Acceleration Board
GE-1170

Antenna
GN-3010

EFI Printer
Board
GA-1211

Bluetooth
Module
GN-2010

Wireless LAN
Module
GN-1050/C

Bridge Kit
KN-4520

Data Overwrite Enabler

GP-1070
Meta Scan Enabler
GS-1010

Hole Punch Unit

MJ-6004 N/E/F/S

Damp Heater
MF-3500CU/CE

Reversing Automatic
Document Feeder
(RADF)
MR-3018

Paper Feed
Pedestal (PFP)
KD-1023/C

Large Capacity
Feeder (LCF)
KD-1024 A4/LT/C

2nd Line for

FAX Unit
GD-1260
NA/AU/EU/C/TW

FAX Unit
GD-1250
NA/AU/AS/
EU/C/TW

e-BRIDGE
ID Gate
KP-2005

e-BRIDGE
ID Gate
KP-2004

Work Table
KK-3511

Original Cover
KA-3511PC/PC-C

1.5
System List
1

Fig. 1-1

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 16

2.

SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Mode
Control panel
check mode
Test mode
Test print mode
Adjustment
mode
Setting mode
List print mode
PM support
mode
Firmware
update mode

For start
[0]+[1]+
[POWER]
[0]+[3]+
[POWER]
[0]+[4]+
[POWER]
[0]+[5]+
[POWER]
[0]+[8]+
[POWER]
[9]+[START]+
[POWER]
[6]+[START]+
[POWER]
[8]+[9]+
[POWER]

Contents
All LEDs on the control panel are lit, and all
the LCD pixels blink.
Checks the status of input/output signals.
Outputs the test patterns.
Adjusts various items.
Sets various items.
Prints out the data lists of the codes 05 and
08, PM support mode and pixel counter.
Clears each counter.
Performs updating of the system firmware.

For exit
[POWER]
OFF/ON
[POWER]
OFF/ON
[POWER]
OFF/ON
[POWER]
OFF/ON
[POWER]
OFF/ON
[POWER]
OFF/ON
[POWER]
OFF/ON
[POWER]
OFF/ON

Display
-

2
100% C A4
TEST MODE
100% P A4
TEST PRINT
100% A A4
TEST MODE
100% D
TEST MODE
100% L A4
LIST PRINT
100% K
TEST MODE
-

Note:
To enter the desired mode, turn the power ON while pressing two digital keys designated to each
mode (e.g. [0] and [5]) simultaneously. Hold the two keys until the [COPY] [e-FILING] [SCAN]
[PRINT] [FAX] buttons is lit.
To exit from Adjustment mode and Setting mode:
Shut down the equipment. When the power should be turned OFF, be sure to shut down the
equipment by pressing the [ON/OFF] button for a few seconds.
Control panel check mode (01):
<Operation procedure>
[0][1]
[POWER]

LED lit/
LCD blinking

[START]

(Button check)

[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)

[START]

Notes:
1. A mode can be canceled by [POWER] OFF/ON when the LED is lit and the LCD is blinking.
2. Button Check
Buttons with LED
(Press to turn OFF the LED.)
Buttons without LED
(Press to display the message on the control panel.)
Button on touch panel
(Press to display the initial screen displayed at power-ON.
Press [execution] on the touch panel and then
the [CLEAR] button on the control panel.
The screen then returns to the Button Check menu.)

Test mode (03): Refer to

P.2-4 "2.1 Input check (Test mode 03)" and
P.2-12 "2.2 Output check
(test mode 03)".
Test print mode (04): Refer to
P.2-15 "2.3 Test print mode (test mode 04)".

Adjustment mode (05): Refer to

Setting mode (08): Refer to

P.2-28 "2.5 ADJUSTMENT MODE (05)"

P.2-76 "2.6 SETTING MODE (08)"

List print mode (9S): The procedure varies depending on the code.
<Operation procedure>
2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2-1

PRINT
[9][START]
[POWER]

[START]
[Digital keys]
(Code)
Key in the first
101: Adjustment mode (05)
code to be printed
102: Setting mode (08)

[START]

[Digital keys]
Key in the last
code to be printed

[START]
List starts to
be printed

[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)

(Code)
103: PM support mode
104: Stored information of pixel counter (toner cartridge reference)
105: Stored information of pixel counter (service technician reference)
106: Error history (Maximum 1000 items)
107: Error history (Latest 80 items)
108: Firmware update log (Maximum 200 items)
110: Power-ON/OFF log (Maximum 100 items)
111: Version list

USB (CSV format, txt format)

[9][START]
[POWER]

Connect
USB

[START]
[Digital keys] [START] [Digital keys]
(Code)
Key in the last
201: Adjustment mode (05) Key in the first
code to be printed
code to be printed
202: Setting mode (08)

[START] Disconnect
List starts to
USB
be printed

[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)

(Code)
203: PM support mode
204: Stored information of pixel counter (toner cartridge reference)
205: Stored information of pixel counter (service technician reference)
206: Error history (Maximum 1000 items)
208: Firmware update log (Maximum 200 items)
210: Power-ON/OFF log (Maximum 100 items)
211: Version list CSV file output
213: Error log
214: Total counter list CSV file output
300: ALL CSV files

Notes:
Precautions when storing information into USB media
When storing the setting information of the equipment into a USB media, be sure to obtain
permission from a user in advance.
When storing the setting information of the equipment into a USB media, the information is
printed out in a CSV format. Handle and manage the information with extra care.
Do not lose or leak the setting information of the equipment.
Do not use the setting information of the equipment for purposes other than maintenance or
product services.
Provide the information promptly if a user requires so.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-2

Remarks:
The [COPY] [e-FILING] [SCAN] [PRINT] [FAX] buttons on the control panel keep blinking
while data are being stored in the USB media.
Do not disconnect the USB media while data are being stored.
When the data of a code are printed again on the same equipment, the CSV file will be
overwritten because the names of these files contain the same serial number.
In the USB storage procedure above, lists are stored in a CSV or txt format. The names of the
CSV and txt files are shown below. The numbers "0123456789" in the file name represent the
serial number of the machine.
- 201:ADJUSTMENT_LIST_0123456789.csv
- 202:SETTING_LIST_0123456789.csv
- 203:PM_LIST_0123456789.csv
- 204:PIXEL_TONER_LIST_0123456789.csv
- 205:PIXEL_SERVICE_LIST_0123456789.csv
- 206:ERROR_LOG_0123456789.csv
- 208:FW_UPGRADE_LOG0123456789.csv
- 210:POWER_ONOFF_LOG_0123456789.csv
- 211:VERSION_LIST_0123456789.csv
- 213:logdump.txt / i.txt
- 214:TOTAL_COUNTER_LIST_0123456789.csv
PM support mode (6S):
<Operation procedure>
[6][START]
[POWER]

(Code)
2: PM Support Screen

[START]
(Operation started)

[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)

Firmware update mode (89): Refer to 8.FIRMWARE UPDATING.

State transition diagram of self-diagnosis modes

[POWER]
ON
Normal
[0][1]

Warming up

Control panel
check mode

[0][3]

Test mode

[0][4]
Test print
mode

[0][5]
Adjustment
mode

[0][8]
Setting
mode

[9][START]
List print
mode

[6][START]
PM support
mode

[8][9]

Firmware
update mode

Ready

[POWER]
OFF
*1
To user

State transition diagram of self-diagnosis modes

Fig. 2-1

*1 Turn OFF the power after using the self-diagnosis mode, and leave the equipment to the user.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2-3

2.1

Input check (Test mode 03)

The status of each input signal can be checked by pressing the [FAX] button, [COPY] button and
the digital keys in the test mode (03).
<Operation procedure>
[0][3]
[POWER]

[START]

[FAX]
or
[COPY]

[Digital keys]

(LCD ON)

[CLEAR]

[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)

Note:
Initialization is performed before the equipment enters the test mode.

Fig. 2-2 Example of display during input check

Items to be checked and the condition of the equipment when the buttons [A] to [H] are highlighted are
listed in the following pages.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-4

[FAX] button: OFF/[COPY] button: OFF ([FAX] LED: OFF/[COPY] LED: OFF)
Digital
key

Button

Contents
Highlighted display
Normal display

Items to check

e.g.

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

e.g.

A
B
C
D
E
F
G

Used toner paddle motor lock detection sensor

PWA-F-SRAM connection detection
K drum phase sensor
Color drum phase sensor
-

Sensor blocked
Not connected
Sensor blocked
Sensor blocked
-

Sensor not blocked

Connected
Sensor not blocked
Sensor not blocked
-

H
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H

Waste toner cover open/close detection switch

PFP upper drawer detection switch
PFP upper drawer paper stock sensor
PFP upper drawer feed sensor
PFP connection
PFP side cover open/close switch
PFP upper drawer empty sensor
PFP upper drawer tray-up sensor

OPEN

CLOSE

Drawer not installed

Paper almost empty
Paper present
Not connected
Cover opened
No paper
Tray at upper limit
position

Drawer present
Paper present
No paper
Connected
Cover closed
Paper present
Other than upper
limit position

Not connected
Not connected
Error
Tray at upper limit
position
Tray at upper limit
position
Paper almost empty
Paper almost empty
Drawer not installed
Drawer not installed
No paper
No paper
Normal
Connected

Connected
Connected
Normal
Other than upper
limit position
Other than upper
limit position
Paper present
Paper present
Drawer present
Drawer present
Paper present
Paper present
Abnormal
Not connected

Old
Paper present
Cover opened
Paper present

New BAM
No paper
Cover closed
No paper

Paper full
Not connected

Paper not full

Connected

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A

IMG board connection

IPC board connection
HSYNC error
2nd drawer tray-up sensor

1st drawer tray-up sensor

C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B

2nd drawer paper stock sensor

1st drawer paper stock sensor
2nd drawer detection switch
1st drawer detection switch
2nd drawer empty sensor
1st drawer empty sensor
High voltage control leak detection status
Fuser unit thermistor connection detection

C
D
E
F

Fuser unit new BAM judging signal-1

Bridge unit transport sensor-2 (Exit sensor)
Bridge unit cover open/close detection switch
Bridge unit transport sensor-1 (Entrance
sensor)
Bridge unit paper full detection sensor
Bridge unit connection

G
H

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2-5

Digital
key

[6]

[7]

[8]

[9]

[0]

Button

Contents
Highlighted display
Normal display

Items to check

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F

K process unit connection signal

C process unit connection signal
M process unit connection signal
Y process unit connection signal
Paper clinging detection sensor
Registration sensor

Image position aligning sensor (rear)

Image position aligning sensor (front)

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H

PFP lower drawer detection switch

PFP lower drawer paper stock sensor
PFP lower drawer feed sensor
PFP motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at
output mode (03))
PFP lower drawer empty sensor
PFP lower drawer tray-up sensor

LCF tray bottom sensor

B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A

LCF standby side paper misload detection

sensor
LCF drawer detection switch
Paper stock sensor at LCF feed side
LCF end fence home position sensor

LCF end fence stop position sensor

C
D
E
F

Empty sensor at LCF standby side

LCF side cover open/close switch
LCF motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at
output mode (03))
LCF tray-up sensor

G
H

LCF feed sensor

Empty sensor at LCF feed side

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

e.g.

e.g.

Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
No paper
Paper present

Connected
Connected
Connected
Connected
Paper present
No paper

Drawer not installed

Paper almost empty
Paper present
Abnormal rotation

Toner pattern
detection
Toner pattern
detection
Drawer present
Paper present
No paper
Normal rotation

No paper
Tray at upper limit
position
Tray at bottom
position
Properly loaded

Paper present
Other than upper
limit position
Other than upper
limit position
Paper misload

Drawer not installed

Paper almost empty
Fence home
position
Fence stop position
No paper
Cover closed
Normal rotation

Drawer present
Paper present
Other than home
position
Other than stop
position
Paper present
Cover opened
Abnormal rotation

Tray at upper limit

position
No paper
Paper present

Other than upper

limit position
Paper present
No paper

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-6

[FAX] button: ON/[COPY] button: OFF ([FAX] LED: ON/[COPY] LED: OFF)
Digital
key

Button

Contents
Highlighted display
Normal display

Items to check

e.g.

[1]

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H

[2]

[3]

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E

[4]
F
G
H
A

[5]

B
C
D
E
F
G
H

LCF connection
Exit sensor

e.g.

Not connected
Paper present
Not connected
Paper present
Paper present

Transfer belt installation detection

2nd drawer feeding jam sensor
1st drawer feeding jam sensor
-

Connected
No paper
Connected
No paper
No paper

Polygonal motor ready signal

24V Power supply
ADU opening/closing switch
Laser shutter open/close detection
Waste toner box full detection sensor
2nd transfer roller position detection sensor
Used toner motor lock detection sensor
Belt contact position detection sensor
Transfer cover switch
Toner cartridge detection sensor-K
Toner cartridge detection sensor-C
Toner cartridge detection sensor-M
Toner cartridge detection sensor-Y
ADU exit sensor
ADU entrance sensor
Bypass feed paper existence sensor
Bypass feed sensor
Bypass feed paper width sensor 3
(Refer to table1)
Bypass feed paper width sensor 2
(Refer to table1)
Bypass feed paper width sensor 1
(Refer to table1)
Bypass feed paper width sensor 0
(Refer to table1)
RADF connection
Platen sensor
Carriage home position sensor

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Power ON
ADU opened
ON
Waste toner box full
Released
Sensor blocked
Color
Cover opened
Cartridge present
Cartridge present
Cartridge present
Cartridge present
Paper present
Paper present
No paper
No paper
Bit 1

Ready
Power OFF
ADU closed
OFF
Not full
Contacted
Sensor not blocked
Black
Cover closed
No Cartridge
No Cartridge
No Cartridge
No Cartridge
No paper
No paper
Paper present
Paper present
Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 0
-

Connected
Platen cove opened
Home position

Not connected
Platen cover closed
Other than home
position

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2-7

Digital
key

Button

Items to check

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F

Contents
Highlighted display
Normal display
e.g.

[6]

[7]

G
H
A

D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E

RADF read sensor

RADF registration sensor
RADF original tray width sensor (TWID0S)
(Refer to table2)
RADF original tray width sensor (TWID1S)
(Refer to table2)
RADF original tray width sensor (TWID2S)
(Refer to table2)
RADF original length sensor
RADF original width sensor 1
RADF original width sensor 2
Needle electrode cleaner detection sensor

F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H

Side cover open/close switch

Drum mode detection signal
Fuser unit connection
Key copy counter connection

B
C
[8]

[9]

[0]

APS sensor (APS-R)

APS sensor (APS-C)
APS sensor (APS-3)
APS sensor (APS-2)
APS sensor (APS-1)
RADF tray sensor
RADF empty sensor
RADF jam access cover sensor
RADF open/close sensor
RADF exit sensor
RADF intermediate sensor

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

e.g.

Original present
Original present
Original present
Original present
Original present
Original present
Original present
Cover opened
RADF opened
Original present
Original present

No original
No original
No original
No original
No original
No original
No original
Cover closed
RADF closed
No original
No original

Original present
Original present
OFF(H)

No original
No original
ON(L)

OFF(H)

ON(L)

OFF(H)

ON(L)

Original present
Original present
Original present
Cleaner limit
position
Cover opened
Color
Connected
Not connected

No original
No original
No original
Other than cleaner
limit position
Cover closed
Black
Not connected
Connected

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-8

Table 1. Relation between the status of the bypass paper width sensor and paper size (width).
3
0
1
1
1
0
1

Bypass paper width sensor

2
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0

Paper width size

0
1
1
1
0
1
1

A3/LD
A4-R/LT-R
A5-R/ST-R
Card size
B4-R/LG
B5-R

Table 2. Relation between the status of the original tray width sensor and paper size (width).
Original tray width sensor
TWID2S
TWID1S
TWID0S
H
H
H
H
H
L
H
L
H
L
H
H
L
H
L
L
L
H
L

Paper width size

(LT series)

Paper width size

(A4 series)

LD / LT
ST-R
LD / LT
8.5x8.5 / LT-R /
KLG / 13"LG
COMPUTER

A3 / A4
B5-R
A5-R
A3 / A4
Postcard
A4-R / FOLIO
B4 / B5

H (= high level): Open L (= low level): Short

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2-9

[FAX] button: OFF/[COPY] button: ON ([FAX] LED: OFF/[COPY] LED: ON)

Digital
key
[1]
[2]

Button
-

[4]

[6]

[7]

[8]

[9]

Items to check

e.g.

[3]

[5]

Contents
Highlighted display
Normal display

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H

Temperature/humidity sensor (displays

temperature inside of the equipment)
Temperature/humidity sensor (displays humidity
inside of the equipment)
Drum thermistor-K
(displays temperature on the drum surface of K
color)
Drum thermistor-Y
(displays temperature on the drum surface of Y
color)
-

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

e.g.
-

Temperature [C]

Humidity [%RH]

Temperature [C]

Temperature [C]

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 10

Digital
key

[0]

Button

Items to check

A
B
C
D
E

Contents
Highlighted display
Normal display
e.g.

F
G
H

Security enabler
Judgement for acceptable USB storage device
(*1)
-

e.g.

Connectable
Acceptable
-

Not connectable
Not acceptable
-

*1
Be sure to install the USB storage device to the equipment and check if the device can be used with
this code.
Be sure to turn OFF the write protection (the function to prevent data from erasure by the accidental
recording or deleting) of the USB storage device before performing the check, otherwise this code
cannot be used.
It may take some time (2 sec. to 10 sec.) before this check is completed depending on the USB
storage device.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 11

2.2

Output check (test mode 03)

Status of the output signals can be checked by entering the following codes in the test mode 03.

<Operation procedure>
Procedure 1
[0][3]
[POWER]

(Code)

Stop
code

Operation
ON

[START]

[START]

Operation
OFF

[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)

Procedure 2
[0][3]
[POWER]

[START]

(Code)

Operation
One direction

[CLEAR]

Test mode
standby

[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)

Procedure 3
[0][3]
[POWER]

(Code)

[START]

Operation
ON

[START]

Operation
OFF

[CLEAR]

Test mode
standby

[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)

Procedure 4
[0][3]
[POWER]
Code
101

103
108
109
110
111

112
113
114
115
116
118

119
120
121
122
123
125

(Code)

[START]

Function
Drum motor ON + Transfer belt motor
ON
(Operational without process unit Y/M/
C/K)
Polygonal motor (600dpi) ON
Registration motor ON
PFP motor ON
ADU motor ON
Developer unit motor Y/M/C/K ON
(Operational without process unit Y/M/
C/K)
Developer unit motor K ON
(Operational without process unit K)
Fuser motor ON
Developer unit motor ON + Drum
motor ON (normal speed)
ADU motor ON (high speed during
transport within ADU)
Exit motor (reversal rotation) ON (high
speed)
Laser ON(Y: 05-2853, M: 05-2854, C:
05-2855, k: 05-2856 setting value
output)
ADU motor ON (transport speed)
Exit motor (normal rotation) ON
Exit motor (reversal rotation) ON
LCF motor ON
Transport motor ON
Sensor shutter solenoid ON (open)

[POWER] OFF

Code
151

Function
Code No.101 function OFF

Procedure
1

153
158
159
160
161

Code No.103 function OFF

Code No.108 function OFF
Code No.109 function OFF
Code No.110 function OFF
Code No.111 function OFF

1
1
1
1
1

162

Code No.112 function OFF

163
164

Code No.113 function OFF

Code No.114 function OFF

1
1

165

Code No.115 function OFF

166

Code No.116 function OFF

168

Code No.118 function OFF1

169
170
171
172
173
175

Code No.119 function OFF

Code No.120 function OFF
Code No.121 function OFF
Code No.122 function OFF
Code No.123 function OFF
Code No.125 function OFF

1
1
1
1
1
1

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 12

Code
126

Function
Image position aligning sensor (front/
rear) LED ON

Code

Code
176

Function
Code No.126 function OFF

Function

Procedure
1

Procedure

201

1st drawer feed clutch ON/OFF

202

2nd drawer feed clutch ON/OFF

204

Bypass feed clutch ON/OFF

206

LCF pickup solenoid ON/OFF

207

LCF end fence reciprocating movement

208

LCF end fence motor ON/OFF

209

LCF feed clutch ON/OFF

210

LCF transport clutch ON/OFF

218

Key copy counter count up

222

ADU clutch ON/OFF

225

PFP transport clutch ON/OFF

226

PFP upper drawer feed clutch ON/OFF

228

PFP lower drawer feed clutch ON/OFF

229

Middle roller (upper) transport speed drive clutch ON/OFF

230

Middle roller (lower) transport speed drive clutch ON/OFF

231

Middle roller (upper) process speed drive clutch ON/OFF

232

Bridge unit gate solenoid ON/OFF

233

Middle roller (lower) process speed drive clutch ON/OFF

234

Bypass pickup solenoid ON/OFF

235

Discharge LED (K) ON/OFF (Do not let it radiate to the photoconductive drum for a long
time.)

236

Discharge LED (Y/M/C) ON/OFF (Do not let it radiate to the photoconductive drum for a
long time.)

239

Switching contact/release of 2nd transfer roller

240

Drum switching motor (switches position in the black/color mode)

241

1st transfer roller cam motor (switches contact/release of transfer belt)

242

1st drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up)

243

2nd drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up)

248

Developer bias (K) [DC] ON/OFF (Operational without process unit K)

249

Developer bias (K) [AC] ON/OFF (Operational without process unit K)

252

Main charger (K) ON/OFF (Operational without process unit K)

253

Main charger (Y/M/C) ON/OFF (Operational without process unit Y/M/C)

254

Developer bias (Y) [DC] ON/OFF (Operational without process unit Y)

255

Developer bias (M) [DC] ON/OFF (Operational without process unit M)

256

Developer bias (C) [DC] ON/OFF (Operational without process unit C)

257

Developer bias (Y/M/C) [AC] ON/OFF (Operational without process unit Y/M/C)

261

Scan motor ON (Automatically stops at limit position)

264

Scanner fan motor (high speed) ON/OFF

265

Scanner fan motor (low speed) ON/OFF

267

Scanner exposure lamp ON/OFF

271

LCF tray-up motor UP/DOWN

278

PFP upper drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up)

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 13

Code

Function

Procedure

280

PFP lower drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up)

281

RADF feed motor ON/OFF (normal rotation)

282

RADF feed motor ON/OFF (reverse rotation)

283

RADF read motor ON/OFF

284

RADF exit/reverse motor ON/OFF (normal rotation)

285

RADF exit/reverse motor ON/OFF (reverse rotation)

294

Reverse/exit solenoid ON/OFF

295

Power OFF mode

297

RADF fan motor ON/OFF

410

Toner motor (K) ON/OFF (Operational without toner cartridge K)

411

Toner motor (C) ON/OFF (Operational without toner cartridge C)

412

Toner motor (M) ON/OFF (Operational without toner cartridge M)

413

Toner motor (Y) ON/OFF (Operational without toner cartridge Y)

414

Used toner motor ON/OFF

415

Waste toner transport motor ON/OFF

417

Laser shutter (open/close)

433

Drum (K) recovery blade bias ON/OFF

434

Drum (Y/M/C) recovery blade bias ON/OFF

439

EPU cooling fan (low speed) ON/OFF

440

EPU cooling fan (high speed) ON/OFF

441

Fuser/exit section cooling fan (low speed) ON/OFF

442

Fuser/exit section cooling fan (high speed) ON/OFF

443

Ozone exhaust fan (low speed) ON/OFF

444

Ozone exhaust fan (high speed) ON/OFF

445

Laser unit cooling fan (low speed) ON/OFF

446

Laser unit cooling fan (high speed) ON/OFF

448

Switching regulator cooling fan ON/OFF

449

Internal cooling fan (low speed) ON/OFF

450

Internal cooling fan (high speed) ON/OFF

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 14

2.3

Test print mode (test mode 04)

The embedded test pattern can be printed out by keying in the following codes in the test print mode (04).

<Procedure 1>
[0][4]
[POWER]

2
(Code)

(Media selection)

[START]

Operation
Continuous
Test Printing

[CLEAR]

[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)

<Procedure 2>
[0][4]
[POWER]

(Code)

Media
[START]
selection
[CLEAR]

Color
selection

[START]

Operation [CLEAR]
Continuous
Test Printing

[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)

Notes:
1. When an error occurs, it is indicated on the panel, but the recovery operation is not
performed.
Turn OFF the power and then back ON to clear the error.
2. During test printing, the [CLEAR] button is disabled when Wait adding toner is displayed.

Code

Types of test pattern

Remarks

Remarks

Output
from

142

Grid pattern (black)

Pattern width: 2 dots,

Pitch: 10 mm

LGC

204

Grid pattern (color)

Pattern width: 1 dot,

Pitch: 10 mm

LGC

219

6% test pattern

LGC

220

8% test pattern

LGC

231

Secondary scanning direction 33

gradation steps

LGC

237

Halftone

LGC

3 pixels standard, Width: 10 mm

262

Ladder pattern (4 lines ON/ 4 lines OFF)

For color deviation confirmation

LGC

270

Image quality control test pattern

For checking the image quality

control

LGC

285

Field curvature deviation check pattern

For secondary scanning position

fine adjustment

LGC

Note:
In the (Color selection) of <Procedure 2>, the printing method is different between [K(1)] and
[K(4)] as follows.
[K(1)] .....................Printing by bringing one K color developer unit into contact with the transfer
belt
[K(4)] .....................The developer units of four (YMCK) colors are brought into contact with the
transferbelt, but the test pattern is printed in K color only.
* The number in parentheses indicates the contact of the developer unit and the transfer belt.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 15

2.4

List Printing

Lists below are output in the list print mode.

List data are printed out or output in a CSV or txt format by storing them in a USB media. Paper sizes
available for this printing are A4 or LT or larger. This section introduces a sample of each list.
Starting the list print mode: [9] + [START] + [ON/OFF]
List code

Lists
Printout

CSV file output

txt file output

Adjustment mode (05) data

list

101

201

Setting mode (08) data list

102

202

PM support mode data list

103

203

Pixel counter list

(toner cartridge reference)

104

204

Pixel counter list

(service call reference)

105

205

Error history list

106
(Maximum 1000 items)

206
(Maximum 1000 items)

Error history list

107
(Latest 80 items)

Firmware upgrade log

108
(Maximum 200 items)

208
(Maximum 200 items)

Power ON/OFF log

110
(Maximum 100 items)

210
(Maximum 100 items)

111

211

Error log

213

Total counter list

214

All CSV files

300

Version list

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 16

Adjustment mode (05)

05 ADJUSTMENT MODE

DATA LIST

'08-02-08 20:13

2
CODE

DATA

CODE

200
201
202
203
204
205205205205247

128
128
128
128
111,111
129
135
135
140
34

386388
389
390390390390391391391-

0
1
2
3

0
1
2
3
0
1
2

DATA

CODE

88
107
676
330
334
356
286
580
589
580

483483483483483483483485485485-

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
1
2

DATA

CODE

128
124
128
128
128
128
128
127
128
128

592604
605
606
648
649
664664664667-

DATA
2

0
1
2
0

128
128
128
128
2
2
176
176
176
0

Fig. 2-3

The selected adjustment codes and the current adjustment value for each code are output in a list.
See the following page for the adjustment code (05):
P.2-28 "2.5 ADJUSTMENT MODE (05)"

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 17

Setting mode (08)

08 SETTING MODE

DATA LIST

'08-02-08 20:13

CODE

DATA

201
202
203
204
205
206
207
209
210
218

2
0
0
0
15
20
0
1
148,105
1

CODE

DATA

288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297

12
5
1
6
0
0
1
0
1200
1000

CODE

DATA

304-10
304-11
304-12
304-13
304-14
304-15
304-16
304-17
304-18
304-19

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

CODE
307-11
307-12
307-13
307-14
307-15
307-16
307-17
307-18
307-19
307-21

DATA
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Fig. 2-4

The selected setting codes and the current setting value for each code are output in a list. See the
following page for the setting code (08):
P.2-76 "2.6 SETTING MODE (08)"

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 18

PM support mode
PM SUPPORT CODE LIST

'08-02-08 20:13
UNIT

2
OUTPUT PAGES/
DEVELOP COUNTS

DRUM (K)
DRUM BLADE (K)
GRID (K)
MAIN CHARGER NEEDLE (K)
CHARGER CLEANING PAD (K)
DRUM (Y)
DRUM BLADE (Y)
GRID (Y)
MAIN CHARGER NEEDLE (Y)
CHARGER CLEANING PAD (Y)
DRUM (M)
DRUM BLADE (M)
GRID (M)
MAIN CHARGER NEEDLE (M)
CHARGER CLEANING PAD (M)

PM OUTPUT PAGE/
DEVELOP COUNTS

2516
2516
2516
2516
2516
411
411
411
411
411
411
411
411
411
411

70000
70000
70000
70000
70000
70000
70000
70000
70000
70000
70000
70000
70000
70000
70000

DRIVE COUNTS

11735
11735
11735
11735
11735
8625
8625
8625
8625
8625
8625
8625
8625
8625
8625

PM DRIVE COUNTS

170000
170000
170000
170000
170000
170000
170000
170000
170000
170000
170000
170000
170000
170000
170000

Fig. 2-5

The number of pages currently output (OUTPUT PAGES/DEVELOP COUNTS), the recommended
number of output pages for PM (PM OUTPUT PAGES/DEVELOP COUNTS), the current drive count
(DRIVE COUNTS) and the recommended drive count for PM (PM DRIVE COUNTS) are output
together with PM units. Use this list for confirming the PM units to be replaced at each PM. See the
following page for PM:
P.5-1 "5. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)"
Note:
The number of output pages printed only in the full color mode is given in "PM OUTPUT PAGE/
DEVELOP COUNTS" of the PM support code list.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 19

Stored information of pixel counter (toner cartridge reference)

PIXEL COUNTER CODE LIST

'08-02-08 20:13
TONERCARTRIDGE

No DATE
COL.
--------------------------0 20080208 Y
1 20080208 Y
2 20080208 Y
3 20080208 M
4 20080208 M
5 20080208 M
6 20080208 C
7 20080208 C
8 20080208 C
9 20080208 K
10 20080208 K
11 20080208 K

Print Count[LT/A4]
Average Pixel Count[%]
Latest Pixel Count[%]
Print Count[LT/A4]
Average Pixel Count[%]
Latest Pixel Count[%]
Print Count[LT/A4]
Average Pixel Count[%]
Latest Pixel Count[%]
Print Count[LT/A4]
Average Pixel Count[%]
Latest Pixel Count[%]

PPC

PRN

FAX

TOTAL

181
2.70
6.15
181
6.11
6.82
181
5.46
6.42
278
6.15
7.32

45
1.74
0.39
45
2
2.15
45
2
2.73
145
3.86
2.19

------------------9
23.25
6.25

226
2.51
0.39
226
5.29
2.15
226
4.81
2.73
432
5.74
2.19

Fig. 2-6

Pixel counter data (toner cartridge reference) are output in a list. See the following page for the pixel
counter:
P.2-99 "2.6.7 Pixel counter"

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 20

Stored information of pixel counter (service technician reference)

PIXEL COUNTER CODE LIST

'08-02-08 20:13
SERVICEMAN

No DATE
COL.
--------------------------0 20080208 F
Print Count[LT/A4]
1 20080208 F
Average Pixel Count[%]
2 20080208 F
Latest Pixel Count[%]
3 20080208 Y
Print Count[LT/A4]
4 20080208 Y
Average Pixel Count[%]
5 20080208 Y
Latest Pixel Count[%]
6 20080208 M
Print Count[LT/A4]
7 20080208 M
Average Pixel Count[%
8 20080208 M
Latest Pixel Count[%]
9 20080208 C
Print Count[LT/A4]
10 20080208 C
Average Pixel Count[%]
11 20080208 C
Latest Pixel Count[%]
12 20080208 K
Print Count[LT/A4]
13 20080208 K
Average Pixel Count[%]
14 20080208 K
Latest Pixel Count[%]
15 20080208 K
Print Count[LT/A4]
16 20080208 K
Average Pixel Count[%]
17 20080208 K
Latest Pixel Count[%]

PPC

PRN

FAX

TOTAL

181
4.95
8.36
181
2.7
6.15
181
6.11
6.82
181
5.46
6.42
181
5.51
14.05
97
7.36
7.32

45
2.34
2.34
45
1.74
0.39
45
2
2.15
45
2.18
2.73
45
3.43
4.10
100
4.06
2.19

------------------------------9
23.25
6.25

226
4.43
2.34
226
2.51
0.39
226
5.29
2.15
226
4.81
2.73
226
5.10
4.10
206
6.45
2.19

Fig. 2-7

Pixel counter data (service call reference) are output in a list. See the following page for the pixel
counter:
P.2-99 "2.6.7 Pixel counter"

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 21

Error history
ERROR HISTORY LIST

'08-02-08 20:13
CODE
F110
F110
F110
F110
F110
EAD0
E860
E731
E090
E870
E724

COUNTER
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000001
00000060
00000060
00000060
00000137
00000137

DATE TIME
071212-151809
071212-153814
071212-155334
071212-160243
071212-161517
071212-172126
071225-133517
071225-133525
071225-133602
071226-140648
071226-140650

ZOOM_XY ABCD EFHI JLO

064 064 3400_1000_011
064 064 3400_1000_011
064 064 3400_1000_011
064 064 3400_1000_011
064 064 3400_1000_011
064 064 3400_1000_011
064 064 3422_1000_011
064 064 3422_1000_011
064 064 3402_1000_011
064 064 3422_1000_011
064 064 3422_1000_011

S/N: xxxxxxxxx

TOTAL:

9999999

TOSHIBA e-STUDIOxxx

DF COUNTER:

9999999

CODE COUNTER DATE TIME ZOOM_XY ABCD EFHI JLO

F110 00000000 071212-151809 064 064 3400_1000_011

Fig. 2-8

The error history is output. See the following page for the parameters for each error:
P.6-21 "6.1.4 Printer function error"

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 22

Firmware update log

FW UPGRADE LOG
S / N : 12345678901
TOSHIBA e-STUDIO3520C

'08-05-10 17:35
STATE
MANUFACTURE
UNPACKING
V1.00
T430SY0J001
T430S-01
T430M-01
T430F-02
V1.01
T430SY0J002
T430S-02
T430M-02
T430F-03
V1.02
T430SY0J003
T430S-03
T430M-03
T430F-04

DATE
2007-04-17
2007-04-17
2007-04-17
2007-04-17
2007-04-17
2007-05-18
2007-05-18
2007-06-18
2007-06-18
2007-06-18
2007-06-18
2007-06-18
2007-07-17
2007-07-17
2007-07-17
2007-07-17
2007-08-18

TOTAL

COPY(B)

COPY(2)

COPY(C)

PRINT(B)

PRINT(2)

PRINT(C)

LIST

FAX

99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999

99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999

99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999

99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999

99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999

99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999

99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999

99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999

99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999

Fig. 2-9

Firmware upgrade logs are output.

- The MANUFACTURE field shows the date of manufacture. The UNPACKING field shows the
date that the equipment was unpacked.
- Only the versions of ROMs downloaded using a USB download jig are displayed.
Item

Content

STATE

Version name of ROM downloaded

DATE

Date that the ROM was downloaded

TOTAL

Total counter data when the ROM was downloaded

COPY (B)

Copier counter data (black) when the ROM was downloaded

COPY (2)

Copier counter data (twin color) when the ROM was downloaded

COPY (C)

Copier counter data (full color) when the ROM was downloaded

PRINT (B)

Printer counter data (black) when the ROM was downloaded

PRINT (2)

Printer counter data (twin color) when the ROM was downloaded

PRINT (C)

Printer counter data (full color) when the ROM was downloaded

LIST

List print counter data when the ROM was downloaded

FAX

Fax print counter data when the ROM was downloaded

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 23

Power-ON/OFF log
POWER ON_OFF LOG
S / N : 12345678901
TOSHIBA e-STUDIO3520C

'08-05-10 17:35
DATE TIME
030619-144650
030619-181201
030620-103551
030620-134930
030620-135026
030620-141110
030623-112540
030624-112524
030624-162102
030624-163459

FUNCTION
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
RMT_OFF
OFF

TOTAL
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999

DATE TIME
030624-163459
030624-163459
030624-163510
030624-163735
030624-164138

FUNCTION
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
RMT_OFF

TOTAL
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999

Fig. 2-10

Power ON/OFF logs are output.

- Note that cases that the power was turned OFF with the main switch (not with the [ON/OFF]
button on the control panel) will not be displayed.
Item

Content

DATE

Date that the power was turned ON or OFF

TIME

Time that the power was turned ON or OFF

FUNCTION

Whether the power was turned ON or OFF, or if it was turned ON or

OFF with a remote reset function

TOTAL

Total counter data when the power was turned OFF and then back ON

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 24

Version list

VERSION LIST
TIME : 04-12-'00 09:00
SERIAL NUMBER: 01234567890123456789
SYSTEM FIRMWARE ROM VERSION
: T410SY0J230
SYSTEM FIRMWARE INTERNAL ROM VERSION: VTD12.000 J
PRINTER ROM VERSION
: 390M-915
SCANNER ROM VERSION
: 390S-915
RADF ROM VERSION
: DF-9010
FINISHER STACKER ROM VERSION
: FIN-90
FINISHER SADDLE ROM VERSION
: SDL-07
FINISHER PUNCH ROM VERSION
:
CONVERTER ROM VERSION
:
FAX BOARD FIRMWARE ROM VERSION
:
SYSTEM FIRMWARE OS VERSION
: 3901-00
UI DATA FIX SECTION VERSION
: V0.70/0.B3
UI DATA COMMON SECTION VERSION
: V002.000 0
UI DATA INITIAL LANGUAGE AT POWER ON
: V002.000 0
UI DATA 1ST LANGUAGE IN HDD
: V002.000 3
UI DATA 2ND LANGUAGE IN HDD
: V002.000 3
UI DATA 3RD LANGUAGE IN HDD
: V034.000 7
UI DATA 4TH LANGUAGE IN HDD
: V034.000 6
UI DATA 5TH LANGUAGE IN HDD
: V034.000 11
UI DATA 6TH LANGUAGE IN HDD
: V034.000 10
UI DATA 7TH LANGUAGE IN HDD
: V030.000 4
HDD DATA VERSION
: T410HD0J230
WEB UI DATA 1ST LANGUAGE IN HDD
: V022.000 1
WEB UI DATA 2ND LANGUAGE IN HDD
: V022.000 2
WEB UI DATA 3RD LANGUAGE IN HDD
: V022.000 3
WEB UI DATA 4TH LANGUAGE IN HDD
: V022.000 4
WEB UI DATA 5TH LANGUAGE IN HDD
: V022.000 5
WEB UI DATA 6TH LANGUAGE IN HDD
: V022.000 6
CAPACITY OF HDD
: 74.5 GB
DEVICE INFORMATION OF HDD
:
SERIAL NUMBER OF HDD
:
MEMORY SIZE
: 512 MB
INSTALLED ELK NAME
: Data overwrite enabler
IPSec enabler
Meta scan enabler
External interface enabler

Fig. 2-11

The list of versions is output.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 25

Error Log
Error logs are output.
The conditions of the error logs produced in a USB media are as shown below.
LOG folders
- yyyymmddhhmm_ss_xxxx (Date and time in which the error occurred + error code)
- logdump.txt
- i.txt

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 26

Total Counter list

TOTAL COUNTER LIST

2010/9/28 17:07
TOSHIBA e-STUDIO2020C
CUE800200
TOTAL

220

DF TOTAL

22

PRINT COUNTER
TOTAL
FULL COLOR TWIN/MONO COLOR BLACK TOTAL
COPY
37
0
1
38
FAX
0
0
0
0
PRINTER
122
0
60
182
LIST
0
0
0
0
TOTAL
159
0
61
220
COPY
FULL COLOR TWIN/MONO COLOR BLACK TOTAL
37
0
1
38
0
0
0
0
37
0
1
38

SMALL
LARGE
TOTAL
FAX

FULL COLOR TWIN/MONO COLOR BLACK TOTAL

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

SMALL
LARGE
TOTAL
PRINTER
SMALL
LARGE
TOTAL

FULL COLOR TWIN/MONO COLOR BLACK TOTAL

118
0
60
178
4
0
0
4
122
0
60
182

SMALL
LARGE
TOTAL

FULL COLOR TWIN/MONO COLOR BLACK TOTAL

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

LIST

SCAN COUNTER
TOTAL
FULL COLOR TWIN/MONO COLOR BLACK TOTAL
COPY
7
0
1
FAX
0
0
0
NETWOR
0
0
0
TOTAL
7
0
1

8
0
0
8

COPY
FULL COLOR TWIN/MONO COLOR BLACK TOTAL
7
0
1
8
0
0
0
0
7
0
1
8

SMALL
LARGE
TOTAL
FAX

FULL COLOR TWIN/MONO COLOR BLACK TOTAL

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

SMALL
LARGE
TOTAL
NETWORK

FULL COLOR TWIN/MONO COLOR BLACK TOTAL

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

SMALL
LARGE
TOTAL
CALIBRATION COUNTER

Fig. 2-12

The list of total counter is output.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 27

2.5

ADJUSTMENT MODE (05)

Items in the adjustment mode list in the following pages can be corrected or changed in this adjustment
mode (05). Turn ON the power with pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously in order to enter
this mode.
Note:
When the power should be turned OFF, be sure to shut down the equipment by pressing the
[ON/OFF] button for a few seconds.
Remarks:
The Service Handbook contains only the selected codes while the Service Manual contains
all codes.
The digit after the hyphen in Code of the following table is a sub code.
In RAM, the SRAM of the board in which the data of each code is stored is indicated. M
stands for the LGC board and SYS stands for the SYS board.

2.5.1

Classification List of Adjustment Mode (05)

Classification

Scanner

[Log table]
[Image position]
[Carriage position]
[Fixed value]
[Shading position]
[Distortion]
[Reproduction ratio]
[Automatic dust
detection]
[ACS]
[RGB]
[Black header density
level adjustment]
[Fine line
enhancement
switchover]
[Leading edge
adjustment]

Image

Adjustment Mode (05)

Given in the Service Manual and
Given in the Service Manual
Service Handbook
361, 362
305, 306
359, 360
363, 364
350, 351
308
340
349
1675
1080, 1081, 1082, 8372
7811, 7812, 7816
7323-0 to 2, 8103-0 to 2

7322-0 to 2, 8102-0 to 2,

497-0 to 5, 4065, 4066,

4067-0 to 6, 4562, 4563, 4564,
4565, 4567-0 to 5, 4568,

408, 410, 411, 428, 429, 440, 441,

442, 444, 445, 498-0 to 1,
4732-0 to 1
503, 504, 505, 507, 508, 510, 514,
515, 700, 710, 714, 725, 729, 845,
846, 847, 848, 860, 861, 862, 863,
931, 934, 937, 940, 1585, 1586,
1587, 1588, 1589, 7475, 7478,
7641-0 to 2, 7642-0 to 2,
8210-0 to 3, 8211-0 to 3,
8212-0 to 3, 8213, 8214, 8215,
8249-0 to 4, 8250-0 to 4,
8251-0 to 4, 8252-0 to 4,
8253-0 to 4, 8254-0 to 4, 8340,
8341, 8342, 8344, 8345, 8346,
8348, 8349, 8350, 8371, 8380,
8381, 8382

[Image density]

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 28

Classification

Adjustment Mode (05)

Given in the Service Manual and
Given in the Service Manual
Service Handbook

[Color balance]

Image

[Gamma adjustment]
[Gamma balance]

[Black reproduction
switching]
[Highlight pen]
[Color / Black
selection]
[Line width minimum
value adjustment]
[Reproduction level
adjustment]
[Maximum text
density]
[Background/Black
density]

1644-0 to 8, 7380-0 to 2
7319-0 to 2, 7320-0 to 2,

1779-0 to 2, 1780-0 to 2,
1781-0 to 2, 1782-0 to 2,
1783-0 to 2, 1784-0 to 2,
1785-0 to 2, 1786-0 to 2,
1787-0 to 2, 1788-0 to 2,
1789-0 to 2, 1790-0 to 2,
1791-0 to 2, 1792-0 to 2,
1793-0 to 2, 1794-0 to 2,
1795-0 to 2, 1796-0 to 2,
1797-0 to 2, 1798-0 to 2,
7980-0 to 2, 7981-0 to 2,
7982-0 to 2, 7983-0 to 2,
8026-0 to 2, 8027-0 to 2,
8028-0 to 2, 8029-0 to 2,
8030-0 to 2, 8031-0 to 2,
8032-0 to 2, 8033-0 to 2,
8034-0 to 2, 8035-0 to 2,
8036-0 to 2, 8037-0 to 2,
8038-0 to 2, 8039-0 to 2,
8040-0 to 2, 8041-0 to 2,
8042-0 to 2, 8043-0 to 2,
8044-0 to 2, 8045-0 to 2,
8046-0 to 2, 8047-0 to 2,
8048-0 to 2, 8049-0 to 2,
8050-0 to 2, 8051-0 to 2,
8052-0 to 2, 8053-0 to 2,
8054-0 to 2, 8055-0 to 2,
8056-0 to 2, 8057-0 to 2,
8058-0 to 2, 8059-0 to 2,
8060-0 to 2, 8061-0 to 2,
8062-0 to 2, 8063-0 to 2,
8064-0 to 2, 8065-0 to 2,
8066, 8150-0 to 2, 8151-0 to 2,
8152-0 to 2, 8153-0 to 2,
8154-0 to 2, 8155-0 to 2,
8156-0 to 2, 8157-0 to 2
580, 1642
590-0 to 2, 591-0 to 2, 592-0 to 2,
880-0 to 2, 881-0 to 2, 882-0 to 2,
883-0 to 2, 949-0 to 2, 1004-0 to 8,
1008, 7315-0 to 2, 7316-0 to 2,
7317-0 to 2, 7318-0 to 2,
7480-0 to 2, 7956-0 to 2,
7957-0 to 2, 7958-0 to 2,
7959-0 to 2
1761
1769-0 to 5
8218
8240

7841

1725
1630, 1631, 1632, 1633
1075, 1076, 1077

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 29

Classification

Adjustment Mode (05)

Given in the Service Manual and
Given in the Service Manual
Service Handbook

[Saturation]

8325, 8326, 8327, 8373

[Background
processing]

1070, 1071, 1072, 1688, 1689,

1690, 1691, 1692, 1698, 1699,
1700, 1701, 1702, 7025, 7033,
7034, 7041, 7042, 7043, 7044,
7048, 7049, 7279, 7280, 7468,
7675, 7676, 7677, 7678, 7679,
7754, 7755, 7756, 7757, 7758,
7759, 7760, 7761, 7762, 7763,
7764, 7765, 7766, 8010-0 to 2,
8011-0 to 2, 8012-0 to 2,
8013-0 to 2, 8014-0 to 2,
8015-0 to 2, 8370, 8385, 8386,
8387, 8389, 8390, 8391, 8392,
8394, 8395, 8400, 8402, 8403,
8404, 8405, 8407, 8408, 8409
604, 605, 606, 840, 841, 842, 843,
922, 1086, 1087, 1088, 1737,
1738, 1739, 1740, 1741, 1757,
7470, 7795, 7807, 7808, 7809,
8110-0 to 2, 8111-0 to 2,
8112-0 to 2, 8113-0 to 2,
8118-0 to 2, 8119-0 to 2, 8375
8176, 8187, 8188

[Sharpness]

Image

[Switchover on
screens]
[Smudged/faint text]

8179, 8190, 8191

648, 649, 925, 7102, 7103, 7340,

7341, 7342, 8130, 8131, 8132
664-0 to 2, 1055-0 to 2
8070-0 to 9, 8071-0 to 9
1050, 1612, 1613, 1614, 1615,
1616, 1617, 1618, 1619, 1620

[Toner saving]
[Toner limit threshold]
[Toner amount]
[Blank page
judgment]
[Background
processing]
[Setting beam level
conversion]
[Image void
correction]
[Margin]
[Range correction]

Color
registration

7618
9104, 9107
672-0 to 4, 678-0 to 4

667-0 to 4

4731-0 to 7, 7489
435, 436, 437, 438

[Color registration
adjustment]

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

430, 431, 432, 433, 434-0 to 5,

7236, 7237, 7283, 7284, 7286,
7287, 7295, 7296, 7416, 7417,
7418, 7419, 7421, 7422, 7423,
7424, 7425, 7426, 7667, 7668,
7669, 7670, 7767, 7768, 7769,
7770, 7771, 7772, 7773, 7774,
7775, 7776, 7777, 7778, 8330,
8331, 8332, 8334, 8361, 8362,
8363, 8365
4719, 4720

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 30

Classification
[Secondary scanning
position fine
adjustment]
[Temperature/
Humidity]
[Color/Black
developer]
[Contrast voltage]
Image control
[Performing]
[Sensor]
[Main charger]
[Laser power]

[ADU motor]
[PFP motor]

Drive system

417-0 to 2

393
386-0 to 3
330-0 to 3, 332-0 to 3, 380-0 to 3,
381-0 to 3, 1800-0 to 3,
1801-0 to 3, 1811-0 to 3,
1812-0 to 3, 1815-0 to 3
392
385-0 to 3
331-0 to 3, 333-0 to 3, 382-0 to 3,
383-0 to 3, 384-0 to 3, 1802-0 to 3,
1803-0 to 3, 1816-0 to 3, 2725,
2726
491-0 to 11
4707-0 to 8

394, 395, 396

388, 389, 390-0 to 3, 391-0 to 3

[TLCF motor]
[Feed/transport
motor]
[Transfer belt motor]
[Drum motor]
[Exit motor]
[Fuser roller]
[Registration motor]

4708-0 to 8

[Aligning amount]

4100-0 to 4, 4101-0 to 4,
4103-0 to 4, 4104-0 to 4,
4105-0 to 4, 4106-0 to 4,
4107-0 to 4, 4108-0 to 4,
4109-0 to 4, 4110-0 to 4, 4111,
4115-0 to 4, 4116-0 to 4,
4117-0 to 4, 4118-0 to 4,
4120-0 to 4, 4122-0 to 4,
4123-0 to 4, 4124-0 to 4,
4125-0 to 4, 4126, 4127-0 to 4,
4128-0 to 4, 4129-0 to 4
467-0 to 4

480

4703, 4704, 4758, 4759

205-0 to 3, 2409-0 to 3, 2411

401, 405
200, 201, 202, 203, 204, 206

Feeding
system

Laser
Developer

Adjustment Mode (05)

Given in the Service Manual and
Given in the Service Manual
Service Handbook

[Paper pushing
amount]
[Polygonal motor]
[Auto-toner]

489-0 to 8
487-0 to 8
481-0 to 8
446-0 to 11
485-0 to 8
483-0 to 8

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 31

Classification
[1st transfer]

[2nd transfer]

Transfer

[Color registration
control]
[Temperature/
humidity]
[Cleaning]
[Bias offset]

Charger
Developer
RADF
Finisher
Maintenance

[Charger grid
calibration]
[Developer]
[Aligning amount]
[Transporting]
[Binding/Folding
position]
[Equipment number]

Adjustment Mode (05)

Given in the Service Manual and
Given in the Service Manual
Service Handbook
2900-0 to 11, 2905-0 to 11,
2981-0 to 1, 2985-0 to 1,
2986-0 to 1, 2987-0 to 1,
2988-0 to 1, 2920-0 to 11,
2921-0 to 11
2924-0 to 8, 2925-0 to 8,
2926-0 to 8, 2927-0 to 8,
2983-0 to 1, 2984-0 to 1
4789
247, 270
2961-0 to 1, 2962-0 to 1,
2963-0 to 1, 2966-0 to 1
2934-0 to 8, 2935-0 to 8,
2936-0 to 8, 2937-0 to 8,
2938-0 to 8, 2939-0 to 8,
2940-0 to 8, 2941-0 to 8
248, 2622-0 to 1, 2623-0 to 1,
2624-0 to 1, 2625-0 to 1, 2764
2627-0 to 1, 2628-0 to 1,
2629-0 to 1, 2630-0 to 1
354, 355
357, 358, 365, 366
468-0 to 2
976

[Maintenance]

4721

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 32

2.5.2

Operating Procedure

Procedure 1
[0][5]
[POWER]

[Digital key]
(Code)

[Digital key]
*[FUNCTION CLEAR]
(Key in a value)

[START]

[FAX]
[ENTER]
or
[START]
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM) (Test copy)

[CANCEL]

[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)

[CLEAR] *Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).

(Corrects value)

Procedure 2

[0][5]
[POWER]

[Digital key]
(Code)

[START]

[Digital key]
(Code)

[START]

Value
displayed

[ENTER]
([FAX] [START])
or
(Test copy)
[INTERRUPT]
(Value unchangeable)

[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)

Procedure 3

[0][5]
[POWER]

[UP]
or
[DOWN]
(Adjust a value)

[ENTER]
([FAX] [START])
or
(Test copy)
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)

[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)

[CANCEL]
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)

Procedure 4
[CANCEL]
[0][5]
[POWER]

[Digital key]
(Code)

[START]

[START]
([FAX]
[ENTER]
or
[START] [Digital key]
[POWER]
[INTERRUPT]
OFF/ON
[START])
*[FUNCTION CLEAR]
Stores value
(Exit)
(Key in a value)
(Test
copy)
in RAM
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
*Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).

[Digital key]
(Sub code)

Procedure 5
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
[0][5]
[POWER]

[Digital key]
(Code)

[START]

[ENTER]
or
[INTERRUPT]
Stores value
in RAM

Automatic
adjustment

[FAX]
[START]
(Test copy)

[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)

Procedure 6
[0][5]
[POWER]

[Digital key]
(Code)

[START]

Automatic
adjustment

[FAX] [COPY])
(Test copy)

[POWER]OFF/ON
(Exit)

*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]

*
*

When the automatic adjustment ends abnormally, an error message is

displayed.
Return to standby screen by pressing the [CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
button.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 33

Procedure 7
[CANCEL]
[Digital key]
[Digital key]
[0][5]
[START]
(Code)
(Sub code)
[POWER]

[START]

[ENTER]
Stores value
in RAM

Automatic
adjustment

[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)

[FAX]
[START]
(Test copy)

[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)

*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]

*
*

When the automatic adjustment ends abnormally, an error message is

displayed.
Return to standby screen by pressing the [CANCEL] or [CLEAR] button.

Procedure 10
[Digital key]
(Code)

[0][5]
[POWER]

[START]

[Digital key]
(Sub code)

[START]

Value
displayed

[START]

[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT]
(Value unchangeable)

[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)

Procedure 14
[0][5]
[POWER]

[Digital key]
(Code)

[START]

[Digital key]
(Sub code)

[START]

[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)

[ENTER]
or
[INTERRUPT]
Stores value
in RAM
[CANCEL]
(Corrects value)

[UP] or [DOWN]
(Adjust a value)

[FAX]
[START]
(Test copy)

[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)

Note:
The fuser roller temperature control at the adjustment mode is different from that at the normal
state.
Therefore, the problem of fusing efficiency may be occurred in the test copy at the adjustment
mode.
In that case, turn ON the power normally, leave the equipment for approx. 3 minutes after it has
become ready state and then start up the adjustment mode again.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 34

2.5.3

Test print pattern in Adjustment Mode (05)

Operation:
One test print is printed out when the [FAX] button is pressed after the code is keyed in at Standby
Screen.
Code

Types of test pattern

Remarks

Grid pattern (Black)

For printer related adjustment

Grid pattern (Black/Duplex printing)

Refer to 3.1.8Image dimensional adjustment at the

printing section

Copier gamma adjustment pattern

(Color & black integrated / All media types)

Refer to 3.2.1Automatic gamma adjustment

Copier gamma adjustment pattern

(Color / All media types)

Refer to 3.2.1Automatic gamma adjustment

Copier gamma confirmation pattern

(Black / All media types)

Refer to 3.2.1Automatic gamma adjustment

Copier gamma confirmation pattern

(Color / All media types)

Refer to 3.2.1Automatic gamma adjustment

Grid pattern (Color)

10

Copier gamma adjustment pattern

(Black / All media types)

Refer to 3.2.1Automatic gamma adjustment

12

Secondary scanning direction 33 gradation

steps (Y)

For checking the image of printer section

13

Secondary scanning direction 33 gradation

steps (M)

For checking the image of printer section

14

Secondary scanning direction 33 gradation

steps (C)

For checking the image of printer section

15

Secondary scanning direction 33 gradation

steps (K)

For checking the image of printer section

55

Grid pattern (Full Color / Thick paper 2)

Refer to 3.1.7Paper alignment at the registration

roller

56

Grid pattern (Full Color / Thick paper 3)

Refer to 3.1.7Paper alignment at the registration

roller

57

Grid pattern (Full Color / OHP)

Refer to 3.1.7Paper alignment at the registration

roller

58

Grid pattern (Black / Thick paper 2)

Refer to 3.1.7Paper alignment at the registration

roller

59

Grid pattern (Black / Thick paper 3)

Refer to 3.1.7Paper alignment at the registration

roller

60

Grid pattern (Black / OHP)

Refer to 3.1.7Paper alignment at the registration

roller

63

For color deviation correction (Full Color)

Only for A3/LD size

70

Printer gamma correction table creation pattern

(Plain paper)

Refer to 3.3.1Automatic gamma adjustment

71

Printer gamma correction table confirmation

pattern
(Plain paper)

Refer to 3.3.1Automatic gamma adjustment

74

Printer gamma correction table creation pattern

Refer to 3.3.1Automatic gamma adjustment

75

Printer gamma correction table confirmation

pattern
(Recycled paper)

Refer to 3.3.1Automatic gamma adjustment

76

Printer gamma correction table creation pattern

(Thick paper 1)

Refer to 3.3.1Automatic gamma adjustment

77

Printer gamma correction table confirmation

pattern
(Thick paper 1)

Refer to 3.3.1Automatic gamma adjustment

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 35

Code

Types of test pattern

Remarks

78

Printer gamma correction table creation pattern

(Thick paper 2)

Refer to 3.3.1Automatic gamma adjustment

79

Printer gamma correction table confirmation

pattern
(Thick paper 2)

Refer to 3.3.1Automatic gamma adjustment

80

Printer gamma correction table creation pattern

(Thick paper 3)

Refer to 3.3.1Automatic gamma adjustment

81

Printer gamma correction table confirmation

pattern
(Thick paper 3)

Refer to 3.3.1Automatic gamma adjustment

82

Printer gamma correction table creation pattern

(Thick paper 4)

Refer to 3.3.1Automatic gamma adjustment

83

Printer gamma correction table confirmation

pattern
(Thick paper 4)

Refer to 3.3.1Automatic gamma adjustment

84

Printer gamma correction table creation pattern

(Special paper 1)

Refer to 3.3.1Automatic gamma adjustment

85

Printer gamma correction table confirmation

pattern
(Special paper 1)

Refer to 3.3.1Automatic gamma adjustment

86

Printer gamma correction table creation pattern

(Special paper 2)

Refer to 3.3.1Automatic gamma adjustment

87

Printer gamma correction table confirmation

pattern
(Special paper 2)

Refer to 3.3.1Automatic gamma adjustment

98

Grid pattern -2 (For printing K(4) / Plain paper)

Refer to 3.1.8Image dimensional adjustment at the

printing section

99

Grid pattern -2 (For printing K(4) / Thick paper

1)

100

Grid pattern - 1 (Full color / Thick paper 1)

101

Grid pattern - 1 (Black / Thick paper 1)

104

Color deviation confirmation pattern (A3/LD)

111

Field curvature deviation confirmation pattern

For secondary scanning position fine adjustment

200

Copier gamma adjustment pattern

(Color & black integrated / Plain paper)

Refer to 3.2.1Automatic gamma adjustment

201

Copier gamma confirmation pattern

(Color / Plain paper)

Refer to 3.2.1Automatic gamma adjustment

204

Copier gamma adjustment pattern

(Color & black integrated / Recycled paper)

Refer to 3.2.1Automatic gamma adjustment

205

Copier gamma confirmation pattern

(Color / Recycled paper)

Refer to 3.2.1Automatic gamma adjustment

206

Copier gamma adjustment pattern

(Color & black integrated / Thick paper 1)

Refer to 3.2.1Automatic gamma adjustment

207

Copier gamma confirmation pattern

(Color / Thick paper 1)

Refer to 3.2.1Automatic gamma adjustment

208

Copier gamma adjustment pattern

(Color & black integrated / Thick paper 2)

Refer to 3.2.1Automatic gamma adjustment

209

Copier gamma confirmation pattern

(Color / Thick paper 2)

Refer to 3.2.1Automatic gamma adjustment

210

Copier gamma adjustment pattern

(Color & black integrated / Thick paper 3)

Refer to 3.2.1Automatic gamma adjustment

211

Copier gamma confirmation pattern

(Color / Thick paper 3)

Refer to 3.2.1Automatic gamma adjustment

212

Copier gamma adjustment pattern

(Color & black integrated / Thick paper 4)

Refer to 3.2.1Automatic gamma adjustment

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 36

Code

Types of test pattern

Remarks

213

Copier gamma confirmation pattern

(Color / Thick paper 4)

Refer to 3.2.1Automatic gamma adjustment

214

Copier gamma adjustment pattern

(Color & black integrated / Special paper 1)

Refer to 3.2.1Automatic gamma adjustment

215

Copier gamma confirmation pattern

(Color / Special paper 1)

Refer to 3.2.1Automatic gamma adjustment

216

Copier gamma adjustment pattern

(Color & black integrated / Special paper 2)

Refer to 3.2.1Automatic gamma adjustment

217

Copier gamma confirmation pattern

(Color / Special paper 2)

Refer to 3.2.1Automatic gamma adjustment

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 37

2.5.4

Code
200
201
202
203
204

206
388

Process
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Classific
Functi <Accept
Items
ation
on
able
value>
All
ALL
Develop Initialization of
(Y,M,C,K)
<0-255>
ment
color autotoner sensor
Y
ALL
light amount
<0-255>
correction
M
ALL
target value
<0-255>
C
ALL
<0-255>
K
ALL
<0-255>

Develop
ment
Image
control

389

390-0

390-1

390-2

390-3

391-0

Image
control

391-1

391-2

391-3

394

Image
control

395

Image
control

396

Image
control

Initialization of auto-toner

ALL

Output value
display of
image quality
sensor

When the
light
source is
OFF
Transfer
belt
surface

ALL

High
density
pattern Y
High
density
pattern M
High
density
pattern C
High
density
pattern K
Low
Output value
display of
density
image quality pattern Y
sensor
Low
density
pattern M
Low
density
pattern C
Low
density
pattern K
Enforced performing of
image quality open-loop
control
Enforced performing of
image quality color closedloop control
Image quality control
initialization

RAM

Contents

The value starts

changing approx. 3
minutes after this
adjustment started.
The value is
automatically set during
this adjustment
(approx. 2 minutes).
(As the value increases,
the sensor output
increases
correspondingly.)
Ch.3.1.2

M
M
M
M

<0-255>
0
<0-1023>

ALL

0
<0-1023>

ALL

0
<0-1023>

ALL

0
<0-1023>

ALL

0
<0-1023>

ALL

0
<0-1023>

ALL

0
<0-1023>

ALL

0
<0-1023>

ALL

0
<0-1023>

ALL

0
<0-1023>

ALL

ALL

ALL

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Proce
dure
5
5
5
5
5

5
Displays the output
value of image quality
sensor when the sensor
light source is OFF.
Displays the output
value of image quality
sensor (when there is
no test pattern) on the
transfer belt.
Displays the output
value of image quality
sensor when a highdensity test pattern is
written.
The larger the value is,
the smaller the toner
amount adhered
becomes.

10

10

10

10

Displays the output

value of image quality
sensor when a lowdensity test pattern is
written.
The larger the value is,
the smaller the toner
amount adhered
becomes.

10

10

10

10

Performs the image

quality open-loop
control.
Performs the image
quality closedloop
control.
Performs the image
quality control, initialize
each control value.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 38

2.5.5

Code
503
504
505
507

508
510

514
515
580

590-0

Image Processing
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Classific
Functi <Accept
Items
ation
on
able
value>
Text/Photo PPC
128
Image
Density
(black) <0-255>
adjustment
Manual
Text
PPC
128
adjustment /
(black) <0-255>
Center value
Image
Density
Text/Photo PPC
20
adjustment
(black) <0-255>
Manual
Text
PPC
20
adjustment /
(black) <0-255>
Light step
value
Text/Photo PPC
20
Image
Density
(black) <0-255>
adjustment
Manual
Text
PPC
20
adjustment /
(black) <0-255>
Dark step
value
Image
Density
Text/Photo PPC
128
adjustment
(black) <0-255>
Automatic
Text
PPC
128
adjustment
(black) <0-255>
Image
Automatic
All media
PPC
gamma
types
(black)
adjustment
(Black)

Image

590-1

Gamma
balance
adjustment
(Text/Photo)

590-2
591-0

Image

591-1

Gamma
balance
adjustment
(Text)

591-2
592-0
592-1
592-2

Image

Gamma
balance
adjustment
(Photo)

Low
density
Medium
density
High
density
Low
density
Medium
density
High
density
Low
density
Medium
density
High
density

PPC
(black)
PPC
(black)
PPC
(black)
PPC
(black)
PPC
(black)
PPC
(black)
PPC
(black)
PPC
(black)
PPC
(black)

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>

Proce
dure

RAM

Contents

SYS

The larger the value is,

the darker the image at
the center value
becomes.

The larger the value is,

the lighter the image of
the light step
becomes.

The larger the value is,

the darker the image of
the dark step
becomes.

The larger the value is,

the darker the image
becomes.

SYS
SYS
SYS

SYS
SYS

SYS
SYS
-

SYS
SYS
SYS

When color
deviation is found in
gradation
reproduction, the
gradation
reproduction of
color K can be
corrected with the
automatic gamma
adjustment.
The result of the
correction above will
be applied to all
media types.
The larger the value is,
the darker the image of
the area surrounding
the target area
becomes.

4
4
4

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 39

Code
604
605
606
648

Adjustment mode (05)

Default
Functi <Accept
Classific
Items
on
able
ation
value>
Text/Photo PPC
128
Image
Sharpness
(black) <0-255>
adjustment
(Black)
Text
PPC
128
(black) <0-255>
Photo
PPC
128
(black) <0-255>
Image

649
664-0

Image

664-1
664-2
667-0

Image

667-1

Smudged/
faint text
adjustment
Upper limit
value in toner
saving mode
(Black / 600
dpi)
Setting beam
level
conversion

667-2
667-3
667-4
700

Image

710

Image

Density
adjustment
Manual
adjustment /
Center value

714
725

Text
PS
PCL
XPS
Beam
level 0/4
Beam
level 1/4
Beam
level 2/4
Beam
level 3/4
Beam
level 4/4
Text

Photo
Text/Photo

Image

729
840

Text/Photo

Image

841

Density
adjustment
Automatic
adjustment
Sharpness
adjustment
(Black)

Text
Text/Photo
Text/Photo
Text

842

Photo

843

Image
smoothing
Text/Photo

845
846
847
848

Image

Density
adjustment
Manual
adjustment /
Center value

Text
Photo
Image
smoothing

PPC
(black)
PPC
(black)
PRT
(black)
PRT
(black)
PRT
(black)
PPC
(black)
PPC
(black)
PPC
(black)
PPC
(black)
PPC
(black)
FAX
(black)

2
<0-4>
2
<0-4>
176
<0-255>
176
<0-255>
176
<0-255>
0
<0-255>
63
<0-255>
127
<0-255>
191
<0-255>
255
<0-255>
128
<0-255>

FAX
(black)
FAX
(black)
FAX
(black)
FAX
(black)
SCN
(black)
SCN
(black)
SCN
(black)
SCN
(black)
SCN
(black)
SCN
(black)
SCN
(black)
SCN
(black)

128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

RAM

Contents

SYS

The larger the value is,

the sharper the image
becomes.
The smaller the value
is, the softer the image
becomes and the less
moire appears.
0: Faint text is
suppressed most.
4: Smudged text is
suppressed most.

SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS

The smaller the value

is, the lighter the printed
image becomes.

SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS

Proce
dure
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
4

The smaller the value

is, the narrower the
beam width becomes
and the smaller the dots
are reproduced.

4
4
4

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS

The larger the value is,

the lighter the image at
the center value
becomes.
The larger the value is,
the darker the image at
the center value
becomes.

SYS

1
1

The larger the value is,

the darker the image
becomes.

The larger the value is,

the sharper the image
becomes. The smaller
the value is, the softer
the image becomes and
the less moire appears.

SYS
SYS

1
1
1

The larger the value is,

the darker the image of
the center value
becomes.

1
1

SYS

SYS

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 40

Code
860
861
862
863
880-0
880-1
880-2
881-0
881-1
881-2
882-0
882-1
882-2
883-0
883-1
883-2
922

Adjustment mode (05)

Default
Classific
Functi <Accept
Items
ation
on
able
value>
Image
Density
Text/Photo SCN
128
adjustment
(black) <0-255>
Automatic
Text
SCN
128
adjustment
(black) <0-255>
Photo
SCN
128
(black) <0-255>
Image
SCN
128
smoothing (black) <0-255>
Image
Gamma
Low
SCN
128
balance
density
(black) <0-255>
adjustment
Medium
SCN
128
(Text/Photo)
density
(black) <0-255>
High
SCN
128
density
(black) <0-255>
Image
Gamma
Low
SCN
128
balance
density
(black) <0-255>
adjustment
Medium
SCN
128
(Text)
density
(black) <0-255>
High
SCN
128
density
(black) <0-255>
Image
Gamma
Low
SCN
128
balance
density
(black) <0-255>
adjustment
Medium
SCN
128
(Photo)
density
(black) <0-255>
128
High
SCN
density
(black) <0-255>
Low
SCN
128
Image
Gamma
density
(black) <0-255>
balance
adjustment
Medium
SCN
128
(Image
density
(black) <0-255>
smoothing)
High
SCN
128
density
(black) <0-255>
User
PPC
128
Image
Sharpness
custom
(black) <0-255>
adjustment
(Black)

RAM
SYS
SYS

Contents
When the value
increases, the image
becomes darker.

Proce
dure
1
1

SYS

SYS

SYS
SYS
SYS

The larger the value is,

the darker the image of
the area surrounding
the target area
becomes.

4
4
4

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS

The larger the value is,

the darker the image of
the area surrounding
the target area
becomes.

4
4
4

The larger the value is,

the sharper the image
becomes. The smaller
the value is, the softer
the image becomes and
the less moire appears.
0: Faint text is
suppressed most.
4: Smudged text is
suppressed most.
The larger the value is,
the darker the image of
the center value
becomes.

925

Image

Smudged/
faint text
adjustment

User
custom

PPC
(black)

2
<0-4>

SYS

931

Image

User
custom

PPC
(black)

128
<0-255>

SYS

934

Image

User
custom

PPC
(black)

20
<0-255>

SYS

The larger the value is,

the lighter the image of
the light step
becomes.

937

Image

Density
adjustment
Manual
adjustment/
Center value
Density
adjustment
Manual
adjustment/
Light step
value
Density
adjustment
Manual
adjustment/
Dark step
value

User
custom

PPC
(black)

20
<0-255>

SYS

The larger the value is,

the darker the image of
the dark step
becomes.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 41

Code
940

949-0
949-1
949-2
1004-0
1004-2
1004-3
1004-4
1004-5
1004-6
1004-7
1004-8
1008

Adjustment mode (05)

Default
Classific
Functi <Accept
Items
able
ation
on
value>
Image
Density
User
PPC
128
adjustment
custom
(black) <0-255>
Automatic
adjustment
Image
Gamma
Low
PPC
128
balance
density
(black) <0-255>
adjustment
Medium
PPC
128
(User custom)
density
(black) <0-255>
High
PPC
128
density
(black) <0-255>
Plain
PRT
Image
Automatic
paper
(color)
gamma
adjustment
Recycled
PRT
paper
(color)
Thick
PRT
paper 1
(color)
Thick
PRT
paper 2
(color)
Thick
PRT
paper 3
(color)
Thick
PRT
paper 4
(color)
Special
PRT
paper 1
(color)
Special
PRT
paper 2
(color)
Image
All media
PRT
types
(color)

Contents

SYS

The larger the value is,

the darker the image
becomes.

SYS

The larger the value is,

the darker the image of
the target area
becomes.

SYS
SYS
SYS

SYS
SYS

SYS
SYS

Maximum toner density

adjustment to OHP film
(600 dpi)

PRT
(color)

200
<0-255>

SYS

1055-0

Image

Upper limit
value in toner
saving mode
(Color / 600
dpi)

PS

PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
SCN
(color)
SCN
(color)
SCN
(color)

176
<0-255>
176
<0-255>
176
<0-255>
50
<0-50>
50
<0-50>
50
<0-50>

SYS

1055-2
1070
1071
1072

Image

Background
adjustment

XPS
Text
Printed
image
Photo

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

When color
deviation is found in
gradation
reproduction, the
gradation
reproduction of 4
colors can be
corrected with the
automatic gamma
adjustment.
The result of the
correction above will
be applied for each
media type.

SYS

Image

PCL

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS
SYS

7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7

When color
deviation is found in
gradation
reproduction, the
gradation
reproduction of 4
colors can be
corrected with the
automatic gamma
adjustment.
The result of the
correction above will
be applied to all
media types.
The larger the value is,
the darker the image
becomes. The smaller
the value is, the lighter
the image becomes.
* Image offset may
occur if the value is
too large.
The smaller the value
is, the lighter the printed
image becomes.

SYS
SYS

4
4

SYS

1050

1055-1

Proce
dure

RAM

4
4
4

The smaller the value

is, the lighter the
background becomes.

1
1
1

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 42

Code
1075
1076
1077
1080
1081
1082
1086

Adjustment mode (05)

Default
Functi <Accept
Classific
Items
on
able
ation
value>
Text
SCN
0
Image
Fine
(color)
<0-4>
adjustment of
black density
Printed
SCN
0
image
(color)
<0-4>
Photo
SCN
0
(color)
<0-4>
Image
RGB
Text
SCN
0
conversion
(color)
<0-3>
method
Printed
SCN
0
selection
image
(color)
<0-3>
Photo
SCN
0
(color)
<0-3>
Image

1087

Sharpness
adjustment
(Full color)

1088
1585

Image

1586
1587

Density
adjustment
Automatic/
Manual
adjustment/
Center value

Text
Printed
image
Photo
Text/Photo
Text

1588

Printed
image
Photo

1589

Map

1612

Image

1613

Maximum
toner density
adjustment to
paper type

1614
1615
1616
1617
1618
1619
1620
1630
1631

Image

Maximum text
density
adjustment

Plain
paper
Thick
paper 1
Thick
paper 2
Thick
paper 3
OHP film
Special
paper 1
Special
paper 2
Recycled
paper
Thick
paper 4
Y
M

1632

1633

SCN
(color)
SCN
(color)
SCN
(color)
PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
255
<0-255>
255
<0-255>
255
<0-255>
255
<0-255>
240
<0-255>
255
<0-255>
255
<0-255>
255
<0-255>
255
<0-255>
5
<0-10>
5
<0-10>
5
<0-10>
5
<0-10>

RAM

Contents

SYS

The larger the value is,

the darker the black
side of the image
becomes.

SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS

Proce
dure
1
1
1

Sets the color space

format of the output
image.
0: sRGB
1: AppleRGB
2: ROMMRGB
3: AdobeRGB
The larger the value is,
the sharper the image
becomes. The smaller
the value is, the softer
the image becomes and
the less moire appears.

The larger the value is,

the darker the image
becomes.

1
1
1
1
1

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS
SYS
SYS

The smaller the value

is, the less toner is
adhered to the highdensity section of the
image.

1
1
1

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS
SYS

The larger the value is,

the darker the text
becomes.

1
1

SYS

SYS

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 43

Code
1642

Adjustment mode (05)

Default
Classific
Functi <Accept
Items
ation
able
on
value>
Image
Automatic
All media
PPC
gamma
types
(color)
adjustment
(Color / Black)

1675

Image

ACS judgment threshold

1688

Image

Background
adjustment
(Full color /
Automatic
density
adjustment)

1689
1690

Text/Photo
Text

1691

Printed
image
Photo

1692

Map

1698
1699
1700

Image

Background
adjustment
(Full color /
Manual
density
adjustment)

Text/Photo
Text

1701

Printed
image
Photo

1702

Map

RAM
SYS

PPC/
SCN

70
<0-255>

SYS

PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)

128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>

SYS

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

SYS

Contents

When color
deviation is found in
gradation
reproduction, the
gradation
reproduction of 4
colors can be
corrected with the
automatic gamma
adjustment.
The result of the
correction above will
be applied to all
media types.
The larger the value is,
the more an original
tends to be judged as
black even at the auto
color mode. The
smaller value is, the
more it tends to be
judged as color.
The larger the value is,
the lighter the
background becomes.

Proce
dure
7

1
1

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS
SYS

The larger the value is,

the lighter the
background becomes.

1
1

SYS

SYS

SYS

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 44

Code
1725

1737

Adjustment mode (05)

Default
Classific
Functi <Accept
Items
able
ation
on
value>
Text/Photo PPC
0
Image
Text/Photo
(color)
<0-5>
reproduction
level
adjustment
(Text/Photo
reproduction)

Image

1738

Sharpness
adjustment
(Full color)

1739

Text/Photo
Text

1740

Printed
image
Photo

1741

Map

1757

Image

Sharpness
adjustment
(Auto color)

1761

Image

1769-0

Image

Black reproduction level

switchover in twin color
copy mode
Marker color
Yellow
adjustment
Magenta

1769-1

Text/Photo

1769-2

Cyan

1769-3

Red

1769-4

Green

1769-5

Blue

RAM

Contents

SYS

0: Default
1: Photo-oriented 2
(The reproduction
level of printed
image is higher than
that of the Photooriented 1)
2: Photo-oriented 1
(The reproduction
level of printed
image is higher than
that of the default
setting)
3: Equivalent to the
default setting
4: Text-oriented 1 (The
reproduction level of
text is higher than
that of the default
setting)
5: Text-oriented 2 (The
reproduction level of
text is higher than
that of text-oriented
1)
The larger the value is,
the sharper the image
becomes. The smaller
the value is, the softer
the image becomes and
the less moire appears.

PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)

128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>

PPC
(color)

0
<0-1>

SYS

PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)

3
<0-6>
3
<0-6>
3
<0-6>
3
<0-6>
3
<0-6>
3
<0-6>

SYS

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

SYS
SYS
SYS

Proce
dure
1

1
1
1

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS
SYS

The larger the value is,

the sharper the image
becomes. The smaller
the value is, the softer
the image becomes and
the less moire appears.
0: Default
1: Black reproduction
level is higher
The color of the onetouch adjustment
Marker can be
adjusted.
P.3-38 "3.2.10 Color
Adjustment of Marker"

4
4
4

SYS

SYS

SYS

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 45

Code

Classific
ation

1779-0

Image

1779-1

Items
Color balance
adjustment for
Y (Text/
Photo)

1779-2
1780-0

Image

1780-1

Color balance
adjustment for
Y (Text)

1780-2
1781-0

Image

1781-1

Color balance
adjustment for
Y (Printed
image)

1781-2
1782-0

Image

1782-1

Color balance
adjustment for
Y (Photo)

1782-2
1783-0
1783-1
1783-2

Image

Color balance
adjustment for
Y (Map)

Adjustment mode (05)

Default
Functi <Accept
on
able
value>
L
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
M
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
H
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
L
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
M
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
H
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
L
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
M
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
H
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
L
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
M
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
H
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
L
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
M
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
H
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

RAM
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS

Contents
The target color, mode
and density area
become darker as the
value increases.
L: Low density area
M: Medium density
area
H: High density area

Proce
dure
4
4
4
4

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 46

Code

Classific
ation

1784-0

Image

1784-1

Items
Color balance
adjustment for
M (Text/
Photo)

1784-2
1785-0

Image

1785-1

Color balance
adjustment for
M (Text)

1785-2
1786-0

Image

1786-1

Color balance
adjustment for
M (Printed
image)

1786-2
1787-0

Image

1787-1

Color balance
adjustment for
M (Photo)

1787-2
1788-0

Image

1788-1

Color balance
adjustment for
M (Map)

1788-2
1789-0

Image

1789-1

Color balance
adjustment for
C (Text/
Photo)

1789-2
1790-0

Image

1790-1

Color balance
adjustment for
C (Text)

1790-2
1791-0

Image

1791-1

Color balance
adjustment for
C (Printed
image)

1791-2
1792-0
1792-1
1792-2

Image

Color balance
adjustment for
C (Photo)

Adjustment mode (05)

Default
Functi <Accept
able
on
value>
L
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
M
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
H
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
L
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
M
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
H
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
L
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
M
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
H
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
L
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
M
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
H
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
L
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
M
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
H
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
L
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
M
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
H
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
L
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
M
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
H
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
L
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
M
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
H
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
L
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
M
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
H
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

RAM

Contents

SYS

The target color, mode

and density area
become darker as the
value increases.
L: Low density area
M: Medium density
area
H: High density area

SYS
SYS
SYS

Proce
dure
4
4
4
4

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 47

Code
1793-0
1793-1
1793-2
1794-0
1794-1
1794-2
1795-0
1795-1
1795-2
1796-0
1796-1
1796-2
1797-0
1797-1
1797-2
1798-0
1798-1
1798-2
7025

Adjustment mode (05)

Default
Classific
Functi <Accept
Items
able
ation
on
value>
L
PPC
128
Image
Color balance
(color) <0-255>
adjustment for
C (Map)
M
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
H
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
L
PPC
128
Image
Color balance
adjustment for
(color) <0-255>
K (Text/
M
PPC
128
Photo)
(color) <0-255>
H
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
L
PPC
128
Image
Color balance
(color) <0-255>
adjustment for
K (Text)
M
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
H
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
Image
Color balance
L
PPC
128
adjustment for
(color) <0-255>
K (Printed
M
PPC
128
image)
(color) <0-255>
H
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
L
PPC
128
Image
Color balance
(color) <0-255>
adjustment for
K (Photo)
M
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
H
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
Image
Color balance
L
PPC
128
adjustment for
(color) <0-255>
K (Map)
M
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
H
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
Image
Background
Text/Photo PPC
128
offset
(black) <0-255>
Text
adjustment for
User
ADF
custom
mode

7033

Image

7034

Image

7041

Image

7042

Image

Background
adjustment
(Black /
Automatic
density
adjustment)
Background
adjustment
(Black /
Manual
density
adjustment)

Text/Photo
Text

Text/Photo
Text

PPC
(black)
PPC
(black)

128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>

PPC
(black)
PPC
(black)

128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

RAM

Contents

SYS

The target color, mode

and density area
become darker as the
value increases.
L: Low density area
M: Medium density
area
H: High density area

SYS
SYS
SYS

Proce
dure
4
4
4
4

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS
SYS

The larger the

adjustment value is, the
lighter the background
becomes. The smaller
the adjustment value is,
the darker the
background becomes.
The larger the value is,
the lighter the
background becomes.

1
1

SYS

SYS

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 48

Code
7043
7044

7048
7049

7102
7103
7236

7237

7279

7280

7283
7284

7286
7287

Adjustment mode (05)

Default
Classific
Functi <Accept
Items
ation
on
able
value>
Photo
PPC
128
Image
Background
(black) <0-255>
adjustment
(Black /
Image
Image
PPC
128
Automatic
smoothing (black) <0-255>
density
adjustment)
Image
Background
Photo
PPC
128
adjustment
(black) <0-255>
(Black /
Image
Image
PPC
128
Manual
smoothing (black) <0-255>
density
adjustment)
Text/Photo PPC
2
Image
Smudged/
(black)
<0-4>
faint text
adjustment
Image
Text
PPC
2
(Auto color &
(black)
<0-4>
black)
User
PPC
1
Image
Range
custom
(black)
<0-1>
correction
adjustment
(Black /
Automatic
density
adjustment)
User
PPC
1
Image
Range
custom
(black)
<0-1>
correction
adjustment
(Black /
Manual
density
adjustment)
Image
Background
User
PPC
128
adjustment
custom
(black) <0-255>
(Black /
Automatic
density
adjustment)
User
PPC
Image
Background
128
custom
(black) <0-255>
adjustment
(Black /
Manual
density
adjustment)
Text/Photo PPC
1
Image
Range
(black)
<0-1>
correction
adjustment
Image
Text
PPC
1
(Black /
(black)
<0-1>
Automatic
density
adjustment)
Text/Photo PPC
1
Image
Range
(black)
<0-1>
correction
adjustment
Image
Text
PPC
1
(Black /
(black)
<0-1>
Manual
density
adjustment)

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

RAM

Contents

SYS

The larger the value is,

the lighter the
background becomes.

SYS

Proce
dure
1
1

SYS

SYS

SYS
SYS
SYS

0: Faint text is
suppressed most.
4: Smudged text is
suppressed most.

0: Background peak Fixed

1: Background peak Varied

SYS

SYS

The larger the value is,

the lighter the
background becomes.

SYS

SYS
SYS

SYS
SYS

0: Background peak Fixed

1: Background peak Varied

0: Background peak Fixed

1: Background peak Varied

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 49

Code
7295

7296

7315-0
7315-1
7315-2

7316-0

Adjustment mode (05)

Default
Classific
Functi <Accept
Items
able
ation
on
value>
Image
PPC
1
Image
Range
smoothing (black)
<0-1>
correction
adjustment
(Automatic
density
adjustment)
Image
Range
Image
PPC
0
correction
smoothing (black)
<0-1>
adjustment
(Manual
density
adjustment)
L
PRT
128
Image
Gamma
(black) <0-255>
balance
adjustment
M
PRT
128
(PS / Smooth
(black) <0-255>
/ 600dpi)
H
PRT
128
(black) <0-255>
Image

7316-1
7316-2

7317-0

Image

7317-1
7317-2

7318-0

Image

7318-1
7318-2

7322-0

Image

7322-1

Gamma
balance
adjustment
(PS / Detail /
600dpi)

7341
7342

M
H

Gamma
balance
adjustment
(PCL /
Smooth /
600dpi)

L
M
H

Gamma
balance
adjustment
(PCL / Detail /
600dpi)

Fine line
enhancement
switchover
(e-BRIDGE)

7322-2

7340

M
H

PS
PCL
XPS

Image

Smudged/
faint text
adjustment

PS
PCL
XPS

RAM

Proce
dure

SYS

0: Background peak Fixed

1: Background peak Varied

SYS

0: Background peak Fixed

1: Background peak Varied

SYS

When the value

increases, the density
in the target area
becomes higher.
L: Low density area
M: Medium density
area
H: High density area
When the value
increases, the density
in the target area
becomes higher.
L: Low density area
M: Medium density
area
H: High density area
When the value
increases, the density
in the target area
becomes higher.
L: Low density area
M: Medium density
area
H: High density area
When the value
increases, the density
in the target area
becomes higher.
L: Low density area
M: Medium density
area
H: High density area
Sets whether or not fine
line enhancement is
enabled in the printer
function. Use this code
in cases such as fine
lines being excessively
emphasized.
0: OFF
1: ON
The larger the value is,
the darker the small text
and fine lines become
and the more faint text
is suppressed.

SYS
SYS

PRT
(black)
PRT
(black)
PRT
(black)

128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>

PRT
(black)
PRT
(black)
PRT
(black)

128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>

SYS

PRT
(black)
PRT
(black)
PRT
(black)

128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>

SYS

PRT
(black)
PRT
(black)
PRT
(black)

1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>

SYS

PRT
(black)
PRT
(black)
PRT
(black)

0
<0-8>
0
<0-8>
0
<0-8>

SYS

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Contents

SYS
SYS
SYS

SYS
SYS

SYS
SYS

SYS
SYS

SYS
SYS

4
4

4
4
4

4
4
4

4
4
4

4
4
4

1
1
1

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 50

Code
7416
7417
7418
7419
7421
7422
7423
7424
7425

7426

7468

Adjustment mode (05)

Default
Classific
Functi <Accept
Items
able
ation
on
value>
Text/Photo SCN
1
Image
Range
(black)
<0-1>
correction
adjustment
Text
SCN
1
(Black /
(black)
<0-1>
Automatic
Photo
SCN
1
density
(black)
<0-1>
adjustment)
Image
SCN
1
smoothing (black)
<0-1>
Text/Photo SCN
0
Image
Range
(black)
<0-1>
correction
adjustment
Text
SCN
0
(Black /
(black)
<0-1>
Manual
Photo
SCN
0
density
(black)
<0-1>
adjustment)
Image
SCN
0
smoothing (black)
<0-1>
User
SCN
1
Image
Range
custom
(black)
<0-1>
correction
adjustment
(Black /
Automatic
density
adjustment)
User
SCN
0
Image
Range
custom
(black)
<0-1>
correction
adjustment
(Black /
Manual
density
adjustment)
Image
Background offset
SCN
128
adjustment for ADF
(black) <0-255>

RAM
SYS
SYS

Contents
0: Background peak Fixed
1: Background peak Varied

Proce
dure
1
1

SYS

SYS

SYS
SYS

0: Background peak Fixed

1: Background peak Varied

1
1

SYS

SYS

SYS

0: Background peak Fixed

1: Background peak Varied

SYS

SYS

The larger the value is,

the lighter the
background becomes.
The larger the value is,
the sharper the image
becomes. The smaller
the value is, the softer
the image becomes and
the less moire appears.
The larger the value is,
the darker the image at
the center value
becomes.

7470

Image

Sharpness
adjustment
(Black)

User
custom

SCN
(black)

128
<0-255>

SYS

7475

Image

User
custom

SCN
(black)

128
<0-255>

SYS

7478

Image

User
custom

SCN
(black)

128
<0-255>

SYS

The larger the value is,

the darker the image
becomes.

7480-0

Image

Density
adjustment
Manual
density
adjustment /
Center value
Density
adjustment
Automatic
density
adjustment
Gamma
balance
adjustment
(User custom)

SCN
(black)
SCN
(black)
SCN
(black)

128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>

SYS

The larger the value is,

the darker the image of
the area surrounding
the target area
becomes.
L: Low density area
M: Medium density
area
H: High density area

7480-1
7480-2

L
M
H

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

SYS
SYS

4
4

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 51

Code

Classific
ation

7641-0

Image

7641-1
7641-2

7642-0

Image

7642-1
7642-2

7667

Image

7668

Image

7669

Image

7670

Image

7675

Image

7676

Image

7677

Image

7678

Image

7679

Image

Items
Black area
adjustment in
twin color
copy mode
(Selected 2
colors)

Black area
adjustment in
twin color
copy mode
(Black and
red)

Range
correction
adjustment
(Auto color &
black /
Automatic
density
adjustment)
Range
correction
adjustment
(Auto color &
black /
Manual
density
adjustment)
Background
offset
adjustment for
ADF
Background
adjustment
(Auto color &
black /
Automatic
density
adjustment)
Background
adjustment
(Auto color &
black /
Manual
density
adjustment)

Adjustment mode (05)

Default
Functi <Accept
on
able
value>
H
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
M
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
L
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>

RAM

Contents

SYS

The larger the value is,

the larger the area
recognized as black in
the original becomes.
The smaller the value
is, the larger the area
recognized as colors
other than black
becomes.
L: Low density area
M: Medium density
area
H: High density area
The larger the value is,
the larger the area
recognized as red in the
original becomes.
The smaller the value
is, the larger the area
recognized as colors
other than red
becomes.
L: Low density area
M: Medium density
area
H: High density area
0: Background peak Fixed
1: Background peak Varied

SYS
SYS

4
4
4

PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)

128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>

PPC
(black)
PPC
(black)

1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>

SYS

PPC
(black)
PPC
(black)

1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>

SYS

SYS

Auto color
& black

PPC
(black)

128
<0-255>

SYS

The larger the value is,

the lighter the
background becomes.

Text/Photo

PPC
(black)
PPC
(black)

128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>

SYS

The larger the value is,

the lighter the
background becomes.

PPC
(black)
PPC
(black)

128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>

M
L

Text/Photo
Text

Text/Photo
Text

Text

Text/Photo
Text

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

SYS

Proce
dure

SYS
SYS

SYS

SYS

4
4

1
1

SYS

SYS

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 52

Code
7754
7755
7756
7757
7758
7759
7760
7761
7762

7763

7764
7765
7766
7767
7768
7769
7770
7771
7772
7773
7774
7775
7776

Adjustment mode (05)

Default
Classific
Functi <Accept
Items
ation
on
able
value>
Text/Photo PPC
128
Image
Background
(color) <0-255>
adjustment
(Monocolor /
Text
PPC
128
Automatic
(color) <0-255>
density
Printed
PPC
128
adjustment)
image
(color) <0-255>
Photo
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
Map
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
Image
Background
Text/Photo PPC
128
adjustment
(color) <0-255>
(Twin color /
Text
PPC
128
Manual
(color) <0-255>
density
Printed
PPC
128
adjustment)
image
(color) <0-255>
Image
Background
User
PPC
128
custom
(color) <0-255>
adjustment
(Monocolor /
Automatic
density
adjustment)
User
PPC
128
Image
Background
custom
(color) <0-255>
adjustment
(Monocolor /
Manual
density
adjustment)
Image
Background
Full color
PPC
128
offset
(color) <0-255>
adjustment for Mono
Image
PPC
128
ADF
color
(color) <0-255>
Image
Twin color
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
Image
Range
Text/Photo PPC
1
correction
(color)
<0-1>
adjustment
Image
Text
PPC
1
(Full color /
(color)
<0-1>
Automatic
Image
Printed
PPC
1
adjustment)
image
(color)
<0-1>
Image
Photo
PPC
1
(color)
<0-1>
Image
Map
PPC
1
(color)
<0-1>
Image
Range
Text/Photo PPC
0
correction
(color)
<0-1>
adjustment
Image
Text
PPC
0
(Full color /
(color)
<0-1>
Manual
Image
Printed
PPC
0
adjustment)
image
(color)
<0-1>
Image
Photo
PPC
0
(color)
<0-1>
Image
Map
PPC
0
(color)
<0-1>

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

RAM

Contents

SYS

The larger the value is,

the lighter the
background becomes.

SYS

Proce
dure
1
1

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS
SYS

The larger the value is,

the lighter the
background becomes.

SYS
SYS

SYS

The larger the value is,

the lighter the
background becomes.

SYS

The larger the value is,

the lighter the
background becomes.

SYS
SYS

1
1

SYS

SYS

1
1
1

0: Background peak Fixed

1: Background peak Varied

1
1

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS
SYS

0: Background peak Fixed

1: Background peak Varied

1
1

SYS

SYS

SYS

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 53

Code
7777

7778

7795

7807

7808

7809

7811
7812

7956-0

Adjustment mode (05)

Default
Classific
Functi <Accept
Items
able
ation
on
value>
User
PPC
1
Image
Range
custom
(color)
<0-1>
correction
adjustment
(Full color /
Automatic
adjustment)
Image
Range
User
PPC
0
correction
custom
(color)
<0-1>
adjustment
(Full color /
Manual
adjustment)
Image
Sharpness
User
PPC
128
adjustment
custom
(color) <0-255>
(Full color)
Text
PPC
128
Image
Sharpness
(color) <0-255>
adjustment
(Auto color)
Image
Sharpness
Printed
PPC
128
adjustment
image
(color) <0-255>
(Auto color)
Image
Sharpness
Image
PPC
128
adjustment
smoothing (color) <0-255>
(Black)
0
Image
Black header Text/Photo PPC
(color)
<0-8>
density level
adjustment
Image
Text
PPC
0
(color)
<0-8>
Image

7956-1
7956-2

7957-0

Image

7957-1
7957-2
7958-0

Image

7958-1
7958-2
7959-0
7959-1
7959-2

Image

Gamma
balance
adjustment
(Black / Image
smoothing)

Gamma
balance
adjustment
(Auto color &
black / Text/
photo)
Gamma
balance
adjustment
(Auto color &
black / Text)
Gamma
balance
adjustment
(Auto color &
black / Photo)

L
M
H

L
M
H
L
M
H
L
M
H

PPC
(black)
PPC
(black)
PPC
(black)

128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>

PPC
(black)
PPC
(black)
PPC
(black)
PPC
(black)
PPC
(black)
PPC
(black)
PPC
(black)
PPC
(black)
PPC
(black)

128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

RAM
SYS

Contents
0: Background peak Fixed
1: Background peak Varied

SYS

SYS

SYS

Proce
dure
1

The larger the value is,

the sharper the image
becomes. The smaller
the value is, the softer
the image becomes and
the less moire appears.

SYS

SYS

SYS
SYS

SYS
SYS
SYS

SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS

The larger the value is,

the darker the header
becomes.
The smaller the value
is, the lighter the
header becomes.
The larger the value is,
the darker the image of
the area surrounding
the target area
becomes.
L: Low density area
M: Medium density
area
H: High density area
The larger the value is,
the darker the image of
the area surrounding
the target area
becomes.
L: Low density area
M: Medium density
area
H: High density area

1
1

4
4
4

4
4
4
4
4

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 54

Code

Classific
ation

7980-0

Image

7980-1

Items
Color balance
adjustment for
Y (User
custom mode)

7980-2

7981-0

Image

7981-1

Color balance
adjustment for
M (User
custom mode)

7981-2

7982-0

Image

Color balance
adjustment for
C (User
custom mode)

7982-2

Image

Color balance
adjustment for
K (User
custom mode)

7983-2

Image

8010-2
Image

8011-1
8011-2
8012-0

Image

8012-1
8012-2
8013-0
8013-1
8013-2

L
M

L
M
H

8010-1

8011-0

7983-1

8010-0

7982-1

7983-0

Adjustment mode (05)

Default
Functi <Accept
able
on
value>
L
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
M
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
H
PPC
128
(color) <0-255>

Image

Background
adjustment
(Smooth /
Color / 600
dpi)
Background
adjustment
(Smooth /
Twin color /
600 dpi)
Background
adjustment
(Smooth /
Monocolor /
600 dpi)
Background
adjustment
(Detail / Color
/ 600 dpi)

PS
PCL
XPS
PS
PCL
XPS
PS
PCL
XPS
PS
PCL
XPS

PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)

128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>

PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)

128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>

PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)

128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>

PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)

128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

RAM

Contents

SYS

The target color, mode

and density area
become darker as the
value increases.
L: Low density area
M: Medium density
area
H: High density area
The target color, mode
and density area
become darker as the
value increases.
L: Low density area
M: Medium density
area
H: High density area
The target color, mode
and density area
become darker as the
value increases.
L: Low density area
M: Medium density
area
H: High density area
The target color, mode
and density area
become darker as the
value increases.
L: Low density area
M: Medium density
area
H: High density area
The larger the value is,
the darker the
background becomes.
The smaller the value
is, the lighter the
background becomes.

SYS
SYS

SYS
SYS
SYS

SYS
SYS
SYS

SYS
SYS
SYS

SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS

The larger the value is,

the darker the
background becomes.
The smaller the value
is, the lighter the
background becomes.

Proce
dure
4
4
4

4
4
4

4
4
4

4
4
4

4
4
4
4
4
4

The larger the value is,

the darker the
background becomes.
The smaller the value
is, the lighter the
background becomes.

The larger the value is,

the darker the
background becomes.
The smaller the value
is, the lighter the
background becomes.

4
4

4
4

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 55

Code
8014-0
8014-1
8014-2
8015-0
8015-1
8015-2
8026-0
8026-1
8026-2
8027-0
8027-1
8027-2
8028-0
8028-1
8028-2
8029-0
8029-1
8029-2
8030-0
8030-1
8030-2
8031-0
8031-1
8031-2
8032-0
8032-1
8032-2

Adjustment mode (05)

Default
Classific
Functi <Accept
Items
ation
on
able
value>
PS
PRT
128
Image
Background
(color) <0-255>
adjustment
(Detail / Twin
PCL
PRT
128
color / 600
(color) <0-255>
dpi)
XPS
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
PS
PRT
128
Image
Background
(color) <0-255>
adjustment
(Detail /
PCL
PRT
128
Monocolor /
(color) <0-255>
600 dpi)
XPS
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
Low
PRT
128
Image
Color balance
density
(color) <0-255>
adjustment for
twin color
Medium
PRT
128
mode (PS/
density
(color) <0-255>
smooth/Y/
High
PRT
128
600dpi)
density
(color) <0-255>
Low
PRT
128
Image
Color balance
density
(color) <0-255>
adjustment for
twin color
Medium
PRT
128
mode (PS/
density
(color) <0-255>
smooth/M/
High
PRT
128
600dpi)
density
(color) <0-255>
Low
PRT
128
Image
Color balance
density
(color) <0-255>
adjustment for
twin color
Medium
PRT
128
mode (PS/
density
(color) <0-255>
smooth/C/
High
PRT
128
600dpi)
density
(color) <0-255>
Image
Color balance
Low
PRT
128
adjustment for
density
(color) <0-255>
twin color
Medium
PRT
128
mode (PS/
density
(color) <0-255>
smooth/K/
High
PRT
128
600dpi)
density
(color) <0-255>
Low
PRT
128
Image
Color balance
adjustment for
density
(color) <0-255>
twin color
Medium
PRT
128
mode (PS/
density
(color) <0-255>
smooth/Y/
High
PRT
128
600dpi)
density
(color) <0-255>
Low
PRT
128
Image
Color balance
density
(color) <0-255>
adjustment for
twin color
Medium
PRT
128
mode (PS/
density
(color) <0-255>
smooth/M/
High
PRT
128
600dpi)
density
(color) <0-255>
Image
Color balance
Low
PRT
128
adjustment for
density
(color) <0-255>
twin color
Medium
PRT
128
mode (PS/
density
(color) <0-255>
smooth/C/
High
PRT
128
600dpi)
density
(color) <0-255>

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Proce
dure

RAM

Contents

SYS

The larger the value is,

the darker the
background becomes.
The smaller the value
is, the lighter the
background becomes.

The larger the value is,

the darker the
background becomes.
The smaller the value
is, the lighter the
background becomes.

The larger the value is,

the higher the yellow
density of the area
becomes.

SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS

SYS

The larger the value is,

the higher the magenta
density of the area
becomes.

SYS

The larger the value is,

the higher the cyan
density of the area
becomes.

SYS

The larger the value is,

the higher the black
density of the area
becomes.

SYS

The larger the value is,

the higher the yellow
density of the area
becomes.

SYS
SYS

4
4

4
4

4
4

4
4
4

The larger the value is,

the higher the magenta
density of the area
becomes.

SYS
SYS

SYS
SYS

SYS
SYS

SYS
SYS

SYS
SYS

4
4
4

The larger the value is,

the higher the cyan
density of the area
becomes.

4
4
4

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 56

Code
8033-0
8033-0
8033-0
8034-0
8034-1
8034-2
8035-0
8035-1
8035-2
8036-0
8036-1
8036-2
8037-0
8037-1
8037-2
8038-0
8038-1
8038-2
8039-0
8039-1
8039-2
8040-0
8040-1
8040-2
8041-0
8041-1
8041-2

Adjustment mode (05)

Default
Classific
Functi <Accept
Items
able
ation
on
value>
Low
PRT
128
Image
Color balance
density
(color) <0-255>
adjustment for
twin color
Medium
PRT
128
mode (PS/
density
(color) <0-255>
smooth/K/
High
PRT
128
600dpi)
density
(color) <0-255>
Low
PRT
128
Image
Color balance
density
(color) <0-255>
adjustment for
twin color
Medium
PRT
128
mode (PCL/
density
(color) <0-255>
smooth/Y/
High
PRT
128
600dpi)
density
(color) <0-255>
Low
PRT
128
Image
Color balance
density
(color) <0-255>
adjustment for
twin color
Medium
PRT
128
mode (PCL/
density
(color) <0-255>
smooth/M/
High
PRT
128
600dpi)
density
(color) <0-255>
Low
PRT
128
Image
Color balance
density
(color) <0-255>
adjustment for
twin color
Medium
PRT
128
mode (PCL/
density
(color) <0-255>
smooth/C/
High
PRT
128
600dpi)
density
(color) <0-255>
Low
PRT
128
Image
Color balance
density
(color) <0-255>
adjustment for
twin color
Medium
PRT
128
mode (PCL/
density
(color) <0-255>
smooth/K/
High
PRT
128
600dpi)
density
(color) <0-255>
Image
Color balance
Low
PRT
128
adjustment for
density
(color) <0-255>
twin color
Medium
PRT
128
mode (PCL/
density
(color) <0-255>
smooth/Y/
High
PRT
128
600dpi)
density
(color) <0-255>
Low
PRT
128
Image
Color balance
density
(color) <0-255>
adjustment for
twin color
Medium
PRT
128
mode (PCL/
density
(color) <0-255>
smooth/M/
High
PRT
128
600dpi)
density
(color) <0-255>
PRT
128
Low
Image
Color balance
(color) <0-255>
adjustment for
density
twin color
Medium
PRT
128
mode (PCL/
density
(color) <0-255>
smooth/C/
High
PRT
128
600dpi)
density
(color) <0-255>
Image
Color balance
Low
PRT
128
adjustment for
density
(color) <0-255>
twin color
Medium
PRT
128
mode (PCL/
density
(color) <0-255>
smooth/K/
High
PRT
128
600dpi)
density
(color) <0-255>

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

RAM

Contents

SYS

The larger the value is,

the higher the black
density of the area
becomes.

SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS

SYS

The larger the value is,

the higher the yellow
density of the area
becomes.

SYS

The larger the value is,

the higher the magenta
density of the area
becomes.

SYS

The larger the value is,

the higher the cyan
density of the area
becomes.

SYS

The larger the value is,

the higher the black
density of the area
becomes.

SYS

The larger the value is,

the higher the yellow
density of the area
becomes.

SYS

The larger the value is,

the higher the magenta
density of the area
becomes.

SYS
SYS

4
4

4
4

4
4

4
4
4

The larger the value is,

the higher the cyan
density of the area
becomes.

SYS
SYS

SYS
SYS

SYS
SYS

SYS
SYS

SYS
SYS

SYS
SYS

SYS
SYS

Proce
dure

4
4
4

The larger the value is,

the higher the black
density of the area
becomes.

4
4
4

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 57

Code

Classific
ation

8042-0

Image

8042-1

Items
Color balance
adjustment
(XPS/smooth/
Y)

8042-2
8043-0

Image

8043-1

Color balance
adjustment
(XPS/smooth/
M)

8043-2
8044-0

Image

8044-1

Color balance
adjustment
(XPS/smooth/
C)

8044-2
8045-0

Image

8045-1

Color balance
adjustment
(XPS/smooth/
K)

8045-2
8046-0

Image

8046-1

Color balance
adjustment
(XPS/detail/Y)

8046-2
8047-0

Image

8047-1

Color balance
adjustment
(XPS/detail/
M)

8047-2
8048-0

Image

8048-1

Color balance
adjustment
(XPS/detail/C)

8048-2
8049-0
8049-1
8049-2

Image

Color balance
adjustment
(XPS/detail/K)

Adjustment mode (05)

Default
Functi <Accept
on
able
value>
L
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
M
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
H
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
L
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
M
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
H
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
L
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
M
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
H
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
L
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
M
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
H
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
L
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
M
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
H
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
L
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
M
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
H
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
L
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
M
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
H
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
L
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
M
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
H
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

RAM

Contents

SYS

The larger the value is,

the darker only the
target color becomes.
L: Low density area
M: Medium density
area
H: High density area

SYS
SYS
SYS

Proce
dure
4
4
4
4

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS

The larger the value is,

the darker only the
target color becomes.
L: Low density area
M: Medium density
area
H: High density area

4
4
4
4

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 58

Code

Classific
ation

8050-0

Image

8050-1

Items
Color balance
adjustment
(PS / Smooth
/ Y)

8050-2
8051-0

Image

8051-1

Color balance
adjustment
(PS / Smooth
/ M)

8051-2
8052-0

Image

8052-1

Color balance
adjustment
(PS / Smooth
/ C)

8052-2
8053-0

Image

8053-1

Color balance
adjustment
(PS / Smooth
/ K)

8053-2
8054-0

Image

8054-1

Color balance
adjustment
(PS / Detail /
Y)

8054-2
8055-0

Image

8055-1

Color balance
adjustment
(PS / Detail /
M)

8055-2
8056-0

Image

8056-1

Color balance
adjustment
(PS / Detail /
C)

8056-2
8057-0
8057-1
8057-2

Image

Color balance
adjustment
(PS / Detail /
K)

Adjustment mode (05)

Default
Functi <Accept
on
able
value>
L
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
M
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
H
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
L
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
M
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
H
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
L
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
M
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
H
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
L
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
M
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
H
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
L
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
M
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
H
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
L
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
M
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
H
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
L
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
M
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
H
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
L
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
M
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
H
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

RAM

Contents

SYS

The larger the value is,

the darker only the
target color becomes.
L: Low density area
M: Medium density
area
H: High density area

SYS
SYS
SYS

Proce
dure
4
4
4
4

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS

The larger the value is,

the darker only the
target color becomes.
L: Low density area
M: Medium density
area
H: High density area

4
4
4
4

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 59

Code

Classific
ation

8058-0

Image

8058-1

Items
Color balance
adjustment
(PCL /
Smooth / Y)

8058-2
8059-0

Image

8059-1

Color balance
adjustment
(PCL /
Smooth / M)

8059-2
8060-0

Image

8060-1

Color balance
adjustment
(PCL /
Smooth / C)

8060-2
8061-0

Image

8061-1

Color balance
adjustment
(PCL /
Smooth / K)

8061-2
8062-0

Image

8062-1

Color balance
adjustment
(PCL / Detail /
Y)

8062-2
8063-0

Image

8063-1

Color balance
adjustment
(PCL / Detail /
M)

8063-2
8064-0

Image

8064-1

Color balance
adjustment
(PCL / Detail /
C)

8064-2
8065-0
8065-1
8065-2

Image

Color balance
adjustment
(PCL / Detail /
K)

Adjustment mode (05)

Default
Functi <Accept
able
on
value>
L
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
M
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
H
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
L
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
M
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
H
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
L
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
M
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
H
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
L
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
M
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
H
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
L
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
M
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
H
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
L
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
M
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
H
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
L
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
M
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
H
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
L
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
M
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>
H
PRT
128
(color) <0-255>

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

RAM

Contents

SYS

The larger the value is,

the darker only the
target color becomes.

SYS

Proce
dure
4
4

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS

The larger the value is,

the darker only the
target color becomes.
L: Low density area
M: Medium density
area
H: High density area

4
4
4
4

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 60

Code
8066

8070-0

Adjustment mode (05)

Default
Classific
Functi <Accept
Items
ation
on
able
value>
PRT
0
Image
Color balance adjustment
(color)
<0-1>
mode switchover
(Network print)

Image

8070-2
8070-3

Maximum
toner density
Threshold
adjustment
(Detail / 600
dpi)

8070-4
8070-5
8070-6
8070-7
8070-8
8070-9
8071-0
8071-2
8071-3
8071-4
8071-5
8071-6
8071-7
8071-8
8071-9

Image

Maximum
toner density
Threshold
adjustment
(Smooth / 600
dpi)

Plain
paper
Recycled
paper
Thick
paper 1
Thick
paper 2
Thick
paper 3
Thick
paper 4
Special
paper 1
Special
paper 2
OHP film
Plain
paper
Recycled
paper
Thick
paper 1
Thick
paper 2
Thick
paper 3
Thick
paper 4
Special
paper 1
Special
paper 2
OHP film

PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>

RAM

Contents

SYS

Switches the image

processing method for
color balance
adjustment for network
printing by changing the
default value 0 to 1
so that the density of
solid images will
become lighter along
with the adjustment.
0: Adjusts color
balance with the
solid image density
fixed
1: Adjusts color
balance with the
solid image density
varied
The larger the value is,
the larger the maximum
amount of toner to be
adhered becomes.
The smaller the value
is, the smaller the
maximum amount of
toner to be adhered
becomes.

SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS

Proce
dure
1

4
4
4
4
4

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS

The larger the value is,

the larger the maximum
amount of toner to be
adhered becomes.
The smaller the value
is, the smaller the
maximum amount of
toner to be adhered
becomes.

4
4
4
4
4

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 61

Code
8102-0
8102-1
8102-2

8110-0

Adjustment mode (05)

Default
Classific
Functi <Accept
Items
ation
on
able
value>
Image
Fine line
PS
PRT
1
enhancement
(color)
<0-1>
switchover
PCL
PRT
1
(e-BRIDGE)
(color)
<0-1>
XPS
PRT
1
(color)
<0-1>

Image

8110-1

Sharpness
adjustment
(e-BRIDGE /
PS / General)

8110-2
8111-0

Image

8111-2
Image

8112-1
8112-2
8113-0

Image

8113-1

Sharpness
adjustment
(e-BRIDGE /
PS /
Photograph)
Sharpness
adjustment
(e-BRIDGE /
PS /
Presentation)
Sharpness
adjustment
(e-BRIDGE /
PS / Line Art)

8113-2
8118-0

Image

Sharpness
adjustment
(e-BRIDGE /
PS)

8118-2
Image

Sharpness
adjustment
(EFI / PS)

8150-2

Image
Text
Graphics
Image
Text
Graphics

Text
Graphics

Text
Graphics
Image

Image

Smudged/
faint text
adjustment

8132

8150-1

Graphics

Image

8131

8150-0

Text

Image

8118-1

8119-0
(EFI)
8119-1
(EFI)
8119-2
(EFI)
8130

Graphics
Image

8111-1

8112-0

Text

PS
PCL
XPS

Image

Color balance
adjustment for
twin color
mode (XPS/
smooth/Y/
600dpi)

Low
density
Medium
density
High
density

PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(black)
PRT
(black)
PRT
(black)
PRT
(black)
PRT
(black)
PRT
(black)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
0
<0-8>
0
<0-8>
0
<0-8>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>

RAM

Contents

SYS

Sets whether or not fine

line enhancement is
enabled in the printer
function. Use this code
in cases such as fine
lines being excessively
emphasized.
0: OFF
1: ON
The larger the value is,
the sharper the image
becomes.
The smaller the value
is, the softer the image
becomes.

SYS
SYS

SYS
SYS
SYS

Proce
dure
4
4
4

4
4
4

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS

SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS

The larger the value is,

the sharper the image
becomes.
The smaller the value
is, the softer the image
becomes.

4
4
4

The larger the value is,

the sharper the image
becomes.
The smaller the value
is, the softer the image
becomes.

The larger the value is,

the darker the small text
and fine lines become
and the more faint text
is suppressed.

The larger the value is,

the higher the yellow
density of the area
becomes.

4
4

1
1

4
4

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 62

Code
8151-0
8151-1
8151-2
8152-0
8152-1
8152-2
8153-0
8153-1
8153-2
8154-0
8154-1
8154-2
8155-0
8155-1
8155-2
8156-0
8156-1
8156-2
8157-0
8157-1
8157-2
8176

8187

Adjustment mode (05)

Default
Classific
Functi <Accept
Items
able
ation
on
value>
PRT
128
Image
Color balance Low
(color) <0-255>
adjustment for density
twin color
Medium
PRT
128
mode (XPS/
density
(color) <0-255>
smooth/M/
High
PRT
128
600dpi)
density
(color) <0-255>
PRT
128
Image
Color balance Low
(color) <0-255>
adjustment for density
twin color
Medium
PRT
128
mode (XPS/
density
(color) <0-255>
smooth/C/
High
PRT
128
600dpi)
density
(color) <0-255>
PRT
128
Image
Color balance Low
(color) <0-255>
adjustment for density
twin color
Medium
PRT
128
mode (XPS/
density
(color) <0-255>
smooth/K/
High
PRT
128
600dpi)
density
(color) <0-255>
PRT
128
Image
Color balance Low
(color) <0-255>
adjustment for density
twin color
Medium
PRT
128
mode (XPS/
density
(color) <0-255>
detail/Y/
High
PRT
128
600dpi)
density
(color) <0-255>
PRT
128
Image
Color balance Low
(color) <0-255>
adjustment for density
twin color
Medium
PRT
128
mode (XPS/
density
(color) <0-255>
detail/M/
High
PRT
128
600dpi)
density
(color) <0-255>
Image
Color balance Low
PRT
128
adjustment for density
(color) <0-255>
twin color
Medium
PRT
128
mode (XPS/
density
(color) <0-255>
detail/C/
High
PRT
128
600dpi)
density
(color) <0-255>
PRT
128
Image
Color balance Low
(color) <0-255>
adjustment for density
twin color
Medium
PRT
128
mode (XPS/
density
(color) <0-255>
detail/K/
High
PRT
128
600dpi)
density
(color) <0-255>
Image
Screen switchover
PRT
0
(e-BRIDGE)
(color)
<0-1>

Image

Screen
switchover
(e-BRIDGE)

Graphics

PRT
(color)

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3
<3,11>

RAM

Contents

SYS

The larger the value is,

the higher the magenta
density of the area
becomes.

SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS

SYS

The larger the value is,

the higher the cyan
density of the area
becomes.

SYS

The larger the value is,

the higher the black
density of the area
becomes.

SYS

The larger the value is,

the higher the yellow
density of the area
becomes.

SYS

The larger the value is,

the higher the magenta
density of the area
becomes.

SYS

The larger the value is,

the higher the cyan
density of the area
becomes.

SYS

4
4

4
4

4
4
4

The larger the value is,

the higher the black
density of the area
becomes.

SYS
SYS

SYS
SYS

SYS
SYS

SYS
SYS

SYS
SYS

SYS
SYS

Proce
dure

4
4
4

0: High screen ruling

value (smoother
image)
1: Low screen ruling
value (rougher
image)
3: High screen ruling
value (smoother
image)
11: Low screen ruling
value (rougher
image)

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 63

Code
8188

8210-0

Adjustment mode (05)

Default
Classific
Functi <Accept
Items
ation
on
able
value>
Image
PRT
3
Image
Screen
(color)
<3,11>
switchover
(e-BRIDGE)

Image

8210-1
8210-2

PureBlack /
Gray
threshold
adjustment
(PCL /
Graphics)

8210-3
8211-0

Image

8211-1
8211-2

PureBlack /
Gray
threshold
adjustment
(PCL / Image)

8211-3
8212-0

Image

8212-1
8212-2

PureBlack /
Gray
threshold
adjustment
(PCL / Image)

8212-3
8213

Image

8214
8215

General
Photograp
h
Presentati
on
Line Art
General
Photograp
h
Presentati
on
Line Art
General
Photograp
h
Presentati
on
Line Art

PureBlack /
Gray
threshold
adjustment
(Twin color
print)

General

Image

General
General

8218

Image

Twin color
copy mode /
black
selection

8240

Image

Line width minimum value

adjustment

8249-0

Image

PureBlack /
Gray
threshold
adjustment
(XPS / Text)

8249-1

General

8249-3

Photograp
h
Presentati
on
Line Art

8249-4

Advanced

8249-2

Contents

SYS

3: High screen ruling

value (smoother
image)
11: Low screen ruling
value (rougher
image)
The larger the value is,
the wider the range of
colors to be replaced
with black becomes.
The smaller the value
is, the narrower the
range becomes.

The larger the value is,

the wider the range of
colors to be replaced
with black becomes.
The smaller the value
is, the narrower the
range becomes.

The larger the value is,

the wider the range of
colors to be replaced
with black becomes.
The smaller the value
is, the narrower the
range becomes.

PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)

8
<1-255>
8
<1-255>
8
<1-255>
8
<1-255>
1
<1-255>
1
<1-255>
1
<1-255>
8
<1-255>
1
<1-255>
1
<1-255>
1
<1-255>
8
<1-255>
8
<1-255>
1
<1-255>
1
<1-255>

PRT
(color)

0
<0-1>

SYS

PRT
(color)

2
<1-9>

SYS

PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)
PRT
(color)

8
<1-255>
8
<1-255>
8
<1-255>
8
<1-255>
8
<1-255>

SYS

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Proce
dure

RAM

SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS

SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS

The larger the value is,

the wider the range of
colors to be replaced
with black becomes.
The smaller the value
is, the narrower the
range becomes.
Sets whether the image
on an original is printed
in the color or the black
mode.
0: OFF
(printed in color)
1: ON
(printed in black)
The larger the value is,
the thicker (darker) the
lines become.
The larger the value is,
the wider the range of
colors to be replaced
with black becomes.
The smaller the value
is, the narrower the
range becomes.

4
4
4
4

4
4
4

4
4
4
1
1
1
1

4
4
4
4
4

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 64

Code
8250-0
8250-1
8250-2
8250-3
8250-4
8251-0
8251-1
8251-2
8251-3
8251-4
8252-0
8252-1
8252-2
8252-3
8252-4
8253-0
8253-1
8253-2
8253-3
8253-4
8254-0
8254-1
8254-2
8254-3
8254-4
8325
8326
8327

Adjustment mode (05)

Default
Classific
Functi <Accept
Items
ation
on
able
value>
General
PRT
1
Image
PureBlack /
(color) <1-255>
Gray
threshold
Photograp
PRT
1
adjustment
h
(color) <1-255>
(XPS /
Presentati
PRT
1
Graphic)
on
(color) <1-255>
Line Art
PRT
8
(color) <1-255>
Advanced
PRT
1
(color) <1-255>
Image
PureBlack /
General
PRT
1
Gray
(color) <1-255>
threshold
Photograp
PRT
1
adjustment
h
(color) <1-255>
(XPS / Image) Presentati
PRT
1
on
(color) <1-255>
Line Art
PRT
8
(color) <1-255>
Advanced
PRT
1
(color) <1-255>
General
PRT
8
Image
PureBlack /
(color) <1-255>
Gray
threshold
Photograp
PRT
8
adjustment
h
(color) <1-255>
(PS / Text)
Presentati
PRT
8
on
(color) <1-255>
PRT
8
Line Art
(color) <1-255>
Advanced
PRT
8
(color) <1-255>
General
PRT
1
Image
PureBlack /
Gray
(color) <1-255>
threshold
Photograp
PRT
1
adjustment
h
(color) <1-255>
(PS / Graphic) Presentati
PRT
1
on
(color) <1-255>
Line Art
PRT
8
(color) <1-255>
Advanced
PRT
1
(color) <1-255>
General
PRT
1
Image
PureBlack /
(color) <1-255>
Gray
threshold
Photograp
PRT
1
adjustment
h
(color) <1-255>
(PS / Image)
Presentati
PRT
1
on
(color) <1-255>
Line Art
PRT
8
(color) <1-255>
Advanced
PRT
1
(color) <1-255>
Image
Saturation
Text
SCN
128
adjustment
(color) <0-255>
Photo
SCN
128
(color) <0-255>
Printed
SCN
128
image
(color) <0-255>

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

RAM

Contents

SYS

The larger the value is,

the wider the range of
colors to be replaced
with black becomes.
The smaller the value
is, the narrower the
range becomes.

SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS

SYS
SYS
SYS

The larger the value is,

the wider the range of
colors to be replaced
with black becomes.
The smaller the value
is, the narrower the
range becomes.

SYS
SYS
SYS

The larger the value is,

the wider the range of
colors to be replaced
with black becomes.
The smaller the value
is, the narrower the
range becomes.

SYS
SYS
SYS

The larger the value is,

the wider the range of
colors to be replaced
with black becomes.
The smaller the value
is, the narrower the
range becomes.

SYS
SYS

4
4
4
4

4
4
4
4

4
4
4
4
4

The larger the value is,

the wider the range of
colors to be replaced
with black becomes.
The smaller the value
is, the narrower the
range becomes.

SYS
SYS

SYS
SYS

SYS
SYS

SYS
SYS

Proce
dure

4
4
4
4
4

The larger the value is,

the brighter the image
becomes. The smaller
the value is, the duller
the image becomes.

1
1
1

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 65

Code
8330
8331
8332
8334
8340
8341
8342
8344
8345
8346

8348

Adjustment mode (05)

Default
Classific
Functi <Accept
Items
ation
on
able
value>
Text
SCN
1
Image
Range
(color)
<0-1>
correction
adjustment
Printed
SCN
1
(Full color /
image
(color)
<0-1>
Automatic
Photo
SCN
1
density
(color)
<0-1>
adjustment)
User
SCN
1
custom
(color)
<0-1>
Text
SCN
128
Image
Density
(color) <0-255>
adjustment
Manual
Printed
SCN
128
adjustment /
image
(color) <0-255>
Center value
Photo
SCN
128
(color) <0-255>
Text
SCN
20
Image
Density
adjustment
(color) <0-255>
Manual
Printed
SCN
20
adjustment
image
(color) <0-255>
/ Light step
Photo
SCN
20
value
(color) <0-255>

Image

8349
8350

8361

Image

8362
8363
8365

Density
adjustment
Manual
adjustment
/ Dark step
value

Range
correction
adjustment
(Full color /
Manual
density
adjustment)

Text
Printed
image
Photo

Text
Printed
image
Photo
User
custom
User
custom
mode

RAM
SYS
SYS

0: Background peak Fixed

1: Background peak Varied

Proce
dure
1
1

SYS

SYS

SYS
SYS

The larger the value is,

the darker the image at
the center value
becomes.

SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS

SCN
(color)
SCN
(color)
SCN
(color)

20
<0-255>
20
<0-255>
20
<0-255>

SCN
(color)
SCN
(color)
SCN
(color)
SCN
(color)
SCN
(color)

0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
50
<0-50>

SYS

SYS
SYS
SYS

SYS

1
1
1

Sets the changing

amount per step of the
density adjustment
buttons on the control
panel.
The larger the value is,
the lighter the image of
the light step
becomes.
Sets the changing
amount per step of the
density adjustment
buttons on the control
panel.
The larger the value is,
the darker the image of
the dark step
becomes.
0: Background peak Fixed
1: Background peak Varied

1
1
1

1
1
1

1
1

SYS

SYS

8370

Image

Background
adjustment

8371

Image

Fine
adjustment of
black density

User
custom
mode

SCN
(color)

0
<0-4>

SYS

8372

Image

RGB
conversion
method
selection

User
custom
mode

SCN
(color)

0
<0-3>

SYS

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Contents

SYS

When the value

increases, the
background becomes
darker.
Adjusts the black
density of the scanned
image. When the value
increases, the black
density becomes
darker.
Sets the color space
format of the output
image.
0: sRGB
1: AppleRGB
2: ROMMRGB
3: AdobeRGB

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 66

Code
8373

Adjustment mode (05)

Default
Classific
Functi <Accept
Items
ation
on
able
value>
SCN
128
Image
Saturation
User
(color) <0-255>
adjustment
custom
mode

RAM

Contents

SYS

The larger the value is,

the brighter the image
becomes. The smaller
the value is, the duller
the image becomes.
When the value
increases, the image
becomes sharper.
When the value
decreases, the image
becomes softer.
The smaller the value
is, the less the moire
becomes.
The larger the value is,
the darker the image of
the center step density
becomes.

8375

Image

Sharpness
adjustment

User
custom
mode

SCN
(color)

128
<0-255>

SYS

8380

Image

User
custom
mode

SCN
(color)

128
<0-255>

SYS

8381

Image

Density
adjustment
Fine curve
compensation
/ Center value
Density
adjustment
/ Light step
value

User
custom
mode

SCN
(color)

20
<0-255>

SYS

8382

Image

Density
adjustment
/ Dark step
value

User
custom
mode

SCN
(color)

20
<0-255>

SYS

8385

Image

Background
offset
adjustment
(Automatic
density
adjustment)

Text

SCN
(color)
SCN
(color)
SCN
(color)
SCN
(color)

128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>

SYS

SCN
(color)
SCN
(color)
SCN
(color)
SCN
(color)

128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>

SYS

SCN
(color)

128
<0-255>

8386
8387
8389

8390

Image

8391
8392
8394

8395

Image

Background
offset
adjustment
(Manual
density
adjustment)

Printed
image
Photo
User
custom
mode
Text
Printed
image
Photo

User
custom
mode
Background offset
adjustment for ADF

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

SYS
SYS
SYS

SYS
SYS
SYS

SYS

Sets the changing

amount by 1 step at
density adjustment on
the control panel
The larger the value is,
the lighter the image of
the light steps
becomes.
Sets the changing
amount by 1 step at
density adjustment on
the control panel
The larger the value is,
the darker the image of
the dark steps
becomes.
The larger the value is,
the less easily the
background (low
density area) is printed.
The smaller the value
is, the more easily the
background (low
density area) is printed.

Proce
dure
1

1
1
1
1

The larger the value is,

the less easily the
background (low
density area) is printed.
The smaller the value
is, the more easily the
background (low
density area) is printed.

The larger the

adjustment value is, the
lighter the background
becomes.

1
1
1

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 67

Code
8400
8402
8403
8404

8405
8407
8408
8409

Adjustment mode (05)

Default
Classific
Functi <Accept
Items
ation
on
able
value>
Text/Photo SCN
128
Image
Background
(black) <0-255>
offset
adjustment
Photo
SCN
128
(Automatic
(black) <0-255>
density
Gray scale SCN
128
adjustment)
(black) <0-255>
SCN
128
User
(black) <0-255>
custom
mode
Image
Background
Text/Photo SCN
128
offset
(black) <0-255>
adjustment
Photo
SCN
128
(Manual
(black) <0-255>
density
Gray scale SCN
128
adjustment)
(black) <0-255>
User
SCN
128
custom
(black) <0-255>
mode

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

RAM

Contents

SYS

The larger the value is,

the less easily the
background (low
density area) is printed.
The smaller the value
is, the more easily the
background (low
density area) is printed.

SYS
SYS
SYS

SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS

The larger the value is,

the less easily the
background (low
density area) is printed.
The smaller the value
is, the more easily the
background (low
density area) is printed.

Proce
dure
1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 68

2.5.6

Code
976

System
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Classific
Functi <Accept
Items
ation
on
able
value>
Maintena Equipment number (serial
ALL
nce
number) display

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

RAM

Contents

SYS

When this adjustment is

performed with this
code, the setting code
(08-995) is also
performed
automatically. (10
digits)

Proce
dure
1

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 69

2.5.7

Code
305

Scanner
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Classific
Functi <Accept
Items
ation
on
able
value>
Scanner Image location adjustment
ALL
124
of secondary scanning
<68-188>
direction
(scanner section)

RAM

Contents

SYS

When the value

increases by 1, the
image shifts by approx.
0.08333 mm toward the
trailing edge of the
paper.
When the value
increases by 1, the
image shifts by approx.
0.0423 mm toward the
front side of the paper.
Moves carriages to the
adjusting position.
(Ch.3.1.9)
When the value
increases by 1, the
reproduction ratio in the
secondary scanning
direction (vertical to
paper feeding direction)
increases by approx.
0.017%.
When the value
increases by 1, the
reproduction ratio of the
secondary scanning
direction on original (fed
from the RADF)
increases by approx.
0.1%.
When the value
increases by 1, the
image of original fed
from the RADF shifts
toward the rear side of
paper by approx.
0.0423 mm.
Transfers the
characteristic values of
the scanner (shading
correction factor / RGB
color correction /
reproduction ratio color
aberration correction /
shading position
correction factor /
reproduction ratio
correction value in
primary scanning
direction) from the
SRAM of the SYS
board to the SRAM of
the SLG board.

306

Scanner

Image location adjustment

of primary scanning
direction
(scanner section)

ALL

113
<0-255>

SYS

308

Scanner

Distortion mode

ALL

340

Scanner

Reproduction ratio
adjustment of secondary
scanning direction
(scanner section)

ALL

128
<0-255>

SYS

357

RADF

Fine adjustment of RADF

transport speed

ALL

50
<0-100>

SYS

358

RADF

RADF sideways deviation

adjustment

ALL

128
<0-255>

SYS

363

Scanner

Data transfer of
characteristic value of
scanner / SYS board
SLG board

SCN

SYS

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Proce
dure
1

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 70

Code

Classific
ation

364

Scanner

365

RADF

366

Items

Adjustment mode (05)

Default
Functi <Accept
on
able
value>
SCN
-

Data transfer of
characteristic value of
scanner / SLG board
SYS board

RADF leading
edge position
1 adjustment

for single
sided
original
for double
sided
original

RAM

Contents

SYS

Transfers the
characteristic values of
the scanner (shading
correction factor / RGB
color correction /
reproduction ratio color
aberration correction /
shading position
correction factor /
reproduction ratio
correction value in
primary scanning
direction) from the
SRAM of the SLG
board to the SRAM of
the SYS board.
When the value
increases by 1, the
copied image of original
fed from the RADF
shifts toward the trailing
edge of paper by
approx. 0.2 mm.

ALL

50
<0-100>

SYS

ALL

50
<0-100>

SYS

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Proce
dure
6

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 71

2.5.8

Code
401
405

Printer
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Classific
Functi <Accept
Items
ation
on
able
value>
Laser
Fine adjustment of
PRT
128
polygonal motor rotation
<0-255>
speed (reproduction ratio
PPC
128
adjustment)
<0-255>

When the value

increases by 1, the
reproduction ratio of
primary scanning
direction increases by
approx. 0.07%.
(approx. 0.1 mm/step)
When the value
increases by 1, the
image shifts toward the
trailing edge of the
paper by approx.
0.1 mm.
When the value
increases by 1, the
writing start position
shifts to the front side
by approx. 0.0423 mm.
When the value
increases by 1, the
image shifts toward the
trailing edge of the
paper by approx.
0.1 mm.
When the value
increases by 1, the
image shifts toward the
trailing edge of the
paper by approx.
0.1 mm.
When the value
increases by 1, the
blank area becomes
wider by approx.
0.0423 mm.

100
<0-200>

Adjustment of primary
scanning laser writing start
position

PPC

128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>

Image

Leading edge
position
adjustment
(Normal
speed)

410

Image

411

Contents

PPC

408

Common
items

RAM

PRT

Proce
dure
1
1

1
1
1

428

Image

Leading edge
position
adjustment
(Normal
speed)

PFP lower
drawer

ALL

50
<0-100>

429

Image

Leading edge
position
adjustment
(Normal
speed)

LCF

ALL

50
<0-100>

430

Image

PPC

0
<0-255>

431

Image

PPC

0
<0-255>

432

Image

PPC

0
<0-255>

433

Image

Top margin adjustment

(blank area at the leading
edge of the paper))
Left margin adjustment
(blank area at the left of the
paper along the paper
feeding direction)
Right margin adjustment
(blank area at the right of
the paper along the paper
feeding direction)
Bottom margin adjustment
(blank area at the trailing
edge of the paper)

PPC

0
<0-255>

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 72

Code
434-0

434-1

434-2

434-3

434-4

434-5

440
441
442
444
445
468-0
468-1
468-2
480

Adjustment mode (05)

Default
Classific
Functi <Accept
Items
ation
on
able
value>
Image
Bottom margin adjustment
PPC/
24
(blank area at the trailing
PRT
<0-255>
edge of the paper)
/Reverse side at duplexing
PPC/
18
Image
Right margin adjustment
PRT
<0-255>
(blank area at the right of
the paper along the paper
feeding direction)
/Reverse side at duplexing
PPC/
24
Image
Bottom margin adjustment
PRT
<0-255>
(blank area at the trailing
edge of the paper)
/Reverse side at duplexing
(black)
Image
Right margin adjustment
PPC/
18
PRT
<0-255>
(blank area at the right of
the paper along the paper
feeding direction)
/Reverse side at duplexing
(color)
PPC/
18
Image
Bottom margin adjustment
PRT
<0-255>
(blank area at the trailing
edge of the paper)
/Reverse side at duplexing
(color)
Image
Right margin adjustment
PPC/
12
(blank area at the right of
PRT
<0-255>
the paper along the paper
feeding direction)
/Reverse side at duplexing
(Thick paper 1)
ALL
50
Image
Leading edge 1st
drawer
<0-100>
position
adjustment
2nd
ALL
50
(Normal
drawer
<0-100>
speed)
Bypass
ALL
50
feeding
<0-100>
PFP upper
ALL
50
drawer
<0-100>
Duplex
ALL
50
feeding
<0-100>
Finisher Fine
A4-R
ALL
0
adjustment of /LT-R
<-14-14>
binding
B4
ALL
0
position/
<-14-14>
folding
A3/LD
ALL
0
position
<-14-14>
Paper
Paper feed aligning
ALL
feeding amount adjustment (using
icons)

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

RAM
M

Contents
When the value
increases, the blank
area becomes wider.

Proce
dure
4

M
M
M

When the value

increases by 1, the
image shifts toward the
trailing edge of the
paper by approx.
0.1 mm.

1
1
1

M
M
M
M

When the value

increases by 1, the
binding/folding position
shifts toward the right
page by 0.25 mm.
Press the button on the
LCD.

4
4
4
4

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 73

Code
487-0
487-1
487-2
487-3
487-4
487-5
487-6
487-7
487-8
489-0
489-1
489-2
489-3
489-4
489-5
489-6
489-7
489-8
498-0
498-1

Adjustment mode (05)

Default
Classific
Functi <Accept
Items
able
ation
on
value>
Transport
PRT
128
Drive
Fine
speed:
<0-255>
adjustment of
Normal
transfer belt
FAX
128
speed
motor
<0-255>
rotational
PPC
128
speed
<0-255>
PRT
128
Transport
speed:
<0-255>
Decelerati
FAX
128
ng
<0-255>
PPC
128
<0-255>
Transport
PRT
128
speed:
<0-255>
High
FAX
128
speed
<0-255>
PPC
128
<0-255>
Transport
PRT
136
Drive
Fine
speed:
<0-255>
adjustment of
Normal
feed/transport
FAX
128
speed
motor
<0-255>
rotational
PPC
128
speed
<0-255>
PRT
128
Transport
<0-255>
speed:
Decelerati
FAX
128
ng
<0-255>
PPC
128
<0-255>
Transport
PRT
128
speed:
<0-255>
High
FAX
128
speed
<0-255>
PPC
128
<0-255>
ALL
128
Image
Adjustment of Long size
<0-255>
primary
scanning
ALL
128
Short size
laser writing
<0-255>
(A4/LT or
start position
shorter)
for duplex
printing

RAM

Contents

When the value

increases, the
reproduction ratio in the
secondary scanning
direction becomes
larger. (Approx. 0.1
mm/1 steps)

M
M
M

4
4
4
4

M
M

4719

Color
registrati
on

Color registration
adjustment

ALL

4720

Color
registrati
on

Displaying parameters for

color registration
adjustment detection
abnormality

ALL

<0-255>

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Proce
dure

When the value

increases by 1, the
image shifts toward the
front side by 0.0423
mm.
When the value of 4980 is set, the same one
is automatically applied
to 498-1.
Forcibly performs the
color registration
control adjustment in
order to eliminate the
color deviation of Y, M,
C and K colors.
Checks the cause of a
CA00 error when it
occurs.

4
4

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 74

Code
4721

4732-0

4732-1

Adjustment mode (05)

Default
Classific
Functi <Accept
Items
ation
on
able
value>
Maintena Tilt motor initial excitation
ALL
nce
setting

Image

Displaying
corrected
values of
leading edge
adjustment

Absolute
humidity
reference
value
Absolute
humidity
RMS
value

RAM

Contents

Perform this adjustment

when the SRAM on the
laser unit or the LGC
board has been
replaced.

Proce
dure
6

ALL

255
<0-255>

10

ALL

255
<0-255>

10

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 75

2.6

SETTING MODE (08)

The items in the setting code list can be set or changed in this setting mode (08).
Note:
When the power should be turned OFF, be sure to shut down the equipment by pressing the
[ON/OFF] button for a few seconds.
Remarks:
1. The Service Handbook contains only the selected codes while the Service Manual contains
all codes.
2. The digit after the hyphen in Code of the following table is a sub code.
3. In RAM, the SRAM of the board in which the data of each code is stored is indicated. M
stands for the LGC board, SYS, NIC and UTY stands for the SYS board.

2.6.1

Classification List of Setting Mode (08)

Classification

[ACS]
[AMS]
[Feeding paper media]
[X in 1]
[Color specification]
[Indicator]
[Edit copying]
[Sound]
[Counter]
[Cascade]
[ACS]
[Screen]
[Administrator]
[Feeding setting]
[Language]
User interface
[Original counter]
[Original direction]
[Copy volume]
[Automatic calibration]
[Default setting]

[Jam releasing]
[Offsetting between jobs]
[Security level]
[Sorting]
[Timer]
[Template]
[Image shift]
[Tray reset]
[Panel calibration]

Setting Mode (08)

Given in the Service
Given in the Service
Manual and Service
Manual
Handbook
9698
605
9185-0 to 1
650
643, 644
671
645, 646
610, 969, 970
202
652, 653
268
207, 602, 9985
263, 9882
658, 659
220, 221, 1929, 1930, 1931,
1932, 1933, 1934, 1935
302
628
300
632
276, 277, 278, 279, 280,
281, 282, 283, 284, 285,
286, 289, 331, 603, 604,
607, 618, 642, 9986
9359
682
1708
627, 634, 641, 649
204, 205, 206
1140
636, 1429, 1430, 8546
648
9051

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 76

Classification

[Date]
[Annotation]
[Displaying number]
[Job Build]
[File]
[Department management]

User interface

Scanner

Fax

[Black-free]
[Book duplexing]
[Box printing]
[Paper size]
[Blank copy prevention]
[User mode]
[EXTENSION button]
[Icon]
[Trial copy function]
[ACC function]
[Display method of file
name]
[File name form for
exporting]
[Private print/Hold print job
continue operation]
[E-mail]
[Pre-scan]
[Date/time]
[FAX mistransmission
prevention function]
[Receiving confidential data]
[Function]
[Destination]
[Default setting]
[Priority drawer]
[Retaining the settings]
[ACS]
[ALL clear]
[Automatic calibration]
[Default setting]

Image

[Toner density ratio]

[Smoothing]
[Image repeat gap]
[Outlining white text]
[Blank page judgment]
[Quantized coefficient
correction]

Setting Mode (08)

Given in the Service
Given in the Service
Manual and Service
Manual
Handbook
640
651, 657
342, 1478, 9891
1130, 1131
209, 218, 219
617, 620, 621, 622, 623,
624, 629

343
611
951, 953, 954
613
625
506, 508, 580, 590
9955
8598, 9982
3635
8591
8624
8625
8626
272, 273
3015
8540
3847, 3848, 3849
3846
1498, 1926, 8612
701
274
689
9987
609-0 to 4, 9825, 9974, 9975
7000, 7001, 7300, 7301,
7400, 7500
595
1149, 9382, 9897, 9898,
9899
2707-0 to 3
560, 562
7612
8011
9973
8304

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 77

Setting Mode (08)

Given in the Service
Given in the Service
Manual and Service
Manual
Handbook

Classification

[2nd transfer]
[Abnormality detection]
[Contrast voltage]
[Automatic starting]
Image control
[Smoothing]
[Laser power]
[Potential on white
background]
[Feeding setting]
[Paper source]
[detection]
[Setting]
[Coated paper Mode]
[Paper size]
[Paper dimension]

Feeding system
[Paper retry]

[Pushing Paper]
[Paper information]
[Color registration
adjustment]
[Drum phase adjustment]
[Polygonal motor]
Laser
Main charger

[Cleaning]
[Charger]

548
2513-0 to 3, 2514-0 to 3,
2515
559, 565, 566, 567, 568,
569, 570, 571, 572
560
2525-0 to 3, 2526-0 to 3,
2527
2548-0 to 3, 2549-0 to 3,
2554
254, 255, 619, 1438
480, 481, 1135, 1431,
4016-0 to 1
449, 1492, 4621, 4622
988
675-0 to 4
224, 225, 226, 227, 228,
256, 8548
210, 229, 230, 231, 232,
233, 234, 235, 236, 237,
238, 239, 240, 241, 242,
243, 244, 245, 246, 247,
248, 249, 470, 471, 4567,
4568
463-0 to 1, 464-0 to 1,
465-0 to 1, 466-0 to 1,
467-0 to 1, 468-0 to 1, 482,
1390, 1391, 1392, 1393,
1394, 1395, 1396, 1397,
1398, 1399, 1400, 1401
4553-0 to 4
9300, 9301, 9302, 9303,
9304, 9305
4550-0 to1, 4562, 4605

573, 574, 575, 576

556,

557,

4546

4766
398, 399, 478, 483, 484,
485, 486, 489, 490, 4604,
9805
1389
808

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 78

Classification

[Toner nearly empty]

Developer

[Toner cartridge rotation

counter]
[Toner density ratio manual
offset control]
[Prevention of color toner
low density]
[Used toner mixing paddles]
[Used toner motor lock
detection]
[Enforced toner supply]

Paper exit

Transfer

Cleaner

[Paper exit speed control

switching]
[Duplex reversing position
correction control]
[1st transfer]
[2nd transfer]
[Resistance detection]
[Transfer bias]
[Drum reverse rotation
amount control]
[Prevention of drum rotation
without fusing]
[Discharge blade]
[Exhaust fan rotation period]

Setting Mode (08)

Given in the Service
Given in the Service
Manual and Service
Manual
Handbook
1415, 1416, 1416-0 to 3,
6452-0 to 3, 6453-0 to 3,
6454-0 to 3, 8523, 9804
1376-0 to 3
2707-0 to 3
2692, 2693
4551-0 to 1, 4554-0 to 1,
4561, 6209-0 to 2
4595
2411-0 to 2, 2412-0 to 2,
2413-0 to 2
4563
4564
816, 2512
2490
2511
2510
2367
2380, 2381, 2382, 2383,
2384
2553
2370

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 79

Classification

[Temperature]

Fuser

[Intermittence setting]
[Status counter]
[Fuser reverse rotation
setting]
[Pre-running]

[Fuser unit]
[Fuser unit voltage
determination]
[Counter]
Image processing
RADF

Finisher

[Switchback]
[Stapling]
[Hole punching]
[Finisher model switching]

Setting Mode (08)

Given in the Service
Given in the Service
Manual and Service
Manual
Handbook
409, 410-0 to 3, 412-0 to 1,
413-0 to 1, 434-0 to 1,
437-0 to 1, 438, 448,
450-0 to 3, 451-0 to 1, 452,
453, 518-0 to 1, 531-0 to 1,
534-0 to 4, 1902, 1903,
1904, 2017-0 to 3,
2018-0 to 3, 2019-0 to 3,
2151-0 to 3, 2153-0 to 1,
2155-0 to 1, 2159-0 to 1,
2161, 2255, 4545,
5241-0 to 3, 5277-0 to 5,
5285-0 to 3, 5293-0 to 3,
5294-0 to 3, 5295-0 to 3,
5296-0 to 3, 5409-0 to 1,
5410-0 to 1
5449-0 to 6
400
4569
417-0 to 1, 439-0 to 1,
440-0 to 1, 441-0 to 1,
461-0 to 4, 517, 526, 584,
855, 2020-0 to 3,
5280-0 to 1, 5299-0 to 1,
5308-0 to 1, 5309-0 to 1,
5310-0 to 3
4549
4591
1371, 1372, 1378, 1380,
1382, 1383, 1385, 1386,
1387, 1388
462
704-0 to 1, 1911, 9811-0 to 3,
9937-0 to 3, 9938-0 to 3
9847
1912

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 80

Classification

[AppleTalk]
[Bindery]
[Cloning]
[Community]
[DDNS]
[DHCP]

[Directory]
[DNS]
[DPWS]

[E-mail]

[File]
[FTP]

Network

[HTTP]
[IP Conflict]
[IP Filter]

[IPP]

[IPv6]
[IPX]
[IP address]
[LDAP]
[LLTD]
[LPD]
[MAC address]
[MIB]
[Network logs]
[NDS]
[NIC]

Setting Mode (08)

Given in the Service
Given in the Service
Manual and Service
Manual
Handbook
1014, 1015, 1936, 3729,
3730
1026
3789, 9791
1065, 1066
1020, 1112, 3737, 3745,
3746, 3747, 3748
1755, 1756, 1757, 1759,
1760, 1762, 3772, 3773,
3774, 3778, 3779, 3780
1028, 1029
1017, 1018, 1019, 3736,
3781, 3782, 3784
3749, 3750, 3751, 3752,
3753, 3754, 3755, 3757,
3758, 3759, 3760, 3765,
3766, 3785, 3796
265, 1097, 1098, 1477,
1489, 1491, 3837, 8584,
8585, 8586, 8587, 8588,
9384, 9946, 9947, 9957,
9958, 9959, 9980, 9981
1779, 1782, 1783, 1784,
1785, 1786
1055, 1059, 1060, 1089,
1090, 1091, 1092, 3739,
3804
1030, 1031, 1032
1440
1720, 1721, 1722, 1723,
1724, 1725, 1726, 1727,
1728, 1729, 1730, 1731,
1732, 1733, 1734, 1735,
1736, 1737, 1738, 1739,
8804
1078, 1079, 1080, 1081,
1082, 1083, 1084, 1085,
1086, 1087, 1088,
1447,1448, 1449, 1450,
1451, 3725, 3726
3767, 3768, 3770, 3775,
3776, 3777
1011, 1099
1006, 1007, 1008, 1009,
1010, 1767, 1768
1016, 1138, 1923, 1924,
3743, 9629, 9933
3793
1075, 1076, 1077
1141, 8805
1063
8535, 8536, 8590-0 to 4,
8605, 8606
1027
1002

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 81

Classification

[Novell]
[PCL setting]
[PMK]
[POP3]

[RawPort]
[Raw/TCP]
[Raw printing]

[Bonjour]
[Role Base Access]
[Samba]
[SearchRoot]
[SLP]
[SMB]
[SMTP]

[SNMP]
[SNTP]
Network

[SSL]

[TRAP]
[WIA Scan Driver]
[InternetFAX]
[Offramp]
[Function]
[Automatic transferring]
[Initialization]
[Scan setting]

[Speed and settings]

[Direct SMTP]
[Data retention period]
[Domain]
[Authentication]

[Print queue]
[Prefix]

Setting Mode (08)

Given in the Service
Given in the Service
Manual and Service
Manual
Handbook
1093, 1094
973
9747, 9748
1046, 1047, 1048, 1049,
1050, 1051, 1052, 3742,
3744
945
1073, 1074, 3731, 3732
290, 291, 292, 293, 294,
295, 296, 297, 298, 299,
978, 979
1103, 1104, 1105
1493, 1928, 3871
1464, 3783, 3833
1095
1021
1023, 1024, 1025, 1117,
1124, 1950, 1951
1022, 1037, 1038, 1039,
1040, 1041, 1042, 1100,
1101, 1102, 1111, 3741
3631, 3845, 8803
1441, 1442, 1444, 1445,
1446, 3740
1740, 1741, 1742, 1743,
1744, 1745, 1746, 1747,
1748, 1749, 1750, 9819,
9822
1069, 1070
9749
266, 1114, 1485, 3812
1043, 1044, 1045
1432, 1435, 1436
660, 661
1119
1781-0 to 1, 1940, 3805,
3815, 3816, 3817, 3818,
3850
1003
3810, 3811
259, 260, 264
1113, 1121, 1122, 1123, 8589
1484, 1486, 1487, 1920,
1921, 1922, 1925, 1937,
1952, 1953, 1954, 1955,
1956, 1957, 1958, 1959,
3722, 3723, 3724, 8608,
8609, 8610, 8623
1096
3771

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 82

Classification

[Frame type]
[Temporary communication
password]
[Local I/F]
[telnet]
Network

[802.1X]
[IPsec]
[SCEP]

[WS Pull Scan]

[Supplicant]

Wireless LAN
[Driver]

Bluetooth

[Data encryption]
[Setting]
[ACS]

[HDD]
[JOB]

Counter

[External counter]
[Calibration counter]
[Count method]
[Paper source]
[Black toner cartridge drive]
[Paper size]

Setting Mode (08)

Given in the Service
Given in the Service
Manual and Service
Manual
Handbook
1012
9798

614
3864, 3865, 3866, 3867,
3868
8800, 8801, 8816, 8819,
9746
8802, 8815, 8820, 8821
8806, 8807, 8808, 8809,
8810, 8811, 8812, 8813,
8814
8817, 8818
1679, 1681, 1682, 1684,
1685, 1686, 1689, 1690,
1691, 1692, 1693, 1696,
1697, 1699, 1700, 1701,
1704, 1705, 1706, 1707,
1764, 1765, 1766
1661, 1662, 1663, 1664,
1665, 1666, 1667, 1668,
1669, 1670, 1671, 1672,
1673, 1674, 1675, 1676,
1677, 1678
1715
1710, 1711, 1712, 1713,
1714, 1719, 1941
6853-0 to 2, 6854-0 to 2,
6855-0 to 2, 6856-0 to 2,
6857-0 to 2, 6858-0 to 2,
6859-0 to 2, 6860-0 to 2,
6861-0 to 2, 6862-0 to 2,
6863-0 to 2, 6864-0 to 2
390, 391, 392, 393
6850-0 to 2, 6851-0 to 2,
6852-0 to 2
381, 1126, 8549, 8594
6817
616, 663
356, 357, 358, 359, 360,
370, 372, 374
1410-0 to 3
301-0 to 23, 303-0 to 23,
304-0 to 23, 305-0 to 23,
306-0 to 23, 307-0 to 23,
308-0 to 23, 309-0 to 23,
310-0 to 23, 311-0 to 23,
312-0 to 23, 313-0 to 23,
314-0 to 23, 315-0 to 23,
316-0 to 23, 6027-0 to 23,
6078-0 to 3

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 83

Classification

[Accelerating/Decelerating
mode]

[Tab paper]
[Special paper]
[Extra long size]
[Double count]
Counter

[Large/Small size]

[n-UP printing]

[Department counter]

Setting Mode (08)

Given in the Service
Given in the Service
Manual and Service
Manual
Handbook
6900, 6901, 6905-0 to 3,
6906-0 to 3, 6907-0 to 3,
6908-0 to 3, 6925-0 to 3,
6926-0 to 3, 6927-0 to 3,
6928-0 to 3, 6929-0 to 3,
6930-0 to 3, 6931-0 to 3,
6932-0 to 3, 6933-0 to 3,
6935-0 to 3, 6950-0 to 3,
6955-0 to 3, 6956-0 to 3,
6960-0 to 3, 6962-0 to 3
1412
6243
3800-0 to 1
6018
317-0 to 2, 318-0 to 2,
319-0 to 2, 320-0 to 2,
321-0 to 2, 322-0 to 2,
323-0 to 2, 324-0 to 2,
325-0 to 2, 326-0 to 2,
327-0 to 2, 328-0 to 2,
329-0 to 2, 330-0 to 2,
332-0 to 2, 333-0 to 2,
334-0 to 2, 335-0 to 2
1530-0 to 4, 1531-0 to 4,
1532-0 to 4, 1533-0 to 1,
1534-0 to 1, 1535,
6806-0 to 7, 6810-0 to 7,
6811-0 to 7, 6812-0 to 7,
6813-0 to 7, 6814-0 to 7,
6815-0 to 7, 6816-0 to 7
8616, 8617, 8618, 8619,
8620

[FAX]
[HDD]
[Engine]
[System]

915
944
903, 905, 907
900, 920, 921, 922, 923,
924, 925, 926, 927, 928,
929, 930, 931, 933, 934,
935, 936, 937, 938, 939
908, 911,
9965

Version
[Finisher]
[Imaging Acceleration
Board]
[FSMS]
[HTTP]
[PM counter]

Maintenance

344, 346, 347, 348, 349,

352, 353,

9945

999
726, 727, 728, 729, 730, 731
223, 5550, 5551, 5552,
5553, 5554, 5555, 5556,
5557, 5558, 5559, 5560,
5561, 5562, 5563, 5564,
5565, 5566, 5567, 5568,
5569, 5570, 5571, 5572,
5573, 5574, 5575, 5576,
5577, 5578, 5579, 5580,
5581, 5582, 5583, 5584,
5585, 6192, 6193, 6196,
6197

[Error history]
[Equipment number]

251, 252, 375, 376,

253
995

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 84

Classification

[Calibration]
[Emergency Mode]
[Service notification]

Maintenance
[Remote update]
[Supply order]

Electronic Filing

[Telephone]
[Panel calibration]
[Setting]

Data overwrite
enabler

[HDD]
[SRAM]

Setting Mode (08)

Given in the Service
Given in the Service
Manual and Service
Manual
Handbook
9059
710, 711
702, 703, 707, 715, 716,
717, 718, 719, 720, 721,
723, 767, 768, 769, 770,
771, 772, 773, 775, 776,
777, 778, 780, 781, 782,
783, 784, 785, 786, 787,
788, 789, 790, 791, 792,
793, 794, 795, 796, 1145,
1495, 9739
3630
732, 733, 734, 738, 739,
740, 741, 742, 743, 744,
745, 746, 747, 748, 749,
750, 751, 752, 753, 754,
755, 756, 757, 758, 759,
760, 761, 762, 763, 764,

2
774,

765

250
692
267, 270, 950, 976, 1497,
8613
1422, 1424,

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1426
1428

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 85

Classification

[HDD]
[EFI]
[EWB]
[PJL]
[Raw printing]
[S-ACS]
[USB]
[Thick paper ]
[TAT partition]
[Address book]
[Easy setup]
[Imaging Acceleration
Board]
[Overprint function setting]

General

Setting Mode (08)

Given in the Service
Given in the Service
Manual and Service
Manual
Handbook
670, 690, 693, 694, 9379
271, 691, 3625
700, 9950, 9956
3869
3797
9117, 8504
4565, 9934
3615, 3802, 9889
8533, 8534
1118
1125, 3508
9047
9966
8513-0

[Card authentication]
[Card reader]

1776-0 to 15
1772, 1773, 1774, 1775,
3521, 3522, 3523, 3524,
8595

[Custom size]
[Administrator's password]
[Summer time]

9381
1778
3852, 3853, 3854, 3855,
3856, 3857, 3858, 3859,
3860, 3861, 3862, 3863
201

[Destination]
[Initialization]
[Setting]

[Direct print]
[Databases]
[Default repeat count]
[Template]
[Partition]
[Banner]
[Date/Time]
[File]
[Department management]
[Private print]
[BANNER MESSAGE
button]
[Memory]
[User data management]

[Line]
[Duplex printing]

949, 975, 986, 1470, 1471,

9814, 9815, 9828, 9829,
9848, 9892, 9893, 9894,
9799
3803
685, 686
9789
3851, 9886, 9888

947
9826,

684,

662, 666, 667

678, 679, 680
200, 638
288, 1913, 1914, 1916
672

8537, 8597, 8601

681
615
1468, 1469, 1472, 1473,
1474, 1481, 1482, 1483,
1496
203
683

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 86

Classification

[KS/KSSM]

[Profile]

[SRAM board data check]

[Date unpacked]
[DIG partition]
[Counter/job list print]
[Default setting]
[Cartridge empty]

General

[Print image position

adjustment in secondary
scanning direction]
[Wide A4 Mode (for PCL)]
[Number of jobs in batch
processing]
[RIP standard paper
judgment]
[Outside erase]
[Scan setting]
[No paper message]
[ACS release]
[Panel]
[Hardcopy security printing]
[Electronic key]
[Real time log notification]
[Job status display]
[Converts spaces of folder
name into underscores]
[ScanToFile]
[External options I/F]
[User authentication]
[JOB STATUS]
[Mode]
[hrPrinterTable]
[Saving log]
[Operation of machine when
coin controller is used]

Setting Mode (08)

Given in the Service
Given in the Service
Manual and Service
Manual
Handbook
1960, 1961, 1963, 1964,
1965, 1966, 1967, 1968,
1970, 1971, 1972, 1973,
1974, 1975, 1976, 1977,
1978, 1979, 1980, 1984,
1985, 1986, 1987, 1988,
1989, 1990, 1991, 1992,
1993, 1994
1790-0 to 35, 1791, 1792,
1793, 1794-0 to 35, 1795,
1796, 1797, 1798-0 to 35,
3600-0 to 35, 3601, 3602,
3603, 3604-0 to 35, 3605,
3606, 3607, 3608-0 to 35,
4586,
4587-0 to 15, 4588-0 to 15,
4589-0 to 15, 4590-0 to 15
3612
3619
9954
503, 550, 585, 587, 588,
9972, 9977
8506
8508, 8509, 8510

8511
8512
8514
8515, 8516, 8600
8517, 8518, 8519, 8526,
8527, 8528
8524
8529-0 to 2, 8530-0 to 2,
8531-0 to 2,
8532
9883, 9884
3840, 3841, 3842, 3870
3623, 3624, 3626

8596, 8604
8599
8602, 8622
8603
8823
9984-0 to 4
3520
8611
8615
8628

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 87

Classification

General

[Default setting of color

mode]

Setting Mode (08)

Given in the Service
Given in the Service
Manual and Service
Manual
Handbook
8629

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 88

2.6.2

Operating Procedure
[CANCEL]

[0][8]
[POWER]

[Digital key]
(Code)

[Digital key]
*[FUNCTION CLEAR]
Sets or
changes value

[START]

[ENTER]
[POWER] OFF/ON
or
(Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)

[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)

Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).

Procedure 2
[0][8]
[POWER]

[Digital key]
(Code)

[ENTER]
or
[INTERRUPT]
Adjustment value
cannot be changed

[START]

[POWER]OFF/ON
(Exit)

Procedure 3
[0][8]
[POWER]

[Digital key]
(Code)

[START]

[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]

[INITIALIZE]
or
(Automatic setting)
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)

[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)

Procedure 4
[CANCEL]
[START]
[0][8]
[POWER]

[Digital key]
(Code)

[START]

[Digital key]
(Sub-code)

[START]

[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)

[ENTER]
or
[Digital key]
* [FUNCTION CLEAR] [INTERRUPT]
(Stores value
Sets or
in RAM)
changes value
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)

[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)

Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).

Procedure 7
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]

[Digital key]
(Code)

[START]

[Digital key]
(Setting)

[ENTER]
or
(HDD formatting)
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)

[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)

[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 89

Procedure 9
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]

[Digital key]
(Code)

[START]

[ENTER]
[POWER] OFF/ON
or
(Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)

[Select button]

Procedure 10
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]

[Digital key]
(Code)

[START]

[Digital key]
(1st setting)

[START]

[ENTER]
[POWER]
or
OFF/ON
[INTERRUPT]
(Exit)
(Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)

[Digital key]
(2nd setting)

[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)

Procedure 11 and 12
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]

[Digital key]
(Code)

[Digital key]
or
[ENTER]
[START]
[Software keyboard] *2(Stores value in RAM)
*1 [MONITOR/PAUSE]
Sets or
changes value [CLEAR]
(Corrects value)

[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)

*1 Press [MONITOR/PAUSE] to enter -, when entering telephone number.

*2 The data are stored in SYS-RAM in procedure 11 and stored in NIC-RAM
in procedure 12.
Procedure 14
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]

[Digital key]
(Code)

[START]

[Digital key]
(Sub-code)

[START]

[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

[ENTER]
or
[INTERRUPT]

[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)

Adjustment value
cannot be changed

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 90

2.6.3

Process
Setting mode (08)
Default
Functi <Accept
on
able
value>
ALL
0
<0-51>

Code

Classific
ation

400

Fuser

Fuser unit error status

counter

556

Image
control

Image quality closed-loop

control/Contrast voltage

ALL

1
<0-1>

557

Image
control

Image quality closed-loop

control/Laser power

ALL

1
<0-1>

573

Image
control

Abnormality detection
count (Y)
Display/0 clearing

ALL

0
<0-16>

574

Image
control

Abnormality detection
count (M)
Display/0 clearing

ALL

0
<0-16>

575

Image
control

Abnormality detection
count (C)
Display/0 clearing

ALL

0
<0-16>

Items

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

RAM

Contents

0: No error
1: C411 2: C412
3: C443 4: 5: C445, C465
6: C446, C466
7: C447 8: C468
9: C449
10 to 17: 18: C468 19: C449
20: C468 21: C449
22: C449 23: C449
24: C447 25: C449
26: C468 27: C449
28: C468 29: C449
30: 31: C4D0 32: C448
33: C467 34: C467
35 to 37: 38: C450 39: C450
40: 41: C451 42: C451
43: 44 to 47: 48: C450 49: C450
50: C452 51: C452
Sets whether or not
correcting the contrast
voltage in closed-loop
control.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Sets whether or not
correcting the laser
power in closed-loop
control.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Counts the abnormality
detection of image
quality control.
Accumulating total of
[CE10], [CE20] and
[CE40]
Counts the abnormality
detection of image
quality control.
Accumulating total of
[CE10], [CE20] and
[CE40]
Counts the abnormality
detection of image
quality control.
Accumulating total of
[CE10], [CE20] and
[CE40]

Proce
dure
1

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 91

Code
576

Classific
ation
Image
control

Items
Abnormality detection
count (K)
Display/0 clearing

Setting mode (08)

Default
Functi <Accept
on
able
value>
ALL
0
<0-16>

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

RAM

Contents

Counts the abnormality

detection of image
quality control.
Accumulating total of
[CE10], [CE20] and
[CE40]

Proce
dure
1

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 92

2.6.4

Code
4546

Printer
Setting mode (08)
Default
Classific
Functi <Accept
Items
ation
on
able
value>
ALL
5
Paper
Color registration
<0-5>
feeding adjustment control mode
setting

RAM
M

Contents
0: Not performed
automatically
1: (a)
2: (b)
3: (a) + (b)
4: (b) + (c)
5: (a) + (b) + (c)

Proce
dure
1

[Description]
(a) Performs the
adjustment
automatically at
warming-up.
(b) Performs the
adjustment
automatically when
printing after a
specified period of
time has been
completed.
(c) Performs the
adjustment
automatically at a
ready status after a
specified period of
time, or at a forcible
interruption of large
amount of printing.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 93

2.6.5

Code
251

252

344
346
347

Counter
Setting mode (08)
Default
Classific
Functi <Accept
Items
ation
on
able
value>
Maintena Setting value of PM sheet
ALL
Refer to
nce
counter / K
(black) content
<8 digits>

Maintena Current value of PM driving

nce
counter Display/0 clearing /
K
Counter Count setting of tab paper
(PM)
Counter Count setting of largesized paper (PM)
Counter Definition setting of large
sized paper (PM)

348

Counter

349

Counter

352

Counter

353

Counter

375

376

Count setting of thick paper

(PM)
Count setting of OHP film
(PM)
Count setting of largesized paper (Fee charging
system counter)

Definition setting of large

sized paper (Fee charging
system counter)
Maintena Setting value of PM driving
nce
counter display/0 clearing /
K
Maintena Current value of PM driving
nce
counter / K

ALL
0
(black) <8 digits>
ALL
ALL
ALL

ALL
ALL
ALL

ALL

1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
JPN: 0
OTHER:
1
<0-2>
0
<0-1>

RAM
M

M
M
M

M
M
M

ALL
170000
(black) <8 digits>

ALL
0
(black) <8 digits>

Contents
<Default value>
e-STUDIO2020C:
40000
e-STUDIO2330C:
46000
e-STUDIO2820C /
2830C:
56000
e-STUDIO3520C /
3530C / 4520C:
70000
[Unit. page]
Counts up when the
registration sensor is
ON.
0: Counted as 1
1: Counted as 2
0: Counted as 1
1: Counted as 2
0: A3/LD
1: A3/LD/B4/LG/
FOLIO/COMP
0: Counted as 1
1: Counted as 2
0: Counted as 1
1: Counted as 2
0: Counted as 1
1: Counted as 2
2: Counted as 1
(Mechanical counter
is double counter)
0: A3/LD
1: A3/LD/B4/LG/
FOLIO/COMP/8k
Time accumulating
counter
Counts the drum driving
time.

Proce
dure
1

1
1
1

1
1
1

Note:
In this equipment, a toner image is formed on the transfer belt prior to a paper feeding.
When the feeding retry occurs and the transport timing is delayed, the toner image on the
transfer belt is cleaned off without the 2nd transfer since the paper cannot be reached for the 2nd
transfer process.
After that, the toner image formation is retried while the paper is waited.
In this case, the toner for this image formation is consumed wastefully since the toner image on
the transfer belt is already cleaned off, even though the printing is normally completed.
Therefore, note that the excessive toner will be consumed consequently when the upper limit
value of feeding retry counter is set larger or set as 0 (no limit).
The toner is also consumed wastefully when the paper misfeeding occurs. Replace the roller at
earlier timing if the paper misfeedings have occurred frequently.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 94

2.6.6

Code

System

Classific
ation

Items

250

Maintena Service technician

nce
telephone number

253

Maintena Error history display

nce
User
Black-free function
interface

343

Setting mode (08)

Default
Functi <Accept
on
able
value>
ALL
0
<32
digits>

Contents

SYS

A telephone number
can be entered up to 32
digits. Use the
[MONITOR/PAUSE]
button to enter a
hyphen(-).
Displays the latest 20
errors data
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
If this code is set to "1"
(enabled), 08-588 is
automatically set to "1"
(black) and "0" (ACS)
and "2" (Full color)
cannot be selected. If
08-629 is set to "0"
(OFF) and 08-1482 is
set to "1" (ON), this
code is set to "0"
(Disabled) and "1" (ON)
cannot be set.
Clears SMS partition.
(Performs when the
service call [F106] has
occurred.)
Initializes the Electronic
Filing.
Initializes the shared
folder.
Display the HDD
information
(Ch.7.2.2)
Rebuilds all databases.
2: Normal formatting

11

Performs the calibration

of the pressing position
on the touch panel
(LCD screen). The
calibration is performed
by pressing 2 reference
positions after this code
is started up.
Returns the value to the
factory shipping default
value.
Checks the bad sector.

ALL

SYS

ALL

0
<0-1>

SYS

662

General

Clearing of SMS partition

ALL

SYS

666

General

BOX partition clearing

ALL

SYS

667

General

/SHA partition clearing

ALL

SYS

670

General

HDD diagnostic menu

display

ALL

SYS

684
690

General
General

Rebuilding all databases

HDD formatting

ALL
ALL

SYS
SYS

692

Maintena Performing panel

nce
calibration

ALL

2
<2>
-

693

General

Initialization of NIC
information

ALL

SYS

694

General

Performing HDD testing

ALL

SYS

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Proce
dure

RAM

SYS

2
1

3
3
2

3
7

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 95

Code
701

Setting mode (08)

Default
Classific
Functi <Accept
Items
ation
on
able
value>
FAX
Destination setting for FAX
FAX
EUR: 5
UC: 4
JPN: 0
Other: 1
<0-25>

RAM
SYS

765

Maintena Automatic ordering

nce
supplies
(Remote) Display

ALL

EUR: 2
UC: 0
JPN: 2
<0-2>

SYS

774

Maintena Display setting of [Service

nce
Notification] button
(Remote)

ALL

SYS

Contents

Proce
dure

0: Japan
1: Asia
2: Australia
3: Hong Kong
4: U.S.A./Canada
5: Germany
6: U.K.
7: Italy
8: Belgium
9: Netherlands
10: Finland
11: Spain
12: Austria
13: Switzerland
14: Sweden
15: Denmark
16: Norway
17: Portugal
18: France
19: Greece
20: Poland
21: Hungary
22: Czech
23: Turkey
24: South Africa
25: Taiwan
0: Valid
(FAX/Internet FAX)
1: Valid
(FAX/Internet FAX/
HTTP)
2: Invalid
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed

2
2
2
2
2

900

Version

System firmware ROM

version

ALL

NAD,
MJD: 1
Other: 0
<0-1>
-

903
905
907
908
911

Version
Version
Version
Version
Version

ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL

915
920

Version
Version

FAX
ALL

F562-XXX
VX.XX/X.XX

2
2

921

Version

ALL

VXXX.XXX X

922

Version

ALL

VXXX.XXX X

923

Version

ALL

VXXX.XXX X

924

Version

ALL

VXXX.XXX X

925

Version

Engine ROM version

Scanner ROM version
RADF ROM version
Finisher ROM version
Finisher punch ROM
version
FAX board ROM version
FROM basic section
software version
System firmware ROM
internal program version
UI data fixed section
version
UI data common section
version
Version of UI data
language 1 in HDD
Version of UI data
language 2 in HDD

JPN: T450SY0JXXX
UC: T450SY0UXXX
EUR: T450SY0EXXX
Others: T450SY0XXXX
450M-XXX
450S-XXX
DF-XXXX
SDL-XXX FIN-XXX
PUN-XXX

ALL

VXXX.XXX X

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 96

Code

Classific
ation

926

Version

927

Version

928

Version

929

Version

930

Version

931

Version

933
934

Version
Version

935

Version

936

Version

937

Version

938

Version

939

Version

944

Version

947

General

995

Items

Setting mode (08)

Default
Functi <Accept
on
able
value>
ALL
-

Version of UI data
language 3 in HDD
Version of UI data
language 4 in HDD
Version of UI data
language 5 in HDD
Version of UI data
language 6 in HDD
Version of UI data in
FROM displayed at powerON
Version of UI data
language 7 in HDD
Web data whole version
Web UI data in HDD
Version: Language 1
Web UI data in HDD
Version: Language 2
Web UI data in HDD
Version: Language 3
Web UI data in HDD
Version: Language 4
Web UI data in HDD
Version: Language 5
Web UI data in HDD
Version: Language 6
HDD version

RAM

Contents

Proce
dure

VXXX.XXX X

ALL

VXXX.XXX X

ALL

VXXX.XXX X

ALL

VXXX.XXX X

ALL

VXXX.XXX X

ALL

VXXX.XXX X

ALL
ALL

VXXX.XXX X
VXXX.XXX X

2
2

ALL

VXXX.XXX X

ALL

VXXX.XXX X

ALL

VXXX.XXX X

ALL

VXXX.XXX X

ALL

VXXX.XXX X

ALL

ALL

SYS

Maintena Equipment number

nce
(serial number) display

ALL

<10
digits>

SYS

1426

General

ALL

1428

Forcible SRAM backup

Data
overwrite data all clearing
enabler

ALL

9059

Maintena Display switchover for user

nce
calibration

ALL

MJD: 1
Other: 0
<0-1>

SYS

JPN: T450HD0JXXX
UC: T450HD0UXXX
EUR: T450HD0EXXX
Others: T450HD0XXXX
Perform this code when
the software in this
equipment has been
upgraded.
This code can be also
keyed in from the
adjustment mode (05976).
10 digits
HDD data is cleared in
the procedure set in 081424.
When this code is
performed, the
equipment cannot be
started up.
* This setting is
enabled only when
the GP-1070 is
installed.
Switches whether or not
to display a menu for
paper selection at user
calibration (automatic
gamma adjustment).
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed (for both
copy and print)

Initialization after software

version upgrade

Forcible HDD data clearing

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

11

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 97

Code
9379

9826
9965

Setting mode (08)

Default
Classific
Functi <Accept
Items
ation
on
able
value>
ALL
0
User
AES data encryption
<0-2>
interface function setting (Except for
CND)

General
Version

Disabling Media File Save

ALL

Imaging Acceleration
Board
SROM version

ALL

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

0
<0-1>
-

RAM

Contents

SYS

0: Encryption invalid
1: Encryption valid
(Security priority)
Encrypts all of the
user's data.
2: Encryption valid
(Performance
priority)
Encrypts the user's
data except the files
temporarily created
and deleted in the
image processing
such as copying or
printing.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
I-XX.X.X

SYS
-

Proce
dure
1

1
2

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 98

2.6.7

Pixel counter

[A] Outline
1. Outline
Pixel counter is a function that counts the number of dots emitted by the laser and converts it into the
print ratio (%) per standard paper size. This Print ratio (%) per standard paper size is called Pixel
count (%).
This function enables you to know how each user uses the equipment and to grasp the tendency of
toner consumption (number of output pages per cartridge).
2. Factors affecting toner consumption
Standard number of output pages per cartridge shows the average number of output pages under
the condition that the data of print ratio 6% is printed on the standard paper size (A4/LT) at a normal
temperature and humidity.
However, users do not always print under the above condition. As for the type of original, copy/print
mode and environment, each user has different tendency, and as a result, the number of output
pages per cartridge becomes different depending on the user.
The major factors affecting toner consumption are as follows:
- Original/Data coverage
- Original/Data density
- Original/Print mode
- Density setting
Also there are other factors in addition to the above, such as environment, individual difference of
equipment, difference in lot quality of materials, toner density and drum surface potential.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 99

Toner consumption

Toner consumption

The general relations between the above 4 factors and toner consumption per output page in the
copy function are as follows:

Toner consumption

Original density

Toner consumption

Original coverage

TEXT
/PHOTO

TEXT

PHOTO

PRINTED
IMAGE

Manual Manual Automatic Manual Manual Manual

density density density density density density
+5
+1
Center
-1
-5

MAP

Density setting

Original mode

Fig. 2-1 Factors affecting toner consumption and the tendency

3. Details of pixel counter

- Toner cartridge reference and service technician reference
The pixel counter function in this equipment has 2 references, toner cartridge reference and
service technician reference.
Toner cartridge reference
This is a system that accumulates data between the installation of a new toner cartridge and next
installation.
The installation of new toner cartridge is judged when the total number of pixel count or output
pages after the detection of toner cartridge empty has exceeded the threshold.
The threshold to be used is selectable in the setting mode (08-1506) between the pixel count and
output pages (0: Output pages 1: Pixel counter). The threshold of pixel count is set in the setting
mode (08-1508) and that of output pages is set in the setting mode (08-1507). When the new
toner cartridge is judged as installed, the data related with the previous cartridge is cleared and
replaced with the data after the installation of new cartridge. Clearing of the counter of the toner
cartridge reference is performed in the setting mode (08-1503).

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 100

Service technician reference

This is a system that accumulates data between clearing the counter of the service technician
reference by service technician and subsequently clearing the same counter.
Clearing of the counter of the service technician reference is performed in the setting mode (081502).
-

Print count (number of output pages)

The number of output pages shown at the pixel counter is counted after converting all paper
sizes to the standard paper size (A4/LT). Printing on other than the standard size is converted by
paper area ratio. The standard paper size is set in the setting mode (08-1500).
The examples of conversion are as follows:
Ex.)
1 is added to the print count when printing on A4/LT size.
2 is added to the print count when printing on A3/LD size. (area ratio to A4/LT: 200%)
1.49 is added to the print count when printing on B4 size. (area ratio to A4: 149%)
1.27 is added to the print count when printing on LG size. (area ratio to LT: 127%)

Pixel count (%)

Pixel count (%) shows the ratio of laser emitting pixels to all pixels on standard paper.
The examples of pixel count are as follows:
Note:
In the following examples, solid copy is considered to be 100%. But since the image has 4
margins, it never becomes 100% actually.
Ex.)
Printing 5 pages on A4/LT size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.)
Pixel count: 100%, Print count: 5
Printing 5 pages on A4/LT size with blank copy (Laser never emits.)
Pixel count: 0%, Print count: 5
Printing 2 pages on A4/LT size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.)
Printing 2 pages on A4/LT size with blank copy (Laser never emits.)
Pixel count: 50%, Print count: 4
Printing 3 pages on A4/LT size with 6% of laser emission
Printing 1 page on A4/LT size with 2% of laser emission
Pixel count: 5%, Print count: 4
Printing 2 pages on A3/LD size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.)
Pixel count: 100%, Print count: 4
Printing 2 pages on A3/LD size with 6% of laser emission
Pixel count: 6%, Print count: 4

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 101

Average pixel count (%) and latest pixel count (%)

There are 2 types of the value calculated as the pixel count, average pixel count (%) and latest
pixel count (%).
Average pixel count (%)
The average value of all pixel count data after each reference data is cleared is calculated and
displayed.
Latest pixel count (%)
The value is displayed for printing just before the pixel counter is confirmed.

Type of calculated data

Since this is multifunctional and color equipment, the data of pixel count is calculated for each
function and color.
The following list is the information that can be confirmed by LCD screen. But actually, more
information can be confirmed by the setting mode (08).
See after-mentioned 5)-Display in the setting mode (08) for details.
: With data
: Without data
Toner cartridge reference

Copier function
Printer function
FAX function
Total

Yellow

Magen
ta

Cyan

Service technician reference

Black

Total

Full color/Twin color

Magen
Yellow
Cyan
ta

Black

Black

Table 2-201 Type of calculated data

-

Setting related with the pixel counter function

Standard paper size setting
The standard paper size (A4 or LT) to convert it into the pixel count is selected (08-1500).
Pixel counter display setting
Whether or not to display the pixel counter on the LCD screen is selected (08-1504).
Display reference setting
The reference when displaying the pixel counter on the LCD screen (toner cartridge reference or
service technician reference) is selected (08-1505).
Determination counter of toner empty
This is the counter to determine the replacement of new toner cartridge after the toner empty is
detected.
After the toner empty is detected by the auto-toner sensor, this counter checks if toner empty is
not detected one more time while the specified number of pixel count or output pages is counted.
Pixel counter clearing
There are 3 types for the pixel count clear as follows:
08-1501: All information related to the pixel count is cleared.
08-1502: All information related to the service technician reference pixel count is cleared.
08-1503: All information related to the toner cartridge reference pixel count is cleared.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 102

4. Relation between pixel count and toner consumption

The users printing out the image with large coverage or high density may cause the large value of
pixel count. And the setting that toner consumption becomes high in the original mode or density
setting may cause it as well.
In this case, the replacement cycle of toner cartridge is faster than the standard number of output
pages. Therefore, this trend needs to be grasped for the service.
The relation between pixel count and number of output pages per cartridge is as follows:

Number of output pages per cartridge (Page)

Standard number of output pages (K)

Y

Standard number of output pages (Y, M, C)

Y/2

X/2
Y/10
X/10
60%

6% 12%

Pixel count (%)

Fig. 2-2 Pixel count and number of output pages per cartridge

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 103

5. Pixel counter confirmation

- Display on LCD screen
Whether or not to display the pixel counter on the LCD screen is selected (0: Displayed, 1: Not
displayed) in the setting mode (08-1504), and whether or not to display it at the service
technician reference or toner cartridge reference is selected (0: Service technician reference, 1:
Toner cartridge reference) in the setting mode (08-1505).
The following screen is displayed when the buttons, [COUNTER] and [PIXEL COUNTER] are
pressed in this order after Displayed is selected with the code above and the power is, as usual,
turned ON. (The displayed buttons are depending on the setting of 08-1505.)

Fig. 2-3

Fig. 2-4 Reference selection screen

When selecting and pressing the button in the above screen, each pixel counter screen is
displayed.
[TONER CARTRIDGE] button: Information screen of toner cartridge reference is displayed.
e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 104

[SERVICE (COLOR)] button: Information screen of service technician reference (full color) is
displayed.
[SERVICE (BLACK)] button: Information screen of service technician reference (black) is
displayed.
The following screen is displayed when pressing the [TONER CARTRIDGE] button.

Fig. 2-5 Information screen of toner cartridge reference

The following screen is displayed when pressing the [SERVICE (COLOR)] button.

Fig. 2-6 Information screen of service technician reference (full color)

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 105

The following screen is displayed when pressing the [SERVICE (BLACK)] button.

Fig. 2-7 Information screen of service technician reference (black)

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 106

Data list printing

The data for pixel counter can be printed in the list print mode (9S).
9S-104: The data of the toner cartridge reference is printed.
9S-105: The data of service technician reference is printed.

PIXEL COUNTER CODE LIST

'08-02-08 20:13

TOSHIBA e-STUDIO4520C
TONERCARTRIDGE
No DATE
COL.
--------------------------0 20080208 Y
1 20080208 Y
2 20080208 Y
3 20080208 M
4 20080208 M
5 20080208 M
6 20080208 C
7 20080208 C
8 20080208 C
9 20080208 K
10 20080208 K
11 20080208 K

Print Count[LT/A4]
Average Pixel Count[%]
Latest Pixel Count[%]
Print Count[LT/A4]
Average Pixel Count[%]
Latest Pixel Count[%]
Print Count[LT/A4]
Average Pixel Count[%]
Latest Pixel Count[%]
Print Count[LT/A4]
Average Pixel Count[%]
Latest Pixel Count[%]

PPC

PRN

FAX

TOTAL

181
2.70
6.15
181
6.11
6.82
181
5.46
6.42
278
6.15
7.32

45
1.74
0.39
45
2
2.15
45
2
2.73
145
3.86
2.19

------------------9
23.25
6.25

226
2.51
0.39
226
5.29
2.15
226
4.81
2.73
432
5.74
2.19

Fig. 2-8 Data list of toner cartridge reference

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 107

PIXEL COUNTER CODE LIST

'08-02-08 20:13
TOSHIBA e-STUDIO4520C
SERVICEMAN

No DATE
COL.
--------------------------0 20080208 F
Print Count[LT/A4]
1 20080208 F
Average Pixel Count[%]
2 20080208 F
Latest Pixel Count[%]
3 20080208 Y
Print Count[LT/A4]
4 20080208 Y
Average Pixel Count[%]
5 20080208 Y
Latest Pixel Count[%]
6 20080208 M
Print Count[LT/A4]
7 20080208 M
Average Pixel Count[%
8 20080208 M
Latest Pixel Count[%]
9 20080208 C
Print Count[LT/A4]
10 20080208 C
Average Pixel Count[%]
11 20080208 C
Latest Pixel Count[%]
12 20080208 K
Print Count[LT/A4]
13 20080208 K
Average Pixel Count[%]
14 20080208 K
Latest Pixel Count[%]
15 20080208 K
Print Count[LT/A4]
16 20080208 K
Average Pixel Count[%]
17 20080208 K
Latest Pixel Count[%]

PPC

PRN

FAX

TOTAL

181
4.95
8.36
181
2.7
6.15
181
6.11
6.82
181
5.46
6.42
181
5.51
14.05
97
7.36
7.32

45
2.34
2.34
45
1.74
0.39
45
2
2.15
45
2.18
2.73
45
3.43
4.10
100
4.06
2.19

------------------------------9
23.25
6.25

226
4.43
2.34
226
2.51
0.39
226
5.29
2.15
226
4.81
2.73
226
5.10
4.10
206
6.45
2.19

Fig. 2-9 Data list of service technician reference

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 108

Display in the setting mode (08)

Information of pixel count can be also checked in the setting mode (08).
For details, see
P.2-94 "2.6.5 Counter".
Print count, pixel count
Full color/Twin color

Copier
function

Printer
function

FAX function

Total

Print count
(page)
Average pixel count
(%)
Latest pixel count
(%)
Print count
(page)
Average pixel count
(%)
Latest pixel count
(%)
Print count
(page)
Average pixel count
(%)
Latest pixel count
(%)
Average pixel count
(%)

Yellow

Magenta

Cyan

Black

1557

1559

1561

1552

1553

Black
(at color)
+
Black
-

1609

1610

1611

1612

1613

1614

1626

1627

1628

1629

1639

1558

1560

1562

1554

1555

1615

1616

1617

1618

1619

1620

1630

1631

1632

1633

1640

1556

1625

1634

1621

1622

1623

1624

Black

Table 2-202 Pixel count code table (toner cartridge reference)

Copier
function

Printer
function

FAX function

Total

Print count
(page)
Average pixel count
(%)
Latest pixel count
(%)
Print count
(page)
Average pixel count
(%)
Latest pixel count
(%)
Print count
(page)
Average pixel count
(%)
Latest pixel count
(%)
Average pixel count
(%)

Total
1547

Full color/Twin color

Yellow Magenta
Cyan
-

Black
-

Black
1548

1577

1578

1579

1580

1581

1592

1596

1597

1598

1599

1600

1606

1549

1550

1582

1583

1584

1585

1586

1593

1601

1602

1603

1604

1605

1607

1551

1594

1608

1587

1588

1589

1590

1591

1595

Table 2-203 Pixel count code table (service technician reference)

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 109

Pixel count distribution

Copier
function
Printer
function
FAX function

Print count distribution

(page)
Print count distribution
(page)
Print count distribution
(page)

Yellow
1641

Full color/Twin color

Magenta
Cyan
1642
1643

Black
1644

Black
1649

1645

1646

1647

1648

1650

1651

Table 2-204 Pixel count code table

Note:
By entering the sub code at the above code, the pixel count distribution can be displayed
dividing into 10 ranges. The sub codes are as follows.
0: 0 - 5%
1: 5.1 - 10%
2: 10.1 - 15% 3: 15.1 - 20% 4: 20.1 - 25%
5: 25.1 - 30% 6: 30.1 - 40% 7: 40.1 - 60% 8: 60.1- 80% 9: 80.1 - 100%
Other information
Toner cartridge replacement counter.
The toner cartridge replacement count is displayed.
08-1563: Toner cartridge Y
08-1564: Toner cartridge M
08-1565: Toner cartridge C
08-1566: Toner cartridge K
Toner cartridge reference count started date
The toner cartridge reference count started date is displayed.
08-1515: Toner cartridge Y
08-1516: Toner cartridge M
08-1517: Toner cartridge C
08-1518: Toner cartridge K
Service technician reference cleared date
The service technician reference cleared date (08-1510) is displayed.
The date (08-1502 was performed) is stored.
Toner cartridge reference cleared date
The toner cartridge reference cleared date is displayed.
The date (08-1503 was performed) is stored.
08-1511: Toner cartridge Y
08-1512: Toner cartridge M
08-1513: Toner cartridge C
08-1514: Toner cartridge K

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 110

[B] Pixel counter related code

Note:
In the pixel counter function, the twin color copy mode is regarded as the full color mode.

Code

Classific
ation

Items

1504

Pixel
counter

Pixel counter display

setting

1505

Pixel
counter

Displayed reference
setting

Setting mode (08)

Default
Functi <Accept
on
able
value>
ALL
1
<0-1>

ALL

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

0
<0-1>

RAM
SYS

SYS

Contents
Selects whether or not
to display the pixel
counter on the LCD
screen.
0: Displayed
1: Not displayed
Selects the reference
when displaying the
pixel counter on the
LCD screen.
0: Service technician
reference
1: Toner cartridge
reference

Proce
dure
1

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 111

2.6.8

PM support mode related code

The management items at PM support mode can also be operated at setting mode (08).
The following items are displayed or set by using sub-codes at PM management setting in the table
below.
<Sub-codes>
0: Present number of output pages
- Means the present number of output pages.
1: Recommended number of output pages for replacement
- Means the recommended number of output pages for replacement.
2: Number of output pages at the last replacement
- Means the number of output pages at the last replacement.
3: Present driving counts
- Means the present drive counts (1 count = 2 seconds).
4: Recommended driving counts to be replaced
- Means the recommended drive counts for replacement (1 count = 2 seconds).
5: Driving counts at the last replacement
- Means the drive counts at the last replacement.
6: Present output pages for control
- Means the present number of output pages for controlling.
7: Present driving counts for control
- Means the present drive counts for controlling (1 count = 2 seconds).
8: Number of times replaced
- Counts up when clearing the counter of each unit in the PM Support Mode Screen.
Notes:
Sub-code 0 is equivalent to sub-code 6.
Sub-code 3 is equivalent to sub-code 7.
When the value of sub-code 3 is changed, the value of sub-code 7 is also updated and vice
versa.
When 0 is set at one of sub-codes 0, 3, 6 and 7, the rest of them are automatically updated
to 0.

Items
Photoconductive drum
(K)

Photoconductive drum
(Y)

PM management
setting <Procedure
4> *Indicated in 8
digits
1150-0 to 8

1152-0 to 8

Date of previous
replacement
<Procedure 2>
1151

1153

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Remarks
<Default values of code 1150
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/
0
Sub-code 1: 40,000/46,000/56,000/
56,000/70,000/70,000/70,000
Sub-code 4: 170,000/170,000/170,000/
170,000/170,000/170,000/170,000
<Default values of code 1152
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/
0
Sub-code 1: 40,000/46,000/56,000/
56,000/70,000/70,000/70,000
Sub-code 4: 170,000/170,000/170,000/
170,000/170,000/170,000/170,000

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 112

PM management
setting <Procedure
4> *Indicated in 8
digits

Date of previous
replacement
<Procedure 2>

Photoconductive drum
(M)

1154-0 to 8

1155

Photoconductive drum
(C)

1156-0 to 8

1157

Drum cleaning blade

(K)

1158-0 to 8

1159

Drum blade cleaner (Y)

1160-0 to 8

1161

Drum blade cleaner (M)

1162-0 to 8

1163

Drum blade cleaner (C)

1164-0 to 8

1165

Items

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Remarks
<Default values of code 1154
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/
0
Sub-code 1: 40,000/46,000/56,000/
56,000/70,000/70,000/70,000
Sub-code 4: 170,000/170,000/170,000/
170,000/170,000/170,000/170,000
<Default values of code 1156
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/
0
Sub-code 1: 40,000/46,000/56,000/
56,000/70,000/70,000/70,000
Sub-code 4: 170,000/170,000/170,000/
170,000/170,000/170,000/170,000
<Default values of code 1158
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/
0
Sub-code 1: 40,000/46,000/56,000/
56,000/70,000/70,000/70,000
Sub-code 4: 170,000/170,000/170,000/
170,000/170,000/170,000/170,000
<Default values of code 1160
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/
0
Sub-code 1: 40,000/46,000/56,000/
56,000/70,000/70,000/70,000
Sub-code 4: 170,000/170,000/170,000/
170,000/170,000/170,000/170,000
<Default values of code 1162
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/
0
Sub-code 1: 40,000/46,000/56,000/
56,000/70,000/70,000/70,000
Sub-code 4: 170,000/170,000/170,000/
170,000/170,000/170,000/170,000
<Default values of code 1164
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/
0
Sub-code 1: 40,000/46,000/56,000/
56,000/70,000/70,000/70,000
Sub-code 4: 170,000/170,000/170,000/
170,000/170,000/170,000/170,000

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 113

PM management
setting <Procedure
4> *Indicated in 8
digits

Date of previous
replacement
<Procedure 2>

Charger grid (K)

1174-0 to 8

1175

Charger grid (Y)

1176-0 to 8

1177

Charger grid (M)

1178-0 to 8

1179

Charger grid (C)

1180-0 to 8

1181

Charger (Wire/
needle)(K)

1182-0 to 8

1183

Charger (Wire/
needle)(Y)

1184-0 to 8

1185

Items

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Remarks
<Default values of code 1174
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/
0
Sub-code 1: 40,000/46,000/56,000/
56,000/70,000/70,000/70,000
Sub-code 4: 170,000/170,000/170,000/
170,000/170,000/170,000/170,000
<Default values of code 1176
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/
0
Sub-code 1: 40,000/46,000/56,000/
56,000/70,000/70,000/70,000
Sub-code 4: 170,000/170,000/170,000/
170,000/170,000/170,000/170,000
<Default values of code 1178
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/
0
Sub-code 1: 40,000/46,000/56,000/
56,000/70,000/70,000/70,000
Sub-code 4: 170,000/170,000/170,000/
170,000/170,000/170,000/170,000
<Default values of code 1180
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/
0
Sub-code 1: 40,000/46,000/56,000/
56,000/70,000/70,000/70,000
Sub-code 4: 170,000/170,000/170,000/
170,000/170,000/170,000/170,000
<Default values of code 1182
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/
0
Sub-code 1: 40,000/46,000/56,000/
56,000/70,000/70,000/70,000
Sub-code 4: 170,000/170,000/170,000/
170,000/170,000/170,000/170,000
<Default values of code 1184
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/
0
Sub-code 1: 40,000/46,000/56,000/
56,000/70,000/70,000/70,000
Sub-code 4: 170,000/170,000/170,000/
170,000/170,000/170,000/170,000

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 114

PM management
setting <Procedure
4> *Indicated in 8
digits

Date of previous
replacement
<Procedure 2>

Charger (Wire/
needle)(M)

1186-0 to 8

1187

Charger (Wire/
needle)(C)

1188-0 to 8

1189

Charger cleaning pad

(K)

1190-0 to 8

1191

Charger cleaning pad

(Y)

1192-0 to 8

1193

Charger cleaning pad

(M)

1194-0 to 8

1195

Charger cleaning pad

(C)

1196-0 to 8

1197

Items

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Remarks
<Default values of code 1186
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/
0
Sub-code 1: 40,000/46,000/56,000/
56,000/70,000/70,000/70,000
Sub-code 4: 170,000/170,000/170,000/
170,000/170,000/170,000/170,000
<Default values of code 1188
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/
0
Sub-code 1: 40,000/46,000/56,000/
56,000/70,000/70,000/70,000
Sub-code 4: 170,000/170,000/170,000/
170,000/170,000/170,000/170,000
<Default values of code 1190
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/
0
Sub-code 1: 40,000/46,000/56,000/
56,000/70,000/70,000/70,000
Sub-code 4: 170,000/170,000/170,000/
170,000/170,000/170,000/170,000
<Default values of code 1192
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/
0
Sub-code 1: 40,000/46,000/56,000/
56,000/70,000/70,000/70,000
Sub-code 4: 170,000/170,000/170,000/
170,000/170,000/170,000/170,000
<Default values of code 1194
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/
0
Sub-code 1: 40,000/46,000/56,000/
56,000/70,000/70,000/70,000
Sub-code 4: 170,000/170,000/170,000/
170,000/170,000/170,000/170,000
<Default values of code 1196
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/
0
Sub-code 1: 40,000/46,000/56,000/
56,000/70,000/70,000/70,000
Sub-code 4: 170,000/170,000/170,000/
170,000/170,000/170,000/170,000

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 115

PM management
setting <Procedure
4> *Indicated in 8
digits

Date of previous
replacement
<Procedure 2>

Ozone filter-1

1198-0 to 8

1199

Developer material (K)

1200-0 to 8

1201

Developer material (Y)

1202-0 to 8

1203

Developer material (M)

1204-0 to 8

1205

Developer material (C)

1206-0 to 8

1207

Transfer (Wire/Roller/
1st transfer K roller)

1214-0 to 8

1215

Items

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Remarks
<Default values of code 1198
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/
0
Sub-code 1: 40,000/46,000/56,000/
56,000/70,000/70,000/70,000
Sub-code 4: 170,000/170,000/170,000/
170,000/170,000/170,000/170,000
<Default values of code 1200
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/
0
Sub-code 1: 40,000/46,000/56,000/
56,000/70,000/70,000/70,000
Sub-code 4: 125,000/125,000/125,000/
125,000/125,000/125,000/125,000
<Default values of code 1202
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/
0
Sub-code 1: 40,000/46,000/56,000/
56,000/70,000/70,000/70,000
Sub-code 4: 125,000/125,000/125,000/
125,000/125,000/125,000/125,000
<Default values of code 1204
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/
0
Sub-code 1: 40,000/46,000/56,000/
56,000/70,000/70,000/70,000
Sub-code 4: 125,000/125,000/125,000/
125,000/125,000/125,000/125,000
<Default values of code 1206
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/
0
Sub-code 1: 40,000/46,000/56,000/
56,000/70,000/70,000/70,000
Sub-code 4: 125,000/125,000/125,000/
125,000/125,000/125,000/125,000
<Default values of code 1214
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/
0
Sub-code 1: 40,000/46,000/56,000/
56,000/70,000/70,000/70,000
Sub-code 4: 170,000/170,000/170,000/
170,000/170,000/170,000/170,000

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 116

PM management
setting <Procedure
4> *Indicated in 8
digits

Date of previous
replacement
<Procedure 2>

Transfer (Wire/Roller/
1st transfer Y roller)

1216-0 to 8

1217

Transfer (Wire/Roller/
1st transfer M roller)

1218-0 to 8

1219

Transfer (Wire/Roller/
1st transfer C roller)

1220-0 to 8

1221

Transfer belt

1228-0 to 8

1229

Transfer belt cleaning

blade

1232-0 to 8

1233

2nd transfer roller

1240-0 to 8

1241

Items

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Remarks
<Default values of code 1216
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/
0
Sub-code 1: 40,000/46,000/56,000/
56,000/70,000/70,000/70,000
Sub-code 4: 170,000/170,000/170,000/
170,000/170,000/170,000/170,000
<Default values of code 1218
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/
0
Sub-code 1: 40,000/46,000/56,000/
56,000/70,000/70,000/70,000
Sub-code 4: 170,000/170,000/170,000/
170,000/170,000/170,000/170,000
<Default values of code 1220
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/
0
Sub-code 1: 40,000/46,000/56,000/
56,000/70,000/70,000/70,000
Sub-code 4: 170,000/170,000/170,000/
170,000/170,000/170,000/170,000
<Default values of code 1228
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/
0
Sub-code 1: 40,000/46,000/56,000/
56,000/70,000/70,000/70,000
Sub-code 4: 170,000/170,000/170,000/
170,000/170,000/170,000/170,000
<Default values of code 1232
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/
0
Sub-code 1: 160,000/184,000/224,000/
224,000/280,000/280,000/280,000
Sub-code 4: 680,000/680,000/680,000/
680,000/680,000/680,000/680,000
<Default values of code 1240
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/
0
Sub-code 1: 160,000/184,000/224,000/
224,000/280,000/280,000/280,000
Sub-code 4: 680,000/680,000/680,000/
680,000/680,000/680,000/680,000

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 117

PM management
setting <Procedure
4> *Indicated in 8
digits

Date of previous
replacement
<Procedure 2>

Pressure roller

1250-0 to 8

1251

Pressure roller
separation finger

1270-0 to 8

1271

Fuser belt

1272-0 to 8

1273

Fuser roller

1274-0 to 8

1275

Fuser belt guide

1276-0 to 8

1277

1282-0, 1, 2, 8

1283

1284-0,1,2,8

1285

Items

Pickup roller
(RADF)

Feed roller
(RADF)

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Remarks
<Default values of code 1250
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/
0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/92,000/112,000/
112,000/140,000/140,000/140,000
Sub-code 4: 340,000/340,000/340,000/
340,000/340,000/340,000/340,000
<Default values of code 1270
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/
0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/92,000/112,000/
112,000/140,000/140,000/140,000
Sub-code 4: 340,000/340,000/340,000/
340,000/340,000/340,000/340,000
<Default values of code 1272
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/
0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/92,000/112,000/
112,000/140,000/140,000/140,000
Sub-code 4: 340,000/340,000/340,000/
340,000/340,000/340,000/340,000
<Default values of code 1274
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/
0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/92,000/112,000/
112,000/140,000/140,000/140,000
Sub-code 4: 340,000/340,000/340,000/
340,000/340,000/340,000/340,000
<Default values of code 1276
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/
0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/92,000/112,000/
112,000/140,000/140,000/140,000
Sub-code 4: 340,000/340,000/340,000/
340,000/340,000/340,000/340,000
<Default values of code 1282
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 120,000/120,000/120,000/
120,000/120,000/120,000/120,000
<Default values of code 1284
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 120,000/120,000/120,000/
120,000/120,000/120,000/120,000

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 118

PM management
setting <Procedure
4> *Indicated in 8
digits

Date of previous
replacement
<Procedure 2>

Separation roller
(RADF)

1286-0, 1, 2, 8

1287

Pickup roller
(1st drawer)

1290-0, 1, 2, 8

1291

Pickup roller
(2nd drawer)

1292-0,1,2,8

1293

Pickup roller
(LCF)

1294-0,1,2,8

1295

Feed roller
(1st drawer)

1298-0,1,2,8

1299

Feed roller
(2nd drawer)

1300-0,1,2,8

1301

1302-0, 1, 2, 8

1303

Separation roller
(1st drawer)

1306-0,1,2,8

1307

Separation roller
(2nd drawer)

1308-0,1,2,8

1309

Separation roller
(LCF)

1310-0,1,2,8

1311

Items

Feed roller
(LCF)

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Remarks
<Default values of code 1286
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 120,000/120,000/120,000/
120,000/120,000/120,000/120,000
<Default values of code 1290
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000/
80,000/80,000/80,000/80,000
<Default values of code 1292
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000/
80,000/80,000/80,000/80,000
<Default values of code 1294
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 160,000/160,000/160,000/
160,000/160,000/160,000/160,000
<Default values of code 1298
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000/
80,000/80,000/80,000/80,000
<Default values of code 1300
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000/
80,000/80,000/80,000/80,000
<Default values of code 1302
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 160,000/160,000/160,000/
160,000/160,000/160,000/160,000
<Default values of code 1306
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000/
80,000/80,000/80,000/80,000
<Default values of code 1308
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000/
80,000/80,000/80,000/80,000
<Default values of code 1310
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 160,000/160,000/160,000/
160,000/160,000/160,000/160,000

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 119

PM management
setting <Procedure
4> *Indicated in 8
digits

Date of previous
replacement
<Procedure 2>

Separation roller
(PFP upper drawer)

1312-0,1,2,8

1313

Separation roller
(PFP lower drawer)

1314-0,1,2,8

1315

Separation roller
(Bypass unit)

1316-0,1,2,8

1317

Feed roller
(PFP upper drawer)

1320-0,1,2,8

1321

Feed roller
(PFP lower drawer)

1322-0,1,2,8

1323

Feed roller
(Bypass unit)

1324-0,1,2,8

1325

Pickup roller
(PFP upper drawer)

1328-0,1,2,8

1329

Pickup roller
(PFP lower drawer)

1330-0,1,2,8

1331

Pickup roller
(Bypass unit)

1332-0,1,2,8

1333

Items

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Remarks
<Default values of code 1312
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000/
80,000/80,000/80,000/80,000
<Default values of code 1314
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000/
80,000/80,000/80,000/80,000
<Default values of code 1316
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000/
80,000/80,000/80,000/80,000
<Default values of code 1320
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000/
80,000/80,000/80,000/80,000
<Default values of code 1322
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000/
80,000/80,000/80,000/80,000
<Default values of code 1324
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000/
80,000/80,000/80,000/80,000
<Default values of code 1328
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000/
80,000/80,000/80,000/80,000
<Default values of code 1330
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000/
80,000/80,000/80,000/80,000
<Default values of code 1332
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000/
80,000/80,000/80,000/80,000

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 120

Items
Ozone filter-2

PM management
setting <Procedure
4> *Indicated in 8
digits

Date of previous
replacement
<Procedure 2>

1340-0 to 8

1341

2nd transfer facing

roller cleaning Mylar

1342-0 to 8

1343

Developer filter(K)

5600-0 to 8

5601

Developer filter(Y)

5602-0 to 8

5603

Developer filter(M)

5604-0 to 8

5605

Developer filter(C)

5606-0 to 8

5607

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Remarks
<Default values of code 1340
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/
0
Sub-code 1: 160,000/184,000/224,000/
224,000/280,000/280,000/280,000
Sub-code 4: 680,000/680,000/680,000/
680,000/680,000/680,000/680,000
<Default values of code 1342
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/
0
Sub-code 1: 160,000/184,000/224,000/
224,000/280,000/280,000/280,000
Sub-code 4: 680,000/680,000/680,000/
680,000/680,000/680,000/680,000
<Default values of code 5600
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/
0
Sub-code 1: 40,000/46,000/56,000/
56,000/70,000/70,000/70,000
Sub-code 4: 125,000/125,000/125,000/
125,000/125,000/125,000/125,000
<Default values of code 5602
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/
0
Sub-code 1: 40,000/46,000/56,000/
56,000/70,000/70,000/70,000
Sub-code 4: 125,000/125,000/125,000/
125,000/125,000/125,000/125,000
<Default values of code 5604
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/
0
Sub-code 1: 40,000/46,000/56,000/
56,000/70,000/70,000/70,000
Sub-code 4: 125,000/125,000/125,000/
125,000/125,000/125,000/125,000
<Default values of code 5606
(e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/
3520C/3530C/4520C)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0/0/0/
0
Sub-code 1: 40,000/46,000/56,000/
56,000/70,000/70,000/70,000
Sub-code 4: 125,000/125,000/125,000/
125,000/125,000/125,000/125,000

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2 - 121

2.6.9

Default setting / restore setting of the EFI Printer Board

The codes whose value can be changed by performing Default setting of the EFI Printer Board (08700) or Restore setting of the EFI Printer Board (08-9952) are listed below.
Adjustment mode (05)
Code
7322-0
7322-1
7322-2
8102-0
8102-1
8102-2
8118-0
8118-1
8118-2

Item
Tagbit extension processing for printing
(Black mode)
Tagbit extension processing for printing
(Color mode)
Sharpness adjustment / PS

PS
PCL
XPS
PS
PCL
XPS
Text
Graphics
Image

Default value
when 08-700 is
performed
1
1
1
1
1
1
128
128
128

Default value
when 08-9952 is
performed
1
1
1
1
1
1
128
128
128

Default value
when 08-700 is
performed
1
10 250 250 249
255 255 255 252
10 250 250 250
2
2
50021
2
2
2
2
2
2
0

Default value
when 08-9952 is
performed
2
000 000 000 000
000 000 000 000
000 000 000 000
1
1
21
1
1
1
1
1
1
0

18

Setting mode (08)

Code

Item

1006
1008
1009
1010
1011
1014
1060
1073
1075
1078
1089
1103
1464
8508

Address Mode
IP address
Subnet mask
Gateway
Availability of IPX
Availability of AppleTalk
TCP port number of FTP server
Availability of Raw/TCP
Availability of LPD client
Availability of IPP
Availability of FTP print
Bonjour setting
Samba server ON/OFF setting
Controlling method for print image position adjustment
in secondary scanning direction
Controlling amount for print image position adjustment
in secondary scanning direction
Menu display for controlling print image position
adjustment in secondary scanning direction

8509
8510

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 122

3.

ADJUSTMENT

3.1
3.1.1

Image Related Adjustment

Adjustment Order

This chapter mainly explains the procedures for image related adjustment. When replacing
components which have other specified instructions for adjustment, those specified instructions are to
be obeyed in priority.
In the following diagram, the solid lines with arrow lead to essential adjustments, while the dotted lines
lead to adjustments to be performed if necessary.

Developer material

Photoconductive drum
1st transfer roller(*1)
Main charger grid

Parts to be replaced
Drum cleaning blade

Transfer belt(*1)
Image position aligning
Needle electrode
sensor(*1)
Image quality sensor(*1)

Item to be adjusted
Code in mode 05
3.1.2 Adjustment of the auto-toner 200(Y,M,C,K), 201(Yellow)
sensor(*2)
202(Magenta), 203(Cyan)
204(Black), 206(Y,M,C)

Item to be adjusted

Life counter clear

([6]+[START]: PM support mode)

396(*4)

Item to be adjusted
3.1.4 Adjustment of color registration control

Code in mode 05
4719

Item to be adjusted
3.1.5 Adjustment of the transfer belt due to environmental factors

6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

4106, 4107, 4108, 4109, 4110,

4111, 4115, 4116, 4117, 4118,
4120, 4122, 4123, 4124, 4125,
4126, 4127, 4128, 4129

3.1.8
Image
dimensional
adjustment
at the
printing
section
3.1.9
Image
dimensional
adjustment
at the
scanning
section

401
(a) Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction
411
(b) Primary scanning data laser writing start position
487
(c) Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction
(d) Secondary scanning data laser writing start position 408, 440, 441, 444, 428, 442, 445
(e) Primary scanning data laser writing start position at
498
duplexing
(a) Image distortion
(b) Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction
(c) Image location of primary scanning direction
(d) Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction
(e) Image location of secondary scanning direction
(f) Top margin
(g) Right margin
(h) Bottom margin

Item to be adjusted
3.2.1 Automatic gamma adjustment (PPC)
3.3.1 Automatic gamma adjustment (PRT)

405
306
340
305
430
432
433

Code in mode 05
1642(*5), (1644, 580)
1008(*6), 1004 - 0, 1004 - 2 to 8

Adjust the image quality if necessary.

END

Code in mode 05
408

3.1.6 Image dimensional adjustment

Code in mode 05
Items
3.1.7 Paper
. alignment at the registration roller
4100, 4101, 4103, 4104, 4105,

1
2
3
4
5

Tilt motor initial

excitation setting
(05-4721) (*3)

Code in mode 05

3.1.3 Adjustment of image quality control /

Automatic initialization of image quality control

Order

Laser optical unit

(Chapter 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5 )

*1: There is no need to perform counter clear.

*2: Adjust only the color changed.
*3: When the SRAM board <LGC board> has been replaced, perform the adjustment from 05-4721.
*4: When upgrading firmware, perform the adjustment from 05-396.
*5: Use [4] + [FAX] test pattern.
*6: Use [70] + [FAX] test pattern.

Fig. 3-1
2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

3-1

3.1.2

Adjustment of the Auto-Toner Sensor

When the developer material is replaced, adjust the auto-toner sensor in the following procedure.
(1) Install the cleaner and developer unit.
Note:
Do not install the toner cartridge.
(2)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. The following message will be
displayed.

100%

[0] [5]
[POWER]

A3

TEST MODE
Fig. 3-2

(3) Key in a code and press the [START] button.

Code 200: All developer materials 201: Developer material Y 202: Developer material M
203: Developer material C
204: Developer material K 206: Developer material YMC

(Code)

100%

200

[START]

A3

TEST MODE
Fig. 3-3

(4)

The message below will be displayed approx. 2 minutes later and the adjustment starts:
During the adjustment, Current sensor voltage (V) shown in (B) automatically changes and
gradually approaches to Target value (V) for adjustment reference voltage shown in (A).

(B)
(C)
(A)

Y: x.xxV M: x.xxV C: x.xxV K: x.xxV

Y:
M:
C:
K:
Y: z.zzV M: z.zzV C: z.zzV K: z.zzV

ww%

(B): Current sensor voltage (V)

(C): Adjustment value, Humidity (%)
(A): Target value (V) for adjustment reference voltage
Fig. 3-4

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-2

(5)

When the Current sensor voltage (V) in (B) is converged and the Sensor output control value
(bit value) corresponding to the value for initial developer material is displayed in (C), the
adjustment is completed.
When the adjustment is completed, the [ENTER] button is displayed on the screen.
e-STUDIO2820C/ 2830C / 3520C / 4520C

(B)
(C)
(A)

Y: x.xxV M: x.xxV C: x.xxV K: x.xxV

Y: yyy
M: yyy C: yyy K: yyy
Y: z.zzV M: z.zzV C: z.zzV K: z.zzV
e-STUDIO3530C

K: x.xxV
K: yyy
K: z.zzV

(B)
(C)
(A)

(B): Current sensor voltage (V)

(C): Sensor output control value (bit value)
(A): Target value (V) for adjustment reference voltage
Fig. 3-5

Note:
The values in (A), (B) and (C) vary with humidity.
(6)

Press the [ENTER] button to store the adjustment result in the memory.

(7)

Turn the power OFF.

(8)

Install the toner cartridges.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

3-3

3.1.3
(1)

Performing Image Quality Control (ICQ)

When unpacking
Prior to image dimensional adjustment, perform the Automatic initialization of image quality
control (05-396) procedure.

(2)

When any of the following parts is replaced, be sure to perform the Automatic initialization of
image quality control (05-396) procedure.
Photoconductive drum
Developer material
Laser optical unit
Transfer belt
1st transfer roller
Drum cleaning blade
Needle electrode
Main charger grid
Image position aligning sensor
Image quality sensor
Note:
When performing Automatic gamma adjustment in addition, Automatic initialization of image
quality control (05-396) should be done first.
If "Readjust from IQC-Adjustment" is displayed, perform "Automatic initialization of image quality
control (05-396)."

(3)

When performing Automatic gamma adjustment in cases no parts written above are replaced,
do the Forced performing of image quality closed-loop control (05-395) procedure before
Automatic gamma adjustment.

Code
395

Item to be adjusted
Forced performing of
image quality closedloop control

Contents
<Procedure>
1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
Adjustment Mode
2. Key in [395] and press the [START] button.
3. WAIT is displayed.
4. When the adjustment finishes normally, the equipment returns to the
initial state of Adjustment Mode.
When an error occurs
<When Waste toner box replacement is displayed>
1. Replace the waste toner box with a new one and close the waste
toner cover.
2. Press and hold the [MAIN POWER] button for a few seconds to shut
down the equipment.
3. Turn the power ON.
4. Release the waste toner box full status by the warming-up
operation.
5. Check that WAIT is displayed.
<When an adjustment error is displayed>
1. Press and hold the [ON/OFF] button for a few seconds to shut down
the equipment in order to check the toner empty status.
2. Turn the power ON.
3. Check the toner supply operation in warming-up.
When a message prompts you to replace the toner cartridge, open
the front cover and replace the cartridge with a new one.
4. Check that WAIT is displayed.
<Other abnormalities>
Take the appropriate action described in Troubleshooting.
P.6-1 "6. ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING"

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-4

Code

Item to be adjusted

Contents

396

Automatic initialization
of image quality control

<Procedure>
1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
Adjustment Mode
2. Key in [396] and press the [START] button.
3. WAIT is displayed.
4. When the adjustment finishes normally, the equipment will return to
initial state of the Adjustment Mode.
When an error occurs
<When Waste toner box replacement is displayed>
1. Replace the waste toner box with a new one and close the waste
toner cover.
2. Press and hold the [MAIN POWER] button for a few seconds to shut
down the equipment.
3. Turn the power ON.
4. Release the waste toner box full status by the warming-up
operation.
5. Check that WAIT is displayed.
<When an adjustment error is displayed>
1. Press and hold the [ON/OFF] button for a few seconds to shut down
the equipment in order to check the toner empty status.
2. Turn the power ON.
3. Check the toner supply operation in warming-up.
When a message prompts you to replace the toner cartridge, open
the front cover and replace the cartridge with a new one.
4. Check that WAIT is displayed.
<Other abnormalities>
Take the appropriate action described in Troubleshooting.
P.6-1 "6. ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING"

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

3-5

3.1.4

Adjustment of Color Registration Control

After having finished the Automatic initialization of image quality control (05-396) procedure, perform
the Forced performing of color registration control adjustment (05-4719) procedure.
Code
4719

Item to be adjusted
Forced performing of
color registration
control

Contents
<Procedure>
1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
Adjustment mode
2. Key in [4719] and press the [START] button.
3. When the adjustment finishes normally, the equipment returns to the
initial state of Adjustment Mode.
When an error occurs
<When Waste toner box replacement is displayed>
1. Replace the waste toner box with a new one and close the waste
toner cover.
2. Press and hold the [MAIN POWER] button for a few seconds to shut
down the equipment.
3. Turn the power ON.
4. Release the waste toner box full status by the warming-up
operation.
5. Check that WAIT is displayed.
<When an adjustment error is displayed>
1. Press and hold the [ON/OFF] button for a few seconds to shut down
the equipment in order to check the toner empty status.
2. Turn the power ON.
3. Check the toner supply operation in warming-up.
When a message prompts you to replace the toner cartridge, open
the front cover and replace the cartridge with a new one.
4. Check that WAIT is displayed.
<Other abnormalities>
Take the appropriate action described in Troubleshooting.
P.6-1 "6. ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING"

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-6

3.1.5

Adjustment of the transfer belt due to environmental factors

The length of the transfer belt may vary depending on environments such as temperature or humidity.
When the belt length varies, the leading position of an image also varies. Therefore, check image
position in the secondary scanning direction after installation or parts replacement because there is
difference between the environments of an installation site and a factory where the equipment was
shipped. (Although image adjustment is already performed at the shipment from the factory, this
adjustment must be performed again in the installation site.) If required, perform Leading edge position
adjustment / Common items (05-408).
P.3-72 "3.10.1 Adjustment of the transfer belt due to environmental factors"

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

3-7

3.1.6

Image Dimensional Adjustment

There are several adjustment items in the image dimensional adjustment, as listed below. Prior to this
image dimensional adjustment, perform the Automatic initialization of image quality control (05-396).
When adjusting these items, the following adjustment order should strictly be observed.
Item to be adjusted
1.Paper alignment at the registration roller

2.Printerrelated image
dimensional
adjustment

3.Scannerrelated image
dimensional
adjustment

Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction

(Fine adjustment of polygonal motor rotation speed)
Primary scanning data laser writing start position
Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction
(Fine adjustment of transfer belt motor rotation speed)
Secondary scanning data laser writing start position
Primary scanning data laser writing start position at duplexing
Image distortion
Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction
Image location of primary scanning direction
Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction
Image location of secondary scanning direction
Top margin
Right margin
Bottom margin

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

Code in mode 05
4100, 4101, 4103, 4104,
4105, 4106, 4107, 4108,
4109, 4110, 4111, 4115, 4116,
4117, 4118, 4120, 4122, 4123,
4124, 4125, 4126, 4127,
4128, 4129
401
411
487
408, 440, 441, 444, 428, 442,
445
498
405
306
340
305
430
432
433

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-8

[Procedure to key in adjustment values]

In accordance with the procedure described below, make adjustment of each adjustment item so that
the measured values obtained from test copies satisfy the specification. By pressing the [FAX] button,
immediately after starting the Adjustment Mode (05), single-sided test copying can be performed
(normal copy mode).

<Operation keys>

<Display>

100%
0

A3

TEST MODE

POWER
1
Digital keys : Key in codes.

Code No.

100%

START

XXX

A3

TEST MODE
YYY

Digital keys : Key in adjustment

values.
( CLEAR Use to make corrections)
Value ZZZ is stored
ENTER
replacing values YYY.
or
INTERRUPT
FAX
Test copy
START

ZZZ

Current adjustment value

100%

A3

A3

A3

Adjustment value newly keyed in.

(If no entering, YYY is displayed.)

TEST MODE

100%
Wait Warming Up

If the test copy does not

satisfy the specified values,
return to step 1 and
repeat the adjustment
procedure.

100%
COPYING

Power OFF/ON : Exit the Adjustment Mode.

Fig. 3-6

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

3-9

3.1.7

Paper alignment at the registration roller

[A] Adjustment with touch panel

Paper alignment at the registration roller can be adjusted in the following procedure by performing the
code 05-480.
1. Select the drawer.

Fig. 3-7

2. Select the paper size.

Fig. 3-8

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 10

3. Select the media type.

Fig. 3-9

4. Select the copy speed.

(45ppm for black copying in e-STUDIO4520C or Other for others)

Fig. 3-10

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 11

5. Key in the adjustment value.

Fig. 3-11

6. Press the [ENTER] button to finish the adjustment.

* Press the [FUNCTION CLEAR] button to return to the previous menu.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 12

[B] Adjustment by direct code entry

The aligning amount is adjusted by using the following codes in Adjustment Mode (05).
Drawer
1st drawer
(CST1)

2nd drawer
(CST2)

3rd drawer
(CST3)

4th drawer
(CST4)

Bypass feed

LCF

ADU

Code

Sub code

4100
4115

0,1,2,3,4
0,1,2,3,4

4122

0,1,2,3,4

4101
4116

0,1,2,3,4
0,1,2,3,4

4123

0,1,2,3,4

4108
4117

0,1,2,3,4
0,1,2,3,4

4124

0,1,2,3,4

4109
4118

0,1,2,3,4
0,1,2,3,4

4125

0,1,2,3,4

4103
4104
4105
4106
4107
4127

0,1,2,3,4
0,1,2,3,4
0,1,2,3,4
0,1,2,3,4
0,1,2,3,4
0,1,2,3,4

4128
4129
4111
4126

0,1,2,3,4
0,1,2,3,4

4110
4120

0,1,2,3,4
0,1,2,3,4

Paper size
(Select the paper size with
the sub code.)
0: 330 mm or longer
(13.0 inches or longer)
1: 220329 mm
(8.712.9 inches)
2: 205219 mm
(8.18.6 inches)
3: 160-204 mm
(6.38.0 inches)
4: 159 mm or shorter
(6.26 inches or shorter)

0:
1:
2:
3:
4:

330 mm or longer
(13.0 inches or longer)
220329 mm
(8.712.9 inches)
205219 mm
(8.18.6 inches)
160-204 mm
(6.38.0 inches)
159 mm or shorter
(6.26 inches or shorter)

Paper type*
Plain paper
Thick paper 1/Thick paper 2/
Thick paper 3
Plain paper
(e-STUDIO3530C/4520C, black
only)
Plain paper
Thick paper 1/Thick paper 2/
Thick paper 3
Plain paper
(e-STUDIO3530C/4520C, black
only)
Plain paper
Thick paper 1/Thick paper 2/
Thick paper 3
Plain paper
(e-STUDIO3530C/4520C, black
only)
Plain paper
Thick paper 1/Thick paper 2/
Thick paper 3
Plain paper
(e-STUDIO3530C/4520C, black
only)
Plain paper
Thick paper 1
Thick paper 2
Thick paper 3/Thick paper 4
OHP
Plain paper
(e-STUDIO3530C/4520C, black
only)
Special paper 1
Special paper 2
Plain paper
Plain paper (e-STUDIO3530C/
4520C, black only)
Plain paper
Thick paper 1

*Weight:
Plain paper: 64 to 105 g/m2 (17 lb. Bond to 28 lb. Bond)
Thick paper 1: 106 to 163 g/m2 (28 lb. Bond to 60 lb. Cover (90 lb. Index))
Thick paper 2: 164 to 209 g/m2 (61 lb. Cover to 77.3 lb. Cover (115.7 lb. Index))
Thick paper 3: 210 to 256 g/m2 (77.3 lb. Cover to 94.5 lb. Cover (141.4 lb. Index))
Thick paper 4: 257 to 280 g/m2 (94.5 lb. Cover to 100 lb. Cover (150 lb. Index))
2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 13

<Procedure>
(Not necessary for LCF)

[0][5]
[Power]

(Code)

[START]

(Sub-code)

[SET] or
[INTERRUPT]
Stores in memory

[START]
[Drawer
selection]

Current value
displayed
[ ]*1 +[FAX]

(Test print)

Enter new
value
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)

Fig. 3-12

(*1)

1:
3:
55:
56:
57:
58:
59:
60:
98:

Single-sided grid pattern in Black Mode

Double-sided grid pattern in Black Mode
Grid pattern of thick paper 2 in Full Color Mode
Grid pattern of thick paper 3/thick paper 4 in Full Color Mode
Grid pattern of OHP film in Full Color Mode
Single-sided grid pattern of thick paper 2 in Black Mode
Single-sided grid pattern of thick paper 3/thick paper 4 in Black Mode
Single-sided grid pattern of OHP film in Black Mode
Single-sided grid pattern in K(4)* Mode

K(4)*: System in which the test pattern is printed only in the black mode, though the four color
developers (Y, M, C, K) are contacted to the transfer belt.
Note:
If the aligning amount is too large, abnormal noise (paper-folding noise) or actual paper folding
may occur during paper feeding. If the aligning amount is too small, on the other hand, a skew,
an image dislocation in feeding direction or a paper exit jam (E010) may occur. Pay attention to
the above and select the appropriate value.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 14

3.1.8

Image dimensional adjustment at the printing section

The printer related adjustment is performed by using the printed out grid pattern.

21
A
B, E

6
C
22

Feeding direction

Fig. 3-13

Adjustment
Tolerance
200 0.5mm

B
C

52 0.5mm
200 0.5mm

D
E

52 0.5mm
52 0.5mm

Detail of adjustment
Refer to [A] Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of
polygonal motor rotation speed (Printer))
Refer to [B] Primary scanning data laser writing start position (Printer)
Refer to [C] Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction (Fine adjustment
of transfer belt motor rotation speed (Printer))
Refer to [D] Secondary scanning data laser writing start position
Refer to [E] Primary scanning data laser writing start position at duplexing

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 15

[A] Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of polygonal motor
rotation speed (Printer))
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)
Press [98] [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from the 2nd
drawer.)
Measure the distance A from the 1st line to the 21st line of the grid pattern.
Check if the distance A is within 2000.5 mm.
If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance A again.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [401]) [START]
(Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)
100% A is displayed.
Press [98] [FAX] (A grid pattern is printed out.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance A becomes (approx. 0.08 mm/
step).

[B] Primary scanning data laser writing start position (Printer)

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

(6)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)
Press [98] [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from the 2nd
drawer.)
Measure the distance B from the left edge of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.
Check if the distance B is within 520.5 mm.
If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance B again.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [411]) [START]
(Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)
100% A is displayed
Press [98] [FAX] (A grid pattern is printed out.))
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance B becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/
step).
After the adjustment for the code 411 is completed, apply the same adjustment value for the
code 410.

(Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [410]) [START]

(Key in the same value in the step 5 above)
Press [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory).
Note:
Make sure the first line of the grid pattern is printed out since the line is occasionally vanished.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 16

[C] Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of transfer belt motor
rotation speed)
Code

Sub code

Function

Remarks

487

PRT

FAX

When the value increases, the reproduction ratio in the

secondary scanning direction becomes larger.
(Approx. 0.1 mm/1steps)

PPC

PRT

FAX

PPC

PRT

FAX

PPC

If the sub code 0 of 05-487 is adjusted, the adjustment values of sub codes 1 to 8 are also changed
automatically, being operated with the adjusted value, according to the proper parameter. Basically,
adjusting only the sub code 0 completes all the adjustment of PRT, PPC and FAX.
[C-1]

Confirmation of 05-487-0
1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)
2. Press [98] [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from the
2nd drawer.)
3. Measure the distance C from the 2nd line at the leading edge of the paper to the 22nd line of
the grid pattern.
* Normally, the 1st line of the grid pattern is not printed.
4. Check if the distance C is within 2000.5 mm.
5. If not, perform the procedure in [C-2] Adjustment of 05-487-0 to change the values and
measure the distance C again.
6. Perform the color registration (4719) after the adjustment.

[C-2]

Adjustment of 05-487-0
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [487]) [START] (Key in the sub-code [0])
[START] (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)
When the value is not within the recommended values, the trailing edge area of the image may be
out of position for the paper length or the density at the trailing edge area of the image may become
lower. Perform the adjustment confirming the image.
100% A is displayed
Press [98] [FAX] (A grid pattern is printed out.)
The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance C becomes (approx. 0.1 mm/ step).
(Key in the code [4719]) [START] (Enforced color registration)
Notes:
1. The grid pattern outputted by pressing [0][5] [98] [FAX] is the one of PRT (05-487-0).
Even though the sub codes 1 to 8 are adjusted, the result cannot be confirmed in the grid
pattern outputted by pressing [0][5] [98] [FAX].
2. When 05-487-0 is performed, a proper value is automatically calculated for the size of an
image in each function mode (copy/printer/Fax) or at each speed (normal speed/reduced
speed/high speed). The speed of the transfer belt motor is also adjusted. Therefore, use the
above default value other than the sub code 0, unless otherwise required.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 17

[D] Secondary scanning data laser writing start position

Performing the code 05-408 covers this adjustment for all paper sources.
The adjustment for each paper source is also available.
For all paper sources
Code

Paper size

Acceptable value

408

A3/LD

0 to 200

Remarks
Performs the adjustment for all paper sources.

For each paper source

Order for
adjustment
1
2
3
4
5
6

(1)
(2)
(3)

(4)
(5)

Paper source

Code

Paper size

1st drawer
2nd drawer
3rd drawer
4th drawer
Bypass feed
Duplexing

440
441
444
428
442
445

A4/LT
A3/LD
A4/LT
A4/LT
A4/LT
A3/LD

Acceptable
value
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100

Remarks

Paper fed from the 2nd drawer

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)
Press [98] ([3] for duplexing) [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out.)
Measure the distance D from the leading edge of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.
* Normally, the 1st line of the grid pattern is not printed.
* At the duplexing, measure it on the top side of the grid pattern.
Check if the distance D is within 520.5 mm.
If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance D again.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code shown above) [START]
(Key in an acceptable value shown above)
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)
100% A is displayed
Press [98] ([3] for duplexing)
[FAX] (A grid pattern is printed out.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance D becomes (approx. 0.10 mm/
step).

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 18

[E] Primary scanning data laser writing start position at duplexing

Note:
Make sure the first line of the grid pattern is printed out since the line is occasionally vanished.
[E-1]
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

[E-2]
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

Adjustment for long-sized paper

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)
Press [3] [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from the 2nd
drawer.)
Check the grid pattern on the test print and measure the distance E from the left edge of the
paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.
Check if the distance E is within 520.5 mm.
If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance E again.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [498]) [START] [0] [START]
(Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)
100% A is displayed.
Press [3] [FAX] (A grid pattern is printed out.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance E becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/
step).
Adjustment for short-sized paper
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)
Press [3] [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A4/LT from the 1st
drawer.)
Check the grid pattern on the test print and measure the distance E from the left edge of the
paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.
Check if the distance E is within 520.5 mm.
If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance E again.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [498]) [START] [1] [START]
(Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)
100% A is displayed
Press [3] [FAX] (A grid pattern is printed out.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance E becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/
step).

<Adjustment procedure summarization for A to E>

[0] [5] [Power ON] [98] ([3](05-445, 498) for duplexing) [FAX]
A: 05-401 (2nd drawer, A3/LD)
2000.5 mm (0.08 mm/step)
B: 05-411 (2nd drawer, A3/LD)
520.5 mm (0.04 mm/step)
Key in the same value for 05-410.
C: 05-487-0 (2nd drawer, A3/LD)
2000.5 mm (0.1 mm/step)
D: 05-408 (2nd drawer, A3/LD)
520.5 mm (0.15 mm/step)
05-440 (1st drawer, A4/LT)
05-441 (2nd drawer, A3/LD)
05-444 (3rd drawer, A4/LT)
05-428 (4th drawer, A4/LT)
05-442 (Bypass feed, A4/LT)
05-445 (Duplexing, A3/LD)
E: 05-498-0 (2nd drawer, A3/LD),
520.5 mm (0.04 mm/step)
05-498-1 (1st drawer, A4/LT)

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 19

3.1.9

Image dimensional adjustment at the scanning section

[A] Image distortion

Feeding direction

Step 1

Feeding direction

Step 2

Fig. 3-14

(1)
(2)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
Press [FAX] to make a copy of any image on a sheet of A3/LD paper.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 20

(3)

Key in [308] and press the [START] button to move the carriage to the adjustment position.

(4)

Make an adjustment in the order of step 1

and 2.
Step 1
In case of A:
Tighten the mirror-3 adjustment screw (CW).
In case of B:
Loosen the mirror-3 adjustment screw
(CCW).

Adjustment screw for the mirror-3 (Rear)

Carriage-2
Fig. 3-15

Step 2
In case of C:
Tighten the mirror-1 adjustment screw (CW).
In case of D:
Loosen the mirror-1 adjustment screw
(CCW).

Adjustment screw
for the mirror-1 (Rear)

Carriage-1
Fig. 3-16

(5)

Apply the screw locking agents to the adjustment screws. (2 areas)

Recommended screw lock agent
Manufacturer: Three Bond
Product name: 1401E
The following adjustments (b) to (e) should be performed with Test Chart No. TCC-1.
P.3-27 " Adjustments and Checks using Test Chart No. TCC-1"

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 21

[B] Reproduction ratio adjustment of primary scanning direction

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)
Place Test Chart No. TCC-1 on the original glass (with the arrow positioned at the left rear side).
Press [FAX] [START] to make a copy at the mode of A4/LT, 100%, Full color and Text/Photo.
Measure the distance A between M1 and M2 on the copy with a ruler.
Check if the distance A is within 2000.5 mm.
If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat step 3. to 5. above.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [405]) [START]
(Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255) with digital keys)
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance A becomes (approx. 0.1
mm/step).

[C] Image location of primary scanning direction

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)
Place Test Chart No. TCC-1 on the original glass (with the arrow positioned at the left rear side).
Press [FAX] [START] to make a copy at the mode of A4/LT, 100%, Full color and Text/Photo.
Measure the distance B from the left paper edge to the 5 mm line of left grid pattern on the copy
with a ruler.
Check if the distance B is within 50.5 mm.
If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat step 3. to 5. above.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in code [306]) [START]
(Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance B becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/
step).

[D] Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)
Place Test Chart No. TCC-1 on the original glass (with the arrow positioned at the left rear side).
Press [FAX] [START] to make a copy at the mode of A4/LT, 100%, Full color and Text/Photo.
Measure the distance C between M3 and M4 on the copy with a ruler.
Check if the distance C is within 1500.5 mm.
If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat step 3. to 5. above.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [340]) [START]
(Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance C becomes (approx. 0.02 mm/
step).

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 22

[E] Image location of secondary scanning direction

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)
Place Test Chart No. TCC-1 on the original glass (with the arrow positioned at the left rear side).
Press [FAX] [START] to make a copy at the mode of A4/LT, 100%, Full color and Text/Photo.
Measure the distance D from the top paper edge to the 10 mm line of top grid pattern on the copy
with a ruler.
Check if the distance D is within 100.5 mm.
If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat step 3. to 5. above.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [305]) [START]
(Key in a value (acceptable values: 68 to 188))
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance D becomes (approx. 0.08
mm/step).

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 23

[F] Top margin

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

(6)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)
Open the platen cover or RADF.
Press [FAX] [START] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Full color, Text/Photo and
2nd drawer.
Measure the blank area E at the leading edge of the copied image.
Check if the blank area E is within the range.
Function

Black

Color

Copy

32.0 mm

5-1.0 mm, 5+2.0 mm

(4.0 to 7.0 mm)

If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 3. to 5. above.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [430]) [START]
(Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)
(100% A is displayed.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/
step).

Feeding direction

E
Fig. 3-17

Note:
Paper jams tend to occur in equipment in which thin paper such as 64g/m2 (17lb. Bond) paper is
used or a large amount of high density images such as pictures are output. For this equipment,
we recommend that you adjust the top margin in the plus direction in order to prevent paper
jamming.
Range of top margin adjustment (e.g.)
Function

Black

Color

Copy

3.0 - 5.0 mm

5.0 - 7.0 mm

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 24

[G] Right margin

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

(6)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)
Open the platen cover or RADF.
Press [FAX] [START] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Full color, Text/Photo and
2nd drawer.
Measure the blank area F at the right side of the copied image.
Check if the blank area F is within the range.
Function

Black

Color

Copy

22.0 mm

22.0 mm

If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 3. to 5. above.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [432]) [START]
(Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory).
(100% A is displayed.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area at the right side becomes
(approx. 0.04 mm/step).

Feeding direction

Fig. 3-18

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 25

[H] Bottom margin

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

(6)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)
Open platen cover or RADF.
Press the [FAX] [START] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Full color, Text/Photo
and 2nd drawer.
Measure the blank area G at the trailing edge of the copied image.
Check if the blank area G is within the range.
Function

Black

Color

Copy

32.0 mm

32.0 mm

If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 3. to 5. above.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [433]) [START]
(Key in value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (stored in memory)
(100% A is displayed.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area at the trailing edge
becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/step).

Feeding direction

G
Fig. 3-19

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 26

Adjustments and Checks using Test Chart No. TCC-1

Following items can be checked with the Test Chart No. TCC-1.
1. Points to be measured in the chart

Feeding direction

A
Fig. 3-20

<Adjustment order>
[0] [5] [Power ON] (Chart TCC-1) [FAX] [START] (A3/LD, 100%, Full color and Text/
Photo)
A: 05-405 2000.5 mm (0.1 mm/step)
B: 05-306 50.5 mm (0.04 mm/step)
C: 05-340 1500.5 mm (0.02 mm/step)
D: 05-305 100.5 mm (0.08 mm/step)

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 27

2. Checking areas of the chart and their descriptions

[9]

[1]

[3]

[8]

[10]

[5]

[2]

[2]

TOSHIBA COLOR CHART

No.TCC-1

[7]

[3]
[2]

[1]
[1]
[6]
[6]

[4]

[3]
[11]

[14]
[7]

[7]

[2]

[12]

[7]

[13]

[8]

[1]
Fig. 3-21

[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]

Grid patterns
YMCK patches
Resolution patterns
Gradation pattern

:
:
:
:

[5]
[6]
[7]

Color registration pattern

Pictures
Magnification lines

:
:
:

[8]
[9]

Center lines
Arrow

:
:

[10] Halftone band

[11] White text on the black
solid
[12] Text
[13] Thin lines
[14] Note area

:
:

For adjusting margin (void) and scanner section

For checking uniformity
For checking resolution
Gradation pattern of seven colors (Y, M, C, R, G, B and K)
Coverage: 10-100%
For adjusting the halftone reproduction and gray balance
For checking color registration
For checking color reproduction and moire
For checking the magnification error of primary and secondary
scanning directions
Center lines for A4/LT sizes
A mark for placing the chart properly onto the original glass
(place it to the left rear corner of the original glass.)
For checking uniformity
For checking the reproduction of white text on black solid

: For checking reproduction of text

: For checking reproduction of the thin lines (line width: 100m)
: For recording the date, conditions, etc.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 28

3.2

Image Quality Adjustment (Copying Function)

3.2.1

Automatic gamma adjustment

When the reproduction of gradation is not appropriate, the gradation reproducibility of all colors Y, M, C
and K can be corrected by performing this automatic gamma adjustment. In case the gradation
reproduction of the image checked is not satisfactory, make this adjustment as described below at parts
replacement.

3
(1)

When unpacking or any of the following parts has been replaced, be sure to make this
adjustment:
Photoconductive drum
Developer material
Laser optical unit
Transfer belt
1st transfer roller
Drum cleaning blade
Needle electrode
Main charger grid
Image position aligning sensor
Image quality sensor
SRAM board (LGC board, SYS board)

(2)

When any of the following parts are replaced or adjusted, make a copy and check the image to
determine if adjustment is necessary:
2nd transfer roller
Notes:
1. Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing the image adjustment in
P.3-4
"3.1.3 Performing Image Quality Control (ICQ)" and
P.3-8 "3.1.6 Image Dimensional
Adjustment".
2. Normally, only the adjustment of color/black integrated pattern is needed. When the
adjustment of
P.3-39 "3.2.11 Beam level conversion setting" is made, color pattern and
black pattern need to be adjusted individually.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>

Code

Item to be adjusted

1642
(1643)
(580)

Automatic gamma
adjustment

Contents
When the reproduction of gradation is not appropriate, the gradation
reproducibility of all colors Y, M, C and K can be corrected by performing this
automatic gamma adjustment. The result will be applied to all paper sizes.

<Procedure>
(1)
(2)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. Adjustment Mode
Select the A4/LT drawer. Key in the pattern number and press the [FAX] button to output a Patch
chart for gamma adjustment.

Pattern No.

Pattern No.

(3)
(4)

Remark

Paper type

Color/black integrated

When performing code 05-1642

All paper types

200

Color/black integrated

When performing code 05-1644-0

Plain paper

204

Color/black integrated

When performing code 05-1644-2

Recycled paper

206

Color/black integrated

When performing code 05-1644-3

Thick paper1

208

Color/black integrated

When performing code 05-1644-4

Thick paper2

210

Color/black integrated

When performing code 05-1644-5

Thick paper3

212

Color/black integrated

When performing code 05-1644-6

Thick paper4

214

Color/black integrated

When performing code 05-1644-7

Special paper 1

216

Color/black integrated

When performing code 05-1644-8

Special paper 2

Place the patch chart for adjustment printed in step (2) face down on the original glass.
Place the chart aligning its side with 2 black squares against the original scale.
Key in a code and press the [START] button.
The scanner reads the chart automatically and performs automatic gamma adjustment
calculation (approx.30 sec.).

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 29

(5)

When the adjustment has finished normally, ENTER is shown. Press the [ENTER] button to
have the adjustment results reflected.
(To cancel the reflection of adjustment results, press the [CANCEL] button.)
In the case of an abnormal ending, ADJUSTMENT ERROR is shown.
Press the [CANCEL] button to clear the error display. When it is cleared, the control panel display
will return to the ready state. Then, check if the patch chart on the original glass is placed in the
wrong direction or if it is placed inclined on the original glass, and then repeat step (3) and
afterward.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 30

3.2.2

Density adjustment

The center density and the density variation controlled by density adjustment keys can be adjusted as
follows.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Color
mode
mono
Color

Original mode
Printed
Text*
Photo
Image*
1586
1587
1588

Text/
Photo*
1585

Map

Item to be
adjusted

1589

center value

Remarks
The larger the value is, the
darker the image becomes.
Acceptable values:
0 to 255 (Default: 128)

If this setting has been changed, the density levels of the IMAGE SMOOTHING or Photo in the
black mode may be affected.

<Adjustment Mode (05)>

Color
mode
Black

Original mode
Text/
Photo
503

Item to be
adjusted

504

User
custom
931

508

510

937

Manual density
mode dark step
value

505

507

934

Manual density
mode light step
value

514

515

940

Automatic density
mode

Text

Manual density
mode center value

Remarks
The larger the value is, the darker the image
becomes.
Acceptable values:
0 to 255 (Default: 128)
The larger the value is, the darker the dark
side becomes.
Acceptable values:
0 to 255 (Default: 20)
The larger the value is, the lighter the light
side becomes.
Acceptable values:
0 to 255 (Default: 20)
The larger the value is, the darker the image
becomes.
Acceptable values:
0 to 255 (Default: 128)

Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make
adjustments according to the following procedure.
Note:
Be sure that this adjustment is made after performing
P.3-29 "3.2.1 Automatic gamma
adjustment".
<Procedure>
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
Key in a code and press the [START] button.
Key in an adjustment value.
(To correct the value once keyed in, press the [CLEAR] button.)
Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value. The equipment goes back to
the ready state.
Press the [FAX] button and then press the [START] button to make a test copy.
If the desired image quality has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (5).

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 31

3.2.3

Color balance adjustment

The color balance is adjusted by adjusting the density of each color at the Full Color Mode. The
adjustment is performed by selecting its density area from the following: low density, medium density
and high density.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Original mode
Color

Text/
Photo

Text

Printed
Image

Photo

Map

user
custom

Yellow

1779-0

1780-0

1781-0

1782-0

1783-0

7980-0

1779-1

1780-1

1781-1

1782-1

1783-1

7980-1

1779-2

1780-2

1781-2

1782-2

1783-2

7980-2

1784-0

1785-0

1786-0

1787-0

1788-0

7981-0

1784-1

1785-1

1786-1

1787-1

1788-1

7981-1

1784-2

1785-2

1786-2

1787-2

1788-2

7981-2

1789-0

1790-0

1791-0

1792-0

1793-0

7982-0

Magenta

Cyan

Black

Item to be
adjusted

Remarks

Low density

The larger the

value is, the
Medium density
darker the color
High density
to be adjusted
becomes.
Low density
Acceptable
Medium density values:
0 to 255
High density
(Default: 128)
Low density

1789-1

1790-1

1791-1

1792-1

1793-1

7982-1

Medium density

1789-2

1790-2

1791-2

1792-2

1793-2

7982-2

High density

1794-0

1795-0

1796-0

1797-0

1798-0

7983-0

Low density

1794-1

1795-1

1796-1

1797-1

1798-1

7983-1

Medium density

1794-2

1795-2

1796-2

1797-2

1798-2

7983-2

High density

Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make
adjustments according to the following procedure.
Notes:
Be sure that this adjustment is made after performing
P.3-29 "3.2.1 Automatic gamma
adjustment".
Changing the adjustment setting influences the adjacent density area slightly.
E.g.: When the value of the medium density is larger, the adjacent areas in the low density
and high density range will become slightly darker.
<Procedure>
(1)
(2)
(3)

(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
Key in the code of the mode to be adjusted (color and original mode) and press the [START]
button.
Select the density area to be adjusted with digital keys (0, 1 or 2), and press the [START] button.
0: Low density
1: Medium density
2: High density
Key in an adjustment value. (To correct the value once keyed in, press the [CLEAR] button.)
Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory.
The equipment goes back to the ready state.
For resetting the value, repeat step (2) to (5).
Press the [FAX] button and then press the [START] button to make a test copy.
If the desired image quality has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (7).

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 32

<Range of the density area (low density, medium density, high density)>
The color from 10 to 30 (low density), from 40 to 70 (medium density) and from 80 to 100 (high density)
in No. TCC-1 chart can be used as a guide for the range of the density area influenced by the change of
the adjustment value (low density, medium density, high density).

Low density

Medium density

High density

Fig. 3-22

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 33

3.2.4

Gamma balance adjustment

The density adjustment at the Black Mode is performed by selecting its density area from the following:
low density, medium density and high density.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Original mode
Color
mode

Black

ACS/
Black/
Text/
Photo

ACS/
Black/
Photo

User
custo
m

Item to be
adjusted

592-0

7956-0 7957-0 7958-0 7959-0

949-0

591-1

592-1

7956-1 7957-1 7958-1 7959-1

949-1

591-2

592-2

7956-2 7957-2 7958-2 7959-2

949-2

Low density The larger the

value is, the
Medium
density of the item
density
to be adjusted
High
becomes darker.
density
Acceptable values:
0 to 255 (Default:
128)

Text/
Photo

Text

Photo

590-0

591-0

590-1
590-2

Gray
scale

ACS/
Black/
Text

Remarks

Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make
adjustments according to the following procedure.
Note:
Be sure that this adjustment is made after performing
P.3-29 "3.2.1 Automatic gamma
adjustment".
<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of

P.3-32 "3.2.3 Color balance adjustment".

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 34

3.2.5

Background adjustment

The density of the background can be adjusted as follows.

<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Original mode
Color
mode

Text/
Photo

Text

Printed
Image

Photo

Map

user
custo
m

Gray
scale

1688

1689

1690

1691

1692

7762

---

1698

1699

1700

1701

1702

7763

---

Mono
Color

7754

7755

7756

7757

7758

---

---

Twin
color
mode
ACS
black

7759

7760

7761

---

---

---

---

7676

7677

---

---

---

---

---

7678

7679

---

---

---

---

---

7033

7034

7043

---

---

7279

7044

7041

7042

7048

---

---

7280

7049

Full
Color

black

Item to be
adjusted
Automatic
density
mode
Manual
density
mode
Automatic
density
mode
Manual
density
mode
Automatic
density
mode
Manual
density
mode
Automatic
density
mode
Manual
density
mode

Remarks

The larger the value

is, the lighter the
background becomes.
Acceptable values:
0 to 255 (Default: 128)

Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make
adjustment using the following procedure.
<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of

P.3-31 "3.2.2 Density adjustment".

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 35

3.2.6

Judgment threshold for ACS (common for copy and scan)

Judgment levels for automatically identifying whether an original is color or black are adjusted. This
adjustment is for judgment levels when Auto Color is selected as a color mode. The same adjustment
value is simultaneously applied to all cases of originals on the original glass for copier functions and
network scanning functions, and those placed on the RADF.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Code
1675

Item to be adjusted

Contents

Judgment threshold
for ACS

The larger the value is, the more an original tends to be judged as black in the
Auto Color mode. The smaller the value is, the more it tends to be judged as
color.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 70)

Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary and make
adjustment.
<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of

3.2.7

P.3-31 "3.2.2 Density adjustment".

Sharpness adjustment

If you want to make copy images look softer or sharper, perform the following adjustment. The
adjustment can be made for each of the color modes and original modes independently.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Code
1737

Original mode
Text/Photo*
Text*

1739

Printed Image*

1740

Photo

1741

Map

7795

User custom
Black

The larger the value is, the sharper the image

becomes; while the smaller the value is, the softer the
image becomes.
The smaller the value is, the less moire tends to
appear.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 128)

Text/Photo
Text

606

Photo

922

User custom

7809

Gray scale
Auto Color

605

1757

Contents

1738

604

Color mode
Full Color

Text/Photo

7807

Text

7808

Photo

Any change in these settings affects the settings of IMAGE SMOOTHING and Photo in the black
mode, and Text/Photo, Text and Printed Image in the twin color mode.

Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make
adjustment.
Note:
You have to make adjustment by balancing between moire and sharpness.
<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of

P.3-31 "3.2.2 Density adjustment".

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 36

3.2.8

Setting range correction

The values of the background peak/text peak in the range correction at the Black Mode can be
switched to varied or fixed in the following codes.
If they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values.
The values of the background peak affects the reproduction of the background density, and the values
of the text peak affects that of the text density.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Origin
al
mode
Full
color

Original mode
Text/
Photo

Text

7767

7768

7769

7772

7773

7774

Map

User
Custo
m

Gray
Scale

7770

7771

7777

---

7775

7776

7778

---

Printed
Photo
Image

Item to be adjusted

Remarks

ACS
black
mode

7667

7668

---

---

---

---

---

Automatic density mode 0: Background

peak / fixed
Manual density mode
1: Background
Automatic density mode peak / varied

7669

7670

---

---

---

---

---

Manual density mode

Black

7283

7284

---

---

---

7236

7295

Automatic density mode

7286

7287

---

---

---

7237

7296

Manual density mode

Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make
adjustment.
<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of

3.2.9

P.3-31 "3.2.2 Density adjustment".

Adjustment of smudged/faint text

The smudge/faint text at a Black Mode can be set at the following codes.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Original mode
Color mode

Text/
Photo

Text

User
custom

Black

648

649

925

ACS
monochrome

7102

7103

---

Item to be
adjusted

Remarks

Adjustment of
smudged/ faint text

When the value decreases, the faint

text is improved. When the value
increases, the smudged text is
improved.
Acceptable values: 0 to 4
(Default: 2)

Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make
adjustment.
Note:
Remember the image specifications and life span of the replacing parts may not meet the
standard when the setting value is changed from the default value.
<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of

P.3-31 "3.2.2 Density adjustment".

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 37

3.2.10

Color Adjustment of Marker

The color of the one touch adjustment MARKER can be adjusted so that any marker colors already on
the original can be distinguished.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Relation between the adjustment value and the color
(Acceptable values: 0 to 6)

Code

Item to be
adjusted

0 to 2

3 (Default)

1769-0

Yellow

The smaller the value is,

the more reddish the
color becomes.

Yellow

The larger the value is,

the more greenish the
color becomes.

1769-1

Magenta

The smaller the value is,

the more bluish the
color becomes.

Magenta

The larger the value is,

the more reddish the
color becomes.

1769-2

Cyan

The smaller the value is,

the more greenish the
color becomes.

Cyan

The larger the value is,

the more bluish the
color becomes.

1769-3

Red

The smaller the value is,

the closer to Magenta
the color becomes.

Red

The larger the value is,

the more yellowish the
color becomes.

1769-4

Green

The smaller the value is,

the more yellowish the
color becomes.

Green

The larger the value is,

the closer to Cyan the
color becomes.

1769-5

Blue

The smaller the value is,

the closer to Cyan the
color becomes.

Blue

The larger the value is,

the closer to Magenta
the color becomes.

4 to 6

Note:
The color may not always be reproduced precisely due to the characteristics of the fluorescent
ink.
<Procedure>
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
Key in a code and press the [START] button.
Key in a sub-code and press the [START] button.
Key in an adjustment value.
(To correct a value once keyed in, press the [CLEAR] button.)
Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value. The equipment goes back to
the ready state.
Turn the power OFF and back ON in the normal mode. Then make a copy in the one touch
adjustment MARKER mode.
If the desired image quality has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (6).

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 38

3.2.11

Beam level conversion setting

The beam level for 4 divided smoothing is set at the Black Mode. This adjustment enables to adjust the
dot size.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Code

Item to be adjusted

Remarks

667-0

Beam level 0/4

667-1

Beam level 1/4

667-2

Beam level 2/4

667-3

Beam level 3/4

The smaller the value is, the smaller the beam width
becomes. Therefore, the smaller dot is reproduced
accordingly. Acceptable values: 0 to 255
(Default: Level 0/4: 0, Level 1/4: 63, Level 2/4: 127, Level 3/
4: 191, Level 4/4: 255)

667-4

Beam level 4/4

Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make
adjustments according to the following procedure.
<Procedure>
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
Key in a code and press the [START] button.
Key in a sub-code and press the [START] button.
Key in an adjustment value.
(To correct a value once keyed in, press the [CLEAR] button.)
Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value. The equipment goes back to
the ready state.
Press the [FAX] button and then press the [START] button to make a test copy.
If the desired image quality has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (6).

Notes:
1. When this adjustment was performed, perform Automatic gamma adjustment (black) (05580) as well because the density reproduction level in the black mode will vary. In addition to
performing the code 05-580, perform the code 05-1642 or 05-1644 individually because the
result of this adjustment will not be reflected to the color & black integrated pattern.
2. When this adjustment is performed, setting 1 in 08-595 makes the result of 08-595
impossible to be reflected on User Calibration.
3. The setting value must increase as the beam level number (0 to 4) becomes higher. Do not
increase this order when setting the values.
4. Usually, beam level 4 / 4 is most effective on black mode.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 39

3.2.12

Maximum toner density adjustment to paper type

The maximum toner amount adhering to the paper can be controlled.

<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Code

Paper type

Remarks

1612

Plain paper

1613

Thick paper 1

1614

Thick paper 2

1615

Thick paper 3

1616

OHP film

1617

Special paper 1

The smaller the value is, the toner amount adhered

decreases of the high density area (ex. prevention of fusing
offsetting, etc.).
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
(Default: Plain paper: 255, Thick paper 1: 255,
Thick paper 2: 255, Thick paper 3: 255, OHP film: 240,
special paper 1: 255, special paper 2: 255,
Recycled paper: 255, Thick paper 4: 255)

1618

Special paper 2

1619

Recycled paper

1620

Thick paper 4

Note:
The larger the value is, the more frequently fusing offsetting occurs.
<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of

3.2.13

P.3-31 "3.2.2 Density adjustment".

Maximum text density adjustment

The maximum text density of each color at Full Color Mode can be adjusted as follows.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Color

Code

Item to be adjusted

Remarks

Yellow

1630

Maximum text density

The larger the value is, the darker the maximum text density
of each color to be adjusted becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 10 (Default: 5)

Magenta

1631

Cyan

1632

Black

1633

Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make
adjustments according to the following procedure.
Note:
Be sure that this adjustment is made after performing
P.3-29 "3.2.1 Automatic gamma
adjustment".
<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of

P.3-31 "3.2.2 Density adjustment".

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 40

3.2.14

Text/Photo reproduction level adjustment

Text/Photo reproduction level at the Full color mode, Auto color mode and Gray scale mode can be
adjusted.
Text/Photo reproduction level adjustment can be switched to Photo oriented 1, Photo oriented 2,
Text oriented 1 or Text oriented 2 in the following codes.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Mode

Mode

Text/Photo

User custom

1725

7841

Item to be adjusted
Text/Photo
reproduction level
adjustment

Contents
0: Default
1: Photo oriented 2 (The printed image reproduction
level higher than that of the Photo oriented 1)
2: Photo oriented 1 (The printed image reproduction
level higher than that of the Default)
3: Equivalent to the Default
4: Text oriented 1 (The text reproduction level higher
than that of the Default)
5: Text oriented 2 (The text reproduction level higher
than that of the Text oriented 1)

Notes:
The text reproduction level is lower when the mode is switched from the default value to the
Photo oriented 1 or Photo oriented 2. (The text reproduction level in Photo oriented 2 is lower
than that in Photo oriented 1.)
Changing the setting value from default value to the Text oriented 1 or Text oriented 2 causes
image noise in the printed photo image with few lines per inch. (Photo oriented 2 causes more
image noise than Photo oriented 1.)
<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of

3.2.15

P.3-31 "3.2.2 Density adjustment".

Black reproduction switching at the Twin color copy mode

Black reproduction can be switched at the Twin color (Black/Red) copy mode.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Mode
Twin color copy mode
(Black/Red)

Code
1761

Item to be adjusted
Black reproduction
switching

Remarks
0: Default
1: Black reproduction oriented

Note:
The boundary between Red and Black may not be smooth when the setting value is 1.
<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of

P.3-31 "3.2.2 Density adjustment".

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 41

3.2.16

Black header density level adjustment

The density level of headers in the black mode is adjusted.

<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Mode
Full Color/
ACS Color
Full Color

Code

Original mode

7811

Text/Photo *

7812

Text

7816

User custom

Remarks
The larger the value is, the darker the headers become.
However, the density level differs depending on the
modes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 8 (Default: 0)
Refers to the table specified by default when 0 is set.
The default table is:
Text/Photo: 4
Text: 5
User custom: 4

Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make
adjustment.
<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of

3.2.17

P.3-31 "3.2.2 Density adjustment".

Black area adjustment in twin color copy mode

<Adjustment Mode (05)>

Mode
Twin color mode
with selected
colors

Twin color mode

(Black and red)

Code

Item to be
adjusted

7641-0

High density

7641-1

Medium density

7641-2

Low density

7642-0

High density

7642-1

Medium density

7642-2

Low density

<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of

3.2.18

Remarks
The larger the value is, the larger the area recognized as
black in the original becomes. The smaller the value is, the
larger the area recognized as the color other than black
becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 128)
The larger the value is, the larger the black area becomes.
The smaller the value is, the larger the red area becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 128)

P.3-32 "3.2.3 Color balance adjustment".

Judgment threshold adjustment for blank originals

The judgment level is adjusted for automatic identification of whether the original set is blank or not.
This adjustment is made when OMIT BLANK PAGE is selected on the control panel.
The adjustment value is simultaneously applied to all modes at PPC and NW scanning.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Code

Item to be adjusted

7618

Judgment threshold
adjustment for blank
originals

Remarks
The larger the value is, the more an original tends
to be judged as a blank sheet.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 128)

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 42

3.2.19

Background offsetting adjustment for ADF

The background level for scanning originals with the ADF is adjusted when the background fogging at
the scanning of a manually-set original and an original used with the ADF is different. This is to adjust
the level of the background image removed when the scanning of the originals with the ADF is
performed.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Color mode

Code

Full Color

7764

Mono Color

7765

Twin Color
mode

7766

ACS Black

7675

Black

7025

Remarks
The larger the value is, the lower the
background density becomes. Acceptable
values: 0 to 255 (Default: 128)

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 43

3.3

Image Quality Adjustment (Printing Function)

3.3.1

Automatic gamma adjustment

When the reproduction of gradation is not appropriate, the gradation reproducibility of all colors Y, M, C
and K can be corrected by performing this automatic gamma adjustment. In case the gradation
reproduction of the image checked is not satisfactory, make this adjustment as described below at parts
replacement.
1. When unpacking or any of the following parts has been replaced, be sure to make this adjustment:
Photoconductive drum
Developer material
Laser optical unit
Transfer belt
1st transfer roller
Drum cleaning blade
Needle electrode
Main charger grid
Image position aligning sensor
Image quality sensor
SRAM board (LGC board, SYS board)
2. When any of the following parts are replaced or adjusted, make a print and check the image to
determine if adjustment is necessary:
2nd transfer roller
Note:
Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing the image adjustment in
P.3-4 "3.1.3
Performing Image Quality Control (ICQ)" and
P.3-8 "3.1.6 Image Dimensional Adjustment".
<Adjustment Mode (05)>

Code

Paper type

Remarks

1004-0

Plain paper

1004-2

Recycled paper

When the reproduction of gradation is not appropriate, the

gradation reproducibility of all colors Y, M, C and K can be
corrected by performing this automatic gamma adjustment.

1004-3

Thick paper 1

1004-4

Thick paper 2

1004-5

Thick paper 3

1004-6

Thick paper 4

1004-7

Special paper 1

1004-8

Special paper 2

1008

All paper types

If the code 1008 is performed, the adjustment will be applied to all paper types.

<Procedure>
1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. Adjustment Mode
2. Select the A4/LT drawer. Key in the pattern number and press the [FAX] button to output a Patch
chart for adjustment.
Pattern No.

Paper type

Remarks

70

Plain paper

Used when the code 1004-0 is performed

74

Recycled paper

Used when the code 1004-2 is performed

76

Thick paper 1

Used when the code 1004-3 is performed

78

Thick paper 2

Used when the code 1004-4 is performed

80

Thick paper 3

Used when the code 1004-5 is performed

82

Thick paper 4

Used when the code 1004-6 is performed

84

Special paper 1

Used when the code 1004-7 is performed

86

Special paper 2

Used when the code 1004-8 is performed

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 44

Note:
However, this is applied to all paper types when 05-1008 is performed.
Code
08-9059

Remarks
0: No paper selecting buttons displayed
1: Paper selecting buttons displayed. (For both Copy and Printer)

3. Place the patch chart for adjustment printed in step (2) face down on the original glass, with its side,
on which two black squares are present, aligned against the original scale.
4. Key in a code and press the [START] button. The scanner reads the chart automatically and
performs automatic gamma adjustment calculation (approx. 30 sec.).
5. When the adjustment has finished normally, ENTER is shown.
Press the [ENTER] button to have the adjustment results reflected.
(To cancel the reflection of adjustment results, press the [CANCEL] button.)
In the case of an abnormal ending, ADJUSTMENT ERROR is shown. Press the [CANCEL] button
to clear the error display.
When it is cleared, the control panel display will return to the ready state. Then, check if the patch
chart on the original glass is placed in the wrong direction or if it is placed inclined on the original
glass, and then repeat step (3) and afterward.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 45

3.3.2

Gamma balance adjustment (Black Mode)

The gamma balance is adjusted by adjusting the density at the Black Mode. The adjustment is
performed by selecting its density area from the following: low density, medium density and high
density.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Color
mode
Black

Language and screen

Item to
be
adjusted

Smooth
(PS)

Detail
(PS)

Smooth
(PCL)

Detail
(PCL)

Smooth
(XPS)

Detail
(XPS)

7315-0

7316-0

7317-0

7318-0

7319-0

7320-0

Low
density

7315-1

7316-1

7317-1

7318-1

7319-1

7320-1

Medium
density

7315-2

7316-2

7317-2

7318-2

7319-2

7320-2

High
density

Remarks
The larger the value is,
the density of the item
to be adjusted
becomes darker.
Acceptable values: 0
to 255
(Default: 128)

Notes:
Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing
P.3-44 "3.3.1 Automatic gamma
adjustment".
Changing the adjustment setting influences the adjacent density area slightly.
E.g.: When the value of the medium density is larger, the adjacent areas in the low density
and high density range will become slightly darker.
<Procedure>
(1)
(2)
(3)

(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
Key in the codes to be adjusted (language and screen) and press the [START] button.
Key in the value corresponding to the density area to be adjusted (0, 1 or 2) and press the
[START] button.
0: Low density 1: Medium density 2: High density
Key in the adjustment value. (To correct the value once keyed in, press the [CLEAR] button.)
Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. The equipment
goes back to the ready state.
For resetting the value, repeat step (2) to (5).
Let the equipment restart and perform the printing job.
If the image density has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (7).

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 46

<Range of the density area (low density, medium density, high density)>
The color from the 1st to the 7th stage (low density), from the 8th to the 11th stage (medium density)
and from the 12th to the 13th stage (high density) in Patch chart for gamma adjustment ([71] [FAX])
output in
P.3-44 "3.3.1 Automatic gamma adjustment" can be used as a guide for the range of the
density area influenced by the adjustment with the change of the adjustment value (low density,
medium density, high density).

1
2
3
Low
density

4
5
6
7
8

Medium
density

9
10
11

High
density

12
13

Fig. 3-23

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 47

3.3.3

Color balance adjustment

The color balance is adjusted by adjusting the density of each color. The adjustment is performed by
selecting its density area from the following: low density, medium density and high density.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Color
Yellow

Magenta

Cyan

Black

PS

PCL

XPS

Density

Smooth

Detail

Smooth

Detail

Smooth

Detail

8050-0

8054-0

8058-0

8062-0

8042-0

8046-0

Low

8050-1

8054-1

8058-1

8062-1

8042-1

8046-1

Medium

8050-2

8054-2

8058-2

8062-2

8042-2

8046-2

High

8051-0

8055-0

8059-0

8063-0

8043-0

8047-0

Low

8051-1

8055-1

8059-1

8063-1

8043-1

8047-1

Medium

8051-2

8055-2

8059-2

8063-2

8043-2

8047-2

High

8052-0

8056-0

8060-0

8064-0

8044-0

8048-0

Low

8052-1

8056-1

8060-1

8064-1

8044-1

8048-1

Medium

8052-2

8056-2

8060-2

8064-2

8044-2

8048-2

High

8053-0

8057-0

8061-0

8065-0

8045-0

8049-0

Low

8053-1

8057-1

8061-1

8065-1

8045-1

8049-1

Medium

8053-2

8057-2

8061-2

8065-2

8045-2

8049-2

High

Remarks
The larger the
value is, the darker
the color to be
adjusted becomes.
Acceptable
values: 0 to 255
(Default: 128)

Notes:
Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing
P.3-44 "3.3.1 Automatic gamma
adjustment".
Changing the adjustment setting influences the adjacent density area slightly.
E.g.: When the value of the medium density is larger, the adjacent areas in the low density
and high density range will become slightly darker.
<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of

P.3-46 "3.3.2 Gamma balance adjustment (Black Mode)".

<Range of the density area (low density, medium density, high density)>
The color from the 1st to the 7th stage (low density), from the 8th to the 11th stage (medium density)
and from the 12th to the 13th stage (high density) in Patch chart for gamma adjustment ([71] [FAX])
output in
P.3-44 "3.3.1 Automatic gamma adjustment" can be used as a guide for the range of the
density area influenced by the adjustment with the printer driver and the change of the adjustment
value (low density, medium density, high density (Refer to P.3-47 "Fig. 3-23").

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 48

3.3.4

Adjustment of faint text

The faint text can be improved in the following codes.

<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Black mode

Color mode

PS

PCL

XPS

PS

PCL

XPS

7340

7341

7342

8130

8131

8132

Remarks
When the small characters or fine lines in a halftone
image are faint, they can be improved by increasing
the value to raise the density level.
Acceptable values: 0 to 8 (Default: 0)

<Procedure>
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
Key in the codes to be adjusted and press the [START] button.
Key in the adjustment value. (To correct the value once keyed in, press the [CLEAR] button.)
Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. The equipment
goes back to the ready state.
For resetting the value, repeat step (2) to (4).
Let the equipment restart and perform the printing job.
If the desired image has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (6).

3.3.5

Upper limit value at Toner Saving Mode

The upper limit value is adjusted at the Toner Saving Mode.

<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Black mode

Color mode

PS

PCL

XPS

PS

PCL

XPS

664-0

664-1

664-2

1055-0

1055-1

1055-2

<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of

Remarks
The smaller the value is, the lighter the density of
image becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255

P.3-46 "3.3.2 Gamma balance adjustment (Black Mode)".

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 49

3.3.6

Maximum toner density adjustment

The maximum toner amount adhering to the paper can be controlled.

<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Code

Paper type

1050

OHP film

Remarks
The smaller the value is, the toner amount adhered decreases of the high
density area (ex. prevention of fusing offsetting, etc.).
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
(Default: OHP film: 200)

<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of
P.3-49 "3.3.4 Adjustment of faint text".
Note:
The larger the value is, the more frequently fusing offsetting occurs.

3.3.7

Fine line enhancement switchover

<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Black mode

Color mode

PS

PCL

XPS

PS

PCL

7322-0

7322-1

7322-2

8102-0

8102-1

<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of

3.3.8

Remarks
8102-2

Whether fine lines are enhanced or not can be

switched.
0: OFF
1: ON
Acceptable values: 0 to 1 (Default: 1)

P.3-46 "3.3.2 Gamma balance adjustment (Black Mode)".

PureBlack/PureGray threshold adjustment (PCL)

<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Original mode

General

Photograp
hic

Presentati
on

Line art

Item to be
adjusted

8210-0

8210-1

8210-2

8210-3

Text

8211-0

8211-1

8211-2

8211-3

Graphics

8212-0

8212-1

8212-2

8212-3

Image

<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of

Remarks
The larger the value is, the wider the
color range to be printed only with the
black toner becomes. The smaller the
value is, the narrower this color range
becomes. Acceptable values: 1 to 255

P.3-46 "3.3.2 Gamma balance adjustment (Black Mode)".

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 50

3.3.9

PureBlack/PureGray threshold adjustment (Twin color mode)

<Adjustment Mode (05)>

Code

Item to be
adjusted

8213

Text

8214

Graphics

8215

Image

Remarks
The larger the value is, the wider the color range to be printed
only with the black toner becomes. The smaller the value is,
the narrower this color range becomes.
Acceptable values: 1 to 255

<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of

3.3.10

P.3-49 "3.3.4 Adjustment of faint text".

PureBlack/PureGray threshold adjustment (PS)

<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Original mode

Item to be
Advanced adjusted

General

Photogra
phic

Presentat
ion

Line art

8252-0

8252-1

8252-2

8252-3

8252-4

Text

8253-0

8253-1

8253-2

8253-3

8253-4

Graphics

8254-0

8254-1

8254-2

8254-3

8254-4

Image

<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of

3.3.11

Remarks
The larger the value is, the wider
the color range to be printed only
with the black toner becomes. The
smaller the value is, the narrower
this color range becomes.
Acceptable values: 1 to 255

P.3-46 "3.3.2 Gamma balance adjustment (Black Mode)".

PureBlack/PureGray threshold adjustment (XPS)

<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Original mode

Item to be
Advanced adjusted

General

Photogra
phic

Presentat
ion

Line art

8249-0

8249-1

8249-2

8249-3

8249-4

Text

8250-0

8250-1

8250-2

8250-3

8250-4

Graphics

8251-0

8251-1

8251-2

8251-3

8251-4

Image

<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of

Remarks
The larger the value is, the wider
the color range to be printed only
with the black toner becomes. The
smaller the value is, the narrower
this color range becomes.
Acceptable values: 1 to 255

P.3-46 "3.3.2 Gamma balance adjustment (Black Mode)".

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 51

3.3.12

Toner limit threshold adjustment

<Adjustment Mode (05)>

Smooth
(PS/PCL/XPS)

Detail
(PS/PCL/XPS)

Paper type

8071-0

8070-0

Plain paper

8071-2

8070-2

Recycled paper

8071-3

8070-3

Thick paper 1

8071-4

8070-4

Thick paper 2

8071-5

8070-5

Thick paper 3

8071-6

8070-6

Thick paper 4

8071-7

8070-7

Special paper 1

8071-8

8070-8

Special paper 2

8071-9

8070-9

OHP film

<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of

3.3.13

Remarks
The larger the value is, the darker the
image in the high density area becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
(Default: 128)

P.3-46 "3.3.2 Gamma balance adjustment (Black Mode)".

Screen switchover
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Code
8176

8179
(EFI Printer Board)

Remarks
The level of screen ruling shown in the screen selecting menu of the printer driver can
be switched.
0: High screen ruling value (smoother image)
1: Low screen ruling value (rougher image)

<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of

P.3-49 "3.3.4 Adjustment of faint text".

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 52

3.3.14

Sharpness adjustment

This adjustment is applied when images need to be softer or sharper.

The adjustment for each original mode is available.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
PS
EFI

Item to be
adjusted

8113-0

8119-0

Text

8112-1

8113-1

8119-1

Graphics

8112-2

8113-2

8119-2

Image

monoch
rome

General

Photo

Present
ation

Line art

8118-0

8110-0

8111-0

8112-0

8118-1

8110-1

8111-1

8118-2

8110-2

8111-2

<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of

3.3.15

Remarks
The larger the value is, the
sharper the image becomes. The
smaller the value is, the softer
the image becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
(Default: 128)

P.3-46 "3.3.2 Gamma balance adjustment (Black Mode)".

Thin line width lower limit adjustment

<Adjustment Mode (05)>

Code

Remarks

8240

Sets the lower limit value of the thin line width when Distinguish Thin Lines is selected in the
screen selecting menu of the printer driver.
The larger the value is, the thicker (darker) the thin line becomes.
Acceptable values: 1 to 9
(Default: 2)

<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of

3.3.16

P.3-49 "3.3.4 Adjustment of faint text".

Offsetting adjustment for background processing

<Adjustment Mode (05)>
PS

PCL

XPS

Smooth

Detail

Smooth

Detail

Smooth

Detail

Color

8010-0

8013-0

8010-1

8013-1

8010-2

8013-2

Twin Color

8011-0

8014-0

8011-1

8014-1

8011-2

8014-2

Monochro
me

8012-0

8015-0

8012-1

8015-1

8012-2

8015-2

<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of

Remarks
The larger the value is, the
darker the background
becomes. The smaller the
value is, the lighter the
background becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
(default: 128)

P.3-46 "3.3.2 Gamma balance adjustment (Black Mode)".

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 53

3.4

Image Quality Adjustment (Scanning Function)

3.4.1

Gamma balance adjustment

The gamma balance at the Black Mode is adjusted by adjusting the density. The adjustment is
performed by selecting its density area from the following: low density, medium density and high
density.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Black
Original mode

Gray
Scale

Text/
Photo

Text

Photo

User
custom

880-0

881-0

882-0

7480-0

883-0

880-1

881-1

882-1

7480-1

883-1

880-2

881-2

882-2

7480-2

883-2

Item to be
adjusted

Remarks

Low density

The larger the value is, the density of the

item to be adjusted becomes darker.
Medium density Acceptable values:
0 to 255 (Default: 128)
High density

<Procedure>
(1)
(2)
(3)

(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
Key in the code corresponding to the desired original mode and press the [START] button.
Key in the value corresponding to the density area to be adjusted (0, 1 or 2) and press the
[START] button.
0: Low density (L), 1: Medium density (M), 2: High density (H)
Key in the adjustment value. (To correct the value once keyed in, press the [CLEAR] button.)
Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. The equipment goes
back to the ready state.
For resetting the value, repeat step (2) to (5).
Let the equipment restart and perform the scanning job.
If the desired image has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (7).

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 54

3.4.2

Density adjustment

Adjusts the center density and the variation of density adjustment buttons.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Original mode
Color
Mode

Text

Color

Item to be
adjusted

Remarks

Photo

Printed
image

User
custom

8340

8341

8342

8380

Manual density
center value

The larger the value is, the darker the image

becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 128)

8344

8345

8346

8381

Manual density
light step value

Sets the changing amount by 1 step at the

density adjustment on the control panel.
The larger the value is, the lighter the light
side becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 20)

8348

8349

8350

8382

Manual density
dark step value

Sets the changing amount by 1 step at the

density adjustment on the control panel.
The larger the value is, the darker the dark
side becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 20)

<Adjustment Mode (05)>

Black
Original mode

Gray
Scale

Item to be
adjusted

Manual density
center value

Text/
Photo

Text

Photo

User
custom

845

846

847

7475

848

860

861

862

7478

863

Remarks

The larger the value is, the darker the image

becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
Automatic density (Default: 128)

<Procedure>
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
Key in a code and press the [START] button.
Key in an adjustment value (acceptable values: 0 to 255).
(To correct a value once keyed in, press the [CLEAR] button.)
Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory.
back to the ready state.
Let the equipment restart and perform the scanning.
If the desired image quality has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (5).

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

The equipment goes

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 55

3.4.3

Background adjustment (Color Mode)

The adjustment level of background center value is adjusted. The control value of background
adjustment button is automatically adjusted to the same level as the adjusted center value.
For example, when the control value of background adjustment key ranges from 0 to 6, the background
center value (-2 to +2) is used to be the range from 6 to 14 accordingly.
Before adjustment

+2

+1

-1

-2

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
+2

After adjustment

+1

-1

-2

<Adjustment Mode (05)>

Code
1070

Original mode
Text

1071

Printed Image

1072

Photo

8370

User custom

Remarks
The smaller the value is, the background becomes lighter.
Acceptable values: 0 to 50 (Default: 50)

<Procedure>
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
Key in the codes and press the [START] button.
Key in the adjustment values. Acceptable values: 0 to 50. (To correct the value once keyed in,
press the [CLEAR] button.)
Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. The equipment goes
back to the ready state.
Let the equipment restart and perform the scanning job.
If the desired image has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (5).

3.4.4

Judgment threshold for ACS (common for copy and network

scan)

The judgment level is adjusted for the automatic identification of whether the original set on the glass is
black or color. Namely, this is to adjust the judgment level used when Auto Color is selected at color
modes. The same adjustment value is simultaneously applied to all cases of originals on the original
glass for copier functions and network scanning functions, and those placed on the RADF.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Code

Item to be adjusted

Contents

1675

Judgment threshold
for ACS

The larger the value is, the more an original tends to be judged as black even
at the Auto Color Mode. The smaller the value is, the more it tends to be
judged as color.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 70)

<Procedure>:
The procedure is the same as that of

P.3-55 "3.4.2 Density adjustment".

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 56

3.4.5

Sharpness adjustment

If you want to make scan images look softer or sharper, perform the following adjustment. The
adjustment can be made for each of the color modes and original modes independently.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Code

Color mode

Original mode

1086

Full Color

Text

1087

Printed Image

1088

Photo

8375

User custom

840

Black

Text

842

Photo

7470

User custom
Gray Scale

The larger the value is, the sharper the image becomes;
while the smaller the value is, the softer the image becomes.
The smaller the value is, the less moire tends to appear.
The acceptable values are 0 to 255.
The center value is 128.

Text/Photo

841

843

Contents

Note:
You have to make adjustment by balancing between moire and sharpness.
<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of

P.3-55 "3.4.2 Density adjustment".

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 57

3.4.6

Setting range correction

The values of the background peak in the range correction at the Black Mode can be switched to
varied or fixed in the following codes.
If they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values.
The values of the background peak affects the reproduction of the background density and the values
of the text peak affects that of the text density.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Black
Original mode

Gray
Scale

Item to be adjusted

Text/
Photo

Text

Photo

User
custom

7416

7417

7418

7425

7419

Range correction
(Automatic density
adjustment)

7421

7422

7423

7426

7424

Range correction
(Manual density
adjustment)

Remarks

0: Background peak - fixed

1: Background peak - varied

Color
Original mode

Item to be adjusted

Text

Photo

Printed
Image

User
custom

8330

8331

8332

8334

Range correction (Automatic

density adjustment)

8361

8362

8363

8365

Range correction (Manual density

adjustment)

<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of

Remarks

0: Background peak - fixed

1: Background peak - varied

P.3-55 "3.4.2 Density adjustment".

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 58

3.4.7

Fine adjustment of black density

The density of black side on scanned image is adjusted at color-scanning.

<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Code
1075

Original mode
Text

1076

Printed Image

1077

Photo

8371

User custom

Remarks
The larger the value is, the black side of the image becomes darker.
Acceptable values: 0 to 4 (Default: 0)

Note:
Be careful for the value not to be too large since the gradation is reproduced worse in darker
side.
<Procedure>
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
Key in the codes and press the [START] button.
Key in the adjustment values. Acceptable values: 0 to 4. (To correct the value once keyed in,
press the [CLEAR] button.)
Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. The equipment
goes back to the ready state.
Let the equipment restart and perform the scanning job.
If the desired image has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (5).

3.4.8

RGB conversion method selection

The color space conversion method of image is decided at color-scanning.

<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Code

Original mode

1080

Text

1081

Printed Image

1082

Photo

8372

User custom

Remarks
0: sRGB, 1: AppleRGB, 2: ROMMRGB, 3: AdobeRGB
(Default: 0)

<Procedure>
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
Key in the codes and press the [START] button.
Key in the adjustment values. Acceptable values: 0 to 3. (To correct the value once keyed in,
press the [CLEAR] button.)
Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. The equipment
goes back to the ready state.
Let the equipment restart and perform the scanning job.
If the desired image has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (5).

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 59

3.4.9

Adjustment of saturation

The saturation of the scanned image is adjusted for color-scanning.

<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Code
8325

Original mode
Text

8326

Printed Image

8327

Photo

8373

User custom

Remarks
The larger the value is, the brighter the image becomes.
The smaller the value is, the duller the image becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 128)

<Procedure>
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
Key in the codes and press the [START] button.
Key in the adjustment values. Acceptable values: 0 to 255.
(To correct the value once keyed in, press the [CLEAR] button.)
Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in the memory. The equipment
goes back to the ready state.
Let the equipment restart and perform the scanning job.
If the desired image has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (5).

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 60

3.4.10

Background processing offset adjustment

The density of background is adjusted.

<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Black
Original mode
Text/
Photo

Item to be adjusted

Photo

User
Custom

Gray
Scale

8400

8402

8404

8403

Background density
adjustment
/ Automatic density
adjustment

8405

8407

8409

8408

Background density
adjustment
/ Manual density
adjustment

Remarks

3
The larger the value is, the lower
the density of the image
background (low density section)
becomes. The smaller the value
is, the higher the density of the
image background (low density
section) becomes. Acceptable
values: 0 to 255
(Default: 128)

Color
Original mode

Item to be adjusted

Text

Photo

Printed
Image

User
Custom

8385

8386

8387

8389

Background density
adjustment
/ Automatic density
adjustment

8390

8391

8392

8394

Background density
adjustment
/ Manual density
adjustment

Remarks

The larger the value is, the lower

the density of the image
background (low density section)
becomes. The smaller the value
is, the higher the density of the
image background (low density
section) becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
(Default: 128)

ADF
Black/
Gray
Scale

Color

7468

8395

Item to be
adjusted

Background
density processing
/ ADF scanning

<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of

Remarks

Adjusts the density of background for ADF scanning. The

larger the value is, the lower the density of the background
and the low density section (e.g. light text or lines)
becomes. The smaller the value is, the higher the density
of them becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
(Default: 128)

P.3-55 "3.4.2 Density adjustment".

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 61

3.5

Image Quality Adjustment (FAX Function)

3.5.1

Density adjustment

The center density and the density variation controlled by density adjustment keys can be adjusted as
follows.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Color
mode
Black

Original mode

Item to be
adjusted

Remarks

Text/
Photo

Text *

Photo

714

700

710

Manual density
center value

[TEXT/PHOTO], [PHOTO]: The larger the value

is, the darker the image becomes.
[Text]: The larger the value is, the lighter the
image becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 128)

729

725

Automatic density
mode

The larger the value is, the darker the image

becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 128)

Since the gradation in this mode is reproduced in a binary image (black and white), this adjustment
should be a simple binary threshold adjustment.

<Procedure>
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
Key in a code and press the [START] button.
Key in an adjustment value.
(To correct the value once keyed in, press the [CLEAR] button.)
Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value. The equipment goes back to
the ready state.
Turn the power OFF.

<Confirmation>
If possible, perform a Fax transmission and check the adjusted density with the image on the recipient's
side.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 62

3.5.2

Beam level conversion setting

A beam level for smoothing process (divided into 4) in the fax function can be set. In this setting the size
of dots is adjusted.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Code

Item to be adjusted

678-0

Beam level 0/4

678-1

Beam level 1/4

678-2

Beam level 2/4

678-3

Beam level 3/4

678-4

Beam level 4/4

Remarks
The smaller the value is, the smaller the beam width
becomes. Therefore, the smaller dot is reproduced
accordingly. Acceptable values: 0 to 255
(Default: Level 0/4: 0, Level 1/4: 63, Level 2/4: 127,
Level 3/4: 191, Level 4/4: 255)

<Procedure>
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
Key in a code and press the [START] button.
Key in a sub-code and press the [START] button.
Key in an adjustment value.
(To correct a value once keyed in, press the [CLEAR] button.)
Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value. The equipment goes back to
the ready state.
Take the POWER OFF.

<Confirmation>
Check the beam level conversion setting with the actual fax data received, if possible.
Notes:
1. The setting value must increase as the beam level number (0 to 4) becomes higher. Do not
increase this order when setting the values.
2. Usually, beam level 4 / 4 is most effective on black mode.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 63

3.6
3.6.1

Adjustment of the Process unit Related Section

High-Voltage Transformer Setting

The high-voltage transformers (PS-HVT-450) supply high-voltage to the parts related to charging,
development, transfer and Discharging blade.
The high-voltage transformer has the following high-voltage outputs.
CH1

Main charger needle (Y)

Main charger needle (M)

Main charger needle (C)

Main charger needle (K)

Main charger grid bias (Y)

Main charger grid bias (M)

Main charger grid bias (C)

Main charger grid bias (K)

Developer bias (Y)

Developer bias (M)

Developer bias (C)

Developer bias (K)

1st transfer roller bias (Y)

1st transfer roller bias (M)

1st transfer roller bias (C)

1st transfer roller bias (K)

CH5

2nd transfer roller bias

CH6

Recovery blade bias (Y)

Recovery blade bias (M)

Recovery blade bias (C)

Recovery blade bias (K)

CH2

CH3

CH4

Note:
Never move the variable resistance on the board since the output adjustment has been
performed at the shipment for the high-voltage transformer supplied as a service part. Also do
not perform the setting change when the high-voltage power supply is replaced.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 64

3.7

Adjustment of the Scanner Section

3.7.1
(1)
(2)

Adjustment carriages-1 and -2 positions

Move the carriage-2 toward the exit side.

Loosen the screws fixing the front side pulley
bracket, make the sections A and B of the
carriage-2 touch with the inside of the exit
side frame and screw them up.

Carriage-2

Pulley bracket

3
[Rear]

[Front]

Exit side frame

Enlarged view of carriage

Fig. 3-24

(3)

Put the carriage-1 on the rail, make the

sections C and D of it touch with the inside of
the exit frame and screw up the front/rear
side of the bracket to fix it.
Note:
Make sure that the sections A and B of the
carriage-2 touch with the exit side frame.

Bracket

Bracket
Carriage-1

Exit frame

D
[Rear]

Enlarged view of carriage

C
[Front]

Fig. 3-25

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 65

3.7.2
(1)
(2)
(3)

(4)

Belt tension adjustment of the Scan motor

Hook the belt tension jig to the motor bracket

and the flame.
Loosen screw-B and -C. (There is no need to
loosen screw-A, since it is a shoulder screw.)
The scan motor is pulled by the belt tension
jig. Fix screw-B and then -C at the stopped
position.
Remove the belt tension jig.

Belt tension jig

C

Pulley

A
Timing belt

B
Scan motor

Fig. 3-26

Belt tension jig

Fig. 3-27

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 66

3.8
3.8.1

Adjustment of the Paper Feeding System

Sheet sideways deviation caused by paper feeding

<Procedure>
The center of the printed image shifts to the front side. Move the guide to the front side (Arrow (A)
direction in the lower figure).

[Rear]

Feeding direction
Center

[Front]
Fig. 3-28

The center of the printed image shifts to the rear side. Move the guide to the rear side (Arrow (B)
direction in the lower figure).
[Rear]

Feeding direction
Center

[Front]
Fig. 3-29

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 67

Bypass feeding

1. Loosen the screen.

2. Move the entire guide to the front or rear side.
3. Tighten the screw.

(A)

(B)

Fig. 3-30

Drawer feeding

1. Pull out the drawer until the locking lever [1] on

the rear side comes to the operable position. If
the lever is locked, release it.

[1]

Fig. 3-31

2. If the side guides [1] are located on the extreme

outside, slightly shift them to the inside. (Keep
the locking lever on the rear side released.)

[1]
[1]

Fig. 3-32

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 68

3. Rotate 2 screws about half a turn to loosen

them.

Fig. 3-33

4. Pull down the protrusion indicated by the arrow

and shift it in the specified direction.

Fig. 3-34

5. Tighten 2 screws.

Fig. 3-35

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 69

3.9

Adjustment of the developer unit

3.9.1

Adjustment of the Auto-Toner Sensor

When the developer material is replaced, adjust the auto-toner sensor.

P.3-2 "3.1.2 Adjustment of the Auto-Toner Sensor"

3.9.2

Adjustment of the doctor-to-sleeve gap

For the adjustment of the doctor-to-sleeve gap, perform the same procedure for the Y, M, C and K
developer units.
Adjustment tool to use: Doctor-sleeve gap jig
<Adjustment procedure>
(1)
(2)

Take off the process unit from the equipment.

Take off the developer unit from the process
unit.
Service Manual "12.6 Disassembly and
Replacement"
(3) Take off the developer material cover. Then
discharge the developer material.
Note:
While reattaching the developer material
cover set the latches securely.

Developer material cover

Developer unit
Fig. 3-36

(4)
(5)

Loosen 2 doctor blade fixing screws.

Insert the doctor-sleeve gap jig to adjust the
gap.

Using the sandblasted magnetic roller:

Insert the gauge "0.65" of the doctorsleeve gap jig between the developer
sleeve and the doctor blade to adjust the
gap, and tighten the screws.

Using the knurled magnetic roller:

Insert the gauge "0.70" of the doctorsleeve gap jig between the developer
sleeve and the doctor blade to adjust the
gap, and tighten the screws.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

Doctor blade

Fig. 3-37

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 70

Notes:
1. Flip up 2 protection sheets for the doctor
blade from the sleeve before inserting the
gauge. Also, be sure not to damage the
protection sheets.

Doctor-sleeve gap jig

3
Protection sheet
Fig. 3-38

2. When confirming and adjusting the gap

between the developer sleeve and the
doctor blade, insert the gauges into the
gap after rotating the developer sleeve so
that its marking faces the doctor blade.

Doctor blade

Marking

Fig. 3-39

(6)

Using the sandblasted magnetic roller:

Insert the gauge "0.60" of the doctorsleeve gap jig between the developer
sleeve and the doctor blade to make sure
that the gauge can move smoothly in the
front/rear direction and the gauge "0.70"
cannot be inserted into the gap.

Using the knurled magnetic roller:

Insert the gauge "0.65" of the doctorsleeve gap jig between the developer
sleeve and the doctor blade to make sure
that the gauge can move smoothly in the
front/rear direction and the gauge "0.75"
cannot be inserted into the gap.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Doctor-sleeve gap jig

Fig. 3-40

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 71

3.10 Adjustment of the Transfer Unit

3.10.1

Adjustment of the transfer belt due to environmental factors

The length of the transfer belt may change depending on the environmental temperature and humidity,
and this will cause change to the leading edge position of the image.
Although image position adjustment has been performed at factory shipment, when the equipment is
installed or any part is replaced, it is necessary to check the difference between the 05-4732-0:
Reference value and 05-4732-1: actual value of the Displaying corrected values of leading edge
adjustment, because there may be a difference between the environment of the factory and that of the
installation location. If the difference between the reference value and actual value is 10 bits or more,
be sure to perform Image location adjustment of secondary scanning direction (05-408).

The equipment automatically corrects the change in the leading edge position caused by any
environmental change. However, readjustment for the leading edge position in the installation
environment (i.e. obtaining the reference value) can make the automatic correction even more
precise, since it can suppress inconsistency caused by the dispersion of units, parts and sensors.

A difference between the reference value and actual value may occur even if the equipment has not
been moved. However, you do not have to perform 05-408 every time a difference is found, if it has
already been performed after installation of the equipment or replacement of parts.
Code

Adjustment item

Remarks

4732-0

Displaying corrected values of

leading edge adjustment
Absolute humidity reference
value

Displays the absolute value of the corrected value of the

leading edge adjustment

4732-1

Displaying corrected values of

leading edge adjustment
Absolute humidity actual
value

Displays the actual value of the corrected value of the leading

edge adjustment

408

Image location adjustment of

secondary scanning direction

Performs the image location adjustment of the secondary

scanning direction (laser writing start position adjustment)

Note:
When checking Displaying corrected values of leading edge adjustment (05-4732-0), (05-47321) and Image location adjustment of secondary scanning direction (05-408), be sure to do this
in a few hours after the equipment has been installed or any part has been replaced.
The length of the transfer belt changes slowly according to the environment, so the larger the
environmental change is, the longer it takes the belt length to become stable. And if you perform
this adjustment immediately after installation or replacement work, the adjustment value may not
be proper, and therefore, deviation in the leading edge position is likely to occur when the
equipment becomes stable.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 72

<Procedure>
(1)

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.

(2)

Perform paper selection for the drawer, key in [98], and then press the [FAX] button to output the
grid pattern (to update the actual value).

(3)

Key in [4732] and press the [START] button.

(4)

Key in [0] and press the [START] button.

(5)

Record the displayed Reference value (A) and press the [ENTER] button.

(6)

Key in [4732] and press the [START] button.

(7)

Key in [1] and press the [START] button.

(8)

Record the displayed actual value (B) and press the [ENTER] button.

(9)

Calculate the difference between Reference value (A) and actual value (B) to obtain
Difference (C).
Range of difference (C)

Remarks

C -10

Perform the image location adjustment of the secondary scanning

direction. Proceed to step (10).

-10 < C < 10

10 C

The image location of the secondary scanning direction is set

properly. Proceed to step (12).
Perform the image location adjustment of the secondary scanning
direction. Proceed to step (10).

When the difference between 05-4732-0: Reference value and 05-4732-1: actual value is
10 bits, the equipment has already performed automatic correction by approx. 1 mm.

(10) Key in [408] and press the [START] button.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 73

(11) Enter the adjustment value by means of the following procedure.

In order to enter the adjustment value, it is necessary to key in a value other than the current one
to clear the previously stored one. Then enter the value which has been displayed as the current
one after keying in the code [408] again.
E.g.: when the adjustment value is 50

100%

408

A4

Record the current adjustment value.

TEST MODE

50

50
Current adjustment value

100%

408

Adjustment value newly keyed in.

(If there has been no entering,
the current adjustment value
is displayed.)

A4

TEST MODE

49

50

In order to clear the adjustment value

previously stored in the memory,
key in any value other than the current
one and press the [ENTER] button.

Key in a value other than

the current adjustment one.

100%

408

A4

TEST MODE

49

49

100%

408

A4

TEST MODE

50

49

Key in the code [408] again

and press the [START] button.

Key in the recorded adjustment value

again and press the [ENTER] button.

Key in the recorded

adjustment value.

100%

408

A4

Check the adjustment value.

TEST MODE

50

50

Check the adjustment value

Fig. 3-41

(12) Turn the power OFF.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 74

3.10.2

Adjustment of Gap between Transfer Belt Unit (TBU) Drive Gears

Perform this adjustment for setting the gap between the shafts of the TBU drive transmission gear and
the TBU drive gear.
Since the gap can be adjusted only by the tension of the spring, no jig is required.
Perform this adjustment after replacing or disassembling any of the parts described below. (If this
adjustment is not performed, image problems or abnormal noise may occur.)
A. When the TBU drive unit was replaced
(It is limited to the case the unit includes brackets. The adjustment is not required when only the
gear or the motor itself was replaced.)
B. When the TBU drive transmission gear was replaced
C. When the TBU was replaced
D. When the frame of the TBU was disassembled for parts replacement
(The adjustment is not required when only the transfer belt or only the TBU drive gear was
replaced.)
TBU drive gear

C, D

B: TBU drive transmission gear

Fig. 3-42

<Procedure>
Note:
Perform the adjustment while the TBU releasing lever is being pressed down after the installation
of the TBU.
(1)

Take off 1 ozone filter, 2 rear covers and the ozone exhausting duct.

(2)

Loosen 3 screws shown in the figure. (Tension is applied by the spring.)

(3)

Tighten the 3 screws loosened in step 2.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 75

(4)

Reinstall the parts taken off in step 1.

Fig. 3-43

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 76

3.11 Adjustment of the Separation Plate Gap

Perform this adjustment when the following parts are replaced or disassembled.
Separation plate

Fuser belt

Fuser roller

Frame of fuser unit

Heat roller

Adjustment tool to use: Separation plate gap jig

Fuser belt

Separation plate gap jig

Separation plate

0.6 - 1.0 mm

Heat roller

Fuser roller

Frame
Fig. 3-44

Notes:
Perform gap adjustment when the fuser unit is at a normal temperature.
Make sure that the pressure roller is released.
Be careful not to damage the fuser belt and jig (to protect the fuser belt, the jig is made from
ABS).
<Adjustment procedure>
(1)

Take off the front side cover, heat roller cover, and transport guide.
Service Manual "16.6.2 Front side cover"
Service Manual "16.6.4 Heat roller cover"
Service Manual "16.6.6 Transport guide"

(2)

Insert the jig end (with a hole) into the first window on the separation plate viewed from the front.
Adjust it with a screw so that the 0.6 mm jig can be inserted between the separation plate and the
fuser belt, but the 1.0 mm jig cannot.

(3)

Insert the jig into the last window on the separation plate viewed from the front, and then adjust it
in the same manner.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

3 - 77

(4)

Insert the jig into the remaining three windows on the separation plate, and then adjust them in
the same manner.
* If the 0.6 mm jig cannot be inserted, the gap is too narrow. Adjust it again.
* If the 1.0 mm jig can be inserted, the gap is too wide. Adjust it again.
0.6 mm

Separation plate gap jig

0.8 mm
Hole

Separation plate

1.0 mm
0.6 mm

Fig. 3-45

Notes:
When thin paper or paper with a small leading edge margin is used, the gap needs to be
narrower. In this case, use the jig end (without a hole). (The procedure is the same.)
- Using the jig end (with a hole): The gap is between 0.6 mm and 1.0 mm.
- Using the jig end (without a hole): The gap is between 0.6 mm and 0.8 mm.
Paper jams tend to occur in equipment in which thin paper such as 64g/m2 (17lb. Bond) paper
is used or a large amount of high density images such as pictures are output. For this
equipment, we recommend that you adjust the gap of the separation plate within the range of
0.6 mm to 0.8 mm in order to prevent paper jamming.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ADJUSTMENT

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 78

4.

BACKUP FUNCTION

4.1
4.1.1

Data Cloning
General description

Data cloning is a function that backs up user data, setting data and SRAM data into a USB media and
also restores these data into the equipment. The types of data to back up or restore are selectable. You
can back up or restore all data in a batch, or only the required one separately.

4.1.2

Precautions

1. Programs required for data cloning are as follows:

System ROM version
---

Storage location
Root directory

Program file name

rootusb2, clone_2820C_3530C.xxx

2. Be sure to check the Status display of the USB data cloning permission (08-9889) before data
cloning. When the value of 08-9889 is 1 (Prohibited), data cloning cannot be performed. Contact
and ask the user (machine administrator) to change the setting on the [Data Cloning Function] in
TopAccess, or set 0 (Accepted) in 08-9889.
3. It is assumed that data cloning is to be performed when equipment is installed or options are
installed. If the address book has been registered, do not perform restore. Registered / set data are
lost.
4. The USB media for the data cloning must meet the following conditions. A data cloning operation
with any devices other than the following will not be guaranteed.
- A combination USB media with a flash memory (to be connected directly to the USB port) and its
capacity is between 256 MB and 512 MB (or 1 GB) or more.
- A device compliant with the following specifications established by USB-IF (USB Implementers
Forum)
Class number:
8 (=08h)
(Mass storage class)
Sub-Class number: 6 (=06h)
(SCSI transfer command set)
Protocol number:
80 (=50h)
(Bulk-only)
- Most of the common USB medias are compliant with the above specifications and are therefore
applicable to this data cloning. However, most of these devices were originally developed to be
used in an environment for PCs (e.g. Windows or Macintosh) and thus operations exclusively
with this equipment have not been fully guaranteed. Therefore, the user must thoroughly check
in advance whether there will be any problem in operating with this equipment when adopting
one of these devices.
5. The USB medias compliant with both USB 1.1 and USB 2.0 can be used for this data cloning.
6. Data cloning with any storage devices other than a flash memory (e.g. USB-connectable memory
card reader, CD/DVD drive, hard disk) will never be guaranteed. Therefore never use them for this
operation.
7. Be sure to unplug the LAN cable and Fax line before data are backed up / restored. Also, do not use
the RADF and open the cover, drawer, etc. during the data cloning.
8. Data can be backed up / restored only for the same model and version. If the version is different,
update the firmware and back up / restore data in the same version.
9. Restore data to equipment which has the same options as when the data are backed up.
10.If Department management or User management information is restored, the counter values are
copied as well, so clear all of them. However, the total counter is not copied.
11. Delete the backed up data in the USB media after the data cloning.
12.[ERROR12: Device is Busy] is displayed if the equipment is in one of the following statuses when
running data cloning.
- When backing up
- Control panel is in use
- JOB is in process

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
BACKUP FUNCTION

4-1

When restoring
- Control panel is in use
- JOB is in process
- Private job has been reserved
- Schedule print job has been reserved
- Proof print job has been reserved
- Hold print job has been reserved
- Invalid job is pending

4.1.3

Backup files

Data files that are available for backup are limited to user data, setting data and SRAM data. The
detailed descriptions for each file are shown below. Note that backup files are encrypted.
1.User data file
The folder user_data is created in the root directory and the following files are stored in it.
Data item
Address book
Mailbox
Template
Back up the Address book, Mailbox
and Template in a batch
Department management information
User management information
Role information
Mata Scan information

folder
user_data
user_data
user_data

File name
BACKUP_ADDR.sct
BACKUP_MBOX.sct
BACKUP_TEMP.sct

user_data

BACKUP_ALL.sct

user_data
user_data
user_data
user_data\metaScan

BACKUP_Department.sct
BACKUP_User.sct
BACKUP_Role.sct
xxxx.sct*

The file name that the user has set for saving this file comes at "XXXX".

2.Setting data file

The folder setting_data is created in the root directory and the following files are stored in it.
Data item
Network / Print service

setting_data

SaveAsFile / Email / InternetFAX

Notification setting
Directory Service
FAX setting
Wireless LAN setting / Bluetooth
setting
COPY setting
GENERAL setting
User management setting

setting_data
setting_data
setting_data
setting_data

File name
network.sct
IPsec.sct*
scan.sct
notice.sct
ldap.sct
fax.sct, fax08.sct

setting_data

wl.sct, bl.sctt

setting_data
setting_data
setting_data

copy.sct
general.sct
usrmng.sct

folder

Enabled when the IPsec enabler (GP-1080) is installed.

3.SRAM data file

The folder sram_data is created in the root directory and the following files are stored in it.
Data item
SRAM

folder
sram_data

File name
sram.sct

Note:
In addition to the backed up data, the following files are created in each folder
Data item
User data
Setting data
SRAM data

folder
user_data
setting_data
sram_data

File name
user_data.txt
setting_data.txt
sram_data.txt

<Contents of file>
e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
BACKUP FUNCTION

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4-2

Version: VTD05.022
Serial Number: CAK700239
Date: MON MAR 17 18:34:40 2008

Fig. 4-1

File format (user_data.txt, setting_data.txt, sram_data.txt: all in common)

Line 1: Version
Line 2: Serial number
Line 3: Date

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
BACKUP FUNCTION

4-3

4.1.4

List of codes available for cloning

Setting mode (08)

08-204
08-219
08-260
08-288
08-294
08-299
08-503
08-619
08-624
08-642
08-652
08-702
08-726
08-780
08-785
08-790
08-976
08-1011
08-1017
08-1024
08-1029
08-1038
08-1043
08-1048
08-1055
08-1066
08-1075
08-1089
08-1095
08-1100
08-1114
08-1440
08-1446
08-1451
08-1665
08-1670
08-1675
08-1686
08-1693
08-1701
08-1708
08-1714
08-1722
08-1727
08-1732
08-1737
08-1743
08-1749
08-1760
08-1767
08-1781-1
08-1785
08-1950
08-3506
08-3723

08-205
08-221
08-264
08-290
08-295
08-300
08-550
08-620
08-629
08-645
08-653
08-703
08-727
08-781
08-786
08-945
08-978
08-1012
08-1018
08-1025
08-1030
08-1039
08-1044
08-1049
08-1059
08-1069
08-1076
08-1090
08-1096
08-1101
08-1123
08-1441
08-1447
08-1464
08-1666
08-1671
08-1676
08-1689
08-1696
08-1704
08-1710
08-1715
08-1723
08-1728
08-1733
08-1738
08-1744
08-1750
08-1762
08-1772
08-1782
08-1786
08-1951
08-3507
08-3724

08-206
08-250
08-272
08-291
08-296
08-302
08-603
08-621
08-634
08-649
08-658
08-707
08-728
08-782
08-787
08-969
08-979
08-1014
08-1019
08-1026
08-1031
08-1040
08-1045
08-1050
08-1060
08-1070
08-1078
08-1091
08-1097
08-1102
08-1125
08-1442
08-1448
08-1472
08-1667
08-1672
08-1677
08-1690
08-1697
08-1705
08-1711
08-1719
08-1724
08-1729
08-1734
08-1739
08-1745
08-1755
08-1764
08-1779
08-1783
08-1920
08-1953
08-3508
08-3736

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
BACKUP FUNCTION

08-209
08-254
08-273
08-292
08-297
08-331
08-610
08-622
08-638
08-650
08-659
08-721
08-729
08-783
08-788
08-970
08-1002
08-1015
08-1020
08-1027
08-1032
08-1041
08-1046
08-1051
08-1063
08-1073
08-1079
08-1092
08-1098
08-1103
08-1138
08-1444
08-1449
08-1661
08-1668
08-1673
08-1678
08-1691
08-1699
08-1706
08-1712
08-1720
08-1725
08-1730
08-1735
08-1740
08-1746
08-1756
08-1765
08-1780
08-1784-0
08-1937
08-1958
08-3631
08-3737

08-218
08-259
08-274
08-293
08-298
08-342
08-611
08-623
08-640
08-651
08-671
08-723
08-730
08-784
08-789
08-973
08-1007
08-1016
08-1022
08-1028
08-1037
08-1042
08-1047
08-1052
08-1065
08-1074
08-1080
08-1094
08-1099
08-1111
08-1432
08-1445
08-1450
08-1662
08-1669
08-1674
08-1685
08-1692
08-1700
08-1707
08-1713
08-1721
08-1726
08-1731
08-1736
08-1741
08-1748
08-1759
08-1766
08-1781-0
08-1784-1
08-1941
08-1959
08-3722
08-3738

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4-4

08-3739
08-3745
08-3755
08-3767
08-3777
08-3782
08-3796
08-3847
08-3853
08-3858
08-3863
08-8581
08-8586
08-8590-1
08-8592
08-8608
08-8617
08-8625
08-8801
08-8818
08-9121
08-9126
08-9629
08-9791
08-9946
08-9981
08-9984-4

08-3740
08-3746
08-3757
08-3768
08-3778
08-3783
08-3797
08-3848
08-3854
08-3859
08-8504
08-8582
08-8587
08-8590-2
08-8593
08-8609
08-8618
08-8626
08-8803
08-9015
08-9122
08-9193
08-9700
08-9799
08-9947
08-9984-0

08-3741
08-3747
08-3758
08-3774
08-3779
08-3785
08-3812
08-3849
08-3855
08-3860
08-8511
08-8583
08-8588
08-8590-3
08-8604
08-8610
08-8619
08-8628
08-8804
08-9103
08-9123
08-9294
08-9746
08-9829
08-9957
08-9984-1

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

08-3742
08-3748
08-3759
08-3775
08-3780
08-3789
08-3833
08-3851
08-3856
08-3861
08-8543
08-8584
08-8589
08-8590-4
08-8605
08-8615
08-8620
08-8629
08-8805
08-9117
08-9124
08-9384
08-9747
08-9889
08-9958
08-9984-2

08-3743
08-3754
08-3760
08-3776
08-3781
08-3793
08-3846
08-3852
08-3857
08-3862
08-8580
08-8585
08-8590-0
08-8591
08-8606
08-8616
08-8624
08-8800
08-8817
08-9120
08-9125
08-9394
08-9748
08-9891
08-9980
08-9984-3

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
BACKUP FUNCTION

4-5

Fax function mode (13)

13-100
13-105
13-110
13-122
13-129
13-139
13-149
13-200
13-211
13-222
13-227
13-232
13-262
13-271
13-281
13-317
13-338
13-351
13-361
13-368
13-375
13-389
13-433
13-512
13-565
13-574
13-580
13-587
13-607
13-615
13-711
13-725
13-923
13-930
13-955

13-101
13-106
13-111
13-123
13-132
13-140
13-150
13-201
13-213
13-223
13-228
13-236
13-267
13-272
13-282
13-325
13-339
13-355
13-362
13-370
13-377
13-391
13-501
13-517
13-566
13-575
13-581
13-601
13-610
13-616
13-720
13-726
13-924
13-931
13-961

13-102
13-107
13-112
13-125
13-135
13-141
13-151
13-203
13-216
13-224
13-229
13-245
13-268
13-273
13-283
13-328
13-340
13-356
13-363
13-371
13-378
13-394
13-509
13-518
13-567
13-576
13-584
13-602
13-611
13-706
13-722
13-727
13-925
13-940
13-962

13-103
13-108
13-116
13-127
13-137
13-142
13-152
13-206
13-220
13-225
13-230
13-247
13-269
13-279
13-312
13-331
13-346
13-357
13-365
13-372
13-379
13-398
13-510
13-519
13-569
13-577
13-585
13-605
13-612
13-707
13-723
13-728
13-926
13-941
13-970

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
BACKUP FUNCTION

13-104
13-109
13-117
13-128
13-138
13-143
13-153
13-210
13-221
13-226
13-231
13-249
13-270
13-280
13-313
13-335
13-350
13-359
13-367
13-373
13-382
13-430
13-511
13-564
13-571
13-578
13-586
13-606
13-614
13-709
13-724
13-922
13-927
13-944
13-971

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4-6

4.1.5

Cloning procedure

[A] Backup procedure

(1)

Shut down the equipment.

(2)

Connect the USB media to the USB port on the right upper cover.

USB port

USB media
Fig. 4-2

Note:
Backing up cannot be performed with multiple USB media connected at the same time.
(3)

Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] buttons simultaneously.
A screen for selecting items to back up is displayed. Select the number (any of 1, 3 and 5)
for data you want to back up. Press the [Start] button.
Number
1: User Data Back Up
3: Setting Back Up
5: SRAM Data Back Up

Backup Item
Backing up User data
Backing up Setting item
Backing up SRAM data

Fig. 4-3

Notes:
It may take some time for the next screen to appear after you key in the number for the item.
The screen above is not displayed if the data cloning function is disabled. In this case, ask the
user (machine administrator) to enable the data cloning function on the TopAccess menu, or
set 0 (Accepted) in 08-9889.
To clear the selection, press the [CLEAR] or [FUNCTION CLEAR] button.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
BACKUP FUNCTION

4-7

(4)

The screen below is displayed when a certain period of time has passed after an asterisk was
displayed. Then select the number of the desired data so that an asterisk will be displayed.
<When 1: User Data Back Up is selected>
Number
1: Address Book
2: Mail Boxes
3: Template
4: Combined
5: FAX Kit
6: User Info
7: Role Info

Backup Item
Backing up Address book
Backing up Mail box
Backing up Template and meta scan definition file
Backing up Address Book, Mail Box, Template, and meta scan
definition file in a batch
Backing up Department management
Backing up User management information
Backing up role information

The items 4, 5, 6, and 7 are selected in the screen by default.

Fig. 4-4

<When 3: Setting Back Up is selected>

Number
1: Network/Print Service
2: SaveAsFile/Email/InternetFAX
3: Notification
4: Directory Service
5: FAX Kit
6: WirelessLAN/Bluetooth Kit
7: Copy
8: General
9: User Management

Backup Item
Backing up TopAccess: Network/Print Service
Backing up TopAccess: SaveAsFile/Email/InternetFAX
Backing up TopAccess: Notification
Backing up TopAccess: Directory Service
Backing up Option: Fax setting
Backing up Option: WirelessLAN/Bluetooth setting
Backing up TopAccess: Copy setting
Backing up TopAccess: General setting
Backing up TopAccess: User management setting

No items are selected in the screen by default.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
BACKUP FUNCTION

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4-8

Setting Back Up
AdminSetting
1: Network/Print Service
2: SaveAsFile/Email/InternetFAX
3: Notification
4: Directory Service
Setting for Option
5: FAX Kit
6: WirelessLAN/Bluetooth Kit
7: COPY
8: General
9: User Management

4
Fig. 4-5

<When 5: SRAM Data Back Up is selected>

Number
1. SRAM

Backup Item
Backing up SRAM Data

No items are selected in the screen by default.

Fig. 4-6

(5)

Press the [START] button. The backup starts and the backing up status is displayed on the LCD
screen.

(6)

Back Up Completed is displayed on the LCD screen when the backup has been properly
completed.

(7)

Turn the power OFF and remove the USB media.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
BACKUP FUNCTION

4-9

[B] Restoring procedure

(1)

Shut down the equipment.

(2)

Connect the USB media to the USB port on the right upper cover.

USB port

USB media
Fig. 4-7

Note:
Restoring cannot be performed with multiple USB media connected at the same time.
(3)

Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] buttons simultaneously.
A screen for selecting items to restore is displayed. Select the number (any of 2, 4 and 6) for
data you want to restore. Press the [Start] button.
Number
2: User Data Restore
4: Setting Restore
6: SRAM Data Restore

Restore Item
Restoring up User data
Restoring up Setting item
Restoring up SRAM data

Fig. 4-8

Notes:
It may take some time for the next screen to appear after you key in the number for the item.
The screen above is not displayed if the data cloning function is disabled. In this case, ask the
user (machine administrator) to enable the data cloning function on the TopAccess menu, or
set 0 (Accepted) in 08-9889.
To clear the selection, press the [CLEAR] or [FUNCTION CLEAR] button.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
BACKUP FUNCTION

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4 - 10

(4)

The screen below is displayed when a certain period of time has passed after the [START] button
is pressed. Then select the number of the desired data so that an asterisk will be displayed.
<When 2: User Data Restore is selected>
Number
1: Address Book
2: Mail Boxes
3: Template
4: Combined
5: Department Code
6: User Info
7: Role Info

Restore Item
Restoring Address book
Restoring Mail boxes
Restoring Template and meta scan definition file
Restoring Address Book, Mail Box, Template, and meta scan
definition file in a batch
Restoring Department management
Restoring User management information
Restoring role information

The items 4, 5, 6, and 7 are selected in the screen by default.

Fig. 4-9

<When 4: Setting Restore is selected>

Number
1: Network/Print Service
2: SaveAsFile/Email/InternetFAX
3: Notification
4: Directory Service
5: FAX Kit
6: WirelessLAN/Bluetooth Kit
7: Copy
8: General
9: User Management

*
*

Restore Item
Restoring TopAccess: Network/Print Service
Restoring TopAccess: SaveAsFile/Email/InternetFAX
Restoring TopAccess: Notification
Restoring TopAccess: Directory Service
Restoring Option: Fax setting
Restoring Option: WirelessLAN/Bluetooth setting
Restoring TopAccess: Copy setting
Restoring TopAccess: General setting
Restoring TopAccess: User management setting

No items are selected in the screen by default.

Be sure to restore the same option items in the same condition as when the option items were
backed up.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
BACKUP FUNCTION

4 - 11

Setting Restore
AdminSetting
1: Network/Print Service
2: SaveAsFile/Email/InternetFAX
3: Notification
4: Directory Service
Setting for Option
5: FAX Kit
6: WirelessLAN/Bluetooth Kit
7: COPY
8: General
9: User Management

Fig. 4-10

<When 6: SRAM Data Restore is selected>

Number
1. SRAM

Restore Item
Restoring SRAM Data

No items are selected in the screen by default.

Fig. 4-11

(5)

Press the [START] button. The restore starts and the restoring status is displayed on the LCD
screen.

(6)

Restore Completed is displayed on the LCD screen when restoring has been properly
completed.

(7)

Turn the power OFF and remove the USB media.

* When department management data or user management data are restored, clear their
counter values in a procedure below.

(8)

Counter values can be all cleared as the data are copied. Note that the total counter values are
not copied.
<Procedure>
Press the buttons as follows: [USER FUNCTIONS]
[ADMIN]
Enter the password
[COUNTER]
[DEPARTMANT SETTING]
Enter the password
[RESET ALL
COUNTERS]
* Enable the department management when the [RESET ALL COUNTERS] buttons is set to be
disabled.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
BACKUP FUNCTION

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4 - 12

[C] Confirmation of the error

Back Up ERROR X (X: Error number) is displayed at the top of the LCD screen when the data have
not been properly backed up / restored. In this case, turn the power OFF and then check the following
items. After confirming and solving the problem, back up / restore the data again from the beginning.
Does the USB media meet the conditions being used for this cloning?
Is the updated program file written on the USB media properly?
Is the USB media installed properly?
Is the USB media or the equipment damaged?

Fig. 4-12

Error number
ERROR 1
ERROR 2
ERROR 3
ERROR 4
ERROR 5

Error content
Copy error
I/F error
USB memory full error
Working folder error
File not found error

ERROR 6
ERROR 7
ERROR 8
ERROR 9
ERROR 10
ERROR 11
ERROR 12

Security error
Checksum error
Model check error
Version check error
Destination check error
Serial number check error
Device is Busy

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
BACKUP FUNCTION

4 - 13

4.2

AES Data Encryption Function Setting

4.2.1

General description

Data encryption is a function that encrypts data in the HDD to enhance the security.
Note that this function may affect the equipment performance.

4.2.2

Precautions

When the data encryption function is set enabled, data currently stored in the HDD will not be retrieved.
Therefore when data encryption function needs to be enabled after the installation of the equipment, it
is necessary to back up the data in the HDD before setting this function and then recover them after the
setting.
To ensure security, ask the user (machine administrator) to back up or restore the users data
and information in the HDD. A service technician can back up or restore them only when the
user (machine administrator) permits it.

Some data in the HDD cannot be backed up and can be left only on printouts.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
BACKUP FUNCTION

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4 - 14

4.2.3

Setting procedure

A procedure for setting the data encryption function is shown below.

Start

[A] Back up data in HDD

[B] Print out "FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE"

[C] Print out "FUNCTION" list

[D] Erase HDD

[E] Replace/Format HDD

[F] Reset user's setting item and restore data/information

[G] Reset "FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE"

[H] Reset "FUNCTION" list

[I] Check actuation of data encryption function setting

Setting completed
Fig. 4-13

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
BACKUP FUNCTION

4 - 15

[A] Back up in HDD

Ask the user (machine administrator) to back up the data in the HDD. Refer to the table below for the
type of data, availability and method of backup.
Type of data in HDD

Availability

Image data in the e-Filing

Available

F-code information, Template

registration information, Address
book data

Available

Department management data

Available

Log data (Print, Scan, FAX

(Transmission/Reception)

Available

Data in the shared folder (Scanned

data, Saved data of copy / FAX
transmission)

Available

Role information

Available

Print waiting data (Copying data and

FAX reception data that are waiting to
be printed due to the paper run-out
and jam, etc.)
Print job (Private print data, Schedule
print data)
FAX saved data (Confidential /
Bulletin board data)
Registration data for FAX
transmission (Delayed transmission /
Recovery transmission)

Backup method
Archive them in the e-Filing of
TopAccess. As for the backup in
Box data, all data (selectable by the
box) can be backed up / restored in
one go by using e-Filing Backup/
Restore Utility.
Back them up in the Administrator
menu of TopAccess.
Export them in Administrator
menu of TopAccess.
Export them in the Administrator
menu of TopAccess. (Import cannot
be performed.)
Copy them to the client computer
via the network. (The data which
have been copied to
the client computer cannot be
copied to the shared folder.)
Export role information on the
TopAccess menus.
[User Management] tab >
[User Confirm/Create/Modify] >
[Role Information]

Not available

Not available
Not available
Not available

Finish printing them after the paper

supply and the jam release, etc.
(The data cannot be kept.)
If any jobs are left, print them. (The
data cannot be backed up.)
Print them. (The data cannot be
backed up.)
Print them. (The data cannot be
backed up.)

[B] Print out FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE

(1)

Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button and then the [USER] button.

(2)

Press the [LIST] button.

(3)

Key in [*] [#] [*] [*] [3] [3] and then press the [START] button. The FUNCTION LIST FOR
MAINTENANCE is printed out.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
BACKUP FUNCTION

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4 - 16

[C] Print out FUNCTION list

(1)

Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button.

(2)

Press the [ADMIN] button, enter the password, and then press the [ENTER] button.

(3)

Press the [LIST/REPORT] button and then the [LIST] button.

(4) Press the [FUNCTION] button. The FUNCTION list is printed out.
Note:
Explain the procedure to the user (machine administrator) and ask him/her to enter his/her
password.
[D] Enable data encryption function
Perform the setting of the data encryption function in the code 08-9379. The setting values are shown
below.
0: Encryption disabled
1: Encryption enabled (Security priority)
2: Encryption enabled (Performance priority)
Security priority: All user data are encrypted.
Performance priority: Encryption data are generated only in a copying or a printing process temporarily.
All user data except files which are deleted in a corresponding process are encrypted.
[E] Format HDD
Perform the code 08-690:2 to format the HDD.
When the FAX Unit (GD-1250) is installed, perform Fax Set Up (1*-100) and Clearing the image data
(1*-102). Then turn the power OFF.
1. Turn the power ON while pressing the digital keys [1] and [*] simultaneously.
2. Key in [100] and then press the [START] button.
3. Key in [102] and then press the [START] button.
4. Turn the power OFF.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
BACKUP FUNCTION

4 - 17

[F] Reset users setting items and restore data/information

Ask the user (machine administrator) to reset the users setting items and to restore data or information.
Refer to the following for the reset and restore:
Items to reset/restore
Printer driver
F-code information, Template registering
information, Address book data
Department management data
Image data in the e-Filing
Role information

Method
Upload them in the Administrator menu of TopAccess.
Restore them in the Administrator menu of TopAccess.
Import them in the Administrator menu of TopAccess.
Restore them in the e-Filing of the TopAccess.
Import role information on the TopAccess menus.
[User Management] tab > [User Confirm/Create/Modify] > [Role
Information]

When the SSL is enabled, perform the setting of the following items again with Create selfcertificate of TopAccess.
Country Name
State or Province Name
Locality Name
Organization Name
Organizational Unit Name
Common Name
Email Address

When wireless LAN is used, perform the setting again on the LCD panel. (only when security with a
certificate is used) Also, upload the following certificate file with Install Certificate for Wireless LAN
of TopAccess.
CA certificate
User certificate

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
BACKUP FUNCTION

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4 - 18

[G] Reset FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE

(1)

Print out the FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE list after the formatting.
P.4-16 "[B] Print out FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE"

(2)

While pressing [1] and [3] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Function Mode)

(3)

Compare the lists which were printed before and after the formatting to check the setting items
having the different setting values. Set the value which was set before the formatting
Turn the power OFF.

(4)

Turn the power OFF.

[H] Reset FUNCTION list

Reset the fax function by referring to the function list that was printed out in Ch.4.2.3 [C] Print out
function list.
(1)

Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button.

(2)

Press the [ADMIN] button, enter the password, and then press the [ENTER] button.

(3)

Press the [FAX] button and then the [TERMINAL ID] button to set each item.

(4) Press the [INITIAL SETUP] button to set each item.

Note:
Explain to the user (machine administrator) about the next operation and ask him/her to enter
his/her password.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
BACKUP FUNCTION

4 - 19

[I] Check actuation of data encryption function setting

Check if the data encryption function is in operation.
Press the [USER FUNCTION] button on the control panel. If a key-shaped icon is displayed at the
top right of the screen, the data encryption function is in operation.

Fig. 4-14

4.2.4

Procedure for disabling data encryption function

The basic procedure is the same as the one for enabling this function. To disable it, set 0 (Invalid) in
the code 08-9379 at step
P.4-17 "[D] Enable data encryption function".

4.2.5

Procedure for discarding HDD when data encryption function is

enabled

Set the data encryption function disabled following the procedure shown in
P.4-20 "4.2.4 Procedure
for disabling data encryption function". Then perform the code 08-1426 (Forcible HDD data clearing) to
completely erase the data in the HDD.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
BACKUP FUNCTION

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4 - 20

4.3

Assist Mode

4.3.1

Assist Mode

This equipment has the Assist Mode to enable the following functions.
(1)

(2)

Update Error flag clearing (Clear Update Error Flags.)

Even if the firmware downloading has been completed normally, the Recovery Mode may
accidentally start up when the power is turned ON again. In this case, clear the Update Error
flags used in the download process with this function. (Normally, the flags are automatically
cleared in the download process.)
Also in the case the Recovery Mode accidentally starts up after the replacement of SRAM on the
SYS board, the flags are cleared with this function.
Data storage partition formatting (Format Loader Partition.)
When a defection occurs on the UI data, etc. which are stored in the HDD, the partition with the
stored UI data, etc. is formatted with this function. (Do not use this function since it is not
normally necessary.)

(3)

HDD partition creation (All Partition Delete and Create Loader Partition.)
When the HDD is replaced or UI data, etc. are downloaded using the USB storage, it is
necessary to format a partition in the HDD before downloading. In this case, the partition is
created in the HDD with this function.
Notes:
1. When downloading with a download jig, it is not necessary to format a partition in advance.
2. Perform the HDD partition formatting only when a new HDD is installed since all data in the
current HDD are erased by this operation.

(4)

SRAM data format

When SRAM is replaced with a new one, abnormal values may be written in the new SRAM.
SRAM data must be formatted with this function for such case.
Notes:
1. This function is required only when a new SRAM is installed.
2. Do not perform this function in cases other than the installation of a new SRAM because all
data in the SRAM will be deleted with this function.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
BACKUP FUNCTION

4 - 21

4.3.2
(1)

Operating Procedure of Assist Mode

Turn ON the power while [3] button and [CLEAR] button are pressed simultaneously.
The following screen is displayed.

Fig. 4-15

(2) Select the item with the digital keys and press the [START] button.
Note:
Explain the user (machine administrator) about the next operation and ask him/her to enter his/
her password.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
BACKUP FUNCTION

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4 - 22

5.

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

5.1

General Description

The purpose of preventive maintenance (PM) is to maintain the quality level of this equipment by
periodically inspecting and cleaning this equipment and also replacing the parts whose replacement
timing has come according to the maintenance contract. There are PM kits packaged for each unit or a
group of parts with the same replacement number of output pages, allowing you to carry out efficient
parts replacement.
Also to maintain the quality level of the equipment, overhauling is required when a specified number of
pages has been printed or when a specified period of time has passed, regardless of the number of
output pages.

5.2

PM Display

5.2.1

General Description

The maintenance timing for the PM parts of the process unit, such as the drum and developer material,
and the PM parts of the units other than the process unit, such as the 2nd transfer roller and fuser belt
varies depending on the conditions of the use, such as the ratio of color/black printing. Therefore, this
equipment shows the appropriate maintenance timing of each part on the control panel LCD.

5.2.2

PM Display Conditions

The conditions of the PM display consist of the codes of the setting mode (08) for the setting value
treated as a threshold of the PM display, the counter indicating the current number of prints and
driving time and the setting value which determines the display conditions.
The PM timing is displayed when the counter exceeds the setting value according to the display
condition based on the setting value which determines the display conditions.

Setting value treated as a threshold of the PM display

Note:
When 0 is entered as the setting value, PM timing is not displayed.
08-251
08-375
08-6192
08-6193
08-5550
08-5551
08-5552
08-5553
08-5554
08-5555
08-5556
08-5557
08-5558
08-5559
08-5560
08-5561
08-5562
08-5563

: Setting value of PM sheet counter [process unit (K)]

: Setting value of PM driving counter [process unit (K)]
: Setting value of PM sheet counter [process unit (Y)]
: Setting value of PM driving counter [process unit (Y)]
: Setting value of PM sheet counter [process unit (M)]
: Setting value of PM driving counter [process unit (M)]
: Setting value of PM sheet counter [process unit (C)]
: Setting value of PM driving counter [process unit (C)]
: Setting value of PM sheet counter [developer material (K)]
: Setting value of PM driving counter [developer material (K)]
: Setting value of PM sheet counter [developer material (Y)]
: Setting value of PM driving counter [developer material (Y)]
: Setting value of PM sheet counter [developer material (M)]
: Setting value of PM driving counter [developer material (M)]
: Setting value of PM sheet counter [developer material (C)]
: Setting value of PM driving counter [developer material (C)]
: Setting value of PM sheet counter [parts other than the PM parts of the process unit]
: Setting value of PM driving counter [parts other than the PM parts of the process unit]

Counter indicating the current number of prints and driving time

08-252 : Current value of PM sheet counter [process unit (K)]
08-376 : Current value of PM driving counter [process unit (K)]
08-6196 : Current value of PM sheet counter [process unit (Y)]

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

5-1

08-6197
08-5564
08-5565
08-5566
08-5567
08-5568
08-5569
08-5570
08-5571
08-5572
08-5573
08-5574
08-5575
08-5576
08-5577

: Current value of PM driving counter [process unit (Y)]

: Current value of PM sheet counter [process unit (M)]
: Current value of PM driving counter [process unit (M)]
: Current value of PM sheet counter [process unit (C)]
: Current value of PM driving counter [process unit (C)]
: Current value of PM sheet counter [developer material (K)]
: Current value of PM driving counter [developer material (K)]
: Current value of PM sheet counter [developer material (Y)]
: Current value of PM driving counter [developer material (Y)]
: Current value of PM sheet counter [developer material (M)]
: Current value of PM driving counter [developer material (M)]
: Current value of PM sheet counter [developer material (C)]
: Current value of PM driving counter [developer material (C)]
: Current value of PM sheet counter [parts other than the PM parts of the process unit]
: Current value of PM driving counter [parts other than the PM parts of the process unit]

Setting value which determines the display conditions

08-223 : Switching of output pages/driving counts at PM [process unit (K)]
08-5578 : Switching of output pages/driving counts at PM [process unit (Y)]
08-5579 : Switching of output pages/driving counts at PM [process unit (M)]
08-5580 : Switching of output pages/driving counts at PM [process unit (C)]
08-5581 : Switching of output pages/driving counts at PM [developer material (K)]
08-5582 : Switching of output pages/driving counts at PM [developer material (Y)]
08-5583 : Switching of output pages/driving counts at PM [developer material (M)]
08-5584 : Switching of output pages/driving counts at PM [developer material (C)]
08-5585 : Switching of output pages/driving counts at PM [parts other than the PM parts of the
process unit]

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5-2

5.2.3

PM Display Contents

When the counter value exceeds the setting value, the equipment notifies you of when the
maintenance time has come by displaying the message Time for periodic maintenance **** on the
control panel LCD. **** in the message is a 4-digit hexadecimal number code. This number is
allocated in the following manner, therefore the parts needing maintenance can be identified.
PM parts of the process unit (K)
PM parts of the process unit (Y)
PM parts of the process unit (M)
PM parts of the process unit (C)
Developer material (K)
Developer material (Y)
Developer material (M)
Developer material (C)
Parts other than the PM parts of the process unit

: 0008
: 0001
: 0002
: 0004
: 0080
: 0010
: 0020
: 0040
: 0100

If multiple parts have reached the maintenance time, the sum of the corresponding code values listed
above is displayed in hexadecimal numbers.
For example, if the PM parts of the process units (K) and (C) and the developer materials (K) and (C)
reach the maintenance time, the 4-digit hexadecimal number code will be 00CC in hexadecimal
numbers: 0008+0004+0080+0040=00CC.
4th digit
None

Always 0

3rd digit
Part (transfer roller)
Hexadecimal
Explanation
number code
0
No
maintenance
required
1
Maintenance
required

2nd digit
Developer material
Hexadecimal
Explanation
number code
0
No
maintenance
required
1
Y

1st digit
Photoconductive drum
Hexadecimal
Explanation
number code
0
No
maintenance
required
1
Y

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F

M
M+Y
C
Y+C
C+M
Y+M+C
K
K+Y
K+M
K+M+Y
K+C
K+Y+C
K+C+M
K+Y+M+C

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

M
M+Y
C
Y+C
C+M
Y+M+C
K
K+Y
K+M
K+M+Y
K+C
K+Y+C
K+C+M
K+Y+M+C

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

5-3

5.2.4

Counter Clearing

The counter indicating current number of prints and driving time used for the PM display function is
reset by entering 0 in it or clearing it in the PM support mode.
Note:
Even if 0 is entered in the PM management setting value of the setting mode (08), the
corresponding counter for the PM display is not reset. Be sure to clear the counter in the PM
support mode when the maintenance is finished.
The reset condition of each counter is as follows:

08-252: Current value of PM sheet counter [process unit (K)]

08-376: Current value of PM driving counter [process unit (K)]
When the current value of CLEANER/DRUM/CHARGER (K) on the main screen or DRUM (K) on
the sub-screen in the PM support mode is cleared, the counter is reset.

08-6196: Current value of PM sheet counter [process unit (Y)]

08-6197: Current value of PM driving counter [process unit (Y)]
When the current value of CLEANER/DRUM/CHARGER (Y) on the main screen or DRUM (Y) on
the sub-screen in the PM support mode is cleared, the counter is reset.

08-5564: Current value of PM sheet counter [process unit (M)]

08-5565: Current value of PM driving counter [process unit (M)]
When the current value of CLEANER/DRUM/CHARGER (M) on the main screen or DRUM (M)
on the sub-screen in the PM support mode is cleared, the counter is reset.

08-5566: Current value of PM sheet counter [process unit (C)]

08-5567: Current value of PM driving counter [process unit (C)]
When the current value of CLEANER/DRUM/CHARGER (C) on the main screen or DRUM (C) on
the sub-screen in the PM support mode is cleared, the counter is reset.

08-5568: Current value of PM sheet counter [developer material (K)]

08-5569: Current value of PM driving counter [developer material (K)]
When the current value of DEVELOPMENT UNIT on the main screen or BLACK DEVELOPER
(K) on the sub-screen in the PM support mode is cleared, the counter is reset.

08-5570: Current value of PM sheet counter [developer material (Y)]

08-5571: Current value of PM driving counter [developer material (Y)]
When the current value of DEVELOPMENT UNIT on the main screen or YELLOW DEVELOPER
(Y) on the sub-screen in the PM support mode is cleared, the counter is reset.

08-5572: Current value of PM sheet counter [developer material (M)]

08-5573: Current value of PM driving counter [developer material (M)]
When the current value of DEVELOPMENT UNIT (M) on the main screen or MAGENTA
DEVELOPER (M) on the sub-screen in the PM support mode is cleared, the counter is reset.

08-5574: Current value of PM sheet counter [developer material (C)]

08-5575: Current value of PM driving counter [developer material (C)]
When the current value of DEVELOPMENT UNIT on the main screen or CYAN DEVELOPER (C)
on the sub-screen in the PM support mode is cleared, the counter is reset.

08-5576: Current value of PM sheet counter [parts other than the PM parts of the process unit]
08-5577: Current value of PM driving counter [parts other than the PM parts of the process unit]
When the current value of 2nd TRANSFER on the main screen or 2nd TRANSFER ROLLER on
the sub screen in the PM support mode is cleared, the counter is reset.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5-4

5.3
(1)

General Descriptions for PM Procedure

Preparation
Ask the user about the current conditions of the equipment and note them down.
Before starting maintenance, make some sample copies and store them.
See the replacement record and check the parts to be replaced in the PM support mode (6S2) or list printing mode (9S-103).
6S-2
: [6] + [START] + [POWER] ON
[2]
[START]
9S-103 : [9] + [START] + [POWER] ON
[103]
[START]
PM SUPPORT CODE LIST
MM-DD-YY HH:MM
UNIT

OUTPUT PAGES/ PM OUTPUT PAGE/

DEVELOP COUNTS DEVELOP COUNTS

DRUM(K)
DRUM BLADE(K)
DRUM BRUSH(K)
GRID(K)
MAIN CHARGER NEEDLE(K)
CHARGER CLEANING PAD(K)

342
342
342
342
342
177

70000
70000
70000
70000
70000
70000

DRIVE COUNTS

PM DRIVE COUNTS

4377
4377
4377
4377
4377
3681

130000
130000
130000
130000
130000
130000

Fig. 5-1

Turn OFF the power and make sure to unplug the equipment.

(2)

Perform a preventive maintenance using the following checklist and illustrations. Refer to the
Service Manual if necessary.

(3)

Plug in the equipment after the maintenance has been finished. Then turn ON the power and
make some copies to confirm that the equipment is working properly.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

5-5

5.4

PM Support Mode

5.4.1

General Description

This equipment has a PM support mode which enables you to confirm the use status of each part (the
number of output pages or developed pages, and drive counts) requiring periodic replacement and also
the replacement record, as well as resetting counter values efficiently. This record can be printed out in
the list print mode.

5.4.2

Operational flow

PM support mode activated

[6]+[START]+[POWER]ON
[RETURN] pressed

[2]

[START]
Main unit chosen
[SUB UNIT] pressed

Main screen
Main unit list displayed

[CANCEL] pressed

[RETURN]
pressed

Main unit chosen

[RESET]

Sub screen
Sub unit list displayed

Clear finished

Clear screen
[CANCEL]
pressed

Counter clear
confirmation displayed

Sub unit chosen

[RESET] pressed
[INITIALIZE]
pressed

Clear finished
Counter clear performed
Fig. 5-2

The screen goes back to the main screen when the counter clear is performed or the [CANCEL]
button is pressed after moving from the main screen, while it goes back to the sub screen after
moving from the sub screen.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5-6

5.4.3

Operational screen

The description of the display (including the function of each button) on the LCD screen is shown
below.
1. Main screen
10

5
Fig. 5-3

Displaying of the main unit name

Back to the PM support mode activation screen

Moving to the clear screen to clear the selected unit counters 6 and 8 , including all sub unit
(parts) counters belonging to that unit When the unit is not selected, all counters are cleared.
Moving to the sub screen of the selected unit

4
5
6

7
8

9
10

Moving to the next/previous page

Displaying of the present number of print / develop pages
When there are differences among the sub units (parts), _ is displayed and CHECK
SUBUNIT is displayed at the top
* is displayed next to the present number when the number of print / develop pages has
exceeded its PM standard number.
Displaying of the standard number of print / develop pages to replace the unit parts
Displaying of the present drive counts
* is displayed next to the present number when the number of drive counts has exceeded its
PM standard number.
Displaying of the standard number of drive counts to replace the unit parts
Displaying of the number of print / develop pages (Page/D. cnt), drive counts (Cnt.) and
previous replacement date (Chg.) for a chosen unit
When the replacement date for the sub unit is different, press the [SUB UNIT] button to move
to the sub screen and see each information, otherwise information is not displayed

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

5-7

Notes:
1. is always displayed at the drive counts section for the reversing automatic document
feeder (RADF) and feed unit.
2. is displayed at the numeric section for the paper source which is not installed since the
paper source is different depending on the structure of options.
3. The number of output pages printed only in the full color mode is given in the pm output pages
section.
2. Sub screen
8

3
Fig. 5-4

Displaying of the sub unit (parts) name

Back to the main screen

Moving to the clear screen to clear the selected unit (parts) counters

Displaying of the present number of print / develop pages

* is displayed next to the present number when the number of print / develop pages has
exceeded its PM standard number.

Displaying of the standard number of print / develop pages to replace the sub unit (parts)

Displaying of the present drive counts

* is displayed next to the present number when the number of drive counts has exceeded its
PM standard number.

Displaying of the standard number of drive counts to replace the sub unit (parts)

Displaying of the number of print / develop pages and drive counts and previous replacement
date for a chosen sub unit

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5-8

3. Clear screen

Fig. 5-5
1

When the [CANCEL] button is pressed, the counter is not cleared and the display returns to
the main or sub screen.

When the [INITIALIZE] button is pressed, Present number of print / develop pages and
Present driving counts are cleared and Previous replacement date is updated.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

5-9

5.4.4

Access tree

The relation between the main unit and the sub unit is shown below.
Note:
Some parts in this manual are described with different names on the LCD screen. In this case,
the name in this manual is indicated in square brackets [ ].
Main screen

Sub-screen

CLEANER/DRUM/CHARGER (K)
[Process unit (K)]

DRUM (K)
DRUM BLADE (K) [Drum cleaning blade]
GRID (K) [Main charger grid]
MAIN CHARGER NEEDLE (K) [Needle electrode]
CHARGER CLEANING PAD (K) [Main charger cleaner]

CLEANER/DRUM/CHARGER (Y)
[Process unit (Y)]

DRUM (Y)
DRUM BLADE (Y) [Drum cleaning blade]
GRID (Y) [Main charger grid]
MAIN CHARGER NEEDLE (Y) [Needle electrode]
CHARGER CLEANING PAD (Y) [Main charger cleaner]

CLEANER/DRUM/CHARGER (M)
[Process unit (M)]

DRUM (M)
DRUM BLADE (M) [Drum cleaning blade]
GRID (M) [Main charger grid]
MAIN CHARGER NEEDLE (M) [Needle electrode]
CHARGER CLEANING PAD (M) [Main charger cleaner]

CLEANER/DRUM/CHARGER (C)
[Process unit (C)]

DRUM (C)
DRUM BLADE (C) [Drum cleaning blade]
GRID (C) [Main charger grid]
MAIN CHARGER NEEDLE (C) [Needle electrode]
CHARGER CLEANING PAD (C) [Main charger cleaner]

OZONE FILTER (REAR)

[Ozone filter-1]

-----

OZONE FILTER (TRAY BACK)

[Ozone filter-2]

-----

DEVELOPER UNIT

BLACK DEVELOPER [Developer material K]

YELLOW DEVELOPER [Developer material Y]
MAGENTA DEVELOPER [Developer material M]
CYAN DEVELOPER [Developer material C]
DEVELOPER FILTER (K)
DEVELOPER FILTER (Y)
DEVELOPER FILTER (M)
DEVELOPER FILTER (C)

TBU CLEANING PAD

[Transfer belt cleaning mylar]

CLEANING PAD (FACING ROLLER)

[2nd transfer facing roller cleaning mylar]

TRANSFER BELT CLEANER

[Transfer belt cleaning unit]

BELT BLADE [Transfer belt cleaning blade]

2nd TRANSFER

2nd TRANSFER ROLLER

FUSER

FUSER BELT
PRESS ROLLER
FUSER ROLLER
PRESS ROLLER FINGER [Separation finger]
FUSER BELT GUIDE

1st CST.
[1st drawer]

PICK UP ROLLER (1st CST.)

FEED ROLLER
SEP ROLLER (1st CST.) [Separation roller]

2nd CST.
[2nd drawer]

PICK UP ROLLER (2nd CST.)

FEED ROLLER (2nd CST.)
SEP ROLLER (2nd CST.) [Separation roller]

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5 - 10

Main screen

Sub-screen

SFB
[Bypass unit]

PICK UP ROLLER (SFB)

FEED ROLLER (SFB)
SEP ROLLER (SFB) [Separation roller]

RADF

PICK UP ROLLER (RADF)

FEED ROLLER (RADF)
SEP ROLLER (RADF) [Separation roller]

LCF

PICK UP ROLLER (LCF)

FEED ROLLER (LCF)
SEP ROLLER (LCF) [Separation roller]

3rd CST.
[PFP upper drawer]

PICK UP ROLLER (3rd CST.)

FEED ROLLER (3rd CST.)
SEP ROLLER (3rd CST.) [Separation roller]

4th CST.
[PFP lower drawer]

PICK UP ROLLER (4th CST.)

FEED ROLLER (4th CST.)
SEP ROLLER (4th CST.) [Separation roller]

Note:
When the counter value of any of the pickup roller, feed roller and separation roller in each unit is
reset, the value of the feeding retry counter is also reset simultaneously. When the [RESET]
button is pressed after selecting the feed unit in the Main Screen, the value of the feeding retry
counter is also reset simultaneously.
The feeding retry counter:
1st drawer
Reset the feeding retry counter (08-1390)
2nd drawer
Reset the feeding retry counter (08-1391)
PFP upper drawer Reset the feeding retry counter (08-1392)
PFP lower drawer Reset the feeding retry counter (08-1393)
Bypass unit
Reset the feeding retry counter (08-1394)
LCF
Reset the feeding retry counter (08-1395)

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

5 - 11

5.5

Work flow of parts replacement

The life span of the parts changes depending on their general use, such as the ratio of the color/black
printing or the adjustment for keeping the printing quality. Therefore, it is necessary to consider not only
the number of printed/developed pages but also the drive counts when deciding the timing for parts
replacement. Even if the number of print / develop pages has reached the level of replacement, for
instance, the part may still be usable with its drive counts not reaching the specified drive counts. On
the other hand, the part may need replacement even if the number of print / develop pages has not
reached the level of replacement with its driving time exceeding the specified drive counts. The life
span of some parts such as feed roller is heavily dependent on the number of output pages rather than
the drive counts.
The following work flow diagram shows how to judge the timing of replacement with the number of print
/ develop pages.
Example 1:
When the number of print / develop pages has reached the specified level
The parts in RADF
The parts in feeding system

The parts in the drum/cleaner unit

The parts in the transfer belt unit
The parts in the 2nd transfer unit
Developer material
The parts in the fuser unit

Check the drive counts at PM

support mode.
Does it exceed the specified
drive counts?

Replace the part.

Yes

Replace the part.

No
The part is still usable.

Replace the part after the drive

counts has reached the specified
count.
Fig. 5-6

Example 2:
When the image failure occurred before the number of print / develop pages has reached the
specified level
Check the drive counts of all parts at PM support mode.

Does it exceed the specified drive count?

Yes

Replace the part.

No
Check the part and equipment according to the TROUBLESHOOTING.
Fig. 5-7

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5 - 12

5.6

Preventive Maintenance Checklist

Symbols/value used in the checklist

Cleaning

Lubrication/Coating

A: Clean with alcohol

B: Clean with soft pad,
cloth or vacuum
cleaner

L:
SI:
W1:
W2:
AV:
FL:

Replacement

Launa 40
Silicon oil
White grease
(Molykote EM-30L)
White grease
(Molykote HP-300)
Alvania No.2
Floil (GE-334C)

Value:
Replacement
cycle
R: Replace if
deformed or
damaged

Operation check
O: After cleaning or
replacement,
confirm there is
no problem.

[Preventive Maintenance Checklist]

Notes:
1. Perform cleaning and lubricating in the following timing. Lubricate the replacement parts
according to the replacement cycle.
Model name

Black

Full color

e-STUDIO2020C

every 40,000 sheets

every 40,000 sheets

e-STUDIO2330C

every 56,000 sheets

every 46,000 sheets

e-STUDIO2820C

every 56,000 sheets

every 56,000 sheets

e-STUDIO2830C

every 70,000 sheets

every 56,000 sheets

e-STUDIO3520C
e-STUDIO3530C
e-STUDIO4520C

every 70,000 sheets

every 70,000 sheets

2. The value in the Replacement field of the table below indicates the replacement number of
output pages in either the black or the full color mode. If the values are different, the one for
the full color mode is indicated in parentheses ( ). If they differ according to the model, they
are indicated in the order of the e-STUDIO2020C, e-STUDIO2330C, e-STUDIO2820C, eSTUDIO2830C and e-STUDIO3520C/3530C/4520C.
3. The replacement cycle of the parts in the feeding section equals to the number of sheets fed
from each paper source.
4. Be careful not to put oil on the rollers, belts and belt pulleys when lubricating.
5. Parts list <P-I> represents the page item in e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/
3530C/4520C Service Parts List.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

5 - 13

5.6.1

Scanner
A2

A4

A5

A8

A6

A3

A1

A9

A10

A7
Fig. 5-8

Items to check

A1

Original glass

A2

Replacement
(x 1,000 sheets)

(x 1,000 drive
counts)

Operati
on
check

Parts
list
<P-I>

B or A

28-1

ADF original glass

28-2

A3

Mirror-1

A4

Mirror-2

A5

Mirror-3

A6

Reflector

A7

Lens

A8

Exposure lamp

A9

Automatic original detection

sensor

A10 Slide sheet

(front and rear)

Cleaning

Lubric
ation/
Coatin
g

12-10
R

B
B or A

29-6

12-12

A1: Original glass, A2: ADF original glass

Clean both sides of the original glass and ADF original. Make sure that there is no dust on the
mirrors-1, -2, -3 and lens after cleaning. Then install the original glass and ADF original glass.
Note:
Make sure that there is no fingerprints or oil staining on part of the original glass on where the
original scale is mounted since the shading correction plate is located below the scale to be
scanned.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5 - 14

5.6.2

Laser unit
B1

Fig. 5-9

Items to check

B1

LSU slit glass

Cleaning

Lubric
ation/
Coatin
g

Replacement
(x 1,000 sheets)

(x 1,000 drive
counts)

Operati
on
check

Parts
list
<P-I>

B or A

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

5 - 15

5.6.3

Feed unit
C4

C1

C2
C3
C4

C1

C2

C3

C6
C5
C6

C5
C6
C7

C7

Fig. 5-10

Items to check

Replacement
(x 1,000 sheets)

(x 1,000 drive
counts)

Operati
on
check

Parts
list
<P-I>

C1

Pickup roller

80

20-20

C2

Feed roller

80

20-24

C3

Separation roller

80

20-5

C4

Transport roller

C5

Paper guide

C6

GCB bushing bearing

C7

Drive gear
(tooth face and shaft)

W1

C8

One side of the plastic

bushing to which the shaft is
inserted

W1

C9

Registration roller (metal)

C10 Middle guide

Cleaning

Lubric
ation/
Coatin
g

AV, W2

A
A

25-19
25-2

C3: Separation roller

Apply an even coat of grease (Alvania No.2) to all round the inside of the spring.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5 - 16

When replacing the separation roller, apply 1 rice-sized grain of white grease (Molykote HP-300)
on the places of the holder shown in the figure (4 places).
Note:
Make sure that the grease does not adhere to the roller surface. Wipe it off with alcohol if
adhered.

5
Apply white grease

Apply grease on the

inner surface

Fig. 5-12

Fig. 5-11

C7: Drive gear

Apply a blob of white grease (Molykoto EM-30L) onto the teeth (3 rice-sized grains) and onto the
inner shaft (1 rice-sized grain) of the drive gears.
Note:
Make sure that oil is not running over or scattered around as the gear is rotated coming into the
clutch after applying molykote to the gear which is located near the clutch. The quantity of
molykote should be smaller than that to be applied to the other parts.

C10: Middle guide

Open the 2nd transfer unit, and then open the middle guide by holding its knob to clean the entire
surface of the Mylar with alcohol.
Note:
Do not hold the middle guide itself when opening and closing it.
Mylar

Knob

Middle guide

2nd transfer unit

Fig. 5-13

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

5 - 17

5.6.4

Automatic duplexing unit

D1

D3

D1

D2

D4
D2

D3
D1
D3
Front side

Rear side
Fig. 5-14

Lubric
ation/
Coatin
g

Items to check

Cleaning

D1

Transport roller (upper,

middle and lower)

D2

One side of the GCB bushing

to which the shaft is inserted

D3

One side of the plastic

bushing to which the shaft is
inserted

W1

D4

Paper guide

Replacement
(x 1,000 sheets)

(x 1,000 drive
counts)

Operati
on
check

Parts
list
<P-I>
48-2
48-12

47-4

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5 - 18

5.6.5

Bypass feed unit

E5
E7 E2

E1
E4

E3

5
E3
Fig. 5-15

Items to check

Cleaning

Lubric
ation/
Coatin
g

Replacement
(x 1,000 sheets)

(x 1,000 drive
counts)

Operati
on
check

Parts
list
<P-I>

E1

Pickup roller

80

24-26

E2

Feed roller

80

24-37

E3

Separation roller

80

23-1

E4

Bypass tray

24-40

E5

Drive gear (shaft)

E6

GCB bushing bearing

E7

Transport roller

AV, W2
B
W1
L
A

E3: Separation roller

Apply an even coat of grease (Alvania No.2) to all round the inside of the spring.
When replacing the separation roller, apply 1 rice-sized grain of white grease (Molykote HP-300)
on the places of the holder shown in the figure (4 places).
Make sure that the grease does not adhere to the roller surface. Wipe it off with alcohol if
adhered.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

5 - 19

5.6.6

Main charger
F3
F4
F5
F2
F1

F3

Fig. 5-16

Items to check

Cleaning

Lubric
ation/
Coatin
g

Replacement
(x 1,000 sheets)

(x 1,000 drive
counts)

Operati
on
check

Parts
list
<P-I>

F1

Main charger case

40-1

F2

Needle electrode

F3

Contact point of terminals

F4

Main charger grid

40/56/56/70/70
(40/46/56/56/70)

170

40-14

F5

Main charger cleaner

40/56/56/70/70
(40/46/56/56/70)

170

40-15

40/56/56/70/70
(40/46/56/56/70)

170

40-6
40-2
40-3

F1: Main charger case

Clean the main charger case with a cloth soaked in water and squeezed tightly, and then wipe
them with a dry cloth.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5 - 20

5.6.7

Drum/Cleaner unit, Cleaner related section

G2

G5

G1
G9

G3
G4

G6

G8

G7

Fig. 5-17

Items to check

Cleaning

Lubric
ation/
Coatin
g

Replacement
(x 1,000 sheets)

(x 1,000 drive
counts)

Operati
on
check

Parts
list
<P-I>

G1

Whole cleaner unit

G2

Drum

40/56/56/70/70
(40/46/56/56/70)

170

G3

Drum cleaning blade

40/56/56/70/70
(40/46/56/56/70)

170

39-16

G4

Felt

39-19
39-20

G5

Recovery blade

39-21

G6

Drum thermistor

38-33

G7

Discharge LED

36-19

G8

Ozone filter-1

40/56/56/70/70
(40/46/56/56/70)

170

1-13

G9

Ozone filter-2

160/224/224/280/
280
(160/184/224/224/
280)

680

7-36

G2: Drum
Handling precautions
If fingerprints or oil adhere to the surface of the drum, its properties may degrade, affecting
the quality of the copy image. So, wear gloves to avoid touching the drum surface with your
bare hands. Be sure to handle the drum carefully when installing and removing it so as not to
damage its surface.

Do not use patting powder (lubricant)

Since patting powder may affect the initial image if it adheres to the OPC surface, do not
apply it. The friction between the drum and cleaning blade is sufficiently small without it and
no problem would occur even if it is not applied.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

5 - 21

Clearing the drum counter

When the drum has been replaced with a new one, the drum counter for the new drum (K, Y,
M, C) must be cleared to 0 (zero). This clearing can be performed in PM support mode.
- Drum counter
Drum (K): 08-1150-0, 3, 6, 7
Drum (Y): 08-1152-0, 3, 6, 7
Drum (M): 08-1154-0, 3, 6, 7
Drum (C): 08-1156-0, 3, 6, 7

Storage location of photoconductive drums

The drum should be stored in a dark place where the ambient temperature is between 10C
to 35C (no condensation). Be sure to avoid places where drums may be subjected to high
humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes.
Do not place the drum in a location where it is exposed to direct sunlight or high intensity light
such as near a window. Otherwise the drum will fatigue, and will not produce sufficient image
density immediately after being installed in the equipment.

Cleaning the drum

At periodic maintenance calls, wipe the entire surface of the drum clean using the designated
cleaning cotton. Note that there is no need to clean the surface of the new drum unless there
is a problem. Use sufficiently thick cleaning cotton (dry soft pad) so as not to scratch the drum
surface inadvertently with your fingertips or nails. Also, remove your rings and wristwatch
before starting cleaning work to prevent accidental damage to the drum.
Do not use alcohol, selenium refresher and other organic solvents or silicon oil as they will
have an adverse effect on the drum.

Scratches on drum surface

If the surface is scratched in such a way that the aluminum substrate is exposed, no copy
image will be produced on this area. In addition, the cleaning blade will be damaged so
replacement with a new drum will be necessary.

Collecting used drums

Regarding the recovery and disposal of used drums, we recommend following the relevant
local regulations or rules.

G3: Drum cleaning blade

Handling precautions
Pay attention to the following points as the cleaning blade life is determined by the condition
of its edge. Since the edge of the blade is vulnerable and can be easily damaged by factors
such as the adherence of paper dust.
- Do not allow hard objects to hit or rub against blade edge.
- Do not rub the edge with a cloth or soft pad.
- Do not leave oil (or fingerprints, etc.) on the edge.
- Do not apply solvents such as paint thinner to the blade.
- Do not allow paper fibers or dirt to contact the blade edge.
- Do not place the blade near a heat source.

Cleaning procedure
Clean the blade edge with a cloth moistened with water and squeezed lightly.
Replace the cleaning blade with new ones if poor images are copied due to the damaged
blade regardless of the number of output pages which have been made

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5 - 22

G4: Felt
When replacing the drum cleaning unit, check that there is no gap between the blade and felt on
both ends. If there is, or when the felts put pressure to the cleaning blade, reattach the felts on
the position shown in the figure (by slightly pushing them to the direction of the arrows).
Felt

Drum cleaning blade

Blade
Felt

5
Blade
Fig. 5-18

G5: Recovery blade

Clean the surface of the recovery blade with a soft pad or cloth, if dirt cannot be removed with a
vacuum cleaner. If the edge of recovery blade is damaged, replace the blade regardless of the
number of output pages.
Note:
Never use water or alcohol for cleaning the transfer belt recovery blade.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

5 - 23

5.6.8

Developer unit (K, Y, M, and C)

H5
H10

H2

H6

H11
H7

H7

H1
H3

H4
H5

H2

H6

H8
Fig. 5-19

Items to check

H1

Whole developer unit

H2

Developer unit drive section

H3

Developer material

H4

Front shield (unified with the

doctor blade)

H5

Side seal (front, rear)

H6

Oil seal
(Developer sleeve)

H7

Cleaning

Lubric
ation/
Coatin
g

Replacement
(x 1,000 sheets)

(x 1,000 drive
counts)

Operati
on
check

Parts
list
<P-I>

B
W1
40/56/56/70/70
(40/46/56/56/70)

125

103-2

38-26

38-27
38-28

38-2

Oil seal
(Rear side)

38-3

H8

Oil seal
(Front side)

38-4
38-13

H9

Auto-toner sensor

AV

38-31

H10 Developer filter

H11 Developer unit upper cover

40/56/56/70/70
(40/46/56/56/70)
B

125

38-40
38-25

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5 - 24

H1: Developer unit, H4: Front shield (unified with the doctor blade)
1. Cleaning
Clean the doctor blade so as to prevent developer material from adhering to it when the
drum is being replaced.
Space the front shield from the developer sleeve and then insert a doctor blade
cleaning jig into the doctor sleeve gap. Then clean the doctor blade by running the jig
for 3 times to and from along with the edge of the blade.

Fig. 5-20

2. Removal of foreign matter in the developer unit

(1) Take off the process unit (EPU).
(2) Space the front shield.
(3) Insert the cleaning jig all the way in the developer unit at a position approx. 30 mm
away from the white streak.

30mm

1
Fig. 5-21

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

5 - 25

(4) Slide the cleaning jig to where the white streak appears.
(5) Pull out the cleaning jig while manually turning the gear to rotate the developer
sleeve.

Knob

Fig. 5-22

Tip:
If foreign matter is not removed by the above procedure, take off the developer unit,
discharge the developer material on to a sheet of clean paper and then remove any
foreign matter found. If you cannot find any foreign matter, exchange the developer
material.
3. Removal of foreign matter on the developer sleeve
(1) Apply a sheet of paper to the developer sleeve.
(2) Scrape off foreign matter and developer material on the developer sleeve using the
jig.

Foreign matter
Fig. 5-23

H3: Developer material

After replacing the developer material, be sure to perform the auto-toner adjustment and then
image quality control initialization.
P.3-2 "3.1.2 Adjustment of the Auto-Toner Sensor"
P.3-4 "3.1.3 Performing Image Quality Control (ICQ)"

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5 - 26

H6: Oil seal (Developer sleeve)

During replacement, coat the oil seal with grease (Alvania No.2) following the procedure below.
Also, when the developer sleeve is disassembled, clean the shaft and oil seal before coating the
oil seal with grease.
Developer sleeve
(1)

(2)

(3)

2 pc.

Push in a new oil seal parallel to the

mounting hole section of the developer
frame.
* Pay attention to the direction in which the
oil seal is attached. (See figure on right.)
Apply an even coat of grease to the inside of
the oil seal.
Amount: a minute amount
Wipe off any grease exuded from the inside.

Developer frame

Outside

5
Inside

Grease

Oil seal

Fig. 5-24

H9: Auto-toner sensor

Clean the surface of the auto-toner sensor with a cotton swab or soft cloth with sufficient alcohol
filled in.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

5 - 27

5.6.9

Waste Toner Box

I1

Waste toner box

Fig. 5-25

Items to check

I1

Waste toner box full

detection sensor

Cleaning

Lubric
ation/
Coatin
g

Replacement
(x 1,000 sheets)

(x 1,000 drive
counts)

Operati
on
check

Parts
list
<P-I>
42-104

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5 - 28

5.6.10

Transfer belt unit / Transfer belt cleaning unit

J9

J3

J2(Y)

J10 J8

J2(M) J2(C)

J2(K)

J1

J5

Rear side
J4

J6

J7
Fig. 5-26

Items to check

Cleaning

Lubric
ation/
Coatin
g

Replacement

Operati
on
check

Parts
list
<P-I>

(x 1,000 sheets)

(x 1,000 drive
counts)

33-1

33-9

J1

Transfer belt

J2

1st transfer roller

J3

Drive roller

33-5

J4

2nd transfer facing roller

33-10

J5

2nd transfer facing roller

cleaning Mylar

160/224/224/280/
280
(160/184/224/224/
280)

680

31-14

J6

Tension roller

33-8

J7

Idling roller

33-7

J8

Transfer belt cleaning blade

160/224/224/280/
280
(160/184/224/224/
280)

680

35-4

J9

Recovery blade

35-3
35-15

J10

Blade seal

160/224/224/280/
280
(160/184/224/224/
280)

680

35-8
35-11

J1: Transfer belt

Handling precautions
- Do not touch the front and rear surfaces of the transfer belt surface with bare hands.
- Prevent oil or other foreign matter from adhering to both surfaces of the transfer belt.
- Do not apply external pressure that might scratch the transfer belt.
- When replacing the belt and transfer belt cleaning unit, apply patting powder sufficiently
and evenly. Otherwise, it may reduce the cleaning efficiency.
- When replacing the transfer belt, clean the drive roller, 2nd transfer facing roller, and
tension roller with a solvent such as alcohol, and then attach the transfer belt.

Cleaning procedure
Fully clean up the toner and such adhering to the roller with alcohol, and then wipe it with a
dry cloth until no trace remains. Take care not to have the transfer belt surface being
damaged or dented. Replace the transfer belt with a new one regardless of the number of
output pages, if any crack or major scar is found.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

5 - 29

J3: Drive roller, J4: 2nd transfer facing roller, J6: Tension roller, J7: Idling roller
Fully clean up the toner and such adhering to the roller with alcohol when the transfer belt
cleaning blade is replaced, since an image failure may occur if there is any dirt remaining on the
roller. Also, remove dust and toner scattering adhering to the inside of the transfer belt unit in
order to keep rollers clean.

J4: 2nd transfer facing roller

Apply Floil (GE-334C) all around the shaft of the 2nd transfer facing roller, which contacts the
grounding plate inside the 2nd transfer facing roller rear holder.

J8: Transfer belt cleaning blade

Handling precautions
Pay attention to the following points as the cleaning blade life is determined by the condition
of its edge.
- Do not allow hard objects to hit or rub against blade edge.
- Do not rub the edge with a cloth or soft pad.
- Do not leave oil (or fingerprints, etc.) on the edge.
- Do not apply solvents such as paint thinner to the blade.
- Do not allow paper fibers or dirt to contact the blade edge.
- Do not place the blade near a heat source.

Cleaning procedure
Clean the blade edge with a cloth moistened with water and squeezed lightly.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5 - 30

5.6.11

Image quality control unit

Image quality control unit
K2

K3
K1
K3

Fig. 5-27

Items to check

Cleaning

Lubric
ation/
Coatin
g

5
Replacement
(x 1,000 sheets)

(x 1,000 drive
counts)

Operati
on
check

Parts
list
<P-I>

K1

Image quality sensor

27-5

K2

Sensor shutter

27-2

K3

Image position aligning

sensor (Front/Rear)

27-4

K1: Image quality sensor, K2: Sensor shutter, K3: Image position aligning sensor
Clean the image quality sensor, image position aligning sensor (Front/Rear) and the sensor
shutter when replacing the transfer belt cleaning blade and the blade seal, or the transfer belt
itself.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

5 - 31

5.6.12

2nd transfer roller unit

L3
L4
L1
L2

Fig. 5-28

Items to check

Cleaning

L1

2nd transfer roller

L2

Registration roller
(rubber)

L3

Paper clinging detection

sensor

L4

2nd transfer roller paper

guide

Lubric
ation/
Coatin
g

Replacement
(x 1,000 sheets)

(x 1,000 drive
counts)

Operati
on
check

Parts
list
<P-I>

160/224/224/280/
280
(160/184/224/224/
280)

680

13-10

14-1
13-108

L3: Paper clinging detection sensor

Open the 2nd transfer unit and clean the paper clinging detection sensor with a cotton swab.
Note:
Be sure to clean the entire surface of the sensor.
Paper clinging detection sensor
2nd transfer unit

Fig. 5-29

L3: 2nd transfer roller paper guide

If toner adheres to the ribs of the 2nd transfer roller paper guide, clean it with a soft pad, cloth or
electric vacuum cleaner.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5 - 32

5.6.13

Fuser unit
M2

M10
M6
M8
M4

M3
M9

5
M1
M5
M3
M13

M7

M11

Fig. 5-30

Items to check

Cleaning

Lubric
ation/
Coatin
g

Replacement
(x 1,000 sheets)

(x 1,000 drive
counts)

Operati
on
check

Parts
list
<P-I>

M1

Pressure roller

80/112/112/140/
140
(80/92/112/112/
140)

340

44-1

M2

Pressure roller separation

finger

80/112/112/140/
140
(80/92/112/112/
140)

340

44-18

M3

Pressure roller thermistor

(center/rear)

44-14

M4

Fuser belt

80/112/112/140/
140
(80/92/112/112/
140)

340

43-3

M5

Heat roller

43-10

M6

Fuser roller

80/112/112/140/
140
(80/92/112/112/
140)

340

43-4

M7

Fuser belt guide

80/112/112/140/
140
(80/92/112/112/
140)

340

43-12

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

5 - 33

Items to check

Cleaning

Replacement
(x 1,000 sheets)

(x 1,000 drive
counts)

Operati
on
check

Parts
list
<P-I>

M8

Fuser belt front thermistor

43-21

M9

Fuser belt thermostat

(center/rear)

43-19
43-20

M10 Separation plate

43-2

M11 Entry guide

44-27
44-28

M12 Fuser unit gear

Lubric
ation/
Coatin
g

W2

44-30

M13 Pressure roller cleaning pad

44-13

M14 Fuser belt thermopiles

(center/rear)

46-4

M1: Pressure roller, M4: Fuser belt

Handling precautions
Pressure roller
- Do not leave any oil (fingerprints, etc.) on the pressure roller.
- Be careful not to allow any hard object to hit or rub against the pressure roller, or it may be
damaged, possibly resulting in poor cleaning.
Fuser belt
- Do not touch the fuser belt surface with bare hands.
- Prevent oil or other foreign matter from staining the fuser belt surface.
- Do not allow alcohol or any other organic solvent to contact with the fuser belt.
- Do not apply external pressure that might scratch the fuser belt.

Checking
- Check for stain and damage on the fuser belt and pressure roller, and clean if necessary.
- Check the separation plate and fingers and check for chipped tips.
- Check the thermistors contact and non-contact status.
- Check the fused and fixed condition of the toner.
- Check the gap between the inlet guide and pressure roller.
- Check the fuser belt for proper transportation.
- Check the pressure roller for proper rotation.

Cleaning procedure
When the fuser belt and pressure roller become dirty, they will cause jamming. If this
happens, wipe the surface clean with a suitable cloth. For easier cleaning, clean the belt and
roller while they are still warm.

Note:
Be careful not to rub the fuser belt and pressure roller surface with your nails or hard objects
because it can be easily damaged. Do not use silicone oil on the fuser belt and pressure roller.

Checking after the assembly of the fuser belt unit

After the assembly, rotate the fuser belt for a round to confirm that the belt is neither folded
nor scratched.
A folded or scratched belt may be broken when it is in use.

M2: Pressure roller separation finger

The paper jam may be caused if the tip of the finger is damaged or deformed. If there is any
problem with it, replace the finger with a new one regardless of the number of output pages
which have been made. Do not damage the tip of the finger during the cleaning. The finger may
be damaged if the toner adhering to the tip of it is scraped off forcibly. Replace the finger if the
toner is sticking to it heavily.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5 - 34

M3: Pressure roller thermistor

Clean the thermistor with alcohol if the toner or dirt is sticking to it when the pressure roller is
replaced. Do not deform or damage the thermistor during the cleaning. Replace the thermistor
with a new one if it is damaged or deformed regardless of degree.

M4: Fuser belt, M5: Heat roller, M6: Fuser roller

When any or all of fuser belt, heat roller and fuser roller is replaced or taken off from the fuser
unit, perform adjustment for the separation plate gap.
P.3-77 "3.11 Adjustment of the Separation Plate Gap"

M8: Fuser belt front thermistor

Clean the thermistor with alcohol if the toner or dirt is sticking to it when the fuser belt is replaced.
Do not deform or damage the thermistor during the cleaning. Replace the thermistor with a new
one if it is damaged or deformed regardless of degree.

M12: Fuser unit gear

Wipe off any old grease, and then apply 3 to 4 rice-sized grains of white grease (Molykote HP300) onto the gear teeth.

M14: Fuser belt thermopiles (center/rear)

Remove the thermopiles. Use a cloth with a small amount of alcohol to clean them.
Be sure not to touch the lens of the thermopiles.
Clean the equipment according to the following timing.
Model name

Black

Full color

e-STUDIO2020C

every 8,000 sheets

every 8,000 sheets

e-STUDIO2330C

every 112,000 sheets

every 92,000 sheets

e-STUDIO2820C

every 112,000 sheets

every 112,000 sheets

e-STUDIO2830C

every 140,000 sheets

every 112,000 sheets

e-STUDIO3520C
e-STUDIO3530C
e-STUDIO4520C

every 140,000 sheets

every 140,000 sheets

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

5 - 35

5.6.14

Exit unit

N1

N2

Fig. 5-31

Items to check

N1

Upper exit roller

N2

Lower exit roller

Cleaning

Lubric
ation/
Coatin
g

Replacement
(x 1,000 sheets)

(x 1,000 drive
counts)

Operati
on
check

Parts
list
<P-I>
46-21

W2

46-30

N2: Lower exit roller

Wipe off any old grease, and then apply 0.5 to 1 rice-sized grains of white grease (Molykote HP300) onto the inside of the roller and both end faces of the shaft hole.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5 - 36

5.6.15

RADF (MR-3018)
O5

O8

O6

O4

O7

O3

O2

O9

O1

O10

Fig. 5-32

Items to check

Cleaning

Lubric
ation/
Coatin
g

Replacement
(x 1,000 sheets)

(x 1,000 drive
counts)

Operati
on
check

Parts
list
<P-I>

O1

Pickup roller

120

5-1

O2

Separation roller

120

4-10

O3

Feed roller

120

5-1

O4

Registration roller

4-30

O5

Intermediate transfer roller

3-13

O6

Front read roller

3-14

O7

Rear read roller

3-1

O8

Reverse registration roller

3-10

O9

Exit/reverse roller

4-25

O10 Platen sheet

B or A

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

5 - 37

5.6.16

PFP (KD-1023)
P1

P2

P3

P2
P3

P1
Fig. 5-33

Items to check

Cleaning

Lubric
ation/
Coatin
g

Replacement
(x 1,000 sheets)

(x 1,000 drive
counts)

Operati
on
check

Parts
list
<P-I>

P1

Pickup roller
(upper/lower)

80

5-20

P2

Feed roller
(upper/lower)

80

5-24

P3

Separation roller
(upper/lower)

80

5-5

P4

Drive gear
(tooth face)

AV, W2
W1

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5 - 38

5.6.17

LCF (KD-1024)
Q1

Q2

Q3

Fig. 5-34

Items to check

Cleaning

Lubric
ation/
Coatin
g

Replacement
(x 1,000 sheets)

(x 1,000 drive
counts)

Operati
on
check

Parts
list
<P-I>

Q1

Pickup roller

160

4-30

Q2

Feed roller

160

4-28

Q3

Separation roller

160

5-12

Q4

Drive gear
(tooth face)

W1

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

5 - 39

5.7

Storage of Supplies and Replacement Parts

Precautions for storing supplies and replacement parts are shown below.
1. Toner/Developer
Toner and developer should be stored in a place where the ambient temperature is between 10C to
35C (no condensation), and should also be protected against direct sunlight during transportation.
2. Photoconductive drum
Like the toner and developer, photoconductive drum should be stored in a dark place where the
ambient temperature is between 10C to 35C (no condensation). Be sure to avoid places where
drums may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes.
3. Drum cleaning blade / Transfer belt cleaning blade
This item should be stored in a flat place where the ambient temperature is between 10C to 35C,
and should also be protected against high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes.
4. Transfer belt / Transfer roller / Fuser belt / Pressure roller
Avoid places where the rollers may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes.
5. Paper
Avoid storing copy paper in places where it may be subjected to high humidity.
After a package is opened, be sure to place and store it in a storage bag.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5 - 40

5.8

PM KIT

A PM kit is a package for each unit of replacement parts requiring PM.

KIT name
DEV-KIT-FC28K-N

DEV-KIT-FC28CLR-N

TBU-KIT-FC28

FR-KIT-FC28

PM-KIT-ROLLER

ROL-KIT-1010

DF-KIT-3018

Component

Part name

Qty.

Drum cleaning blade

BL-FC28D

Main charger grid

GRID-CHARGR-MAIN-F45X

Needle electrode

ELCTRD-CHARGR-MAIN-380

Main charger cleaner

FILM-CLNR-GRID-F45X

Developer material

D-FC28-K

Developer unit filter

ASYS-DUCT-DEV-COV

Ozone filter 1

FLTR-OZON-45X-CBO-600M

Slit glass cleaner pad

ASYS-CLNR-GLASS

Drum cleaning blade

BL-FC28D

Main charger grid

GRID-CHARGR-MAIN-F45X

Needle electrode

ELCTRD-CHARGR-MAIN-380

Main charger cleaner

FILM-CLNR-GRID-F45X

Developer material (Y)

D-FC28-Y

Developer material (M)

D-FC28-M

Developer material (C)

D-FC28-C

Developer filter

ASYS-DUCT-DEV-COV

Transfer belt cleaning blade

BL-FC35TR

2nd transfer roller

CR-FC35TR2

Blade seal (front side)

SEAL-BLADE-CLN-TBU-F

Blade-seal (rear side)

SEAL-BLADE-CLN-TBU-R

2nd transfer facing roller

cleaning Mylar

MYLAR-CLN-TR2-WP-450

Ozone filter 2

FLTR-OZ-50-TNR-EX-450

Fuser belt

BT-FC35-FU

Fuser roller

FR-FC28-U

Press roller

HR-FC28-L

Separation finger

SCRAPR-FUS-350

Fuser belt guide

COLLAR-HR-T1

Pick up roller

ROLLER-PICK-AT

Feed roller

K-ROLL-FEED

Separation roller

ASYS-ROLL-SPT

Pick up roller

ROL-PICK-UP

Feed roller

ROL-PAPER-FED-F

Separation roller

ROL-PAPER-FED-S

Pick up roller

ASYS-ROL-FEED

Feed roller

ASYS-ROL-FEED

Separation roller

ASYS-ROL-RET

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

5 - 41

5.9

Maintenance Part List

The parts used for the maintenance of this equipment are as follows.
No.

Item

Purpose

Parts list
<P-I>*

Cleaning brush

Cleaning inside of the equipment

101-2

Doctor blade cleaning jig

Cleaning the doctor blade

101-3

Wire holder jig

Fixing the wire at the assembly of the carriage wire

101-4

Developer material nozzle

Pouring the developer material (attached to the

developer bottle)

101-5

Doctor-sleeve gap jig

Measuring the gap between the developer sleeve and

the doctor blade (gauge 0.60, 0.65, 0.70)

101-6

Belt tension jig

Adjusting the belt tension at the installation of the

scan motor

101-7

Separation plate gap jig

Measuring the gap between the separation plate and

the fuser belt

101-8

Drum bag

Storing the drum

101-10

Download jig (DLM board)

Updating the scanner/options ROM

102-1

10

ROM

Installing the DLM board

102-10

11

Download jig-2 (6 Flash ROMs)

Updating the system/engine/scanner ROM

102-2

12

ROM writer adapter (For 1881)

Writing the data of PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2

102-4

13

ROM writer adapter (For 1931)

Writing the data of PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2

102-5

14

Harness jig

Updating the converter PC board

21-3

15

Doctor-sleeve gap jig

Measuring the gap between the developer sleeve and

the doctor blade (gauge 0.75)

*:

101-27

Part list <P-I> represents the page item in e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/

3530C/4520C Service Parts List.
No.1-13,15: Refer to e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C Service
Parts List
No.14 : Refer to MJ-1101 Service Parts List

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5 - 42

11

10

12,13

15

14

Fig. 5-35

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

5 - 43

5.10 Grease List

The parts used for the maintenance of this equipment are as follows.
Volume

Container

Parts list
<P-I>*

Launa 40

100 cc

Oiler

101-21

W1

White grease (Molykote EM-30L)

100 g

Bottle

101-24

W2

White grease (Molykote HP-300)

100 g

Bottle

101-22

W2

White grease (Molykote HP-300)

10 g

Bottle

101-22

AV

Alvania No.2

100 g

Tube

101-23

FL

FLOIL (GE-334C)

20 g

Bottle

101-26

Symbol
L

Grease name

* : Part list <P-I> represents the page item in e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/

4520C Service Parts List.

5.11 Operational Items in Overhauling

Overhauling must be performed in order to maintain the quality level of this equipment at the following
timing.
e-STUDIO2020C:

When the number of output pages has reached 400,000 or 2.5 years have
passed from the start of use (Whichever is earlier.)

e-STUDIO2330C:

When the number of output pages has reached 490,000 or 2.5 years have
passed from the start of use (Whichever is earlier.)

e-STUDIO2820C:

When the number of output pages has reached 560,000 or 2.5 years have
passed from the start of use (Whichever is earlier.)

e-STUDIO2830C:

When the number of output pages has reached 602,000 or 2.5 years have
passed from the start of use (Whichever is earlier.)

e-STUDIO3520C/3530C/4520C:
When the number of output pages has reached 700,000 or 2.5 years have
passed from the start of use (Whichever is earlier.)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

Replace all the supplies.

Check the components in the drive section (gears, pulleys, timing belts, etc.). Replace them with
new ones if they are damaged.
Check all the adhesives such as tape and Mylar if they are damaged or have become unstuck.
Replace them with new ones if necessary.
Check the performance of all the switches and sensors. Replace them with new ones if
necessary.
Clean inside the equipment thoroughly.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

5 - 44

6.

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6.1

Error Code List

The following error codes is displayed at the upper right of the screen when the CLEAR PAPER or
CALL SERVICE symbol is blinking.

6.1.1

Jam

Error code
E010

E011

Classification
Paper exit jam

Other paper jam

E020

Paper exit jam

E030

Other paper jam

E061

E062

E063

E064

E065

E090
E091

E0A0
E110

E120

E130

E140

Paper misfeeding

Contents
Jam not reaching the exit sensor: The paper which
has passed through the fuser unit does not reach
the exit sensor.
Transfer belt paper-clinging jam: The paper after
the 2nd transfer is clinging to the transfer belt, or a
paper jam occurred between the registration roller
and the paper clinging detection sensor.
Stop jam at the exit sensor: The trailing edge of the
paper does not pass the exit sensor after its leading
edge has reached this sensor.
Power-ON jam: The paper is remaining on the
paper transport path when power is turned ON.
Incorrect paper size setting for 1st drawer: The size
of paper in the 1st drawer differs from size setting of
the equipment.
Incorrect paper size setting for 2nd drawer: The
size of paper in the 2nd drawer differs from size
setting of the equipment.
Incorrect paper size setting for PFP upper drawer:
The size of paper in the 3rd drawer differs from size
setting of the equipment.
Incorrect paper size setting for PFP lower drawer:
The size of paper in the 4th drawer differs from size
setting of the equipment.
Incorrect paper size setting for bypass tray: The
size of paper in the bypass tray differs from size
setting of the equipment.
Image data delay jam: Image data to be printed
cannot be prepared.
Motor-ON time-out jam: The equipment does not
operate normally because abnormality occurred on
an interface between the SYS board and engine
firmware.
Image transport ready time-out jam: Image data to
be printed cannot be sent.
ADU misfeeding (Paper not reaching the
registration sensor): The paper which has passed
through ADU does not reach the registration sensor
during duplex printing.
Bypass misfeeding (Paper not reaching the bypass
feed sensor): Paper fed from the bypass tray does
not reach the bypass feed sensor.
1st drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching the 1st
drawer feed sensor): The paper fed from the 1st
drawer does not reach the 1st drawer feed sensor.
2nd drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching the 2nd
drawer feed sensor): The paper fed from the 2nd
drawer does not reach the 2nd drawer feed sensor.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Troubleshooting
P. 6-24

P. 6-32

6
P. 6-24

P. 6-32
P. 6-33

P. 6-33

P. 6-33

P. 6-33

P. 6-33

P. 6-33
P. 6-33

P. 6-33
P. 6-24

P. 6-25

P. 6-25

P. 6-25

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6-1

Error code
E150

Classification
Paper misfeeding

E160

E190

E200

E210

E220

E270

E300

E310

E320

E330

E340

E350

E360

Paper transport jam

Contents

Troubleshooting

PFP upper drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching

the PFP upper drawer feed sensor): The paper fed
from the PFP upper drawer does not reach the PFP
upper drawer feed sensor.
PFP lower drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching
the PFP lower drawer feed sensor): The paper fed
from the PFP lower drawer does not reach the PFP
lower drawer feed sensor.
LCF misfeeding (Paper not reaching the LCF feed
sensor): The paper fed from the LCF does not
reach the LCF feed sensor.
1st drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the
registration sensor): The paper does not reach the
registration sensor after it has passed the 1st
drawer feed sensor.
2nd drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the
registration sensor): The paper does not reach the
registration sensor after it has passed the 1st
drawer feed sensor.
2nd drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the
1st drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach
the 1st drawer feed sensor after it has passed the
2nd drawer feed sensor.
Bypass transport jam (Paper not reaching the
registration sensor): Paper fed from the bypass tray
and passed through the bypass feed sensor does
not reach the registration sensor.
PFP upper drawer transport jam (Paper not
reaching the registration sensor): The paper does
not reach the registration sensor after it has passed
the 1st drawer feed sensor.

P. 6-26

PFP upper drawer transport jam (Paper not

reaching the 1st drawer feed sensor): The paper
does not reach the 1st drawer feed sensor after it
has passed the 2nd drawer feed sensor.
PFP upper drawer transport jam (Paper not
reaching the 2nd drawer feed sensor): The paper
does not reach the 2nd drawer feed sensor after it
has passed the PFP upper drawer feed sensor.
PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not
reaching the registration sensor): The paper does
not reach the registration sensor after it has passed
the 1st drawer feed sensor.
PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not
reaching the 1st drawer feed sensor): The paper
does not reach the 1st drawer feed sensor after it
has passed the 2nd drawer feed sensor.
PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not
reaching the 2nd drawer feed sensor): The paper
does not reach the 2nd drawer feed sensor after it
has passed the PFP upper drawer feed sensor.
PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not
reaching the PFP upper drawer feed sensor): The
paper does not reach the PFP upper drawer feed
sensor after it has passed the PFP lower drawer
feed sensor.

P. 6-28

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

P. 6-26

P. 6-27

P. 6-28

P. 6-28

P. 6-28

P. 6-28

P. 6-28

P. 6-29

P. 6-28

P. 6-28

P. 6-29

P. 6-29

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6-2

Error code
E3C0

Classification
Paper transport jam

E3D0

E3E0

E400

Cover open jam

E410
E420

Cover open jam

E430
E440
E450
E480
E4A0
E510

Paper transport jam

(ADU section)

E520

E550

Other paper jam

E712

RADF jam

E713

E714

E721

E722

Contents

Troubleshooting

LCF transport jam (Paper not reaching the

registration sensor): Paper fed from the LCF and
passed through the 1st drawer feed sensor does
not reach the registration sensor.
LCF transport jam (Paper not reaching the 1st
drawer feed sensor): Paper fed from the LCF and
passed through the 2nd drawer feed sensor does
not reach the 1st drawer feed sensor.
LCF transport jam (Paper not reaching the 2nd
drawer feed sensor): Paper fed from the LCF and
passed through the LCF feed sensor does not
reach the 2nd drawer feed sensor.
Jam access cover open jam: The jam access cover
has opened during printing.
Front cover open jam: The front cover has opened
during printing.
PFP side cover open jam: The PFP side cover has
opened during printing.
ADU open jam: The ADU has opened during
printing.
Side cover open jam: The side cover has opened
during printing.
LCF side cover open jam: The LCF side cover has
opened during printing.
Bridge unit open jam: The bridge unit has opened
during printing.

P. 6-28

P. 6-28

P. 6-29

P. 6-35
P. 6-35
P. 6-35
P. 6-35
P. 6-35
P. 6-36
P. 6-36

Waste toner cover open jam: The waste toner cover

has opened during printing.
Jam not reaching the ADU entrance sensor: The
paper does not reach the ADU entrance sensor
after it is switchbacked in the exit section.

P. 6-36

Stop jam in the ADU: The paper does not reach the
ADU exit sensor after it has passed the ADU
entrance sensor.
Paper remaining jam on the transport path: The
paper is remaining on the transport path when
printing is finished (caused by a multiple paper
feeding).
Jam not reaching the original registration sensor:
The original fed from the original feeding tray does
not reach the original registration sensor.
Cover open jam in the read ready status: Jam
caused by opening of the RADF jam access cover
or front cover while the RADF is waiting for the
scanning start signal from the equipment.
Feed signal reception jam: The feed signal is
received even no original exists on the original
feeding tray.
Jam not reaching the read sensor: The original
does not reach the read sensor after it has passed
the registration sensor (when scanning obverse
side) or the reverse sensor (when scanning reverse
side).
Jam not reaching the original exit/reverse sensor
(during scanning): The original which passed the
read sensor does not reach the original exit/reverse
sensor when it is transported from the scanning
section to exit section.

P. 6-30

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

P. 6-30

P. 6-34

P. 6-37

P. 6-37

P. 6-37

P. 6-37

P. 6-37

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6-3

Error code
E724

Classification
RADF jam

E725

E726

E731

E860
E870
E910

Finisher jam
(Bridge unit)

E920

E930

E940

E9F0

Finisher jam
(Punch unit)

EA10

Finisher jam
(Finisher section)

EA20

EA21

EA22

Contents

Troubleshooting

Stop jam at the original registration sensor: The

trailing edge of the original does not pass the
original registration sensor after its leading edge
has reached this sensor.
Stop jam at the read sensor: The trailing edge of the
original does not pass the read sensor after its
leading edge has reached this sensor.
Transport/exit signal reception jam: RADF receives
the transport/exit reception signal from the
equipment when no original is at the exposure
waiting position.
Stop jam at the original exit/reverse sensor: The
trailing edge of the original does not pass the
original exit/reverse sensor after its leading edge
has reached this sensor.
RADF jam access cover open: The RADF jam
access cover has opened during RADF operation.
RADF open jam: RADF has opened during RADF
operation.
Jam at the bridge unit transport sensor 1: The
paper does not reach the bridge unit transport
sensor 1 after it has passed the exit sensor.
Stop jam at the bridge unit transport sensor 1: The
trailing edge of the paper does not pass the bridge
unit transport sensor 1 after its leading edge has
reached the sensor.
Jam at the bridge unit transport sensor 2: The
trailing edge of the paper does not reach the bridge
unit transport sensor 2 after its leading edge has
reached the bridge unit transport sensor 1.
Stop jam at the bridge unit transport sensor 2: The
trailing edge of the paper does not pass the bridge
unit transport sensor 2 after its leading edge has
reached the bridge unit transport sensor 2.
Punching jam: Punching is not performed properly.
[MJ-1030 (when MJ-6004 is installed)]
[MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is installed)]

P. 6-38

Paper transport delay jam: The paper which has

passed the bridge unit does not reach the inlet
sensor. [MJ-1030/1031/1101]
Paper transport stop jam:
(1) The paper does not pass through the inlet
sensor.
[MJ-1030/1031]
(2) The paper has passed through the inlet sensor
but does not reach or pass the feed path sensor
or processing tray sensor.
[MJ-1030]
Paper transport delay jam:
The paper which has passed through the inlet
sensor does not reach the transport sensor. [MJ1101]
Paper size error jam: Paper does not reach the
sensor because the paper is shorter than spec.
[MJ-1101]
Paper transport jam (Finisher paper punching edge
detection sensor): The paper position sensor on the
Finisher transport path detects paper shorter than
the acceptable paper size. [MJ-1101]

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

P. 6-38

P. 6-38

P. 6-38

P. 6-38
P. 6-39
P. 6-40

P. 6-40

P. 6-40

P. 6-40

P. 6-49

P. 6-41

P. 6-41

P. 6-42

P. 6-42

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6-4

Error code
EA23

Classification
Finisher jam
(Finisher section)

EA24

EA25

EA26

EA27

EA28

EA29

EA30

EA31

EA32

EA40

EA50
EA60

EA70

Finisher jam

Contents

Troubleshooting

Paper transport jam (transport sensor) : Paper

being transported on the Finisher transport path is
stopped at the outlet sensor at 27.56 inches or
longer. [MJ-1101]
Paper transport jam (between entrance and
transport sensors): The leading edge of paper
which has passed the entrance sensor on the
Finisher transport path does not reach the transport
sensor. [MJ-1101]
Paper transport jam (after paper stack exit): The
finishing tray paper detection sensor detects paper
after a stack of paper exits from the finishing tray.
[MJ-1101]
Paper transport jam (stop command request): A
command to stop equipment operation is received
while paper is being transported in the Finisher.
[MJ-1101]
Paper transport jam (paper not inserted): The
equipment detects a paper-not-inserted jam but the
entrance sensor is turned ON before the equipment
is stopped. [MJ-1101]
Paper transport jam (paper holder plate operation
delay): An attempt to start the arm assisting
operation for dropping paper on the finishing tray is
made, but the previous arm assisting operation has
not yet been finished. [MJ-1101]
Paper transport jam (stack transport delay): The
buffer tray is extended to drop a stack of paper on
the finishing tray but the previous stack has not yet
exited. [MJ-1101]
Power-ON jam:
(1) Paper exists at the inlet sensor when power is
turned ON.
[MJ-1030/1031]
(2) Paper exists at the feed path sensor or
processing tray sensor when power is turned
ON.
[MJ-1030]
Transport path paper remaining jam: The paper
which has passed through the inlet sensor does not
reach the transport sensor. [MJ-1101]

P. 6-42

Exit paper remaining jam: The paper is remaining

on the finishing tray when the power is turned ON.
[MJ-1101]
Door open jam:
The upper/front cover of the finisher section or the
upper/ front door of the puncher section has
opened during printing. [MJ-1030]
Joint open jam:
The finisher cover opened during machine
operation. [MJ-1031]
Cover open error:
The front cover or stationary tray cover is opened
during paper transport. [MJ-1101]
Stapling jam: Stapling is not performed properly.
[MJ-1030/1031/1101]
Early arrival jam: The inlet sensor detects the paper
earlier than a specified timing.
[MJ-1030/1031/1101]
Stack exit belt home position error: The stack exit
belt is not at the home position. [MJ-1101]
Stack slider home position error: The stack slider is
not at the home position. [MJ-1031]

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

P. 6-42

P. 6-42

P. 6-42

P. 6-42

P. 6-42

P. 6-42

P. 6-43

P. 6-43

P. 6-43

P. 6-44

P. 6-44
P. 6-45

P. 6-46

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6-5

Error code
EA80
EA90

Classification
Finisher jam
(Saddle stitcher
section)

EAA0

EAB0

EAC0

EAD0

Other paper jam

EAE0

Finisher jam

EB30

EB50

Paper transport jam

EB60

ED10

Finisher jam

ED11

ED12
ED13

ED14

ED15
ED16

Finisher jam
(Finisher section)

Contents

Troubleshooting

Stapling jam: Stapling is not performed properly.

[MJ-1030]
Door open jam: The delivery cover or inlet cover
has opened during printing [MJ-1030].
Power-ON jam: Paper exists at No.1 paper sensor,
No. 2 paper sensor, No.3 paper sensor, vertical
path paper sensor or delivery sensor when power is
turned ON. [MJ-1030]
Transport stop jam: The paper which passed
through the inlet sensor does not reach or pass
No.1 paper sensor, No. 2 paper sensor, No.3 paper
sensor or delivery sensor. [MJ-1030]

P. 6-47

Transport delay jam: The paper which has reached

the inlet sensor does not pass through the inlet
sensor. [MJ-1030]
Print end command time-out jam: The printing has
not finished normally because of the
communication error between the SYS board and
LGC board at the end of printing.
Receiving time time-out jam: The printing has been
interrupted because of the communication error
between the equipment and finisher when the
paper is transported from the equipment to the
finisher.
Ready time time-out jam: The equipment judges
that the paper transport to the finisher is disabled
because of the communication error between the
equipment and finisher at the start of printing.
Paper remaining on the transport path: The multiple
feeding of preceding paper caused the misfeeding
of upcoming paper.
Paper remaining on the transport path: The multiple
feeding of preceding paper caused the misfeeding
of upcoming paper (redetection after no jam is
detected at [EB50]).
Skew adjustment motor (M1) home position
detection abnormality: The Skew adjustment motor
is not at the home position. [MJ-1101 (when MJ6101 is installed)]
Sideways adjustment motor (M2) home position
detection error: The Sideways adjustment motor is
not at the home position. [MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101
is installed)]
Shutter home position error: The shutter is not at
the home position. [MJ-1101]
Front alignment plate home position error: The front
alignment plate is not at the home position. [MJ1101]
Rear alignment plate home position error: The rear
alignment plate is not at the home position. [MJ1101]
Paddle home position error: The paddle is not at the
home position. [MJ-1101]
Buffer tray home position error: The buffer tray is
not at the home position. [MJ-1101]

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

P. 6-47
P. 6-47

P. 6-47

P. 6-48

P. 6-49

P. 6-49

P. 6-49

P. 6-31

P. 6-31

P. 6-50

P. 6-50

P. 6-50
P. 6-50

P. 6-50

P. 6-51
P. 6-51

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6-6

6.1.2

Service call

Error code
C040

Classification
Paper feeding system
related service call

C130

C140

C150

C160

C180

C1A0

C1B0

C260

Scanning system
related service call

C270

C280

C370
C380
C381
C390
C391
C3A0
C3A1
C3B0
C3B1
C411

Copy process related

service call

Fuser unit related

service call

Contents
PFP motor abnormality: The PFP motor is not
rotating normally. (the case that paper can be fed
from any drawer except the PFP)
1st drawer tray abnormality: The tray-up motor is
not rotating or the 1st drawer tray is not moving
normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any
drawer except the 1st drawer)
2nd drawer tray abnormality: The tray-up motor is
not rotating or the 2nd drawer tray is not moving
normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any
drawer except the 2nd drawer)

Troubleshooting
P. 6-52

PFP upper drawer tray abnormality: The PFP upper

drawer tray-up motor is not rotating or the PFP
upper drawer tray is not moving normally. (the case
that paper can be fed from any drawer except the
PFP upper drawer)
PFP lower drawer tray abnormality: The PFP lower
drawer tray-up motor is not rotating or the PFP
lower drawer tray is not moving normally. (the case
that paper can be fed from any drawer except the
PFP lower drawer)
LCF tray-up motor abnormality: The LCF tray-up
motor is not rotating or the LCF tray is not moving
normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any
drawer except the LCF)
LCF end fence motor abnormality: The LCF end
fence motor is not rotating or the LCF end fence is
not moving normally. (the case that paper can be
fed from any drawer except the LCF)
LCF transport motor abnormality: The LCF
transport motor is not rotating normally. (the case
that paper can be fed from any drawer except the
LCF)
Peak detection error: Lighting of the exposure lamp
(white reference) is not detected when power is
turned ON.
(1) Carriage home position sensor not turning OFF
within a specified period of time: The carriage does
not shift from its home position in a specified time.
(2) Downloading firmware with an incorrect model.
Carriage home position sensor not turning ON
within a specified period of time: The carriage does
not reach to its home position in a specified period
of time.
Transfer belt motor abnormality
Auto-toner sensor-K abnormality (upper limit)
Auto-toner sensor-K abnormality (lower limit)
Auto-toner sensor-C abnormality (upper limit)
Auto-toner sensor-C abnormality (lower limit)
Auto-toner sensor-M abnormality (upper limit)
Auto-toner sensor-M abnormality (lower limit)
Auto-toner sensor-Y abnormality (upper limit)
Auto-toner sensor-Y abnormality (lower limit)
Thermistor or heater lamp abnormality at powerON: Abnormality of the thermistor is detected when
power is turned ON or the temperature of the fuser
roller does not rise in a specified period of time after
power is turned ON.

P. 6-54

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

P. 6-53

P. 6-53

6
P. 6-54

P. 6-55

P. 6-56

P. 6-57

P. 6-57

P. 6-58

P. 6-58

P. 6-101
P. 6-101
P. 6-101
P. 6-101
P. 6-101
P. 6-101
P. 6-101
P. 6-101
P. 6-101
P. 6-59

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6-7

Error code

Classification

C412

C443

C445

C446

C447
C448

C449

C450

C451

C452
C465

C466

C467

C468
C4B0
C4B1
C4D0
C550
C570

Optional
communication related
service call

C580
C5A0
C5A1
C900
C940
C962
C970
C9E0

Circuit related service

call

Process related
service call
Circuit related service
call

Contents

Troubleshooting

Thermistor/heater lamp abnormality at power-ON:

Thermistor abnormality is detected at power-ON or
the fuser roller temperature does not rise within a
specified period of time after power-ON.
Heater lamp abnormality after abnormality
judgment (not reaching to intermediate
temperature)
Heater lamp abnormality after abnormality
judgment (pre-running end temperature
abnormality)
Heater lamp abnormality after abnormality
judgment (pre-running end temperature
abnormality)
Heater lamp abnormality after abnormality
judgment (temperature abnormality at ready status)
Heater lamp continuous lighting abnormality:
Heater lamp lights continuously for a certain period
of time when the pressure roller temperature during
ready status is higher than the specified
Heater lamp abnormality after abnormality
judgment (temperature abnormality at high
temperature)
Abnormal temperature difference between the
center thermopile and the edge thermistor (Not
determined)
Abnormal temperature difference between the
center thermopile and the edge thermistor
(Determined)
Abnormal thermopile temperature difference
Pressure roller thermistor abnormality after entering
ready status (pre-running end temperature
abnormality)
Pressure roller thermistor abnormality after entering
ready status (pre-running end temperature
abnormality)

P. 6-59

Pressure roller thermistor abnormality after entering

ready status (temperature abnormality at ready
status)
Pressure roller thermistor abnormality after entering
ready status (overheating)
Fuser unit counter abnormality
Fuser unit destination selection abnormality
Fuser belt thermopile abnormality
RADF I/F error: Communication error has occurred
between the RADF and the scanner.
Communication error between Engine-CPU and
IPC board
Communication error between IPC board and
finisher
SRAM board not connected (LGC board)
SRAM board data abnormality (LGC board)
Connection error between SYS board and LGC
board
Engine-CPU abnormality
LGC board ID abnormality
High-voltage transformer abnormality: Leakage of
the main charger is detected.
Connection error between SLG board and SYS
board

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

P. 6-60

P. 6-60

P. 6-60

P. 6-60
P. 6-60

P. 6-60

P. 6-60

P. 6-60

P. 6-60
P. 6-61

P. 6-61

P. 6-61

P. 6-61
P. 6-62
P. 6-62
P. 6-63
P. 6-63
P. 6-63
P. 6-63
P. 6-65
P. 6-65
P. 6-65
P. 6-65
P. 6-66
P. 6-101
P. 6-66

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6-8

Error code
CA00
CA10

Classification
Image control related
service call
Laser optical unit
related service call

CA20
CB00

Finisher related
service call

CB01

CB10
CB11

CB12

CB30

CB31

CB40

CB50

CB51
CB60

CB70
CB80

CB81

Finisher related
service call

Contents

Troubleshooting

color registration abnormality

P. 6-88

Polygonal motor abnormality: The polygonal motor

is not rotating normally.
H-sync detection error: H-sync detection PC board
cannot detect laser beams.
Finisher not connected: Communication error has
occurred between the equipment and finisher. [MJ1101]
Finisher communication error: Communication error
has occurred between the equipment and finisher.
[MJ-1101]
Entrance motor abnormality: The entrance motor is
not rotating normally. [MJ-1101]
Buffer tray guide motor abnormality: The buffer tray
guide motor is not rotating or the buffer tray guide is
not moving normally. [MJ-1101]
Buffer roller drive motor abnormality: The buffer
roller drive motor is not rotating or the buffer roller is
not moving normally. [MJ-1101]
Tray 1/Tray 2 shift motor abnormality: Tray 1/Tray 2
shift motor is not rotating or delivery tray is not
moving normally. [MJ-1030]
Movable tray shift motor abnormality: The movable
tray shift motor is not rotating or the movable tray is
not moving normally. [MJ-1101]
Movable tray paper-full detection error: The
actuator of the movable tray paper-full detection
sensor does not move smoothly. [MJ-1101]
Rear aligning plate motor abnormality: Rear
aligning plate motor is not rotating or aligning plate
is not moving normally. [MJ-1030]
Front alignment motor abnormality: The front
alignment motor is not rotating or the front
alignment plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1101]
Staple motor abnormality: Staple motor is not
rotating or stapler is not moving normally. [MJ-1030]
Staple unit abnormality: Staple unit is not moving
normally. [MJ-1031]
Stapler home position error: The stapler home
position sensor does not work. [MJ-1101]
Stapler shift home position error: The stapler is not
at the home position. [MJ-1101]
Stapler shift motor abnormality: Stapler shift motor
is not rotating or staple unit is not moving normally.
[MJ-1030/1101]
Paper loading amount detection sensor abnormality
[MJ-1030]
Backup RAM data abnormality:
1. Abnormality of checksum value on finisher
controller PC board is detected when the power
is turned ON. [MJ-1030/1031/1101]
2. Abnormality of checksum value on punch
controller PC board is detected when the power
is turned ON. [MJ-1030 (when MJ-6004 is
installed)]
Flash ROM abnormality: Abnormality of checksum
value on finisher controller PC board is detected
when the power is turned ON. [MJ-1101]

P. 6-68

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

P. 6-69
P. 6-71

P. 6-71

P. 6-71
P. 6-72

P. 6-72

P. 6-72

P. 6-73

P. 6-73

P. 6-74

P. 6-75
P. 6-75

P. 6-75
P. 6-76

P. 6-76

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6-9

Error code
CB90

Classification
Finisher related
service call

CBA0

CBB0

CBC0

CBD0

CBF0

CC00

CC10

CC20

CC30

CC31

CC40

CC41

CC51

CC52

Troubleshooting
P. 6-77

Guide motor abnormality: Guide motor is not

rotating or guide is not moving normally. [MJ-1030]
Paper folding motor abnormality: Paper folding
motor or paper folding roller is not rotating normally.
[MJ-1030]
Paper positioning plate motor abnormality: Paper
positioning plate motor is not rotating or paper
positioning plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1030]
Sensor connector abnormality: Connector of guide
home position sensor, paper pushing plate home
position sensor or paper pushing plate top position
sensor is disconnected. [MJ-1030]

CBE0

CC50

Contents
Paper pushing plate motor abnormality: Paper
pushing plate motor is not rotating or paper pushing
plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1030]
Stitch motor (front) abnormality: Stitch motor (front)
is not rotating or rotary cam is not moving normally.
[MJ-1030]
Stitch motor (rear) abnormality: Stitch motor (rear)
is not rotating or rotary cam is not moving normally.
[MJ-1030]
Alignment motor abnormality: Alignment motor is
not rotating or aligning plate is not moving normally.
[MJ-1030]

Finisher related
service call

Micro switch abnormality: With all covers closed,

inlet door switch, delivery door switch or front cover
switch is open. [MJ-1030]
Communication error between finisher and saddle
stitcher: Communication error between finisher
controller PC board and saddle stitcher controller
board [MJ-1030]
Stack transport motor abnormality: The stack
transport motor is not rotating or the stack transport
belt is not moving normally. [MJ-1101]
Stack delivery motor abnormality: The stack
delivery motor is not rotating normally. [MJ-1031]
Transport motor abnormality: The transport motor is
not rotating or the stack transport roller -1 and -2 is
not rotating normally. [MJ-1101]
Swing motor abnormality: Swing motor is not
rotating or swing unit is not moving normally. [MJ1030]
Paper holder cam home position abnormality: The
paper holder cam is not at the home position. [MJ1101]
Horizontal registration motor abnormality:
Horizontal registration motor is not rotating or
puncher is not shifting normally. [MJ-1030 (when
MJ-6004 is installed)]
Sideways adjustment motor (M2) abnormality:
Sideways adjustment motor is not rotating or
puncher is not shifting normally. [MJ-1101 (when
MJ-6101 is installed)]
Skew adjustment motor (M1) abnormality: Skew
adjustment motor is not rotating or puncher is not
shifting normally. [MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is
installed)]

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

P. 6-77

P. 6-77

P. 6-77

P. 6-77
P. 6-78

P. 6-78

P. 6-78

P. 6-79

P. 6-79

P. 6-79

P. 6-80

P. 6-80

P. 6-80

P. 6-81

P. 6-81

P. 6-82

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 10

Error code
CC60

Classification
Finisher related
service call

CC61

CC71

CC72

CC80

CC90

CCB0
CCD0

CCE0

CCF0
CCF1

CD70
CD71
CDE0

Process related
service call
Finisher related
service call

CE00

CE10

CE20

CE40

Image control related

service call

Contents

Troubleshooting

Punch motor abnormality: Punch motor is not

rotating or puncher is not shifting normally. [MJ1030 (when MJ-6004 is installed)]
Punch motor (M3) home position detection error:
Punch motor is not rotating or puncher is not
shifting normally. [MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is
installed)]
Punch ROM checksum error: Abnormality of
checksum value on Hole punch controller PC board
is detected when the power is turned on. [MJ-1101
(when MJ-6101 is installed)]
Punch RAM read/write error: Abnormality of
checksum value on Hole punch controller PC board
is detected when the power is turned on. [MJ-1101
(when MJ-6101 is installed)]
Front aligning plate motor abnormality: Front
aligning plate motor is not rotating or aligning plate
is not moving normally. [MJ-1030]
Rear alignment motor abnormality: The rear
alignment motor is not rotating or the rear alignment
plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1101]
Tray shift motor abnormality: The tray shift motor is
not rotating or the stack tray is not moving normally.
[MJ-1031]
Offset motor abnormality: The offset motor is not
rotating normally. [MJ-1031]
Stack ejection motor abnormality: Stack ejection
motor or stack ejection roller is not rotating
normally. [MJ-1030]
Paper trailing edge assist motor abnormality: Paper
trailing edge assist motor is not rotating or paper
trailing edge assist is not moving normally. [MJ1030]
Gear changing motor abnormality: Gear changing
motor is not rotating normally. [MJ-1030]
Tray safety switch abnormality (1) The tray safety switch turned on during tray
operation (moving up or down).
(2) The tray operated with the tray safety switch
turned on.
[MJ-1031]
Waste toner box mixing paddle locked: The mixing
paddle in the waste toner box does not rotate.
Waste toner transport motor drive locking error.
Paddle motor abnormality: The paddle motor is not
rotating or the paddle is not rotating normally. [MJ1101]
Communication error between finisher and punch
unit: Communication error between finisher
controller PC board and punch controller PC board
[MJ-1030 (when MJ-6004 is installed)]
[MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is installed)]

P. 6-81

Image quality sensor abnormality (OFF level): The

output value of this sensor is out of a specified
range when sensor light source is OFF.
Image quality sensor abnormality (no pattern level):
The output value of this sensor is out of a specified
range when the image quality control test pattern is
not formed.
Image quality control test pattern abnormality: The
test pattern is not formed normally.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

P. 6-83

P. 6-83

P. 6-83

P. 6-84

P. 6-84

P. 6-84
P. 6-85

P. 6-85

P. 6-85
P. 6-85

P. 6-102
P. 6-103
P. 6-86

P. 6-86

P. 6-93

P. 6-94

P. 6-96

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 11

Error code
CE50

Classification
Image control related
service call

CE60
CE70

CE71

CE90
CEC0

Copy process related

service call

CF10

Finisher related
service call
Laser optical unit
related service call
Communication
related service call
Circuit related service
call
Other service call

CF90
F070
F090
F100
F101
F102
F103
F104
F105
F106
F107
F108
F110
F111
F120
F130
F140
F200
F350
F400

Communication
related service call
Other service call

Circuit related service

call
Circuit related service
call

Contents

Troubleshooting

Temperature/humidity sensor abnormality: The

output value of this sensor is out of a specified
range.
Drum thermistor-Y abnormality: The output value of
the drum thermistor-Y is out of a specified range.
Drum drive switching abnormality: The drum
switching detection sensor (S19) is not turned ON
after the drum motor was rotated for a specified
period of time.
Drum phase adjustment abnormality: Drum phase
sensors (Color drum phase sensor (S43) and K
drum phase sensor (S44)) are not turned ON after
the drum motor was rotated for a specified period of
time.
Drum thermistor-K abnormality: The output value of
the drum thermistor-K is out of a specified range.
2nd transfer roller position detection abnormality:
The 2nd transfer roller does not contact/release
normally.
Communication module SRAM reading failure.
[MJ-1101]
Laser optical unit shutter abnormality.

P. 6-98

P. 6-98
P. 6-99

P. 6-100

P. 6-98
P. 6-104

P. 6-87
P. 6-70

Communication error between System-CPU and

Engine-CPU
SRAM abnormality on the SYS board

P. 6-64

HDD format error: HDD cannot be initialized

normally.
HDD unmounted: Connection of HDD cannot be
detected.
HDD start error: HDD cannot become Ready state.
HDD transfer time-out: Reading/writing cannot be
performed in the specified period of time.
HDD data error: Abnormality is detected in the data
of HDD.
HDD other error
Point and Print partition damage
/BOX partition damage
/SHA partition damage
Communication error between System-CPU and
Scanner-CPU
Scanner response abnormality
Database abnormality: Database is not operating
normally.
Invalid MAC address
Accelerator ASIC format error
Data Overwrite option (GP-1070) disabled
SLG board abnormality

P. 6-105

P. 6-105
P. 6-105
P. 6-105
P. 6-105
P. 6-64

SYS board cooling fan abnormality

P. 6-106

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

P. 6-66

P. 6-105
P. 6-105
P. 6-105
P. 6-105

P. 6-64
P. 6-105
P. 6-106
P. 6-106
P. 6-106
P. 6-67

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 12

6.1.3

Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function

1. Internet FAX related error

Error code
1C10
1C11
1C12
1C13
1C14
1C15
1C20
1C21
1C22
1C30
1C31
1C32
1C33
1C40
1C60
1C61
1C62
1C63
1C64
1C65
1C66
1C67
1C68
1C69
1C6A
1C6B
1C6C
1C6D
1C70
1C71
1C72
1C80
1C81
1C82
1CC0
1CC1

Classification
System access abnormality
Insufficient memory
Message reception error
Message transmission error
Invalid parameter
Exceeding file capacity
System management module access abnormality
Job control module access abnormality
Job control module access abnormality
Directory creation failure
File creation failure
File deletion failure
File access failure
Image conversion abnormality
HDD full failure during processing
Address Book reading failure
Memory acquiring failure
Terminal IP address unset
Terminal mail address unset
SMTP address unset
Server time time-out error
NIC time time-out error
NIC access error
SMTP server connection error
HOST NAME error
Terminal mail address error
Destination mail address error
System error
SMTP client OFF
SMTP authentication error
POP before SMTP error
Internet FAX transmission failure when processing E-mail job received
Onramp Gateway transmission failure
Internet FAX transmission failure when processing FAX job received
Job canceling
Power failure

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Troubleshooting
P. 6-106
P. 6-106
P. 6-106
P. 6-106
P. 6-107
P. 6-107
P. 6-107
P. 6-107
P. 6-107
P. 6-107
P. 6-107
P. 6-106
P. 6-107
P. 6-107
P. 6-107
P. 6-107
P. 6-107
P. 6-107
P. 6-107
P. 6-108
P. 6-108
P. 6-108
P. 6-108
P. 6-108
P. 6-108
P. 6-108
P. 6-108
P. 6-108
P. 6-108
P. 6-108
P. 6-108
P. 6-109
P. 6-109
P. 6-109
P. 6-109

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 13

2. RFC related error

Error code
2500

Message displayed in
the TopAccess screen
Syntax error, command
unrecognized

2501

Syntax error in parameters or

arguments

2503

Bad sequence of commands

2504
2550

Command parameter not

implemented
Mailbox unavailable

2551

User not local

2552

Insufficient system storage

2553

Mailbox name not allowed

Contents
HOST NAME error (RFC: 500)
Destination mail address error
(RFC: 500)
Terminal mail address error
(RFC: 500)
HOST NAME error (RFC: 501)
Destination mail address error
(RFC: 501)
Terminal mail address error
(RFC: 501)
Destination mail address error
(RFC: 503)
HOST NAME error
(RFC: 504)
Destination mail address error
(RFC: 550)
Destination mail address error
(RFC: 551)
Terminal/Destination mail address
error
(RFC: 552)
Destination mail address error
(RFC: 553)

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

Troubleshooting
P. 6-109

P. 6-109

P. 6-109
P. 6-109
P. 6-109
P. 6-109
P. 6-109

P. 6-109

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 14

3. Electronic Filing related error

2B10

Message displayed in
the TopAccess screen
There was no applicable job.

2B11
2B20
2B30

Job status failed.

Failed to access file.
Insufficient disk space.

2B31

Failed to access Electronic Filing.

2B32

Failed to print Electronic Filing

document.

2B50
2B51
2B71

Failed to process image.

Failed to process print image.
Document(s) expire(s) in a few days

2B80
2B90
2BA0
2BA1

Hard Disk space for Electronic Filing

nearly full.
Insufficient Memory.
Invalid Box password specified.
Incorrect paper size/ color mode

2BB0
2BB1

Job canceled
Power failure occurred

2BC0
2BC1

System fatal error.

Failed to acquire resource.

2BD0

Power failure occurred during eFiling restoring.

Failed to get machine parameter.
Maximum number of page range is
reached.
Maximum number of document
range is reached.
Maximum number of folder range is
reached.

Error code

2BE0
2BF0
2BF1
2BF2

Contents

Troubleshooting

No applicable job error in job control

module
JOB status abnormality
File library function error
Insufficient disk space in /BOX
partition
Status of specified Electronic Filing
or folder is undefined or being
created/deleted
Electronic Filing printing failure:
Specified document can not be
printed because of clients access
(being edited, etc.).
Image library error
List library error
Documents expiring in a few days
exist
Hard disk space in /BOX partition is
nearly full (90%).
Insufficient memory capacity
Invalid Box password
A Paper size or a color mode not
supported in the Electronic Filing
function is being selected.
Job canceling
Power failure

P. 6-109

Fatal failure occurred

System management module
resource acquiring failure
Power failure occurred during
restoring of Electronic Filing
Machine parameter reading failure
Exceeding maximum number of
pages
Exceeding maximum number of
documents
Exceeding maximum number of
folders

P. 6-109
P. 6-109
P. 6-109
P. 6-110

P. 6-110

P. 6-110
P. 6-110
P. 6-110
P. 6-110
P. 6-110

P. 6-110
P. 6-109
P. 6-109
P. 6-110
P. 6-111
P. 6-111
P. 6-111
P. 6-111

4. Remote scanning related error

Error code
2A20

Message displayed in
the TopAccess screen
Failed to acquire resource

Contents

2A40

System fatal error

System management module

resource acquiring failure
System error

2A50
2A51

Job canceling
Power failure

Job canceling
Power failure

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Troubleshooting
P. 6-111
P. 6-111
P. 6-111

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 15

5. E-mail related error

2C20

Message displayed in
the TopAccess screen
Illegal Job status
Not enough memory
Illegal Job status
Illegal Job status
Invalid parameter specified
Message size exceeded limit or
maximum size
Illegal Job status

2C21

Illegal Job status

2C22

Illegal Job status

2C30
2C31
2C32
2C33
2C40
2C43
2C44

Failed to create directory

Failed to create file
Failed to delete file
Failed to create file
Failed to convert image file format
Encryption error. Failed to create file
Creating the image file was not
permitted.
Failed to process your Job.
Insufficient disk space.
Failed to read AddressBook
Not enough memory
Invalid Domain Address
Invalid Domain Address
Failed to connect to SMTP server
Failed to connect to SMTP server
Failed to send E-Mail message
Failed to send E-Mail message
Failed to connect to SMTP server
Failed to send E-Mail message
Invalid address specified in From:
field
Invalid address specified in To: field

Error code
2C10
2C11
2C12
2C13
2C14
2C15

2C60
2C61
2C62
2C63
2C64
2C65
2C66
2C67
2C68
2C69
2C6A
2C6B
2C6C
2C6D
2C70
2C71
2C72
2C80
2C81
2CC0
2CC1

Contents

Troubleshooting

System access abnormality

Insufficient memory
Message reception error
Message transmission error
Invalid parameter
Exceeding file capacity

P. 6-112
P. 6-112
P. 6-112
P. 6-112
P. 6-112
P. 6-112

System management module access

abnormality
Job control module access
abnormality
Job control module access
abnormality
Directory creation failure
File creation failure
File deletion failure
File access failure
Image conversion abnormality
Encryption error
Encryption PDF enforced mode error

P. 6-112

P. 6-112
P. 6-112
P. 6-112
P. 6-112
P. 6-112
P. 6-112
P. 6-113

HDD full failure during processing

P. 6-113

Address Book reading failure

Memory acquiring failure
Terminal IP address unset
Terminal mail address unset
SMTP address unset
Server time time-out error
NIC time time-out error
NIC access error
SMTP server connection error
HOST NAME error (No RFC error)
Terminal mail address error

P. 6-113
P. 6-112
P. 6-113
P. 6-113
P. 6-113
P. 6-113
P. 6-113
P. 6-113
P. 6-113
P. 6-113
P. 6-113

Destination mail address error (No

RFC error)
System error
SMTP client OFF
SMTP authentication error
POP before SMTP error

P. 6-114

NIC system error

SMTP service is not available
Failed SMTP Authentication
POP Before SMTP Authentication
Failed
Failed to process received E-mail job E-mail transmission failure when
processing E-mail job received
Failed to process received Fax job
Process failure of FAX job received
Job canceled
Job canceling
Power failure occurred
Power failure

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

P. 6-112
P. 6-112

P. 6-113
P. 6-114
P. 6-114
P. 6-114
P. 6-114
P. 6-114
P. 6-114

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 16

6. File sharing related error

2D20

Message displayed in
the TopAccess screen
Illegal Job status
Not enough memory
Illegal Job status
Illegal Job status
Invalid parameter specified
Document size exceeded limit or
maximum size.
Illegal Job status

2D21

Illegal Job status

2D22

Illegal Job status

2D30
2D31
2D32
2D33
2D40
2D43
2D44

Failed to create directory

Failed to create file
Failed to delete file
Failed to create file
Failed to convert image file format
Encryption error. Failed to create file
Creating the image file was not
permitted.
Failed to copy file
Invalid parameter specified
Failed to connect to network
destination. Check destination path
Specified network path is invalid.
Check destination path
Logon to file server failed. Check
username and password
There are too many documents in the
folder. Failed in creating new
document.
Failed To Process your Job.
Insufficient Storage space.
FTP service is not available
File Sharing service is not available
Expired scan documents deleted
from share folder.
Expired Sent Fax documents deleted
from shared folder.
Expired Received Fax documents
deleted from shared folder.
Scanned documents in shared folder
deleted upon users request.
Sent Fax Documents in shared folder
deleted upon users request.
Received Fax Documents in shared
folder deleted upon users request.
Failed to delete file.
Failed to acquire resource.
Job canceled
Power failure occurred

Error code
2D10
2D11
2D12
2D13
2D14
2D15

2D60
2D61
2D62
2D63
2D64
2D65

2D66
2D67
2D68
2DA0
2DA1
2DA2
2DA3
2DA4
2DA5
2DA6
2DA7
2DC0
2DC1

Contents

Troubleshooting

System access abnormality

Insufficient memory
Message reception error
Message transmission error
Invalid parameter
Exceeding the maximum size for file
sharing
System management module access
abnormality
Job control module access
abnormality
Job control module access
abnormality
Directory creation failure
File creation failure
File deletion failure
File access failure
Image conversion abnormality
Encryption error
Encryption PDF enforced mode error

P. 6-114
P. 6-114
P. 6-115
P. 6-115
P. 6-115
P. 6-115

File library access abnormality

Invalid parameter
File server connection error

P. 6-115
P. 6-115
P. 6-115

Invalid network path

P. 6-116

Login failure

P. 6-116

Exceeding documents in folder:

Creating new document is failed.

P. 6-116

Storage capacity full failure during

processing
FTP service not available
File sharing service not available
Periodical deletion of scanned
documents completed properly.
Periodical deletion of transmitted
FAX documents completed properly.
Periodical deletion of received FAX
documents completed properly.
Manual deletion of scanned
documents completed properly.
Manual deletion of transmitted FAX
documents completed properly.
Manual deletion of received FAX
documents completed properly.
File deletion failure
Resource acquiring failure
Job canceling
Power failure

P. 6-116

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

P. 6-115
P. 6-115
P. 6-115
P. 6-115
P. 6-115
P. 6-114
P. 6-115
P. 6-115
P. 6-115
P. 6-115

P. 6-116
P. 6-116
P. 6-114
P. 6-114
P. 6-116

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 17

7. E-mail reception related error

Error code
3A10
3A11

3A12

3A20
3A21

3A22

3A30
3A40
3A50
3A51

3A52

3A60
3A61

3A62

3A70

3A80
3A81

3A82

3B10
3B11

3B12

Message displayed in
the TopAccess screen
MIME Error has been detected in the
received mail.
MIME Error has been detected in the
received mail. This mail has been
transferred to the administrator.
MIME Error has been detected in the
received mail. This mail could not be
transferred to the administrator.
Analyze Error has been detected in
the received mail.
Analyze Error has been detected in
the received mail. This mail has been
transferred to the administrator.
Analyze Error has been detected in
the received mail. This mail could not
be transferred to the administrator.
Whole partial mails were not reached
by timeout.
Partial Mail Error has been detected
in the received mail.
HDD Full Error has been occurred in
this mail.
HDD Full Error has been occurred in
this mail. This mail has been
transferred to the administrator.
HDD Full Error has been occurred in
this mail. This mail could not be
transferred to the administrator.
HDD Full Warning has been occurred
in this mail.
HDD Full Warning has been occurred
in this mail. This mail could not be
transferred to the administrator.
HDD Full Warning has been occurred
in this mail. This mail could not be
transferred to the administrator.
Receiving partial mail was aborted
since the partial mail setting has
been changed to Disable.
Partial mail was received during the
partial mail setting is disabled.
Partial mail was received during the
partial mail setting is disabled. This
mail has been transferred to the
administrator.
Partial mail was received during the
partial mail setting is disabled. This
mail could not be transferred to the
administrator.
Format Error has been detected in
the received mail.
Format Error has been detected in
the received mail. This mail has been
transferred to the administrator.
Format Error has been detected in
the received mail. This mail could not
be transferred to the administrator.

Contents
E-mail MIME error

Troubleshooting
P. 6-117
P. 6-117

P. 6-117

E-mail analysis error

P. 6-117
P. 6-117

P. 6-117

Partial mail time-out error

P. 6-117

Partial mail related error

P. 6-117

Insufficient HDD capacity error

P. 6-117
P. 6-117

P. 6-117

Warning of insufficient HDD capacity

P. 6-117
P. 6-117

P. 6-117

Warning of partial mail interruption

P. 6-117

Partial mail reception setting OFF

P. 6-117
P. 6-117

P. 6-117

E-mail format error

P. 6-117
P. 6-117

P. 6-117

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 18

Error code
3B20
3B21

3B22

3B30
3B31

3B32

3B40
3B41

3B42

3C10
3C11

3C12

3C13
3C20
3C21

3C22

3C30
3C31

3C32

Message displayed in
the TopAccess screen
Content-Type Error has been
detected in the received mail.
Content-Type Error has been
detected in the received mail. This
mail has been transferred to the
administrator.
Content-Type Error has been
detected in the received mail. This
mail could not be transferred to the
administrator.
Charset Error has been detected in
the received mail.
Charset Error has been detected in
the received mail. This mail has been
transferred to the administrator.
Charset Error has been detected in
the received mail. This mail could not
be transferred to the administrator.
Decode Error has been detected in
the received mail.
Decode Error has been detected in
the received mail. This mail has been
transferred to the administrator.
Decode Error has been detected in
the received mail. This mail could not
be transferred to the administrator.
Tiff Analyze Error has been detected
in the received mail.
Tiff Analyze Error has been detected
in the received mail. This mail has
been transferred to the administrator.
Tiff Analyze Error has been detected
in the received mail. This mail could
not be transferred to the
administrator.
Tiff Analyze Error has been detected
in the received mail.
Tiff Compression Error has been
detected in the received mail.
Tiff Compression Error has been
detected in the received mail. This
mail has been transferred to the
administrator.
Tiff Compression Error has been
detected in the received mail. This
mail could not be transferred to the
administrator.
Tiff Resolution Error has been
detected in the received mail.
Tiff Resolution Error has been
detected in the received mail. This
mail has been transferred to the
administrator.
Tiff Resolution Error has been
detected in the received mail. This
mail could not be transferred to the
administrator.

Contents
Content-Type error

Troubleshooting
P. 6-117
P. 6-117

P. 6-117

Charset error

P. 6-117
P. 6-117

P. 6-117

6
E-mail decode error

P. 6-117
P. 6-117

P. 6-117

TIFF analysis error

P. 6-118
P. 6-118

P. 6-118

P. 6-118
TIFF compression error

P. 6-118
P. 6-118

P. 6-118

TIFF resolution error

P. 6-118
P. 6-118

P. 6-118

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 19

Error code
3C40
3C41

3C42

3C50
3C51

3C52

3C60
3C61

3C62

3C70
3D10

3D20

3D30
3E10
3E20
3E30
3E40
3F00
3F10
3F20
3F30
3F40

Message displayed in
the TopAccess screen
Tiff Paper Size Error has been
detected in the received mail.
Tiff Paper Size Error has been
detected in the received mail. This
mail has been transferred to the
administrator.
Tiff Paper Size Error has been
detected in the received mail. This
mail could not be transferred to the
administrator.
Offramp Destination Error has been
detected in the received mail.
Offramp Destination Error has been
detected in the received mail. This
mail has been transferred to the
administrator.
Offramp Destination Error has been
detected in the received mail. This
mail could not be transferred to the
administrator.
Offramp Security Error has been
detected in the received mail.
Offramp Security Error has been
detected in the received mail. This
mail has been transferred to the
administrator.
Offramp Security Error has been
detected in the received mail. This
mail could not be transferred to the
administrator.
Power Failure has been occurred in
Email receiving.
SMTP Destination Error has been
detected in the received mail. This
mail was deleted.
Offramp Destination limitation Error
has been detected in the received
mail.
Fax Board Error has been occurred
in the received mail.
POP3 Connection Error has been
occurred in the received mail.
POP3 Connection Timeout Error has
been occurred in the received mail.
POP3 Login Error has been occurred
in the received mail.
POP3 Login Error occurred in the
received mail.
File I/O Error has been occurred in
this mail. The mail could not be
received until File I/O is recovered.

Contents
TIFF paper size error

Troubleshooting
P. 6-118
P. 6-118

P. 6-118

Offramp destination error

P. 6-118
P. 6-118

P. 6-118

Offramp security error

P. 6-118
P. 6-118

P. 6-118

Power failure error

P. 6-118

Destination address error

P. 6-118

Offramp destination limitation error

P. 6-118

FAX board error

P. 6-118

POP3 server connection error

P. 6-119

POP3 server connection time-out

error
POP3 login error

P. 6-119

POP3 login method error

P. 6-119

File I/O error

P. 6-119
P. 6-119
P. 6-119
P. 6-119
P. 6-119

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

P. 6-118

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 20

6.1.4

Printer function error

Following codes are displayed at the end of the user name on the print job log screen.
Error code
4031
4032
4033

4034
4035
4036
4040
4050
4300
4301
4310

4311

4312
A221
A222
A290

A291
A292
A2A0

A2A1

A2A2

Contents
HDD full during print - Large quantity image data by private print or invalid
network print are saved in HDD.
Private-print-only error: Jobs other than Private print jobs cannot be
performed.
Printing data storing limitation error: Printing with its data being stored to the
HDD temporarily (Proof print, Private print, Scheduled print, etc.) cannot be
performed.
e-Filing storing limitation error: Printing with its data being stored to the HDD
(print and e-Filing, print to e-Filing, etc.) cannot be performed.
Local file storing limitation error: Network FAX or Internet FAX cannot be sent
when Local is selected for the destination of the file to save.
User authentication error: The user who intended to print a document is not
registered as a user.
Not being authorized to perform JOB
Problem in LDAP server connection or LDAP server authorization settings
USB direct printing: Job execution error due to functional restrictions Printing with he USB direct printing function restricted
USB direct printing: File conversion error - Printing a file whose format is not
supported, or an invalid file
Double-sign encoding error: A double-sign encoding error occurred because
the PDF file is encrypted in a forbidden language or in a language not
supported.
Printing not permitted: Printing is not permitted or only printing in a low
resolution level is permitted due to the encryption language of the encrypted
PDF file.
* Permitted only when a user password is entered.
Password mismatching: The entered password is neither matched with a
user password nor an owner password.
Print job cancellation - Print job (copy, list print, network print) is deleted from
the print job screen.
Print job power failure - The power of the equipment is turned OFF during
print job (copy, list print, network print).
Limit over error (Black): The numbers of output pages have exceeded those
specified with both of the department code and the user code at the same
time.
Limit over error (Black): The number of output pages has exceeded the one
specified with the user code.
Limit over error (Black): The number of output pages has exceeded the one
specified with the department code.
Limit over error (Color): The number of prints has exceeded the one
specified for the department code and user code, or users (guests) are not
authorized to perform color printing.
Limit over error (Color): The number of prints has exceeded the one
specified for the user code, or users (guests) are not authorized to perform
color printing.
Limit over error (Color): The number of output pages has exceeded the one
specified with the department code.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Troubleshooting
P. 6-120
P. 6-120
P. 6-120

P. 6-120
P. 6-120
P. 6-120
P. 6-120
P. 6-120
P. 6-120
P. 6-120
P. 6-120

P. 6-120

P. 6-121
P. 6-121
P. 6-121
P. 6-121

P. 6-121
P. 6-121
P. 6-121

P. 6-121

P. 6-121

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 21

6.1.5

TopAccess related error

5BD0

Message displayed in
the TopAccess screen
Toner Not Recognized - Please
Check Toner.
Time for Slit Glass and Main Charger
Cleaning - Please Clean Slit Glass
and Main Charger.
Power failure occurred during restore

5C10

FAX Unit is not attached.

5C11

Security error on Address Book.

5C20

The file has been imported

5C21

Failed to import the file - Invalid file

format
Failed to import the file - Internal
error

Error code
5110
5212

5C22

Contents

Troubleshooting

Toner cartridge detection error

P. 6-122

Appears when the time for main

charger cleaning comes (at every
output of approx. 10,000 sheets)
Power supply is cut off during the
restoration of database sent from
TopAccess
Network FAX is disabled because the
FAX Unit is not attached
The network FAX job failed because
the specified address is not
registered in the Address Book
Displayed when data have been
imported from TopAccess
(Not an error message)
Data import from TopAccess failed
due to invalid file format
Data import from TopAccess failed
due to an internal error, the cause of
which is unknown

P. 6-122

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

P. 6-122

P. 6-122
P. 6-122

P. 6-122

P. 6-122
P. 6-122

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 22

6.1.6

Error history

In the setting mode (08-253), the latest twenty groups of error data will be displayed.
Display example
99999999
06 04 14 17 57 32
064
064
2362 1000 0000 0
EA10
Error code Total counter YY MM DD HH MM SS
MMM
NNN
ABCD_EFHI_JLOP_Q
4 digits
8 digits
12 digits (Year is indicated 3 digits 3 digits 13 digits
with its last two digits.)
A

D
E
F

G
H

I
J
K
L

MMM
NNN
O

Paper source
0: Not selected 1: Bypass feed 2: LCF 3: 1st drawer 4: 2nd drawer 5: PFP upper drawer
6: PFP lower drawer 7: Unused 8: Unused
Paper size code
0: A5/ST 1: A5-R 2: ST-R 3: LT, 4: A4 5: B5-R 6: LT-R 7: A4-R 8: OTHER/UNIV 9: B5,
A: FOLIO/COMP B: LG C: B4 D: LD E: A3 F: 13"LG G: Unused H: A6-R I: Post card J: 8.5"SQ
K: A3-wide L: LD wide M: 8K N: 16K-R O: 16K P: Unused Q: Unused R: Unused S: Unused
T: Unused U: SRA3(320x450) V: SRA3(320x460) Z: Not selected
Sort mode/staple mode
0: Non-sort/Non-staple 1: Group 2: Sort 7: Front staple
8: Double staple 9: Rear staple A: Saddle stitch
ADF mode
0: Unused 1: AUTO FEED (SADF) 2: STACK FEED
APS/AMS mode
0: Not selected 1: APS 2: AMS
Duplex mode
0: Not selected 1: Book 2: Double-sided/Single-sided 4: Double-sided/Duplex copying
8: Single-sided/Duplex copying
Unused
Image shift
0: Unused 1: Book 2: Left 3: Right 4: Top 5: Bottom 6: Book+Top 7: Book+Bottom 8: Left+Top
9: Left+Bottom A: Right+Top B: Right+Bottom
Editing
0: Unused 1: Masking 2: Trimming 3: Mirror image 4: Unused 5: NEG/POS
Edge erase/Dual-page
0: Unused 1: Edge erase 2: Dual-page 3: Edge erase & Dual-page
Unused
Function
0: Unused 1: Copying 2: FAX/Internet FAX transmission 3: FAX/Internet FAX/E-mail reception printing
4: Unused 5: Printing/List print 6: Scan/E-mail transmission
Primary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal)
(Mx256)+(Mx16)+M
Secondary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal)
(Nx256)+(Nx16)+N
Color mode
0: Auto color 1: Full color 2: Black 3: Unused 4: Twin color copy 5: Gray scale
6: Unused 7: Image smoothing
Media type
0: Plain paper 1: Thick 1 2: Thick 2 3: Thick 3 4: Thick 4 5: Special paper 1 6: Special paper 2
7: Recycled paper 8: Plain paper 1 9: Plain paper 2 A: Thin paper B: OHP film C: Thick 1/ reverse
D: Thick 2/ reverse E: Thick 3/ reverse F: Thick 4/ reverse G: Special paper 1/ reverse
H: Special paper 2/ reverse I: Envelope J: Tab paper Z: Unused
RADF size mixed
0: Unused 1: Single-size document 2: Size mixed

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 23

6.2
6.2.1

Diagnosis and Prescription for Each Error Code

Paper transport jam (paper exit section)

[E010] Jam not reaching the exit sensor

1. Check if there is any paper on the transport path or in the fuser unit. Remove it if there is.
* If the error still occurs, check the following.
2. Is the exit sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[1]/[B]).
* If it is working properly, proceed to 6. If not, check 3 to 5 below.
3. Check if the connector CN333 on the LGC board is disconnected from the exit sensor or the
harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
4. Replace the exit sensor.
5. Replace the LGC board.
6. Check if there is any abnormality on the paper transport path in the fuser unit. Correct it if there
is.

[E020] Stop jam at the exit sensor

1. Open the jam access cover and check if there is any paper on the transport path. Remove it if
there is.
* If the error still occurs, check the following.
2. Is the exit sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[1]/[B]).
* If it is working properly, proceed to 6. If not, check 3 to 5 below.
3. Check if the connector CN333 on the LGC board is disconnected from the exit sensor or the
harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
4. Replace the exit sensor.
5. Replace the LGC board.
6. Check the exit roller. Replace it if it is worn out.

6.2.2

Paper misfeeding

[E110] ADU misfeeding (paper not reaching the registration sensor)

1. Open the jam access cover and check if there is any paper in front of the registration sensor.
Remove it if there is.
* If the error still occurs, check the following.
2. Is the registration sensor working? (Perform the input check:03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[F])
* If it is working properly, proceed to 6. If not, check 3 to 5 below.
3. Check if the connector CN338 on the LGC board is disconnected from the registration sensor or
the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
4. Replace the registration sensor.
5. Replace the LGC board.
6. Is the ADU clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-222)
* If it is working properly, proceed to 10. If not, check 7 to 9 below.
7. Check if the connector CN338 on the LGC board is disconnected from the ADU clutch or the
harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
8. Replace the ADU clutch.
9. Replace the LGC board.
10.Check the rollers in the ADU. Replace them if they are worn out.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 24

[E120] Bypass misfeeding (paper not reaching the bypass feed sensor)
1. Are the bypass feed clutch and bypass feed sensor working? (Perform the output check: 03-204
and the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[4]/[D])
* If it is working properly, proceed to 6. If not, check 2 to 5 below.
2. Check if the connector CN338 on the LGC board is disconnected from the bypass feed clutch or
the bypass feed sensor, or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
3. Replace the bypass feed clutch.
4. Replace the bypass feed sensor.
5. Replace the LGC board.
6. Check the rollers in the ADU. Replace them if they are worn out.

[E130] 1st drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the 1st drawer feed sensor)
1. Open the jam access cover and check if there is any paper in front of the 1st drawer feed sensor.
Remove it if there is.
* If the error still occurs, check the following.
2. Is the 1st drawer feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[1]/[G])
* If it is working properly, proceed to 9. If not, check 3 to 8 below.
3. Check if the connector CN337 on the LGC board is disconnected from the 1st drawer feed
sensor or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
4. Replace the 1st drawer feed sensor.
5. Replace the LGC board.
6. Is the 1st drawer feed clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-201)
* If it is working properly, proceed to 10. If not, check 7 to 9 below.
7. Check if the connector CN337 on the LGC board is disconnected from the 1st drawer feed clutch
or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
8. Replace the 1st drawer feed clutch.
9. Replace the LGC board.
10.Check the 1st drawer feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller. Replace them if they are
worn out.

[E140] 2nd drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the 2nd drawer feed sensor)
1. Open the side cover and check if there is any paper in front of the 2nd drawer feed sensor.
Remove it if there is.
* If the error still occurs, check the following.
2. Is the 2nd drawer feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[1]/[F])
* If it is working properly, proceed to 6. If not, check 3 to 5 below.
3. Check if the connector CN348 on the LGC board is disconnected from the 2nd drawer feed
sensor or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
4. Replace the 2nd drawer feed sensor.
5. Replace the LGC board.
6. Is the 2nd drawer feed clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-202)
* If it is working properly, proceed to 10. If not, check 7 to 9 below.
7. Check if the connector CN348 on the LGC board is disconnected from the 2nd drawer feed
clutch or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
8. Replace the 2nd drawer feed clutch.
9. Replace the LGC board.
10.Check the 2nd drawer feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller. Replace them if they are
worn out.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 25

[E150] PFP upper drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the PFP upper drawer feed sensor)
1. Open the PFP side cover and check if there is any paper in front of the PFP upper drawer feed
sensor. Remove it if there is.
* If the error still occurs, check the following.
2. Is the PFP upper drawer feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[D])
* If it is working properly, proceed to 7. If not, check 3 to 6 below.
3. Check if the connectors CN349 on the LGC board is disconnected from the PFP upper drawer
feed sensor or the harnesses are open circuited. Check if the connectors CN241 and CN243 on
the PFP board are disconnected. Correct if any.
4. Replace the PFP upper drawer feed sensor.
5. Replace the PFP board.
6. Replace the LGC board.
7. Is the PFP upper drawer feed clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-226)
* If it is working properly, proceed to 12. If not, check 8 to 11 below.
8. Check if the connectors CN349 on the LGC board is disconnected from the PFP upper drawer
feed clutch or the harnesses are open circuited. Check if the connectors CN241 and CN247 on
the PFP board are disconnected. Correct if any.
9. Replace the PFP upper drawer feed clutch.
10.Replace the PFP board.
11. Replace the LGC board.
12.Check the PFP upper drawer feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller. Replace them if they
are worn out.

[E160] PFP lower drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the PFP lower drawer feed sensor)
1. Open PFP side cover and check if there is any paper in front of the PFP lower drawer feed
sensor. Remove it if there is.
* If the error still occurs, check the following.
2. Is the PFP lower drawer feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/[D])
* If it is working properly, proceed to 7. If not, check 3 to 6 below.
3. Check if the connectors CN349 on the LGC board is disconnected from the PFP lower drawer
feed sensor or the harnesses are open circuited. Check if the connectors CN 241 and CN243 on
the PFP board are disconnected. Correct if any.
4. Replace the PFP lower drawer feed sensor.
5. Replace the PFP board.
6. Replace the LGC board.
7. Is the PFP lower drawer feed clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-228)
* If it is working properly, proceed to 12. If not, check 8 to 11 below.
8. Check if the connectors CN349 on the LGC board is disconnected from the PFP lower drawer
feed clutch or the harnesses are open circuited. Check if the connectors CN241 and CN248 on
the PFP board are disconnected. Correct if any.
9. Replace the PFP lower drawer feed clutch.
10.Replace the PFP board.
11. Replace the LGC board.
12.Check the PFP lower drawer feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller. Replace them if they
are worn out.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 26

[E190] LCF misfeeding (paper not reaching the LCF feed sensor)
1. Open the LCF side cover and check if there is any paper in front of the LCF feed sensor. Remove
it if there is.
* If the error still occurs, check the following.
2. Is the LCF feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[0]/[G])
* If it is working properly, proceed to 7. If not, check 3 to 6 below.
3. Check if the connectors CN349 on the LGC board is disconnected from the LCF feed sensor or
the harnesses are open circuited. Check if the connectors CN1 and CN6 on the LCF board are
disconnected. Correct if any.
4. Replace the LCF feed sensor.
5. Replace the LCF board.
6. Replace the LGC board.
7. Is the LCF feed clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-209)
* If it is working properly, proceed to 12. If not, check 8 to 11 below.
8. Check if the connectors CN349 on the LGC board is disconnected from the LCF feed clutch or
the harnesses are open circuited. Check if the connectors CN1 and CN5 on the LCF board are
disconnected. Correct if any.
9. Replace the LCF feed clutch.
10.Replace the LCF board.
11. Replace the LGC board.
12.Check the LCF feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller. Replace them if they are worn out.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 27

6.2.3

Paper transport jam

[E200] 1st drawer transport jam (not reaching the registration sensor)
[E210] 2nd drawer transport jam (not reaching the registration sensor)
[E270] Bypass transport jam (not reaching the registration sensor)
[E300] PFP upper drawer transport jam (not reaching the registration sensor)
[E330] PFP lower drawer transport jam (not reaching the registration sensor)
[E3C0] LCF transport jam (not reaching the registration sensor)
1. Open the jam access cover and check if there is any paper in front of the 1st drawer feed sensor.
Remove it if there is.
* If the error still occurs, check the following.
2. Is the 1st drawer feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[1]/[G])
* If it is working properly, proceed to 6. If not, check 3 to 5 below.
3. Check if the connector CN348 on the LGC board is disconnected from the 1st drawer feed
sensor or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
4. Replace the 1st drawer feed sensor.
5. Replace the LGC board.
6. Are the lower transport clutches (high/low speed) working? (Perform the output check: 03-230,
233)
* If it is working properly, proceed to 10. If not, check 7 to 9 below.
7. Check if the connector CN348 on the LGC board is disconnected from the lower transport
clutches (high/low) or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
8. Replace the lower transport clutches (high/low speed).
9. Replace the LGC board.
10.Check the condition of the feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller of each paper source,
and replace them if they are worn out.
11. Check the transport roller. Replace it if it is worn out.

[E220] 2nd drawer transport jam (not reaching the 1st drawer feed sensor)
[E310] PFP upper drawer transport jam (not reaching the 1st drawer feed sensor)
[E340] PFP lower drawer transport jam (not reaching the 1st drawer feed sensor)
[E3D0] LCF transport jam (not reaching the 1st drawer feed sensor)
1. Open the jam access cover and check if there is any paper in front of the registration sensor.
Remove it if there is.
* If the error still occurs, check the following.
2. Is the registration sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[F])
* If it is working properly, proceed to 6. If not, check 3 to 5 below.
3. Check if the connector CN337 on the LGC board is disconnected from the registration sensor or
the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
4. Replace the registration sensor.
5. Replace the LGC board.
6. Are the upper transport clutches (high/low speed) working? (Perform the output check: 03-229,
231)
* If it is working properly, proceed to 11. If not, check 7 to 10 below.
7. Check if the connector CN337 on the LGC board is disconnected from the upper transport
clutches (high/low) or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
8. Replace the upper transport clutches (high/low speed).
9. Replace the LGC board.
10.Check the condition of the feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller of each paper source,
and replace them if they are worn out.
11. Check the transport roller. Replace it if it is worn out.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 28

[E320] PFP upper drawer transport jam (not reaching the 2nd drawer feed sensor)
[E350] PFP lower drawer transport jam (not reaching the 2nd drawer feed sensor)
[E3E0] LCF transport jam (not reaching the 2nd drawer feed sensor)
1. Open the side cover and check if there is any paper in front of the 2nd drawer feed sensor.
Remove it if there is.
* If the error still occurs, check the following.
2. Is the 2nd drawer feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[1]/[F])
* If it is working properly, proceed to 6. If not, check 3 to 5 below.
3. Check if the connector CN348 on the LGC board is disconnected from the 2nd drawer feed
sensor or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
4. Replace the 2nd drawer feed sensor.
5. Replace the LGC board.
6. Are the lower transport clutches working? (Perform the output check: 03-230, 233)
* If they are working properly, proceed to 10. If not, check 7 to 9 below.
7. Check if the connector CN348 on the LGC board is disconnected from the lower transport
clutches (high/low) or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
8. Replace the lower transport clutches (high/low speed).
9. Replace the LGC board.
10.Is the PFP transport clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-225)
* If they are working properly, proceed to 16. If not, check 11 to15 below.
11. Check if the connectors CN349 on the LGC board is disconnected from the PFP transport clutch
or the harnesses are open circuited. Check if the connectors CN241 and CN244 on the PFP
board are disconnected. Correct if any.
12.Replace the PFP transport clutch.
13.Replace the PFP board.
14.Replace the LGC board.
15.Check the condition of the feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller of each paper source,
and replace them if they are worn out.
16.Check the transport roller. Replace it if it is worn out.

[E360] PFP lower drawer transport jam (not reaching the PFP upper drawer feed sensor)
1. Open the PFP side cover and check if there is any paper in front of the PFP upper drawer feed
sensor. Remove it if there is.
* If the error still occurs, check the following.
2. Is the PFP upper feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[D])
* If it is working properly, proceed to 7. If not, check 3 to 6 below.
3. Check if the connectors CN349 on the LGC board is disconnected from the PFP upper drawer
feed sensor or the harnesses are open circuited. Check if the connectors CN 241 and CN243 on
the PFP board are disconnected. Correct if any.
4. Replace the PFP upper drawer feed sensor.
5. Replace the PFP board.
6. Replace the LGC board.
7. Is the PFP transport clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-225)
* If it is working properly, proceed to 12. If not, check 8 to 11 below.
8. Check if the connectors CN349 on the LGC board is disconnected from the PFP transport clutch
or the harnesses are open circuited. Check if the connectors CN 241 and CN244 on the PFP
board are disconnected. Correct if any.
9. Replace the PFP transport clutch.
10.Replace the PFP board.
11. Replace the LGC board.
12.Check the condition of the feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller of each paper source,
and replace them if they are worn out.
13.Check the PFP transport roller. Replace it if it is worn out.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 29

[E510] ADU transport stop jam

1. Open the ADU and check if there is any paper in front of the ADU entrance sensor.
* If the error still occurs, check the following.
2. Is the ADU entrance sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[4]/[B])
* If it is working properly, proceed to 7. If not, check 3 to 6 below.
3. Check if the connectors CN338 on the LGC board is disconnected from the ADU entrance
sensor or the harnesses are open circuited. Check if the connectors CN211 and CN214 on the
ADU board are disconnected. Correct if any.
4. Replace the ADU entrance sensor.
5. Replace the ADU board.
6. Replace the LGC board.
7. Is the exit motor (rotating in reverse) working? (Perform the output check: 03-121/171)
* If it is working properly, proceed to 11. If not, check 8 to 10 below.
8. Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected from the exit motor or the
harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
9. Replace the exit motor.
10.Replace the LGC board.
11. Is the ADU motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-110/160)
* If it is working properly, proceed to 16. If not, check 12 to 15 below.
12.Check if the connectors CN338 on the LGC board is disconnected from the ADU motor or the
harnesses are open circuited. Check if the connectors CN211, CN212 and CN215 on the ADU
board are disconnected. Correct if any.
13.Replace the ADU motor.
14.Replace the ADU board.
15.Replace the LGC board.
16.Check the rollers in the ADU, the exit roller and the pressure spring of the equipment. Replace
them if they are worn out.

[E520] Stop jam in the ADU

1. Open the ADU and check if there is any paper in front of the ADU exit sensor.
* If the error still occurs, check the following.
2. Is the ADU exit sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[4]/[A])
* If it is working properly, proceed to 11. If not, check 3 to 10 below.
3. Check if the connectors CN338 on the LGC board is disconnected from the ADU exit sensor or
the harnesses are open circuited. Check if the connectors CN211 and CN213 on the ADU board
are disconnected. Correct if any.
4. Replace the ADU exit sensor.
5. Replace the ADU board.
6. Replace the LGC board.
7. Is the ADU clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-222)
* If it is working properly, proceed to 11. If not, check 8 to 10 below.
8. Check if the connectors CN338 on the LGC board is disconnected from the ADU clutch or the
harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
9. Replace the ADU clutch.
10.Replace the LGC board.
11. Check the rollers in the ADU. Replace them if they are worn out.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 30

[EB50] Paper remaining on the transport path due to multiple feeding

When the paper is fed from any of the 1st drawer, bypass feed unit or ADU:
(When the paper is fed from the 1st drawer:)
1. Open the jam access cover and check if there is any paper in front of the registration sensor
(when the paper is fed from the 1st drawer).
2. Is the 1st drawer feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[1]/[G])
* If it is working properly, proceed to 11. If not, check 3 to 10 below.
3. Check if the connector CN337 on the LGC board is disconnected from the 1st drawer feed
sensor or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
4. Replace the 1st drawer feed sensor.
5. Replace the LGC board.
(When the paper is fed from the bypass feed unit:)
1. Is the bypass feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[4]/[D])
2. Check if the connector CN338 on the LGC board is disconnected from the bypass feed sensor or
the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
3. Replace the bypass feed sensor.
4. Replace the LGC board.
(When the paper is fed from the ADU:)
1. Is the ADU exit sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[4]/[A])
2. Check if the connector CN338 on the LGC board is disconnected from the ADU exit sensor or
the harnesses are open circuited. Check if the connectors CN211 and CN213 on the ADU board
are disconnected. Correct if any.
3. Replace the ADU exit sensor.
4. Replace the ADU board.
5. Replace the LGC board.
6. Is the registration sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[F])
7. Check if the connector CN337 on the LGC board is disconnected from the registration sensor or
the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
8. Replace the registration sensor
9. Replace the LGC board.
10.Check the rollers. Replace them if they are worn out.
When the paper is fed from any of the 2nd drawer, PFP or LCF:
1. Open the jam access cover and check if there is any paper in front of the 1st drawer feed sensor.
Remove it if there is.
2. Are the 1st/2nd drawer feed sensors working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[1]/[G], /[1]/
[F])
* If it is working properly, proceed to 11. If not, check 3 to 10 below.
3. Check if the connector CN348 on the LGC board is disconnected from the 1st and 2nd drawer
feed sensors or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
4. Replace the 1st/2nd drawer feed sensors.
5. Replace the LGC board.
6. Check the rollers. Replace them if they are worn out.

[EB60] Paper remaining on the transport path due to multiple feeding

1. Open the jam access cover and check if there is any paper in front of the registration sensor.
Remove it if there is.
* If the error still occurs, check the following.
2. Is the registration sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[F])
* If it is working properly, proceed to 6. If not, check 3 to 5 below.
3. Check if the connector CN337 on the LGC board is disconnected from the registration sensor or
the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
4. Replace the registration sensor.
5. Replace the LGC board.
6. Check the rollers. Replace them if they are worn out.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 31

6.2.4

Other paper jam

[E011] Paper jam caused by clinging to the transfer belt (Paper not reached the paper clinging
detection sensor)
1. Check if there is any paper clinging to the transfer belt or entering under the receiving tray.
Remove it if there is.
2. Use the paper within the specification if the thin paper being used is out of specification.
3. Is the registration motor rotating? (Perform the input check. 03-108/158)
4. Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected from the registration motor or
the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
5. Replace the registration motor.
6. Replace the LGC board.
7. Check the state of the registration roller and replace it if it is deteriorated.
8. Is the paper clinging detection sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[E])
9. Check if the connector CN337 on the LGC board is disconnected from the paper clinging
detection sensor or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
10.Replace the paper clinging detection sensor.
11. Replace the LGC board.
12.Use the paper within the specification if the special paper whose reflection rate is lower than the
specification is used.

[E030] Power-ON jam

1. Open the cover of the unit/area whose picture is flashing on the control panel and remove if there
is any paper on the transport path. (Refer to the table below.)
2. Is the sensor in the jamming area working? (Perform the input check: Refer to the following
table.)
3. heck if the connector on the LGC board is disconnected from the corresponding sensor in the
jamming area or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
4. Replace the sensor.
5. Replace the LGC board.
Relation between the jamming area and the corresponding sensors/covers.
(If a jam is occurring in the ADU, LCF or PFP, check the board in each unit.)
Jamming area
Registration area

Cover
Jam access cover

Exit area
ADU

Fuser cover
ADU

Feeding area
(equipment)
Bypass unit
LCF
PFP

Side cover
Bypass unit
LCF side cover
PFP side cover

Bridge unit

Bridge unit

Sensor
Registration sensor
Paper clinging detection sensor
1st drawer feed sensor
Exit sensor
ADU entrance sensor
ADU exit sensor
2nd drawer feed sensor

Test Mode/Input check

03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[F]
03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[E]
03-[FAX]ON/[1]/[G]
03-[FAX]ON/[1]/[B]
03-[FAX]ON/[4]/[B]
03-[FAX]ON/[4]/[A]
03-[FAX]ON/[1]/[F]

Bypass feed sensor

LCF feed sensor
PFP upper drawer feed sensor
PFP lower drawer feed sensor
Bridge unit transport sensor-1
(Entrance sensor)
Bridge unit transport sensor-2
(Exit sensor)

03-[FAX]ON/[4]/[D]
03-[FAX]OFF/[0]/[G]
03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[D]
03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/[D]
03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[F]

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[D]

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 32

[E061]Incorrect paper size setting for 1st drawer

[E062]Incorrect paper size setting for 2nd drawer
[E063]Incorrect paper size setting for PFP upper drawer
[E064]Incorrect paper size setting for PFP lower drawer
[E065]Incorrect paper size setting for bypass tray
If any paper remains in the equipment or drawer, remove it. Match the paper size of the drawer
setting and the one in the drawer.
* Paper size detection is performed at the first sheet of paper when the drawer is opened or
closed, or when the power of the equipment is turned ON.

[E090]Image data delay jam

1. Remove the paper remained in front of the registration sensor.
2. Check if the error is cleared by turning the power OFF and then back ON.
3. Check if the connectors connecting the SYS board, IMG board and LGC board are disconnected.
4. Check if the connectors connecting the IMG board and SLG board are disconnected.
5. Check if the connectors of the HDD are disconnected.
6. Check if the page memory is correctly connected to the connector on the SYS board.
7. Replace the page memory.
8. Replace the HDD, SYS board, IMG board and LGC board.

[E091]Motor on time-out jam

1. Check if there is any paper in the equipment. Remove it if there is.
2. Check if the error is cleared by turning the power OFF and then back ON.
3. Check if the connectors connecting the SYS board, IMG board and LGC board are disconnected.
4. Check if the connectors connecting the IMG board and SLG board are disconnected.
5. Check if the connectors of the HDD are disconnected.
6. Replace the HDD, SYS board, IMG board and LGC board.

[E0A0]Image transport ready time-out jam

1. Remove the paper remained in front of the registration sensor.
2. Check if the error is cleared by turning the power OFF and then back ON.
3. Check if the connectors on the LGC board are disconnected.
4. Replace the LGC board.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 33

[E550] Paper remaining on the transport path

1. Open the cover of the unit/area whose picture is flashing on the control panel and remove if there
is any paper on the transport path.
2. Is the sensor in the jamming area working? (Perform the input check: Refer to the following table)
3. Check if the connector on the LGC board is disconnected from the corresponding sensor in the
jamming area or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
4. Replace the sensor.
5. Replace the LGC board.
Relation between the jamming area and the corresponding sensors/covers
(If a jam is occurring in the ADU, LCF or PFP, check the board in each unit.)
Jamming area
Registration area

Cover
Jam access cover

Exit area
ADU

Fuser cover
ADU

Bypass unit
Feeding area
(equipment)
LCF
PFP

Bypass unit
Side cover

Bridge unit

Bridge unit

Finisher

LCF side cover

PFP side cover

Finisher door

Sensor
Registration sensor
1st drawer feed sensor
Exit sensor
ADU entrance sensor
ADU exit sensor
Bypass feed sensor
2nd drawer feed sensor
LCF feed sensor
PFP upper drawer feed sensor
PFP lower drawer feed sensor
Bridge unit transport sensor-1
(Entrance sensor)
Bridge unit transport sensor-2
(Exit sensor)
Sensors in the finisher

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

Test Mode/Input check

03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[F]
03-[FAX]ON/[1]/[G]
03-[FAX]ON/[1]/[B]
03-[FAX]ON/[4]/[B]
03-[FAX]ON/[4]/[A]
03-[FAX]ON/[4]/[D]
03-[FAX]ON/[1]/[F]
03-[FAX]OFF/[0]/[G]
03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[D]
03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/[D]
03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[F]
03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[D]
-

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 34

6.2.5

Cover open jam

[E400] Jam access cover open

1. Close the jam access cover if it is opened. Remove if there is any paper before closing it.
2. Is the voltage of 24V being supplied from the power supply unit? (Perform the input check: 03[FAX] ON/[2]/[B])
3. Check if the connector CN361 on the LGC board is disconnected from the connector CN405 on
the switching regulator or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
4. Check if the fuse (F201, F202, F203, and F204) on the switching regulator has blown.
5. Replace the LGC board.
6. Replace the switching regulator.
7. Is the transfer cover switch working properly? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX] ON/[3]/[D])
8. Check if the connector CN338 on the LGC board is disconnected from the transfer cover switch
or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.

[E410] Front cover open jam

1. Close the front cover if it is opened.
2. Is the voltage of 24V being supplied from the power supply unit? (Perform the input check: 03[FAX] ON/[2]/[B])
3. Check if the connector CN345 on the LGC board is disconnected from the connector CN405 on
the switching regulator or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
4. Check if the fuse (F201, F202, F203, and F204) on the switching regulator has blown.
5. Replace the LGC board.
6. Replace the switching regulator.

[E420] PFP side cover open jam

1. Close the PFP side cover if it is opened. Remove if there is any paper before closing it.
2. Is the PFP side cover opening/closing switch working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/
[2]/[F])
3. Check if the connector CN349 on the LGC board is disconnected from the PFP side cover
opening/closing switch or the harnesses are open circuited. Check if the connectors CN241 and
CN243 on the PFP board are disconnected. Correct if any.
4. Replace the PFP side cover opening/closing switch.
5. Replace the PFP board.
6. Replace the LGC board.

[E430] ADU open jam

1. Close the ADU if it is opened. Remove if there is any paper before closing it.
2. Is the ADU opening/closing switch working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[2]/[C])
3. Check if the connector CN338 on the LGC board is disconnected from the ADU opening/closing
switch or the harnesses are open circuited. Check if the connectors CN211 and CN217 on the
ADU board are disconnected. Correct if any.
4. Replace the ADU opening/closing switch.
5. Replace the ADU board.
6. Replace the LGC board.

[E440] Side cover open jam

1. Close the side cover if it is opened. Remove if there is any paper before closing it.
2. Is the side door switch working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[0]/[B])
3. Check if the connector CN348 on the LGC board is disconnected from the side cover switch or
the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
4. Replace the side door switch.
5. Replace the LGC board.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 35

[E450] LCF side cover open jam

1. Close the LCF side cover if it is opened. Remove if there is any paper before closing it.
2. Is the LCF side cover opening/closing switch working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/
[0]/[D])
3. Check if the connector CN349 on the LGC board is disconnected from the LCF side cover
opening/closing switch or the harnesses are open circuited. Check if the connectors CN1 and
CN6 on the LCF board are disconnected. Correct if any.
4. Replace the LCF side cover opening/closing switch.
5. Replace the LCF board.
6. Replace the LGC board.

[E480] Bridge unit open jam

1. Close the bridge unit if it is opened. Remove if there is any paper before closing it.
2. Is the bridge unit cover opening/closing detection switch working? (Perform the input check: 03[FAX]OFF/[5]/[E])
3. Check if the connector CN334 on the LGC board is disconnected from the bridge unit cover
opening/closing detection switch or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
4. Replace the bridge unit cover opening/closing detection switch.
5. Replace the LGC board.

[E4A0] Waste toner cover open jam

1. Close the waste toner cover if it is opened. Remove if there is any paper before closing it.
2. Is the waste toner cover open/close detection switch working? (Perform the input check: 03[FAX]OFF/[1]/[H])
3. Check if the connector CN359 on the LGC board is disconnected from the waste toner cover
open/close detection switch or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
4. Replace the waste toner cover open/close detection switch.
5. Replace the LGC board.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 36

6.2.6

RADF jam

[E712] Jam not reaching the original registration sensor

1. Clean the pickup roller, feed roller and separation roller if they are stained.
2. Flatten the original if it is folded or excessively curled and place it again.
3. Is the original registration sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[H])
* If it is working properly, proceed to 7. If not, check 3 to 6.
4. Check if the connector CN74 on the RADF board is disconnected from the original registration
sensor or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
5. Replace the original registration sensor.
6. Replace the RADF board.
7. Replace the pickup roller, feed roller and separation roller if they are worn out.

[E713] Cover open jam in the read ready status

1. Close the RADF jam access cover or the front cover if they are opened in the read ready status.
2. Is the RADF jam access cover sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[C])
3. Check if the connector CN75 on the RADF board is disconnected from the RADF jam access
cover sensor or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
4. Replace the RADF jam access cover sensor.
5. Replace the RADF board.

[E714] Feed signal reception jam

1. Is the empty sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[B])
2. Check if the lever of empty sensor is working normally.
3. Check if the connector CN75 on the RADF board is disconnected from the empty sensor or the
harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
4. Replace the empty sensor.
5. Replace the RADF board.

[E721] Jam not reaching the read sensor

1. Clean the registration roller and the read roller if they are stained.
2. Is the read sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[G])
* If it is working properly, proceed to 6. If not, check 3 to 5 below.
3. Check if the connector CN76 on the RADF board is disconnected from the read sensor or the
harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
4. Replace the read sensor.
5. Replace the RADF board.
6. Replace the registration roller and the read roller if they are worn out.

[E722] Jam not reaching the exit sensor (during scanning)

1. Clean the read roller if it is stained.
2. Is the original exit/reverse sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[E])
* If it is working properly, proceed to 6. If not, check 3 to 5 below.
3. Check if the connector CN75 on the RADF board is disconnected from the original exit/reverse
sensor or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
4. Replace the original exit/reverse sensor
5. Replace the RADF board.
6. Replace the read roller if it is worn out.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 37

[E724] Stop jam at the registration sensor

1. Clean the registration roller if it is stained.
2. Is the registration sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[H])
* If it is working properly, proceed to 6. If not, check 3 to 5 below.
3. Check if the connector CN74 on the RADF board is disconnected from the registration sensor or
the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
4. Replace the registration sensor.
5. Replace the RADF board.
6. Replace the registration roller if it is worn out.

[E725] Stop jam at the read sensor

1. Clean the read roller if it is stained.
2. Is the read sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[G])
* If it is working properly, proceed to 6. If not, check 3 to 5 below.
3. Check if the connector CN75 on the RADF board is disconnected from the read sensor or the
harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
4. Replace the read sensor.
5. Replace the RADF board.
6. Replace the read roller if it is worn out.

[E726] Transport/exit signal reception jam

1. If any original remains in the RADF, remove it.
2. If any paper remains in the equipment, remove it.
3. Turn the power OFF and then back ON. If the jam still occurs, perform the following procedure.
4. Check the connection between the RADF board and SLG board, and the connection between
the RADF board and switching power supply.
* Are the connection of the connectors and joint connectors normal?
* Are the connector pins connected or are the harnesses open circuited?
5. Check if the 24V and 5V outputs of the switching power supply are normal.
6. Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open circuited.
7. Replace the RADF board.
8. Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open circuited.
9. Replace the SLG board.

[E731] Stop jam at the exit sensor

1. Clean the exit roller if it is stained.
2. Is the exit/reverse sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[E])
* If it is working properly, proceed to 6. If not, check 3 to 5 below.
3. Check if the connector CN4 on the RADF board is disconnected from the exit/reverse sensor or
the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
4. Replace the exit/reverse sensor.
5. Replace the RADF board.
6. Replace the exit roller if it is worn out.

[E860] RADF jam access cover open

1. Close the RADF jam access cover if it is opened. Remove if there is any original before closing it.
2. Is the RADF jam access cover switch working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[C])
* If it is working properly, proceed to 6. If not, check 3 to 5 below.
3. Check if the connector CN8 on the RADF board is disconnected from the RADF jam access
cover switch or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
4. Replace the RADF jam access cover switch.
5. Replace the RADF board.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 38

[E870] RADF open jam

1. Close the RADF if it is opened. Remove if there is any original before closing it.
2. Is the RADF opening/closing sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[D])
* If it is working properly, proceed to 6. If not, check 3 to 5 below.
3. Check if the connector CN75 on the RADF board is disconnected from the RADF opening/
closing sensor or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
4. Replace the RADF opening/closing sensor.
5. Replace the RADF board.
6. Is the RADF opening/closing sensor adjusted within the specified range?

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 39

6.2.7

Jam in bridge unit

[E910] Paper not reaching the bridge unit transport sensor-1

[E920] Paper stopping at the bridge unit transport sensor-1
1. Check if there is any paper in the bridge unit and remove it if there is.
2. Is the bridge unit transport sensor-1 working? (Perform the input check:03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[F])
* If it is working properly, proceed to 6. If not, check 3 to 5 below.
3. Check if the connector CN334 on the LGC board is disconnected from the bridge unit transport
sensor-1 (entrance sensor) or the harnesses are open circuited. Check if the connector J523 of
the bridge unit is disconnected. Correct if any.
4. Replace the bridge unit transport sensor-1.
5. Replace the LGC board.
6. Is the bridge unit gate solenoid working? (Perform the output check: 03-232)
* If it is working properly, proceed to 10. If not, check 7 to 9 below.
7. Check if the connector CN334 on the LGC board is disconnected from the bridge unit gate
solenoid or the harnesses are open circuited. Check if the connector J523 of the bridge unit is
disconnected. Correct if any.
8. Replace the bridge unit gate solenoid.
9. Replace the LGC board.
10.Does the transport roller of the bridge unit work when the fuser motor is rotated? (Perform the
output check: 03-113/163)
* If it is working properly, proceed to 12. If not, check 11 below.
11. Check the drive system of the equipment and bridge unit.
12.Check if the rollers in the exit roller, the pressure spring and the bridge unit are worn out.

[E930] Paper not reaching the bridge unit transport sensor-2

[E940] Paper stopping at the bridge unit transport sensor-2
1. Check if there is any paper in the bridge unit and remove it if there is.
2. Is the bridge unit transport sensor-2 working? (Perform the input check:03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[D])
* If it is working properly, proceed to 6. If not, check 3 to 5 below.
3. Check if the connector CN334 on the LGC board is disconnected from the bridge unit transport
sensor-2 (exit sensor) or the harnesses are open circuited. Check if the connector J523 of the
bridge unit is disconnected. Correct if any.
4. Replace the bridge unit transport sensor-2.
5. Replace the LGC board.
6. Does the transport roller of the bridge unit work when the fuser motor is rotated? (Perform the
output check: 03-113/163)
* If it is working properly, proceed to 8. If not, check 7 below.
7. Check the drive system of the equipment and bridge unit.
8. Check if the rollers in the exit roller, the pressure spring and the bridge unit are worn out.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 40

6.2.8

Paper jam in finisher section

[EA10] Paper transport delay jam

MJ-1030
1. Check if there is any paper in the finisher or on the transport path of the equipment and remove it
if there is.
2. Check if the connector J708 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the inlet
sensor (P133) or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
3. Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
4. Replace the inlet sensor.
5. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1031
1. Check if there is any paper in the finisher or on the transport path of the equipment and remove it
if there is.
2. Check if the connector J104 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the inlet
sensor (SR2) or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
3. Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
4. Replace the inlet sensor.
5. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1101
1. Check if there is any paper in the finisher or on the transport path of the equipment and remove it
if there is.
2. Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the entrance
sensor (S1)?
3. Is the gap between the flapper and entrance roller shaft other than 0.60?0.20mm when the gate
solenoid (SOL2) is pulled?.
4. Is the harness between the entrance motor (M1) and the finisher control PC board (CN7)
disconnected or open circuited?
5. Is the harness between the gate solenoid (SOL2) and the finisher control PC board (CN22)
disconnected or open circuited?
6. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

[EA20] Paper transport stop jam

MJ-1030
1. Check if there is any paper in the finisher or on the transport path of the equipment and remove it
if there is.
2. Check if the connectors J707, J708 and J722B on the finisher controller PC board are
disconnected from the corresponding sensors (inlet sensor [P133], transport path sensor [P134]
and processing tray sensor [P138]) or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
3. Attach the actuators securely if their shafts are out of place.
4. Replace the sensors.
5. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1031
1. Check if there is any paper in the finisher or on the transport path of the equipment and remove it
if there is.
2. Check if the connector J104 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the inlet
sensor (SR2) or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
3. Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
4. Replace the inlet sensor.
5. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 41

[EA20] Paper transport stop jam (inlet sensor)

MJ-1101
1. Check if there is any paper in the finisher or on the transport path of the equipment and remove it
if there is.
2. Check if the connector on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the transport
sensor (S2) or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
3. Replace the sensor.
4. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1031
1. Check if there is any paper in the finisher or on the transport path of the equipment and remove it
if there is.
2. Check if the connector J104 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the inlet
sensor (SR2) or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
3. Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
4. Replace the inlet sensor.
5. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

[EA21] Paper size error jam (outlet sensor)

[EA22] Paper size error jam (punch paper edge sensor)
MJ-1101
1. Check if there is any paper in the finisher or on the transport path of the equipment and remove it
if there is.
2. Is the paper size used shorter than the size specified in the specifications?
3. Check if the connectors CN7 and CN22 on the finisher controller PC board are disconnected
from the entrance sensor (S1) and the transport sensor (S2), or the harnesses are open
circuited. Correct if any.
4. Replace the sensor.
5. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

[EA23] Paper transport stop jam (transport sensor)

[EA24] Paper transport stop jam (between entrance & transport sensor)
[EA25] Paper transport stop jam (after paper stack exit)
[EA26] Paper transport stop jam (stop command request)
[EA27] Paper transport stop jam (paper not inserted)
[EA28] Paper transport stop jam (paper holder plate operation delay)
[EA29] Paper transport stop jam (stack transport delay)
MJ-1101
1. Check if there is any paper in the finisher or on the transport path of the equipment and remove it
if there is.
2. Check if the connectors CN7 and CN22 on the finisher controller PC board are disconnected
from the entrance sensor (S1) and the transport sensor (S2), or the harnesses are open
circuited. Correct if any.
3. Replace the sensor.
4. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 42

[EA30] Power-ON jam

MJ-1030
1. Check if there is any paper in the finisher or on the transport path of the equipment and remove it
if there is.
2. Check if the connectors J707, J708 and J722B on the finisher controller PC board are
disconnected from the corresponding sensor (inlet sensor [P133], transport path sensor [P134]
and processing tray sensor [P138]) or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
3. Is each of the sensors (the inlet sensor, the transport path sensor and the processing tray
sensor) working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
4. Replace the sensors.
5. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1031
1. Check if there is any paper in the finisher or on the transport path of the equipment and remove it
if there is.
2. Check if the connector J104 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the inlet
sensor (SR2) or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
3. Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
4. Replace the inlet sensor.
5. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

[EA31] Transport path paper remaining jam

MJ-1101
1. Check if there is any paper in the finisher or on the transport path of the equipment and remove it
if there is.
2. Check if the connector CN22 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the
transport sensor (S2) or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
3. Check if the connectors CN7 and CN22 on the finisher controller PC board are disconnected
from the entrance sensor (S1) and the transport sensor (S2), or the harnesses are open
circuited. Correct if any.
4. Replace the sensor.
5. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

[EA32] Exit paper remaining jam

MJ-1101
1. Check if there is any paper in the finisher or on the transport path of the equipment and remove it
if there is.
2. Check and correct the mechanism.
3. Check if the connector CN11 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the
finishing tray paper detection sensor (S12) or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
4. Replace the sensor.
5. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 43

[EA40] Door open jam / joint open jam

MJ-1030
1. Check if there is any paper in the finisher or on the transport path of the equipment and remove it
if there is.
2. Close the upper or front cover of the finisher if any of them is opened.
3. Check if the connectors J707 and J708 on the finisher controller PC board are disconnected from
the upper cover opening sensor (P131) and the front cover opening sensor (P132), or the
harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
4. Replace the upper/front cover opening sensor.
5. Check if the connector J719 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the front
cover switch (MS31) or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
6. Replace the front cover switch (MS31).
7. Is the connector J5 on the punch controller PC board disconnected?
8. Is the harness connecting the punch controller PC board and upper door switch (MSW61) open
circuited?
9. Is the harness connecting the punch controller PC board and front door switch (MSW62) open
circuited?
10.Are the upper and front door switches working properly?
11. Reconnect or replace the connector of the upper cover switch or the front cover switch.
12.Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1031
1. Check if there is any paper in the finisher or on the transport path of the equipment and remove it
if there is.
2. Check if the connector J110 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the Joint
switch (SW1) or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
3. Replace the Joint switch.
4. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1101
1. Close the front cover or the stationary tray cover if they are opened.
2. Replace the handle cover installed inside of the front cover if it is broken.
3. Reinstall the stationary tray opening/closing switch if it is incorrectly installed.
4. Check if the connector CN16 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the front
cover switch (SW1) and the stationary tray opening/closing switch (SW2) or the harnesses are
open circuited. Correct if any.
5. Replace the sensors.
6. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

[EA50] Stapling jam

MJ-1030
1. Check if there is any paper in the finisher or on the transport path of the equipment or on the
stapling tray. Remove it if there is.
2. Is the jam cleared by taking off the staple cartridge from the finisher and removing the staple
sheet slid from the staple case?
3. Is the connector J721B on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
4. Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and staple home position sensor
(PI40) open circuited?
5. Is the staple home position sensor working properly?
6. Reconnect or replace the connector of the staple home position sensor.
7. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 44

MJ-1031
1. Check if there is any paper in the finisher or stapler and remove it if there is.
2. Is the jam cleared by taking off the staple cartridge from the finisher and removing the staple
sheet slid from the staple case?
3. Check if the connectors J112, J113 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the
stapler) or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
4. Check if the connectors on the stapler is disconnected or the harnesses are open circuited.
Correct if any.
5. Replace the stapler.
6. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1101
1. Check if there is any paper in the finisher or on the transport path of the equipment or on the
finishing tray. Remove it if there is.
2. Is the jam cleared by taking off the staple cartridge from the finisher and removing the staple
sheet slid from the staple case?
3. Check if the actuator of the stapler interference sensor (S11) moves smoothly.
4. Check if the connector CN2 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the stapler
or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
5. Check the harnesses in the stapler are disconnected or open circuited. Correct if any.
6. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

[EA60] Early arrival jam

MJ-1030
1. Check if there is any paper in the finisher or on the transport path of the equipment or on the
stapling tray. Remove it if there is.
2. Check if the connector CN2 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the stapler
or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
3. Check if the connector on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the inlet sensor
(P133) or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
4. Check if the inlet sensor (P133) is working (or if the actuator returns) properly.
5. Replace the inlet sensor.
6. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1031
1. Check if there is any paper in the finisher or on the transport path of the equipment and remove it
if there is.
2. Check if the connector J104 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the inlet
sensor (SR2) or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
3. Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
4. Replace the inlet sensor.
5. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1101
1. Check if there is any paper in the finisher or on the transport path of the equipment or on the
finishing tray. Remove it if there is.
2. Check if there is any disconnection, incorrect installation or breakage on the entrance sensor
(S1). Correct if any.
3. Check if the connector CN7 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the
entrance sensor (S1) and the harnesses are disconnected or open circuited. Correct if any.
4. Replace the entrance sensor.
5. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 45

[EA70] Stack exit belt home position error / Stack slider home position error
MJ-1101
1. Check if the connector CN11 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the stack
belt exit home position sensor (S9) and the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
2. Is the harness between the stack transport motor (M5) and the finisher control PC board (CN10)
disconnected or open circuited?
3. Replace the sensor.
4. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1031
1. Check if the connector J111 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the stack
edging HP sensor (SR8) or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
2. Check if the connector J111 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the stack
slide motor (M4) or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
3. Replace the stack slider HP sensor.
4. Replace the stack slide motor.
5. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 46

6.2.9

Paper jam in saddle stitcher section

[EA80] Stapling jam

MJ-1030
1. Check if there is any paper in the finisher, saddle stitcher, or on the transport path of the
equipment, or on the stapling tray. Remove it if there is.
2. Remove the staple cartridge from the finisher and remove staples stuck in the stapling unit.
3. Check if the connector J8 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board is disconnected from the
stitcher home position switches (rear: SW5, front: SW7) or the harnesses are open circuited.
Correct if any.
4. Check if the stitcher home position switches are working properly.
5. Replace the stitcher home position switch.
6. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

[EA90] Door open jam

MJ-1030
1. Check if there is any paper in the finisher, saddle stitcher or on the transport path of the
equipment. Remove it if there is.
2. Check if the saddle stitcher door is closed.
3. Check if the connectors J10 and J11 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board are disconnected
from any of the cover opening switches (the delivery cover sensor [P13] and the inlet cover
sensor [P19]) or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
4. Check if the cover opening switches noted above are working properly.
5. Replace the sensor.
6. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

[EAA0] Power-ON jam

MJ-1030
1. Check if there is any paper on the transport path of the saddle stitcher or the finisher. Remove it
if there is.
2. Is any of the connectors J9, J10 and J13 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board
disconnected?
3. Check if the connectors on the saddle stitcher controller PC board are disconnected from the No.
1 paper sensor (PI18), No. 2 paper sensor (PI19), No. 3 paper sensor (PI20), vertical path paper
sensor (PI17) and delivery sensor (PI11), or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
4. Is each of the sensors (No.1 paper sensor, No.2 paper sensor, No.3 paper sensor, the vertical
path paper sensor, and the delivery sensor) working properly? (Check the movement of the
actuator.)
5. Replace the sensor.
6. Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.

[EAB0] Paper transport stop jam

MJ-1030
1. Check if there is any paper in the finisher, saddle stitcher or the on the transport path of the
equipment. Remove it if there is.
2. Is the connector J708 on finisher controller PC board disconnected?
3. Is the harness between the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor [PI33] open circuited?
4. Is either of the connectors J9 or J10 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board disconnected?
5. Is the harness between the saddle stitcher controller PC board and each sensor (No.1 paper
sensor [PI18], No.2 paper sensor [PI19], No.3 paper sensor [PI20] and the delivery sensor
[PI11]) open circuited?
6. Is each of the sensors (the inlet sensor, No.1 paper sensor, No.2 paper sensor, No.3 paper
sensor and the delivery sensor) working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
7. Replace the sensor.
8. Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 47

[EAC0] Transport delay jam

MJ-1030
1. Check if there is any paper in the finisher, saddle stitcher or the on the transport path of the
equipment. Remove it if there is.
2. Is the connector J708 on finisher controller PC board disconnected?
3. Is the harness between the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor [PI33] open circuited?
4. Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
5. Replace the sensor.
6. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 48

6.2.10

Paper jam in puncher unit

[E9F0] Punching jam

MJ-1030 (when MJ-6004 is installed)
1. Check if there is any paper in the finisher or the on the transport path of the equipment. Remove
it if there is.
2. Is the connector J605A on the punch controller PC board disconnected?
3. Check if the connector on the punch controller PC board is disconnected from the punch home
position sensor (PI63) or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
4. Check if the punch home position sensor (PI63) is working properly.
5. Replace the punch home position sensor.
6. Replace the punch controller PC board.
MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is installed)
1. Check if there is any paper in the finisher, saddle stitcher or the on the transport path of the
equipment. Remove it if there is.
2. Rotate the punch motor (M3) and fix its mechanism if it does not rotate smoothly.
3. Check if the harnesses and the punch HP sensor (S4) are connected properly. Correct if any.
4. Check if the wiring of the hole punch controller PC board (HP board) and the punch motor (M3) is
proper. Correct if any.
5. Replace the punch motor (M3).
6. Replace the hole punch control PC board.

6.2.11

Other paper jam

[EAD0] Print end command time-out jam

1. Is the drum motor rotating normally?
2. Replace the SYS board.
3. Replace the LGC board.

[EAE0] Receiving time-out jam

1. Is the finisher working?
2. Check if the voltage (24V) is being supplied to the finisher.
3. Check the connection of the LGC board and IPC board.
4. Check if the harness connecting the IPC board and finisher I/F connector of the equipment side
is open circuited.
5. Check if the harness connecting the I/F connector of the finisher side and finisher controller PC
board is open circuited.
6. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

[EB30] Ready time-out jam

1. Check if there is any paper in the equipment. Remove it if there is.
2. Check if the connector on the equipment is disconnected from the finisher or the harnesses are
open circuited. Correct if any.
3. Replace the IPC board.
4. Replace the LGC board.
5. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 49

[ED10] Skew adjustment motor (M1) home position detection abnormality

MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is installed)
1. Check if there is any paper in the finisher or the on the transport path of the equipment. Remove
it if there is.
2. Rotate skew adjustment motor and fix its mechanism if it does not rotate smoothly.
3. Check if the connectors on the hole punch controller PC board (HP board) are disconnected from
the skew HP sensor (S2) and the skew adjustment motor, or the harnesses are open circuited.
Correct if any.
4. Replace the skew adjustment motor.
5. Replace the hole punch control PC board.

[ED11] Sideways adjustment motor (M2) home position detection error

MJ-1101 (when MJ-6101 is installed)
1. Check if there is any paper on the transport path and remove it if there is.
2. Rotate sideways adjustment motor and fix its mechanism if it does not rotate smoothly.
3. Check if the connectors on the hole punch controller PC board (HP board) are disconnected from
the sideways deviation HP sensor (S3)and the sideways adjustment motor, or the harnesses are
open circuited. Correct if any.
4. Replace the sideways adjustment motor.
5. Replace the hole punch control PC board.

[ED12] Shutter home position error

MJ-1101
1. Open and close the shutter. If there is any mechanical problem, fix its mechanism.
2. Check if the connectors on the finisher controller PC board are disconnected from the shutter
opening/closing sensor (S4) and the shutter clutch (CLT1), or the harnesses are open circuited.
Correct if any.
3. Replace the shutter clutch (CLT1).
4. Replace the shutter opening/closing sensor (S4).
5. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

[ED13] Front alignment plate home position error

MJ-1101
1. Move the front alignment plate. If there is any mechanical problem, fix its mechanism.
2. Check if the connectors on the finisher controller PC board are disconnected from the front
alignment plate home position sensor (S7) and the front alignment motor (M9), or the harnesses
are open circuited. Correct if any.
3. Replace the front alignment motor (M9).
4. Replace the front alignment plate home position sensor (S7).
5. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

[ED14] Rear alignment plate home position error

MJ-1101
1. Move the rear alignment plate. If there is any mechanical problem, fix its mechanism.
2. Check if the connectors on the finisher controller PC board are disconnected from the rear
alignment plate home position sensor (S8) and the rear alignment motor (M10), or the harnesses
are open circuited. Correct if any.
3. Replace the rear alignment motor (M10).
4. Replace the rear alignment plate home position sensor (S8).
5. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 50

[ED15] Paddle home position error

MJ-1101
1. Rotate the paddle. If there is any mechanical problem, fix its mechanism.
2. Check if the connectors on the finisher controller PC board are disconnected from the paddle
home position sensor (S3) and the paddle motor (M8), or the harnesses are open circuited.
Correct if any.
3. Replace the paddle motor (M8).
4. Replace the paddle home position sensor (S3).
5. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

[ED16] Buffer tray home position error

MJ-1101
1. Open and close the buffer tray guide. If there is any mechanical problem, fix its mechanism.
2. Check if the connectors on the finisher controller PC board are disconnected from the buffer tray
home position sensor (S5) and the buffer tray guide motor (M3), or the harnesses are open
circuited. Correct if any.
3. Replace the buffer tray guide motor (M3).
4. Replace the buffer tray home position sensor (S5).
5. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 51

6.2.12

Paper feeding system related service call

[C040] PFP motor abnormality

Is the PFP motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-109/159)
NO
1. Check if the signal line connector CN503 of the PFP motor is disconnected.
|
|
2. Check if the power line connector CN502 of the PFP motor is disconnected.
|
3. Check if the connector CN246 on the PFP board is disconnected.
|
4. Check if the signal line connector CN241 on the PFP board is
|
disconnected.
|
5. Check if the power line connector CN242 on the PFP board is
|
disconnected.
|
6.
Check if the connector CN349 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
7. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
8. Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP motor board, PFP board and
|
|
LGC board are short circuited or open circuited.
|
9. Replace the PFP motor.
|
10.Replace the PFP board.
|
11. Replace the LGC board.
|
YES
Is the LED on the PFP motor board lit without flashing?
NO
1. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
|
circuited.
|
2. Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP motor board, PFP board and
|
LGC board are short circuited or open circuited.
|
3. Replace the PFP motor.
|
4. Replace the PFP board.
|
5. Replace the LGC board.
|
YES
1. Check if the PLL lock signal CN246-8 pin output from the PFP board is always L level.
2. Check if the voltage supplied to the microcomputer input terminal IC5-17 pin is always L
level.
3. Replace the PFP board.
4. Replace the LGC board.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 52

[C130] 1st drawer tray abnormality

[C140] 2nd drawer tray abnormality
Does the tray go up? (Perform the output check: 03-242, 243)
NO
1. Check if the connector of the tray-up motor is disconnected.
|
|
2. Check if the connector CN348 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5.
Replace
the tray-up motor.
|
6. Replace the LGC board.
YES
Is the tray-up sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[4]/[B], /[4]/[A])
NO
1. Check if the connector of the sensor is disconnected.
|
|
2. Check if the connector CN348 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
3. Check if the slit reaches the sensor.
|
4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
5. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
6.
Replace
the tray-up sensor.
|
7.
Replace
the LGC board.
|
YES
1. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
2. Replace the LGC board.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 53

[C150] PFP upper drawer tray abnormality

[C160] PFP lower drawer tray abnormality
Does the tray go up? (Perform the output check: 03-278, 280)
NO
1. Check if the connector of the tray-up motor is disconnected.
|
|
2. Check if any of the connectors CN241, CN242 and CN244 on the PFP
|
board is disconnected.
|
3. Check if the connector CN349 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
5. Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short
|
circuited or open circuited.
|
6. Replace the tray-up motor.
|
7. Replace the PFP board.
|
8. Replace the LGC board.
|
YES
Is the tray-up sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[H], /[8]/[H])
NO
1. Check if the connector of the sensor is disconnected.
|
|
2. Check if any of the connectors CN241, CN247 and CN248 on the PFP
|
board is disconnected.
|
3. Check if the connector CN349 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
4. Check if the slit reaches the sensor.
|
5. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
6.
Check
if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short
|
circuited
or open circuited.
|
7.
Replace
the
tray-up sensor.
|
8.
Replace
the
PFP board.
|
|
9. Replace the LGC board.
YES
1. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
2. Replace the LGC board.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 54

[C180] LCF tray-up motor abnormality

Does the tray move? (Perform the output check: 03-271)
NO
1. Check if the connector of the LCF tray-up motor is disconnected.
|
|
2. Check if any of the connectors CN100, CN101 and CN103 on the LCF
|
board is disconnected.
|
3. Check if the connector CN349 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
5. Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short
|
circuited or open circuited.
|
6. Replace the LCF tray-up motor.
|
7. Replace the LCF board.
|
8. Replace the LGC board.
|
YES
Are the LCF tray-up sensor and LCF tray bottom sensor working?
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[0]/[F], /[9]/[A])
NO
1. Check if the connectors of the sensors are disconnected.
|
|
2. Check if any of the connectors CN100, CN104 and CN105 on the LCF
|
board is disconnected.
|
3. Check if the connector CN349 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
4. Check if the slit reaches the sensors.
|
5. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
6.
Check
if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short
|
circuited
or open circuited.
|
7.
Replace
the
sensor.
|
8.
Replace
the
LCF board.
|
|
9. Replace the LGC board.
YES
1. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
2. Replace the LGC board.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 55

[C1A0] LCF end fence motor abnormality

Is the LCF end fence motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-207)
NO
1. Check if the connector of the LCF end fence motor is disconnected.
|
|
2. Check if any of the connectors CN100, CN101 and CN103 on the LCF
|
board is disconnected.
|
3. Check if the connector CN349 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
5. Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short
|
circuited or open circuited.
|
6. Replace the LCF end fence motor.
|
7. Replace the LCF board.
|
8. Replace the LGC board.
|
YES
Are the LCF end fence home/stop position sensors working?
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[0]/[A], /[0]/[B])
NO
1. Check if the connectors of the sensors are disconnected.
|
|
2. Check if either of the connectors CN100 or CN107 on the LCF board is
|
disconnected.
|
3. Check if the connector CN349 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
4. Check if the slit reaches the sensors.
|
5. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
6.
Check
if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short
|
circuited
or open circuited.
|
7.
Replace
the
sensors.
|
8.
Replace
the
LCF board.
|
|
9. Replace the LGC board.
YES
1. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
2. Replace the LGC board.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 56

[C1B0] LCF transport motor abnormality

Is the LCF transport motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-122/172)
NO
1. Check if the connector CN112 of the LCF transport motor is disconnected.
|
|
2. Check if the connector CN102 on the LCF board is disconnected.
|
3. Check if the signal line connector CN100 on the LCF board is
|
disconnected.
|
4. Check if the power line connector CN101 on the LCF board is
|
disconnected.
|
5. Check if the connector CN349 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
6. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
7. Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF transport motor board, LCF
|
board and LGC board are short circuited or open circuited.
|
|
8. Replace the LCF transport motor.
|
9. Replace the LCF board.
|
10.Replace the LGC board.
|

6
YES
1. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open circuited.
2. Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF transport motor board, LCF board and LGC
board are short circuited or open circuited.
3. Check if the PLL lock signal CN102-3 pin output from the LCF board is always L level.
4. Check if the voltage supplied to the microcomputer input terminal IC103-17 pin is always
L level.
5. Replace the LCF transport motor.
6. Replace the LCF board.
7. Replace the LGC board.

6.2.13

Scanning system related service call

[C260] Peak detection error

Does the exposure lamp light? (Perform the output check: 03-267)
YES
1. Check if the connectors on the CCD and SLG boards are disconnected.
|
|
2. Check if the shading correction plate is dirty.
|
3. Check if the conductor pattern on the CCD board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
4. Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5.
Replace
the lens unit.
|
6.
Replace
the SLG board.
|
NO
1. Check if the connectors of the exposure lamp and inverter are disconnected.
2. Check the SLG board if the connector pin CN21 is disconnected or the harness is short
circuited or open circuited.
3. Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open circuited.
4. Replace the SLG board.
5. Replace the inverter.
6. Replace the exposure lamp.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 57

[C270] Carriage home position sensor not going OFF within a specified time / Downloading
firmware with an incorrect model
Remove the original glass and move the carriages to the paper feeding side. Turn ON the power and
check the following items.
Are the carriages slightly moved to the feeding direction?/Are the carriages staying at a
position other than home position?
YES
Check if the circuits of the SLG board are abnormal.
NO
1. Check if the connector pin is disconnected or the harness is short circuited or open
circuited.
2. Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open circuited.
3. Replace the SLG board.
4. If the model of the firmware downloaded is incorrect, a C270 error (exposure lamp blinks
twice) occurs.
If the exposure lamp blinks twice, download the correct ROM.

[C280] Carriage home position sensor not going ON within a specified time
Remove the original glass and move the carriages to the paper feeding side. Turn ON the power and
check the following items.
Do the carriages make a big noise after they arrive at the home position?
YES
The carriage home position sensor is not turned ON.
|
|
1. Check if the connector of the sensor is disconnected.
|
2. Check if the circuits of the SLG board are abnormal.
NO
The carriages are stopped at the home position and do not move.
1. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are short circuited or open
circuited.
2. Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open circuited.
3. Replace the SLG board.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 58

6.2.14

Fuser unit related service call

Note:
Be sure to turn OFF the power and unplug the power cable beforehand when checking the power supply
unit and fuser unit.
The fuser unit itself or the part of the unit remains heated and the capacitors are still charged after a while
the power cable is unplugged. So make sure the unit is cooled down enough before checking.

[C411/C412] Thermistor/heater lamp abnormality at power-ON

1.Check the power voltage
(1)

Check if the power voltage is normal.(Is the voltage during the operation 10% of the rated
voltage?)

2.Check the thermopiles

(1)
(2)

Check if the fuser belt center and side thermopiles (front, rear) are installed properly.
Check if the harnesses of the fuser belt center and side thermopiles (front, rear) are open
circuited.

3. Check the power supply unit and fuser unit

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)

Is the fuser unit installed correctly?

Check if the heater lamp is broken.
Check if the connector of the heater lamp is disconnected.
Check if the thermostat is blown.
Check if the connectors of the power supply unit are disconnected (power supply unit AC output
connector CN408, CN409 and LGC I/F connector CN404 CN405).
Check if the power supply unit is abnormal.
Replace the power supply unit.

4. Check the LGC board

(1)
(2)
(3)

Check if the connectors CN333, CN345 and CN361 are disconnected.

Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
Replace the LGC board.

5. Clear the status counter

After repairing the matter which caused the error [C411/C412], perform the following:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

Turn ON the power while [0] and [8] are pressed simultaneously.
Key in 400, then press [START].
Change the current status counter value 1 or 2 to 0, then press [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT]
(to cancel [C411/C412]).
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Make sure that the equipment enters the normal ready
state.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 59

[C443/C445/C446/C447/C449] Heater lamp abnormality after abnormality judgment

1,2,3,4. Check the thermopiles, Heater and LGC board
Check the above components following the procedures 1, 2,3 and 4 for [C411/C412].
5. Clear the status counter
Change the current status counter value (08-400) 3, 5, 6, 9, 19, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 27,
32 or 29 to 0 for [C44X], taking the same procedure as that for [C41X].
The status counter value is as follows in the following cases.
- The error occurred during warming-up: 3, 5 or 6
- The error occurred after the equipment has become ready: 7
- The temperature detected by the fuser belt center thermopile is 220C or higher, the
temperature detected by the side thermopile is 230C or higher or the temperature detected
by the front thermopile is 250C or higher: 9, 19, 21, 22, 23, 25, 27 or 29.
- The error occurred during printing: 24 or 25
- The error occurred during energy saving: 27
- A paper jam occurred: 29
[C448] Heater lamp lights continuously for a certain period of time when the pressure roller
temperature during ready status is higher than the specified
1. Check the power supply and fuser unit
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

Check if the fuser unit is installed properly.

Check if foreign matter or paper in the fuser unit is plugging up the monitoring opening of the
fuser belt thermopile.
Check if the opening of the fuser belt thermopile of the equipment is plugged up.
Check if the connectors of the power supply are disconnected (power supply unit AC output
connector CN409 and LGC Interface connector CN403).
Check if the power supply unit is abnormal.
* Replace the power supply unit.

2. Check the LGC board

(1)
(2)
(3)

Check if the connector CN333 is disconnected.

Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
Replace the LGC board.

3. Clear the status counter

After repairing the matter which caused the error [C448], perform the following:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

Turn the power ON while [0] and [8] are pressed simultaneously.
Key in 400, then press the [START] button.
Change the displayed current status counter value 32 to 0, then press [ENTER] or
[INTERRUPT] (to cancel C448).
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Make sure that the equipment enters the normal status.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 60

[C450] Abnormal temperature difference between the center thermopile and the edge thermistor (Not
determined)
[C451] Abnormal temperature difference between the center thermopile and the edge thermistor
(Determined)
[C452] Abnormal thermopile temperature difference
1. Check the power supply unit and fuser unit
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)

Check if the fuser unit is installed properly.

Check if foreign matter or paper in the fuser unit is plugging up the monitoring opening of the
thermopile.
Check if the heater lamp is open circuited.
Check if the connector of the heater lamp is disconnected.
Check if the thermistor is open circuited.
Check if the connectors of the power supply unit (power supply unit AC output connector CN408,
CN409 and LGC/IF connector CN404) are disconnected.
Check if the power supply unit is broken.
* Replace it if it is broken.

2. Check the thermopile

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

Check if foreign matter is plugging up the thermopile.

Check if the thermopile is installed properly.
Check if the harnesses are open circuited.
Replace the thermopile.

3. Check the LGC board

(1)
(2)
(3)

Check if the connectors CN333, CN345 and CN361 are disconnected.

Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
Replace the LGC board.

4. Reset the status counter

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

Turn the power ON while [0] and [8] are pressed simultaneously.
Key in "400", and then press the [START] button.
Reset the displayed current status counter value "38", "39", "48" or "49" to "0", then press
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT]. (The error C450, C451 or C452 is cleared.)
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Then check that the equipment normally enters into the
standby mode.

[C465/C466/C467/C468] Pressure roller thermistor abnormality after entering ready status

1. Check the pressure roller thermistor
(1)
(2)
(3)

Check if the connector is disconnected.

Check if the pressure roller center/rear thermistor is installed properly.
Check if the harnesses of the pressure roller center and rear thermistors are open circuited.

2. Check the power supply unit and fuser unit

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

Check if the fuser unit is installed properly.

Check if the pressure roller lamp is open circuited. (Check if the pressure roller lamp has electric
continuity.)
Check if the connector of the pressure roller lamp is disconnected.
Check if the thermistor is open circuited.
Check if the connectors of the power supply (power supply AC output connector CN409, LGCI/F
connector CN403) are disconnected.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 61

(6)

Check if the power supply unit is broken.

* Replace the power supply unit if it is broken.

3. Check the LGC board

(1)
(2)
(3)

Check if the connector CN333/CN345 is disconnected.

Check if the conductor pattern on the board is short circuited or open circuited.
Replace the LGC board.

4. Clear the status counter

Change the current status counter value (08-400) 5, 6, 8, 18, 20, 26, 28, 33 or 34 to 0
* The status counter value is set as follows in the following cases.
The error occurred during warming-up: 5 or 6
The error occurred after the equipment has become ready: 33
Regardless of the equipments status (i.e. during warming-up or in ready status), when the
temperature detected by the pressure roller thermistor is 210C or higher: 8, 18, 20, 26 or
28.
The error occurred during printing: 34

[C4B0] IGBT overheating abnormality

1. Check the LGC board
(1)
(2)
(3)

Check if the conductor pattern on the board is short circuited or open circuited.
Check if SRAM is mounted.
Replace the LGC board.

2. Clear the status counter

Change the values 30 or above, or 4 of the status counter (08-400) to 0.

[C4B1] Fuser unit destination selection abnormality

(1) Check if the fuser unit is installed correctly or if its destination is correct.
(2) Check if any harness in the fuser unit is caught.
(3) Check if the destination of the SRAM is correct.
(4) Replace the LGC board if any harness of the LGC board is open or short circuited.
* The first occurrence of the error C4B1 is not the determination of the error.
When the error C4B1 occurred, turn the power of the equipment OFF and then back ON following
the instruction shown in the touch panel. If the abnormality is resolved, the value of the fuser unit
status counter is automatically reset to 0. When the error C4B1 occurred twice or more
consecutively, the error is determined and recorded in the error history.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 62

[C4D0] Fuser belt thermopile abnormality

1. Check the thermopile
(1)
(2)
(3)

Check if the connector of the thermopile is disconnected.

Check if the harnesses of the fuser belt center thermopile and the fuser belt side thermopile are
open circuited.
Replace the thermopile.

2. Check the LGC board

(1)
(2)
(3)

Check if the connector CN333 is disconnected.

Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is open circuited or short circuited.
Replace the LGC board.

3. Cancel the service call

After repairing the matter which caused the error [C4D0], turn the power OFF and then back ON to
cancel the service call. However, the counter value will be stored until it is written over by the value of
the other service call.

6.2.15

Communication related service call

[C550] RADF I/F error

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

Check if the harness connecting the RADF board and SLG board is disconnected or open
circuited.
Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open circuited.
Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open circuited.
Replace the RADF board.
Replace the SLG board.

[C570] Communication error between Engine-CPU and IPC board

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

Check if the LGC board and IPC board are connected properly.
Check if the conductor pattern on the IPC board is short circuited or open circuited.
Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
Replace the IPC board.
Replace the LGC board.

[C580] Communication error between IPC board and finisher

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)

Confirm the setting of 08 Code 1912.

Check if the specified finisher is attached.
Check if the harness connecting the IPC board and the finisher controller PC board is
disconnected or open circuited.
Check if the conductor pattern on the IPC board is short circuited or open circuited.
Check if the conductor pattern on the finisher controller PC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
Replace the IPC board.
Replace the finisher controller PC board.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 63

[F070] Communication error between System-CPU and Engine-CPU

(1)
(2)
(3)

Check the version of the system ROM on the SYS board.

Check the version of the engine ROM on the LGC board.
Check if the connector CN423 on the IMG board and the connector CN354 on the LGC board
are completely inserted.
(4) Check if the connector pin between the IMG board (connector CN423) and the LGC board
(connector CN354) is disconnected.
(5) Check if the connector CN422 on the IMG board and the connector CN135 on the SYS board are
completely inserted.
(6) Check if the connector pin between the IMG board (connector CN422) and the SYS board
(connector CN135) is disconnected.
(7) Check if the conductor patterns on the IMG board, LGC board and SYS board are short circuited
or open circuited.
(8) Replace the LGC board if no problem is found in steps from (1) to (7) above.
(9) If the problem is not corrected with the replacement of the LGC board, reinstall the removed LGC
board and replace the SYS board.
(10) If the problem is still not corrected with the replacement of the SYS board, reinstall the removed
SYS board and replace the IMG board.

[F110] Communication error between System-CPU and Scanner-CPU

[F111] Scanner response abnormality
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

Check if the harness connecting the IMG board and SLG board is disconnected or open
circuited.
Check the version of the system ROM on the SYS board.
Check the version of the scanner ROM version on the SLG board.
Replace the SYS board.
Replace the SLG board.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 64

6.2.16

RADF related service call

No service call for the RADF (MR-3018).

6.2.17

Circuit related service call

[C5A0] SRAM board not connected (LGC board)

[C5A1] SRAM board data abnormality (LGC board)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

Check if the SRAM board is installed securely.

Check if the SRAM board is short circuited or open circuited.
Check if the battery on the SRAM board has not run out.
Replace the SRAM board.
Replace the LGC board.

6
[C900] Connection error between the SYS board and the LGC board
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)

Check if the connector CN423 on the IMG board and the connector CN354 on the LGC board
are completely inserted.
Check if the connector pin between the IMG board (connector CN423) and the LGC board
(connector CN354) is disconnected.
Check if the connector CN422 on the IMG board and the connector CN135 on the SYS board are
completely inserted.
Check if the connector pin between the IMG board (connector CN422) and the SYS board
(connector CN135) is disconnected.
Check if the conductor patterns on the IMG board, LGC board and SYS board are short circuited
or open circuited.
Replace the LGC board if no problem is found in steps from (1) to (5) above.
If the problem is not corrected with the replacement of the LGC board, reinstall the removed LGC
board and replace the IMG board.
If the problem is still not corrected with the replacement of the IMG board, reinstall the removed
IMG board and replace the SYS board.

[C940] Engine-CPU abnormality

Does service call still occur even after turning OFF the main switch then back ON?
NO
Leave it for a while and see how.
YES
1. Check if the conductor pattern between the Engine-CPU and FROM, SRAM is short
circuited or open circuited.
2. Replace the LGC board if it frequently occurs.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 65

[C962] LGC board ID abnormality

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)

Check if the connector CN344 on the LGC board is completely inserted or not disconnected.
Check if the connector CN423 on the IMG board and the connector CN354 on the LGC board
are completely inserted.
Check if the connector pin between the IMG board (connector CN423) and the LGC board
(connector CN354) is disconnected.
Check if the connector CN425 on the IMG board is completely inserted or not disconnected.
Check if the conductor patterns on the IMG board and the LGC board are short circuited or open
circuited.
Replace the LGC board if no problem is found in steps from (1) to (5) above.
If the problem is not corrected with the replacement of the LGC board, reinstall the removed LGC
board and replace the IMG board.
If the problem is still not corrected with the replacement of the IMG board, reinstall it and ask a
specialist to repair it. (Abnormal ID)

[C9E0] Connection error between the SLG board and the SYS board
(1)
(2)
(3)

(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)

Check if the connector CN12 on the SLG board is completely inserted or not disconnected.
Check if the connector CN421 on the IMG board is completely inserted or not disconnected.
Check if the connector pin between the SLG board (connector CN12) and the IMG board
(connector CN421) is disconnected, or the harness connecting these boards is short circuited or
open circuited.
Check if the connector CN422 on the IMG board and the connector CN135 on the SYS board are
completely inserted.
Check if the connector pin between the IMG board (connector CN422) and the SYS board
(connector CN135) is disconnected.
Check if the conductor patterns on the SLG board, IMG board and SYS board are short circuited
or open circuited.
Replace the SLG board if no problem is found in steps from (1) to (6) above.
If the problem is not corrected with the replacement of the SLG board, reinstall the removed SLG
board and replace the IMG board.
If the problem is still not corrected with the replacement of the IMG board, reinstall the removed
IMG board and replace the SYS board.

[F090] SRAM abnormality on the SYS board

(1)
(2)

Turn the power OFF and start up the Setting Mode (08).
When SRAM ERROR DOES IT INITIALIZE is displayed on the LCD, check the destination and
then press the [START] button. If the destination is not correct, key in the correct one and then
press the [START] button. (SRAM is initialized.)
(3) After the confirmation message is displayed, press the [INTERRUPT] button.
(4) Perform the panel calibration (08-692).
(5) Enter the serial number (08-995). Match it with the serial number on the label attached to the rear
cover of the equipment.
(6) Initialize the NIC information (08-693).
(7) Turn the power OFF and then start up with the Adjustment mode (05).
(8) Perform Data transfer of characteristic value of scanner (05-364).
(9) Perform Automatic gamma adjustment <PPC> (05-1642). (using [4][FAX] test pattern)
(10) Perform Automatic gamma adjustment <PRT> (05-1008). (using [70][FAX] test pattern)
(11) Turn the power OFF and then back ON. If the error is not recovered, replace the SRAM on the
SYS board.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 66

[F350] SLG board abnormality

(1)
(2)

(3)

Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open circuited.
If there is no problem found in the check (1) above, check the combination of the firmware
version of the system ROM, engine ROM and scanner ROM. Reinstall the scanner ROM
firmware.
If an error occurs after step (2) above has been performed, replace the SLG board.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 67

6.2.18

Laser optical unit related service call

[CA10] Polygonal motor abnormality

Is the polygonal motor rotating?
NO
<e-STUDIO2020C/2330C//2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C>
|
|
1. Check if the connector of the polygonal motor is disconnected.
|
2. Check if the relay connector J506 is disconnected.
|
3. Check if the connector CN343 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5. Replace the LGC board.
|
6. Replace the laser optical unit.
|
<e-STUDIO4520C>
|
1. Check if the connector on the POL board is disconnected.
|
2. Check if the connectors on the both edges of the HRNS-POL-DRV-382 are
|
disconnected.
|
|
3. Check if the relay connector J506 is disconnected.
|
4. Check if the connector CN343 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
5. Check if the conductor pattern on the POL board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
6. Replace the POL board.
|
7. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
8. Replace the LGC board.
|
9. Replace the laser optical unit.
|
YES
Is the printed image distorted?
YES
<e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C>
|
1. Check if the connector CN343 on the LGC board is almost disconnected.
|
|
2. Check if the relay connector J506 is almost disconnected.
|
3. Check if the harness is almost open circuited or the connector pin is almost
|
disconnected.
|
4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5. Check if the laser unit cooling fan is stopped.
|
6. Check if the suction area of the laser unit cooling fan is plugged up.
|
7. Replace the laser optical unit.
|
8. Replace the LGC board.
|
<e-STUDIO4520C>
|
1. Check if the connector CN343 on the LGC board is almost disconnected.
|
|
2. Check if the relay connector J506 is almost disconnected.
|
3. Check if the connectors on the both edges of the HRNS-POL-DRV-382 are
|
almost disconnected.
|
4. Check if the harness is almost open circuited or the connector pin is almost
|
disconnected.
|
5. Check if the conductor pattern on the POL board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
6. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
7. Check if the laser unit cooling fan is stopped.
|
8. Check if the suction area of the laser unit cooling fan is plugged up.
|
|
9. Replace the laser optical unit.
10.Replace the LGC board.
NO

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 68

1. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
2. Check if the units with high-voltage (developer unit, transfer belt unit, 2nd transfer roller
unit) are securely grounded.
3. Check if the bias supply joints of the units with high-voltage are securely connected or they
are not stained.
4. Check if the plate in the paper transport system is securely grounded.
5. Check if the equipment is grounded.
6. Check if the laser unit cooling fan is stopped.
7. Check if the suction area of the laser unit cooling fan is plugged up.
8. Replace the laser optical unit.
9. Replace the LGC board.

[CA20] H-sync detection error

Is the harness between the LGC board (CN356) and the LDR board open circuited, broken or
disconnected?
Are the relay connectors (J505) disconnected or almost disconnected? (Are they locked with
the latches?)
Is the harness between the LGC board (CN355) and the SNS board open circuited, broken or
disconnected?
Are the relay connector (J503) disconnected or almost disconnected? (Are they locked with the
latches?)
YES
1. Reconnect the harness.
|
|
2. Replace the laser optical unit.
3. Replace the LGC board.
NO
Is the pin CN405-4 on the power supply unit +5V?
NO
1. Check if there is any abnormality in the harness (e.g.: if it is caught)
|
|
between the power supply unit and the LGC board.
2. Replace the power supply unit.
YES
Is the pin CN361-4 on the LGC board +5V?
NO
1. Check if the harness between the power supply unit and the LGC board is
|
|
open circuited, broken or disconnected.
2. Replace the LGC board.
YES
1. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
2. Check if the units with high-voltage (developer unit, transfer belt unit, 2nd transfer roller
unit) are securely grounded.
3. Check if the bias supply joints of the units with high-voltage are securely connected or they
are not stained.
4. Check if the plate in the paper transport system is securely grounded.
5. Check if the equipment is grounded.
6. Check if the laser unit cooling fan is stopped.
7. Check if the suction area of the laser unit cooling fan is plugged up.
8. Replace the laser optical unit.
9. Replace the LGC board.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 69

[CF90] Laser optical unit shutter abnormality

Take off the developer unit so that the laser shutter can be seen.
Clean around the laser shutter if the toner or developer material is spilled over.
Is there any abnormality such as warp on the main charger cleaner rod?
|
YES
Replace the main charger cleaner rod.
NO
Does the harness of EPU (Auto toner sensor) contact with the shutter?
|
YES
Correct the wiring.
NO
Is the shutter motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-417)
NO
1. Check if the connector of the exit shutter motor is disconnected.
|
|
2. Check if the connector CN359 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5. Replace the shutter motor.
|
6. Replace the LGC board.
YES
Is the laser shutter working?
NO
1. Check and correct the mechanism of the laser shutter.
|
|
2. Check if the shutter plate is assembled correctly.
YES
Is the shutter motor assembled correctly?
NO
1. Check if the positioning of the gear and the rack is correct.
|
|
2. Check if the distance between the gear and the rack is proper.
|
3. Check if the worm gear and the drive gear are engaging properly.
|
4. Check if grease is applied to the worm gear and the drive gear.
YES
Is the laser shutter able to be opened/closed repeatedly?
NO
1. Check if the connector of the shutter status detection sensor (S20) is
|
|
disconnected.
|
2. Check if the connector CN359 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5.
Replace
the shutter status detection sensor.
|
6. Replace the LGC board.
YES
Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
Replace the LGC board.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 70

6.2.19

Finisher related service call

[CB00] Finisher not connected

MJ-1101
1. Check if the MJ-1101 is set as the specified finisher on the equipment.
2. Check if the harness connecting the converter PC board and the finisher controller PC
board is disconnected or open circuited.
3. Check if the conductor pattern on the converter PC board is open circuited or short
circuited.
4. Check if the conductor pattern on the finisher controller PC board is open circuited or short
circuited.
5. Replace the converter PC board.
6. Replace the finisher control PC board.

[CB01] Finisher communication error

MJ-1101
1. Check if the MJ-1101 is set as the specified finisher on the equipment.
2. Check if the harness connecting the converter PC board and the finisher controller PC
board is disconnected or open circuited.
3. Check if the conductor pattern on the converter PC board is open circuited or short
circuited.
4. Check if the conductor pattern on the finisher controller PC board is open circuited or short
circuited.
5. Replace the converter PC board.
6. Replace the finisher control PC board.

[CB10] Entrance motor abnormality

MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the entrance roller is rotated?
YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
Is the harness between the entrance motor (M1) and the finisher control PC board (CN7)
disconnected or open circuited?
l
YES Reconnect the connector securely.
Replace the harness.
NO
1. Replace the entrance motor (M1).
2. Replace the finisher control PC board.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 71

[CB11] Buffer tray guide motor abnormality

* You receive a [CB11] error when the [ED16] error occurs three times in succession.
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the buffer tray guide is opened/closed while the buffer
roller is lifted up?
YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
Is the harness between the buffer tray guide motor (M3) and the finisher control PC board
(CN18) disconnected or open circuited?
l
YES Reconnect the connector securely.
Replace the harness.
NO
1. Replace the buffer tray guide motor (M3).
2. Replace the finisher control PC board.

[CB12] Buffer roller drive motor abnormality

MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the buffer roller is rotated?
YES Fix the drive mechanism.
NO
Is the harness between the buffer roller drive motor (M6) and the finisher control PC board
(CN18) disconnected or open circuited?
l
YES Reconnect the connector securely.
Replace the harness.
NO
1. Replace the buffer roller drive motor (M6).
2. Replace the finisher control PC board.

[CB30] Tray 1/2 shift motor abnormality

MJ-1030
Are the tray 1 shift area sensors 1-3 and tray 2 shift area sensors 1-3 normal?
NO
Replace the tray 1/2 shift area sensor boards.
YES
Are the wirings between the finisher controller PC board and the tray 1/2 shift motors (M37/
M38) correct?
NO
Correct the wirings.
YES
Is there any problem with the tray lift mechanism?
NO
Fix the lift mechanism.
YES
1. Replace the tray 1/2 shift motors.
2. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 72

[CB30] Movable tray shift motor abnormality

MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the movable tray is moved?
YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
Is the harness between the movable tray shift motor (M7) and the finisher control PC board
(CN8) disconnected or open circuited?
l
YES Reconnect the connector securely.
Replace the harness.
NO
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the movable tray
position A, B, and C sensors (S13, S14, and S15)?
l
YES Replace the harness.
Reinstall the sensor correctly.
Replace the sensor.
NO
1. Replace the movable tray shift motor (M7).
2. Replace the finisher control PC board.

[CB31] Movable tray paper-full detection error

MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the actuator of the movable tray paper-full sensor
(S16) is moved?
YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the movable tray
paper-full sensor (S16)?
YES Connect the connector securely.
l
l
Reinstall the sensor correctly.
Replace the sensor.
NO
Is the harness between the movable tray paper-full sensor (S16) and the finisher control PC
board (CN13) disconnected or open circuited?
l
YES Reconnect the connector securely.
Replace the harness.
NO
Replace the finisher control PC board.

[CB40] Rear aligning plate motor abnormality

MJ-1030
Is the rear aligning plate home position sensor (PI37) normal?
NO
Correct the wiring.
YES
Is there any mechanical problem with the path of aligning plate?
NO
Fix the mechanism.
YES
1. Replace the rear aligning plate motor.
2. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 73

[CB40] Front alignment motor abnormality

* You receive a [CB40] error when the [ED13] error occurs three times in succession.
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the front alignment plate is moved?
YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
Is the harness between the front alignment motor (M9) and the finisher control PC board
(CN10) disconnected or open circuited?
l
YES Reconnect the connector securely.
Replace the harness.
NO
Replace the front alignment motor (M9).

[CB50] Staple motor abnormality

MJ-1030
Is the wiring between the stapler and finisher controller PC board correct?
NO
Correct the wiring.
YES
1. Replace the stapler.
2. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
[CB50] Staple unit abnormality
MJ-1031
1. Check if the connectors J112, J113 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from
the stapler) or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
2. Replace the staple unit.
3. Replace the finisher control PC board.

[CB50] Stapler home position error

* You receive a [CB50] error when the [EA50] error occurs three times in succession.
MJ-1101
Is the harness between the stapler and the finisher control PC board (CN2) disconnected or
open circuited?
l
YES Reconnect the connector securely.
Replace the harness.
NO
Are the harnesses in the stapler disconnected or open circuited?
l
YES Reconnect the connector securely.
Replace the harness.
NO
Replace the finisher control PC board.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 74

[CB51] Stapler shift home position error

MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the stapler is moved?
YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the stapler unit
home position sensor (S10)?
YES Connect the connector securely.
l
l
Reinstall the sensor correctly.
Replace the sensor.
NO
Is the harness between the stapler unit home position sensor (S10) and the finisher control PC
board (CN1) disconnected or open circuited?
l
YES Reconnect the connector securely.
Replace the harness.
NO
Is the harness between the stapler unit shift motor (M4) and the finisher control PC board
(CN5) disconnected or open circuited?
l
YES Reconnect the connector securely.
Replace the harness.
NO
Replace the finisher control PC board.

[CB60] Stapler unit shift motor abnormality

MJ-1030
Is the stapler shift home position sensor (PI40) working normally?
NO
Replace the sensor.
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the stapler shift motor (M35)
correct?
NO
Correct the wiring.
YES
Is there any mechanical problem with the stapler stand motion path?
YES
Fix the lift mechanism.
NO
1. Replace the stapler shift motor.
2. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the stapler is moved?
YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
Is the harness between the stapler unit shift motor (M4) and the finisher control PC board
(CN5) disconnected or open circuited?
l
YES Reconnect the connector securely.
Replace the harness.
NO
1. Replace the stapler unit shift motor (M4).
2. Replace the finisher control PC board.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 75

[CB70] Paper loading amount detection sensor abnormality

MJ-1030
1. Check if there is any abnormality with the mechanical section (sensor's actuator, etc.).
2. Check if the harness connecting the area sensor and the finisher controller PC board is
disconnected or open circuited.
3. Replace the area sensor.
4. Replace the finisher control PC board.
[CB80] Backup RAM data abnormality
MJ-1030
Is the problem solved by turning the power of the equipment OFF and ON?
YES
End.
NO
1. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
2. Replace the punch controller PC board.

[CB80] Backup RAM data abnormality

MJ-1031
Is the problem solved by turning the power of the equipment OFF and ON?
YES
End.
NO
Replace the finisher controller PC board.

[CB80] RAM abnormality

MJ-1101
Is the error recovered when the power of the equipment is turned OFF and then back ON?
YES End.
NO
Replace the finisher control PC board.

[CB81] Flash ROM abnormality

MJ-1101
Is the error recovered when the power of the equipment is turned OFF and then back ON?
YES End.
NO
1. Check if the conductor pattern on the finisher controller PC board is open circuited or short
circuited.
2. Replace the finisher control PC board.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 76

[CB90] Paper pushing plate motor abnormality

MJ-1030
Are the paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI14), paper pushing plate top position
sensor (PI15) and paper pushing plate motor clock sensor (PI1) working normally?
NO
Replace the sensor.
YES
Is the paper pushing plate drive mechanism normal?
NO
Fix the mechanism.
YES
1. Replace the paper pushing plate motor (M8).
2. Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.

[CBA0] Stitch motor (front) abnormality

[CBB0] Stitch motor (rear) abnormality
MJ-1030
Are the front and rear stitchers and their stands installed properly?
NO
Install them properly.
YES
Are the stitcher home position switches (SW7/SW5) and stitcher motors (M7/M6) on the front
and rear stitchers working normally?
NO
Replace the front or rear stitcher.
YES
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.

[CBC0] Alignment motor abnormality

MJ-1030
Is the alignment plate home position sensor (PI5) working normally?
NO
Replace the sensor.
YES
Is the alignment plate drive mechanism normal?
NO
Fix the mechanism.
YES
1. Replace the alignment motor (M5).
2. Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.

[CBD0] Guide motor abnormality

MJ-1030
Is the guide home position sensor (PI13) working normally?
NO
Replace the sensor.
YES
Is the guide plate drive mechanism normal?
NO
Fix the mechanism.
YES
1. Replacing the guide motor (M3).
2. Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 77

[CBE0] Paper folding motor abnormality

MJ-1030
Are the paper folding motor clock sensor (PI4) and paper folding home position sensor (PI21)
working normally?
NO
Replace the sensors.
YES
Is the paper folding roller drive mechanism normal?
NO
Fix the mechanism.
YES
1. Replacing the paper folding motor (M2).
2. Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.

[CBF0] Paper positioning plate motor abnormality

MJ-1030
Is the paper positioning plate home position sensor (PI7) working normally?
NO
Replace the sensor.
YES
Is the paper positioning plate drive mechanism normal?
NO
Fix the mechanism.
YES
1. Replacing the paper positioning plate motor (M4).
2. Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.

[CC00] Sensor connector abnormality

MJ-1030
Are the guide home position sensor (PI13), paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI14)
and paper pushing plate top position sensor (PI15) connected to the saddle stitcher controller
PC board?
NO
Connect them to the board.
YES
Is the wiring between the sensors and the saddle stitcher correct?
NO
Correct the wiring.
Is 5V DC being supplied from the connector pins J9-7, -10 and -13 on the saddle stitcher
controller PC board?
NO
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
YES
Are the connector pins J9-8, -11 and -14 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board correctly
connected to the ground?
NO
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
YES
End.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 78

[CC10] Microswitch abnormality

MJ-1030
Are the front cover switch (MS31), inlet door switch (SW1) and delivery door switch (SW3)
normal?
NO
Replace the switches.
YES
Measure the voltage between J704-1 (+) and J704-2 (-) on the finisher controller PC board. Is
it 24V?
NO
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
Is the wiring between J704 on the finisher controller PC board and J1 on the saddle stitcher
controller PC board correct?
NO
Correct the wiring.
YES
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.

[CC20] Communication error between finisher and saddle stitcher

MJ-1030
Is the problem solved by turning OFF and ON the power switch of the equipment?
YES
End.
NO
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the saddle stitcher controller PC
board connected?
NO
Connect the wiring.
YES
1. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
2. Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.

[CC30] Stack transport motor abnormality

* You receive a [CC30] error when the [EA70] error occurs three times in succession.
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the stack transport belt is moved?
YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
Is the harness between the stack transport motor (M5) and the finisher control PC board
(CN10) disconnected or open circuited?
l
YES Reconnect the connector securely.
Replace the harness.
NO
1. Replace the stack transport motor (M5).
2. Replace the finisher control PC board.

[CC30] Stack delivery motor abnormality

MJ-1031
1. Check if the connector J111 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the
stack edging HP sensor (SR8) or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
2. Check if the connector J111 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the
stack slide motor (M4) or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
3. Replace the stack edging HP sensor.
4. Replace the stack slide motor.
5. Replace the finisher control PC board.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 79

[CC31] Transport motor abnormality

* You receive a [CC31] error when the [ED12] error occurs three times in succession.
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the stack transport roller -1 and -2 are rotated?
YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
Is the harness between the transport motor (M2) and the finisher control PC board (CN5)
disconnected or open circuited?
l
YES Reconnect the connector securely.
Replace the harness.
NO
1. Replace the transport motor (M2).
2. Replace the finisher control PC board.

[CC40] Swing motor abnormality

MJ-1030
Is the swing unit home position sensor (PI35) normal?
NO
Replace the sensor.
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the swing motor (M36) correct?
NO
Correct the wiring.
YES
Is the swing mechanism normal?
NO
Fix the mechanism.
YES
1. Replace the swing motor.
2. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

[CC41] Paper holder cam home position abnormality

MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the paper holder cam is rotated?
YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
Is the harness between the paper holder home position sensor (S6) and the finisher control PC
board (CN17) disconnected or open circuited?
l
YES Reconnect the connector securely.
Replace the harness.
NO
1. Replace the paper holder home position sensor (S6).
2. Replace the finisher control PC board.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 80

[CC50] Horizontal registration motor abnormality

MJ-1030 (when MJ-6004 is installed)
Is the horizontal registration home position sensor (PI61) working normally?
NO
Replace the sensor.
YES
Is the wiring between the horizontal registration home position sensor and finisher controller
PC board correct?
NO
Correct the wiring.
YES
Is the horizontal registration mechanism normal?
NO
Fix the mechanism.
YES
1. Replace the horizontal registration motor (M62).
2. Replace the punch controller PC board.
3. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

6
[CC51] Sideways adjustment motor (M2) abnormality
* The [CC51] error will be displays when the [ED11] error occurs three times in succession or
during the initial operation.
MJ-1101 (When MJ-6101 is installed)
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path?
YES Remove the paper.
NO
Rotate the sideways adjustment motor (M2). Does it rotate smoothly?
NO
Fix the mechanism.
YES
Are the sideways deviation home position sensor (S3) and its wiring correct?
NO
Replace the sensor. Correct the wiring.
YES
Is the wiring between the hole punch control PC board (HP) and sideways adjustment motor
(M2) correct?
NO
Correct the wiring.
YES
1. Replace the punch sideways adjustment motor (M2).
2. Replace the hole punch control PC board (HP).

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 81

[CC52] Skew adjustment motor (M1) abnormality

* The [CC52] error will be displays when the [ED10] error occurs three times in succession or
during the initial operation.
MJ-1101 (When MJ-6101 is installed)
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path?
YES Remove the paper.
NO
Rotate the skew adjustment motor (M1). Does it rotate smoothly?
NO
Fix the mechanism.
YES
Are the skew home position sensor (S2) and its wiring correct?
NO
Replace the sensor. Correct the wiring.
YES
Is the wiring between the hole punch control PC board (HP) and skew adjustment motor (M1)
correct?
NO
Correct the wiring.
YES
1. Replace the skew adjustment motor (M1).
2. Replace the hole punch control PC board (HP).

[CC60] Punch motor abnormality

MJ-1030 (when MJ-6004 is installed)
Are the punch home position sensor (PI63) and punch motor clock sensor (PI62) working
normally?
NO
Replace the sensors.
YES
Is the wiring between the sensors and finisher controller PC board correct?
NO
Correct the wiring.
YES
Is the punching mechanism normal?
NO
Fix the mechanism.
YES
1. Replace the punch motor (M61).
2. Replace the punch controller PC board.
3. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 82

[CC61] Punch motor (M3) home position detection error

* The [CC61] error will be displays when the [E9F0] error occurs three times in succession or
during the initial operation.
MJ-1101 (When MJ-6101 is installed)
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path?
YES Remove the paper.
NO
Rotate the punch motor (M3). Does it rotate smoothly?
NO
Fix the mechanism.
YES
Are the punch home position sensor (S4) and its wiring correct?
NO
Replace the sensor. Correct the wiring.
YES
Is the wiring between the hole punch control PC board (HP) and punch motor (M3) correct?
NO
Correct the wiring.

YES
1. Replace the punch motor (M3).
2. Replace the hole punch control PC board (HP).

[CC71] Punch ROM checksum error

MJ-1101 (When MJ-6101 is installed)
Is the conductor pattern on the hole punch control PC board (HP) open circuited or short
circuited?
YES Replace the hole punch control PC board (HP).
NO
Replace the finisher control PC board.

[CC72] Punch RAM read/write error

MJ-1101 (When MJ-6101 is installed)
Is the conductor pattern on the hole punch control PC board (HP) open circuited or short
circuited?
YES Replace the hole punch control PC board (HP).
NO
Replace the finisher control PC board.

[CC80] Front jogging motor abnormality/Front aligning plate motor abnormality

MJ-1030 (Front aligning plate motor abnormality)
Is the front aligning plate home position sensor (PI36) normal?
NO
Replace the sensor.
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the front aligning plate motor (M33)
correct?
NO
Correct the wiring.
YES
Is there any mechanical problem with the path of aligning plate?
NO
Fix the mechanism.
YES
1. Replace the front aligning plate motor.
2. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 83

[CC80] Rear alignment motor abnormality

* You receive a [CC80] error when the [ED14] error occurs three times in succession.
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the rear alignment plate is moved?
YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
Is the harness between the rear alignment motor (M10) and the finisher control PC board
(CN10) disconnected or open circuited?
l
YES Reconnect the connector securely.
Replace the harness.
NO
1. Replace the rear alignment motor (M10).
2. Replace the finisher control PC board.

[CC90] Tray shift motor abnormality

MJ-1031
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and tray shift motor (M2) correct?
NO
Correct the wiring.
YES
Are the front and rear sides of the stack tray leveled?
NO
Level them.
YES
Is the tray clock sensor (SR9) working properly?
NO
Replace the sensor.
YES
Are the tray lower limit sensor (SR5), tray 500 sensor (SR4) and tray safety switch (SW2)
working properly?
NO
Replace the sensor or sensor controller PC board.
YES
Does the voltage between the pins J114-1 and -2 on the finisher controller PC board become
24V when the tray shift motor starts rotating?
NO
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
YES
Check the wiring between the tray shift motor and finisher controller PC board. If there is no
problem, replace the tray shift motor.

[CCB0] Offset motor abnormality

MJ-1031
1. Check if the connector J104 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the
offset HP sensor (SR1) or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
2. Check if the connector J107 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the
offset motor (M5) or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
3. Replace the offset HP sensor.
4. Replace the offset motor.
5. Replace the finisher control PC board.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 84

[CCD0] Stack ejection motor abnormality

MJ-1030
Is the shutter home position sensor (PI45) normal?
NO
Replace the sensor.
YES
Are the wirings between the finisher controller PC board and the stack ejection motor (M32)/
shutter clutch (CL31) correct?
NO
Correct the wirings.
YES
Is there any problem with the shutter mechanism?
YES
Fix the shutter mechanism.
NO
1. Replace the stack ejection motor and shutter clutch.
2. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

[CCE0] Rear end assist motor abnormality

MJ-1030
Is the rear end assist guide home position sensor (PI39) normal?
NO
Replace the sensor.
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the rear end assist motor (M39)
correct?
NO
Correct the wiring.
YES
Is there any problem with the rear end assist mechanism?
YES
Fix the rear end assist mechanism.
NO
1. Replace the rear end assist motor.
2. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

[CCF0] Gear change motor abnormality

MJ-1030
Is the gear change home position sensor (PI49) normal?
NO
Replace the sensor.
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the gear change motor (M40)
correct?
NO
Correct the wiring.
YES
Is there any problem with the gear change mechanism?
YES
Fix the gear change mechanism.
NO
1. Replace the gear change motor.
2. Replace the finisher controller PC board.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 85

[CCF1] Tray safety switch abnormality

MJ-1030
1. Check if the connector J110 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the
tray safety switch (SW2) or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
2. Check if the connector J114 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the
stack tray shift motor (M2) or the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if any.
3. Replace the tray safety switch
4. Replace the stack tray shift motor.
5. Replace the finisher control PC board.

[CDE0] Paddle motor abnormality

* You receive a [CDE0] error when the [ED15] error occurs three times in succession or during
the initial operation.
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem with the paddle is rotated?
YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
Is the harness between the paddle motor (M8) and the finisher control PC board (CN6)
disconnected or open circuited?
l
YES Reconnect the connector securely.
Replace the harness.
NO
1. Replace the paddle motor (M8).
2. Replace the finisher control PC board.

[CE00] Communication error between finisher and puncher unit

MJ-1030 (When MJ-6004 is installed)
Is the problem solved by turning OFF and ON the power of the equipment?
YES
End.
NO
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and punch controller PC board correct?
NO
Correct the wiring.
YES
1. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
2. Replace the punch controller PC board.

[CE00] Punch communication error

MJ-1101 (When MJ-6101 is installed)
Is the harness between the hole punch control PC board (HP) and the finisher control PC
board disconnected or open circuited?
YES Replace the harness. Correct the wiring.
NO
Is the conductor pattern on the hole punch control PC board (HP) open circuited or short
circuited?
YES Replace the hole punch control PC board (HP).
NO
Replace the finisher control PC board.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 86

[CF10] Communication module SRAM reading failure

MJ-1101
1. Is the error recovered when the power of the equipment is turned OFF and then back ON?
2. Check if the MJ-1101 is set as the specified finisher on the equipment.
3. Check if the harness connecting the converter PC board and the finisher controller PC
board is disconnected or open circuited.
4. Check if the conductor pattern on the converter PC board is open circuited or short
circuited.
5. Check if the conductor pattern on the finisher controller PC board is open circuited or short
circuited.
6. Replace the converter PC board.
7. Replace the finisher control PC board.
MJ-1101 (When MJ-6101 is installed)
1. Is the error recovered when the power of the equipment is turned OFF and then back ON?
2. Check if the MJ-1101 is set as the specified finisher on the equipment.
3. Check if the harness connecting the converter PC board and the finisher controller PC
board is disconnected or open circuited.
4. Check if the harness connecting the hole punch control PC board and the finisher control
PC board is disconnected or open circuited.
5. Check if the conductor pattern on the converter PC board is open circuited or short
circuited.
6. Check if the conductor pattern on the finisher controller PC board is open circuited or short
circuited.
7. Check if the conductor pattern on the hole punch control PC board is open circuited or
short circuited.
8. Replace the converter PC board.
9. Replace the finisher control PC board.
10.Replace the hole punch control PC board.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 87

6.2.20
(1)

(2)

Image control related service call

Based on the procedure of [CE10], [CE20] and [CE40] described below, check the status and
take appropriate actions. And then perform the forced performing of image quality closed-loop
control according to the following procedure.
1.

While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn ON the power.

2.

Key in [396], and then press the [START] button. Confirm that the image quality control
has finished normally.

After confirming the items in (1), clear the abnormal detection counter of image quality control.
1.

While pressing [0] and [8] simultaneously, turn ON the power.

2.

Key in [573], and then press the [START] button.

3.

Rewrite the displayed status counter from 1 - 16 to 0, and then press the [ENTER]
or [INTERRUPT] button.

4.

Key in [574], and then press the [START] button.

5.

Rewrite the displayed status counter from 1 - 16 to 0, and then press the [ENTER]
or [INTERRUPT] button.

6.

Key in [575], and then press the [START] button.

7.

Rewrite the displayed status counter from 1 - 16 to 0, and then press the [ENTER]
or [INTERRUPT] button.

8.

Key in [576], and then press the [START] button.

9.

Rewrite the displayed status counter from 1 - 16 to 0, and then press the [ENTER]
or [INTERRUPT] button.

10. Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Make sure that the equipment enters the normal
ready state.

[CA00] Color registration abnormality

<Color toner low density>
When you check the printing status to find out that the color printing ratio is less than 5%, color toner
low density might be the cause.
Turn the code 08-2692 Prevention of color toner low density / ON/OFF setting to ON, and then set
number of sheets to be judged at the code 08-2693 Prevention of color toner low density / Judged
number of sheets setting.
If the color printing ratio is 5% or more, check the following.
1. Check if there is any abnormality on the hand grips and rods of the main charger cleaner. Correct if
there is.
2. Check if the drum is rotated properly by turning the coupling of the developer unit. Correct the auger
and the surrounding hardware if not.
3. Check if the connectors CN337, CN346 and CN358 of the LGC board are disconnected from the
laser optical unit or the harnesses are open circuited.
4. Check if there is any stain or scratch on the glass surface of the laser optical unit. Clean or correct if
there is.
5. Check if there is any stain on the image quality sensor and Image position aligning sensors.
6. Check if the sensor shutter is working properly.
* If the error still occurs, check the following.
e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 88

< Invalidating color registration control >

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

Turn the power ON while [0] and [8] are pressed simultaneously.
Key in 4546, then press the [START] button. (08-4546: Position adjustment control / Mode
setting)
Set the value to 0 (not performed automatically).
Turn the power OFF.

< Checking the abnormal status on color registration >

(5)
(6)
(7)

Turn the power ON while [0] and [5] are pressed simultaneously.
Key in 4720, then press the [START] button. (05-4720: Displaying the cause of color
registration detection error)
Check the displayed value.
When the error [CA00] occurs, the value between 1 and 255 is displayed. (0: Normal
completion)
(The statues of total 8 sections (4 colors on the front and rear sides) are displayed.)
1 : Y on the rear side detection abnormality (*1)
-> Go to (23)
2 : Y on the front side detection abnormality (*1)
-> Go to (23)
3 : Y on the front and rear sides detection abnormality
-> Go to (23)
4 : M on the rear side detection abnormality (*1)
-> Go to (23)
8 : M on the front side detection abnormality (*1)
-> Go to (23)
12 : M on the front and rear sides detection abnormality
-> Go to (23)
16 : C on the rear side detection abnormality (*1)
-> Go to (23)
32 : C on the front side detection abnormality (*1)
-> Go to (23)
48 : C on the front and rear sides detection abnormality
-> Go to (23)
64 : K on the rear side detection abnormality (*1)
-> Go to (23)
85 : All colors on the rear side detection abnormality
-> Go to (8)
128: K on the front side detection abnormality (*1)
-> Go to (23)
170: All colors on the front side detection abnormality
-> Go to (8)
192: K on the front and rear sides detection abnormality
-> Go to (23)
255: All colors on the front and rear sides detection abnormality -> Go to (8)
Other than the above: Multiple colors detection abnormality
-> (*2), Go to (23)
(*2) The adjustment value is the sum of (*1), which, as in the example below, specifies the
cause of the detection abnormality.
(E.g. 1) 05-4720 --- in case of 72
72 = 64 + 8
-> K on the rear side / M on the front side detection abnormality
(E.g. 2) 05-4720 --- in case of 146
146 = 128 + 18 = 128 + 16 + 2
-> K on the front side / C on the rear side / Y on the front side detection abnormality

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 89

< Checking the status of the image position aligning sensor >
Check if the light emitting area of the image position aligning sensor emits LEDs and if the reflected
lights on the transfer belt surface are detected by the light receiving area of the image position aligning
sensor.
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)

Turn the power ON while [0] and [3] are pressed simultaneously.
Press the [START] button.
Check how items [G] and [H] are displayed while [7] is pressed.
Press the [CLEAR] button.
Key in 125, then press the [START] button. (03-125: Sensor shutter is opened)
Key in 126, then press the [START] button. (03-126: Image position aligning sensor / LED ON)
Press the [START] button.
Check how items [G] and [H] are displayed while [7] is pressed.
Compare them with the statues of [G] and [H] displayed in step 10.
Both [G] and [H] are changed The image position aligning sensors on both
sides are operating normally.
[G] remains same
The image position aligning sensor on the rear
side is not operating normally.
[H] remains same
The image position aligning sensor on the front
side is not operating normally.
Both [G] and [H] remain same The image position aligning sensors on both
sides are not operating normally.

(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)

Press the [CLEAR] button.

Key in 176, then press the [START] button. (03-176: Image position aligning sensor / LED OFF)
Key in 175, then press the [START] button. (03-175: Sensor shutter closed)
Turn the power OFF.
If the image position aligning sensors on both sides are operating normally, proceed to step (23).
In other cases, proceed to step (22).
(22) Check the following items if the image position aligning sensors are not operating normally:
Is the connector CN337 on the LGC board disconnected?
Is the connector of the image position aligning sensor disconnected?
Is the harness between the LGC board and the image position aligning sensor broken?
Is the light emitting or receiving area of the image position aligning sensor stained with toner?
Are the sensor shutter and the image quality sensor opening or closing normally? Or are they
damaged?
Is the light emitting area of the image position aligning sensor emitting LEDs?
< Checking procedure for the sensor shutter opening/closing status >
|
|
1. Take off the transfer belt unit so that the sensor unit can be seen.
|
2. Turn the power ON while [0] and [3] are pressed simultaneously.
|
3. The shutter should be opened when 125 is keyed in. It should be
|
closed when 175 is keyed in.
|
|
< Checking procedure for the LED emission of the image position aligning
|
sensor >
|
1. Key in 125 to open the sensor shutter.
|
2. The light emitting area of the sensor should emit LEDs when 126 is
|
keyed in.
|
|
|

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 90

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|

Abnormal

1. Reconnect the connector.

2. Replace the harness.
3. Clean the light emitting and receiving areas of the image position
aligning sensor.
4. If the sensor shutter is damaged, replace it.
If the sensor shutter solenoid is not operating normally, replace the
solenoid.
Proceed to step (8).

Normal (Proceed to step (23).)

< Checking with test pattern >
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)

Turn the power ON while [0] and [4] are pressed simultaneously.
Key in 220, then press the [START] button.
Select C, M, Y or K, then press the [START] button.
Press the [CLEAR] button after one sheet of test pattern has been exited.
Check if the printed image of the test pattern in each color contains difference in density on its
front, center and rear sides, or if there is any image trouble in a whole image.
Is the test pattern printed in blank?
Check if the laser shutter is operating normally.
|
|
< Checking procedure for the laser shutter opening/closing status >
|
1. Take off the developer unit so that the laser shutter can be seen.
|
* Clean around the laser shutter if the toner or developer material is
|
spilled over.
|
2. Turn the power ON while [0] and [3] are pressed simultaneously.
|
3. Key in 417. (03-417: Laser shutter opening/closing status)
|
4. Press the [START] button repeatedly to open and close the shutter
|
alternatively.
|
|
Abnormal
If the laser shutter is not opening or closing normally, check the shutter
|
|
and correct it if necessary.
|
|
|
|
Proceed to step (23).
Normal
Is the image of the test pattern printed normally without any difference in density on its front
and rear sides?
NO
1. Check the contacting status of the transfer belt and the
|
|
photoconductive drum.
|
2. Check the amount of the developer material. (Check if the developer
|
material is supplied on the developer sleeve.)
|
|
YES
Is the image printed normally without yellow, magenta, cyan or black streaks in the secondary
scanning direction?
NO
Check if the main charger wire corresponding to the color of the streaks is
|
|
stained.
|
YES
Is the image printed normally without white streaks in the secondary scanning direction?
|
NO
Check if the slit glass of the laser optical unit is stained.
|
YES

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 91

Is a certain color in the printed image turned to black solid?

Abnormal
Abnormality in the main high-voltage transformer corresponding to the
|
|
color or abnormality in the laser optical unit.
|
Replace one of 4 main high-voltage transformers which possibly
|
contains abnormality, and also the one possibly normal. Then print the
|
same test pattern.
|
If the color which turned into black solid changes along with the
|
replacement of the main high-voltage transformer, this main high|
voltage transformer is defined as abnormal.
|

If
the color which turned into black solid does not change, check if the
|
harness
between the LGC board and the main high-voltage
|
transformer is broken or if the power is sufficiently supplied to the main
|
charger (breaking of the high-voltage harness or connection defect). If
|
|
no problem is found, check the laser optical unit.
|
Normal
If the density level is low on both front and rear sides, is the image printed normally in cases
other than noted above?
NO
Check the following items:
|
|
1. Check if the photoconductive drum and the transfer belt are rotating. If
|
not, correct their mechanism.
|
2. Check if there are abnormal stain, large breaking or scratches on the
|
transfer belt surface.
|
3. Check if the connector of the transfer transformer is disconnected.
|
4. Check if the high-voltage harnesses of the main high-voltage
|
transformer and the transfer transformer are disconnected.
|
5.
Check
if the harness between the LGC board and the transfer
|
transformer
is broken.
|
6. Check if the high-voltage joints of the transfer belt unit are securely
|
contacted or if they are not stained.
|
|
7. Check if the high-voltage harness is broken.
|
8. Check if the connector of the main high-voltage transformer is
|
disconnected.
|
9. Check if the harness between the LGC board and the main high|
voltage transformer is broken.
|
10.Replace
the transfer transformer.
|
11.
Replace
the
main high-voltage transformer.
|
|

YES
Proceed to step (23).
(Proceed to step (28).)

< Checking with the enforced image position adjustment >

(28) Turn the power ON while [0] and [5] are pressed simultaneously.
(29) Key in 4719, then press the [START] button. (05-4719: Enforced position adjustment)
Does the error [CA00] occur during the position adjustment control?
|
YES
Proceed to step (5).
NO (Proceed to step (30).)

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 92

< Validating the color registration control >

Check the operation and correct if necessary. Then be sure to perform the following:
(30) Turn the power ON while [0] and [8] are pressed simultaneously.
(31) Key in 4546, then press the [START] button. (08-4546: Position adjustment control / Mode
setting)
(32) Set the value to 5 (performed automatically).
(33) Turn the power OFF.
<Checking the image position aligning sensor>
(34) Clean the image position aligning sensor (S16/S17).
<Checking the power supply>
(35) Check if any of the springs for supplying power to the transfer belt unit is deformed. Replace the
spring if it is deformed.

6
[CE10] Image quality sensor abnormality (OFF level)
Is the connector of the image quality sensor, or the connector CN337 on the LGC board
disconnected?
Is the harness between the LGC board and the image quality sensor, or the harness between
the LGC board and the switching power supply open circuited?
YES
Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the output voltage from the 12V-power supply normal?
(Is +12V voltage normally output by the CN345-7pin on the LGC board?)
NO
Check the power supply system and replace the switching power supply.
YES
1. Replace the image quality sensor.
2. Replace the LGC board.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 93

[CE20] Image quality sensor abnormality

Is the transfer belt or the transfer belt unit securely installed?
Are there any abnormal stains (cleaning defects), large scratches or breaking on the transfer
belt surface?
Are the drum and the transfer belt rotating?
NO
<Checking procedure>
|
|
1. Check if the transfer belt unit is securely installed. Correct it if not.
|
2. Check if any toner image remains on the transfer belt surface.
|
If any, check the installation status of the TBU cleaner unit. If there is any
|
abnormality, correct it, and clean the transfer belt.
|
3. Check if the drum and the transfer belt are properly operated.
|
(ON: 03-101 / OFF: 03-151)
|
If they are not rotating normally, check if their drive gears are damaged or if
|
they contact the equipment. Correct it if needed.
|
|
Proceed to step (6). (to step (1) for the second time)
YES
Is the sensor shutter of the image quality sensor opening or closing normally? Or is it
damaged?
Is the sensor surface of the image quality sensor stained with toner? If so, has it been
cleaned?
NO
<Checking procedure>
|
1. Take off the transfer belt unit so that you can see the sensor unit.
|
|
2. Check if the sensor shutter is opening or closing normally.
|
(Opening: 03-125 / Closing: 03-175)
|
If the sensor shutter is not opening or closing, check if it is damaged or
|
there is any abnormality in the sensor shutter solenoid.
|
Check the connector and the harness between the sensor shutter solenoid
|
and the LGC board. (LGC CN337-8pin, 9pin)
|
3.
Slide
the sensor shutter so that the sensor surface can be seen.
|
4. Clean the sensor surface with a cotton swab or a soft cloth.
|
5. Clean the area around the sensor (e.g.: sensor shutter) if it is stained, so
|
that the sensor surface does not become dirty.
|
|
Proceed to step (6). (to step (1) for the second time)
YES
Is the connector of the image quality sensor securely connected?
Is the connector CN337 on the LGC board securely connected?
Is the harness between the LGC board and the image quality sensor disconnected?
NO
<Checking procedure>
|
Reconnect the connector.
|
|
Replace the harness.
|
Proceed to step (6). (to step (1) for the second time)
YES
Is +12V power supply voltage normally supplied to the image quality sensor?
Is +12V voltage normally output by the CN345-7pin on the LGC board?
NO
|
<Checking procedure>
|
1. Check if +12V voltage is output by the switching power supply (PS-ACC
|
CN404-7pin).
|
2. Check if +12V voltage is output by the CN345-7pin on the LGC board.
|
Check if the supply harness between the switching power supply and the
|
LGC board is open circuited, damaged or disconnected.
|
|

Proceed to step (6). (to step (1) for the second time)

YES
e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 94

(1)

Set the values of Image quality closed-loop control / Contrast voltage (08-556) and Image
quality closed-loop control / Laser power (08-557) to 0 (Invalid).

(2)

Perform Enforced performing of image quality open-loop control (05-394).

(3)

Output the image quality control test pattern (04-270) more than one time and the list print
([9][START]) in the adjustment mode (05), and then check if the image is normal.
Normal
Abnormal
|
|
Abnormal image:
|
Blank print, Solid print, White banding, Color banding, White spots, Poor
|
transfer, Uneven image density, Faded image (low density), Uneven light
|
distribution, Blotched image.
|
* Blank print: including when one of the YMCK colors is not printed.
|
|
Correct the abnormal image.
|
|
Proceed to step (5).

(4)

Replace the image quality sensor or the LGC board.

(5)

Set the values of Image quality closed-loop control / Contrast voltage (08-556) and Image
quality closed-loop control / Laser power (08-557) to 1 (Valid).

(6)

Perform Automatic initialization of image quality control (05-396) and make sure it is
completed normally. (Error [CE10], [CE20] and [CE40] do not appear.) Then perform
Automatic gamma adjustment (Chapter 3.7.1 and 3.8.1).
| When an error occurs:

(7)

Check and correct it accordingly.

Reset all of the values in the codes Abnormality detection count (Y/M/C/K) Display/0 clearing
(08-573 to 08-576).

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 95

[CE40] Image quality control test pattern abnormality

<Color toner low density>
When you check the printing status to find out that the color printing ratio is less than 5%, color toner
low density might be the cause.
Turn the code 08-2692 Prevention of color toner low density / ON/OFF setting to ON, and then set
number of sheets to be judged at the code 08-2693 Prevention of color toner low density / Judged
number of sheets setting.
If the color printing ratio is 5% or more, check the following.
1. Check if there is any abnormality on the hand grips and rods of the main charger cleaner. Correct if
there is.
2. Check if the drum is rotated properly by turning the coupling of the developer unit. Correct the auger
and the surrounding hardware if not.
3. Check if the connectors CN337, CN346 and CN358 of the LGC board are disconnected from the
laser optical unit or the harnesses are open circuited.
4. Check if there is any stain or scratch on the glass surface of the laser optical unit. Clean or correct if
there is.
5. Check if there is any stain on the image quality sensor and Image position aligning sensors.
6. Check if the sensor shutter is working properly.
* If the error still occurs, check the following.
(1)

Use Image quality control abnormal detection counter Y to K display/0 clearing (08-573 to 576)
to check the abnormal occurring condition for each color.

(2)

Check Output value display of image quality sensor / Low-density pattern (05-391-0 to 3) to
check if the low-density pattern abnormality occurs for each color. The values under 180 for Y, M
and C, and under 20 for K are defined as low-density pattern abnormality.
| Under 180 (Y, M and C)
| 180 or above (Y, M and C)
| 20 or above (K)
Under 20 (K)
|
Low-density pattern abnormality
|
Check the transfer belt. If the cleaning is poor, check the
|
installation status of the transfer belt cleaner unit and
|
correct it if necessary.
|
|
To (9)
|
|
(If you have already performed this checking cycle once,
proceed to step (4).)

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 96

(3)

Check Output value display of image quality sensor / High-density pattern (05-390-0 to 3) to
check if the high-density pattern abnormality occurs for each color and identify the color which
pattern is abnormal. If the value is 628 or above, it is defined as high-density pattern abnormality.
| 628 or above (Y, M, C and K)
| Under 628 (Y, M, C and K)
|
|
High-density pattern abnormality
|
Check if the laser shutter is working properly.
|
<Procedure>
|
1. Take off the developer unit so that the laser shutter
|
can be easily seen.
|
* Clean around the laser shutter if the developer has
|
been spilled over.
|
2. While pressing the digital keys [0] and [3]
|
simultaneously, turn the power ON.
|
|
3. Key in 417.
|
4. Press the [START] button repeatedly to open and
|
close the shutter alternatively.
|
- If the laser shutter does not open/close, check
|
the shutter and correct it if necessary.
|

Check
if
the developer unit has been installed properly.
|
1.
Visually
check
the installation status of the developer
|
unit, and correct it if there is any abnormality.
|
|
|
|
To (9)
(If you have already performed this checking cycle once,
proceed to step (4).)

(4)

Set the values of Image quality closed-loop control / Contrast voltage (08-556) and Image
quality closed-loop control / Laser power (08-557) to 0 (Invalid).

(5)

Perform Enforced performing of image quality open-loop control (05-394).

(6)

Output the image quality control test pattern (04-270) more than one time and the list print
([9][START]) in the adjustment mode (05), and check the patch of the color identified in step (1)
to see if the image is abnormal.
Abnormal
| Normal
|
Abnormal image:
|
Blank print, Solid print, White banding, Color banding, White spots,
|
Poor transfer, Uneven image density, Faded image (low density),
|
Uneven light distribution, Blotched image.
|
* Blank print: including when one of the YMCK colors is not printed.
|
|
Correct the abnormal image.
|
|
Proceed to step (8).

(7)

Replace the image quality sensor or LGC board.

(8)

Set the values of Image quality closed-loop control / Contrast voltage (08-556) and Image
quality closed-loop control / Laser power (08-557) to 1 (Valid).

(9)

Perform Automatic initialization of image quality control (05-396) and make sure it is completed
normally. (Error [CE40] does not appear.) Then perform Automatic gamma adjustment (Chapter
3.7.1 and 3.8.1).
| When an error occurs:
|
|
Check and correct it accordingly.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 97

(10) Clear all Image quality control abnormal detection counter Y to K display/0 clearing (08-573 to
576).
(11) Check if any of the springs for supplying power to the transfer belt unit is deformed. Replace the
spring if it is deformed.

[CE50] Temperature/humidity sensor abnormality

Is the connector CN342 on the LGC board or the connector of the temperature/humidity
sensor disconnected?
Is the harness between the LGC board and the temperature/humidity sensor disconnected?
YES
Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
1. Replace the temperature/humidity sensor.
2. Replace the LGC board.

[CE60] Drum thermistor Y abnormal

[CE90] Drum thermistor K abnormal
Is the harness between the LGC board and the drawer connector for developer unit
disconnected?
Is the harness inside of the developer unit and the harness of the drum thermistor Y or K
disconnected?
Is the connector CN340 on the LGC board, or the connector of the drum thermistor Y or K
disconnected?
YES
Reconnect the connector. Replace the harness.
NO
1. Replace the drum thermistor Y or K.
2. Replace the LGC board.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 98

[CE70] Drum drive switching abnormality

Is the drum switching motor (M11) operating properly? (Perform the output check: 03-240)
NO
1. Check if the connector of the motor and joint connectors are disconnected.
|
|
2. Check if the drum switching detection sensor (S19) is coming off its
|
installation position.
|
3. Check if the connector (CN339) on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
4. Check if the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
|
5. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
6.
Replace
the drum switching motor.
|
7. Replace the LGC board.
YES
Is the drum switching detection sensor (S19) working? (Perform the input check:
03-[FAX]ON/[0]/[E]Highlighted in the color mode)
NO
1. Check if the connector of the drum switching detection sensor and joint
|
connectors are disconnected.
|
2. Check if there is any foreign matter such as grease in the detection area of
|
the drum switching detection sensor.
|
3. Check if the connector (CN339) on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
|
4. Check if the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
|
5. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
6. Replace the drum switching sensor.
7. Replace the LGC board.
YES
Is the drum switching motor assembled in the drum drive unit able to be rotated smoothly by
hand?
NO
1. While reinstalling the drum switching motor, push it so that its gear will
|
|
slightly move away from the engaging gear.
|
2. Check the bracket in which the drum switching motor is installed. If it is
|
deformed, replace it.
YES
Is the drum switching guide able to be moved smoothly by hand after the drum switching motor
has been removed?
NO
Check if the slide area (guide, plate) of the drum switching guide is deformed
|
|
or any foreign matter is attached to it. (Replace it if there is.)
1. Check if the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
2. Replace the LGC board.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 99

[CE71] Drum phase adjustment abnormality

Check if the error is cleared after the power has been turned OFF and then back ON.
Is the drum motor (M10) operating properly? (Perform the output check: ON 03-101 / OFF 03151.))
(Check the operation after removing all process units (EPU (Y, M, C, K))).
NO
1. Check if the connector of the motor and joint connectors are disconnected.
|
|
2. Check if the connector (CN332) on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
3. Check if their drive gears are damaged or if they contact with the
|
equipment. Correct if any.
|
4. Check if the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
|
5. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
6.
Replace
the drum motor.
|
7. Replace the LGC board.
YES
Rotate the drum of each EPU in the direction of the arrow once. (See the figure below.) If the
rotation of the drum is extremely heavy or not smooth, check if the mechanism of the EPU is
normal.

Fig. 6-1

Are the drum phase sensors (Color drum phase sensor (S43) and K drum phase sensor (S44))
are operating properly? (Perform the input check: Color 03-[1] [F] / K 03-[1] [E].)
NO
1. Check if the connector of the drum phase sensors (S43/S44) and joint
|
connectors are disconnected.
|
2.
Check
if the connector (CN339) on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
3.
Check
if
there is any foreign matter such as grease in the detection area of
|
the drum phase sensors (S43/S44).
|
|
4. Check if the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
|
5. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
|
circuited.
|
6. Replace the drum phase sensors (S43/S44).
7. Replace the LGC board.
YES
1. Check if the drive gears are installed properly. (Check if the mark on each gear is aligned
with the area of the punched mark on the frame.)
2. Check if the actuator is installed properly.
3. Check if the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
4. Replace the drum motor.
5. Replace the LGC board.
CE71 error can be prevented by setting the drum phase adjustment control OFF in the selfdiagnostic code below.
The setting value shall be returned after the recovery, otherwise color deviation increases.
Drum phase adjustment control ON/OFF code
08-4766
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Default)

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 100

6.2.21

Copy process related service call

[C370] Transfer belt motor abnormality

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)

Check if the connector of the transfer belt unit is not disconnected.

Is the transport belt unit working normally?
Check if the connector of the transfer belt motor is not disconnected.
Check if the connector CN342 on the LGC board is disconnected.
Check if the fuse on the switching power supply has blown.
Check if the transfer belt release detection sensor is working properly.
Replace the transfer belt motor.
Replace the LGC board.

[C380] Auto-toner sensor-K abnormality (upper limit)

[C381] Auto-toner sensor-K abnormality (lower limit)
[C390] Auto-toner sensor-C abnormality (upper limit)
[C391] Auto-toner sensor-C abnormality (lower limit)
[C3A0] Auto-toner sensor-M abnormality (upper limit)
[C3A1] Auto-toner sensor-M abnormality (lower limit)
[C3B0] Auto-toner sensor-Y abnormality (upper limit)
[C3B1] Auto-toner sensor-Y abnormality (lower limit)

<Color toner low density>

When you check the printing status to find out that the color printing ratio is less than 5%, color toner
low density might be the cause.
Turn the code 08-2692 Prevention of color toner low density / ON/OFF setting to ON, and then set
number of sheets to be judged at the code 08-2693 Prevention of color toner low density / Judged
number of sheets setting.
If the color printing ratio is 5% or more, check the following.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

Is the developer unit installed properly?

Check if the connector CN340 on the LGC board is disconnected from the auto toner sensor or
the harnesses are open circuited. Correct if necessary.
Check if there is any foreign matter such as toner in the drawer connector of the equipment and
fuser unit or the connector of the auto toner sensor. Remove if there is and reconnect it.
Replace the auto-toner sensor.
Replace the LGC board.

[C970] High-voltage transformer abnormality

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

Is the main charger installed securely?

Check if the spring of high-voltage supply contact point is deformed.
Check if the needle electrode is broken or the main charger grid is deformed.
Check if any foreign matter is on the needle electrode or main charger grid.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 101

[CD70] Waste toner box mixing paddle locked

Do the paddles in the waste toner box rotate? (Actually make them rotate.)
|
NO
1. Replace the waste toner box.
YES
Is the waste toner paddle motor rotating? (Perform the output check: 03-414)
NO
1. Check if the connector or the relay connector of the waste toner paddle
|
|
motor is disconnected.
|
2. Check if there is any damage or abnormality in the gears on the driving
|
cascade of the waste toner paddle motor.
|
3. Check if the connector CN359 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
4. Check if the connector pin is disconnected or the harness is broken.
|
5. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
6.
Replace
the waste toner paddle motor.
|
7.
Replace
the LGC board.
|
YES
Is the waste toner paddle motor lock detection sensor operating normally? (Perform output
check: 03-[FAX] OFF/[1]/[C])
To judge it is an error, check if the sensor detects each status of normal display
|
|
and highlighted display.
|
|
NO
1. Check if the connector or the relay connector of the waste toner paddle
|
motor lock detection sensor is disconnected.
|
2. Check if the connector CN359 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
3. Check if the connector pin is disconnected or the harness is broken.
|
4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5.
Replace
the waste toner paddle motor lock detection sensor.
|
6. Replace the LGC board.
|
YES
1. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
2. Replace the LGC board.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 102

[CD71] Waste transport motor drive locking error

Is the waste toner transport motor rotating? (Perform the output check: 03-415)
NO
1. Check if the connector or the relay connector of the waste toner transport
|
|
motor is disconnected.
|
2. Check if there is any damage or abnormality in the gears on the driving
|
cascade of the waste toner transport motor.
|
3. Check if the connector CN342 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
4. Check if the connector pin is disconnected or the harness is broken.
|
5. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
6. Replace the waste toner paddle motor.
|
7. Replace the LGC board.
|
YES
Is the auger lock detection sensor operating normally? (Perform output check: 03-[FAX] ON/
[2]/[G])
To judge it is an error, check if the sensor detects each status of normal display
|
|
and highlighted display.
|
|
NO
1. Check if the connector or the relay connector of the auger lock detection
|
sensor is disconnected.
|
2. Check if the connector CN359 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
3. Check if the connector pin is disconnected or the harness is broken.
|
4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5. Replace the auger lock detection sensor.
|
6. Replace the LGC board.
|
YES
1. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
2. Replace the LGC board.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 103

[CEC0] 2nd transfer roller position detection abnormality

Is the 2nd transfer roller contacted and released properly? (Perform the output check: 03-239)
NO
1. Check if the connectors of the registration motor(M19) are disconnected.
|
|
2. Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the wires of harnesses are
|
open circuited.
|
4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5. Replace the registration motor.
|
6. Replace the LGC board.
|
|
YES
Is the 2nd transfer roller position detection sensor(S29) working properly?
(Perform the input check:03-[FAX]ON/[2]/[F])
NO
1. Check if the connector or joint connectors of the 2nd transfer roller position
|
|
detection sensor are disconnected.
|
2. Check if the connector CN337 on the LGC board is disconnected.
|
3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the wires of harnesses are
|
open circuited.
|
4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
5.
Replace
the 2nd transfer roller position detection sensor.
|
6.
Replace
the LGC board.
|
YES
1. Check if there is any abnormality with the mechanical section (sensor's actuator, etc.).
2. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
3. Replace the LGC board.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 104

6.2.22

Other service call

[F100] HDD format error

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)

Check if the HDD is mounted.

Check if the specified HDD is mounted.
Check if the connector pins of the HDD are bent.
Check if the connectors CN116, CN132 on the SYS board is disconnected.
Replace the harness.
Format the HDD. (Key in 2 at 08-690.)
Replace the HDD.
Replace the SYS board.

[F101] HDD unmounted

[F102] HDD start error
[F103] HDD transfer time-out
[F104] HDD data error
[F105] HDD other error
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

Check if the connectors of the HDD are disconnected.

Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the wires of harnesses are open circuited.
Perform the bad sector check (08-694). If the check result is OK, recover the data in the HDD. If
the check result is failed, replace the HDD.
Replace the SYS board.

[F106] Point and Print partition damage

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

Turn the power OFF and start up the Setting Mode (08).
Key in 662 and press the [START] button. (Partition clearing is performed.)
Restart the equipment.
Access TopAccess. Click the [Administration] tab, and then click the Maintenance Menu to open.
Then install the Point and Print driver.

[F107] / SHR partition damage

Initialize the Electronic Filing using the Setting Mode (08-666).

[F108] /SHA partition damage

Initialize the shared folder using the Setting Mode (08-667).

[F120] Database abnormality

(1) Check that no jobs remain and rebuild the databases. (Perform 08-684.)
(2) If the error is not recovered, initialize the HDD. (Key in 2 at 08-690.)
Notes:
If you rebuild the databases with a job remaining, delete it after finishing.
When Rebuilding all databases (08-684) is performed, all data in the Address Book and
Mailbox are deleted. If you back up the data in advance, they will be recovered by restoring
them after rebuilding the database.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 105

[F130] Invalid MAC address

Compare the serial number of the equipment with a number displayed in 08-995. If they are different,
enter the correct serial number at 08-995.

[F140] Accelerator ASIC format error

(1)
(2)

Check if the connector on the SYS board is connected.

Replace the SYS board.

[F200] Data Overwrite option (GP-1070) disabled

Perform firmware installation (all firmware: OS, HDD, SYS, PFC Firmware, Engine Main Firmware, and
Scanner Firmware) with the USB media.
* When the function of the Data Overwrite option (GP-1070) is deleted from the equipment, the
service call F200 occurs.

[F400] SYS board cooling fan abnormality

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

Check if the fan is rotating properly.

If not, check if any foreign object is adhered.
Are the connector CN126 and the relay connector of the SYS board connected securely?
Replace the SYS board cooling fan.

6.2.23

Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function

Notes:
1. When initializing the Electronic Filing (Setting Mode (08-666)), all data in the Electronic Filing
are erased. Back up the data in the Electronic Filing by using the Electronic Filing Function of
TopAccess before the initialization.
2. When initializing the shared folder (Setting Mode (08-667)), all data in the shared folder are
erased. Back up the data in the shared folder by using Explorer before the initialization.
3. When formatting the HDD (Setting Mode (08-690)), all data in the shared folder, Electronic
Filing, Address Book, template, etc. are erased. Back up these data before the initialization.
Note that some of data cannot be backed up
P.7-18 "7.2.3 Precautions and procedures when replacing the HDD"

[ 1 ] Internet FAX related error

[1C10] System access abnormality
[1C32] File deletion failure
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
If the error still occurs, first, check if there are no jobs existing and then perform the HDD formatting
(08-690).

[1C11] Insufficient memory

When there are running jobs, perform the job in error again after the completion of the running jobs.
If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.

[1C12] Message reception error

[1C13] Message transmission error
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 106

[1C14] Invalid parameter

When a template is used, form the template again.
If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.

[1C15] Exceeding file capacity

Reset and extend the Maximum send to E-mail/iFAX size or reduce the number of pages and
perform the job again.

[1C20] System management module access abnormality

[1C21] Job control module access abnormality
[1C22] Job control module access abnormality
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Check if there are no other running jobs and perform the HDD formatting (08-690).
If the recovery is still not completed, replace the SYS board.

[1C30] Directory creation failure

[1C31] File creation failure
[1C33] File access failure
Check if the access privilege to the storage directory is writable.
Check if the server or local disk has a sufficient space in disk capacity.

[1C40] Image conversion abnormality

Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Replace the main memory and perform the job again.

[1C60] HDD full failure during processing

Reduce the number of pages of the job in error and perform the job again.
Check if the server or local disk has a sufficient space in disk capacity.

[1C61] Address Book reading failure

Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Reset the data in the Address Book and perform the job again.

[1C62] Memory acquiring failure

Check if there is any job being performed and perform the job in error again.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Replace the main memory and perform the job again.

[1C63] Terminal IP address unset

Reset the Terminal IP address.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.

[1C64] Terminal mail address unset

Reset the Terminal mail address.
2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 107

Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.

[1C65] SMTP address unset

Reset the SMTP address and perform the job.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.

[1C66] Server time-out error

Check if the SMTP server is operating properly.

[1C67] NIC time-out error

[1C68] NIC access error
[1C6D] System error
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
If the error still occurs, replace the SYS board.

[1C69] SMTP server connection error

Reset the login name or password of SMTP server and perform the job again.
Check if the SMTP server is operating properly.

[1C6A] HOST NAME error

Check if there is an illegal character in the device name.
Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate device name.

[1C6B] Terminal mail address error

Check the SMTP Authentication method.
Check if there is an illegal character in the Terminal mail address.
Set the correct SMTP Authentication method or delete the illegal character and reset the
appropriate Terminal mail address, then perform the job again.

[1C6C] Destination mail address error

Check if there is an illegal character in the Destination mail address.
Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate Destination mail address, then perform the job
again.

[1C70] SMTP client OFF

Set the SMTP valid and perform the job again.

[1C71] SMTP authentication error

Check that SMTP authentication method, login name and password are correct, then perform
authentication again.

[1C72] POP Before SMTP error

Check that both the POP Before SMTP setting and POP3 setting are correct, then perform
authentication again.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 108

[1C80] Internet FAX transmission failure when processing E-mail job received
Reset the Received InternetFax Forward.

[1C81] Onramp Gateway transmission failure

Reset the mail box.

[1C82] Internet FAX transmission failure when processing FAX job received
Reset the Received Fax Forward.

[1CC1] Power failure

Check if the power cable is connected properly and it is inserted securely.
Check if the power voltage is unstable.

6
[ 2 ] RFC related error
[2500] HOST NAME error (RFC: 500) / Destination mail address error (RFC: 500) / Terminal mail
address error (RFC: 500)
[2501] HOST NAME error (RFC: 501) / Destination mail address error (RFC: 501) / Terminal mail
address error (RFC: 501)
Check if the Terminal mail address and Destination mail address are correct.
Check if the mail server is operating properly.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.

[2503] Destination mail address error (RFC: 503)

[2504] HOST NAME error (RFC: 504)
[2551] Destination mail address error (RFC: 551)
Check if the mail server is operating properly.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
If the error still occurs, replace the SYS board.

[2550] Destination mail address error (RFC: 550)

Check the state of the mail box in the mail server.

[2552] Terminal/Destination mail address error (RFC: 552)

Confirm the size on the mail server.
Transmit again in text mode or with lower resolution or divide the document and transmit again.
If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.

[2553] Destination mail address error (RFC: 553)

Check if there is an illegal character in the mail box in the mail server.

[ 3 ] Electronic Filing related error

[2B10] No applicable job error in Job control module
[2B11] JOB status abnormality
[2B20] File library function error
[2B30] Insufficient disk space in BOX partition
[2BC0] Fatal failure occurred
[2BC1] System management module resource acquiring failure
2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 109

Erase some data in the Electronic Filing and perform the job in error again (in case of [2B30]).
Ask the administrator if e-Filing has been disabled. (In case of [2CC1])
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Check if there are no other running jobs and perform the HDD formatting (08-690).
If the recovery is still not completed, replace the SYS board.

[2B50] Image library error

[2B90] Insufficient memory capacity
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
If the error still occurs, replace the main memory.
Perform the job in error again.
Check if there are no other running jobs and initialize the Electronic Filing using the Setting Mode
(08-666).

[2B31] Status of specified Electronic Filing or folder is undefined or being created/deleted

Check if the specified Electronic Filing or folder exists. (If no, this error would not occur.)
Delete the specified Electronic Filing or folder.
Perform the job in error again.
If the specified Electronic Filing or folder can not be deleted, initialize the Electronic Filing using the
Setting Mode (08-666).

[2B32] Electronic Filing printing failure: Specified document can not be printed because of
client's access (being edited, etc.)
Check if the specified document exists. (If no, this error would not occur.)
Delete the specified document.
Perform the job in error again.
If the specified document can not be deleted, initialize the Electronic Filing using the Setting Mode
(08-666).

[2B51] List library error

Check if the Function List can be printed out.
If it can be printed out, perform the job in error again.
If it can not be printed out, replace the main memory.
If the recovery is still not completed, perform the HDD formatting (08-690).

[2BA0] Invalid Box password

Check if the password is correct.
Reset the password.
When this error occurs when printing the data in the Electronic Filing, perform the printing with the
administrator's password.
If the recovery is still not completed or in case of invalid password for the operation other than
printing (opening the file, etc.), initialize the Electronic Filing using the Setting Mode (08-666).

[2BA1] A paper size or a color mode not supported in the Electronic Filing function is being
selected.
Check the paper size or color mode.

[2BB1] Power failure

[2BD0] Power failure occurred during restoring of Electronic Filing
e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 110

Check if the power cable is connected properly and it is inserted securely.

Check if the power voltage is unstable.

[2BE0] Machine parameter reading error

Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.

[2BF0] Exceeding maximum number of pages

Reduce the number of inserting pages and perform the job again.

[2BF1] Exceeding maximum number of documents

Backup the documents in the box or folder to PC or delete them.

[2BF2] Exceeding maximum number of folders

Backup the folders in the box or folder to PC or delete them.

[ 4 ] Remote scanning related error

[2A20] System management module resource acquiring failure
Retry the job in error.
If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, then retry the job in error.

[2A40] System error

Turn the power OFF and then back ON, then retry the job in error.

[2A51] Power failure

Check if the power cable is properly connected.
Check if the power supply voltage is inconstant.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 111

[ 5 ] E-mail related error

[2C10] System access abnormality
[2C32] File deletion failure
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
If the error still occurs, first, check if there are no jobs existing and then perform the HDD formatting
(08-690).

[2C11] Insufficient memory

When there are running jobs, perform the job in error again after the completion of the running jobs.
If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.

[2C12] Message reception error

[2C13] Message transmission error
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.

[2C14] Invalid parameter

When a template is used, form the template again.
If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.

[2C15] Exceeding file capacity

Reset and extend the Maximum send to E-mail/iFAX size or reduce the number of pages and
perform the job again.

[2C20] System management module access abnormality

[2C21] Job control module access abnormality
[2C22] Job control module access abnormality
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Check if there are no other running jobs and perform the HDD formatting (08-690).
If the recovery is still not completed, replace the SYS board.

[2C30] Directory creation failure

[2C31] File creation failure
[2C33] File access failure
Check if the access privilege to the storage directory is writable.
Check if the server or local disk has a sufficient space in disk capacity.

[2C40] Image conversion abnormality

[2C62] Memory acquiring failure
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Replace the main memory and perform the job again.

[2C43] Encryption error

Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 112

[2C44] Encryption PDF enforced mode error

Reset the encryption and perform the job in error again.
If an image file not encrypted is created, consult your administrators.

[2C60] HDD full failure during processing

Reduce the number of pages of the job in error and perform the job again.
Check if the server or local disk has a sufficient space in disk capacity.

[2C61] Address Book reading failure

Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Reset the data in the Address Book and perform the job again.

[2C63] Terminal IP address unset

Reset the Terminal IP address.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.

[2C64] Terminal mail address unset

Reset the Terminal mail address.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.

[2C65] SMTP address unset

Reset the SMTP address and perform the job.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.

[2C66] Server time-out error

Check if the SMTP server is operating properly.

[2C67] NIC time-out error

[2C68] NIC access error
[2C6D] NIC system error
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
If the error still occurs, replace the SYS board.

[2C69] SMTP server connection error

Reset the login name and password of SMTP server and perform the job again.
Check if the SMTP server is operating properly.

[2C6A] HOST NAME error (No RFC error)

Check if there is an illegal character in the device name.
Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate device name.

[2C6B] Terminal mail address error

Check the SMTP Authentication method.
Check if there is an illegal character in the Terminal mail address.
Set the correct SMTP Authentication method or delete the illegal character and reset the
appropriate Terminal mail address, then perform the job again.
2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 113

[2C6C] Destination mail address error (No RFC error)

Check if there is an illegal character in the Destination mail address.
Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate Destination mail address, then perform the job
again.

[2C70] SMTP client OFF

Set the SMTP valid and perform the job again.

[2C71] SMTP authentication error

Check that SMTP authentication method, login name and password are correct, then perform
authentication again.

[2C72] POP Before SMTP error

Check that both the POP Before SMTP setting and POP3 setting are correct, then perform
authentication again.

[2C80] E-mail transmission failure when processing E-mail job received

Reset the Received InternetFax Forward.

[2C81] Process failure of FAX job received

Reset the setting of the mail box or Received InternetFax Forward.

[2CC1] Power failure

Check if the power cable is connected properly and it is inserted securely.
Check if the power voltage is unstable.

[ 6 ] File sharing related error

[2D10] System access abnormality
[2D32] File deletion failure
[2DA6] File deletion failure
[2DA7] Resource acquiring failure
Delete some files in the shared folder by using Explorer because of automatic/manual file deletion
failure (in case of [2DA6])
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
If the error still occurs, first, check if there are no jobs existing and then perform the HDD formatting
(08-690).

[2D11] Insufficient memory

When there are running jobs, perform the job in error again after the completion of the running jobs.
If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.
When the Imaging Acceleration Board (GE-1170, optional) is installed
Since the input data are a high-compression PDF created at high speed, an error code is displayed
when the input data cause the overflow of the memory capacity specified for data processing.
Check the content of the data and reattempt the process because the specified memory capacity
cannot be changed. You cannot see if this error will occur until you actually perform the process.
e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 114

[2D12] Message reception error

[2D13] Message transmission error
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.

[2D14] [2D61] Invalid parameter

When a template is used, form the template again.
If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.

[2D15] Exceeding the maximum size for file sharing

Divide the file in error into several files and retry. Or retry the job in a single-page format.

[2D20] System management module access abnormality

[2D21] Job control module access abnormality
[2D22] Job control module access abnormality
[2D60] File library access abnormality
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Check if there are no other running jobs and perform the HDD formatting (08-690).
If the recovery is still not completed, replace the SYS board.

[2D30] Directory creation failure

[2D31] File creation failure
[2D33] File access failure
Check if the access privilege to the storage directory is writable.
Check if the server disc, local disk or USB storage device has a sufficient space in capacity.

[2D40] Image conversion abnormality

Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Replace the main memory and perform the job again.
If the error still occurs, first, check if there are no jobs existing and then initialize the shared folder
using the Setting Mode (08-667).
When the Imaging Acceleration Board (GE-1170, optional) is installed
Refer to the following page:
Service Manual "26.4.4 Abnormality Related to Imaging Acceleration Board (GE-1170, optional)"
[2D43] Encryption error
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.

[2D44] Encryption PDF enforced mode error

Reset the encryption and perform the job in error again.
If an image file not encrypted is created, consult your administrators.

[2D62] File server connection error

Check the IP address or path of the server.
Check if the server is operating properly.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 115

[2D63] Invalid network path

Check the network path.
If the path is correct, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.

[2D64] Login failure

Reset the login name and password. Perform the job.
Check if the account of the server is properly set up.

[2D65] Exceeding documents in folder: Creating new document is failed

Delete some documents in the folder.

[2D66] Storage capacity full failure during processing

Reduce the number of pages of the job in error or set the resolution mode low, and perform the job
again.
Check if the server disc, local disk or USB storage device has a sufficient space in capacity.

[2D67] FTP service not available

Check if the setting of FTP service is valid.

[2D68] File sharing service not available

Check if the setting of SMB is valid.

[2DC1] Power failure

Check if the power cable is connected properly and it is inserted securely.
Check if the power voltage is unstable.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 116

[ 7 ] E-mail reception related error

[3A10] [3A11] [3A12] E-mail MIME error
The format of the mail is not corresponding to MIME 1.0.
Request the sender to retransmit the mail in the format corresponding to MIME 1.0.

[3A20] [3A21] [3A22] E-mail analysis error

[3B10] [3B11] [3B12] E-mail format error
[3B40] [3B41] [3B42] E-mail decode error
These errors occur when the mail data is damaged from the transmission to the reception of the
mail.
Request the sender to retransmit the mail.

[3A30] Partial mail time-out error

The partial mail is not received in a specified period of time.
Request the sender to retransmit the partial mail, or set the time-out period of the partial mail longer.

[3A40] Partial mail related error

The format of the partial mail is not corresponding to this equipment.
Request the sender to remake and retransmit the partial mail in RFC2046 format.

[3A50] [3A51] [3A52] Insufficient HDD capacity error

[3A60] [3A61] [3A62] Warning of insufficient HDD capacity
These errors occur when the HDD capacity is not sufficient for a temporary concentration of the
jobs, etc.
Request the sender to retransmit after a certain period of time, or divide the mail into more than one.
Insufficient HDD capacity error also occurs when printing is disabled for no printing paper.
In this case, supply the printing paper.

[3A70] Warning of partial mail interruption

This error occurs when the partial mail reception setting becomes OFF during the partial mail
reception.
Reset the partial mail reception setting ON and then request the sender to retransmit the mail.

[3A80] [3A81] [3A82] Partial mail reception setting OFF

Reset the partial mail reception setting ON and then request the sender to retransmit the mail.

[3B20] [3B21] [3B22] Content-Type error

The format of the attached file is not supported by this equipment (TIFF-FX).
Request the sender to retransmit the file in TIFF-FX.

[3B30] [3B31] [3B32] Charset error

These errors occur when the standard of the Charset is other than ISO-8559-1 or ISO-8559-2.
Request the sender to reformat the Charset into either of the standards described above and then
retransmit the mail.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 117

[3C10] [3C11] [3C12] [3C13] TIFF analysis error

These errors occur when the mail data is damaged from the transmission to the reception of the
mail, or when the format of the attached file is not supported by this equipment (TIFF-FX).
Request the sender to retransmit the mail.

[3C20] [3C21] [3C22] TIFF compression error

The compression method of the TIFF file is not acceptable for this equipment. (Acceptable: MH/MR/
MMR/JBIG)
Request the sender to retransmit the file in the acceptable compression method.

[3C30] [3C31] [3C32] TIFF resolution error

The resolution of the TIFF file is not acceptable for this equipment. (Acceptable: 200 x 100, 200 x
200, 200 x 400, 400 x 400, 300 x 300 or equivalent)
Request the sender to retransmit the file in the acceptable resolution.

[3C40] [3C41] [3C42] TIFF paper size error

The paper size of the TIFF file is not acceptable for this equipment. (Acceptable: A4, B4, A3, B5, LT,
LG, LD or ST)
Request the sender to retransmit the file in the acceptable paper size.

[3C50] [3C51] [3C52] Offramp destination error

These errors occur when the FAX number of the offramp destination is incorrect.
Request the sender to correct the FAX number of offramp destination and then retransmit the mail.

[3C60] [3C61] [3C62] Offramp security error

These errors occur when the FAX number of the offramp destination is not on the Address Book.
Check if the FAX number of the offramp destination is correctly entered or the number has not been
changed.

[3C70] Power failure error

Check if the mail is recovered after turning ON the power again.
Request the sender to retransmit the mail if it is not recovered.

[3D10] Destination address error

Check if the setting of the server or DNS is correct. Correct if any of the setting is incorrect.
When the content of the setting is correct, confirm the sender if the destination is correct.

[3D20] Offramp destination limitation error

Inform the sender that the transfer of the FAX data over 40 is not supported.

[3D30] FAX board error

This error occurs when the FAX board is not installed or the FAX board has an abnormality.
Check if the FAX board is correctly connected.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 118

[3E10] POP3 server connection error

Check if the IP address or domain name of the POP3 server set for this equipment is correct, or
check if POP3 server to be connected is operating properly.

[3E20] POP3 server connection time-out error

Check if POP3 server to be connected is operating properly.
Check if the LAN cable is correctly connected.

[3E30] POP3 login error

Check if the POP3 server login name and password set for this equipment are correct.

[3E40] POP3 Login Type error

Check that the login type (Auto, POP3 or APOP) to the POP3 server is correct.

6
[3F00] [3F10] [3F20] [3F30] [3F40] File I/O error
These errors occur when the mail data is not transferred properly to the HDD.
Request the sender to retransmit the mail.
Replace the HDD if the error still occurs after retransmission.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 119

6.2.24

Printer function error

[4031] HDD full failure during printing

Reduce the number of pages of the job in error and perform the job again.
Check if the server or local disk has a sufficient space in disk capacity.

[4032] Private-print-only error

Select Private print, and then perform the printing again.

[4033] Printing data storing limitation error

Select Normal Print, and then perform the printing again.

[4034] e-Filing storing limitation error

Select Normal Print, and then perform the printing again.

[4035] Local file storing limitation error

Select Remote (SMB/FTP) for the destination of the file to save.

[4036] User authentication error

Perform the authentication or register as a user, and then perform the printing again.

[4040] Not being authorized to perform JOB

Confirm the administrator for the JOB authorization.

[4050] Problem in LDAP server connection or LDAP server authorization settings

Confirm the administrator for the LDAP server connection or LDAP server authorization settings.

[4300] Job execution error due to functional restrictions

USB direct printing cannot be performed because the function is restricted by the self-diagnosis.
Check the self-diagnosis setting.

[4301] File conversion error

The format of this file (other than PDF and JPEG) is not supported in USB direct printing, or the file
is invalid. Check the file.

[4310] Double-sign encoding error

Printing using this function cannot be performed due to a decoding process error which occurs
because the PDF file is encrypted incorrectly or encrypted in a language not supported.

[4311] Printing not permitted

This file cannot be printed using this function due to the encrypted PDF file not permitting printing or
permitting it only with a low resolution.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 120

[4312] Password mismatching

The entered password is neither matched with a user password nor an owner password. Check the
password again.

[A221] Print job cancellation

This message appears when deleting the job on the screen.

[A222] Print job power failure

When there are running jobs, perform the job in error again after the completion of the running jobs.
If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.

[A290] Limit over error (black)

[A291] Limit over error (black)
[A292] Limit over error (black)
Clear the limit counter (black).

[A2A0] Limit over error (color)

[A2A1] Limit over error (color)
Clear the limit counter (color), or authorize users so that they can perform color printing.

[A2A2] Limit over error (color)

Clear the limit counter (color).

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6 - 121

6.2.25

TopAccess related error

[5110] Toner cartridge detection error

(1)
(2)

Check if the toner cartridge is installed properly.

Check if the toner cartridge detection sensor operates properly.

[5212] Time for cleaning of the slit glass and main charger
(1)
(2)

Clean the slit glass and main charger.

If the message is not cleared after the cleaning, check if there is any detection error, breakage or
poor connection of the needle electrode cleaner detection sensor.

[5BD0] Power failure during restoration

(1)
(2)
(3)

Check if the power cable is connected properly and is inserted securely.

Check if the power voltage is unstable.
Reattempt the restoration of the database (Address Book, templates, F-code (Mailbox) or user
information).

[5C10] FAX Unit attachment error

(1)
(2)
(3)

Check if the FAX Unit is attached.

Check if there is any damage or abnormality on the FAX board.
Check if the connector on the FAX board is connected properly.

[5C11] Network FAX transmission error

The address specified for the network FAX is not registered on the Address Book. Register it.
[5C20] Data import from TopAccess succeeded
Data (Address book, department or user information) have been imported successfully. No
troubleshooting is required.
[5C21] Error in data import from TopAccess
Data import failed because the specified file (Address Book, department or user information) is
incorrect or damaged. Check if the file is incorrect or damaged, and then reattempt the import.
[5C22] Error on data import from TopAccess
(1)

Data import failed because the specified file (Address Book, department or user information) is
incorrect or damaged. Check if the file is incorrect or damaged, and then reattempt the import.
(2) Check that no jobs remain and rebuild the databases (Perform 08-684).
(3) If the error is not recovered, initialize the HDD (Key in "2" at 08-690).
Notes:
If you rebuild the databases with a job remaining, delete it after finishing.
When "Rebuilding all databases (08-684)" is performed, all the data in the Address Book and
Mailbox are deleted. If you back up the data in advance, they will be recovered by restoring
them after rebuilding the database.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6 - 122

7.

REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD

7.1

Removal and Installation of PC Boards/HDD

Note:
When the PC board/HDD is replaced, refer to the respective Notes and Cautions of
Replacement of PC boards and HDD in
P.7-15 "7.2 Precautions, Procedures and Settings
for Replacing PC Boards and HDD".

7.1.1
(1)
(2)
(3)

Hard disk (HDD)

Take off the rear cover-1.

Service Manual "3.5.18 Rear cover-1"
Remove 4 screws.
Disconnect 2 connectors and take off the
HDD case.

HDD Case
Fig. 7-1

(4)

Remove 6 screws, release 1 clamp and take

off the bracket.

Clamp

bracket
Fig. 7-2

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD

7-1

(5)
(6)

Remove 4 screws and take off the hard disk.

Remove 1 screw each and the 2 ground
wires.

Hard disk

Ground wire

Fig. 7-3

7.1.2
(1)
(2)

Board cover

Take off the rear cover-2.

Service Manual "3-5-19 Rear cover-2"
Remove 1 screw and loosen 11 screws.

Fig. 7-4

(3)

Slide the board cover to take it off.

Board cover

Fig. 7-5

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

7-2

7.1.3
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

FAX cover

Take off the rear cover-1.

Service Manual "3.5.18 Rear cover-1"
Release 1 clamp and disconnect 1
connector.
Remove 1 screw and loosen 3 screws.
Slide the FAX cover to take it off.

FAX cover

Fig. 7-6

7.1.4
(1)
(2)

SYS/HDD cooling fan

Take off the FAX cover.

P.7-3 "7.1.3 FAX cover"
Remove 2 screws and take off the SYS/HDD
cooling fan.

SYS/HDD cooling fan

Fig. 7-7

7.1.5
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

SYS board

Take off the board cover.

P.7-2 "7.1.2 Board cover"
Take off the FAX cover.
P.7-3 "7.1.3 FAX cover"
Take off the hard disk.
P.7-1 "7.1.1 Hard disk (HDD)"
Remove 2 screws and take off 2 earth plates.

Earth plate

Fig. 7-8

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD

7-3

(5)

Disconnect 3 connectors and the USB

terminal.

Fig. 7-9

(6)

Remove 7 screws, release 2 locking

supports and take off the SYS board.

SYS board

Fig. 7-10

7.1.6
(1)
(2)
(3)

IMG board

Take off the SYS board.

P.7-3 "7.1.5 SYS board"
Disconnect 2 connectors.
Remove 6 screws and slide the IMG board to
take it off.

IMG board

Fig. 7-11

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

7-4

7.1.7
(1)
(2)
(3)

LGC board

Take off the board cover.

P.7-2 "7.1.2 Board cover"
Disconnect 19 connectors.
Remove 8 screws and slide the LGC board
to take it off.

LGC board
Fig. 7-12

7.1.8
(1)
(2)
(3)

Switching regulator

Take off the rear cover-3.

Service Manual "3.5.20 Rear cover-3"
Remove 1 screw and take off the connector
cover.
Disconnect 3 connectors.

Connector cover
Fig. 7-13

(4)
(5)
(6)

Disconnect 7 connectors.
Remove 2 screws.
Slightly lift up the switching regulator and
release the hook.

Fig. 7-14

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD

7-5

(7)

Tilt the switching regulator to the front side

and take it off.

Switching regulator

Fig. 7-15

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

7-6

7.1.9
(1)
(2)

High-voltage transformer (HVT)

Take off the switching regulator.

P.7-5 "7.1.8 Switching regulator"
Disconnect 22 connectors.

Fig. 7-16

(3)
(4)

Remove 7 screws.
Release 2 locking supports and take off the
high-voltage transformer.

High-voltage transformer
Fig. 7-17

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD

7-7

7.1.10

FIL board

(1)

Take off the right lower cover.

Service Manual "3.5.13 Right lower
cover"
(2) Take off the rear cover-3.
Service Manual "3.5.20 Rear cover-3"
Note:
Release the optional connector (KD-1023/
1024) from the filter bracket if it is connected.

Optional Connector

Fig. 7-18

(3)

Disconnect 2 relay connector of the filter

bracket.

Fig. 7-19

(4)

Release 2 clamps.

Fig. 7-20

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

7-8

(5)

Remove 3 screws and pull out the filter

bracket.
Note:
Do not pull it out too strongly because the
harness is connected to it.

Filter bracket
Fig. 7-21

(6)

Disconnect 5 connectors from the FIL board

and take off the filter bracket.
Note:
The connector connected to CN497 on the
FIL board can be disconnected on the relay
connector side.

Relay connector

(CN497)

Fig. 7-22

(7) Remove 1 binding band.

(8) Remove 2 Faston terminals.
Note:
Be sure to use the correct harness (black or
white) when assembling.
(9)

FIL board

binding band
White

Remove 2 screws, release 2 locking

supports and take off the FIL board.

Locking support

Black

Fig. 7-23

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD

7-9

7.1.11
(1)
(2)

Board case

Take off the board cover.

P.7-2 "7.1.2 Board cover"
Remove 5 screws.

Fig. 7-24

(3)
(4)

Disconnect the USB terminal and 1

connector from the SYS board.
Disconnect the 1 connector from the IMG
board.

IMG Board

SYS Board

Fig. 7-25

(5)

Disconnect 2 connectors from the LGC

board.
LGC board

Fig. 7-26

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

7 - 10

(6)

Release harnesses from 4 clamps.

Fig. 7-27

(7) Open the board case.

Note:
Open the board case gently during
maintenance work or similar.

Board case

Fig. 7-28

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD

7 - 11

7.1.12
(1)
(2)

SRAM board <for LGC board>

Take off the board cover.

P.7-2 "7.1.2 Board cover"
Release 2 latches and take off the SRAM
board for the LGC board with the case.

Latch

Latch Case

Fig. 7-29

(3)

Release 2 latches and take off the SRAM

board for LGC board from the case.

Latch

SRAM board
(for LGC board)

Case
Fig. 7-30

Note:
The shape of the SRAM board for the LGC
board differs from the one for the SYS board.
Be sure to assemble the correct SRAM
board.

SRAM board
(for LGC board)

SRAM board
(for SYS board)

Fig. 7-31

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

7 - 12

7.1.13
(1)
(2)

SRAM board <for SYS board>

Take off the board cover.

P.7-2 "7.1.2 Board cover"
Disconnect 2 connectors and take off the
HDD.

Fig. 7-32

(3)

Release 2 latches and take off the SRAM

board for the SYS board with the case.

7
Latch

Latch
Case

Fig. 7-33

(4)

Release 2 latches and take off the SRAM

board for SYS board from the case.

Latch

SRAM board
(for SYS board)

Case
Fig. 7-34

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD

7 - 13

Note:
The shape of the SRAM board for the SYS
board differs from the one for the LGC board.
Be sure to assemble the correct SRAM
board.

SRAM board
(for SYS board)

SRAM board
(for LGC board)

Fig. 7-35

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

7 - 14

7.2

7.2.1

Precautions, Procedures and Settings for Replacing PC

Boards and HDD
Precautions when replacing PC boards

The ID for each equipment is registered on the LGC board, the IMG board, the SYS board and the
SLG board. So, if their replacement is required, be sure to replace only one board at a time.

If more than one of the LGC board, the IMG board and the SYS board require replacement, replace
them in the following procedure.
1. First, replace one of the board to be replaced.
2. Turn the power ON and confirm that READY is displayed.
3. Turn the power OFF.
4. Replace another board that requires replacement.
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4.

The LGC board and IMG board can be replaced without other settings.

When the HDD requires replacement, see 7.2.3Precautions and procedures when replacing the
HDD.

When the SYS board requires replacement, see 7.2.4Precautions and Procedures when replacing
the SYS board.

When the SLG board requires replacement, see 7.2.5Procedures and settings when replacing the
SLG board.

When SRAM requires replacement, see 7.2.6Precautions and procedure when replacing the
SRAM board (for the SYS board) / 7.2.7Procedures and settings when replacing SRAM board (for
LGC board).

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD

7 - 15

7.2.2

HDD fault diagnosis

This code displays the HDD operation history, which is recorded in the HDD, on the control panel. HDD
failure can be diagnosed or predicted with the information displayed.
1. Display
The following screen is displayed with setting code 08-670.
HDD manufacturer

Model name

HDD serial number

Fig. 7-36

Items supported differ depending on the HDD manufacturer.

--- is displayed on the VALUE, NAV and Worst columns if items are not supported.

2. Usage
The combination of the values of ID=05 and c5 is used to diagnose whether or not the HDD has a
physical failure when HDD failure is suspected (service call F100-108 or 120 occurred).
ID
05
c5
05
c5
05
c5
05
c5
05
c5

Result
VALUE
0
0
From 1 to 999
0
Any value
1 or more
Either one is at least
1000.
All values are
displayed as -------.

Description

Diagnosis

Low possibility of physical failure

HDD replacement
is not required.

Defective sector has been reassigned and HDD is recovered.

HDD replacement
is not required.

High possibility of defective sector existence. (There will be a

possibility of physical failure depending on the use of HDD.)

HDD replacement
is recommended.

High possibility of physical failure

HDD replacement
is recommended.

High possibility of physical failure (A HDD connector, harness

or SYS board may be one of the causes.)

HDD replacement
is recommended.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

7 - 16

3. ID=05 and c5
ID
05

Name
Re-allocated Sector Count

Description
The number of sectors reassigned

c5

Current Pending Sector Count

The number of candidate sectors to

be reassigned

Remarks
This value tends to increase at
HDD failure.
This value tends to increase at
HDD failure.

4. Description of each ID
ID

Name

Meaning

01

Read Error Rate

This attribute is a measure of the read error rate.

02

Throughput Performance

This attribute is a measure of the throughput performance.

03

Spin Up Time

This attribute is a measure of how quickly the drive is able to

spin up from a spun down condition.

04

Spin Start/Stop Count

This attribute is a measure of the total number of spin ups

from a spun down condition.

05

Re-allocated Sector Count

This attribute is a measure of the total number of reallocated

sectors.

07

Seek Error Rate

This is a measure of the seek error rate.

08

Seek Time Performance

This attribute is a measure of a drive's seek performance

during normal online operations.

09

Power-On Hours

This attribute is a measure of the total time (hours or minutes

depending on disk manufacturer) the drive has been on.

0a

Spin Retry Count

This attribute is a measure of the total number of spin retries.

0c

Power Cycle Count

This attribute is a measure of the number of times the drive

has been turned on.

c0

Power off Retract Count

This attribute is a measure of the total number of emergency

unloads.

c1

Load Cycle Count

This attribute is a measure of the total number of load/

unloads.

c2

Temperature

This attribute is a measure of the temperature in the HDD.

c3

ECC On the Fly Count

This attribute is a measure of the total number of the ECC On

the Fly.

c4

Reallocation Event Count

This attribute is a measure of the total number of the

reallocation events.

c5

Current Pending Sector Count

This attribute is a measure of the total number of candidate

sectors to be reallocated.

c6

Off-Line Scan Uncorrectable Sector Count

This attribute is a measure of the total number of

uncorrectable sectors found during the off-line scan.

c7

Ultra DMA CRC Error Count (Rate)

This attribute is a measure of the total number of errors found

in data transfer in the Ultra-DMA mode.

c8

Write Error Rate

This attribute is a measure of the write error rate.

Note:
"Over-range" appears when the digits of the numbers obtained from HDD exceed the acceptable
limit for being displayed on the touch panel. This is not shown as a failure.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD

7 - 17

7.2.3

Precautions and procedures when replacing the HDD

Notes:
When the HDD is replaced, it is necessary to back up the data in the HDD before replacing
and to recover them after replacing.
To maintain the security, ask users to perform the backup/restore for users data/information
in the HDD. The service technician can perform them only when users permit it.
Some data in the HDD cannot be backed up and can be kept only on the paper.
When 08-690 is performed, the HDD self-certificate is not available, so the SSL-related
setting becomes disabled.
Do not replace the HDD and the SRAM board (for the SYS board) together.
A procedure for replacing the HDD is shown below.
Start

[A] Back up data in HDD

[B] Print out "FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE"

[C] Print out "FUNCTION" list

[D] Erase HDD

[E] Replace/Format HDD

[F] Reset user's setting item and restore data/information

[G] Reset "FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE"

[H] Reset "FUNCTION" list

[I] Adjust image quality

Setting completed
Fig. 7-37

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

7 - 18

[A] Back up in HDD

Ask the user (machine administrator) to back up the data in the HDD. Refer to the table below for the
type of data, availability and method of backup.
Type of data in HDD

Availability

Image data in the e-Filing

Available

F-code information, Template

registration information, Address
book data

Available

Department management data

Available

Log data (Print, Scan, FAX

(Transmission/Reception)

Available

Data in the shared folder (Scanned

data, Saved data of copy / FAX
transmission)

Available

Print waiting data (Copying data and

FAX reception data that are waiting to
be printed due to
the paper run-out and jam, etc.)
Print job (Private print data, Schedule
print data)
FAX saved data (Confidential /
Bulletin board data)
Registration data for FAX
transmission (Delayed transmission /
Recovery transmission)

Not available

Not available
Not available
Not available

Backup method
Archive them in the e-Filing of
TopAccess. As for the backup in
Box data, all data (selectable by the
box) can be backed up / restored in
one go by using e-Filing Backup/
Restore Utility.
Back them up in the Administrator
menu of TopAccess.
Export them in Administrator
menu of TopAccess.
Export them in the Administrator
menu of TopAccess. (Import cannot
be performed.)
Copy them to the client computer
via the network. (The data which
have been copied to
the client computer cannot be
copied to the shared folder.)
Finish printing them after supplying
paper or releasing the jam, etc.
(The data cannot be left.)
If any jobs are left, print them. (The
data cannot be backed up.)
Print them. (The data cannot be
backed up.)
Print them. (The data cannot be
backed up.)

[B] Print out FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE

(1)

Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button and then the [USER] button.

(2)

Press the [LIST] button.

(3)

Key in [*] [#] [*] [*] [3] [3] and then press the [START] button. The FUNCTION LIST FOR
MAINTENANCE is printed out.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD

7 - 19

[C] Print out FUNCTION list

(1)

Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button.

(2) Press the [ADMIN] button, enter the password, and then press the [ENTER] button.
Note:
Explain the procedure to the user (machine administrator) and ask him/her to enter his/her
password.
(3)

Press the [LIST/REPORT] button and then the [LIST] button.

(4)

Press the [FUNCTION] button. The FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE is printed out.

[D] Erase HDD

When the Data Overwrite Enabler (GP-1070) is reinstalled, be sure to perform 08-1426 (forcible HDD
data clearing) and confirm that deleting of the HDD data is completed.
P.7-33 "7.3.1 Precautions for Installation of GP-1070 and Disposal of HDD/Board"
[E] Replace / Format HDD
(1)

Confirm that the power is turned OFF.

(2)

Replace the HDD.

(Refer to
P.7-1 "7.1.1 Hard disk (HDD)".)

(3)

Clear the partitions on the HDD.

1. Turn the power ON while pressing [3] and [CLEAR] button simultaneously.
2. When Firmware Version Up Mode appears on the LCD, key in [3] to select 3: All Partition
Delete and Create Loader Partition. and then press the [START] button.
3. When Initialize completed. is displayed on the LCD, clearing of the partitions is completed.

(4)

Turn the power OFF.

(5)

Update the master data using the USB media.

See 8.1Firmware Updating with USB Media for details.

(6)

Start up with the Setting Mode (08).

(7)

Format the HDD (08-690).

When REBOOT THE MACHINE is displayed on the LCD, formatting of the HDD is completed.

(8)

Turn the power OFF.

(9)

When the Fax Unit (GD-1250) is installed, perform Fax Set Up (1*-100) and Clearing the
image data (1*-102).Then turn the power OFF.

(10) Start up with the Setting mode (08).

(11) Check the version of the HDD (08-944).
Confirm the version displayed on the LCD, and then press the [ENTER] button.
(12) Turn the power OFF.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

7 - 20

[F] Reset users setting items and restore data/information

Ask the user (machine administrator) to reset the users setting items and to restore data or information.
Refer to the following for the reset and restore:
Items to reset/restore
Printer driver
F-code information, Template registering
information, Address book data
Department management data
Image data in the Electronic Filing

Method
Upload them in the Administrator menu of TopAccess.
Restore them in the Administrator menu of TopAccess
Import them in the Administrator menu of TopAccess.
Upload them in the e-Filing of TopAccess.

When the SSL is enabled, perform the setting of the following items again with Create selfcertificate of TopAccess.
Country Name
State or Province Name
Locality Name
Organization Name
Organizational Unit Name
Common Name
Email Address

When wireless LAN is used, perform the setting again on the LCD panel. (only when security with a
certificate is used) Also, upload the following certificate file with Install Certificate for Wireless LAN
of TopAccess.
CA certificate
User certificate

[G] Reset FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE

(1)

Print out the FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE list after the formatting. For how to print it
out, refer to [B]Print out FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE.

(2)

While pressing [1] and [3] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Function Mode)

(3)

Compare the lists which were printed before and after the formatting to check the setting items
having the different setting values. Set the value which was set before the formatting.

(4)

Turn the power OFF.

[H] Reset FUNCTION list

Reset the fax function by referring to the function list that was printed out in
FUNCTION list".
(1)

P.7-20 "[C] Print out

Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button.

(2) Press the [ADMIN] button, enter the password, and then press the [ENTER] button.
Note:
Explain the user (machine administrator) about the next operation and ask him/her to enter his/
her password.
(3)

Press the [FAX] button and then the [TERMINAL ID] button to set each item.

(4)

Press the [INITIAL SETUP] button to set each item.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD

7 - 21

[I]

Adjust image quality

(1)

Start up with the Adjustment mode (05).

(2)

Perform Automatic gamma adjustment <PPC> (05-580).

P.3-29 "3.2.1 Automatic gamma adjustment"

(3)

Turn the power OFF.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

7 - 22

7.2.4

Precautions and Procedures when replacing the SYS board

A procedure for SYS board replacement is shown below.

Start

[A] Replace DIMM and SRAM board

[B] Update system ROM version

[C] Check ROM versions

[D] Reinstall options

Setting completed
Fig. 7-38

[A] Replace DIMM and SRAM boards

Note:
Before replacing the SYS board, perform the following procedure.
P.7-15 "7.2.1 Precautions when replacing PC boards"
(1)

Confirm that the power is turned OFF.

(2)

Replace the SYS board.

(3)

Install DIMM (main memory, page memory) to the new SYS board (from the old SYS board).

(4)

Install SRAM board to the new SYS board (from the old SYS board).

[B] Update system ROM version

Update the version of system ROMs (OS data, UI data, System Firmware) with the USB media.
* See 8.1Firmware Updating with USB Media for details.
[C] Check ROM versions
System firmware ROM version (08-900)
FROM basic section software version (08-920)
System firmware internal program version (08-921)
Version of UI data in FROM displayed at power ON (08-930)
[D] Reinstall options
When any of the options below was installed, reinstall a license for the corresponding option following
its unpacking instructions.
Meta Scan Enabler (GS-1010)
External Interface Enabler (GS-1020)
IPSec Enabler (GP-1080)
When GP-1070 (Data Overwrite Enabler) has been installed, F200 service call occurs.
In this case, perform cancelling the F200 service call (installing the OS / HDD SYS / PFC Firmware /
Engine MainFirmware / Scanner Firmware using the USB media), and then install GP-1070 (Data
Overwrite Enabler) again.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD

7 - 23

7.2.5

Procedures and settings when replacing the SLG board

Note:
Before replacing the SLG board, perform the following procedure.
When the SLG board has been replaced, make sure to follow the procedure below.
(1)

Confirm that the power is turned OFF.

(2)

Replace the SLG board.

Service Manual "7.6.12 SLG board (SLG)"

(3)

Update the scanner ROM using the USB Media.

P.8-5 "8.1 Firmware Updating with USB Media"

(4)

Start up with the Adjustment Mode (05).

(5)

Perform Data transfer of characteristic value of scanner / SYS board -> SLG board (05-363).

(6)

Perform Shading correction plate Automatic dust detection adjustment (05-349).

(7)

Turn the power OFF.

(8)

Start up with the Setting Mode (08).

(9)

Check the version of the scanner ROM (08-905).

(10) Turn the power OFF.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

7 - 24

7.2.6

Precautions and procedure when replacing the SRAM board (for

the SYS board)

Note:
Do not replace the HDD and the SRAM board (for the SYS board) together.
Be careful not to damage the board when replacing the SRAM board.
When you replace the SRAM board while the data encryption function is enabled, readout of the
user data/information stored in the HDD becomes impossible
A procedure for replacing the SRAM board is shown below.
When disposing of the SRAM board, perform the items in
P.7-33 "7.3.3 Precautions when disposing
of the SRAM board".

Start

[A] Replace SRAM board

[B] Initialize SRAM system storage area

[C] Clear SRAM update error flags

[D] Initialize SRAM board

[E] Enable HDD encryption

[F] Adjust image quality

[G] Initialize settings when FAX unit (GD-1250) is installed

[H] Set date and time

[I] Set EFI Printer Board

[J] Reinstall options

Setting completed
Fig. 7-39

[A] Replace SRAM board

(1)

Confirm that the power is turned OFF.

(2)

Take off the Fax Unit (GD-1250) if it is installed.

(3)

Replace the SRAM board (for the SYS board).

P.7-13 "7.1.13 SRAM board <for SYS board>"

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD

7 - 25

[B] Initialize SRAM system storage area

(1)

Turn the power ON while pressing [3] and [CLEAR] simultaneously.

(2)

When Firmware Version Up Mode appears on the LCD, check that 4: SRAM Data Format. is
marked and then press the [START] button. If not marked, key in [4] and then press the [START]
button

(3)

When SRAM Data Format Complete. is displayed on the LCD, the formatting is completed.

(4)

Turn the power OFF.

[C] Clear SRAM update Error flags

(1)

Turn the power ON while pressing [3] and the [CLEAR] button simultaneously.

(2)

After Firmware Version Up Mode is displayed on the LCD, check that 1: Clear SRAM update
Error flags. is marked and press the [START] button.
if not, key in [1] and then press the [START] button.

(3)

When SRAM update Error flags cleared. is displayed on the LCD, clearing the flag is
completed.

(4)

Turn the power OFF.

[D] Initialize SRAM board

(1)

Start up with the Setting Mode (08).

(2)

Initialize the SRAM error.

1. When SRAM ERROR DOES IT INITIALIZE is displayed on the LCD, check the destination
and then press the [START] button.
If the destination is not correct, key in the correct one and then press the [START] button.
2. After the confirmation message is displayed, press the [INTERRUPT] button.

(3)

Perform the panel calibration (08-692).

1. Touch the center of + mark displayed on the upper left of the LCD.
2. Touch the center of + mark displayed on the lower right of the LCD.

(4)

Perform the initialization at the software version upgrade (08-947).

(5)

Initialize the NIC information (08-693).

(6)

Enter the serial number (08-995).

Key in the serial number on the label attached to the rear cover of the equipment, and then press
the [OK] button.

(7)

Turn the power off.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

7 - 26

[E] Enable HDD encryption

If the HDD encryption function has been set, perform the following procedure.
(1)

Start up with the Setting mode (08).

(2)

Enable the HDD encryption function (08-9379).

(3)

Format the HDD (08-690).

(4)

Turn the power OFF.

[F] Adjust image quality

(1)

Start up with the Adjustment mode (05).

(2)

Perform Data transfer of characteristic value of scanner (05-364).

(3)

Perform Automatic gamma adjustment <PPC> (05-1642).

P.3-29 "3.2.1 Automatic gamma adjustment"

(4)

Perform Automatic gamma adjustment <PRT> (05-1008).

P.3-44 "3.3.1 Automatic gamma adjustment"

(5)

Turn the power OFF.

[G] Initialize settings when FAX Unit (GD-1250) is installed

(1)

Reinstall the FAX Unit (GD-1250).

(2)

Start up with the Setting mode (08).

(3)

Set the destination of FAX (08-701).

(4)

Turn the power OFF.

(5)

Start up with the FAX Clearing Mode (1*).

(6)

Perform the FAX Set Up (1*-100).

(7)

Turn the power OFF and then back ON.

(8)

Set the dial type according to these buttons: [USER FUNCTIONS] -> [ADMIN] -> [FAX] ->
[INITIAL SETUP]

[H] Set date and time

[USER FUNCTIONS] [ADMIN] [GENERAL] [CLOCK] [DATE/TIME]

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD

7 - 27

[I] Set EFI Printer Board

If the EFI Printer Board (GA-1211) is installed, perform the following procedure.
(1)

Turn the power OFF.

(2)

Start the setting mode (08).

(3)

Initialize the EFI Printer Board (08-700).

(4)

Turn the power OFF.

[J] Reinstall options

When any of the options below was installed, reinstall a license for the corresponding option following
its unpacking instructions.
Meta Scan Enabler (GS-1010)
External Interface Enabler (GS-1020)
IPSec Enabler (GP-1080)
When GP-1070 (Data Overwrite Enabler) has been installed, F200 service call occurs.
In this case, perform cancelling the F200 service call (installing the OS / HDD SYS / PFC Firmware /
Engine MainFirmware / Scanner Firmware using the USB media), and then install GP-1070 (Data
Overwrite Enabler) again.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

7 - 28

7.2.7

Procedures and settings when replacing SRAM board (for LGC

board)

Note:
Be careful not to damage the board when replacing the SRAM board.
A procedure for replacing the SRAM board is shown below.
When disposing of the SRAM board, perform the items in
P.7-33 "7.3.3 Precautions when disposing
of the SRAM board"
Start

[A] Replace SRAM board

[B] Adjust image quality

[C] Set line adjustment mode

7
Settings completed
Fig. 7-40

[A] Replace SRAM board

(1)

Confirm that the power is turned OFF.

(2)

Replace the SRAM board (for the LGC board).

P.7-12 "7.1.12 SRAM board <for LGC board>"

[B] Adjust image quality

(1)

Write down the adjustment values of the following (05) code attached to the rear side of the front
cover.
L (0)

H (0)

05/2622
05/2623
05/2624
05/2625
05/2627
05/2628
05/2629
05/2630
05/2984
05/2983

(2)

Start up with the Adjustment mode (05).

(3)

Enter all the adjustment values written down in step (1).

Remark:
However, do not adjust the values of 05-2985, 2986, 2987 and 2988.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD

7 - 29

(4)

Reset the auto toner sensor.

1. Turn the power OFF.
2. Replace the developer materials for four colors (YMCK).
3. Perform automatic adjustment of auto-toner sensor. Start up with the Adjustment mode (05),
enter [200] and press the [START] button.
Notes:
You can reset the auto-toner sensor by directly entering the adjustment values for (05) 205-0
to 3, (05) 2409-0 to 3 and (05) 2411 with the Adjustment mode data list, which has been
printed during normal operation of equipment such as when it is setup, when preventive
maintenance (PM) is performed or when developer material is replaced, etc.
If you perform automatic adjustment (05-200) of the auto-toner sensor without replacing the
developer materials for four colors (YMCK), image quality is not guaranteed.

(5)

Adjust the image quality control (05-396).

(6)

Perform Tilt motor initial excitation setting (05-4721).

(7)

Perform the enforced position adjustment (05-4719).

(8)

Perform printer related adjustment and scanner related adjustment.

P.3-15 "3.1.8 Image dimensional adjustment at the printing section"
P.3-20 "3.1.9 Image dimensional adjustment at the scanning section"

(9)

Perform Automatic gamma adjustment <PPC> (05-1642).

P.3-29 "3.2.1 Automatic gamma adjustment"

(10) Perform Automatic gamma adjustment <PRT> (05-1008).

P.3-44 "3.3.1 Automatic gamma adjustment"
Note:
Usually, it is only necessary to perform automatic gamma adjustment for [Plain paper]; however if
other paper is used, perform automatic gamma adjustment per paper type.
[C] Set line adjustment mode
(1)

Turn the power OFF.

(2)

Start up with the Setting Mode (08).

(3) Set Line adjustment mode to 0: For factory shipment (08-203).

Note:
Be sure to change the setting of Line adjustment mode (08-203) to 0: For factory shipment.
Since 1: For line is set for Line adjustment mode in SRAM supplied as a service part, number
of prints is not counted unless it is changed.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

7 - 30

7.2.8

Firmware confirmation after the PC board/HDD replacement

After replacing the PC board/HDD, check the firmware version in the setting mode (08) and confirm if
the firmware combination is correct.
Firmware
Updating HDD/UI data

Code

Remarks

08-944

HDD Version

08-924

Version of UI data language 1 in HDD

Updating System ROM

08-900

System firmware ROM version

08-921

System firmware ROM internal program version

Updating OS

08-920

FROM basic section software version

Updating Engine ROM

08-903

Engine ROM version

Updating Scanner ROM

08-905

Scanner ROM version

Updating PFC ROM

08-906

PFC ROM version

Updating RADF ROM

08-907

RADF ROM version

Updating Finisher ROM

08-908

Finisher ROM version

Saddle stitcher ROM version

08-911

Hole punch unit ROM version

08-9945

Converter ROM version

Updating FAX ROM

08-915

FAX ROM version

Imaging Acceleration Board

ROM

08-9965

Imaging Acceleration Board SROM version

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD

7 - 31

7.2.9

Electronic key re-registration using the one-time dongle

[A] Re-registration when the board is replaced

The Electronic key registered using the one-time dongle can be re-registered only in the same
equipment. When the SYS board or SRAM board (for SYS board) is replaced, follow the procedures for
re-registration given below.
(1)

After the SYS board or SRAM board is replaced, set up the equipment referring to the following
procedures.
P.7-23 "7.2.4 Precautions and Procedures when replacing the SYS board"
P.7-25 "7.2.6 Precautions and procedure when replacing the SRAM board (for the SYS
board)"

(2)

Reinstall the options referring to the following procedures.

P.7-23 "[D] Reinstall options"
P.7-28 "[J] Reinstall options"

(3)

Perform 08-3840 with the one-time dongle previously used for registering the Electronic key.

(4)

When the authentication succeeds, the re-registration screen appears and the available reregistration numbers are displayed after the option names.

(5) Perform the registration in the same manner as a regular one.

Note:
This procedure is available only with the one-time dongle used for the previous registration, since
the model information registered in it is utilized. Use the same one-time dongle and the
equipment when registering the Electronic key.
[B] Re-registration when the equipment is replaced due to malfunction
When the equipment has to be replaced due to a malfunction, return the Electronic key registered in the
equipment to the one-time dongle and register it to the new equipment following the procedure below.
Note:
The Electronic key of the IPSec option (GP-1080) cannot be re-registered.
(1)

Start up with the Setting mode (08).

(2)

Perform 08-3870 and check the registered Electronic key.

(3)

Connect the one-time dongle used for registering the Electronic key to the USB port of the
equipment.
Note:
The one-time dongle to be used is the one for the previous registration of the Electronic key.

(4)

Perform 08-3841. The Electronic keys which can be returned to the one-time dongle are
displayed.

(5)

Select one and press the [RETURN] button.

Note:
The Electronic key is deleted from the equipment and is stored in the one-time dongle.
(6)

After the equipment is replaced, start up with the Setting mode (08).

(7)

Connect the one-time dongle to the USB port and perform 08-3840.

(8)

Perform the re-registration in the same manner as a regular one.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

7 - 32

7.3

7.3.1

Precautions for Installation of GP-1070 and Disposal of HDD/

Board
Precautions for Installation of GP-1070 and Disposal of HDD/
Board

When installing the Data Overwrite Enabler (GP-1070), perform the following setting:
08-1422: HDD data overwriting type setting
This setting is the overwriting method complying with DoD 5220.22-M.
0: LOW: This is the standard overwriting method. (This method is used normally.)
1: MEDIUM: This overwriting method is more secure than LOW. The erasing time is between
LOW and HIGH.
2: HIGH:This is the most secure overwriting method. It takes the longest time to erase data
If disposing of the HDD when the Data Overwrite Enabler (GP-1070) has been installed, perform the
following settings for security.
P.2-69 "2.5.6 System"
08-1424: HDD data clearing type setting (forcible clearing)
This setting is the overwriting method complying with DoD 5220.22-M.
0: LOW: This is the standard overwriting method. (This method is used normally.)
1: MEDIUM: This overwriting method is more secure than LOW. The erasing time is between
LOW and HIGH.
2: HIGH: This is the most secure overwriting method. It takes the longest time to erase data.
08-1426: Forcible HDD data clearing
HDD data are cleared according to the setting of 08-1424
Note:
The process is displayed as a percentage during forcible HDD data clearing. Never turn the
power OFF until 100% is displayed and the process is completed.

7.3.2

Precautions when disposing of the SYS board

When disposing of the SYS board, data clearing is not required since important data, such as user
information, etc. are stored in the SRAM board.

7.3.3

Precautions when disposing of the SRAM board

When disposing of the SRAM board, perform 08-1428 (Forcible SRAM backup data all clearing) for
security reasons.
Note:
If these codes are performed, the equipment cannot be started up.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD

7 - 33

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

7 - 34

8.

FIRMWARE UPDATING

When you want to update the firmware to the latest one or the equipment becomes inoperable due to
some defect in the firmware, updating can be performed as follows.
Equipment
Firmware

Updating method
USB media

Master data
(HDD program data, System firmware, UI data)
System ROM
(OS data)

USB media
Download jig
(PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2)
USB media
Download jig
(PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2)
USB media
Download jig
(K-PWA-DLM-320)

Engine ROM
(Main firmware)
Scanner ROM
(Scanner firmware)

Options
Model name
Reversing Automatic Document
Feeder (RADF)
(MR-3018)

Firmware
RADF firmware

Finisher
(MJ-1101)

Finisher firmware

Saddle Stitch Finisher

(MJ-1030)
Hanging Finisher
(MJ-1031)
Hole Punch Unit
(MJ-6101)
Fax Unit
(GD-1250)
Imaging Acceleration Board
(GE-1170)

Converter firmware*
Finisher firmware
Saddle stitcher firmware
Finisher firmware

Updating method

Download jig
(K-PWA-DLM-320)

Hole punch unit firmware

FAX firmware
Imaging Acceleration Board firmware USB media

The harness jig for board connection (HRNS-CNV-DL-JIG) is necessary.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

8-1

B. System ROM

A. Master data / System ROM /

Engine ROM / Scanner ROM /
Imaging Acceleration Board ROM

PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2

ROM4 ROM1
ROM5 ROM2
ROM6 ROM3

USB Storage Device

C. Scanner ROM
K-PWA-DLM-320

D. RADF ROM (MR-3018)

E. Engine ROM
ROM4 ROM1

K-PWA-DLM-320

PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2

ROM5 ROM2
ROM6 ROM3

F. FAX ROM (GD-1250)

K-PWA-DLM-320

B
C
D

Master data, System ROM, Engine ROM, Scanner ROM

Imaging Acceleration Board ROM
System ROM, Engine ROM, Scanner ROM
Scanner ROM
RADF ROM (MR-3018)

P. 8-7
P. 8-17
P. 8-27
P. 8-33
P. 8-35

E
F

Engine ROM
FAX ROM (GD-1250)

P. 8-29
P. 8-54

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

8-2

G. Finisher ROM (MJ-1101)

K-PWA-DLM-320

H. Hole punch unit ROM (MJ-6101)

K-PWA-DLM-320

I. Converter ROM (MJ-1101)

K-PWA-DLM-320

J. Finisher ROM (MJ-1030)

K-PWA-DLM-320

K. Finisher ROM (MJ-1031)

K-PWA-DLM-320

G
H
I
J
K

Finisher ROM (MJ-1101)

Hole punch unit ROM (MJ-6101)
Converter ROM(MJ-1101)
Finisher ROM (MJ-1030)
Finisher ROM (MJ-1031)

P. 8-37
P. 8-43
P. 8-39
P. 8-47
P. 8-51

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

8-3

Notes:
Written firmware varies depending on the kinds of the boards provided as service parts. For
updating, only the minimum firmware is installed on the system control PC board, logic PC
board, and scanning section control PC board. No firmware is installed on the FAX board. The
latest version of the firmware at the time of delivery is written on the RADF control PC board
and finisher control PC board.
When any of above boards is replaced with a new one in the field, check the other firmware
version used and then update with a corresponding suitable version.
The firmware (master data) is not installed on the hard disk provided as a service part. When
the hard disk is replaced with a new one, check the other firmware version used and then
write a corresponding suitable version.
"Can't fetch Ver." is displayed in the Installed Version field when the version of the installed
ROM cannot be acquired properly. If a normal power on is not performed after the firmware is
updated and [POWER] + [4]+ [9] is performed a second time, "Can't fetch Ver." may be
displayed on the control panel for some ROMS. A normal power on must be performed.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

8-4

8.1

Firmware Updating with USB Media

Firmware can be updated by storing update programs and firmware data files in the USB media.
Note:
When the update is performed, use the latest program.
Program necessary for updating
Update program
Update program loader

Data file name

mentusb2.o

Model specific update program

dlFirmWare_2820C_3530C

Remarks
An error occurs at a time of the [4] + [9]
startup, unless this program is stored in
the USB media.
* Be sure to save this data file to the
root directory of the USB media.
An error occurs at a time of the [4] + [9]
startup, unless this program is stored in
the USB media.

Firmware type and data file name for updating

Equipment
Firmware

Stored

Data file name

Remarks

Master data

Hard disk

hdd.bin

HDD program data,

System firmware,
UI data

System ROM

System control PC
board
(SYS board)

firmImage0.bin

OS data

Engine ROM

Logic PC board
(LGC board)

T450MWW.xxx
* xxx is version.

Main firmware

Scanner ROM

Scanning section
control PC board
(SLG board)

T450SLGWW.xxx
* xxx is version.

Scanner firmware

Options
Firmware
Imaging Acceleration
Board ROM

Stored

Data file name

Imaging Acceleration
Board (MEP board)

T450IWW.xxx
* xxx is version.

Remarks
Imaging Acceleration
Board firmware

Store the update program loader (mentusb2.o) in the root directory, and store the model specific update
program (dlFirmWare_2820C_3530C) and the data file for updating in the model specific folder.
Model specific folder name

2820C_3530C

USB media
mentusb2.o
2820C_3530C

dlFirmWare_2820C_3530C
firmImage0.bin
hdd.bin
T450MWW.xxx
T450SLGWW.xxx
T450IWW.xxx

Fig. 8-1
2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

8-5

Notes:
Since the date and time set in the equipment are recorded in the firmware update log, make
sure that they are correct before updating the firmware.
Never change the model specific folder name, since it is used for identifying the data file when
the data files used for updating multiple models are stored in the USB media.
Important:
Only the USB media which meet the following conditions should be used for updating. Be
careful since updating with any device other than the above is never guaranteed.
- A combination USB media with a flash memory (to be connected directly to the USB port)
and its capacity is between 256 MB and 512 MB (or 1 GB).
- Operation of the USB media used for updating has been confirmed at the input check of
this equipment (Test mode 03).
( P.2-4 "2.1 Input check (Test mode 03)")
- USB media which comply with the following standards regulated by USB-IF (USB
Implementers Forum)
Class number:
8 (=08h) (Mass-storage class)
Sub-class number:
6 (=06h) (SCSI transfer command set)
Protocol number:
80 (=50h) (Bulk-Only)
* Most common USB media comply with the specification above and can be used for
updating. However, the operation in all the Multi Functional Digital Color Systems and
Multi Functional Digital Systems is not necessarily guaranteed since the most of these
devices are developed based on use in a PC environment (Windows or Macintosh).
Therefore, check thoroughly that the device is operational in the equipment for which
the updating will be performed when purchasing it.

The USB media complying with USB1.1 and USB2.0 can be used for updating.

Do not update the firmware by any storage device other than a flash memory (such as a USB
connection type memory card reader, CD/DVD drive or hard disk), since it is never
guaranteed.

It is possible to store the model specific update program and the data file for updating directly
in the root directory when you store the updating data file for one specific model in the USB
media. However, if the model specific folder for the same model as that of the data file stored
in the root directory already exists, this will have priority.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

8-6

8.1.1

Master data/System ROM/Engine ROM/Scanner ROM

Important:
The file system of USB media should be formatted in the FAT or FAT32 format. Be careful
since the devices formatted in NTFS format will not be able to be operated. The file system
can be confirmed on the properties in applications such as Explorer of Windows.
Never shut down the equipment during the update. Firmware data and the following option
data (if installed) could be damaged and may not be able to be operated properly.
- Data Overwrite Enabler (GP-1070)
- Meta Scan Enabler (GS-1010)
- External Interface Enabler (GS-1020)
- IPSec Enabler (GP-1080)
[A] Update procedure
(1)

Connect the USB media to the PC and write the model specific folder in which the data file is
stored.
Store the update program loader (mentusb2.o) in the root directory, and store the model specific
update program (dlFirmWare_2820C_3530C) and the data file for updating in the model specific
folder.

(2)

Press the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel to shut down the equipment.

(3)

Connect the USB media to the USB port on the right upper cover.
USB port

USB media
Fig. 8-2

Note:
Updating cannot be performed with multiple USB media connected at the same time.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

8-7

(4)

Press the [ON/OFF] button while simultaneously holding down the [4] and [9] buttons.
Data in the USB media are checked and the checking status is displayed on the screen.
The screen for selecting items to be updated is displayed after approx. 3 minutes.
On this screen, the current firmware version of this equipment and the firmware version of data to
be updated are displayed.

Fig. 8-3

Notes:
The display of items on this screen varies depending on the types of data written on the USB
media. Each item is displayed only when each data file is written on the USB media in the
following conditions.
Item
1. OS Update
2. HDD SYS Update
3. Engine Main Firmware Update
4. Scanner Firmware Update
5. MEP Firmware Update

Condition
firmImage0.bin is written.
hdd.bin is written.
T450MWW.xxx is written.
* xxx is version.
T450SLGWW.xxx is written.
* xxx is version.
For the details, see the following page:
P.8-17 "8.1.2 Imaging Acceleration Board ROM
(GE-1170)"

If the USB media are not recognized properly, Set Correct USB Storage Device message is
displayed. In this case, disconnect the USB media and connect again within 3 minutes, or
shut down the equipment and connect the device properly. Then repeat the procedure from
(4).
If any of the error messages below is displayed, confirm if the update program or the data file
in the USB media is correct. Then repeat the procedure from (4).
Error
Error message
number
There is no mentusb2.o

Cause

01

There is no dlFirmWare_2820C_3530C in the

storage device.

02

Error Loadmodule

03

Machine Model Get Error

04

Please Change USB Storage or Please Check

ROMDATA
Other models ROMDATA Vxxxx.xxx x
* The version name comes at xxxx.xxx.x.

05

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

Update program loader (mentusb2.o)

is not stored.
Model specific update program
(dlFirmWare_2820C_3530C ) is not
stored.
Module loading failed.
Model information was not
downloaded.
Checking of data file failed.
Master data of other model (hdd.bin)
are stored.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

8-8

(5)

Select the item with the digital keys.

* is displayed next to the selected item. Display or delete the * by pressing the number of the
item.
Item
1. OS Update
2. HDD SYS Update
3. Engine Main Firmware Update
4. Scanner Firmware Update

(6)

Remarks
Updating OS data
Updating Master data and System data
Updating Engine ROM
Updating Scanner ROM

Press the [START] button.

Updating starts and the processing status is displayed on the LCD screen.
Status display during update
OS Update.......................... FROM write
HDD SYS Update ............... Copy file
Engine Firm Update........... Flash Update
Scanner Firm Update ..........Flash Update

(7)

Status display when update is completed

OS Update.......................... Completed
HDD SYS Update ............... Completed
Engine Firm Update........... Completed
Scanner Firm Update ..........Completed

Update Completed. is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen after the updating is
completed properly.

Fig. 8-4

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

8-9

Notes:
Update Failed. is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not
completed properly. Failed appears next to the failed item on the status display. Even
though an update fails, do not turn the power OFF until other updates are finished. If "Update
Failed" appears at the bottom of the screen, turn OFF the power and then check the following
items. After confirming and clearing the problems, restart updating from the beginning.
- Do the USB media meet the conditions to be used for updating?
- Is the data file written properly on the USB media?
- Are the USB media installed properly?
- Do the USB media and equipment operate properly?
When an error occurred and the update failed, Update Failed or Failed appears on the
screen and an error code appears next to the message. The content of each error code is
shown below.
OS update Error
Error number
O01

Error content
FROM writing failed

O02

FROM verification error

O03

File operation error

O04

SRAM flag set error

O05

Electronic key data backup error

O06

Device error

HDD update Error

Error number

Error content

H01

File creation error

H02

File decompression error

H03

Partition mount error

H00

Other errors

Engine update Error

Error number

Error message

Error content

M01

Time out
(When the download is requested)

Communication timeout
(When the download is requested)

M02

Time out
(When the download is written)

Communication timeout
(When the download is written)

M03

Time out
(When the download is finished)

Communication timeout
(When the download is finished)

M04

Reception failed
(When the download is requested)

Downloading request was denied.

(When the download is requested)

M05

Deletion error
(When the download is written)

Deletion error
(When the download is written)

M06

Writing error
(When the download is written)

Writing error
(When the download is written)

M07

Checksum error
(When the download is finished)

Checksum error
(When the download is finished)

M08

Reception status code abnormality

(When the download is requested)

Reception status code abnormality

(When the download is requested)

M09

Reception status code abnormality

(When the download is written)

Reception status code abnormality

(When the download is written)

M10

Reception status code abnormality

(When the download is finished)

Reception status code abnormality

(When the download is finished)

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

8 - 10

Engine update Error

Error number
M00

Error message

Error content

Other error

Other error

Scanner update Error

Error number

Error message

Error content

S01

Time out
(When the download is requested)

Communication timeout
(When the download is requested)

S02

Time out
(When the download is written)

Communication timeout
(When the download is written)

S03

Time out
(When the download is finished)

Communication timeout
(When the download is finished)

S05

Deletion error
(When the download is written)

Deletion error
(When the download is written)

S06

Writing error
(When the download is written)

Writing error
(When the download is written)

S08

Reception status code abnormality

(When the download is requested)

Reception status code abnormality

(When the download is requested)

S09

Reception status code abnormality

(When the download is written)

Reception status code abnormality

(When the download is written)

S10

Reception status code abnormality

(When the download is finished)

Reception status code abnormality

(When the download is finished)

S00

Other error

Other error

(8)

Press the [ON/OFF] button to shut down the equipment, and then remove the USB media.

(9)

Perform the initialization of the updating data.

Press the [ON/OFF] button while simultaneously holding down the [0] and [8] buttons.
Key in 947, and then press the [START] button.
Press the [INITIALIZE] button.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

8 - 11

[B] Confirmation of the updated data

After the updating is completed, check each data version in the Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the
data were overwritten properly.
P.8-56 "8.4 Confirmation of the updated data"

[C] Adjustment
Perform the adjustment of the equipment.

Performing Image Quality Control (05-396):

P.3-4 "3.1.3 Performing Image Quality Control (ICQ)"

Adjustment of Color Registration Control (05-4719):

P.3-6 "3.1.4 Adjustment of Color Registration Control"

Automatic gamma adjustment <PPC> (05-1642) (using [4][FAX] test pattern):

P.3-29 "3.2.1 Automatic gamma adjustment"

Automatic gamma adjustment < PRT > (05-1008) (using [70][FAX] test pattern):
P.3-44 "3.3.1 Automatic gamma adjustment"

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

8 - 12

[D] Display during the update

Update is performed in parallel as shown in the transition diagram below.
Item Selection Screen for Update

[System ROM]

[Master data]

[Engine ROM]

[Scanner ROM]

1. OS Update

2. HDD SYS Update

3. Engine Main
Firmware Update

4. Scanner
Firmware Update

Update Completed
Fig. 8-5

Below is an example of the changes of the LCD screen during update.

System ROM

Fig. 8-6

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

8 - 13

Master data

Fig. 8-7

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

8 - 14

Engine ROM

Fig. 8-8

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

8 - 15

Scanner ROM

Fig. 8-9

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

8 - 16

8.1.2

Imaging Acceleration Board ROM (GE-1170)

Important:
The file system of USB media should be formatted in the FAT or FAT32 format. Be careful
since the devices formatted in NTFS format will not be able to be operated. The file system
can be confirmed on the properties in applications such as Explorer of Windows.
The firmware version of the Imaging Acceleration Board ROM differs depending on the
version of the system firmware.
Therefore confirm in advance that the version is the correct one before updating the Imaging
Acceleration Board ROM.
[A] Update procedure
(1)

Connect the USB media to the PC and write the model specific folder in which the data file is
stored.
Store the update program loader (mentusb2.o) in the root directory, and store the model specific
update program (dlFirmWare_2820C_3530C) and the data file for updating in the model specific
folder.

(2)

Press the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel to shut down the equipment.

(3)

Connect the USB media to the USB port on the right upper cover.

USB port

USB media
Fig. 8-10

Note:
Updating cannot be performed with multiple USB media connected at the same time.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

8 - 17

(4)

Press the [ON/OFF] button while simultaneously holding down the [4] and [9] buttons.
Data in the USB media are checked and the checking status is displayed on the screen.
The screen for selecting items to be updated is displayed after approx. 3 minutes.
On this screen, the current firmware version of this equipment and the firmware version of data to
be updated are displayed.

Fig. 8-11

Notes:
The display of items on this screen varies depending on the types of data written on the USB
media. Each item is displayed only when each data file is written on the USB media in the
following conditions.
Item
1. OS Update
2. HDD SYS Update
3. Engine Main Firmware Update
4. Scanner Firmware Update
5. MEP Firmware Update

Condition
For the details, see the following page:
P.8-7 "8.1.1 Master data/System ROM/Engine ROM/
Scanner ROM"

The Imaging Acceleration Board (GE-1170, optional) must

be installed.
T450IWW.xxx is written.
* xxx is version.

If the USB media are not recognized properly, Set Correct USB Storage Device message is
displayed. In this case, disconnect the USB media and connect again within 3 minutes, or
shut down the equipment and connect the device properly. Then repeat the procedure from
(4).
If any of the error messages below is displayed, confirm if the update program or the data file
in the USB media is correct. Then repeat the procedure from (4).
Error
Error message
number
There is no mentusb2.o

Cause

01

There is no dlFirmWare_2820C_3530C in the

storage device.

02
03

Error Loadmodule
Machine Model Get Error

04

Please Change USB Storage or Please Check

ROMDATA
Other models ROMDATA Vxxxx.xxx x
* The version name comes at xxxx.xxx.x.

05

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

Update program loader (mentusb2.o)

is not stored.
Model specific update program
(dlFirmWare_2820C_3530C ) is not
stored.
Module loading failed.
Model information was not
downloaded.
Checking of data file failed.
Master data of other model (hdd.bin)
are stored.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

8 - 18

(5)

Select 5. MEP Firmware Update with the digital keys.

* is displayed next to the selected item. Display or delete the * by pressing the number of the
item.
Item
5. MEP Firmware Update

(6)

Press the [START] button.

Updating starts and the processing status is displayed on the LCD screen.
Status display during update
MEP Firm Update ..........
SROM Update

(7)

Remarks
Updating the Imaging Acceleration Board ROM

Status display when update is completed

MEP Firm Update ..........
Completed

Update Completed. is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen after the updating is
completed properly.

Fig. 8-12

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

8 - 19

Notes:
Update Failed. is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not
completed properly. Failed appears next to the failed item on the status display. Even
though an update fails, do not turn the power OFF until other updates are finished. If "Update
Failed" appears at the bottom of the screen, turn OFF the power and then check the following
items. After confirming and clearing the problems, restart updating from the beginning.
- Do the USB media meet the conditions to be used for updating?
- Is the data file written properly on the USB media?
- Are the USB media installed properly?
- Do the USB media and equipment operate properly?
When an error occurred and the update failed, Update Failed or Failed appears on the
screen and an error code appears next to the message. The content of each error code is
shown below.
Imaging Acceleration Board update Error
Error number
I01
I02
I03
I04
I05
I06
I00

(8)

Error message

Error content

Board Error

The MEP board is not operating

properly.

Parameter Error

The parameter for API function is

incorrect.

File Read Failed

An error occurred during a file input

operation.

Temporary File Error

An error occurred during a temporary file

operation.

File Format Error

The format of the input file is incorrect.

Memory Allocation Failed

An error occurred during the memory

allocation.

Other error

Other error

Press the [ON/OFF] button to shut down the equipment, and then remove the USB media.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

8 - 20

[B] Confirmation of the updated data

After the updating is completed, check each data version in the Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the
data were overwritten properly.
P.8-56 "8.4 Confirmation of the updated data"
Note:
Check that the icon of the Imaging Acceleration Board on the scan menu is displayed in color.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

8 - 21

[C] Display during the update

Below is an example of the changes of the LCD screen during update.
Imaging Acceleration Board ROM

Fig. 8-13

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

8 - 22

8.2

Firmware Updating with PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2

The data to be overwritten by this update are as follows.

Update the ROM data written on each board according to the need such as the case of replacing the
system control PC board or logic PC board.
Equipment
Firmware

Stored

System ROM
(OS data)

System control PC board

(SYS board)

Engine ROM
(Main firmware)

Logic PC board
(LGC board)

PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48MB)
Connector
(for SYS board
connection)

Connector
(for ROM writer
adapter connection)

ROM4 ROM1
ROM5 ROM2
ROM6 ROM3

Fig. 8-14

Important:
The download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2) is the jig in which the Flash ROM is mounted on the
board directly. Therefore, ROM writer adapter (PWA-DL-ADP-350) is required to write the data to
these Flash ROMs. Refer to the following to write the data.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

8 - 23

8.2.1

Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2)

The download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2) is that in which the Flash ROM is mounted on the board
directly. The ROM writer adapter (PWA-DL-ADP-350) is required to write data to these Flash ROMs.
Connect the download jig with the ROM writer via ROM writer adapter to write data. For the procedure
to write data, refer to the downloading procedure, instruction manual of each ROM writer, or other
sources.
Download jig
(PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2)
ROM writer adapter
(PWA-DL-ADP-350)

PC
ROM writer
Fig. 8-15

Note:
There are two types of the ROM writer adapter. Use the proper one according to the ROM writer
to be used. Applicable type of the adapter for the ROM writer can be confirmed by the model
name indicated on the board. Confirm that the adapter is available for the ROM writer to be used
before connecting them. If an unapplied adapter is connected, the application of the ROM writer
judges it as an error and writing the data cannot be implemented. Applicable combinations of the
ROM writer and adapter are as follows.
ROM writer

ROM writer adapter

Minato Electronics MODEL 1881XP/1881UXP

(or equivalent)

PWA-DL-ADP-350-1881 (model 1881)

Minato Electronics MODEL 1893/1895/1931/1940

(or equivalent)

PWA-DL-ADP-350-1931 (model 1931)

model 1881
model 1931
(LV650)

[PWA-DL-ADP-350-1881]

[PWA-DL-ADP-350-1931]

Fig. 8-16

Fig. 8-17

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

8 - 24

[A] Precautions when writing the System ROM data

Set the writing voltage (VID) to 3.3 V.
When an error appears while the data are being written to the download jig, set the writing voltage
(VID) to 12 V and then write them.
When writing the data, set the address from 0 to 3FFFFF. The data may not be written correctly if it
is not set.
Load the data file into the buffer by means of the following settings.
Auto Format Detected
From File
To Buffer
From File Address
To Buffer Address
Buffer Size
Clear Buffer Before Loading the file

[A-1]

Binary
Normal
Normal
0
0
800100
Clear buffer with blank state

System ROM
System ROM
Rotary Switch

File Name

Flash ROM

firmImage_jig0.bin

ROM1

firmImage_jig1.bin

ROM2

N/A

ROM3

N/A

ROM4

N/A

ROM5

N/A

ROM6

Note:
Be sure not to confuse different ROM Versions since the file name is identical although the ROM
version is different.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

8 - 25

[B] Precautions when writing the Engine ROM data

Clear the buffer of the ROM writer by means of the following settings.
From Address
0
800000

To Address
800000
8000FF

Code
FF
00

Set the writing voltage (VID) to 3.3 V.

When an error appears while the data are being written to the download jig, set the writing voltage
(VID) to 12 V and then write them.
When writing the data, set the address from 0 to 3FFFFF. The data may not be written correctly if it
is not set.
Load the data file into the buffer by means of the following settings.
Auto Format Detected
From File
To Buffer
From File Address
To Buffer Address
Buffer Size
Clear Buffer Before Loading the file

[B-1]

Binary
Normal
Normal
0
300000
800000
Clear buffer with blank state

Engine ROM
Engine ROM
Rotary Switch

File Name

Flash ROM

T450MWW.xxx

ROM1

N/A

ROM2

N/A

ROM3

N/A

ROM4

N/A

ROM5

N/A

ROM6

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

8 - 26

8.2.2

System ROM

The firmware of the system ROM can be updated individually by using WA-DWNLD-350-JIG2.
Important:
Be sure to shut down the equipment before installing and removing the download jig.
Do not shut down the equipment during the update. The data could be damaged and not be
able to be operated properly.
[A] Update procedure
(1)

Write the ROM data to be updated to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2).

(2)

Press the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel to shut down the equipment.

(3)

Take off the cover plate.

Cover plate
Fig. 8-18

(4)

Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN101) on the SYS board.

Download jig

Connector
Fig. 8-19

(5)

Press the [ON/OFF] button while simultaneously holding down the [8] and [9] buttons.

(6)

Select the item with the digital keys.

* is displayed next to the selected item. Display or delete the * by pressing the number of the
item. All items are selected in the default settings.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

8 - 27

(7)

Press the [START] button.

Updating starts and the processing status is displayed on the LCD screen.

(8)

Update Completed. is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen after the updating is
completed properly.

Note:
Update Failed. is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not
completed properly. Failed appears next to the failed item on the status display. In this case,
shut down the equipment and check the following items. Then clear the problems and restart
updating from the beginning.
- Is the download jig connected properly?
- Is the updating data written to the download jig properly?
- Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
(9)

Turn the power OFF using the main power switch on the right-hand surface of the equipment,
remove the download jig, and then install the cover plate.

(10) Perform the initialization of the updating data.

Turn the power ON using the main power switch while pressing the [0] and [8] buttons
simultaneously.
Key in 947, and then press the [START] button.
Press the [INITIALIZE] button.
[B] Confirmation of the updated data
After the updating is completed, check each data version in the Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the
data was overwritten properly.
P.8-56 "8.4 Confirmation of the updated data"

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

8 - 28

8.2.3

Engine ROM

The firmware of the engine ROM can be updated individually by using PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2.
Important:
Be sure to unplug the power cable before installing and removing the download jig.
Do not shut down the equipment during the update. The data could be damaged and not be
able to be operated properly.
When servicing the equipment with the power cable plugged in, be sure not to touch live
sections or motors, etc.
[A] Update Procedure
(1)

Write the ROM data to be updated to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2).

(2)

Turn the power OFF using the main power switch on the right-hand surface of the equipment.

(3)

Unplug the power cable from the outlet.

(4)

Take off the rear cover-1.

Rear cover-1

Fig. 8-20

(5)

Remove the cover plate.

Cover plate
Fig. 8-21

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

8 - 29

(6)

Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN352) on the logic PC board (LGC board).

Connector
Fig. 8-22

(7)

Open the front cover.

(8)

Plug the power cable into the outlet.

(9)

Turn the power ON using the main power switch while simultaneously holding down the [0] and
[8] buttons.
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.

(10) When the update is completed properly, the LED (END) on the download jig blinks.
The LED starts blinking approx. 15 sec. after the update starts. It is assumed that the update has
failed if it does not start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, shut down the
equipment and check the following items. Then clear the problems and restart updating from the
beginning.
Is the download jig connected properly?
Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?
Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
(11) Turn the power OFF using the main power switch on the right-hand surface of the equipment.
(12) Unplug the power cable from the outlet and remove the download jig.
(13) Install the cover plate and rear cover-1, and then close the front cover.
(14) Plug the power cable into the outlet.

[B] Confirmation of the updated data

After the updating is completed, check each data version in Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the data
were overwritten properly.
P.8-56 "8.4 Confirmation of the updated data"

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

8 - 30

[C] Adjustment
Perform the adjustment of the equipment.

Performing Image Quality Control (05-396):

P.3-4 "3.1.3 Performing Image Quality Control (ICQ)"

Adjustment of Color Registration Control (05-4719):

P.3-6 "3.1.4 Adjustment of Color Registration Control"

Automatic gamma adjustment <PPC> (05-1642) (using [4][FAX] test pattern):

P.3-29 "3.2.1 Automatic gamma adjustment"

Automatic gamma adjustment < PRT > (05-1008) (using [70][FAX] test pattern):
P.3-44 "3.3.1 Automatic gamma adjustment"

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

8 - 31

8.3

Firmware Updating with K-PWA-DLM-320

The firmware of the equipment (scanner ROM) and the option (RADF ROM, Finisher ROM, FAX ROM)
can be updated individually by using K-PWA-DLM-320. Update the ROM data written on each board
according to the need such as the case of replacing the board.
Equipment
Firmware

Stored
Scanning section control PC
board
(SLG board)

Scanner ROM
(Scanner firmware)

Options
Model name
Reversing Automatic Document
Feeder (RADF)
(MR-3018)
Finisher
(MJ-1101)
Saddle Stitch Finisher
(MJ-1030)
Hanging Finisher
(MJ-1031)
Hole Punch Unit
(MJ-6101)
Fax Unit
(GD-1250)

Firmware
RADF firmware

Stored
RADF control PC board

Finisher firmware
Converter firmware
Finisher firmware
Saddle stitcher firmware
Finisher firmware

Finisher control PC board

Converter PC board
Finisher control PC board

Hole punch unit firmware

Hole punch control PC board

Fax unit firmware

FAX board

Finisher control PC board

K-PWA-DLM-320
Connector

Mark for ROM

installation direction

LED

ROM

Fig. 8-23

Important:
Pay attention to the direction of the ROM.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

8 - 32

8.3.1

Scanner ROM

Important:
Be sure to shut down the equipment before installing and removing the download jig.
Do not shut down the equipment during the update. The data could be damaged and not be
operated properly.
[A] Update Procedure
(1)

Install the ROM to the download jig (K-PWA-DLM-320).

Make sure the direction is correct.

(2)

Press the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel to shut down the equipment.

(3)

Take off the right upper cover.

Right upper cover

Fig. 8-24

(4)

Remove the cover plate.

Cover plate
Fig. 8-25

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

8 - 33

(5)

Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN16) on the scanning section control PC
board (SLG board).

Connector
Fig. 8-26

(6)

Press the [ON/OFF] button while simultaneously holding down the [0] and [8] buttons.
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.

(7)

After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks.
The LED starts blinking approx. 20 sec. after the update starts. It is assumed that the update has
failed if it does not start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, shut down the
equipment and check the following items. Then clear the problems and restart updating from the
beginning.
Is the download jig connected properly?
Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?
Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?
Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?

(8)

Turn the power OFF using the main power switch on the right-hand surface of the equipment,
remove the download jig, and then install the cover plate and the right upper cover.

[B] Confirmation of the updated data

After the updating is completed, check each data version in Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the data
were overwritten properly.
P.8-56 "8.4 Confirmation of the updated data"
Important:
If the exposure lamp blinks twice at the time of start-up and a C270 error occurs, the model of
the scanner ROM updated may be incorrect.
Check the model of the scanner ROM and retry updating.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

8 - 34

8.3.2

RADF firmware (MR-3018)

Important:
Be sure to shut down the equipment before installing and removing the download jig.
Do not shut down the equipment during the update. The data could be damaged and not be
operated properly.
[A] Update Procedure
(1)

Install the ROM to the download jig (K-PWA-DLM-320).

Make sure the direction is correct.

(2)

Press the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel to shut down the equipment.

(3)

Take off the RADF rear cover.

RADF rear cover

Fig. 8-27

(4)

Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN81) on the RADF control PC board.

Connector

Fig. 8-28

(5)

Press the [ON/OFF] button while simultaneously holding down the [0] and [8] buttons.
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

8 - 35

(6)

After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks slowly (at an interval
of approx. 0.8 sec.).
The LED starts blinking approx. 15 sec. after the update starts. It is assumed that the update has
failed if it does not start blinking even though 1 min. has passed or the LED blinks fast (at an
interval of approx. 0.1 sec.). In this case, shut down the equipment and check the following
items. Then clear the problems and restart updating from the beginning.
Is the download jig connected properly?
Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?
Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?
Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?

(7)

Turn the power OFF using the main power switch on the right-hand surface of the equipment,
remove the download jig, and then install the RADF rear cover.

[B] Confirmation of the updated data

After the updating is completed, check each data version in Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the data
were overwritten properly.
P.8-56 "8.4 Confirmation of the updated data"

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

8 - 36

8.3.3

Finisher firmware (MJ-1101)

Important:
Be sure to shut down the equipment before installing and removing the download jig.
Do not shut down the equipment during the update. The data could be damaged and not be
operated properly.
[A] Update Procedure
(1)

Install the ROM to the download jig (K-PWA-DLM-320).

Make sure the direction is correct.

(2)

Press the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel to shut down the equipment.

(3)

Remove 1 screw and take off the board access cover.

Board access cover

Fig. 8-29

(4)

Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN9) on the Finisher control board.

Download jig
Fig. 8-30

(5)

Press the [ON/OFF] button while simultaneously holding down the [0] and [8] buttons.
Updating starts and the LED on the download jig lights

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

8 - 37

(6)

When the update completes normally, the LED on the download jig starts blinking.
The LED on the download jig starts blinking approx. 12 seconds after the update started.
It is assumed that the update has failed if the LED does not start blinking even after 20 seconds
have elapsed. In this case, shut down the equipment and check the following items. Then clear
the problems and restart updating from the beginning.
Is the downloading jig connected properly?
Is the ROM attached to the downloading jig properly?
Has the update data been written correctly to the ROM on the jig?
Is the download jig or the equipment damaged?

(7)

Turn the power OFF using the main power switch on the right-hand surface of the equipment,
remove the download jig, and then install the board access cover.

[B] Confirmation of the updated data

After the updating is completed, check each data version in Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the data
were overwritten properly.
P.8-56 "8.4 Confirmation of the updated data"

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

8 - 38

8.3.4

Converter Firmware (MJ-1101)

The harness jig for board connection is required for updating the firmware of the converter PC board of
the finisher (MJ-1101) as well as the download jig (K-PWA-DLM-320).
Name of the jig
Harness jig for board connection

Model name
HRNS-CNV-DL-JIG

Important:
Be sure to connect the equipment and finisher (MJ-1101) before updating the converter
firmware.
Be sure to shut down the equipment before installing and removing the download jig.
Do not shut down the equipment during the update. The data could be damaged and not be
operated properly.
[A] Update Procedure
(1)

Install the ROM to the download jig (K-PWA-DLM-320).

Make sure the direction is correct.

(2)

Press the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel to shut down the equipment.

(3)

Take off the finisher board access cover.

Board access cover

Fig. 8-31

(4)

Take off the rear cover-1 of the equipment.

Rear cover-1

Fig. 8-32

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

8 - 39

(5)

Remove the cover plate.

Cover plate
Fig. 8-33

(6)

Take off the converter PC board from the logic PC board (LGC board).

Fig. 8-34

(7)

Connect the 10-pin side of the harness jig for board connection to the connector (CN2) of the
converter PC board.

CN2
Fig. 8-35

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

8 - 40

(8)

Connect the 15-pin side of the harness jig for board connection to the connector (CN15) of the
finisher control PC board.

CN15

Fig. 8-36

Notes:
Be sure to release the connection cable from the connector (CN15) of the finisher control PC
board when the hole punch unit (MJ-6101) has been installed.
Be careful not to short-circuit any part of the converter PC board.
(9)

Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN9) on the Finisher control board.

Download jig
Fig. 8-37

(10) Press the [ON/OFF] button while simultaneously holding down the [0] and [8] buttons.
Updating starts and the LED on the download jig lights.
(11) When the update completes normally, the LED on the download jig starts blinking.
The LED on the download jig starts blinking approx. 20 seconds after the update started.
It is assumed that the update has failed if the LED does not start blinking even after 30 seconds
have elapsed. In this case, shut down the equipment and check the following items. Then clear
the problems and restart updating from the beginning.
Is the downloading jig connected properly?
Is the ROM attached to the downloading jig properly?
Have the update data been written correctly to the ROM on the jig?
Is the download jig or the equipment damaged?
Is the harness jig for board connection connected to connector (CN2) of the converter PC
board and the connector (CN15) of the finisher control PC board correctly?

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

8 - 41

(12) Turn the power OFF using the main power switch on the right-hand surface of the equipment.
(13) Remove the download jig and the harness jig for board connection from the finisher control PC
board.
Note:
Be sure to secure the connection cable in the connector (CN15) of the finisher control PC board
when the hole punch unit (MJ-6101) has been installed.
(14) Install the board access cover.
(15) Remove the harness jig for board connection from the converter PC board.
(16) Install the converter PC board in the equipment.
(17) Install the cover plate and the rear cover-1.

[B] Confirmation of Firmware Version

Be sure to install the converter PC board in the equipment and connect the finisher (MJ-1101) before
confirming the firmware version of the converter firmware.
P.8-56 "8.4 Confirmation of the updated data"

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

8 - 42

8.3.5

Hole punch unit firmware (MJ-6101)

Important:
Be sure to shut down the equipment before installing and removing the download jig.
Do not shut down the equipment during the update. The data could be damaged and not be
operated properly.
[A] Checking the hole punch position
Follow the procedure below to check the stopping position of the paper transport during the punching
operation before updating the firmware, as the value for the position is defaulted when the firmware is
updated.
(1)

Press the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel to shut down the equipment.

(2)

Remove the finisher board access cover and change the setting of the DIP-SW1 (SW1) on the
finisher control PC board as shown in the figure below.

8
SW1
ON
1 2 3 4

Fig. 8-38

(3)

Press the [ON/OFF] button while simultaneously holding down the [0] and [8] buttons. The
[LED1] on the finisher control panel starts blinking. Count the number of times it blinks. If the
number of blinks is 6, this indicates that the value for the stopping position is the default. If the
number is other than 6, record it because the value needs to be reset after the firmware is
updated.

(4)

Return the DIP-SW1 to the status before checking.

[B] Firmware update

(1)

Install the ROM to the download jig (K-PWA-DLM-320).

Make sure the direction is correct.

(2)

Press the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel to shut down the equipment.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

8 - 43

(3)

Remove 1 screw and take off the finisher board access cover.

Board access cover

Fig. 8-39

(4)

Release the latches and take off the rear lower cover of the hole punch unit.

Rear lower cover

Fig. 8-40

(5)

Remove 3 screws and take off the rear cover of the hole punch unit.

Rear cover

Fig. 8-41

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

8 - 44

(6)

Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN9) on the finisher control PC board.

Download jig

Fig. 8-42

(7)

Set the DIP-SW4 on the hole punch control PC board to ON.

ON
1 2 3 4

Fig. 8-43

(8)

Press the [ON/OFF] button while simultaneously holding down the [0] and [8] buttons.
Updating starts and the LED on the download jig lights.

(9)

When the update is completed normally, the LED on the download jig starts blinking.
The LED on the download jig starts blinking approx. 20 seconds after the update started. It is
assumed that the update has failed if the LED does not start blinking even after 30 seconds have
elapsed. In this case, shut down the equipment and check the following items. Then clear the
problems and restart updating from the beginning.
Is the downloading jig connected properly?
Is the ROM attached to the downloading jig properly?
Is the DIP-SW4 on the hole punch control PC board set properly?
Has the update data been written correctly to the ROM on the jig?
Is the download jig or the equipment damaged?
Is the connector (CN12) on the finisher control PC board connected properly?
Are the connector (CN15) on the finisher control PC board and the connector (CN1) on the
hole punch control PC board connected properly?

(10) Turn the power OFF using the main power switch on the right-hand surface of the equipment and
remove the download jig.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

8 - 45

(11) Set the DIP-SW4 on the hole punch control PC board to OFF.
Note:
When the number of blinks is other than 6 (which indicates that the adjustment value is 0) at
the section [A]Checking the hole punch position, follow the steps of 5.1 Stopping Position
Adjustment in the MJ-6101 Service Manual to adjust the value to the one that has been set
before the update.
(12) Change the settings of the DIP-SW1 and -SW2 on the hole punch control PC board according to
the model as shown in the figure below.
MJ-6101E

MJ-6101N

ON

ON

MJ-6101F

MJ-6101S

ON

ON

Fig. 8-44

(13) Install the rear cover of the hole punch unit.

(14) Install the rear lower cover of the hole punch unit.
(15) Install the finisher board access cover.

[C] Confirmation of the updated data

After the updating is completed, check each data version in Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the data
were overwritten properly.
P.8-56 "8.4 Confirmation of the updated data"

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

8 - 46

8.3.6

Finisher firmware/Saddle stitcher firmware (MJ-1030)

Important:
Be sure to shut down the equipment before installing and removing the download jig.
Do not shut down the equipment during the update. The data could be damaged and not be
operated properly.
[A] Firmware update
(1)

Install the ROM to the download jig (K-PWA-DLM-320).

Make sure the direction is correct.

(2)

Press the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel to shut down the equipment.

(3)

Take off the finisher rear cover.

Finisher rear cover

Fig. 8-45

*
(4)

Connect the finisher interface cable with the equipment after removing the finisher rear cover.

Connect the download jig with the jig connector on the finisher control PC board.

Connector

Fig. 8-46

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

8 - 47

(5)

Change the setting of the DIP switch on the finisher control PC board.
Change the setting of the DIP switch as follows according to the firmware to be updated.
Note:
Record the current settings of the DIP switch before changing them. After the updating is
completed, return the DIP switch to the status as record.

Fig. 8-47

DIP switch

Updating Finisher Firmware

Updating Saddle Stitcher Firmware

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

8 - 48

(6)

Press the [ON/OFF] button while simultaneously holding down the [0] and [8] buttons.
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
Tip:
The processing status can be confirmed by the lighting of the LED (LED 101-103) on the finisher
control board.

Fig. 8-48

Processing status

LED
LED103

LED102

LED101

0% or above

OFF

OFF

ON

15% or above

OFF

ON

OFF

30% or above

OFF

ON

ON

45% or above

ON

OFF

OFF

60% or above

ON

OFF

ON

75% or above

ON

ON

OFF

90% or above

ON

ON

ON

(7)

After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks slowly (at interval of
0.8 sec.).
The LED starts blinking approx. 30 sec. (finisher section) or 2 min. 30 sec. (saddle stitcher
section) since the update starts. It is assumed that the update has failed if it does not start
blinking even though 1 min. has passed (finisher section) or 3 min. (saddle stitcher section), or
LED flashes fast (at interval of 0.1 sec.). In this case, shut down the equipment and check the
following items. Then clear the problems and restart updating from the beginning.
Is the download jig connected properly?
Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?
Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?
Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
Is the DIP switch on the finisher control PC board set properly according to the download
section (finisher or saddle stitcher)?

(8)

Turn the power OFF using the main power switch on the right-hand surface of the equipment,
remove the download jig, and then return the DIP switch to the status before updating.

(9)

Install the finisher rear cover.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

8 - 49

[B] Confirmation of the updated data

After the updating is completed, check each data version in Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the data
were overwritten properly.
P.8-56 "8.4 Confirmation of the updated data"

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

8 - 50

8.3.7

Finisher firmware (MJ-1031)

Important:
Be sure to shut down the equipment before installing and removing the download jig.
Do not shut down the equipment during the update. The data could be damaged and not be
operated properly.
[A] Update Procedure
(1)

Install the ROM to the download jig (K-PWA-DLM-320).

Make sure the direction is correct.

(2)

Press the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel to shut down the equipment.

(3)

Take off the hanging finisher (MJ-1031) from the equipment.

Fig. 8-49

(4)

Take off the rear cover.

Fig. 8-50

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

8 - 51

(5)

Install the hanging finisher in the equipment.

Fig. 8-51

(6)

Connect the download jig with the jig connector on the Finisher control board.

Fig. 8-52

(7)

Press the [ON/OFF] button while simultaneously holding down the [0] and [8] buttons.
Updating starts and the LED on the download jig lights.

(8)

When the update completes normally, the LED on the download jig starts blinking.
The LED on the download jig starts blinking approx. 12 seconds after the update started.
It is assumed that the update has failed if the LED does not start blinking even after 20 seconds
have elapsed. In this case, shut down the equipment and check the following items. Then clear
the problems and restart updating from the beginning.
Is the downloading jig connected properly?
Is the ROM attached to the downloading jig properly?
Has the update data been written correctly to the ROM on the jig?
Is the download jig or the equipment damaged?

(9)

Turn the power OFF using the main power switch on the right-hand surface of the equipment and
remove the download jig.

(10) Take off the hanging finisher from the equipment.

(11) Install the board access cover.
(12) Install the hanging finisher in the equipment.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

8 - 52

[B] Confirmation of the updated data

After the updating is completed, check each data version in Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the data
were overwritten properly.
P.8-56 "8.4 Confirmation of the updated data"

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

8 - 53

8.3.8

Fax unit firmware (GD-1250)

Important:
Before updating the FAX ROM, make sure to print out the current Function list for
maintenance, Function list (ADMIN), Address book list and Group number information. In
case the updating is failed and the registered information of the users is lost for some reason,
re-register the user information referring to the lists and recover it.
Confirm the following items before turning OFF the power of the equipment. Turning OFF the
power may clear the data below.
- Confirm that the MEMORY RX LED is OFF and there are no memory reception data.
- Print the Mailbox/Relay box report and then confirm that there are no F code data.
- Press the [JOB STATUS] button to display the screen and then confirm that there are no
memory transmission data.
[A] Firmware update
(1)

Install the ROM to the download jig (K-PWA-DLM-320).

Make sure the direction is correct.

(2)

Press the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel to shut down the equipment.

(3)

Remove the cover plate.

Cover plate
Fig. 8-53

(4)

Connect the download jig with the jig connector on the FAX board.

Connector
Fig. 8-54

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

8 - 54

(5)

Press the [ON/OFF] button while simultaneously holding down the [0] and [8] buttons.
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.

(6)

After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks.
The LED starts blinking approx. 30 sec. after the update starts. It is assumed that the update has
failed if it does not start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, shut down the
equipment and check the following items. Then clear the problems and restart updating from the
beginning.
Is the download jig connected properly?
Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?
Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?
Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?

(7)

Turn the power OFF using the main power switch on the right-hand surface of the equipment,
remove the download jig, and then install the cover plate.

(8)

In the FAX Clearing Mode, perform the FAX Set Up.

Confirm the destination setting is correct in the Setting Mode (08).
08-201: Destination setting of the equipment
08-701: Destination setting of the FAX machine
Turn ON the power while [1] button and [*] button are pressed simultaneously.
Key in 100.
Press the [START] button.
Notes:
If the equipment does not work properly after the operation (8), follow the procedure below and
then perform the Clearing the image data in the FAX Clearing Mode to erase the image data in
the memory.
Confirm the destination setting is correct in the Setting Mode (08).
08-201: Destination setting of the equipment
08-701: Destination setting of the FAX machine
Turn ON the power while [1] button and [*] button are pressed simultaneously.
Key in 102.
Press the [START] button.

[B] Confirmation of the updated data

After the updating is completed, check each data version in Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the data
were overwritten properly.
P.8-56 "8.4 Confirmation of the updated data"

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

8 - 55

8.4

Confirmation of the updated data

After the updating is completed, check each data version in Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the data
were overwritten properly.
Firmware
Updating HDD/UI data
Updating System ROM

Code

Remarks

08-944

HDD Version

08-924

Version of UI data language 1 in HDD

08-900

System firmware ROM version

08-921

System firmware ROM internal program version

Updating OS

08-920

FROM basic section software version

Updating Engine ROM

08-903

Engine ROM version

Updating Scanner ROM

08-905

Scanner ROM version

Updating RADF ROM

08-907

RADF ROM version

Updating Finisher ROM

08-908

Finisher ROM version

08-911

Hole punch unit ROM version (MJ-6101 only)

08-9945

Converter board ROM version

Updating FAX ROM

08-915

FAX ROM version

Imaging Acceleration Board

ROM

08-9965

Imaging Acceleration Board SROM version

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

8 - 56

8.5

When Firmware Updating Fails

When the equipment was shut down during firmware updating or it could not be started after updating
for some reason, perform firmware updating again following the procedure below.

8.5.1

Procedure

(1)

Update System ROM of the system control PC board (SYS board) using the download jig
(PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2).
Updating with the USB media becomes possible only after the System ROM (OS data) has
been updated.
See the updating procedure below for details.
P.8-27 "8.2.2 System ROM"

(2)

Update Master Data, Engine ROM and Scanner ROM using the USB media.
See the updating procedure below for details.
P.8-5 "8.1 Firmware Updating with USB Media"

(3)

When the update with the USB media for Engine ROM and Scanner ROM failed, update
these ROMs using the respective download jigs in the table below.
Firmware
Engine ROM

Scanner ROM

Storage location
Logic PC board
(LGC board)
Scanning section control PC board
(SLG board)

Download jig
PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2
P.8-29 "8.2.3 Engine
ROM"
K-PWA-DLM-320
P.8-33 "8.3.1 Scanner
ROM"

Important:
If the equipment cannot be started even when the above update has been performed, check that
there is no damage to the SYS board, LGC board or SLG board. Replace them if necessary.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

8 - 57

8.5.2

Flow chart for correcting USB update failure

[A] When the update of the System ROM (OS data) failed

USB update failed

Failed twice or more?

NO

Update USB.

YES

Update download jig.

" 8.2.2 System ROM "

NO
Update succeeded?

YES

Check ROM version.

Failed twice or more?

NO

" 8.4 Confirmation of

the updated data "
YES

NO

Replace SYS board.

Is ROM version correct?

YES

Update USB.

Update completed

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

8 - 58

[B] When the update of HDD program data / system firmware / UI data (master data) failed

USB update failed

Failed twice or more?

NO

Update USB.

YES

Check HDD harness connection.

Update USB.

Update succeeded?

NO

YES
Replace HDD.

Update USB.
Check HDD/ROM version.
" 8.4 Confirmation of
the updated data "
YES

Update succeeded?

NO
NO

Is HDD/ROM version correct?

Replace SYS board.
YES
Update USB.
Update completed

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

8 - 59

[C] When the update of Engine ROM / Scanner ROM failed

USB update failed

NO
Failed twice or more?

Update USB.

YES
Clear [Update Error Flags].
Assist Mode :
Turn the power ON with [3] +
[CLEAR] + [ON/OFF]
Clear flags.
[1] -> [START]

Update download jig.

" 8.2.3 Engine ROM "
" 8.3.1 Scanner ROM "
Check harness connection.
SYS board <--> SYS board
NO
Update succeeded?

YES

Check ROM version.

NO
Failed twice or more?

" 8.4 Confirmation of

the updated data "
YES

NO

Replace target board.

Is ROM version correct?

YES

Update USB.

Update completed

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
FIRMWARE UPDATING

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

8 - 60

9.

POWER SUPPLY UNIT

9.1

General description

The power supply unit consists of AC filters, insulation-type DC output circuits and heater lamp control
circuits in order to supply stable DC and AC voltage to each electric part of this equipment.

9.2

Construction

The power supply unit consists of the AC filter, insulation type DC output circuits and heater lamp
control circuit.
1. AC filter
Eliminates noise from the outside and prevents the noise generated by the equipment from leaking
to the outside.
2. DC output circuits
Converts AC voltage input from outside to DC voltage and supplies it to each electric part. The DC
voltage is divided into the following two lines.
a. Main switch line:

Power supply used in the entire equipment during image forming process.
Two kinds of voltage (+5.1 V and +12 V) are output when the main switch
of the equipment is turned ON.

b. Cover switch line:

Power supply used in the entire equipment during image forming process,
being supplied via the cover switch. Two kinds of voltage (+5.1 VD and
+24 VD) are output only when the main switch of the equipment is turned
ON and two covers (front cover and automatic duplexing unit) are closed.

3. Heater lamp control circuit

TRC (Triac) is driven by the heater control signal (BHCON, BHSON, PHON, SUBON) from the LGC
board and then AC power is supplied to each heater lamp (center heater lamp, side heater lamp,
pressure roller lamp) in the fuser unit.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
POWER SUPPLY UNIT

9-1

9.3

Operation of DC Output Circuits

1. Starting operation of the equipment

When the main switch of the equipment is turned ON, power starts supplying to all the lines only
when two covers (front cover and automatic duplexing unit) are closed.
2. Stopping operation of the equipment
When the main switch of the equipment is turned OFF, PER-DN signal is output after the
instantaneous outage insurance time (20 ms or more) elapses and then the supply of each voltage
stops. If the supply of voltage of the main switch line (+5.1 VS, +5.1 VA, +12 VA) stops earlier than
the 24 V line does, it may cause the damage of the electron device on each control circuit. To
prevent this, the supply of these voltages stops after the PWR-DN signal is output and the minimum
retaining time (50 ms) elapses.
3. Normal stopping (shifting to auto shut off mode)
When the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel is pressed for 1 second or more while the main
switch of the equipment is toggled ON, an auto shut off mode shifting signal (SYS-EN) is output and
then all lines for output voltage except +5.1 VS are closed.
4. Normal starting (recovering from auto shut off mode)
When the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel is pressed for 1 second or more during the auto shut
off mode, an auto shut off mode recovery signal (PWR-SW) is output and then voltage starts
supplying to all the lines, if no error was detected.
5. Output protection
Each output system includes an overcurrent and overvoltage protection circuits (a fuse and internal
protection circuit). This is to prevent the defectives (damage or abnormal operation of the secondary
circuit) which may be caused by an overcurrent due to a short circuit or an overvoltage due to a
short circuit between different voltages. If the protection circuit is activated (except the case the fuse
is blown out), remove the causes such as short-circuit. Turn ON the power again 1 minute later to
clear the overcurrent protection.
6. State of the power supply
- Power OFF
The main power switch of the equipment is turned OFF. Since DC voltage is not supplied to each
board, the equipment is not operable.
-

Normal state
The main power switch of the equipment is turned ON and DC voltage is supplied to each board.
When the cover of the equipment is closed, 24 V DC voltage is supplied and the equipment
enters into the ready/printing state.

Sleep mode
Since 24V DC voltage is not supplied but 5 V DC voltage only, the equipment does not enter into
the ready state.

Off mode
Only DC voltage and 5 VS are output from the power supply unit. The [POWER] button is
monitored and the LED of the main power switch is lit.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
POWER SUPPLY UNIT

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

9-2

9.4

Output Channel

The following are 2 output channels for the main switch line.

+5.1 V
+5.1 VS:
+5.1 VA:
+5.1 VB:
+5.1 VB:
+5.1 VB:
+5.1 VB:
+5.1 VB:
+5.1 VB:
+5.1 VB:

CN402 Pin 6
Output to the SYS board
CN402 Pins 8, 9 and 10
Output to the SYS board
CN402 Pins 19 and 20
Output to the SYS board
CN403 Pins 2 and 3
Output to the IMG board
CN404 Pin 1
Output to the LGC board
CN405 Pin 1
Output to the LGC board, PFP/LCF board (via LGC board)
CN406 Pin 4
Output to the Finisher
CN407 Pin 1 and 2
Output to the SLG board, RADF
CN410 Pin 1
Output to the FIL board

+12 V
+12 VA:
+12 VB:
+12 VB:
+12 VB:

CN402 Pins 13 and 14

Output to the SYS board
CN402 Pin 18
Output to the SYS board
CN404 Pin 7
Output to the LGC board
CN407 Pin 14
Output to the SLG unit

The following are 2 output channels for the cover switch line.

+5.1 V
+5.1 VD:

CN405 Pin 4
Output to the LGC board

+24 V
+24 VD1:
+24 VD2:
+24 VD3:

+24 VD4:
+24 VD4:

CN405 Pin 5
Output to the LGC board
CN405 Pin 6
Output to the LGC board
CN405 Pin 7
Output to the LGC board, PFP/LCF (via LGC board)
High-voltage transformer (via LGC board)
CN406 Pin 2
Output to the Finisher
CN407 Pins 9, 10, 11 and 12
Output to the Finisher

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
POWER SUPPLY UNIT

9-3

Output voltage by the type of connector

Main switch line
Connector
CN402
CN403
CN404
CN405
CN406
CN407
CN410

Destination
For the SYS board
For the IMG board
For the LGC, PFP/LCF (via LGC board)
For the LGC board
For the finisher
For the SLG board, RADF
For the FIL board

Voltage
+5.1 VA, +5.1 VB, +5 VS, +12 VA, +12 VB
+5.1 VB
+5.1 VB, +12 VB
+5.1 VB
+5.1 VB
+5.1 VB, +12 VB
+5.1 VB

Destination
For the LGC board, PFP/LCF (via LGC
board, high-voltage transformer (via LGC
board)
For the finisher
For the SLG board, RADF

Voltage
+5.1 VD, +24 VD1, +24 VD2, +24 VD3

Cover switch line

Connector
CN405

CN406
CN407

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
POWER SUPPLY UNIT

+24 VD4
+24 VD

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

9-4

9.5

Fuse

When the power supply secondary fuse is blown out, confirm that there is no abnormality with each part
using the following table.
Voltage
+24 VD1

Board/Unit
LGC board

+24 VD2

PFP/LCF
LGC board

+24 VD3

LGC board

+24 VD4

+5 VB

Part

Fuse type
F201:
6.3 A (Semi time-lag)

Developer motor
Polygonal motor
Mirror motor-M
Mirror motor-C
Mirror motor-K
Fuser motor
Feed/transport motor

M9
M13
M14
M15
M16
M17
M20

Transfer belt motor

Drum motor
Exit motor
Registration motor
Toner motor-Y
Toner motor-M
Toner motor-C
Toner motor-K
Used toner paddle motor
Shutter motor
ADU motor
Internal cooling fan
Ozone exhaust fan
Fuser/exit section cooling fan
Laser unit cooling fan
Waste toner transport motor
EPU cooling fan
Auto-toner sensor-Y
Auto toner sensor-M
Auto toner sensor-C
Auto toner sensor-K
1st drawer transport clutch (High speed)
1st drawer transport clutch (Low speed)
1st drawer feed clutch
2nd drawer transport clutch (Low speed)
2nd drawer transport clutch (High speed)
2nd drawer feed clutch
ADU clutch
Bypass feed clutch
Bypass pickup solenoid
Discharge LED-Y
Discharge LED-M
Discharge LED-C
Discharge LED-K
High-voltage transformer

M7
M10
M18
M19
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
M12
M22
M23
M24
M25
M29
M31
M33
S22
S23
S24
S25
CLT1
CLT2
CLT3
CLT4
CLT5
CLT6
CLT7
CLT8
SOL1
ERS-Y
ERS-M
ERS-C
ERS-K
HVT

F202:
6.3 A (Semi time-lag)

M1
INV

F204:
6.3 A (Semi time-lag)

Bridge unit
Key copy counter, copy key card, coin controller
SLG board
Scan motor
Lamp inverter board
RADF
Finisher
LGC board
LGC board
PFP/LCF (via LGC board)

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

F203:
6.3 A (Semi time-lag)

F205:
5 A (Semi time-lag)

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
POWER SUPPLY UNIT

9-5

Damp heater

AC input

Breaker
FIL
board

Cover interlock
switch

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
POWER SUPPLY UNIT

9-6
Sub heater lamp*

CN409

Pressure roller lamp

CN401

Side heater lamp

F102

AC OFF
detection

Heater lamp
control circuit

RLY1

F101

Switching regulator
Noise filter

Center heater lamp

Main switch

AC-DC
power supply
24V

AC-DC
power supply
12V

FAN
control
circuit

24VD

5VS

5VD

5VA

12VA

5VB

F203

F202

F201

F204

12VB

CN402 ~ CN407

CN5

FAN ON_L

FAN ON_H

PWR-DN

LAMP4ON

LAMP3ON

LAMP2ON

LAMP1ON

PWR-EN

SYS-EN

RLY-ON

*:e-STUDIO4520C only

24VD3

24VD2

24VD1

24VD4

F205

9.6
Configuration of Power Supply Unit

CN6

Noise filter

CN408

Fig. 9-1

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

9.7

Sequence of Power Supply

Power ON, Power failure, Power OFF

ON

ON
20 to 70ms

AC input

70ms or higher

OFF
30 ~ 140ms

OFF
50 ~ 140ms

20ms or higher

50ms or higher
20ms or higher

PWR-DN (5VA)
700ms or lower

50ms or higher

700ms or lower

50ms or higher

4.8V or higher

5VS (MAIN)

SYS-EN (5VS)

30ms or lower

50ms or higher

4.8V or higher

5VA (MAIN)

50ms or higher

50ms or lower

11.4V or higher

+12VA (MAIN)

9
0ms or higher

5ms or higher

PWR-EN (5VS)
20ms or lower
5VB/12VB (MAIN)

RLY-ON (5VB)

700ms or lower

24VD/5VD (DOOR)

Fig. 9-2

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
POWER SUPPLY UNIT

9-7

Sleep mode, OFF mode

Shifting to sleep mode
Recovering from sleep mode

Shifting to auto shut off mode

Recovering from auto shut off mode

ON
AC input
PWR-DN (5VA)
L

3s or lower

5VS (MAIN)
Min 0.8ms
PWR-SW (5VS)
100ms or lower
SYS-EN (5VS)

20ms or lower
5VA (MAIN)

100ms or lower

+12VA (MAIN)
250ms or lower

PWR-EN (5VS)

Standard :
10 or higher
100ms or lower (12VB)
150ms or lower (5VB)

100ms or lower (12VB)

150ms or lower (5VB)

20ms or lower

20ms or lower

5VB/12VB (MAIN)
100ms or lower
RLY-ON (5VB)

700ms or lower

700ms or lower

24VD/5VD (DOOR)

Fig. 9-3

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
POWER SUPPLY UNIT

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

9-8

Neutral
A
GND
B
Live
C

White
J704
2
J703
1
White
AC (N)

Black
J706
4
J705
3
Black
AC (L)

White
AC (N)

Black

Black

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

9-9

1 2 3 CN497

F1

3
2
1

Damp heater switch

(except NAD/MJD)

CN433

Black

White
Black

Black

White

White
Black

Relay

F101

White
Black

White
Black

J658
AC(N: DRM-R)
1 1
AC(L: DRM-R)
2 2
J657
AC(N: DRM-L)
1 1
AC(L: DRM-L)
2 2

Drum damp heater

White
Black

Scanner damp heater

White

White

AC(N: BL-SIDE)

AC(N: PL)

Drum damp heater

thermostat (Left)

Drum damp heater

thermostat (Right)

Scanner damp heater

thermostat

White

White

White

White

CN408
AC(N: BL-CENTER)
1

Black

4 4

3 3

2 2

J702
1 1

J659
1 1
2 2

Drum damp heater

(Left)

Drum damp heater

(Right)

Scanner damp heater

(Right)

J64

Side heater lamp

Pressure roller lamp

Pressure roller thermostat

1 1
2 2

Black

Fuser belt
center
thermostat

Center heater lamp

Black

Scanner damp heater

(Left)

1 1

J640

1 1

J639

J638
1 1

Fuser belt
rear
thermostat

Yellow
Black

1 1
2 2

J63

White

White

White

Black

Fuser

CN410
+5.1VB
1
SG
2

CN409
AC(L)
1

DC

AC-DC
power supply circuit
(Cover switch line)

Pressure roller lamp

control circuit

Side heater lamp

control circuit

Center heater lamp

control circuit

J652
AC(N: SCN)
1 1
AC(L: SCN)
2 2

DC

AC-DC
power supply circuit
(Main switch line)

* Optional for NAD/MJD model, standard for other models

AC(L: Cover)

AC(N: Cover)

SG

Relay

White

Relay on

1 2 3 4 CN493

2B

1B

Cover interlock switch

2A

1A

Main switch

Black

White

F102

Switching regulator

Blue

Black

J650
+5.1VB
1 1
2 2
SG
3 3

Black

FIL board

J701

AC(L: Main)

Black
J701

CN401
AC(N: Main)
1

White

FG

Inlet
(AC IN)

9.8
AC Wire Harness

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C

Black

SG
Black

+5.1VB

AC (L)

Yellow

Breaker

Fig. 9-4

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
POWER SUPPLY UNIT

FG

Inlet
(AC IN)

Neutral
A
GND
B
Live
C

White
J704
2
J703
1
White
AC (N)

Black
J706
4
J705
3
Black
AC (L)

White
AC (N)

Black
Black

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
POWER SUPPLY UNIT

9 - 10
1 2 3 CN497

F1

3
2
1

Damp heater switch

(except NAD/MJD)

CN433

Black

White
Black

Black

White

White
Black

Relay

F101

White
Black

White
Black

J658
AC(N: DRM-R)
1 1
AC(L: DRM-R)
2 2
J657
AC(N: DRM-L)
1 1
AC(L: DRM-L)
2 2

Drum damp heater

White
Black

Scanner damp heater

AC(N: PL)

AC(N: BL-SUB)

Drum damp heater

thermostat (Left)

Drum damp heater

thermostat (Right)

Scanner damp heater

thermostat

AC(N: BL-SIDE)

White

White

White

White

White

White

White

CN408
AC(N: BL-CENTER)
1

Black

6 6

2 2

4 4

3 3

J702
1 1

J659
1 1
2 2

1 1
2 2

J64

1 1
2 2

J63

White

White

White

White

Black

Fuser

CN410
+5.1VB
1
SG
2

CN409
AC(L)
1

DC

AC-DC
power supply circuit
(Cover switch line)

Pressure roller lamp

control circuit

Sub heater lamp

control circuit

Side heater lamp

control circuit

Center heater lamp

control circuit

J652
AC(N: SCN)
1 1
AC(L: SCN)
2 2

DC

AC-DC
power supply circuit
(Main switch line)

* Optional for NAD/MJD model, standard for other models

AC(L: Cover)

AC(N: Cover)

SG

Relay

White

Relay on

1 2 3 4 CN493

2B

1B

Cover interlock switch

2A

1A

Main switch

Black

White

F102

Switching regulator

Black

Drum damp heater

(Left)

Side heater lamp

Pressure roller lamp

Pressure roller thermostat

Scanner damp heater

(Right)

Drum damp heater

(Right)

Fuser belt
center
thermostat

Center heater lamp

Black

Scanner damp heater

(Left)

1 1

J640

J635
1 1

1 1

J639

J638
1 1

Fuser belt
rear
thermostat

Yellow
Black

Blue

Black

J650
+5.1VB
1 1
2 2
SG
3 3

Black

FIL board

J701

AC(L: Main)

Black
J701

CN401
AC(N: Main)
1

White

e-STUDIO4520C

Black

SG
Black

+5.1VB

AC (L)

Yellow

Breaker

Fig. 9-5

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

TCP
(TCP)

TXB
RXIN
CML
LD
ER/HK
ATT3DB
RLADJ1
RLADJ2
RGCLK
AG
-12VB
AG
+12VB
NC
16Hz
AG
CI
ANSDET
REVA
REVB
NC
NC
+5VS
AG
+5VA
-12VB
AG
+12VB
NC
NC

CN9 or CN4
CN502
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
30

CN503
+
1
2

TXOUT
RXIN
CML
LD
EXTRG
ATT3DB
RLADJ1
RLADJ2
RGCLK
AG
-12VB
AG
+12VB
+24VB
16Hz
AG
CI
ANSDET
REVA
REVB
INTHOOK
FXTHOOK
+5VS
AG
+5VA
-12VB
AG
+12VB
+24VB
PG

PWA-F-KEY
(KEY
(KEY)
KEY)

CN9 or CN4
CN501
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
30

Speaker

Option

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26

CN1

+5V
POW
COM1
COM2
OUTP1
OUTP2
OUTP3
OUTP4
OUTP5
OUTP6
OUTP7
OUTP8
NC
NC
SCN1
SCN2
SCN3
SCN4
RET1
RET2
RET3
RET4
RET5
RET6
RET7
SG RET8

+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
NC
DE
SG
VSYNC
SG
VSYNC
SG
B5
B4
B3
SG
B2
B1
B0
SG
G5
G4
G3
SG
G2
G1
G0
SG
R5
R4
R3
SG
R2
R1
R0
NC
SG
SG
CLK
SG
SG

FAX board

CN401
CN600
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
31
31
32
32
33
33
34
34
35
35
36
36
37
37
38
38
39
39
40
40
41
41
42
42
43
43
44
44
45
45
46
46
47
47
48
48
49
49
50
50
51
51
52
52
53
53
54
54
55
55
56
56
57
57
58
58
59
59
60
60
61
61
62
62
63
63
64
64
65
65
66
66
67
67
68
68
69
69
70
70
71
71
72
72
73
73
74
74
75
75
76
76
77
77
78
78
79
79
80
80

FAX
power relay
board

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26

CN7

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

CN17

MODEM board

Option

Option

Option

D[0]
D[2]
D[4]
D[6]
RD-0
A[0]
A[2]
A[4]
A[6]
A[8]
A[10]
A[12]
A[14]
A[16]
A[18]
SG
SG
D[1]
D[3]
D[5]
D[7]
BOOTCS-0
A[1]
A[3]
A[5]
A[7]
A[9]
A[11]
A[13]
A[15]
A[17]
ROMDET0-0
+5V
LEDDL-0

JPD model only

CN810
+12VB
1
SG
2

TXOUT2
SG
+12V
SG
MOD2DMA-1
SG
MEM2CS
MEM2WR
MEM2RD
CLKOE
TXEN2
SG
A[16]
A[14]
A[12]
A[10]
A[8]
A[6]
A[4]
A[2]
A[0]
+5VB
CEP1RST
+5V
SG
CEPCLK
SG
D[0]
D[2]
D[4]
D[6]
D[8]
D[10]
D[12]
D[14]
+3.3V
MOD2DET
+3.3V
DREQ2
DACK2
RXIN2
AG
-12V
AG
MD2INT
SG
MOD2RST
MOD2CS
RXEN2
MEMBHE
MEMBLE
A[18]
A[17]
A[15]
A[13]
A[11]
A[9]
A[7]
A[5]
A[3]
A[1]
CEP2INT
+5V
CPURST
+5V
IORD2
IOWR2
D[1]
D[3]
D[5]
D[7]
D[9]
D[11]
D[13]
D[15]
CEP2CS
+3.3V
DREQD2
+3.3V
DACKD2

CN1
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

1
2
3

1
2
3

P-INV (P-INV)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34

NC

CN701

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34

20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

CN602

Coin controller /
Copy key card

e-BRIDGE ID Gate

Bluetooth module

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

CN114

CN124
+3.3VA
1
NC
2
NC
3
D4
D+
5
NC
6
NC
7
DETACH
8
NC
9
SG
10
NC
11
NC
12
/RESET
13
NC
14
NC
15
NC
16
NC
17
NC
18
NC
19
SG
20

CN135
+3.3VA
1
TXD0
2
RXD0
3
SG
4

CN127
L/S
1
FULL-C
2
MONO-C
3
B/W
4
NC
5
SG
6
NC
7

SG
+12VA
+12VA
+12VA
+5VS
SG
SG
CPPSW
/CPPSW
SG
CP-RTS
SG
CP-CTS
SG
CP-RXD
SG
CP-TXD
RESET
SG
TXCLKP
TXCLKN
SG
TXD2P
TXD2N
SG
TXD1P
TXD1N
SG
TXD0P
TXD0N
SG

COLD

HOT

LCD back light

CN134
+5VA
1
DA1
2
+5VA
3
DD0
4
+5VA
5
DD3
6
+5VA
7
DD6
8
+5VA
9
DD9
10
SG
11
DD12
12
SG
13
SG
14
SG
15
SG
16
SG
17
SG
18
+3.3V
19
INTRQ
20
+3.3V
21
+5VS
22
-12V
23
SG
24
+12V
25
DA0
26
DA2
27
IDECS
28
DD1
29
DD2
30
DD4
31
DD5
32
DD7
33
DD8
34
DD10
35
DD11
36
DD13
37
DD14
38
DD15
39
/DIOR
40
/DIOW
41
/DMACK
42
DLDCS0
43
/RESET
44
DMARQ
45
NC
46
WAKWUP
47
SG
48
SG
49
NC
50

Download jig (FAX)

NCU board [Line1]

NCU board [Line2]

PWA-F-DSP
(DSP)

1
2
3

NC

CN702
+24V
1
PG
2
NC
3

CN811

1
2

+12VB
SG

CN2

CN104
1
2
3
4

CN103
1
2
3
4

CN118
5
6
7
8

VBUS
DD+
SG

VBUS0
DD+
SG

VBUS1
D0D0+
SG

Option

CN5
2
1

CN6
2
1

SG
FAN1

USB connector
(Host)

USB connector
(Host)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52

CN122

A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18

CN133

USB connector
(Device)

Option

SG
FAN2

PS-FAN-MOT-1
(M27)

WAKE
+3.3V
NC
SG
NC
+1.5V
LCKREQ
NC
SG
NC
REFCLKNC
REFCLK+
NC
SG
NC
NC
SG
NC
W-DIS
SG
PERST
PERn0
+3.3V
PERp0
SG
SG
+1.5V
SG
SMB-CLK
PETn0
SMB-DATA
PETp0
SG
SG
USB-DNC
USB-D+
NC
SG
NC
LED-WWAN
NC
LED-WLAN
NC
LED-WPAN
NC
+1.5V
NC
SG
NC
+3.3V

PRSNT1
+12V
+12V
SG
TCK
TDI
TDO
TMS
+3.3V
+3.3V
PERST
SG
REFCLK+
REFCLKSG
PERp0
PERn0
SG
+12V
+12V
+12V
SG
SMCLK
SMDAT
GND
+3.3V
TRST
+3.3Vaux
WAKE
NC
SG
PETp0
PETn0
SG
PRSNT2
SG

TXP
TXN
RXP
TXCT
RXCT
RXN
FG
FG
LEDG-A
LEDG-C
LEDY-C
LEDY-A

1 3
2 2
3 1

CN105
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

CN132

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

CN116

NC
NC
NC

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

SYS-FAN-MOT
(M26)

LAN connector
(10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX)

+12V

SG

SG

+5V

SG
A1+
A1SG
B1B1+
SG

HDD
(HDD)

PWA-F-SYS
(SYS)
(SYS
SYS)

CN128: Page memory DIMM slot [0] (200 pin)

CN123: Main memory DDR DIMM slot [0] (200 pin)

CN1

PS-FAN-MOT-2
(M28)

Imaging Acceleration Board

Wireless LAN module

CN113

CN402

+12VA
FAN-LOCK
SG

PWA-F-SRAM-S (SRAM-S)

J43
3
2
1

J44
3
2
1

J45
3
2
1

J47
3
2
1
J46
3
2
1

J52
1 1
2 2

34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

+5V
APS1
SG
NC

+5V
APS2
SG

+5V
APS3
SG

+5V
APSC
SG

+5V
APSR
SG

FANFRONT
+5V
NC
NC

CN101
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
31
31
32
32
33
33
34
34
35
35
36
36
37
37
38
38
39
39
40
40
41
41
42
42
43
43
44
44
45
45
46
46
47
47
48
48
49
49
50
50

A4 series models
only

APS1
(S1)

APS2
(S2)

APS3
(S3)

APS-C
(S4)

APS-R
(S5)

FANFRONT
(M32)

DATA0
DATA2
DATA4
DATA6
DATA8
DATA10
DATA12
DATA14
A19
A17
A15
A13
A11
A09
A07
A05
A03
A01
RD
CS0-A
CS0-B
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
SG
SG
DATA1
DATA3
DATA5
DATA7
DATA9
DATA11
DATA13
DATA15
A18
A16
A14
A12
A10
A08
A06
A04
A02
A0
A20
CS0
+3.3VA
RMSL
/WR
SG
SG

CN13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34

13
14
15
16

10
11
12

7
8
9

4
5
6

1
2
3

CN15

1
2
3
4

CN22

Download jig (for SYS)

CN5

Download jig (for SLG)

CN9
1
2
3
4

NC

MDT[0]
MDT[2]
MDT[4]
MDT[6]
CPURD
MAD[0]
MAD[2]
MAD[4]
MAD[6]
MAD[8]
MAD[10]
MAD[12]
MAD[14]
MAD[16]
DLAD[0]
SG
SG
MDT[1]
MDT[3]
MDT[5]
MDT[7]
PNLCS
MAD[1]
MAD[3]
MAD[5]
MAD[7]
MAD[9]
MAD[11]
MAD[13]
MAD[15]
DLAD[1]
MCNT
+5V
LED

CN23
FANSLG
1
+24V
2
NC
3
NC
4

Y1
X0
X1
Y0

SG

1
2
3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

SYS-EN
/PWR-EN
PWR-DN
/PWR-SW
SG
+5VS
SG
+5VA
+5VA
+5VA
SG
SG
+12VA
SG
SG
SG
+12VB
SG
+5VB
+5VB

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

PWA-F-FIL
(FIL
(FIL)
FIL)
1
2
3
NC
NC
1
2
3
1
2
3
+5.1VB
1

J650
CN412

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45

CN11

4
5
6
7
8

1
2
3

CN16

+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
NC
NC
NC
NC
SG
SG
SG
SG
SH-R
SH-G
SH-B
OHDEN
SG
SG
CK2BCK2B+
SG
CK2CK2+
SG
CK1CK1+
SG
CPCP+
SG
RSRS+
SG
SHPSHP+
SG
SHDSHD+
SG
ADCLKADCLK+
SG
SG
RARA+

SG
HOME
+5V
SPEC
SG

SG
PLTN
+5V

SG
CTD2+
CTD2SG
CTCLK2+
STCLK2SG
CTC2+
CTC2SG
CTB2+
CTB2SG
CTA2+
CTS2+
CTA2SG
CTD1+
CTD1SG
CTCLK1+
CTCLK1SG
CTC1+
CTC1SG
CTB1+
CTB1SG
CTA1+
CTA1SG
LVRCLK+
LVRCLKSG
PMA3PMA3+
SG
PMB3PMB3+
SG
PMC3PMC3+
SG
PMCLK3PMCLK3+
SG
PMD3PMD3+
SG
PMA1PMA1+
SG
PMB1PMB1+
SG
PMC1PMC1+
SG
PMCLK1PMCLK1+
SG
PMD1PMD1+
SG
PMA2PMA2+
SG
PMB2PMB2+
SG
PMC2PMC2+
SG
PMCLK2PMCLK2+
SG
PMD2PMD2+
SG
WTDT7
WTDT6
WTDT5
WTDT4
WTDT3
WTDT2
WTDT1
WTDT0
SG
WTHDEN
WTVDEN
SG
WTDCLK
SG
TWVSYNC
TWHSYNC
SG
TWRCLK
RSVD
PIF-3V
PIF-3V

76
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40

80
79
78
77

CN10

PWA-F-SLG
(SLG)

4
3
2
1

6
5

10
9
8
7

39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11

SG
RBRB+
SG
RCRC+
SG
RDRD+
SG
RERE+
SG
RLCKRLCK+
SG
SG
NC
AGCST
CLPIN
BCLP-0
SCLK-0
AFECS-0
SD1-1
SD0-1
AFEID
AFERST
SG
SG
NC
NC
+10V
+10V
+10V
+10V
NC
NC
SG
SG
NC
NC
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V

CN135
CN422
101 101
102 102
103 103
104 104
105 105
106 106
107 107
108 108
109 109
110 110
111 111
112 112
113 113
114 114
115 115
116 116
117 117
118 118
119 119
120 120
121 121
122 122
123 123
124 124
125 125
126 126
127 127
128 128
129 129
130 130
131 131
132 132
133 133
134 134
135 135
136 136
137 137
138 138
139 139
140 140
141 141
142 142
143 143
144 144
145 145
146 146
147 147
148 148
149 149
150 150
151 151
152 152
153 153
154 154
155 155
156 156
157 157
158 158
159 159
160 160
161 161
162 162
163 163
164 164
165 165
166 166
167 167
168 168
169 169
170 170
171 171
172 172
173 173
174 174
175 175
176 176
177 177
178 178
179 179
180 180
181 181
182 182
183 183
184 184
185 185
186 186
187 187
188 188
189 189
190 190
191 191
192 192
193 193
194 194
195 195
196 196
197 197
198 198
199 199
200 200

CN10

SCNT
SYSCNT
SCNRTS
MMPIOA
SCN3V
SG
RSVD
SRST
SCNCTS
SCNIN
SCNOUT
SG
CTDCLK
SG
CTHDEN
CTVDEN
SG
CTDT7
CTDT6
CTDT5
CTDT4
CTDT3
CTDT2
CTDT1
CTDT0
SG
CVSYNC
CHSYNC
SG
CPAD[16]
CPAD[15]
CPAD[14]
CPAD[13]
CPAD[12]
CPAD[11]
CPAD[10]
CPAD[9]
CPAD[8]
SG
CPAD[7]
CPAD[6]
CPAD[5]
CPAD[4]
CPAD[3]
CPAD[2]
CPAD[1]
CPAD[0]
SG
IMGCS
SG
CPWR
SG
CPRD
SG
ARSTIMG
SG
CPDT[7]
CPDT[6]
CPDT[5]
CPDT[4]
CPDT[3]
CPDT[2]
CPDT[1]
CPDT[0]
SG
IMGINT
IMG3V
PCMD
SG
PSTS
SG
PEPOW
SG
PCACK
RSTFPGA
PSACK
SG
PSBSY
PSBCY
SG
PCPOW
SCMD
SSERR
SSTS
SCERR
ARSTLGC
SG
SCBSY
SSACK
SSBSY
SCACK
MMPIOB
LGCLIFE
RSVD
SG
SG
RSVD
RSVD
RSVD
RSVD
RSVD

PWA-F-CCD
(CCD)

J50
3
PLTN-SNR
2
(S7)
1
J49
3
HOME-SNR
2
(S6)
1

CN135
CN422
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
31
31
32
32
33
33
34
34
35
35
36
36
37
37
38
38
39
39
40
40
41
41
42
42
43
43
44
44
45
45
46
46
47
47
48
48
49
49
50
50
51
51
52
52
53
53
54
54
55
55
56
56
57
57
58
58
59
59
60
60
61
61
62
62
63
63
64
64
65
65
66
66
67
67
68
68
69
69
70
70
71
71
72
72
73
73
74
74
75
75
76
76
77
77
78
78
79
79
80
80
81
81
82
82
83
83
84
84
85
85
86
86
87
87
88
88
89
89
90
90
91
91
92
92
93
93
94
94
95
95
96
96
97
97
98
98
99
99
100 100

46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90

CN11

+3.3VA
PCMD-1
PCACK
RESERVE0
RSTFPGA
ARSTPIF
PCPOW
IMGLIFE2
LVKSYNC
EKVDEN
SG
EKDT0
EKDT2
EKDT4
EKDT6
SG
EKDT8
EKDT10
EKDT12
EKDT14
EKDSC0
EKDSC2
SG
ETH0
ECVDEN
SG
ECDT0
ECDT2
ECDT4
ECDT6
SG
ECDT8
ECDT10
ECDT12
ECDT14
ECDSC0
ECDSC2
SG
ETH1
EMVDEN0
SG
EMDT0
EMDT2
EMDT4
EMDT6
SG
EMDT8
EMDT10
EMDT12
EMDT14
EMDSC0
EMDSC2
SG
CVSYNC
EYVDEN
SG
EYDT0
EYDT2
EYDT4
EYDT6
SG
EYDT8
EYDT10
EYDT12
EYDT14
EYDSC0
EYDSC2
SG
SG
SG

PS-ACC
(PS)
(PS
PS)

RADF

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70

SG
RD2-0
RCLK2-1
SG
RC2-0
RB2-1
SG
RA2-0
RD1-1
SG
RCLK1-0
RC1-1
SG
RB1-0
RA1-1
SG
SMCK-0
SYSCNT-0
SCNT-1
SCN-3.3V
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
RD2-1
SG
RCLK2-0
RC2-1
SG
RA2-0
RA2-1
SG
RD1-0
RCLK1-1
SG
RC1-0
RB1-1
SG

+5VB
+5VB
SG
SG
SG
+12VB
PG
PG
+24VD4
+24VD4

A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25

J41
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4

TA1RA1
MSRCK+
SMCK-1
SG
SG
SRESET-0 SCNRST-0
MMPIO-1
MMPIO-1
LONEN-0
LMPEN-0
SCNOUT-1
SCNIN-1
SCNIN-1
SCNOUT-1
SCNRTS-0 SCNCTS-0
SCNCTS-0 SCNRTS-0
NC
NC

SG
TD2TCLK2+
SG
TC2TB2+
SG
TA2TD1+
SG
TCLK1TC1+
SG
TB1TA1+
SG
MSRCKSYSCNT-0
SCNT-0
+3.3V
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
TD2+
SG
TCLK2TC2+
SG
TB2TA2+
SG
TD1TCLK1+
SG
TC1TB1+
SG

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

CN14

A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25

CN421

71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140

CN424

PWA-F-IMG
(IMG
(IMG)
IMG)

Option

CN12

CN424

J42
CN18
DFAK-0A
1 1
1
DFSCST-0A
2 2
2
DFRXD-0A
3 3
3
SG
4 4
4
DFTXD-0A
5 5
5
SG
6 6
6
DFRAK-0A
7 7
7
DFRRQ-0A
8 8
8
DFRQ-0A
9 9
9
DFCNT-0A
10 10
10
NC
11 11
SG
11
12 12
NC
13 13
+5V
12
14 14

LP-EXPO
(EXP)

J54
2 2
1 1
SCAN-FAN-MOT
(M30)

CN19
1
2
3
4
5
INV
(INV)

CN17
J30

DG
DG
LMPON
+24V
+24V
CN1
5
4
3
2
1
CN2
1
2
3
4

1
5
6
4
2
3

SCNMA
+24V
SCNMAB
SCNMB
+24V
SCNMBB
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
SCAN-MOT
(M1)

CN126

CN170
CN117
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
31
31
32
32
33
33
34
34
35
35
36
36
37
37
38
38
39
39
40
40
41
41
42
42
43
43
44
44
45
45
46
46
47
47
48
48
49
49
50
50

NC
NC
SRAMCNT
RTCCS
RTCSCLK
RTCS0
/SRAMCS
A[12]
A[11]
A[13]
A[10]
A[14]
A[9]
A[15]
A[8]
/SRAMWR
/SRAMBLE
D[7]
D[8]
D[6]
D[9]
D[5]
D[10]
D[4]
D[11]
D[3]
D[12]
D[2]
D[13]
D[1]
D[14]
D[0]
D[15]
/SRAMBHE
/SRAMRD
A[0]
A[7]
A[1]
A[6]
A[2]
A[5]
A[3]
A[4]
+3.3VA
SG
+3.3VA
SG
NC
/SRAMRST
NC
2

Option

FG

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

J40 J621

+3.3VA
PSTS
PSACK
SG
RESERVE1
SG
PEPOW
SG
CHSYNC
EHDENA
SG
EKDT1
EKDT3
EKDT5
EKDT7
SG
EKDT9
EKDT11
EKDT13
EKDT15
EKDSC1
EKDSC3
SG
SG
ECHDEN
SG
ECDT1
ECDT3
ECDT5
ECDT7
SG
ECDT9
ECDT11
ECDT13
ECDT15
ECDSC1
ECDSC3
SG
SG
EMHDEN
SG
EMDT1
EMDT3
EMDT5
EMDT7
SG
EMDT9
EMDT11
EMDT13
EMDT15
EMDSC1
EMDSC3
SG
SG
EYHDEN
SG
EYDT1
EYDT3
EYDT5
EYDT7
SG
EYDT9
EYDT11
EYDT13
EYDT15
EYDSC1
EYDSC3
SG
EDCLK
SG

SG
TLKDT[0]
TLKDT[2]
TLKDT[4]
TLKDT[6]
TLKDT[8]
TLKDT[10]
TLKDT[12]
PLKDT[14]
TLKPOS[0]
TLKPOS[2]
SG
TLKDCLK
SG
TLCDT[0]
TLCDT[2]
TLCDT[4]
TLCDT[6]
TLCDT[8]
TLCDT[10]
TLCDT[12]
TLCDT[14]
TLCPOS[0]
TLCPOS[2]
SG
TLCVDEN-0
TLCHDEN-0
SG
TLMDT[0]
TLMDT[2]
TLMDT[4]
TLMDT[6]
TLMDT[8]
TLMDT[10]
TLMDT[12]
TLMDT[14]
TLMPOS[0]
TLMPOS[2]
SG
TLMDCLK
SG
TLYDT[0]
TLYDT[2]
TLYDT[4]
TLYDT[6]
TLYDT[8]
TLYDT[10]
TLYDT[12]
TLYDT[14]
TLYPOS[0]
TLYPOS[2]
SG
TLYVDEN-0
TLYHDEN-0
SG
LHSYNC-0
SG
PORT-B
SG
MCLKP
SG
SCBSY-0
SSACK-0
SSBSY-0
SCACK-0
MMPIOB-1
EPVCC
EPCK-1
EPWR-1
LGCLIFE-1
SG
TLKDT[1]
TLKDT[3]
TLKDT[5]
TLKDT[7]
TLKDT[9]
TLKDT[11]
TLKDT[13]
TLKDT[15]
TLKPOS[1]
TLKPOS[3]
SG
TLKVDEN-0
TLKHDEN-0
SG
TLCDT[1]
TLCDT[3]
TLCDT[5]
TLCDT[7]
TLCDT[9]
TLCDT[11]
TLCDT[13]
TLCDT[15]
TLCPOS[1]
TLCPOS[3]
SG
TLCDCLK
SG
TLMDT[1]
TLMDT[3]
TLMDT[5]
TLMDT[7]
TLMDT[9]
TLMDT[11]
TLMDT[13]
TLMDT[15]
TLMPOS[1]
TLMPOS[3]
SG
TLMVDEN-0
TLMHDEN-0
SG
TLYDT[1]
TLYDT[3]
TLYDT[5]
TLYDT[7]
TLYDT[9]
TLYDT[11]
TLYDT[13]
TLYDT[15]
TLYPOS[1]
TLYPOS[3]
SG
TLYDCLK
SG
LVSYNC-0
LMVSYNC-0
LCVSYNC-0
LKVSYNC-0
SG
SCMD-1
SSERR-0
SSTS-0
SCERR-0
ARSTLGC-0
SG
EPRD-1
EPCS-1
IMGCNT
IMGLIFE

1
2
3
4

CN425

CN423
CN354
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
31
31
32
32
33
33
34
34
35
35
36
36
37
37
38
38
39
39
40
40
41
41
42
42
43
43
44
44
45
45
46
46
47
47
48
48
49
49
50
50
51
51
52
52
53
53
54
54
55
55
56
56
57
57
58
58
59
59
60
60
61
61
62
62
63
63
64
64
65
65
66
66
67
67
68
68
69
69
70
70
71
71
72
72
73
73
74
74
75
75
76
76
77
77
78
78
79
79
80
80
81
81
82
82
83
83
84
84
85
85
86
86
87
87
88
88
89
89
90
90
91
91
92
92
93
93
94
94
95
95
96
96
97
97
98
98
99
99
100 100
101 101
102 102
103 103
104 104
105 105
106 106
107 107
108 108
109 109
110 110
111 111
112 112
113 113
114 114
115 115
116 116
117 117
118 118
119 119
120 120
121 121
122 122
123 123
124 124
125 125
126 126
127 127
128 128
129 129
130 130
131 131
132 132
133 133
134 134
135 135
136 136
137 137
138 138
139 139
140 140

Option

SG
KIDATJ[0]
KIDATJ[2]
KIDATJ[4]
KIDATJ[6]
KIDATJ[8]
KIDATJ[10]
KIDATJ[12]
KIDATJ[14]
KIPOSJ[0]
KIPOSJ[2]
SG
KIDCLK-1T
SG
CIDATJ[0]
CIDATJ[2]
CIDATJ[4]
CIDATJ[6]
CIDATJ[8]
CIDATJ[10]
CIDATJ[12]
CIDATJ[14]
CIPOSJ[0]
CIPOSJ[2]
SG
CIVDEN-0T
CIHDEN-0T
SG
MIDATJ[0]
MIDATJ[2]
MIDATJ[4]
MIDATJ[6]
MIDATJ[8]
MIDATJ[10]
MIDATJ[12]
MIDATJ[14]
MIPOSJ[0]
MIPOSJ[2]
SG
MIDCLK-1T
SG
YIDATJ[0]
YIDATJ[2]
YIDATJ[4]
YIDATJ[6]
YIDATJ[8]
YIDATJ[10]
YIDATJ[12]
YIDATJ[14]
YIPOSJ[0]
YIPOSJ[2]
SG
YIVDEN-0T
YIHDEN-0T
SG
IHSYNC-0T
SG
IRCLK-1T
SG
MCLK-1T
SG
CBSY-0T
SACK-0T
SBSY-0T
CACK-0T
MMPI-1T
+3.3V
EP2CK-1T
EP2WD-1T
LGCLIFE
SG
KIDATJ[1]
KIDATJ[3]
KIDATJ[5]
KIDATJ[7]
KIDATJ[9]
KIDATJ[11]
KIDATJ[13]
KIDATJ[15]
KIPOSJ[1]
KIPOSJ[3]
SG
KIVDEN-0T
KIHDEN-0T
SG
CIDATJ[1]
CIDATJ[3]
CIDATJ[5]
CIDATJ[7]
CIDATJ[9]
CIDATJ[11]
CIDATJ[13]
CIDATJ[15]
CIPOSJ[1]
CIPOSJ[3]
SG
CIDCLK-1T
SG
MIDATJ[1]
MIDATJ[3]
MIDATJ[5]
MIDATJ[7]
MIDATJ[9]
MIDATJ[11]
MIDATJ[13]
MIDATJ[15]
MIPOSJ[1]
MIPOSJ[3]
SG
MIVDEN-0T
MIHDEN-0T
SG
YIDATJ[1]
YIDATJ[3]
YIDATJ[5]
YIDATJ[7]
YIDATJ[9]
YIDATJ[11]
YIDATJ[13]
YIDATJ[15]
YIPOSJ[1]
YIPOSJ[3]
SG
YIDCLK-1T
SG
YIVSYNC-0T
MIVSYNC-0T
CIVSYNC-0T
KIVSYNC-0T
SG
CMD-0T
SERR-0T
STS-0T
CERR-0T
SYSRST-0C
SG
EP2RD-1T
EP2CS-1T
IMGCNT-0T
IMGLIFE-1T

1
2
3
4

CN403

Finisher

SG
+12VB

13
14

CN407
+5VB
1
+5VB
2
SG
3
SG
4
PG
5
PG
6
PG
7
PG
8
+24VD4
9
+24VD4
10
+24VD4
11
+24VD4
12

SG
+5V
+5V
SG

CN203
6
5
4
MIR-MOT-M
(M14)
3
2
1
CN204
6
5
4
MIR-MOT-C
(M15)
3
2
1

J604
1
2
J605
3
TNR-SNR-Y
2
(S8)
1
J604
1
TNR-MOT-M
(M3)
2
J605
3
TNR-SNR-M
2
(S9)
1
J604
1
TNR-MOT-C
(M4)
2
J605
3
TNR-SNR-C
2
(S10)
1
J604
1
TNR-MOT-K
(M5)
2
J605
3
TNR-SNR-K
2
(S11)
1
TNR-MOT-Y
(M2)

CN210
10
9
8
7
PWA-F-LDR-M 6
(LDR-M
(LDR-M)
LDR-M)
5
4
3
2
1
CN209
10
9
8
7
PWA-F-LDR-K 6
(LDR-K
(LDR-K)
LDR-K)
5
4
3
2
1
CN208
10
9
8
7
PWA-F-LDR-C 6
(LDR-C
(LDR-C)
LDR-C)
5
4
3
2
1
CN207
10
9
8
7
PWA-F-LDR-Y 6
(LDR-Y
(LDR-Y)
LDR-Y)
5
4
3
2
1

CN201
3
PWA-F-SNS
2
(SNS
(SNS)
SNS)
1

4
3
2
1

J615
8
9
NC
10
11
12
7
6
5

CN205
6
5
4
MIR-MOT-K
(M16)
3
2
1

e-STUDIO3530C/4520C
CN206
8
7
6
5
POL-MOT
M
(M13)
4
3
2
1

PWA-F-SRAM-L (SRAM-L)

NC

FG

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8

1
2
3

3
2
1

3
4
5

3
2
1

3
4
5

3
2
1

3
4
5

J503

B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14

A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8

3
2
1

B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1

A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7

J506
A1 A14
A2 A13
A3 A12
A4 A11
A5 A10
A6
A9

5
4

1
2

J559

5
4

1
2

J558

5
4

J557

3
2
1

1
2

5
4

3
4
5

J556
1
2

B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10

B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11

J2
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

CN405

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

CN404

+5VB
SG
SG
+5VD
+24VD1
+24VD2
+24VD3
PG
PG
PG

+5VB
SG
FANONH
FANONL
PWRDN-1
RLYON
+12VB
SG
LMP1
LMP2
LMP3
LMP4

Option

Copy key card

Coin controller

30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

CN353
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

CN361

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

SG
+5V
IPCAD0
IPCAD2
IPCAD4
IPCAD6
IPCDT0
IPCDT2
IPCDT4
IPCDT6
SG
IPCWR-0C
IPCCS-0CA
+5V
IPCSW-0T
SG
+5V
IPCAD1
IPCAD3
IPCAD5
IPCAD7
IPCDT1
IPCDT3
IPCDT5
IPCDT7
SG
IPCRD-0C
IPCRST-0C
+5V
SG

+24VD3
CTRON
CTRCNT
MCRUN
EXTCTR
PG
BKCTR
MNCTR
FLCTR
SG
SIZE3
SIZE2
SIZE1
SIZE0
+5V
CTRCNT2

CN336
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8

CN345

SG
KTCRC
+24V
KTCRON

B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11

B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1

A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20

A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10

1
2
3
CN356

CN355

B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14

A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8

A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6

CN343

B8
B9
B10

B6
B7

B3
B4
B5

B1
B2

A8
A9
A10

A6
A7

A3
A4
A5

CN335
1
2
3
4

SG
+5VD
YSKHSLV-1
YWRLVL-1
YPWM-1
YPWM-0
YWRAPC-0T
YDDIS-1C
+5VD
SG

SG
+5VD
CSKHSLV-1
CWRLVL-1
CPWM-1
CPWM-0
CWRAPC-0T
CDDIS-1C
+5VD
SG

SG
+5VD
KSKHSLV-1
KWRLVL-1
KPWM-1
KPWM-0
KWRAPC-0T
KDDIS-1C
+5VD
SG

SG
+5VD
MSKHSLV-1
MWRLVL-1
MPWM-1
MPWM-0
MWRAPC-0T
MDDIS-1C
+5VD
SG

SG
BD-0
+5V

+24VD1
+24VD1
TILTK0
TILTK1
TILTK2
TILTK3

+24VD1
+24VD1
TILTC0
TILTC1
TILTC2
TILTC3
NC
SG
PMCK
NC
PG
PMMTR
PMSNC
PG
+24VD1
+24VD1

+24VD1
+24VD1
TILTM0
TILTM1
TILTM2
TILTM3

SG
KCRGSW-0
+5V

KTNMT-0A
+24VD3

SG
CCRGSW-0
+5V

CTNMT-0A
+24VD3

SG
MCRGSW-0A
+5V

MTNMT-0A
+24VD3

SG
YCRGSW-0
+5V

CN331
YTNMT-0A
A1
+24VD3
A2

Key copy counter

A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1

A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20

J505
A1 A20
A2 A19
A3 A18
A4 A17
A5 A16
A6 A15
A7 A14
A8 A13
A9 A12
A10 A11

NC

NC
NC

NC
NC

CNT-GND
F-CNT
NC
NC
NC
NC
SG
TXD
SG
RXD

e-STUDIO2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C
CN206
5
4
POL-MOT
3
M
(M13)
2
1

CN406
+5V
4
SG
3
+24V
2
PG
1

EFI Printer board

PG
15
PG
16
+24VD4
17
+24VD4
18
NC
19
20
15
16
17
18
19
20

PWA-F-LGC
(LGC
(LGC)
LGC)

Download jig (for MAIN)

TBMA-0A
+24VD2
TBMC-0A
TBMB-0A
+24VD2
TBMD-0A

NC
NC
DRMC-0A
+24VD2
DRMA-0A
DRMB-0A
+24VD2
DRMD-0A

RGTMD-0A
+24VD2
RGTMB-0A
RGTMC-0A
+24VD2
RGTMA-0A
NC
NC

PDLMTR
+24VD3

+24VD3
YERSLP-0A

+24VD3
KERSLP-0A

RLC2S-0C
+5V
RLHSW-0
SG
RLCNT-0
RLCSW-0
RLTRS-0
GASOL-0A
+24VD3
PG
NC
NC

EPUFAN-0
+24VD4
NC
NC

CGFAN-0
+24VD3

FUSERFAN-0
+24VD3

BHETH+-1
BHETH--1

+5V
EXTSW-1
SG

BHSTH--1
SG
+5V
VtambBS
NC
NC
NC
NC
FUSJD
SG

BHCTH--1
SG
+5V
VtambBC

PHCTH+-1
PHCTH--1
THCNT

1
2
3
4

7
8
9

1
2
3
4
5
6

2
1

J524
2 2
1 1
J531
2 2
1 1

9
10
J530
2 2
1 1

A7
A8
A9

B15
B16
B17
B18

B13
B14

B11
B12

B9
B10

B6
B7
B8

A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5

A10
A11
A12
A13

NC
NC
NC
NC

CGFAN-0
+24VD3

FUSERFAN-0
+24VD3

BHETH+-1
BHETH--1

+5V
EXTSW-1
SG

BHSTH--1
SG
+5V
VtambBS
NC
NC
NC
NC
FUSJD
SG

BHCTH--1
SG
+5V
VtambBC

PHCTH+-1
PHCTH--1
THCNT

J656

J562

4
5
6

5
6
7
8

1
2
3
4

2
1

J524
2 2
1 1

6
7
J530
2 2
1 1

3
4
5

1
2

6
7
8

3
4
5

1
2

THMS-PR-C
(THM4)

THMS-PR-R
(THM5)

Option

Bridge unit

INTRNL-FAN-MOT
(M23)

THMS-FBLT-F
(THM3)

J648 200V series

1
2
J573
1
EXIT-SNR
2
(S26)
3

4
J574
1
2 THMP-FBLT-R
(THMP2)
3

FUS/EXIT-FAN-MOT
(M25)

J637
1 2
2 1

J575
1
2 THMP-FBLT-C
(THMP1)
3

THMS-PR-C
(THM4)

THMS-PR-R
(THM5)

EPU-FAN-MOT
(M33)

INTRNL-FAN-MOT
(M23)

THMS-FBLT-F
(THM3)

4
J648 200V series
1
2
3
4
5
J573
1
EXIT-SNR
2
(S26)
3

4
J574
1
2 THMP-FBLT-R
(THMP2)
3

J575
1
2 THMP-FBLT-C
(THMP1)
3

J533
3
TNTRLK
2
(S42)
1

J560
2
UTN-COVER
(SW8)
1

J553
1
USD-TNR2
FULL-SNR
(S13)
3

J615
4
3
2
1

J615
4
3
2
1

J615
4
3
2
1

B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17

B10
B11

B8
B9

B5
B6
B7

A14
A15
A16
A17
B1
B2
B3
B4

A10
A11
A12
A13

A7
A8
A9

CGFAN-0
+24VD4
NC
NC
NC
NC

FUSERFAN-0
+24VD4

BHETH+-1
BHETH--1

+5V
EXTSW-1
SG

BHSTH--1
SG
+5V
VtambBS
NC
NC
FUSJD
SG

BHCTH--1
SG
+5V
VtambBC

PHCTH+-1
PHCTH--1
THCNT

5
6
7
8

1
2
3
4

4
5
6

1
2
3

NC
NC

NC
NC

4
3
2
1

7
6
5

4
3
2
1

6
5

J518

J517
2 2
1 1

3
2
1

J516
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

J578

J579

4
5
6

3
2
1

6
5
4

J566
B1 B16
B2 B15
B3 B14
B4 B13
B5 B12

J616
A1
A8
A2
A7
A3
A6
A5
A4
A5
A4

B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16

B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1

B11
B10
B9

4
J574
1
2 THMP-FBLT-R
(THMP2)
3

J575
1
2 THMP-FBLT-C
(THMP1)
3

THMS-PR-C
(THM4)

THMS-PR-R
(THM5)

B6
B7
B8

A3
A2
A1
J613
A1
A8
A2
A7
A3
A6
A4
A5
A5
A4
A6
A3
A7
A2
A8
A1

A6
A7
A8

A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16

A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1

A6
A7
A8

A11
A10
A9

J566
A1 A16
A2 A15
A3 A14
A4 A13
A5 A12

J520

A3
A2
A1

4
5
6

1
2
3

3
2
1

J614
A1
A8
A2
A7
A3
A6
A4
A5
A5
A4
A6
A3
A7
A2
A8
A1

A6
A7
A8

J618
A1
A8
A2
A7
A3
A6
A5
A4
A5
A4

J526
3
DRM-SNR2
2
(S44)
1

J522
3
DRM-SW-SNR
2
(S19)
1

1
2
3

4
5
6
7

1
2
3

3
4
5
6

1
2

10
9
8
7
6

13
12
11

16
5
17
4
18
3
19
2
20
1
J551
1
4
2
3
3
2
4
1
J549
1
3
2
2
3
1
J550
1
6
2
5
3
4

11
12
13
14
15

8
9
10

J548
20
19
18
17
16
15
14

J519
12
11
10
9
8
FEED/TRNS-MOT 7
(M20)
6
5
4
3
2
1

J571
3
2
1

DRM-SW-MOT
(M11)

DEV-MOT
(M9)

J582
3
2
1

J581
2 2
1 1

NC

NC

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

J524
2 2
1 1

INTRNL-FAN-MOT
(M23)

J528 J648 100V series

J648 200V series
7
1
1
6
2
2
J572
J573
1
3
1
5
3
EXIT-SNR
2
2
2
4
4
(S26)
3
3
1
3
5
J637
1 2
2
6
THMS-FBLT-F
(THM3)
2 1
7
1
J530
2 2
FUS/EXIT-FAN-MOT
M
(M25)
1 1

4
3
2
1

3
2
1
J529
8
7
6
5

e-STUDIO2330C/2820C
CN333
NC
A1
NC
A2
NC
J527
A3
THCNT
6
A4
PHETH+-1
A5
5
PHETH--1
A6
4

ATTNR-SNR-C
(S24)

J630
THMS-DRM-K 2
(THM2)
1

ATTNR-SNR-K
(S25)

ATTNR-SNR-M
(S23)

DRM-SNR
(S43)

TR1-SNR
(S15)

TR1-CAM-MOT
(M8)

J630
THMS-DRM-Y 2
(THM1)
1

J577
2 2
1 1
J624
4
TEMP/HUMI-SNR 3
(S12)
2
1

UT-CARRY-MOT
(M31)

LSU-FAN-MOT
(M29)

J628
2 2
1 1

J590
3
TR2-SNR
2
(S29)
1
J591
3
CLNG-SNR
2
(S27)
1
J595
3
RGST-SNR
2
(S28)
1
J596
3
CST1FEED-SNR 2
(S30)
1
J546
1 1
CST1-TR-H-CLT
(CLT1)
2 2
J547
1 1
CST1-TR-L-CLT
(CLT2)
2 2
J545
1 1
OZN-FAN-MOT
(M24)
2 2

J600
5
4
IMG-POS-SNR-F
3
(S16)
2
1
J597
5
4
IMG-POS-SNR-R
3
(S17)
2
1

J598
7
6
5
TNR-LVL-SNR
4
(S18)
3
2
1
J599
2 2
SNR-SHUT-SOL
(SOL2)
1 1

J615
4
3
2
1

ATTNR-SNR-Y
(S22)

J510
6
5
4
TBU-MOT
(M7)
3
2
1

J511
6
5
4
DRM-MOT
(M10)
3
2
1

2
1

J513
6
5
4 RGST-MOT
(M19)
3

1 2
USD-TNR-MOT
(M6)
2 1
J567
1
USD-TNR2
LCK-SNR
(S14)
3

J565

LP-ERS-Y
(ERS-Y)

FUS/EXIT-FAN-MOT
(M25)

J637
1 2
2 1

J528 J648 100V series

7
1
6
2
J572
1
3
5
3
2
2
4
4
3
1
3
5

4
3
2
1

3
2
1
J529
8
7
6
5

TBMA-0A
+24VD2
TBMC-0A
TBMB-0A
+24VD2
TBMD-0A

DRMC-0A
+24VD2
DRMA-0A
DRMB-0A
+24VD2
DRMD-0A

RGTMD-0A
+24VD2
RGTMB-0A
RGTMC-0A
+24VD2
RGTMA-0A

J610
1 1
LP-ERS-M
(ERS-M)
2 2
J609
1 1
LP-ERS-C
(ERS-C)
2 2
J607
1
SHUT-SNR
2
(S20)
3
J606
2 1
SHUT-MOT
(M12)
1 2

3
2
1

5
4

3
2
1

6
5
4

8
7

J612
1 1
2 2

4
5
3
6
2
7
1
8
J528 J648 100V series
10
1
9
2
3
8
7
4
6
5
J572
1
3
5
6
2
2
4
7
3
1
3
8

3
2
1
J529
8
7
6
5

J527
9
8
7
6
5
4

B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12

e-STUDIO2820C/2830C/3530C
CN332
J512
EXTMD-0A
A1
6
+24VD2
A2
5
EXTMB-0A
4
A3
EXIT-MOT
EXTMA-0A
(M18)
A4
3
+24VD2
A5
2
EXTMC-0A
A6
1

J608
1
CH-CLN-SNR
2
(S21)
3
J611
1 1
LP-ERS-K
(ERS-K)
2 2

FUS-MOT
(M17)

NC
NC

J523
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

J525

B8
B9

B5
B6
B7

B3
B4

B1
B2

A6
A7
A8
A9

A4
A5

e-STUDIO2830C/3520C/3530C
CN333
NC
A1
NC
A2
NC
J527
A3
THCNT
6
A4
1
PHETH+-1
5
A5
2
PHETH--1
A6
4
3

B15
B16
B17
B18

B13
B14

B11
B12

B9
B10

B6
B7
B8

A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5

A10
A11
A12
A13

A7
A8
A9

e-STUDIO4520C
CN333
THCNT
A1
NC
A2
NC
A3
THCNT
A4
PHETH+-1
A5
PHETH--1
A6

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12

A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12

FSMBK-0A
+24VD1
+24VD1
PG
PG
FSMGA-0A
FSMRDY-1
FSMDIR-0
FSMCK-1A
FSMON-0A
SG
+5V

B2
B1

LUSTMB
B14
LUSTMA
B15
CN334

B5
B4
B3

+5V
B11
LUSTSW
B12
SG
B13

B9
B8
B7
B6

+24VD3
MERSLP-0A

SG
TNTRK
+5V

NC
NC

A4
A3
A2
A1

A6
A5

J561
A9
A1
A8
A2
A7
A3

J510
6
5
4
TBU-MOT
(M7)
3
2
1

J511
6
5
4
DRM-MOT
(M10)
3
2
1

2
1

J513
6
5
4 RGST-MOT
(M19)
3

+24VD3
B9
CERSLP-0A
B10

B7
B8

B4
B5
B6

B1
B2
B3

NC
TRCOV
SG

+5V
A13
USDFULL
A14
SG
A15

+5V
A10
PDLMTLOCK
A11
SG
A12

A8
A9

A6
A7

A4
A5

CN359
+5V
A1
KCLNLT
A2
SG
A3

B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8

A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14

e-STUDIO2330C/3520C/4520C
CN332
J512
EXTMD-0A
A1
6
+24VD2
A2
5
EXTMB-0A
A3
4
EXIT-MOT
EXTMA-0A
(M18)
A4
3
+24VD2
A5
2
EXTMC-0A
A6
1

SG
CS1FEED-1
+5V

SG
RGSTS-1
+5V

SG
TB2JAM-1
+5V

SG
TB2PS-1
+5V

CPUCNT-0
DG
CATSN-1
+24VD3
CATSVR-1
NC
NC
SG

KDRTH-1
SG
SG

KPUCNT-0
DG
KATSN-1
+24VD3
KATSVR-1

MPUCNT-0
DG
MATSN-1
+24VD3
MATSVR-1
NC
NC
SG

YDRTH-1
SG
SG

YPUCNT-0
DG
YATSN-1
+24VD3
YATSVR-1

SG
DRPOS2-1
+5V

SG
CKMODE1-1
+5V

FDMBK-0A
+24VD1
+24VD1
PG
PG
FDMGA-0A
FDMRDY-1
FDMDIR-0A
FDMCK-1A
FDMON-0A
SG
+5V

NC

SG
DRPOS1-1
+5V

CKMMA-0
CKMMB-1

DVMBK-0A
+24VD1
+24VD1
PG
PG
DVMGA-0A
DVMRDY-1
DVMDIR-0A
DVMTCK-1A
DVMON-0A
SG
+5V

SG
BTPS1-1
+5V
SG
NC

TBCNT-0
TBLTM1A-0
TBLTM1B-1

TEMP-1A
SG
HMS-1
+5V

TNTRMT-0
+24V

PLFAN-0
+24VD3

NC
NC

+24VD3
OZFAN-0A

MDT1CL-0A
+24VD3

MDT1CLH-0A
+24VD3

NC

RGRLED-1
RGFRON-0
SG
RGREAR-1
+12V

RGFRNT
RGREON-0
SG
RGFRNT-1
+12V

LSUSLA-0A
+24VD3
NC

SG
TNLED-1
TNLVL2-1
TNLVL1-1
TNREF-1
SG
+12V

B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16

B6
B7
B8

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5

A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16

A6
A7
A8

A1
A2
A3
A4
A5

CN340

34
35
36

31
32
33

19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30

15
16
17
18

13
14

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

CN339

B4
B5
B6
B7
B8

B1
B2
B3

A5
A6
A7
A8

A3
A4

A1
A2

CN342

39
40

37
38

35
36

33
34

30
31
32

27
28
29

24
25
26

21
22
23

16
17
18
19
20

11
12
13
14
15

8
9
10

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

CN337

CN170
CN363
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
31
31
32
32
33
33
34
34
35
35
36
36
37
37
38
38
39
39
40
40
41
41
42
42
43
43
44
44
45
45
46
46
47
47
48
48
49
49
50
50
NC
NC
SRAMCNT
RTCCS
RTCSCLK
RTCS0
/SRAMCS
A[12]
A[11]
A[13]
A[10]
A[14]
A[9]
A[15]
A[8]
/SRAMWR
/SRAMBLE
D[7]
D[8]
D[6]
D[9]
D[5]
D[10]
D[4]
D[11]
D[3]
D[12]
D[2]
D[13]
D[1]
D[14]
D[0]
D[15]
/SRAMBHE
/SRAMRD
A[0]
A[7]
A[1]
A[6]
A[2]
A[5]
A[3]
A[4]
+3.3VA
SG
+3.3VA
SG
NC
/SRAMRST
NC

CNV / IPC board

(Finisher)

10-1
FG

CN352
1
50
2
49
48
3
47
4
5
46
6
45
44
7
8
43
9
42
10
41
40
11
12
39
13
38
14
37
15
36
16
35
34
17
18
33
32
19
31
20
21
30
22
29
23
28
24
27
25
26
26
25
24
27
23
28
29
22
21
30
20
31
32
19
33
18
34
17
16
35
15
36
14
37
13
38
12
39
11
40
10
41
9
42
8
43
7
44
6
45
5
46
4
47
3
48
2
49
1
50
DLDT[0]
DLDT[2]
DLDT[4]
DLDT[6]
DLDT[8]
DLDT[10]
DLDT[12]
DLDT[14]
DLAD[20]
DLAD[18]
DLAD[16]
DLAD[14]
DLAD[12]
DLAD[10]
DLAD[8]
DLAD[6]
DLAD[4]
DLAD[2]
DLRD-0C
FCCNT-0T
DEBCS-0T
+3.3V
+3.3V
SG
SG
DLDT[1]
DLDT[3]
DLDT[5]
DLDT[7]
DLDT[9]
DLDT[11]
DLDT[13]
DLDT[15]
DLAD[19]
DLAD[17]
DLAD[15]
DLAD[13]
DLAD[11]
DLAD[9]
DLAD[7]
DLAD[5]
DLAD[3]
DLAD[1]
DLAD[21]
DLBDCS-0T
+3.3V
ROMDT-0T
DEBWR-0T
SG
SG

A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17

CN346

A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19

CN349

37
38

35
36

32
33
34

29
30
31

26
27
28

23
24
25

20
21
22

18
19

16
17

14
15

12
13

9
10
11

7
8

4
5
6

1
2
3

CN348

B16
B17
B18

B13
B14
B15

B11
B12

B9
B10

B6
B7
B8

B1
B2
B3
B4
B5

A16
A17
A18

A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15

A1
A2
A3
A

CN338

NC

NC

NC

PG
PG
+24VD3
+24VD3
HVTSTS
HVTMK
HVTMC
NC
TR2MON
TR2IV
HVTTR2VR
HVTTR2
TR1MON-M
TR1MON-C
DALD
DACLK
DADATA
SG
+5V
TR1IV
HVTTR1-M
HVTTR1-C
HVTTR1-Y
HVTTR1-K
TR1CC
TR1MON-Y
TR1MON-K
HVTEC-C
HVTEC-K
HVTDAC-C
HVTDDC-C
HVTDDC-K
HVTCLK
HVTDAC-K

PIFCKA
PIFCKB
DRV7
DRV6
DRV5
DRV4
DRV3
DRV2
DRV1
DRV0
PFRST
+5V
SG
PFPCK
SG
+24VD1
+24VD1
+24VD1
+24VD1
PG
PG
PG
PG
SIZE0
SIZE1
SIZE2
SIZE3
RETS0
RETS1
RETS2
RETS3
RETS4
RETS5
RETS6
RETS7
SCSWA
SCSWB
LCCNT

CS1TUMA-0A
CS1TUMB-1A

SG
CSTCV-0

SG
CS2FEED-1
+5V

SG
CS2PNEM-1
+5V

NC
NC
CS2PCL-0A
+24VD3

SG
CS2TL-1
+5V

SG
CS2PEM-1
+5V

MDT2CL-0A
+24VD3

MDT2CH-0A
+24VD3

SG
CS2PS-0

SG
CS1PS-0

SG
CS1PNEM
+5V

CS1PCL-0A
+24VD3

SG
CS1TL-1
+5V

SG
CS1PEM-1
+5V

NC

TRUCOV-0C
SG

FG1

FG3

SG
MNFDSN-1
+5V

MNTLSL-0A
+24VD2

16
17

5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

J521

J534

J541

4
5

1
2
3

4
5
6

1
2
3

5
6
7

1
2
3
4

4
5
6

1
2
3

5
6
7

1
2
3
4

13
14
15

11
12

J540

A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1

6
7
8

9
10

J539

A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
B19
B18
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1

2
1

5
4
3

3
2
1

6
5
4

3
2
1

7
6
5
4

3
2
1

6
5
4

3
2
1

J538
7
6
5
4

3
2
1

5
4

7
6

10
9
8

J554
1
15
2
14
3
13
4
12
5
11

2
1

13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3

J501
1
17
16
2
15
3
14
4

CN461

FG1

MNFDCL-0A
+24VD2

SG
MNPEM-1
+5V

MNPS3-0
MNPS2-0
MNPS1-0
MNPS0-0
SG

+24VD3
ADUCL-0A
NC

ADUMD-0A
ADUMB-0A
ADUMC-0A
ADUMA-0A
ADUMP1-1
ADUS2-1
+5V
SG
NC
ADUS1-1
ADUCOV

PG
PG
+24VD3
+24VD3

PS-HVT
(HVT)

NC

NC

NC

NC

J535
2 2
1 1

J584
2 2
1 1

J536
1 1
2 2
J537
1 1
2 2

J584
2 2
1 1

SFB-SOL
(SOL1)

CST1-SW
(SW5)
CST2-SW
(SW6)

OUT4-Y
1
OUT4-M
1
OUT4-C
1
OUT4-K
1
OUT5
1

OUT6-K
1
OUT3-K
1
OUT2-K
1
OUT1-K
1

OUT6-C
1
OUT3-C
1
OUT2-C
1
OUT1-C
1

OUT6-M
1
OUT3-M
1
OUT2-M
1
OUT1-M
1

Option

PFP/LCF

CST-TRY-MOT
(M21)

3
CST22 FEED-SNR
(S34)
1
J588
2
SIDE-COV-SW
(SW4)
1

J589

J585
3
CST22 NEMP-SNR
(S37)
1

CST2-FEED-CLT
(CLT6)

J586
3
CST2EMP-SNR
2
(S36)
1
J587
3
CST2TRY-SNR
2
(S35)
1

CST2-TR-L-CLT
(CLT4)

CST2-TR-H-CLT
(CLT5)

J542
2
1
J543
2
1

J585
3
CST12 NEMP-SNR
(S33)
1

CST1-FEED-CLT
(CLT3)

J586
3
CST1EMP-SNR
2
(S32)
1
J587
3
CST1TRY-SNR
2
(S31)
1

1
2

J564
1 1
2 2

COVSW
SG

NC

+24VD1
FDMA
FDMB
FDMC
FDMD
+24VD1

SG
ADUFU
+5.1VB

SG
ADUFL
+5.1VB

2
1

2
3
4
1
6
5

3
2
1

3
2
1

1 2nd transfer facing roller

1 1st transfer roller-K

1 1st transfer roller-C

1 1st transfer roller-M

1 1st transfer roller-Y

1 Needle electrode-K

1 Grid-K

1 Magnetic roller-K

1 Recovery blade-K

1 Needle electrode-C

1 Grid-C

1 Magnetic roller-C

1 Recovery blade-C

1 Needle electrode-M

1 Grid-M

1 Magnetic roller-M

1 Recovery blade-M

1 Needle electrode-Y

1 Grid-Y

1 Magnetic roller-Y

1 Recovery blade-Y

FG2

FG3

J632
3
SFB2 FEED-SNR
(S41)
1

J601
3
SFB-SNR
2
(S40)
1

ADU-CLT
(CLT7)

ADU-SET-SW
(SW7)

ADU-MOT
(M22)

ADU-U-SNR
(S38)

ADU-L-SNR
(S39)

J619
5
4
PWA-F-SFB
3
(SFB)
(SFB
SFB)
2
1

CN217

1
2
3
4
5

CN216

1
2
3
4
5
6

CN215

1
2
3

CN214

1
2
3

CN213

SFB-FEED-CLT
(CLT8)

NC

1
2
3

1
2
3
4
5

FG2

PWA-F-ADU
(ADU)
(ADU
ADU)

J508
2
TR-COV-SW
(SW3)
1

J563
1 1
2 2

3
2
1

J631

J602
2 2
1 1

OUT6-Y
1
OUT3-Y
1
OUT2-Y
1
OUT1-Y
1

NC

J627

J603
2 2
1 1

5
4
3
2
1

CN212
4
3
2
1
CN211
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

10.1 DC Wire Harness

CN130

10.2 Electric Parts Layout

[A] Scanner unit, control panel

[B] Toner cartridge, waste toner box

S4

[C] Transfer belt unit

[D] Developer unit

S5

M30

M11

CCD

M1

M23

S19

SLG

S6

SW1

S7

S44

M10

S15
S43
M9

KEY

EXP

TCP

M32

S20

DSP
Y:
M:
C:
K:

INV
LT series models

M2
M3
M4
M5

M24

M7

M12
M33

S5
P-INV

Y:
M:
C:
K:

S4

S12

S8
S9
S10
S11

Y:
M:
C:
K:

S17

M31

ERS-Y
ERS-M
ERS-C
ERS-K

S21
THM2

Y:
M:
C:
K:

S14
S2
S3

M6

S2

SOL2

S13

S1
S3

S16
SW8

S42

S22
S23
S24
S25
THM1

M8
S18

[E] Laser unit

[F] Fuser unit

[G] Transfer unit

[H] Paper feeding unit

M25
THM5

SNS

M16

SW3

SW2

M18

CLT1
CLT2
M20

M15
M17

M29

M14

S26
CLT3

M19

S27

CLT4

THM4
LDR-M
THMO3

LAMP3

S30

LDR-K

S33

SW4

THM3

S34

SW5
THMO2

LAMP1
S31

LAMP2

THMP2

S32

M21

LAMP4
THMO1

S35
S37

LDR-C

THMP1

S36

SW6
S28
CLT6

LDR-Y

S29

CLT5

M13

[I] Automatic duplexing unit, bypass feed unit

[J] PC board, power supply

[K] Damp heater

DH2

DH1
IMG
SW7
THMO4

LGC

RAM-S

M22
S38

THMO6

RAM-L

SYS
S39
CLT7

DH4
HDD

THMO5

S41

DH3
PS

S40
ADU

M28
M27

HVT
M26
SFB

DH5

SOL1
FIL

CLT8
BRK1

Motors

Sensors and Switches

Symbol

Name

Figure

Wire harness
location

M1

SCAN-MOT
Scan motor

[A]

3-H

M2

TNR-MOT-Y
Toner motor-Y

[B]

5-A

M3

TNR-MOT-M
Toner motor-M

[B]

5-B

M4

TNR-MOT-C
Toner motor-C

M5

TNR-MOT-K
Toner motor-K

[B]

5-B

M6

USD-TNR-MOT
Waste toner paddle motor

[B]

6-C

M7

TBU-MOT
Transfer belt motor

[C]

6-B / 7-B

M8

TR1-CAM-MOT
1st transfer roller cam motor

[C]

7-D

M9

DEV-MOT
Developer unit motor

[D]

7-D

M10

DRM-MOT
Drum motor

[D]

6-B / 7-B

M11

DRM-SW-MOT
Drum switching motor

[D]

7-D

M12

SHUT-MOT
Shutter motor

[D]

6-D

M13

POL-MOT
Polygonal motor

[E]

5-C

Symbol
S1-5

Name
APS1-3, APS-C, APS-R
Automatic original detection sensor

Figure
[A]

* S1: only for A4 series models

[B]

5-B

M14

MIR-MOT-M
Mirror motor-M

[E]

5-B

M15

MIR-MOT-C
Mirror motor-C

[E]

5-C

M16

MIR-MOT-K
Mirror motor-K

[E]

5-D

M17

FUS-MOT
Fuser motor

[F]

6-D

M18

EXIT-MOT
Exit motor

[F]

6-A / 7-A

M19

RGST-MOT
Registration motor

[G]

6-B / 7-B

M20

FEED/TRNS-MOT
Feed/transport motor

[H]

7-E

M21

CST-TRY-MOT
Tray-up motor

[H]

8-E

M22

ADU-MOT
ADU motor

[I]

8-A

M23

INTRNL-FAN-MOT
Internal cooling fan

[B]

6-G

M24

OZN-FAN-MOT
Ozone exhaust fan

[D]

7-C

M25

FUS/EXIT-FAN-MOT
Fuser/exit section cooling fan

[F]

6-F

M26

SYS-FAN-MOT
SYS board cooling fan

[J]

2-G

M27

PS-FAN-MOT-1
Switching regulator cooling fan-1

[J]

2-H

M28

PS-FAN-MOT-2
Switching regulator cooling fan-2

[J]

2-H

M29

LSU-FAN-MOT
Laser unit cooling fan

[E]

7-C

M30

SCAN-FAN-MOT
Scanner unit cooling fan

[A]

3-H

M31

UT-CARRY-MOT
Waste toner transport motor

[B]

7-C

M32

FANFRONT
Exposure lamp cooling fan

[B]

3-E

M33

EPU-FAN
EPU cooling fan

[D]

6-G

Wire harness
location
3-E
3-F

S6

HOME-SNR
Carriage home position sensor

[A]

3-E

S7

PLTN-SNR
Platen sensor

[A]

3-E

S8

TNR-SNR-Y
Toner cartridge detection sensor-Y

[B]

TNR-SNR-M
Toner cartridge detection sensor-M

[B]

S9
S10

TNR-SNR-C
Toner cartridge detection sensor-C

S11

TNR-SNR-K
Toner cartridge detection sensor-K

S12

TEMP/HUMI-SNR
Temperature/humidity sensor

S13

USD-TNR-FLL-SNR
Waste toner box full detection sensor

S14

USD-TNR-LCK-SNR
Waste toner paddle motor lock detection
sensor

[B]
[B]
[B]
[B]

[B]

5-B
5-B
5-B
5-B
7-C
6-C

6-C

Figure

Wire harness
location

SFB-FEED-SNR
Bypass feed sensor

[I]

8-C

TNTRLK
Auger lock detection sensor

[B]

S43

DRM-SNR
Color drum phase sensor

[D]

7-E

S44

DRM-SNR2
K drum phase sensor

[D]

7-E

SW1

MAIN-SW
Main switch

[A]

AC Wire Harness

SW2

COV-INTLCK-SW
Cover interlock switch

[G]

AC Wire Harness

TR-COV-SW
Transfer cover switch

[G]

SIDE-COV-SW
Side cover switch

[H]

CST1-SW
1st drawer detection switch

[H]

CST2-SW
2nd drawer detection switch

[H]

SW7

ADU-SET-SW
ADU opening/closing switch

[I]

SW8

UTN-COVER
Waste toner cover open/close detection switch

[B]

Symbol
S41
S42

SW3
SW4
SW5
SW6

Name

IMG-POS-SNR-F
Image position aligning sensor (Front)

[C]

7-B

IMG-POS-SNR-R
Image position aligning sensor (Rear)

[C]

7-B

S18

TNR-LVL-SNR
Image quality sensor

[C]

7-A

S19

DRM-SW-SNR
Drum switching detection sensor

[D]

7-E

SHUT-SNR
Shutter status detection sensor

CLT3

S20

[D]

6-D

CST1-FEED-CLT
1st drawer feed clutch

CH-CLN-SNR
Needle electrode cleaner detection sensor

CLT4

[H]

8-D

S21

[D]

6-C

CST2-TR-L-CLT
2nd drawer transport clutch (Low speed)

CLT5

8-D

[D]

7-F

CST2-TR-H-CLT
2nd drawer transport clutch (High speed)

[H]

S22

ATTNR-SNR-Y
Auto-toner sensor-Y
ATTNR-SNR-M
Auto-toner sensor-M

CLT6

8-D

[D]

7-F

CST2-FEED-CLT
2nd drawer feed clutch

[H]

S23

ATTNR-SNR-C
Auto-toner sensor-C

CLT7

[I]

S24

[D]

7-G

ADU-CLT
ADU clutch

ATTNR-SNR-K
Auto-toner sensor-K

[D]

7-F

SFB-FEED-CLT
Bypass feed clutch

[I]

S25
S26

EXIT-SNR
Exit sensor

[F]

7-H

S27

CLNG-SNR
Paper clinging detection sensor

[G]

7-B

S28

RGST-SNR
Registration sensor

[G]

7-B

S29

TR2-SNR
2nd transfer roller position detection sensor

[G]

7-B

S30

CST1-FEED-SNR
1st drawer feed sensor

[H]

S31

CST1-TRY-SNR
1st drawer tray-up sensor

S32

CST1-EMP-SNR
1st drawer empty sensor

S33

Name

Figure

Wire harness
location

CLT1

CST1-TR-H-CLT
1st drawer transport clutch (High speed)

[H]

7-C

CLT2

CST1-TR-L-CLT
1st drawer transport clutch (Low speed)

[H]

7-C

CLT8

[H]

7-F

SLG

PWA-F-SLG
Scanning section control PC board (SLG board)

[A]

4-G

THM2

THMS-DRM-K
Drum thermistor-K

[D]

7-F

INV

INV
Lamp inverter board

[A]

3-H

THM3

THMS-FBLT-F
Fuser belt front thermistor

[F]

6-F / 6-H / 7-H

AC WIre harness

DSP

PWA-F-DSP
Display PC board (DSP board)

[A]

1-B

THM4

THMS-PR-C
Pressure roller center thermistor

[F]

6-F / 6-G / 7-G

AC WIre harness

KEY

PWA-F-KEY
Key PC board (KEY board)

[A]

1-C

THM5

THMS-PR-R
Pressure roller rear thermistor

[F]

6-E / 6-G / 7-G

AC WIre harness

P-INV

P-INV
Panel inverter board

[A]

1-A

THMP1

THMP-FBLT-C
Fuser belt center thermopile

[F]

6-F / 6-G / 7-G

AC WIre harness

LDR-Y

PWA-F-LDR-Y
Laser driving PC board-Y (LDR-Y board)

[E]

5-E

THMP2

THMP-FBLT-R
Fuser belt rear thermopile

[F]

6-F / 6-H / 7-H

AC WIre harness

LDR-M

PWA-F-LDR-M
Laser driving PC board-M (LDR-M board)

[E]

5-D

THMO1

THERMO-FBLT-C
Fuser belt center thermostat

[F]

AC WIre harness

LDR-C

PWA-F-LDR-C
Laser driving PC board-C (LDR-C board)

[E]

5-E

THMO2

THERMO-FBLT-S
Fuser belt rear thermostat

[F]

AC WIre harness

LDR-K

PWA-F-LDR-K
Laser driving PC board-K (LDR-K board)

[E]

5-D

THMO3

THERMO-PR
Pressure roller thermostat

[F]

AC WIre harness

SNS

PWA-F-SNS
H-sync detection PC board (SNS board)

[E]

5-D

THMO4

THERMO-SCN-DH
Scanner damp heater thermostat

[K]

AC WIre harness

ADU

PWA-F-ADU
ADU control PC board (ADU board)

[I]

8-A

THMO5

THERMO-DRM-DH-L
Drum damp heater thermostat (Left)

[K]

AC WIre harness

THMO6

THERMO-DRM-DH-R
Drum damp heater thermostat (Right)

[K]

AC WIre harness

Figure

Wire harness
location

[J]

8-G

SFB

PWA-F-SFB
Paper width detection PC board (SFB board)

[I]

8-B

SYS

PWA-F-SYS
System control PC board (SYS board)

[J]

3-A

LGC

PWA-F-LGC
Logic PC board (LGC board)

[J]

6-A

Symbol

IMG

PWA-F-IMG
Image processing PC board (IMG board)

[J]

4-D

HVT

FIL

PWA-F-FIL
Filter PC board (FIL board)

[J]

3-G

Others

PWA-F-SRAM-S
SRAM board <for SYS board>

[J]

3-A

PWA-F-SRAM-L
SRAM board <for LGC board>

[J]

RAM-S
RAM-L

5-A

Lamps and heaters

Symbol

8-B

Name

Figure

Wire harness
location

Transformer

Figure

Wire harness
location

TCP

TCP
Touch panel

[A]

1-B

FS1

FUSE-FUS
Fuser unit fuse

[F]

6-F

HDD

HDD
Hard disk

[J]

3-E

PS-ACC
Switching regulator

[J]

4-H

BRK
Breaker

[J]

AC WIre harness

LP-EXPO
Exposure lamp

[A]

3-H

PS

LP-ERS-Y
Discharge LED-Y

[D]

5-B

BRK

ERS-M

LP-ERS-M
Discharge LED-M

[D]

5-B

ERS-C

LP-ERS-C
Discharge LED-C

[D]

5-B

ERS-K

LP-ERS-K
Discharge LED-K

[D]

5-B

7-C

LAMP1

LP-HTR-C
Center heater lamp

[F]

AC Wire Harness

[H]

8-C

LAMP2

LP-HTR-S
Side heater lamp

[F]

AC Wire Harness

[H]

8-C

LAMP3

LP-PR
Pressure roller lamp

[F]

AC Wire Harness

CST1-NEMP-SNR
1st drawer paper stock sensor

[H]

8-D

LAMP4

LAMP-TRIPLE
Sub heater lamp

[F]

AC Wire Harness

S34

CST2-FEED-SNR
2nd drawer feed sensor

[H]

8-E

DH1

SCN-DH-L
Scanner damp heater (Left)

[K]

AC Wire Harness

S35

CST2-TRY-SNR
2nd drawer tray-up sensor

[H]

8-D

DH2

SCN-DH-R
Scanner damp heater (Right)

[K]

AC Wire Harness

S36

CST2-EMP-SNR
2nd drawer empty sensor

[H]

8-D

DH3

DRM-DH-L
Drum damp heater (Left)

[K]

AC Wire Harness

S37

CST2-NEMP-SNR
2nd drawer paper stock sensor

[H]

8-E

DH4

DRM-DH-R
Drum damp heater (Right)

[K]

AC Wire Harness

S38

ADU-U-SNR
ADU entrance sensor

[I]

8-A

[K]

AC Wire Harness

S39

ADU-L-SNR
ADU exit sensor

[I]

8-A

S40

SFB-SNR
Bypass paper sensor

[I]

8-B

EXP

Symbol

Name

SOL1

SFB-SOL
Bypass pickup solenoid

SOL2

SNR-SHUT-SOL
Sensor shutter solenoid

Figure

Wire harness
location

[I]

8-B

[C]

7-B

DH5

CST-DH-R
Drawer damp heater
* Only for JPD models

10-2

Name
PS-HVT
High-voltage transformer

Symbol

ERS-Y

Solenoids

Wire harness
location

[D]

8-C

8-B

Figure

THMS-DRM-Y
Drum thermistor-Y

6-C

Electromagnetic spring clutches

Name

THM1

8-B

S17

Symbol

4-F

8-D

S16

Wire harness
location

[A]

8-D

7-D

Figure

PWA-F-CCD
CCD driving PC board (CCD board)

8-E

[C]

Name

CCD

8-C

TR1-SNR
1st transfer roller status detection sensor

Thermistors and thermostats

Symbol

6-D

S15

Symbol

PC boards

Name

REVISION RECORD
Ver.12
Page
2
2
2-29

2-48
2-56
2-57
2-62
2-63
2-77
2-82
2-87
2-88
3-68 to 69
4-4
4-4
4-4
4-21
8-43
8-45
10-1
10-2

Ver.12 <2011.11.25>
Contents
Trademarks have been changed.
Copyright description has been changed.
8026-0 to 2, 8027-0 to 2, 8028-0 to 2, 8029-0 to 2, 8030-0 to 2, 8031-0 to 2, 8032-0 to 2,
8033-0 to 2, 8034-0 to 2, 8035-0 to 2, 8036-0 to 2, 8037-0 to 2, 8038-0 to 2, 8039-0 to 2,
8040-0 to 2, 8041-0 to 2, 8150-0 to 2, 8151-0 to 2, 8152-0 to 2, 8153-0 to 2, 8154-0 to 2,
8155-0 to 2, 8156-0 to 2, 8157-0 to 2 have been added.
Items of 7025 have been changed.
8026-0 to 2, 8027-0 to 2, 8028-0 to 2, 8029-0 to 2, 8030-0 to 2, 8031-0 to 2, 8032-0 to 2
have been added.
8033-0 to 2, 8034-0 to 2, 8035-0 to 2, 8036-0 to 2, 8037-0 to 2, 8038-0 to 2, 8039-0 to 2,
8040-0 to 2, 8041-0 to 2 have been added.
8150-0 to 2 has been added.
8151-0 to 2, 8152-0 to 2, 8153-0 to 2, 8154-0 to 2, 8155-0 to 2, 8156-0 to 2, 8157-0 to 2
have been added.
8624, 8625, 8626 have been added.
3631 has been added.
8628 has been added.
8629 has been added.
Step 1 to 3 has been changed to Step 1 to 5.
08-620, 621, 622, 623, 624, 629, 1472 have been added.
08-3631, 8624, 8625, 8626, 8628, 8629 have been added.
08-3506, 3507, 8608, 8609, 8610, 9015, 9103, 9193, 9700 have been added.
and scrambler board has been deleted.
Fig. 8-38 has been changed.
Fig. 8-43 has been changed.
10.1 DC Wire Harness has been added.
10.2 Electric Parts Layout has been added.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REVISION RECORD

Ver.11
Page
1-10
3-22
7-29
4-1
4-2
4-4

4-5

4-8
4-9
4-11
4-12
4-13
2-29
2-75
2-79
2-80
2-82
2-83
2-84
2-85
2-86
2-94
-

Ver.11 <2011.4.25>
Contents
Description has been changed.
Description has been changed.
Description has been changed.
Added in 4.1.2 Precautions.
Added in 4.1.2 Precautions.
Added in 2.Setting data file.
08-204, 205, 206, 218, 219, 221, 250, 254, 259, 260, 272, 290, 291, 292, 293, 294, 295,
296, 297, 298, 299, 300, 302, 331, 342, 503, 550, 603, 610, 611, 619, 634, 638, 640, 642,
645, 649, 650, 651, 652, 653, 658, 659, 671, 702, 703, 707, 721, 723, 726, 727, 728, 729,
730, 780, 781, 782, 783, 784, 785, 786, 787, 788, 789, 790, 969, 970, 973, 978, 979, 1002,
1017, 1022, 1125, 1432, 1740, 1744, 1772, 1780, 3508, 3722, 3723, 3724, 3736, 3737,
3738, 3739, 3740, 3754 have been added.
08-3755, 3757, 3758, 3759, 3760, 3783, 3785, 3789, 3796, 3797, 3812, 3833, 3851, 3852,
3853, 3854, 3855, 3856, 3857, 3858, 3859, 3860, 3861, 3862, 3863, 8504, 8511, 8543,
8580, 8581, 8582, 8583, 8584, 8585, 8586, 8587, 8588, 8589, 8590-0 to 4, 8591, 8592,
8593, 8604, 8605, 8606, 8615, 8616, 8617, 8618, 8619, 8620, 8803, 8804, 8805, 8817,
8818, 9117, 9120, 9121, 9122, 9123, 9124, 9125, 9126, 9294, 9384, 9629, 9791, 9799,
9829, 9889, 9891, 9957, 9958, 9980, 9984-0 to 4 have been added.
Added in <When 3: Setting Back Up is selected>.
Fig. 4-5 has been changed.
Added in <When 4: Setting Restore is selected>.
Fig. 4-10 has been changed.
ERROR 12 has been added.
7380-0 to 2 has been added.
08-8612 has been added.
08-8590-0 to 4 has been added.
08-8608, 8609, 8610, 8623 have been added.
08-8616, 8617, 8618, 8619, 8620 have been added.
08-8613 has been added.
08-1776-0 to 15, 3521, 3522, 3523, 3524 have been added.
08-3870, 3626, 8622, 9984-0 to 4,3520, 8611, 8615 have been added.
Procedure 3 has been changed.
08-1426 has been changed.
2.6.10 has been deleted.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REVISION RECORD

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Ver.10
Page
2-2
2-3
2-12
2-16
2-19
2-26
2-27
2-74
2-75
2-79
2-80
2-81
2-84
2-85
3-4
4-1
4-3

Ver.10 <2010.11.16>
Contents
(9S-)111, 211, 213 and 214 have been added.
(9S-)211, 213 and 214 have been added.
(03-)114 and 164 have been added.
(9S-)211, 213 and 214 have been added.
Note has been added to 2.4 List Printing.
A description of the error logs has been added.
A description of the total counter list has been added.
08-9985 and 9986 have been added.
08-8598, 8591 and 9987 have been added.
08-3789, 8584, 8585, 8586, 8587, 8588, 8590, 8605, 8606 and 9791 have been added.
08-8589 has been added.
08-8594 has been added.
08-3625, 8595, 8597 and 8601 have been added.
08-8596, 8599, 8600, 8602, 8603, 8604, 8823 and 9984 have been added.
3.1.3 Performing Image Quality Control has been changed.
4.1.2 Precautions has been changed.
4.1.4 List of codes available for cloning has been added.

4-5
4-8
4-12

The note of 4.1.5 Cloning procedure has been changed.

The note of 4.1.5 Cloning procedure has been changed.
4.2.2 Precautions has been changed.

5-8
5-44
6-12
6-23

A note has been added to 5.4.3 Operational screen.

FLOIL has been added to 5.10 Grease List.
F140 has been added to 6.1.2 Service call.
<<Error history>> described in the chapter 6.1.4 has been moved to the chapter 6.1.6.
(Configuration change of the contents.)
F140 has been added to 6.2.22 Other service call.
Note has been added to 7.2.2 HDD fault diagnosis.
Note has been added to 8. FIRMWARE UPDATING.
9.5 Fuse has been changed.

6-106
7-17
8-4
9-5

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REVISION RECORD

Ver.09
Page
1-3
1-9
2-22
2-36
2-62
2-73
2-85
2-88
5-1
5-2
5-4
6-63
6-65
6-73
7-32
8-5

Ver.09 <2010.05.17>
Contents
The values for Black / Color copy in the Eliminated portion have been corrected.
The values for Black / Color print in the Eliminated portion have been corrected.
The illustration in the error history list has been corrected.
The classification of 05-206 has been corrected.
The default values of 08-8361, 8362, 8363 and 8365 have been corrected.
Potential on printing white text has been corrected to Potential on white background.
The content of 08-400 has been corrected.
PM counter has been changed to PM sheet counter.
PM time counter has been changed to PM driving counter.
PM counter" has been changed to "PM sheet counter".
PM time counter" has been changed to "PM driving counter".
PM counter has been changed to PM sheet counter.
PM time counter has been changed to PM driving counter.
PM counter has been changed to PM sheet counter.
PM time counter has been changed to PM driving counter.
Step (1) for C580 has been added.
The procedure of [C5A0] / [C5A1] has been exchanged with that of [C900].
The contents of [CB31] have been corrected.
7.2.9 Re-registration of the Electronic License Key with one-time dongle has been added.
Note has been added to 8.1 Firmware Updating with USB Media.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REVISION RECORD

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Ver.08

2-29
2-36
2-73
2-74
2-75
2-76
2-77
2-78
2-81

Ver.08 <2009.12.21>
Contents
The model name has been added.
The model name has been added.
The model name has been added.
Copy speed for e-STUDIO2020C has been added.
The paper size for e-STUDIO2330C has been added.
The model name has been added.
System copy speed for e-STUDIO2020C has been added.
Supported Page Description Language, Supported Client OS, and Interface have been
changed.
05-206 has been added.
05-206 has been added.
08-8546, 9982, 3635, 8540 have been added.
08-2548-0 to 3, 2549-0 to 3, 2554, and 8548 have been added.
08-2370, 2381, 2382, 2383, and 2384 have been added.
08-9933 has been added.
08-3871 has been added.
08-8549 has been added.
08-3508 has been added.

2-82
2-88
2-105

08-3623, 3624, and 8514 have been added.

08-343 has been changed.
08-1150 and 1152 have been changed.

2-106
2-107
2-108
2-109

08-1154, 1156, 1158, 1160, 1162, and 1164 have been changed.
08-1174, 1176, 1178, 1180, 1182, and 1184 have been changed.
08-1186, 1188, 1190, 1192, 1194, and 1196 have been changed.
08-1198, 1200, 1202, 1204, and 1206 have been changed.
08-1214 has been added.
08-1216, 1218, 1220, and 1228 have been added.
08-1232 and 1240 have been changed.
08-1250, 1270, 1272, 1274, 1276, 1282, and 1284 have been changed.
08-1286, 1290, 1292, 1294, 1298, 1300, 1302, 1306, 1308, and 1310 have been changed.
08-1312, 1314, 1316, 1320, 1322, 1324, 1328, 1330, and 1332 have been changed.
08-1340, 1342, 5600, 5602, 5604, and 5606 have been changed.
05-205 has been deleted.
05-206 has been added.
05-206 has been added.
The file name has been changed.
Item has been added, and the file name has been changed.
Notes have been added.
Backup items have been added.
Notes have been added.
The step and restore items have been changed.
The model name has been added.
The replacement timing for e-STUDIO2020C has been added.
The replacement timing for e-STUDIO2020C has been added.
The replacement timing for e-STUDIO2020C has been added.
The replacement timing for e-STUDIO2020C has been added.
The replacement timing for e-STUDIO2020C has been added.
The replacement timing for e-STUDIO2020C has been added.

Page
Precautions
1-2
1-4

1-7
1-8
1-9

2-110
2-111
2-112
2-113
2-114
3-1
3-2
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-6
4-7
5-13
5-20
5-21
5-24
5-29
5-32
5-33

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REVISION RECORD

Page
5-35
5-42
5-44
6-23
6-68
6-122
9-9

Ver.08 <2009.12.21>
Contents
The replacement timing for e-STUDIO2020C has been added.
The model name has been added.
The model name has been added.
The overhauling timing for e-STUDIO2020C has been added.
5110, 5212, 5BD0, 5C10, 5C11, 5C20, 5C21, and 5C22 have been added.
The model name has been added.
5110, 5212, 5BD0, 5C10, 5C11, 5C20, 5C21, and 5C22 have been added.
The model name has been added.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REVISION RECORD

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Ver.07
Page
2-28
2-29
2-74
2-76
3-69
3-70
5-3
5-41
5-42
6-8
6-60
7-24
7-28
8-4

Ver.07 <2009.9.18>
Contents
(05) 7489 has been added.
The code has been changed from "(05) 467-0 to 1" to "(05) 467-0 to 4".
(08)4621 and 4622 have been added.
(08)9981 has been added.
The adjustment procedure for the doctor sleeve gap has been changed.
The adjustment procedure for the doctor sleeve gap has been changed.
An explanation of PM display has been added.
The maintenance part list has been changed.
An illustration (item No. 15) has been added.
C450, C451 and C452 have been added.
C450, C451 and C452 have been added.
Procedures have been added to "7.2.5 Procedures and settings when replacing the SLG
board".
The procedure of "[J] Reinstall options" has been changed.
The note for the firmware updating has been corrected.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REVISION RECORD

Ver.06
Page
5-22
5-23
5-25
5-39
6-104
7-18
7-22
7-23
7-24

Ver.06 <2006.6.22>
Contents
Fig.5-19 has been changed.
The items to check for the developer unit in preventive maintenance have been changed.
An item concerning the cleaning of the developer unit has been added.
How to remove foreign matter inside the developer unit has been added.
The description of the area to be cleaned for the oil seal has been deleted.
An error in the PM KIT has been corrected.
The contents of the error code [F200] have been changed.
Fig.7-37 has been changed.
"[I] Adjustment image quality" has been added.
The procedure in "7.2.4 Precaution and Procedures when replacing the SYS board" has
been changed.
The procedure in "7.2.5 Procedures and settings when replacing the SLG board" has been
changed.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REVISION RECORD

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Ver.05
Page
2-16
2-25
4-3
4-6
5-19
5-21
6-32
7-18
7-24
7-28
7-30
7-31
8-6
8-10
8-19

Ver.05 <2009.1.27>
Contents
A version list has been added to the table in "2.4 List Printing".
A version list has been added.
The procedure has been corrected.
The contents of Note have been changed.
The procedure has been corrected.
The contents of Note have been changed.
"Pad" for G4 has been corrected to "Felt".
"G5: Recovery blade" has been corrected to "G4: Felt".
"G6: Drum thermistor" has been corrected to "G5: Recovery blade".
E090 troubleshooting has been changed. (An item for the page memory has been added.)
A note has been added to "7.2.3 Precautions and procedures when replacing the HDD".
A note has been added to "7.2.6 Precautions and procedure when replacing the SRAM
board (for the SYS board)".
The description of 05 code for HVT label has been changed.
"7.2.8 Firmware confirmation after the PC board/HDD replacement" has been added.
"7.3 Precautions for Disposal of the HDD and PC boards" has been changed to "7.3 Precautions for Installation of GP-1070 and Disposal of HDD/Board".
A note regarding updating with the USB media has been added.
The contents of Notes have been changed.
The contents of Notes have been changed.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REVISION RECORD

Ver.04
Page
2-27
2-28
2-43
2-52
2-58
2-60
2-61
2-74
2-78
2-79
2-80
2-81
2-82
2-83
2-93
5-1
5-2
5-3
6-12
6-76
6-85
6-118
8-1
8-2
8-5
8-6
8-8
8-17 to 8-21
8-56

Ver.04 <2008.10.31>
Contents
(05) 8066 has been added.
(08) 8187, 8188, 8190 and 8191 have been added.
The default value of (05) 1688 has been changed.
The default value of (05) 7767 has been changed.
(05) 8066 has been added.
(05) 8187 has been added.
(05) 8188 has been added.
(08) 9051 and 3846 have been added.
(08) 8535, 8536, 9957, 9958, 9959 and 9980 have been added. (08) 3506 and 3507 have
been deleted.
(08) 1021 and 9749 have been added.
(08) 9746 and 9798 have been added.
(08) 9965 has been added.
(08) 3630 has been added.
(08) 3797, 8513-0, 9966, 8534, 8537 and 9799 have been added.
The content of (08) 9379 has been changed. (08) 9965 has been added.
The contents of PM display have been added.
The contents of PM display have been added.
The contents of PM display have been added.
CC90 has been added.
CB80 (MJ-1031) has been added.
CC90 has been added.
Imaging Acceleration Board (GE-1170) has been added.
"8. FIRMWARE UPDATING"
The item of "Imaging Acceleration Board (GE-1170)" has been added.
"8. FIRMWARE UPDATING"
The item of "Imaging Acceleration Board (GE-1170)" has been added.
"8.1 Firmware Updating with USB Media"
The item of "Imaging Acceleration Board (GE-1170)" has been added.
"8.1 Firmware Updating with USB Media"
The item of "Imaging Acceleration Board (GE-1170)" has been added.
"8.1 Firmware Updating with USB Media"
The item of "Imaging Acceleration Board (GE-1170)" has been added.
"8.1.2 Imaging Acceleration Board ROM (GE-1170)"
The update procedure has been added.
"8.4 Confirmation of the updated data"
The item of "Imaging Acceleration Board (GE-1170)" has been added.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REVISION RECORD

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

10

Ver.03
Page
2-2
2-3
2-17
2-27
2-42
2-50
2-61
2-74
2-81
2-82
2-113
3-2
3-9

3-15
3-23
3-25
3-26
3-27

Ver.03 <2008.09.30>
Contents
207 has been deleted.
300 has been added.
207 has been deleted.
207 has been deleted.
"All CSV files" has been added.
8240 has been added.
The contents of 1070,1071 and 1072 have been corrected.
The content of 7475 has been corrected.
The content of 7478 has been corrected.
8240 has been added.
The code name of 2692 and 2693 has been corrected.
The code name of 8508, 8509 and 8510 has been corrected.
Procedure 5 has been deleted.
The code names of 8508, 8509 and 8510 have been corrected.
Fig.3-1 has been changed.
"2. Printer related adjustment" has been corrected to "2. Printer-related image dimensional
adjustment".
"3. Scanner related adjustment" has been corrected to "2. Scanner-related image dimensional adjustment".
"Single-sided grid pattern in CK Mode" has been corrected to "Single-sided grid pattern in
K(4) Mode" and the description of K (4) system has been added.
"10 mm" has been corrected to "5 mm".
"100.5 mm" has been corrected to "50.5 mm".
"[F] Top margin"
"Printer" has been deleted.
"[G] Right margin"
"Printer" has been deleted.
"[H] Bottom margin"
"Printer" has been deleted.

3-28

"100.5 mm" has been corrected to "50.5 mm".

3-31
3-36
3-38
3-48
3-49

The codes in the list have been corrected.

"Remarks" in "3.2.5 Background adjustment" has been corrected.
"3.2.9 Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak)" has been deleted.
"[Fax]" has been corrected to "[FAX]".
"3.3.3 Color balance adjustment (Color Mode)" has been corrected to "3.3.3 Color balance
adjustment".
"[Fax]" has been corrected to "[FAX]".
"3.3.15 Thin line width lower limit adjustment" has been added.
"Remarks" in "3.4.3 Background adjustment (Color Mode)" has been corrected.
"3.4.7 Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak)" has been deleted.
"Notes" has been added to "3.5.2 Beam level conversion setting".
4.1.2 Precautions
"Program file name" has been corrected.
The capacity of USB memory has been corrected.
Fig.4-13 has been corrected.
"[C] Print out "function list" has been corrected to "[C] Print out "FUNCTION" list".
Step (4) has been corrected.
"[H] Reset "function list" has been corrected to "[H] Reset "FUNCTION" list".

3-54
3-57
3-60
3-64
4-1

4-12
4-14
4-16

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REVISION RECORD

11

Page
5-13

5-15
5-21
5-37
5-38
6-89
6-97
6-103
7-4
7-5
7-18
7-20
7-21
7-22
7-24
7-27
8-11
8-24

Ver.03 <2008.09.30>
Contents
The description for "C3:Separation roller" has been changed.
"C6:Drive gear" has been changed to "C7:Drive gear".
The description for "C7:Drive gear" has been changed.
The description for "E3:Separation roller" has been changed.
"H4:Front shield (unified with the doctor blade)" has been added.
"5.8 Maintenance Part List"
The parts list of Harness jig has been corrected.
The illustration for "5.8 Maintenance Part List" has been changed.
<Color toner low density> has been added.
<Color toner low density> has been added.
<Color toner low density> has been added.
"7.1.5 SYS board"
Step (6) has been corrected.
"7.1.7 LGC board"
Fig.7-12 has been corrected.
Fig.7-37 has been corrected.
"[C] Print out "function list" has been corrected to "[C] Print out "FUNCTION" list".
"[H] Reset "function list" has been corrected to "[H] Reset "FUNCTION" list".
The content of "[D] Reinstall options" has been corrected.
Fig.7-39 has been corrected.
"GA-1010" has been corrected to "GS-1010.
"GA-1020" has been corrected to "GS-1020.
"[C] Adjustment" has been added.
"[C] Adjustment" has been added.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REVISION RECORD

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

12

Ver.02
Page
1-2
1-4
1-4
1-7
2-17
2-26
2-34
2-54
2-73
2-105
2-106
2-107
2-108
2-109
2-109
2-110
2-111
2-112
2-112
2-113
2-114
3-13
3-17
3-18
3-19
3-29
3-31
3-34

3-35

Ver.02 <2008.06.26>
Contents
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
The model name "e-STUDIO2330C" has been added.
1.1.1 General
The model name "e-STUDIO2330C" has been added.
1.1.2 Copy
The model name "e-STUDIO2330C" has been added.
1.1.2 Copy - [ 3 ] Copy speed (Copies/min.)
The copy speed of the e-STUDIO2330C has been added.
1.1.2 Copy - [ 4 ] System copy speed
The system copy speed of the e-STUDIO2330C has been added.
A new clause 2.4 has been added.
The content of the Classification List in 2.5.1 has been changed.
Descriptions for the codes 98 and 99 have been corrected.
New codes 7808 and 7809 have been added.
The content of the Classification List in 2.6.1 has been changed.
The model name "e-STUDIO2330C" has been added in the "Remarks" fields for the codes
1150 and 1152.
The model name "e-STUDIO2330C" has been added in the "Remarks" fields for the codes
1154, 1156, 1158, 1160, 1162, 1164 and 1174.
The model name "e-STUDIO2330C" has been added in the "Remarks" fields for the codes
1176, 1178, 1180, 1182, 1184, 1186 and 1188.
The model name "e-STUDIO2330C" has been added in the "Remarks" fields for the codes
1190, 1192, 1194, 1196, 1198, 1200 and 1202.
The model name "e-STUDIO2330C" has been added in the "Remarks" fields for the codes
1204, 1206, 1228, 1232, 1240, 1250, 1270 and 1272.
The codes 1214, 1216, 1218, 1220 and 1228 have been deleted.
The model name "e-STUDIO2330C" has been added in the "Remarks" fields for the codes
1274, 1276, 1282, 1284, 1286, 1290, 1292, 1294 and 1298.
The model name "e-STUDIO2330C" has been added in the "Remarks" fields for the codes
1300, 1302, 1306, 1308, 1310, 1312, 1314, 1316 and 1320.
The default values for the codes 5600-x have been changed.
The model name "e-STUDIO2330C" has been added in the "Remarks" fields for the codes
1322, 1324, 1328, 1330, 1332, 1340, 1342 and 5600.
The model name "e-STUDIO2330C" has been added in the "Remarks" fields for the codes
5602, 5604 and 5606. Also the default values for these codes have been changed.
The codes 08-482, 1482 and 1496 have been deleted.
"PFP upper drawer" has been changed to "3rd drawer".
"PFP lower drawer" has been changed to "4th drawer".
"[C] Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of transfer belt
motor rotation speed)" has been corrected.
"PFP upper drawer" has been changed to "3rd drawer".
"PFP lower drawer" has been changed to "4th drawer".
"PFP upper drawer" has been changed to "3rd drawer".
"PFP lower drawer" has been changed to "4th drawer".
"SRAM board(LGC board)" has been changed to "SRAM board(LGC board, SYS board)".
The description of the note in "3.2.2 Density adjustment" has been changed.
"ACS/Black text/Photo" has been changed to "ACS/Black/Text/Photo".
"ACS/Black text" has been changed to "ACS/Black/Text".
"ACS/Black Photo" has been changed to "ACS/Black/Photo".
The content of the "Remarks" field in the table in "3.2.5 Background adjustment" has been
changed.

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REVISION RECORD

13

Page
3-36
3-37
3-43

3-45
3-50

3-54

3-56
3-59

3-76
5-9

5-16
5-17
5-20
5-21
5-23
5-26
5-27
5-28
5-29
5-35

5-36

5-37
5-38

6-68
7-1

Ver.02 <2008.06.26>
Contents
The codes 7808 and 7809 have been added in the table in "3.2.7 Sharpness adjustment".
The content of the "Remarks" field in the table in "3.2.8 Setting range correction" has been
changed.
The note in "3.2.17 Black header density level adjustment" has been deleted.
Descriptions for the codes in "3.2.19 Judgment threshold adjustment for blank originals"
have been corrected.
"SRAM board(LGC board)" has been changed to "SRAM board(LGC board, SYS board)".
"3.3.4 Adjustment of smudged/faint text" has been changed to "3.3.4 Adjustment of faint
text".
Descriptions for the codes in "3.3.4 Adjustment of faint text" have been changed.
Descriptions for the codes in "3.3.14 Sharpness adjustment" have been corrected.
The default value has been added in the "Remarks" field in the table in "3.3.15 Offsetting
adjustment for background processing".
An operational procedure has been added in "3.3.15 Offsetting adjustment for background".
The content of the "Remarks" field in the table in "3.4.2 Density adjustment" has been corrected.
Descriptions for "3.4.6 Setting range correction" have been corrected.
The content of the "Remarks" field in the table in "3.4.6 Setting range correction" has been
corrected.
Descriptions in the adjustment procedure (1) have been changed.
The description about the e-STUDIO2330C has been added in the table in No. 1 in Notes.
The model name "e-STUDIO2330C" has been added in No. 2 in Notes.
The model name "e-STUDIO2330C" has been added to the name of the service parts list in
No. 5 in Notes.
The number of sheets for replacement for the e-STUDIO2330C has been added in the
"x 1,000 sheets" field in the table.
The number of sheets for replacement for the e-STUDIO2330C has been added in the
"x 1,000 sheets" field in the table.
The number of sheets for replacement for the e-STUDIO2330C has been added in the
"x 1,000 sheets" field in the table.
The amount of grease to be applied has been changed.
The number of sheets for replacement for the e-STUDIO2330C has been added in the
"x 1,000 sheets" field in the table..
The number of sheets for replacement for the e-STUDIO2330C has been added in the
"x 1,000 sheets" field in the table..
The number of sheets for replacement for the e-STUDIO2330C has been added in the
"x 1,000 sheets" field in the table..
"Fuser belt thermopile (center/rear)" has been added in the table as "M14".
Descriptions for cleaning the fuser belt thermopiles have been added.
The part name of the ozone filter 1 has been changed from "FLTR-OZN-F380" to "FLTROZN-45X-CB0-600M".
The slit glass cleaner pad has been added in the "Component" field for DEV-KIT-FC28K.
A harness jig for the converter board has been added as No. 14 in the "Maintenance Part
List" table.
Descriptions under the Table have been changed.
The illustration of a harness jig for the converter board has been added.
The model name "e-STUDIO2330C" has been added to the name of the service parts list
under the table "5.9 Grease List".
Descriptions for the e-STUDIO2330C have been added in "5.10 Operational Items in Overhauling".
The model name "e-STUDIO2330C" has been added in the troubleshooting procedure for
[CA10].
The illustration in Fig. 7-1 has been corrected.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REVISION RECORD

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

14

Page
7-4
7-5
7-10

7-12

7-13

7-14
7-18
7-20
7-22
7-23
7-24
7-28
7-28
7-28
7-28
7-28
7-30
8-1

8-2
8-18

8-18

8-19

8-21

8-22

Ver.02 <2008.06.26>
Contents
The illustration in Fig. 7-9 has been corrected.
The illustration in Fig. 7-12 has been corrected.
Step (3) in the content of the disassembling procedure in "7.1.11 Board Case" has been
divided to steps (3) and (4).
The illustration in Fig. 7-25 has been corrected.
The illustration in Fig. 7-26 has been corrected.
The content of "Fig. 7-28" in "7.1.12 SRAM board<for LGC board>" has been divided to
"Fig. 7-29" and "Fig. 7-30".
A note and an illustration Fig. 7-31 have been added.
The illustration in Fig. 7-32 has been corrected.
The content of "Fig. 7-30" in "7.1.13 SRAM board<for SYS board>" has been divided to
"Fig. 7-33" and "Fig. 7-34".
A note and an illustration Fig. 7-35 have been added.
The illustration in Fig. 7-37 has been corrected.
A new procedure has been added in step (1) in "[E] Replace / Format HDD.
Descriptions in "7.2.4 Procedures and precautions when replacing the SYS board" has
been corrected.
A new procedure has been added in step (1) in "7.2.5 Procedures and settings when
replacing the SLG board".
The title "7.2.6 Procedures and settings when replacing SRAM (SYS board)" has been corrected to "7.2.6 Procedures and settings when replacing SRAM board (for SYS board)".
The title "7.2.7 Procedures and settings when replacing SRAM (LGC board)" has been corrected to "7.2.7 Procedures and settings when replacing SRAM board (for LGC board)".
A new note has been added in "7.2.7 Procedures and settings when replacing SRAM board
(for LGC board)".
The introductory part of "7.2.7 Procedures and settings when replacing SRAM board (for
LGC board)" has been corrected.
The illustration of Fig.7-40 has been corrected.
The procedure in "[A] Replace SRAM board" has been corrected.
Descriptions in "7.3 Precautions for Disposal of the HDD and PC Boards" have been
corrected.
8. FIRMWARE UPDATING
Descriptions about the necessity of a harness jig for the converter firmware update have
been added.
E. Engine ROM
The illustration of the download jig has been corrected.
8.2.1 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2) - [A] Precautions when
writing the System ROM data
A precaution "Loading the data file into the buffer by means of the following settings." has
been added.
8.2.1 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2) - [A] Precautions when
writing the System ROM data-[A-1] System ROM
The name of the system ROM file has been corrected.
8.2.1 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2) - [B] Precautions when
writing the Engine ROM data
Precautions when writing the Engine ROM data have been added.
8.2.2 System ROM - [A] Update procedure
Step 9: The procedure for shutting down the equipment has been changed to turning OFF
the power with the main switch.
Step 10: The procedure for starting up the equipment has been changed to turning ON the
power with the main switch.
8.2.3 Engine ROM - [A] Update procedure
Step 1:The procedure has been corrected to "Write the ROM data to be updated to the
download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2)."

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REVISION RECORD

15

Page
8-23

8-26

8-28

8-30

8-34

8-35

8-37

8-41

8-44

8-47

Ver.02 <2008.06.26>
Contents
8.2.3 Engine ROM - [A] Update procedure
Step 6: The illustration has been corrected.
Step 11: The procedure for shutting down the equipment has been changed to turning OFF
the power with the main switch.
8.3.1 Scanner ROM - [A] Update procedure
Step 8: The procedure for shutting down the equipment has been changed to turning OFF
the power with the main switch.
8.3.2 RADF firmware (MR-3018) - [A] Update procedure
Step 7: The procedure for shutting down the equipment has been changed to turning OFF
the power with the main switch.
8.3.3 Finisher firmware (MJ-1101) - [A] Update procedure
Step 7: The procedure for shutting down the equipment has been changed to turning OFF
the power with the main switch.
8.3.4 Converter Firmware (MJ-1101) - [A] Update procedure
Step 12: The procedure for shutting down the equipment has been changed to turning OFF
the power with the main switch.
8.3.5 Hole punch unit firmware (MJ-6101) - [A] Checking the hole punch position
Step 1: The procedure has been changed to turning OFF the power with the [ON/OFF] button.
Step 3: The procedure has been changed to turning ON the power with the [0], [8] and [ON/
OFF] buttons.
Step 4: A procedure to set the DIP-SW1 back has been added as step (4).
8.3.5 Hole punch unit firmware (MJ-6101) - [B] Update procedure
Step 10: The procedure for shutting down the equipment has been changed to turning OFF
the power with the main switch.
8.3.6 Finisher firmware/Saddle stitcher firmware (MJ-1030) - [A] Update procedure
Step 8: The procedure for shutting down the equipment has been changed to turning OFF
the power with the main switch.
8.3.7 Finisher firmware (MJ-1031) - [A] Update procedure
Step 9: The procedure for shutting down the equipment has been changed to turning OFF
the power with the main switch.
8.3.8 Fax unit firmware (GD-1250) - [A] Update procedure
Step 7: The procedure for shutting down the equipment has been changed to turning OFF
the power with the main switch.

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REVISION RECORD

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

16

Ver.01
Page
-

1-2

1-12

1-14

2-40
2-67
2-70
2-97
2-101
3-4
5-12
5-20
5-22
5-23
5-25
5-32
6-100
7-10
7-23
7-26

7-29
8-5
8-7

8-18
8-21
8-22
9-6
-

Ver.01 <2008.04.24>
Contents
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
The weight of the equipment has been corrected from "approximately 120 kg (264.55 lb.)"
to "approximately 121 kg (266.75 lb.) or 123 kg (271.16 lb.)".
1.1.1 General
The version name of the equipment has been added to "Machine version".
The weight of the equipment has been corrected from "Approx. 120 kg (264.55 lb.)" to
"Approx. 121 kg (266.75 lb.) (for NAD and MJD) and Approx. 123 kg (271.16 lb.) (for others)".
1.3 Options
The model name of the EFI Printer Board has been corrected from "GA-1300" to "GA1211".
1.5 System List
The model name of the EFI Printer Board has been corrected from "GA-1300" to "GA1211".
Description of the contents of 05-7322 has been added.
The code 08-8822 has been deleted from [IPsec].
The classification of the codes 08-9883 and -9884 has been corrected to "Hardcopy security printing".
The default values of 08-1214, -1216, -1218, -1220 and -1228 have been corrected.
The default values of 08-5600, -5602, -5604 and -5606 have been corrected.
3.1.2 Adjustment of the Auto-Toner Sensor.
The illustration of the procedure in step (5) has been changed.
The contents of C6 and C7 in the table in "5.5.3 Feed unit" have been corrected.
"H9: Developer unit upper cover" has been added to the figure and the table in "5.5.8
Developer unit (K, Y, M, and C)".
The content of "Handling precautions" in "*J1: Transfer belt" has been corrected.
"Handling precautions" and "Cleaning procedure" of "*J8: Transfer belt cleaning blade"
have been added.
"M12" in the figure of "5.5.13 Fuser unit" has been corrected to "M2".
In the table, "FR-KIT-FC35" has been corrected to "FR-KIT-FC28", "FR-FC35-U" has been
corrected to "FR-FC28-U" and "HR-FC35-L" has been corrected to "HR-FC28-L".
New items to check have been added to "CE71 Drum phase adjustment abnormality".
A disassembling procedure in "7.1.11 Board case" has been changed from step (2) to (2),
(3), (4) and (5), and from step (3) to (6).
The model name of the EFI printer board in "[K] Set EFI Printer Board" has been corrected
from "GA-1300" to "GA-1211".
The model name of the EFI printer board in "[K] Set EFI Printer Board" has been corrected
from "GA-1300" to "GA-1211".
"[G] Reinstall options" has been added.
A procedure in "7.3.1 Precautions when disposing of the HDD" has been changed.
The data file name "menteusb2.o" of update program loader in the table "Program necessary for updating" has been corrected to "mentusb2.o".
Precautions for options (GP-1070/1080, GS-1010/1020) have been added to "Important".
The data file name "menteusb2.o" of update program loader in the table "Program necessary for updating" has been corrected to "mentusb2.o".
A data writing error handling procedure has been added to "[A] Precautions when writing
the data".
A note for update procedure has been added.
A procedure for unplugging and re-plugging the power cable has been added.
A procedure for unplugging and re-plugging the power cable has been added.
"Noise filter" has been added to the diagram in "9.6 Configuration of Power Supply Unit".
"10.1 DC Wire Harness" error corrected

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REVISION RECORD

17

e-STUDIO2020C/2330C/2820C/2830C/3520C/3530C/4520C
REVISION RECORD

2008 - 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

18